swanson inc manufactures an advanced swim fin for scuba divers management is now pre 492408

Integration of Sales, Production, and Direct Materials Budgets

Swanson, Inc., manufactures an advanced swim fin for scuba divers. Management is now preparing detailed budgets for the third quarter, July through September, and has assembled the following information to assist in preparing the budget:

a. The Marketing Department has estimated sales as follows for the remainder of the year (in pairs of swim fins). The selling price of the swim fins is $13 per pair.

July

5,600

October

3,600

August

6,600

November

2,600

September

4,600

December

2,600

b. All sales are on account. Based on past experience, sales are expected to be collected in the following pattern:

43% in the month of sale

48% in the month following sale

9% uncollectible.

The beginning accounts receivable balance (excluding uncollectible amounts) on July 1 will be $130,000.

c. The company maintains finished goods inventories equal to 9% of the following month’s sales. The inventory of finished goods on July 1 will be 504 pairs.

d. Each pair of swim fins requires 4 pounds of geico compound. To prevent shortages, the company would like the inventory of geico compound on hand at the end of each month to be equal to 20% of the following month’s production needs. The inventory of geico compound on hand on July 1 will be 4,552 pounds.

e. Geico compound costs $2.50 per pound. Crydon pays for 60% of its purchases in the month of purchase; the remainder is paid for in the following month. The accounts payable balance for Geico compound purchases will be $11,800 on July 1.

Required:

1. Prepare a sales budget, by month and in total, for the third quarter. (Show your budget in both pairs of swim fins and dollars.) Also prepare a schedule of expected cash collections, by month and in total, for the third quarter.

2. Prepare a production budget for each of the months July through October.

3. Prepare a direct materials budget for Geico compound, by month and in total, for the third quarter. Also prepare a schedule of expected cash disbursements for Geico compound, by month and in total, for the third quarter.

acc421 the following information was taken from the records of roland carlson inc fo 492354

Various Reporting Formats

The following information was taken from the records of Roland Carlson Inc. for the year 2007. Income tax applicable to income from continuing operations $187,000; income tax applicable to loss on discontinued operations $25,500; income tax applicable to extraordinary gain $32,300; income tax applicable to extraordinary loss $20,400; and unrealized holding gain on available-for-sale securities $15,000.

Extraordinary gain

95,000

Cash dividends declared

150,000

Loss on discontinued operations

75,000

Retained earnings January 1, 2010

600,000

Administrative expenses

240,000

Cost of goods sold

850,000

Rent revenue

40,000

Selling expenses

300,000

Extraordinary loss

60,000

Sales

1,900,000

Shares outstanding during 2007 were 100,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a single-step income statement for 2007.

(b) Prepare a retained earnings statement for 2007.

(c) Show how comprehensive income is reported using the second income statement format.

acc206 assume that a models and more store bought and sold a line of dolls during de 492356

Comparing amounts for ending inventory—perpetual inventory—FIFO and LIFO
Assume that a Models and More store bought and sold a line of dolls during December as follows:

Beginning inventory

13

units @

11.00

Sale

9

units

Purchase

17

units @

13.00

sale

13

units

Models and More uses the perpetual inventory system.

Requirements

1. Compute the cost of ending inventory using FIFO.

2. Compute the cost of ending inventory using LIFO.

3. Which method results in a higher cost of ending inventory?

acc206 the following transactions occurred during february 2012 for soul art gift sh 492357

Journalizing purchase and sales transactions—perpetual system

The following transactions occurred during February 2012, for Soul Art Gift Shop:

3-Feb Purchased $2,700 of inventory on account under terms of 4/10, n/eom (end of month) and FOB shipping point.

7 Returned $400 of defective merchandise purchased on February 3.

9 Paid freight bill of $110 on February 3 purchase.

10 Sold inventory on account for $4,350. Payment terms were 2/15, n/30. These goods cost the company $2,300

12 Paid amount owed on credit purchase of February 3, less the return and the discount.

16 Granted a sales allowance of $500 on the February 10 sale.

23 Received cash from February 10 customer in full settlement of her debt, less the allowance and the discount.

Requirement

1. Journalize the February transactions for Soul Art Gift Shop. No explanations are required.

acc206 a listing of budgeted selling and administrative expenses for glide tire comp 492359

A listing of budgeted selling and administrative expenses for Glide Tire Company in P7-2 for the year ended December 31, 2008, were as follows:

Advertising expense

942,000

Office rent expense

125,000

Office salaries expense

821,000

Office supplies expense

45,500

Officer’s salaries expense

661,000

Sales salaries expense

988,000

Telephone and fax expense

33,500

Travel expense

443,000

Required:

1. Prepare a selling and administrative expenses budget, in good form, for the year 2008.

accc505 makes 30 000 units per year of a part it uses in the products it manufacture 492361

Fouch Company makes 30,000 units per year of a part it uses in the products it manufactures. The unit product cost of this part is computed as follows:

Direct Materials

$15.70

Direct Labor

$17.50

Variable Manufacturing Overhead

$4.50

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead

$14.60

Unit Product Cost

$52.30

An outside supplier has offered to sell the company all of these parts it needs for $51.90 a unit. If the company accepts this offer, the facilities now being used to make the part could be used to make more units of a product that is in high demand. The additional contribution margin on this other product would be $219,000 per year.

If the part were purchased from the outside supplier, all of the direct labor cost of the part would be avoided. However, $6.20 of the fixed manufacturing overhead cost being applied to the part would continue even if the part were purchased from the outside supplier. This fixed manufacturing overhead cost would be applied to the company’s remaining products.

Required:
i. How much of the unit product cost of $52.30 is relevant in the decision of whether to make or buy the part?
ii. What is the net total dollar advantage (disadvantage) of purchasing the part rather than making it?
iii. What is the maximum amount the company should be willing to pay an outside supplier per unit for the part if the supplier commits to supplying all 30,000 units required each year?

acc400 the open accounts receivable aging is as follows for december 31 2008 492362

The Open Accounts Receivable aging is as follows for December 31, 2008:

Current

1-30

31-60

61-90

Over 90 days

75000

38000

15000

8000

12000

Using the following estimated percentage uncollectible

Current

3%

1-30 days past due

8%

31-90 days past due

27%

Over 90 days

52%

A. Calculate the estimated uncollectible

B. Assuming there is a debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $1,712. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2008 to record bad debt expense.

acc400 top managers of medical products inc have asked for your help in comparing th 492364

Top managers of Medical Products, Inc., have asked for your help in comparing the company’s profit performance and financial position with the average for the industry. The accountant has given you the company’s income statement and balance sheet and also the following data for the industry:

Medical Products, Inc.

Income Statement Compared with Industry Average

Year Ended December 31, 20X5

Medical Industry Average

Net sales

$957,000

100.0%

Cost of goods sold

652,000

55.9

Gross profit

305,000

44.1

Operating expenses

200,000

28.1

Operating income

105,000

16.1

Other expenses

3,000

2.4

Net income

$102,000

13.6%

Medical Products, Inc.

Balance Sheet Compared with Industry Average

December 31, 20X5

Medical Industry Average

Current assets

$486,000

74.4%

Fixed assets, net

117,000

20.0

Intangible assets, net

24,000

0.6

Other assets

3,000

5.0

Total

630,000

100.0

Current liabilities

245,000

45.6

Long-term liabilities

114,000

19.0

Stockholder’s equity

271,000

35.4

Total

$360,000

100.0%

Requirements

1. Prepare a common-size income statement and balance sheet for Medical Products. The first column of each statement should present Medical Products’ common-size statement, and the second column should show the industry averages.

2. For the profitability analysis, compute Medical Products’ (a) ratio of gross profit to net sales (b) ratio of operating income to net sales, and (c) ratio of net income to net sales. Compare these figures with the industry averages. Is Medical Products’ profit performance better or worse than the average for the industry?

3. For the analysis of financial position, compute Medical Products’ (a) ratios of current assets and current liabilities to total assets and (b) ratio of stockholders’ equity to total assets. Compare these ratios with the industry averages. Is Medical Products’ financial position better or worse than the average for the industry?

ries corporation has received a request for a special order of 8 000 units of produc 492367

Ries Corporation has received a request for a special order of 8,000 units of product R34 for $34.60 each. The normal selling price of this product is $36.60 each, but the units would need to be modified slightly for the customer. The normal unit product cost of product R34 is computed as follows:

Direct materials

10.80

Direct labour

2.00

Variable manufacturing overhead

6.80

Fixed manufacturing overhead

2.70

Unit product cost

$22.30

Direct labor is a variable cost. The special order would have no effect on the company’s total fixed manufacturing overhead costs. The customer would like some modifications made to product R34 that would increase the variable costs by $5.80 per unit and that would require a one-time investment of $39,000 in special molds that would have no salvage value. This special order would have no effect on the company’s other sales. The company has ample spare capacity for producing the special order.

Required:
Determine the effect on the company’s total net operating income of accepting the special order. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.

schefter mining operates a copper mine in wyoming acquisition exploration and develo 492368

Schefter Mining operates a copper mine in Wyoming. Acquisition, exploration, and development costs totaled $8.2 million. Extraction activities began on July 1, 2011.

After the copper is extracted in approximately six years, Schefter is obligated to restore the land to its original condition, including constructing a park. The company’s controller has provided the following three cash flow possibilities for the restoration costs:

Cash Flow

Probability

1

700,000

30%

2

800,000

25%

3

900,000

45%

The company’s credit-adjusted, risk-free rate of interest is 5%, and its fiscal year ends on December 31.

Required:

a. What is the initial cost of the copper mine? (Round computations to nearest whole dollar.)

b. How much accretion expense will Schefter report in its 2011 income statement?

c. What is the carrying value (book value) of the asset retirement obligation that Schefter will report in its 2011 balance sheet?

d. Assume that actual restoration costs incurred in 2017 totaled $860,000. What amount of gain or loss will Schefter recognize on retirement of the liability?

in 2011 kp building inc began work on a four year construction project called cincy 492374

In 2011, KP Building Inc. began work on a four-year construction project (called ,Cincy
One,). The contract price is $300 million. KP uses the percentage-of-completion
method of accounting. At the end of 2011, the following financial statement information
indicates the results to date for Cincy One:

INCOME STATEMENT
Gross Profit (before-taxes) recognized in 2011 $22 million

BALANCE SHEET
Accounts Receivable from construction billings $10 million
Construction in progress $66 million
Less: Billings on construction ($75 million)
Net billings in excess of construction in progress $9 million

Required: Compute the following, placing your answer in the spaces provided and
showing supporting computations:
Items to compute:
Cash collected by KP on Cincy One during 2011
Actual costs incurred by KP on Cincy One during 2011
At 12/31/2011, the estimated remaining costs to complete Cincy One
The percentage of Cincy One that was completed during 2011

canton corporation reported the following items in its adjusted trial balance for th 492377

Canton Corporation reported the following items in its adjusted trial balance for the year ended December 31, 2011::

Income from continuing operations before income taxes

110,000

Extaordinary

28,000

Conton is subject to a 3% tax rate.

Required:

Prepare the December 31, 2011, income statement for Canton Corporation, starting with income from continuing operations before income taxes.

houston based advanced electronics manufactures audio speakers for desktop computers 492378

Houston-based Advanced Electronics manufactures audio speakers for desktop computers. The following data relates to the period just ended when the company produced and sold 42,000 speaker sets:

Sales

3,360,000

Variable Costs

840,000

Fixed Costs

2,80,000

Management is considering relocating its manufacturing facilities to Northern Mexico to reduce costs. Variable costs are expected to average $18 per set; annual fixed costs are anticipated to be $1,984,000. (Ignore income taxes)

Required:

1. Calculate the company’s current income and determine the level of dollar sales needed to double that figure, assuming that manufacturing operations remain in the United States.

2. Determine the break even point in speaker sets if operations are shifted to Mexico

3. Assume that management desires to achieve the Mexican break even point; however, operations remain in the United States.

a) If variable costs remain constant, what must management do to fixed costs? By how much must fixed costs change?

b) If fixed costs remain constant, what must management do to the variable cost per unit? By how much must unit variable cost change?

4. Determine the impact (increase, decrease, or no effect) of the following operating changes.

a) Effect of an increase in direct material costs on the break-even point

b) Effect of an increase in fixed administration costs on the unit contribution margin.

c) Effect of an increase in the unit contribution margin on net income.

d) Effect of an decrease in the number of units sold on the break even point.

jonathan macintosh is a highly successful pennsylvania orchardman who has formed his 492379

Jonathan Macintosh is a highly successful Pennsylvania orchardman who has formed his own company to produce and package applesauce. Apples can be stored for several months in cold storage, so applesauce production is relatively uniform throughout the year. The recently hired controller for the firm is about to apply the high-low method in estimating the company’s energy cost behavior. The following costs were incurred during the past 12 months:

Month

Pints of Appleasauce

Produced Energy Cost

January

35,000

23,000

February

21,000

22,100

March

22,000

22,000

April

24,000

22,450

May

30,000

22,900

June

32,000

23,350

July

40,000

28,000

August

30,000

22,800

September

30,000

23,000

October

28,000

22,700

November

41,000

24,100

December

39,000

24,950

Required:

1. Use the high-low method to estimate the company’s energy cost behavior and express it in equation form. Use the formula Y = a + bX, where Y denotes energy cost for a month and X denotes pints of applesauce produced.

2. Predict the energy cost for a month in which 26,000 pints of applesauce are produced

presented below are the monthly factory overhead cost budget at normal capacity of 5 492381

Flexible budget for factory overhead

Presented below are the monthly factory overhead cost budget (at normal capacity of 5,000 units or 20,000 direct labor hours) and the production and cost data for a month.

Factory Overhead Cost Budget

Fixed cost:

Depreciation on building and machinery

1,200

Taxes on building and machinery

500

Insurance on building and machinery

500

Superintendent’s salary

1,500

Supervisor’s salaries

2,300

Maintenance wages

1,000 7,000

Variable cost

Repairs

400

Maintenance supplies

300

Other supplies

200

Payroll taxes

800

Small tools

300 2,000

Total standard factory overhead

$9,000

Required:

1. Assuming that variable costs will vary in direct proportion to the change in volume, prepare a flexible budget for production levels of 80%, 90% and 110% of normal capacity. Also determine the rate for application of factory overhead to work in process at each level of volume in both units and direct labor hours.

2. Prepare a flexible budget for production levels of 80%, 90% and 110%, assuming that variable costs will vary in direct proportion to the change in volume, but with the following exceptions. (Hint: Set up a third category for semifixed expenses).

a. At 110% of capacity, an assistant department head will be needed at a salary of $10,500 annually.

b. At 80% of capacity, the repairs epxense will drop to one-half of the amount at 100% capacity.

c. Maintenance supplies expense will remain constant at all levels of production.

d. At 80% of capacity, one part-time maintenance worker, earning $6,000 a year, will be laid off.

e. At 1105% of capacity, a machine not normally in use and on which no depreciation is normally recorded will be used in production. Its cost was $12,000, it has a ten-year life, and straight-line depreciation will be taken.

3. Using the facts and the flexible budget prepared in 1., determine the budgeted cost at 96% of capacity, using interpolation.

4. Using the flexible budget prepared in 1., determine the budgeted cost at 104% capacity, using a method other than interpolation.

logan chemicals inc which uses the process cost system has two departments a and b 492382

Units gained; cost of production summaries

Logan Chemicals Inc., which uses the process cost system, has two departments: A and B. In both departments, all of the materials are put into production at the beginning of the process. The materials added in Department B increase the number of units being processed by 25%. Labor and factory overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the process in all departments.

A record of the factory operations for Many follows:

Cost Summary.

Dept. A

Dept. B

Materials

25000

7500

Labor

10800

10140

Factory overhead

8100

7215

Production summary

Started in process

10000

Received from prior department

8500

Added to units in process

1500

Finished and transferred

8500

9500

Units in process, end of month

1500

500

Stage of completion

1/3

½

Required:

Prepare a cost of production summary for each department for the month of May.

mega oil company transports crude oil to its refinery where it is processed into mai 492383

Joint cost allocation with costs after split-off and by-product revenue

Mega Oil Company transports crude oil to its refinery where it is processed into main products gasoline, kerosene, and diesel fuel, and by product base oil. The base oil is sold at the split-off for $500,000 of annual revenue, and the joint processing cost to the get the crude oil to split-off are $5,000,000. Additional information includes:

Product

Barrels produced

Cost of Split-off

Selling Price per Barrel

Gasoline

500,000

2,000,000

25

Kerosene

100,000

500,000

30

Diesel fuel

250,000

1,000,000

20

Required:

Determine the allocation of joint costs, using the relative sales value method, (Hint: Reduce the amount of the joint costs to be allocated by the amount of the by-product Revenue)

acc280 on may 1 skyline flying school a company that provides flying lessons was sta 492385

On May 1, Skyline Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, was started with an investment of $45,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2008, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.

Cash

5,600

Notes Payable

30,000

Accounts Receivable

7,200

Rent Expense

1,200

Equipment

64,000

Repair Expense

400

Lesson Revenue

7,500

Fuel Expense

2,500

Advertising Expense

500

Insurance Expense

400

Accounts Payable

800

No additional investments were made in May, but the company paid dividends of $1,500 during the month.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.

(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for May assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $1,500 of fuel expense was incurred but not paid.

acc280 selected transactions for evergreen lawn care company are listed below 492386

Selected transactions for Evergreen Lawn Care Company are listed below.

1. Sold common stock for cash to start business.

2. Paid monthly rent.

3. Purchased equipment on account.

4. Billed customers for services performed.

5. Paid dividends.

6. Received cash from customers billed in (4).

7. Incurred advertising expense on account.

8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.

9. Received cash from customers when service was performed.

Instructions

List the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. For example, the first answer is: (1) Increase in assets and increase in stockholders’ equity.

mesa company produces a single product operating data for the company and its absorp 492327

Mesa Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year are presented below:

Units in beginning inventory

2,000

Units produced

9,000

Units sold

10,000

Sales

$100,000

Less cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

12,000

Add cost of goods manufactured

54,000

Goods available for sale

66,000

Less ending inventory

6,000

Cost of goods sold

60,000

Gross margin

40,000

Less selling and admin. expenses

28,000

Net operating income

$12,000

Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold.

Required:

Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.

data for january concerning del mar corporation s two major business segments fibers 492328

Data for January concerning Del Mar Corporation’s two major business segments- Fibers and Feedstocks-appear below:

Sales revenues, Fibers

$870,000

Sales revenues, Feedstocks

$800,000

Variable expenses, Fibers

$426,000

Variable expenses, Feedstocks

$344,000

Traceable fixed expenses, Fibers

$148,000

Traceable fixed expenses, Feedstocks

S156,000

Common fixed expenses totaled $314,000 and were allocated as follows: $129,000 to the Fibers business segment and $185,000 to the Feedstocks business segment.

Required:

Prepare a segmented income statement in the contribution format for the company. Omit percentages; show only dollar amounts.

cuisine master is a division of a major corporation the following data are for the l 492329

Cuisine Master is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations.

Sales

$30,000,000

Net Operating income

$1,170,000

Average operating assets

$8,000,000

The company’s minimum required rate of return

18%

Required:

i. What is the division’s margin?

ii. What is the division’s turnover?

iii. What is the division’s ROI?

iv. What is the division’s residual income?

the management of union co is considering dropping product l57v data from the compan 492330

The management of Union Co. is considering dropping product L57V. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.

Sales

$480,000

Variable Expenses

$202,000

Fixed Manufacturing Expenses

$158,000

Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses

$130,000

All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $86,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $67,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product L57V is discontinued.

Required:

i. What is the net operating income earned by product L57V according to the company’s accounting system? Show your work!

ii. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product L57V? Should the product be dropped? Show your work!

van buren co manufactures and sells medals for winners of athletic and other events 492331

Van Buren Co. manufactures and sells medals for winners of athletic and other events. Its manufacturing plant has the capacity to produce 15,000 medals each month; current monthly production is 14,250 medals. The company normally charges $115 per medal. Cost data for the current level of production are shown below.

Variable Costs

Direct Materials

$969,000

Direct Labor

$270,750

Selling and Administrative

$270,075

Fixed Costs

Manufacturing

$370,550

Selling and Administrative

$89,775

The company has just received a special one-time order for 600 medals at $102 each. For this particular order, no variable selling and administrative costs would be incurred. This order would also have no effect on fixed costs.

Required:

Should the company accept this special order? Why?

sacramento corporation uses part b78 in one of its products the company s accounting 492332

Sacramento Corporation uses part B78 in one of its products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.

Per Unit

Direct Materials

$2.80

Direct Labor

$6.30

Variable Overhead

$8.50

Supervisor’s Salary

$2.60

Depreciation of Special Equipment

$6.80

Allocated General Overhead

$6.10

An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $28.00 each.

If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided.

Required:

i. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part B78 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.

ii. Which alternative should the company choose?

refer to the data in the preceding exercise for golden gate construction associates 492333

Refer to the data in the preceding exercise for Golden Gate Construction Associates. The company has two divisions: the real estate division and the construction division. The divisions’ total assets, current liabilities, and before-tax operating income for the most recent year are as follows:

Division

Total Assets

Current Liabilities

Before-Tax Operating Income

Real estate

100,000,000

6,000,000

20,000,000

Construction

60,000,000

4,000,000

18,000,000

Required:

Calculate the economic value added (EVA) for each of Golden Gate Construction Associates’ divisions. (You will need to use the weighted-average cost of capital, which was computed in the preceding exercise.)

a real estate developer and building contractor in san francisco has two sources of 492334

Golden Gate Construction Associates , a real estate developer and building contractor in San Francisco, has two sources of long-term capital: debt and equity. The cost to Golden Gate of issuing debt is the after-tax cost of the interest payments on the debt, taking into account the fact that the interest payments are tax deductible.

The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is the investment opportunity rate of Golden Gate’s investors, that is, the rate they could earn on investments of similar risk to that of investing in Golden Gate Construction Associates. The interest rate on Golden Gate’s $60 million of long-term debt is 10 percent, and the company’s tax rate is 40 percent. The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is 15 percent. Moreover, the market value (and book value) of Golden Gate’s equity is $90 million.

Required:
Calculate Golden Gate Construction Associates’ weighted-average cost of capital.

countywide cable services inc is organized with three segments metro suburban and ou 492335

Countywide Cable Services, Inc. is organized with three segments: Metro, Suburban, and Outlying. Data for these segments for the year just ended follow.

Metro

Suburban

Outlying

Service revenue

1,000,000

800,000

400,000

Variable expenses

200,000

150,000

100,000

Controllable fixed expenses

400,000

320,000

150,000

Fixed expenses controllable by others

230,000

200,000

90,000

In addition to the expenses listed above, the company has $95,000 of common fixed expenses. Income-tax expense for the year is $145,000.

Required:

1. Prepare a segmented income statement for Countywide Cable Services, Inc. Use the contribution format.

wyalusing industries has manufactured prefabricated houses for over 20 years the hou 492336

Wyalusing Industries has manufactured prefabricated houses for over 20 years. The houses are constructed in sections to be assembled on customers’ lots. Wyalusing expanded into the precut housing market when it acquired Fairmont Company, one of its suppliers. In this market, various types of lumber are precut into the appropriate lengths, banded into packages, and shipped to customers’ lots for assembly. Wyalusing designated the Fairmont Division as an investment center. Wyalusing uses return on investment (ROI) as a performance measure with investment defined as average productive assets. Management bonuses are based in part on ROI. All investments are expected to earn a minimum return of 15 percent before income taxes. Fairmont’s ROI has ranged from 19.3 to 22.1 percent since it was acquired. Fairmont had an investment opportunity in 20×1 that had an estimated ROI of 18 percent. Fairmont’s management decided against the investment because it believed the investment would decrease the division’s overall ROI. The 20×1 income statement for Fairmont Division follows. The division’s productive assets were $12,600,000 at the end of 20×1, a 5 percent increase over the balance at the beginning of the year.

FAIRMONT DIVISION

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 20×1

(in thousands)

Sales revenue

24,000

Cost of goods sold

15,800

Gross margin

8,200

Operating expenses:

Administrative

2,140

Selling

3,600

5,740

Income from operations before income taxes

2,460

Required:

1. Calculate the following performance measures for 20×1 for the Fairmont Division.

a. Return on investment (ROI).

b. Residual income.

2. Would the management of Fairmont Division have been more likely to accept the investment opportunity it had in 20×1 if residual income were used as a performance measure instead of ROI? Explain your answer.

acc400 at the beginning of the current period huang corp had balances in accounts re 492341

At the beginning of the current period, Huang Corp. had balances in Accounts Receivable of $200,000 and in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $9,000 (credit). During the period, it had net credit sales of $800,000 and collections of $743,000. It wrote off as uncollectible accounts receivable of $7,000. However, a $4,000 account previously written off as uncollectible was recovered before the end of the current period. Uncollectible accounts are estimated to total $25,000 at the end of the period.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the entries to record sales and collections during the period.

(b) Prepare the entry to record the write-off of uncollectible accounts during the period.

(c) Prepare the entries to record the recovery of the uncollectible account during the period.

(d) Prepare the entry to record bad debts expense for the period.

(e) Determine the ending balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

(f) What is the net realizable value of the receivables at the end of the period?

acc400 cyclone inc reports the following liabilities in thousands on its january 31 492342

Cyclone, Inc. reports the following liabilities (in thousands) on its January 31, 2007, balance sheet and notes to the financial statements.

Accounts payable

3,263.9

Notes payable—long-term

5,746.7

Accrued pension liability

1,215.2

Operating leases

1,641.7

Accrued liabilities

1,258.1

Loans payable—long-term

335.6

Bonds payable

1,961.2

Payroll-related liabilities

558.1

Current portion of long-term debt

1,992.2

Short-term borrowings

2,563.6

Income taxes payable

235.2

Unused operating line of credit

3,337.6

Warranty liability-current

1,417.3

Instructions

(a) Identify which of the above liabilities are likely current and which are likely long term. Say if an item fits in neither category. Explain the reasoning for your selection.

(b) Prepare the liabilities section of Cyclone’s balance sheet as at January 31, 2007.

acc400 selected comparative statement data for the giant bookseller barnes amp noble 492343

Selected comparative statement data for the giant bookseller Barnes & Noble are presented here. All balance sheet data are as of December 31:

(in million)

2004

2003

Net sales

4,873.60

5,951.00

Cost of goods sold

3,386.60

4,323.80

Net income

143.30

151.90

Accounts receivable

74.60

60.50

Inventory

1,274.60

1,526.10

Total assets

3,301.50

3,301.50

Total common stockholders’ equity

1,165.90

1,259.70

Instructions

Compute the following ratios for 2004:

(a) Profit margin.

(b) Asset turnover.

(c) Return on assets.

(d) Return on common stockholders’ equity.

(e) Gross profit rate.

the production department of raredon corporation has submitted the following forecas 492345

Direct Labor and Manufacturing Overhead Budgets:

The production department of Raredon Corporation has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year:

1st Quarter

2nd Quarter

3rd Quarter

4th Quarter

Units to be produced

12,000

14,000

13,000

11,000

Each unit requires 0.70 direct labor-hours, and direct labor-hour workers are paid $10.50 per hour.

In addition, the variable manufacturing overhead rate is $1.50 per direct labor-hour. The fixed manufacturing overhead is $80,000 per quarter. The only noncash element of manufacturing overhead is depreciation, which is $22,000 per quarter.

Requirements:

a. Prepare the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.

b. Prepare the company’s manufacturing overhead budget.

the production department of hareston company has submitted the following forecast o 492346

Direct Materials and Direct Labor Budgets:

The production department of Hareston Company has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year:

1st Quarter

2nd Quarter

3rd Quarter

4thquarter

Units to be produced

7,000

8,000

6,000

5,000

In addition, the beginning raw materials inventory for the first quarter is budgeted to be 1,400 pounds and the beginning accounts payable for the first quarter is budgeted to be $2,940.

Each unit requires 2 pounds of raw material that costs $1.40 per pound. Management desires to end each quarter with an inventory of raw materials equal to 10% of the following quarter’s production needs.

The desired ending inventory for the fourth quarter is 1,500 pounds. Management plans to pay for 80% of raw material purchases in the quarter acquired and 20% in the following quarter. Each unit requires 0.60 direct labor-hours and direct labor-hour workers are paid $14.00 per hour.

Requirements:

a. Prepare the company’s direct materials budget and schedule of expected cash disbursements for purchases of materials for the upcoming fiscal year.

b. Prepare the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.

the marketing department of jessi corporation has submitted the following sales fore 492347

Sales and Production Budgets:

The marketing department of Jessi Corporation has submitted the following sales forecast for the upcoming fiscal year (all sales are on account):

1st Quarter

2nd Quarter

3rd Quarter

4th Quarter

Units to be produced

11,000

12,000

14,000

13,000

The selling price of the company’s product is $18.00 per unit. Management expects to collect 65% of sales in the quarter in which the sales are made, 30% in the following quarter, and 5% of sales are expected to be “‘uncollectible.

The beginning balance of accounts receivable, all of which is expected to be collected in the first quarter, is $70,200. The company expects to start the first quarter with 1,650 units in finished goods inventory.

Management desires an ending finished goods inventory in each quarter equal to 15% of the next quarter’s budgeted sales. The desired ending finished goods inventory for the fourth quarter is 1,850 units.

a. Prepare the company’s sales budget and schedule of expected cash collections.

b. Prepare the company’s production budget for the upcoming fiscal year.

tiger golf accessories sells golf shoes gloves and a laser guided range finder that 492349

Tiger Golf Accessories sells golf shoes, gloves, and a laser-guided range-finder that measures distance. Shown below are unit cost and sales data.

Pairs of Shoes

Pairs of Gloves

Range Finder

Unit sales price

100

30

250

Unit variable costs

60

10

200

Unit contribution margin

$40

$20

$50

Sales mix

40%

50%

10%

Fixed costs are $620,000.

Instructions:

a. Compute the break-even point in units for the company. (Round computation for weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

b. Determine the number of units to be sold at the break-even point for each product line. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

c. Verify that the mix of sales units determined in (b) will generate a zero net income.

acc206 on january 2 2006 speedway delivery service purchased a truck at a cost of 63 492351

On January 2, 2006, Speedway Delivery Service purchased a truck at a cost of $63,000. Before placing the truck in service,Speedway spent $2,200 painting it, $800 replacing tires, and $4,000 overhauling the engine. The truck should remain in service for 6 years and have a residual value of $14,200. The truck’s annual mileage is expected to be 18,000 miles in each of the first four years and 14,000 miles in each of the next two years—100,000 miles in total. In deciding which depreciation method to use, Jerry Speers, the general manager, requests a depreciation schedule for each of the depreciation methods (straight-line, units-of-production, and double-declining-balance).

Requirements

1. Prepare a depreciation schedule for each depreciation method, showing asset cost, depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation, and asset book value.

2. Speedway prepares financial statements using the depreciation method that reports the highest net income in the early years of asset use. For income-tax purposes, the company uses the depreciation method that minimizes income taxes in the early years. Consider the first year that Speedway uses the truck. Identify the depreciation methods that meet the general manager’s objectives, assuming the income tax authorities permit the use of any of the methods.

acc505 sandburg co inc began operations on january 1 of the current year after five 492352

Sandburg Co., Inc. began operations on January 1 of the current year. After five months of losses, management expects to earn a profit during June. However, Allan Johnson, the president and founder, was disappointed by the June income statement.

Sandburg Company

Income Statement

For the Month Ended June 30

Sales

445,000

Less: Operating Expenses:

Direct labor cost

65,000

Raw materials purchased

165,000

Manufacturing overhead

85,000

Selling and admin expenses

142,000

457,000

Net Operating Loss

$(12,000)

Johnson was also concerned because the income statement was prepared by Stuart Smiley, a newly hired accounting assistant who had never worked for a manufacturing company before. His only experience was as an accounting clerk for a Las Vegas casino where reconciled poker chip accounts.

The former controller, Susan King, had resigned in May. Johnson recalled from his managerial accounting course, which he had taken over 20 years ago, that there was a way to calculate the cost of goods manufactured and the cost of goods sold based on cost data and inventory balances. He asked Stuart for inventory information, which looked liked this:

Inventory Balances

June 1

June 30

Raw Materials

9,000

14,000

Work in Process

16,000

21,000

Finished Goods

40,000

60,000

Johnson got out his managerial accounting textbook and stayed up all night trying to figure out whether Sandburg Co. was losing money or not. He isn’t sure how to do it, so he asks you for the following:

1. Prepare a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured for June.

2. Prepare a new income statement.

3. Explain to Johnson why your income statement is different from Stuart’s.

acc505 lone star express is a luxury passenger carrier in texas all seats are first 492353

Lone Star Express is a luxury passenger carrier in Texas. All seats are first class, and the following data are available:

Number of seats per passenger train car

80

Average loan factor (percentage of seats filled)

70%

Average full passenger fare

$160

Average variable cost per passenger

$75

Fixed operating cost per month

$3,000,000

Questions

a. What is the break-even point in passengers and revenues per month?

b. What is the break-even point in number of passenger train cars per month?

c. If Lone Star Express raises its average passenger fare to $190, it is estimated that the average load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the monthly break-even point in number of passenger cars?

d. (Refer to original data.) Fuel cost is a significant variable cost to any railway. If crude oil increases by $ 20 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will rise to $90. What will be the new break-even point in passengers and in number of passenger train cars?

e. Lone Star Express has experienced an increase in variable cost per passenger to $ 85 and an increase in total fixed cost to $ 3,400,000. The company has decided to raise the average fare to $ 195. If the tax rate is 30 percent, how many passengers per month are needed to generate an after-tax profit of $ 575,000?

f. (Use original data except as noted). Lone Star Express is considering offering a discounted fare of $ 120, which the company believes would increase the load factor to 80 percent. Only the additional seats would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising cost would be $ 180,000. How much pre-tax income would passengers traveling on the discounted fare provide Lone Star Express if the company has 50 passenger train cars per day, 30 days per month?

g. Lone Star Express has an opportunity to obtain a new route that would be traveled 20 times per month (i.e., 20 train cars per month). The company believes it can sell seats at $ 175 on the route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. Fixed cost would increase by $ 250,000 per month for additional personnel, additional passenger train cars, maintenance, and so on. Variable cost per passenger would remain at $ 75.

1. Should the company obtain the route?

2. How many passenger train cars must Lone Star Express operate to earn pre-tax income of $120,000 per month on this route?

3. If the load factor could be increased to 75 percent, how many passenger train cars must be operated to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?

4. What qualitative factors should be considered by Lone Star Express in making its decision about acquiring this route?

breakfasttime cereal company manufactures two breakfast cereals in a joint process c 492300

Breakfasttime Cereal Company manufactures two breakfast cereals in a joint process. Cost and quantity information is as follows:

Joint Cost

Cereal Quantity at

Split-Off Point

Sales Price per Kilogram

$30,000

Yummies

12,000 kilograms

$2.00

Crummies

8,000 kilograms

$2.50

Required:

Use the physical-units method to allocate the company’s joint production cost between Yummies and Crummies.

cookie creations is gearing up for the winter holiday season during the month of dec 492301

Cookie Creations is gearing up for the winter holiday season. During the month of December 2011, the following transactions occur.

Dec. 1 Natalie hires an assistant at an hourly wage of $8 to help with cookie making and some administrative duties.

5 Natalie teaches the class that was booked on November 25. The balance outstanding is received.

8 Cookie Creations receives a check for the amount due from the neighborhood school for the class given on November 30.

9 Cookie Creations receives $750 in advance from the local school board for five classes that the company will give during December and January.

15 Pays the cell phone invoice outstanding at November 30.

16 Issues a check to Natalie’s brother for the amount owed for the design of the website.

19 Receives a deposit of $60 on a cookie class scheduled for early January.

23 Additional revenue earned during the month for cookie-making classes amounts to $4,000. (Natalie has not had time to account for each class individually.) $3,000 in cash has been collected and $1,000 is still outstanding. (This is in addition to the December 5 and December 9 transactions.)

23 Additional baking supplies purchased during the month for sugar, flour, and chocolate chips amount to $1,250 cash.

23 Issues a check to Natalie’s assistant for $800. Her assistant worked approximately 100 hours from the time in which she was hired until December 23.

28 Pays a dividend of $500 to the common shareholder (Natalie).

As of December 31, Cookie Creations’ year-end, the following adjusting entry data are provided.

1. A count reveals that $45 of brochures and posters were used.

2. Depreciation is recorded on the baking equipment purchased in November. The baking equipment has a useful life of 5 years. Assume that 2 months’ worth of depreciation is required.

3. Amortization (which is similar to depreciation) is recorded on the website. (Credit the Website account directly for the amount of the amortization.) The website is amortized over a useful life of 2 years and was available for use on December 1.s

4. Interest on the note payable is accrued. (Assume that 1.5 months of interest accrued during November and December.) Round to nearest dollar.

5. One month’s worth of insurance has expired.

6. Natalie is unexpectedly telephoned on December 28 to give a cookie class at the neighborhood community center on December 31. In early January Cookie Creations sends an invoice for $450 to the community center.

7. A count reveals that $1,025 of baking supplies were used.

8. A cell phone invoice is received for $75. The invoice is for services provided during the month of December and is due on January 15.

9. Because the cookie-making class occurred unexpectedly on December 28 and is for such a large group of children, Natalie’s assistant helps out. Her assistant worked 7 hours at a rate of $8 per hour.

10. An analysis of the unearned revenue account reveals that two of the five classes paid for by the local school board on December 9 still have not been taught by the end of December. The $60 deposit received on December 19 for another class also remains unearned.

Instructions

Using the information that you have gathered and the general ledger accounts that you have prepared through Chapter 3, plus the new information above, do the following.

(a) Journalize the above transactions.

(b) Post the December transactions. (Use the general ledger accounts prepared in Chapter 3.)

(c) Prepare a trial balance at December 31, 2009. (c) Totals $8,160

(d) Prepare and post adjusting journal entries for the month of December.

(e) Prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2009.

(f) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the 2-month period ending December 31, 2009, and a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2009.

(g) Prepare and post closing entries as of December 31, 2009.

what are the rate of return on stockholders equity and the rate of return on common 492302

What are the rate of return on stockholders’ equity and the rate of return on common stockholders’ equity (rounded to the nearest one-tenth of a percent) given the following information:

Net Income

$350,000

Preferred Dividends

20,000

Common Stock

48,000

Common Stockholders’ Equity 1/1/2011

4,400,000

Total Stockholders’ Equity 1/1/2011

5,300,000

Total Stockholders’ Equity 12/31/2011

5,500,000

A. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 6.5 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 7.6%

B. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 8.1 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 9.2%

C. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 7.8 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 8.9%

D. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 5.6 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 6.7%

accelerator inc manufactures a fuel additive stomp that has a stable selling price o 492304

Materials and labor variances analyses

Accelerator, Inc. manufactures a fuel additive, Stomp, that has a stable selling price of $44 per drum. The company has been producing and selling 80,000 drums per month.

In connection with your examination of Accelerator’s financial statements for the year ended September 30, management has asked you to review some computations made by Accelerator’s cost accountant. Your working papers disclose the following about the company’s operations:

Standard costs per drum of product manufactured:

Materials:

8 gallons of chemicals@$2

$16

1 empty drum @ $1/drum

1

$17

Direct labor: 1 hour @ $8/hour

$ 8

Factory Overhead

$ 6

Costs and expenses during September:

Stomp: 600,000 gallons purchased at a cost of $1,140,000; 645,000 gallons used.

Empty drums: 94,000 purchased at a cost of $94,000; 80,000 drums used.

Direct labor: 81,000 hours worked at a cost of $654,480.

Factory overhead: $768,000.

Required:

Calculate the following variances for September

1. Materials quantity variance.

2. Materials purchase price variance.

3. Labor efficiency variance.

4. Labor rate variance.

the standard cost summary for the most popular product of excelsior products company 492305

Materials and labor variance analyses

The standard cost summary for the most popular product of Excelsior Products Company is shown as follows, together with production and cost data for the period.

Standard Cost Summary

Materials:

2 gallons of liquid lead@$2.00/gallon

$4.00

$10.00

2 gallons of varnish@$3.00/gallon

$6.00

Labor:

1 hour@$12.00/hour

12.00

Factory overhead:

$1.00 per direct labor hour

1.00

Total standard unit cost

$23.00

Production and Cost Summary

Units completed during the month

9,000

Ending units in process (one-fourth completed)

2,000

Gallons of liquid lead used

21,000

Gallons of varnish used

20,000

Direct labor hours worked

10,000

Cost of liquid lead used

41,160

Cost of varnish used

60,000

Cost of direct labor

117,000

One gallon each of liquid lead and varnish are added at the start of processing. The balance of the materials is added when the process is two-thirds complete. Labor and overhead are added evenly throughout the process.

Required:

1. Calculate equivalent production. (Be sure to refer to the standard cost summary to help determine the percentage of materials in ending work in process.)

2. Calculate materials and labor variances and indicate whether they are favorable or unfavorable.

3. Determine the cost of materials and labor in the work in process account at the end of the month.

4. Prove that all materials and labor costs have been accounted for.

folsom shirts inc manufactures men s sport shirts for large stores folsom produces a 492306

Folsom Shirts, Inc., manufactures men’s sport shirts for large stores. Folsom produces a single quality shirt in lots of a dozen according to each customer’s order and attaches the store’s label.

The standard costs for a dozen shirts include the following:

Direct materials

24yards@$0.55/yard

$13.20

Direct labor

3hours@$7.35/hour

22.05

Factory overhead

3hours@$2.00/hour

6.00

Standard cost per dozen

$41.25

During October, Folsum worked on three orders for shirts. Job cost records for the month disclose the following:

Lot

Units in Lot

Materials Used

Hours Worked

30

1,000 dozen

24,100 yards

2,980

31

1,700 dozen

40,440 yards

5,130

32

1,200 dozen

28,825 yards

2,890

The following information is also available:

a. Folsom purchased 95,000 yards of materials during October at a cost of $53,200. The materials price variance is recorded when goods are purchased, and all inventories are carried at standard cost.

b. Direct labor incurred amounted to $81,400 during October. According to payroll records, production employees were paid $7.40 per hour.

c. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Factory overhead totaling $22,800 was incurred during October.

d. A total of $288,000 was budgeted for overhead for the year, based on estimated production at the plant’s normal capacity of 48,000 dozen shirts per year. Overhead is 40% fixed and 60% variable at this level of production.

e. There was no work in process at October 1. During October, Lots 30 and 31 were completed, and all materials were issued for Lot 32, which was 80% completed as to labor and overhead.

Required:

1. Prepare a schedule computing the October standard cost of Lots 30, 31, and 32.

2. Prepare a schedule computing the materials price variance for October and indicate whether it is favorable or unfavorable.

3. For each lot produced during October, prepare schedules computing the following (indicate whether favorable or unfavorable):

a. Materials quantity variance in yards.

b. Labor efficiency variance in hours. (Hint: Don’t forget the percentage of completion.)

c. Labor rate variance in dollars.

4. Prepare a schedule computing the total controllable and volume overhead variances for October and indicate whether they are favorable or unfavorable.

cole laboratories makes and sells a lawn fertilizer called fastgro the company has d 492307

Cole Laboratories makes and sells a lawn fertilizer called Fastgro. The company has developed standard costs for one bag of Fastgro as follows:

Standard Quantity

Standard Cost per bag

Direct material

20 pounds

$8.00

Direct labor

0.1 hours

$1.10

Variable overhead

0.1 hours

$0.40

The company had no beginning inventories of any kind on January 1. Variable overhead is applied to production on the basis of standard direct-labor hours. During January, the company recorded the following activity:

– Production of Fastgro: 4,000 bags

– Direct materials purchased: 85,000 pounds at a cost of $32,300

– Direct-labor worked: 390 hours at a cost of $4,875

– Variable overhead incurred: $1,475

– Inventory of direct materials on January 31: 3,000 pounds

The materials price variance for January is

coles company inc makes and sells a single product product r three yards of material 492310

Coles Company, Inc. makes and sells a single product, Product R. Three yards of Material K are needed to make one unit of Product R. Budgeted production of Product R for the next five months is as follows:

August

14,000 units

September

14,500 units

October

15,500 units

November

12,600 units

December

11,900 units

The company wants to maintain monthly ending inventories of Material K equal to 20% of the following month’s production needs. On July 31, this requirement wasn’t met because only 2,500 yards of Material K were on hand. The cost of Material K is $0.85 per yard. The company wants to prepare a Direct Materials Purchase Budget for the rest of the year.

The total cost of Material K to be purchased in August is

on may 1 magnus company began the manufacture of a new mechanical device known as tr 492312

Analyses; Review of chapter

On May 1, Magnus Company began the manufacture of a new mechanical device known as Triple X. The company installed a standard cost system in accounting for manufacturing costs. The standard costs for a unit of Triple X follow:

Raw materials (5lbs @ $1/lb) 5.00

Direct labor (1 hr @ $8/hr) 8.00

Overhead (50% of direct labor costs) 4.00

17.00

The following data came from Magnus’ records for the month of May:

Units

Actual production

4,000

Units sold

2,500

Debit

Credit

Sales

50,000

Purchases (22,000 pounds)

23,300

Materials price variance

1,300

Materials quantity variance

1,000

Direct labor rate variane

770

Direct labor efficiency variance

1,200

Manufacturing overhead total variance

500

The amount shown above for the materials price variance is applicable to raw materials purchased during May.

Required:

Compute each of the following items for Matrix for the month of May. Show computations in good form.

1. Standard quantity of raw materials allowed (in pounds) for actual production.

2. Actual quantity of raw materials used (in pounds). (Hint: Be sure to consider the materials quantity variance.)

3. Standard direct labor hours allowed.

4. Actual direct labor hours worked.

5. Actual direct labor rate. (Hint: Be sure to consider the direct labor rate variance.)

6. Actual total overhead

operating data for gallup corporation are presented below 492313

Operating data for Gallup Corporation are presented below.

2012

2011

Sales

750,000

600,000

Cost of goods sold

465,000

390,000

Selling expenses

120,000

72,000

Administrative expenses

60,000

54,000

Income tax expense

33,000

24,000

Net income

$72,000

$60,000

Complete the schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2012 and 2011. (List amounts from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2. Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)

fowler company manufactures a single product annual production costs incurred in the 492314

Fowler Company manufactures a single product. Annual production costs incurred in the manufacturing process are shown below for two levels of production.

Costs Incurred

Production in Units

5,000

10,000

Total Cost

Cost Unit

Total Costs

Cost Unit

Direct materials

8,250

1.65

16,500

1.65

Direct labor

9,400

1.88

18,800

1.88

Utilities

1,400

0.28

2,300

0.23

Rent

4,000

0.80

4,000

0.40

Maintenance

800

0.16

1,200

0.12

Supervisory salaries

1,000

0.20

1,000

0.10

Instructions

(a) Define the terms variable costs, fixed costs, and mixed costs.

(b) Classify each cost above as either variable, fixed, or mixed.

the following information is available for year 1 for dancer components 492315

The following information is available for year 1 for Dancer Components:

Revenues (300,000)

5,700,000

Manufacturing costs

Materials

336,000

Variable cash costs

284,800

Fixed cash costs

655,200

Depreciation (fixed)

1,998,000

Marketing and administrative

Marketing (variable, cash)

844,800

Marketing depreciation

299,200

Administrative (fixed, cash)

1,018,400

Administrative depreciation

149,600

Total costs

5,586,000

Operating profits

114,000

All depreciation charges are fixed and are expected to remain the same for year 2. Sales volume is expected to increase by 18 percent, but prices are expected to fall by 5 percent.

Material costs per unit are expected to decrease by 8 percent. Other unit variable manufacturing costs are expected to decrease by 2 percent per unit. Fixed manufacturing costs are expected to increase by 5 percent.

Variable marketing costs will change with volume. Administrative cash costs are expected to increase by 10 percent. Inventories are kept at zero. Dancer operates on a cash basis.

Required

Prepare a budgeted income statement for year 2.

lehne company which has only one product has provided the following data concerning 492316

Lehne Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$ 125

Units in beginning inventory

600

Units produced

3000

Units sold

3500

Units in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

Direct materials

$ 15

Direct labor

$ 50

Variable manufacturing overhead

$ 8

Variable selling and admin

$ 12

Fixed costs:

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$ 75,000

Fixed selling and admin

$ 20,000

The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company’s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.

Required:

a. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

b. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?

c. Prepare an income statement for the month using the variable costing method.

d. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.

a cement manufacturer has supplied the following data 492317

A cement manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Tons of cement produced and sold

220,000

Sales revenue

$924,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$297,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$280,000

Variable selling and admin expense

$165,000

Fixed selling and admin expense

$82,000

Net operating income

$100,000

Required:

a. Calculate the company’s unit contribution margin.

b. Calculate the company’s unit contribution ratio.

c. If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, what would the company’s net operating income be?

lindon company uses 5 000 units of part x each year as a component in the assembly o 492318

Lindon Company uses 5,000 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $80,000 as follows:

Direct Materials

$18,000

Direct Labor

20,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead

12,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead

30,000

Total Costs

80,000

An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $13 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one-third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Required:

Prepare a make or buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.

holton company makes three products in a single facility data concerning these produ 492319

Holton Company makes three products in a single facility. Data concerning these products follow:

Selling price per unit

76.10

72.70

77.10

Direct materials

33.10

40.60

46.40

Direct labor

24.00

13.10

7.20

Variable manufacturing overhead

4.60

4.40

3.30

Variable selling cost per unit

1.60

3.20

2.00

Mixing minutes per unit

2.80

1.90

2.60

Monthly demand in units

3,000

1,000

2,000

The mixing machines are potentially the constraint in the production facility. A total of 14,700 minutes are available per month on these machines.

Direct labor is a variable cost in this company.

Required:

a. How many minutes of mixing machine time would be required to satisfy demand for all three products?

b. How much of each product should be produced to maximize net operating income? (Round off to the nearest whole unit.)

c. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay for one additional hour of mixing machine time if the company has made the best use of the existing mixing machine capacity? (Round off to the nearest whole cent.)

luft company uses the weighted average method in its process costing system 492322

Luft Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system.

Operating data for the first processing department for the month of June appear below:

Units

Percent Complete with respect to Conversion

Beginning work in process inventory

11,000

90%

Started in production during June

58,000

Ending work in process inventory

17,000

10%

According to the company’s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $79,893 at the beginning of June. Additional conversion costs of $343,830 were incurred in the department during the month.

What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)

a sporting goods manufacturer buys wood as a direct material for baseball bats 492324

A sporting goods manufacturer buys wood as a direct material for baseball bats. The Forming Department processes the baseball bats, and the bats are then transferred to the Finishing Department where a sealant is applied. There was no beginning work in process inventory in the Forming Department in May. The Forming Department began manufacturing 15,000 Casey Slugger baseball bats during May. Costs for the Forming Department for the month of May were as follows:

Direct materials

40,500

Conversion costs

27,025

A total of 10,000 bats were completed and transferred to the Finishing Department during May. The ending work in process inventory was 100% complete with respect to direct materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. The company uses the weighted-average method of process costing.

The cost of the units transferred to the Finishing Department during May was: (Do not round your intermediate calculations.)

mcmullen co manufactures automatic door openers the company uses 15 000 electronic h 492325

McMullen Co. manufactures automatic door openers. The company uses 15,000 electronic hinges per year as a component in the assembly of the openers. You have been engaged by McMullen to assist with an evaluation of whether the company should continue producing the hinges or purchase them from an outside vendor. The Accounting Department provided the following detail regarding the annual cost to produce electronic hinges:

Direct materials

54,000

Direct labor

60,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

36,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

90,000

Total costs

240,000

The Procurement Department provided the following supplier pricing:

Supplier A price per hinge $11.00

Supplier B price per hinge $10.75

Supplier C price per hinge $10.50

The supplier pricing was obtained in response to a formal request for proposal (RFP).

Procurement has determined these suppliers meet McMullen’s technical specifications and quality requirements. If McMullen stops producing the part internally, 10% of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Required:

Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting an outside supplier’s offer.

iacollia company makes two products from a common input joint processing costs up to 492326

Iacollia Company makes two products from a common input. Joint processing costs up to the split-off point total $47,600 a year. The company allocates these costs to the joint products on the basis of their total sales values at the split-off point. Each product may be sold at the split-off point or processed further. Data concerning these products appear below:

Product X

Product Y

Total

Allocated joint processing costs

23,800

23,800

47,600

Sales value at split-off point

34,000

34,000

68,000

Costs of further processing

20,900

21,800

42,700

Sales value after further processing

53,600

60,100

113,700

Required:

a. What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product X beyond the split-off point?

b. What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product Y beyond the split-off point?

c. What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product X if it is to be sold at the split-off point?

d. What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product Y if it is to be sold at the split-off point?

the transactions that follow relate to burton enterprises for march 20×1 the company 492287

Transaction Analysis and Statement Preparation.

The transactions that follow relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company’s first month of activity.

3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business.

3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account.

3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash.

3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4.

3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.

3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying $7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next 2 weeks, (Accounts Payable).

3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services.

3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.

3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due.

3/31: Paid $900 for March wages.

3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal from the business for Joanne Burton.

Instructions

a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions onBurton’s assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:

Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity

Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Investments (+) Revenues (-) Withdrawals (-) Expenses

a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.

b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet,

on november 1 of the current year richard parker established a sole proprietorship 492288

Basic Transaction Processing.

On November 1 of the current year, Richard Parker established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:

1: Parker invested $19,000 into the business.

2: Paid $9,000 to acquire a used minivan.

3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.

4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.

5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.

6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.

7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.

8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.

9: Parker withdrew $600 from the business.

10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.

Instructions

a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner’s equity elements of the accounting equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Investments/Withdrawals, and Revenues/Expenses.

b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.

c. Answer the following questions for Parker.

(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?

(2) Did the company have a “good” month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.

the following data relate to preston company as of december 31 19xx 492289

Balance Sheet Preparation.

The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 19XX:

Building

44,000

Accounts Receivable

24,000

Cash

17,000

Loan Payable

30,000

J.Preston, Owners Equity

65,000

Land

21,000

Accounts payable

?

   

Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 19XX.

the following selected balances were extracted from the accounting records of rossi 492290

The following selected balances were extracted from the accounting records of Rossi Enterprises on December 31, 20X3:

Accounts Payable

3,200

Interest Expense

2,500

Accounts Receivable

14,800

Land

18,000

Auto Expense

1,900

Loan Payable

40,000

Building

30,000

Tax Expense

3,300

Cash

7,400

Utilities Expense

4,100

Fee Revenue

56,900

Wage Expense

37,500

a. Determine Rossi’s total assets as of December 31.

b. Determine the company’s total liabilities as of December 31.

c. Compute 20X3 net income or loss.

lee adkins is a portrait artist the following schedule represents lee s combined cha 492291

Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee’s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.

Account number

Account name

Debit

Credit

110

Cash

$ 2,700

120

Accounts Receivable

12,100

130

Equipment and Supplies

2,800

140

Studio

45,000

210

Accounts Payable

$2,600

310

Lee Adkins, Owners Equity

57,400

320

Lee Adkins, Drawing

30,000

410

Revenue

39,000

510

Advertising Expense

2,300

520

Salaries Expense

2,100

540

Utilities Expense

2,000

$99,000

The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:

6/2: Collected $7,500 on account from customers.

6/7: Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 for cash 6/10: Received a $500 bill from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial statements.

6/15: Paid $2,100 to creditors on account.

6/27: Adkins withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.

6/30: Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.

a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company’s general journal.

b. Open running balance ledger “T” accounts by entering account titles, account num¬bers, and May 31 balances.

c. Post the journal entries to the “T” accounts.

d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30.

computer superstores inc has a strong belief in using highly decentralized managemen 492292

Computer Superstores, Inc., has a strong belief in using highly decentralized management. You are the new manager of the company’s store in the Mall of America.

You know much about how to buy, how to display, how to sell, and how to reduce shoplifting. You know little about accounting and finance, however. Top management is convinced that training for higher management should include the active participation of store managers in the budgeting process.

You have been asked to prepare a complete master budget for your store for June, July, and August. You are responsible for its actual full preparation. All accounting is done centrally, so you have no expert help on the premises. In addition, tomorrow the branch manager and the assistant controller will be here to examine your work; at that time, they will assist you in formulating the final budget document. The idea is to have you prepare the budget a few times so that you gain more confidence about accounting matters.

You want to make a favorable impression on your superiors, so you gather the following data as of May 31, 20X5:

Cash

29,000

Recent and Projected Sales

Inventory

420,000

April

300,000

Accounts receivable

369,000

May

350,000

Net furniture

168,000

June

700,000

Total assets

986,000

July

400,000

Accounts payable

475,000

August

400,000

Owners’ equity

511,000

September

300,000

Credit sales are 90% of total sales. Credit accounts are collected 80% in the month following the sale and 20% in the following month.

Assume that bad debts are negligible and can be ignored. The accounts receivable on May 31 are the results of the credit sales for April and May:

(.20 x .90 x $300,000) + (1.0 x .90 x $350,000) = $369,000.

The average gross profit on sales is 40%. ; cost of goods sold is 60% The policy is to acquire enough inventory each month to equal the following month’s projected cost of goods sold. All purchases are paid for in the month following purchase.

Salaries, wages, and commissions average 20% of sales; all other variable expenses are 4% of sales.

Fixed expenses for rent, property taxes, and miscellaneous payroll and other items are $55,000 monthly. Assume that these variable and fixed expenses require cash disbursements each month. Depreciation is $2,500 monthly.

In June, $55,000 is going to be disbursed of $25,000 is to be maintained. Also assume that all borrowings are effective at the beginning of the month and all repayments are made at the end of the month of repayment. Interest is paid only at the time of repaying principal. The interest rate is 10% per annum; round interest computations to the nearest ten dollars. All loans and repayments of principal must be made in multiples of a thousand dollars.

Requirements:

1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the coming quarter, a budgeted statement of monthly cash receipts and disbursements (for each of the next three months), and a budgeted balance sheet for August 31, 20X5. All operations are evaluated on a beforeincome- tax basis, so income taxes may be ignored here.

2. Explain why there is a need for a bank loan and what operating sources supply cash for repaying the bank loan.

the transactions that follow relate to burton enterprises for march 20×1 the company 492293

Transaction Analysis and Statement Preparation.

The transactions that follow relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company’s first month of activity.

3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business.

3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account.

3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash.

3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4.

3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.

3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying $7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next 2 weeks, (Accounts Payable).

3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services.

3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.

3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due.

3/31: Paid $900 for March wages.

3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal from the business for Joanne Burton.

Instructions

a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions onBurton’s assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:

Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity

Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Investments (+) Revenues (-) Withdrawals (-) Expenses

a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.

b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet,

indiana corporation produces a single product that it sells for 9 per unit 492294

Indiana Corporation produces a single product that it sells for $9 per unit. During the first year of operations, 100,000 units were produced, and 90,000 units were sold.

Manufacturing costs and selling and administrative expenses for the year were as follows:

Fixed Costs

Variable Costs

Raw materials

$1.75 per unit produced

Direct labor

$1.25 per unit produced

Factory Overhead

$100,000

$0.50 per unit produced

Selling and administrative

$70,000

$0.60 per unit sold

What was Indiana Corporation’s net operating income for the year using variable costing?

lifsey wedding fantasy company makes very elaborate wedding cakes to order 492295

Lifsey Wedding Fantasy Company makes very elaborate wedding cakes to order. The owner of the company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity-based costing system:

Activity Cost Pools

Activity Rate

Size-related

$0.94 per guest

Complexity-related

$31.62 per tier

Order-related

$55.79 per order

The measure of activity for the size-related activity cost pool is the number of planned guests at the wedding reception. The greater the number of guests, the larger the cake.

The measure of complexity is the number of tiers in the cake. The activity measure for the order-related cost pool is the number of orders. (Each wedding involves one order.) The activity rates include the costs of raw ingredients, such as flour, sugar, eggs, and shortening. The activity rates don’t include the costs of purchased decorations, such as miniature statues and wedding bells, which are accounted for separately.

Data concerning two recent orders are listed here:

Pyburn

Smith

Wedding

Wedding

Number of reception guests

72

189

Number of tiers on the cake

4

5

Cost of purchased decorations for cake

$29.92

$68.75

gargymal company would like to estimate the variable and fixed components of its ele 492299

Gargymal Company would like to estimate the variable and fixed components of its electrical costs and has compiled the following data for the past five months of operations.

Machine

Hours

Electrical Cost

August

1,000

$1,620

September

900

$1,510

October

1,500

$1,870

November

2,000

$1,950

December

1,300

$1,730

Using the high-low method of analysis, the estimated fixed cost per month for electricity is closest to which of the following?

recognition of concepts ron carroll operates a small company that books enter tainer 492272

Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter – tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.

a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy

b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30

c. Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June

d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention

e. The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view

f. Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July

g. The bank loan payable in part (f)

h. Office supplies on hand at year-end

examine the following list of accounts 492274

Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:

Interest Payable

Accumulated Depreciation:
Equipment

Alex Kenzy, Drawing

Accounts Payable

Service Revenue

Cash

Accounts Receivable

Supplies Expense

Interest Expense

Which of the preceding accounts

a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?

b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?

c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?

d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?

adjusting entries and financial statements the following information pertains to fix 492275

Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises:

The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned.

Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.

Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650.

The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.

The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months’ rent of Fixation’s headquarters, beginning on November 1.

Fixation’s accounting year ends on December 31.

Instructions

Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:

a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjustment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)

b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts

c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)

adjusting entries you have been retained to examine the records of kathy s day care 492276

Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy’s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:

· On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.

· Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.

· All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned

· Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.

  • Depreciation on the school’s van was $3,000 for the year.

· On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.

· Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.

· Kathy’s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:

Date Paid

Policy No.

Length of Policy

Amount

Feb. 1, 20X2

1033MCM19

1 year

$540

Jan. 1, 20X3

7952789HP

1 year

912

Aug. 1, 20X3

XQ943675ST

2 years

840

Instructions

The center’s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.

estimation and balance sheet disclosure the following pre adjusted information for t 492279

Allowance method: estimation and balance sheet disclosure. The following pre- – adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31:

Accounts receivable $107,000

Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance)

Credit sales 250,000

a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick’s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions:

(1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales.

(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable.

b. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)?

c. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)?

the december 31 20×2 year end trial balance of targa company revealed the following 492280

Direct write-off and allowance methods: matching approach. The December 31, 20X2, year-end trial balance of Targa Company revealed the following account information:

Debits

Credits

Accounts Receivable

$252,000

Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts

$ 3,000

Sales

855,000

Instructions

a. Determine the adjusting entry for bad debts under each of the following condi tions:

(1) An aging schedule indicates that $12,420 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated at 2% of net sales.

b. On January 19, 20X3, Targa learned that House Company, a customer, had declared bankruptcy. Present the proper entry to write off House’s $950 balance using the allowance method.

c. Repeat the requirement in part (b), using the direct write-off method.

d. In light of the House bankruptcy, examine the allowance and direct write-off methods in terms of their ability to properly match revenues and expenses.

at a january 20×2 meeting the president of sonic sound directed the sales staff to m 492281

Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the president of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff “to move some product this year.” The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company’s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.

By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:

20X2

20X1

Sales

$23,987,000

$8,423,000

Accounts Receivable, 12/31

12,444,000

1,056,000

Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31

?

23,000 cr.

The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:

Age of Receivable

Amount

Percentage of Accounts
Expected to Be Collected

Under 31 days

$5,321,000

99%

31260 days

3,890,000

90

61290 days

1,067,000

80

Over 90 days

2,166,000

60

Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.

Instructions

a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.

b. What is the company’s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?

c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.

d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president’s decision to close the credit evaluation department.

daniel laird owns and operates an architectural firm called laird design the followi 492282

Analysis of transactions, balance sheet, income statement, and statement of owners equity completed.

Daniel Laird owns and operates an architectural firm called Laird Design. The following amounts summarize the financial position of his business an April 30 2009: As of April 30th, Laird had Cash of 1,720. He has 3,240 in accounts receivable, $24,100 in land. $5,400 in accounts payable, and Daniels capital is $23,660 Considering this info log below…

During May 2009, the following events occurred:

A- Laird received $12,000 as a gift and deposited the cash in the business bank account.

B- Paid off the beginning balance of Accounts Payable.

C- Performed services for a client and received cash of $1,100.

D- Collected cash from a customer on account, $750.00

E- Purchased supplies on account, $720.00

F- Consulted on the interior design of a major office building and billed the client for services performed, $5,000.

G- Invested personal cash of $1,700 in the business.

H- Paid Offices rent, $1,860

I- Sold supplies at cost to another interior designed for $80 cash

J- Withdrew cash of $4,000 for personal use.

the following information relates to action sign company for 20×2 492284

Analysis of prepaid account balance.

The following information relates to Action Sign Company for 20X2:

Insurance expense

4,350

Prepaid insurance, December 31, 20X2

1,900

Cash outlays for insurance during 20X2

6,200

Compute the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account on January 1, 20X2.

ron carroll operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters parties c 492285

Week Two Exercise Assignment – Revenue and Expenses

1. Recognition of concepts.

Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.

a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy

b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30

c. Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June

d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention

e. The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view

f. Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July

g. The bank loan payable in part (f)

h. Office supplies on hand at year-end

acc300 selected transactions for d reyes an interior decorator in her first month of 492242

Selected transactions for D. Reyes, an interior decorator in her first month of business, are as follows.

Jan. 2 Invested $10,000 cash in business.

3 Purchased used car for $4,000 cash for use in business.

9 Purchased supplies on account for $500.

11 Billed customers $1,800 for services performed.

16 Paid $200 cash for advertising.

20 Received $700 cash from customers billed on January 11.

23 Paid creditor $300 cash on balance owed.

28 Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use of owner.

Instructions

For each transaction indicate the following.

(a) The basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, owner’s equity).

(b) The specific account debited and credited (cash, rent expense, service revenue, etc.).

(c) Whether the specific account is increased or decreased.

(d) The normal balance of the specific account.

acc300 aussie imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for 50 000 on janua 492246

Depreciation computations: change in estimate.

Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.

Instructions

a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.

b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company’s depreciation expense for 20X5.

c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.

acc300 lee choi opened choi s window washing inc on july 1 2008 during july the foll 492247

Lee Choi opened Choi’s Window Washing, Inc. on July 1, 2008. During July the following transactions were completed.

July 1 Issued $12,000 of common stock for $12,000 cash.

1 Purchased used truck for $6,000, paying $3,000 cash and the balance on account.

3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $1,300 on account.

5 Paid $2,400 cash on one-year insurance policy effective July 1.

12 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.

18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $800 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.

20 Paid $1,200 cash for employee salaries.

21 Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July 12.

25 Billed customers $5,000 for cleaning services.

31 Paid gas and oil for month on truck $200.

31 Declared and paid $900 cash dividend.

The chart of accounts for Choi’s Window Washing contains the following accounts:

No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 128 Cleaning Supplies, No. 130 Prepaid Insurance, No. 157 Equipment, No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 320 Retained Earnings, No. 332 Dividends, No. 350 Income Summary, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 633 Gas & Oil Expense ,No. 634 Cleaning Supplies Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize and post the July transactions. Use page J1 for the journal and the three column form of account.

(b) Prepare a trial balance at July 31 on a worksheet.

(c) Enter the following adjustments on the worksheet and complete the worksheet.

(1) Services provided but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,500.

(2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $300.

(3) One-twelfth of the insurance expired.

(4) An inventory count shows $400 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31.

(5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $600.

(d) Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified balance sheet at July 31.

(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries. Use page J2 for the journal.

(f) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process. Use page J3 for the journal.

(g) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.

acc300 rachel ray recently opened her own basket weaving studio she sells finished b 492248

Rachel Ray recently opened her own basket weaving studio. She sells finished baskets in addition to the raw materials needed by customers to weave baskets of their own. Rachel has put together a variety of raw material kits, each including materials at various stages of completion. Unfortunately, owing to space limitations, Rachel is unable to carry all varieties of kits originally assembled and must choose between two basic packages.

The basic introductory kit includes undyed, uncut reeds, (with dye included) for weaving one basket. This basic package costs Rachel $14 and sells for $30. The second kit, called Stage 2, includes cut reeds that have already been dyed. With this kit the customer need only soak the reeds and weave the basket. Rachel is able to produce the second kit by using the basic materials included in the first kit and adding one hour of her own time, which she values at $18 per hour. Because she is more efficient at cutting and dying reeds than her average customer, Rachel is able to make two kits of the dyed reeds, in one hour, from one kit of undyed reeds. The Stage 2 kit sells for $35.

Instructions:

Determine whether Rachel’s basket weaving shop should carry the basic introductory kit with undyed and uncut reeds o2 the Stage 2 kit with reeds already dyed and cut. Prepare an incremental analysis to support your answer.

kava inc manufactures industrial components one of its products which is used in the 492250

Kava Inc. manufactures industrial components. One of its products, which is used in the construction of industrial air conditioners, is known as K65. Data concerning this product are given below:

Per Unit

Selling price

$180

Direct materials

$ 29

Direct labor

$ 5

Variable manufacturing overhead

$ 4

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$ 21

Variable selling expense

$2

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$ 17

The above per unit data are based on annual production of 4,000 units of the component.

Direct labor can be considered to be a variable cost. (Source: CMA, adapted)

The company has received a special, one-time-only order for 500 units of component K65.

There would be no variable selling expense on this special order, and the total fixed manufacturing overhead and fixed selling and administrative expenses of the company wouldn’t be affected by the order.

Assuming that Kava has excess capacity and can fill the order without cutting back on the production of any product, what is the minimum price per unit on the special order below which the company shouldn’t go?

the management of baggerly corporation would like to investigate the possibility of 492252

The management of Baggerly Corporation would like to investigate the possibility of basing its predetermined overhead rate on activity at capacity. The company’s controller has provided an example to illustrate how this new system would work. In this example, the allocation base is machine hours, and the estimated amount of the allocation base for the upcoming year is 81,000 machine hours. In addition, capacity is 95,000 machine hours, and the actual level of activity for the year is 84,900 machine hours. All od the manufacturing overhead is fixed and is $6,617,700 per year. For simplicity, its assumed that this is the estimated manufacturing overhead for the year as well as the manufacturing overhead at capacity. It’s further assumed that this is also the actual amount of manufacturing overhead for the year.

If the company bases its predetermined overhead rate on capacity, by how much was manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied?

the keego company is planning a 200 000 equipment investment that has an estimated f 492253

The Keego Company is planning a $200,000 equipment investment that has an estimated five-year life with no estimated salvage value.

The company has projected the following annual cash flows for the investment:

Year

Cash Inflows

1

$120,000

2

60,000

3

40,000

4

40,000

5

40,000

Total

$300,000

Assuming that the cash inflows occur evenly over the year, the payback period for the investment is _______ years.

sanker inc has provided the following data for the month of august 492254

Sanker Inc. has provided the following data for the month of August. There were no beginning inventories; consequently, the direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead applied listed below are all for the current month.

Work In Process

Finished Goods

Cost of Goods Sold

Total

Direct materials

$2,790

$7,680

$18,240

$28,710

Direct labor

9,700

19,200

45,600

74,500

Manufacturing overhead applied

5,440

8,000

18,560

32,000

Total

$17,930

$34,880

$82,400

$135,210

Manufacturing overhead for the month was overapplied by $5,000. The company allocates any underapplied or overapplied overhead among work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold at the end of the month on the basis of the overhead applied during the month in those accounts.

The journal entry to record the allocation of any underapplied or overapplied overhead for August would include

the clemson company reported the following results last year for the manufacture and 492255

The Clemson Company reported the following results last year for the manufacture and

sale of one of its products known as a Tam.

Sales (6,500 Tams at $130 each)

$845,000

Variable cost of sales

390,000

Variable distribution costs

65,000

Fixed advertising expense

275,000

Salary of product line manager

25,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

145,000

$(55,000)

Clemson Company is trying to determine whether to discontinue the manufacture and sale of Tams. The operating results reported above for last year are expected to continue in the foreseeable future if the product isn’t dropped. The fixed manufacturing overhead represents the costs of production facilities and equipment that the Tam product shares with other products produced by Clemson. If the Tam product were dropped, there would be no change in the fixed manufacturing costs of the company.

Assume that discontinuing the manufacture and sale of Tams will have no effect on the sale of other product lines. If the company discontinues the Tam product line, the change in annual operating income (or loss) should be a

brittman corporation makes three products that use the current constraint a particul 492256

Brittman Corporation makes three products that use the current constraint-a particular type of machine. Data concerning those products appear below:

IP

NI

YD

Selling price per unit

$183.57

$207.74

$348.15

Variable cost per unit

$144.42

$155.04

$269.50

Minutes on the constraint

2.90

3.40

5.50

Assume that sufficient constraint time is available to satisfy demand for all but the least profitable product. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay to acquire more of the constrained resource?

part n19 is used by malouf corporation to make one of its products a total of 7 000 492258

Part N19 is used by Malouf Corporation to make one of its products. A total of 7,000 units of this part are produced and used every year. The company’s Accounting Department reports the following costs of producing the part at this level of activity:

Per Unit

Direct materials $2.20

Direct labor $8.50

Variable manufacturing overhead $1.30

Supervisor’s salary $5.80

Depreciation of special equipment $7.20

Allocated general overhead $4.60

An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $24.50 each.

If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including the direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company, none of which would be avoided if the part were purchased instead of produced internally. In addition, the space used to make part N19 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $25,000 per year for that product. What would be the impact on the company’s overall net operating income of buying part N19 from the outside supplier?

kean dry cleaners is owned and operated by wally lowman a building and equipment are 492262

Transactions; Financial Statements

Kean Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Wally Lowman. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets and the liabilities of the business on March 1, 2012, are as follows: Cash, $ 15,000; Accounts Receivable, $ 31,000; Supplies, $ 3,000; Land, $ 36,000; Accounts Payable, $ 13,000. Business transactions during March are summarized as follows:

a. Wally Lowman invested additional cash in the business with a deposit of $ 28,000 in the business bank account.

b. Paid $ 14,000 for the purchase of land as a future building site.

c. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning revenue, $ 17,000.

d. Paid rent for the month, $ 5,000.

e. Purchased supplies on account, $ 2,500.

f. Paid creditors on account, $ 12,800.

g. Charged customers for dry cleaning revenue on account, $ 34,000.

h. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for March ( to be paid on April 10), $ 13,500.

i. Paid the following: wages expense, $ 7,500; truck expense, $ 2,500; utilities expense, $ 1,300; miscellaneous expense, $ 2,700.

j. Received cash from customers on account, $ 28,000.

k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $ 1,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $ 3,600.

l. Withdrew $ 8,000 cash for personal use.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of Wally Lowman’s capital as of March 1 of the current year.

2. State the assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity as of March 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.

3. Prepare an income statement for March, a statement of owner’s equity for March, and a balance sheet as of March 31.

4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for March.

the following selected transactions were completed during august of the current year 492263

Transactions and T-accounts

The following selected transactions were completed during August of the current year:

1. Billed customers for fees earned, $ 35,700.

2. Purchased supplies on account, $ 2,000.

3. Received cash from customers on account, $ 26,150.

4. Paid creditors on account, $ 800.

Instructions:

a. Journalize the above transactions in a two- column journal, using the appropriate number to identify the transactions. Journal entry explanations may be omitted.

b. Post the entries prepared in ( a) to the following T accounts: Cash, Supplies, Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Fees Earned. To the left of each amount posted in the accounts, place the appropriate number to identify the transactions.

c. Assume that the unadjusted trial balance on August 31 shows a credit balance for

Accounts Receivable. Does this credit balance mean an error has occurred?

libby and sandman attorneys at law provided legal representation to williams equipme 492265

Job Cost Sheet for a Service Business

Libby and Sandman, Attorneys-at-Law, provided legal representation to Williams Equipment, Inc., in a product liability suit. Twenty partner hours and 65 associate hours were worked in defending the company. The cost of each partner hour is $325, which includes partner wages plus overheard based on direct labor cost. The cost of each associate hour is $145, which also includes both wages and overhead. Other costs that can be directly identified with the job are travel ($2,800) and telephone/fax charges ($1,740).

The date Williams contracted with Libby and Sandman was May 8, and the defense was successfully completed on December 21. The engagement number is 525.

Required:

Prepare a job order cost sheet, in good form, for Williams Equipment, Inc.

lynn and paul partners in a systems consulting firm budgeted the following professio 492266

Preparing a revenue budget and a labor budget for a service business

Lynn and Paul, partners in a systems consulting firm, budgeted the following professional labor hours for the year ended December 31, 2008:

Partners

4,000

Associates

14,000

Staff

22,000

Partners have a billing rate of $225 per hour and actually earn $110 per hour. Associates bill out at $140 per hour and earn $85 per hour. Staff has a billing rate of $95 per hour and earns $55 per hour.

Required:

1. Prepare a revenue budget

2. Prepare a professional labor budget

haille corporation has determined the following selling price and manufacturing cost 492267

Absorption costing versus direct costing

Haille Corporation has determined the following selling price and manufacturing cost per unit based on normal production of 72,000 units per year:

Selling price per unit

22

Variable cost per unit:

Direct materials

4

Direct labor

4

Variable factory overhead

2

Variable cost per unit:

10

Fixed cost per unit:

Fixed factory overhead per year

324,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense per year

48,000

Normal unit production per year

72,000

Month

Units Produced

Units Sold

October

6,000

3,000

November

1,000

4,000

December

8,000

6,000

October has no beginning inventories.

Required:

Prepare comparative income statements for each month under each of the following:

1. Absorption costing (include under- or overapplied overhead)

2. Variable costing

tarbell manufacturing company has a maximum productive capacity of 210 000 units per 492268

Tarbell Manufacturing Company has a maximum productive capacity of 210,000 units per year. Normal capacity is 180,000 units per year. Standard variable manufacturing costs are $10 per unit. Fixed factory overhead is $360,000 per year, Variable selling expense is $5 per unit and fixed selling expenses is $252,000 per year.

The unit sales price is $20.

The operating results for the year are as follows: sales, 150,000 units; production 160,000 units; beginning inventory, 10,000 units. All variances are written off as additions to (or deductions from) the standard cost of sales.

Required:

1. What is the break-even point expressed in dollar sales?

2. How many units must be sold to earn a net income of $100,000 per year?

3. Prepare a formal income statement for the year under the following:

a. Absorption costing (Hint: Don’t forget to compute the volume variance.)

b. Variable costing.

devine and o clock architects have been using a simplified costing system in which a 492269

Allocations using simplified costing versus activity-based costing

Devine and O’Clock, architects, have been using a simplified costing system in which all professional labor costs are included in a single direct cost category (professional labor) and all overhead costs are included in a single indirect cost pool (professional support) and allocated to jobs using professional labor hours as the allocation base. Consider two clients: Shank Products, which required 50 hours of design work for a new addition; and Sayers Markets, which required plans for a new store that took 20 hours to draw. The firm has two partners who each earn a salary of $150,000 a year and four associates who each earn $60,000 per year. Each professional has 1,500 billable hours per year. The professional support is $590,000, which consists of $350,000 of design support and $240,000 of staff support. Shank’s job required 30 hours of partner time and 20 hours of

associate time. Sayers job required 5 hours of partner time and 15 hours of associate time.

Required:

1. Prepare job cost sheets for Shank Products and Sayers Markets, using a simplified costing system with one direct and one indirect cost pool.

2. Prepare job cost sheets for the two clients; using an activity based costing system with two direct cost categories (partner labor and associate labor) and two indirect cost categories (design support and associate labor). Use professional labor dollars as the cost allocation base for design support and use professional labor hours for staff support.

libby and sandman attorneys at law provided legal representation to williams equipme 492270

Job Cost Sheet for a Service Business

Libby and Sandman, Attorneys-at-Law, provided legal representation to Williams Equipment, Inc., in a product liability suit. Twenty partner hours and 65 associate hours were worked in defending the company. The cost of each partner hour is $325, which includes partner wages plus overheard based on direct labor cost. The cost of each associate hour is $145, which also includes both wages and overhead. Other costs that can be directly identified with the job are travel ($2,800) and telephone/fax charges ($1,740).

The date Williams contracted with Libby and Sandman was May 8, and the defense was successfully completed on December 21. The engagement number is 525.

Required:

Prepare a job order cost sheet, in good form, for Williams Equipment, Inc.

acc206 snowbound corporation was incorporated in july the firm s charter authorized 492219

Issuance of stock: organization costs.

Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm’s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:

1-Jul Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.

11-Aug Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.

1-Sep Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.

b. Prepare journal entries for the cash dividend declaration and payment.

acc202 preparing pro form income statements with different assumptions 492220

Preparing pro form income statements with different assumptions.

Top executive officers of Zottoli Company, a merchandising firm, are preparing the next year’s budget. The controller has provided everyone with the current year’s projected income statement.

Sales revenue

2,000,000

Cost of goods sold

1,400,000

Gross profit

600,000

Selling & admin. Expenses

260,000

Net income

340,000

Cost of goods sold is usually 70 percent of sales revenue, and selling and administrative expenses are usually 10 percent of sales plus a fixed cost of $60,000. The president has announced that the company’s goal is to increase net income by 15 percent.

Required

a. What percentage increase in sales would enable the company to reach its goal? Support your answer with a pro forma income statement.

b. The market may become stagnant next year, and the company does not expect an increase in sales revenue. The production manager believes that an improved production procedure can cut cost of goods sold by 2 percent. What else can the company do to reach its goal? Prepare a pro forma income statement illustrating your proposal.

c. The company decides to escalate its advertising campaign to boost consumer recognition, which will increase selling and administrative expenses to $340,000. With the increased advertising, the company expects sales revenue to increase by 15 percent.

Assume that cost of goods sold remains a constant proportion of sales. Can the company reach its goal?

acc202 louis gallo owns a small retail ice cream parlor he is considering expanding 492221

Using the payback period and unadjusted rate of return to evaluate alternative investment opportunities

Louis Gallo owns a small retail ice cream parlor. He is considering expanding the business and has identified two attractive alternatives. One involves purchasing a machine that would enable Mr. Gallo to offer frozen yogurt to customers. The machine would cost $8,100 and has an expected useful life of three years with no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling yogurt are expected to be $5,940 and $900, respectively.

Alternatively, Mr. Gallo could purchase for $10,080 the equipment necessary to serve captional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling cappuccino are expected to be $8,280 and $2,430, respectively. Income before taxes earned by the ice cream parlor is taxed at an effective rate of 20 percent.

Required.

a. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate or return (use average investment) for each alternative.

b. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.

acc202 luke chou the president of digitech computer services needs your help 492222

Flexible Budget Planning

Luke Chou, the president of Digitech Computer Services, needs your help. He wonders about the potential effects on the firm’s net income if he changes the service rate that the firm charges its customers. The following basic data pertain to fiscal year 2012.

Standard Rate & Variable Costs:

Service Rate per Hour 80.00

Labor

40.00

Overhead

7.20

General, selling

4.30

Expected Fixed Costs:

Facility Repair

525,000

General, Selling & Admin

150,000

Required

a. Prepare the pro forma income statement that would appear in the master budget if the firm expects to provide 30,000 hours of services in 2012.

b. A marketing consultant suggests to Mr. Chou that the service rate may affect the number of service hours that the firm can achieve. According to the consultant’s analysis, if Digitech charges customers $75 per hour, the firm can achieve 38,000 hours of services. Prepare a flexible budget using the consultant’s assumption.

c. The same consultant also suggests that if the firm raises its rate to $85 per hour, the number of service hours will decline to 25,000. Prepare a flexible budget using the new assumption.

d. Evaluate the three possible outcomes you determined in Requirements a, b, and c and recommend a pricing strategy.

during may joliet fabrics corporation manufactured 500 units of a special multilayer 492223

Direct-Material and Direct-Labor Variances

During May, Joliet Fabrics Corporation manufactured 500 units of a special multilayer fabric with the trade name Stylex. The following information from the Stylex production department also pertains to May.

Direct material purchased: 18,000 yards at $1.38 per yard 24,840

Direct material used: 9,500 yards at $1.38 per yard 13,110

Direct labor: 2,100 hours at $9.15 per hour 19,215

The standard prime costs for one unit of Stylex are as follows:

Direct material: 20 yards at $1.35 per yard 27

Direct labor: 4 hours at $9.00 per hour 36

Total standard prime cost per unit of output 63

Required: Compute the following variances for the month of May, indicating whether each variance is favorable or unfavorable.

1. Direct-material price variance.

2. Direct-material quantity variance.

3. Direct-labor rate variance.

4. Direct-labor efficiency variance.

pebblebrook supply uses a sales journal a purchases journal a cash receipts journal 492225

Fundamental Accounting Principles

Pebblebrook Supply uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of April.

3-Apr Purchased merchandise for $3,300 on credit from Scott, Inc., terms 3/10, n/30.

9 Issued check no. 210 to Kidman Corp. to buy store supplies for $528.

12 Sold merchandise costing $578 on credit to C. Meyers for $971, terms n/30.

17 Issued check no. 211 for $1,500 to pay off a note payable to City Bank.

20 Purchased merchandise for $3,900 on credit from LeBron, terms 3/10, n/30.

28 Issued check no. 212 to LeBron to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 20, less the discount.

29 Paid salary of $2,250 to B. Decker by issuing check no. 213.

30 Issued check no. 214 to Scott, Inc., to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 3.

Journalize the April transactions that should be recorded in the cash disbursements journal assuming the perpetual inventory system is used. (Record the transactions in the given order. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

mccarty pointers corporation expects to begin operations on january 1 2012 it will o 492226

Prepare a sales budget and schedule of cash receipts

McCarty Pointers Corporation expects to begin operations on January 1, 2012; it will operate as a specialty sales company that sells laser pointers over the Internet. McCarty expects sales in January 2012 to total $200,000 and to increase 10 percent per month in February and March. All sales are on account. McCarty expects to collect 70 percent of accounts receivable in the month of sale, 20 percent in the month following the sale, and 10 percent in the second month following the sale.

Required:

a. Prepare a sales budget for the first quarter of 2012.

b. Determine the amount of sales revenue McCarty will report on the first 2012 quarterly pro forma income statement.

c. Prepare a cash receipts schedule for the first quarter of 2012.

d. Determine the amount of accounts receivable as of March 31, 2012.

aussie imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for 50 000 on january 1 20 492228

Depreciation computations: change in estimate.

Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.

Instructions

a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of utput, and double-declining-balance.

b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company’s depreciation expense for 20X5.

c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.

lavender company has decided to use a predetermined rate to assign factory overhead 492229

Lavender Company has decided to use a predetermined rate to assign factory overhead to production. The following predictions have been made for 2014:

Total factory overhead costs $150,000

Direct labor hours 40,000 hours

Direct labor costs $200,000

Required

a. Compute the predetermined factory overhead rate assuming Lavender uses direct labor hours as the activity base.

b. Assume that actual factory overhead was $152,500 and that Lavender applies factory overhead to Work in Process based on direct labor hours. If actual direct labor was 42,000 hours for 2014, was factory overhead overapplied or underapplied? By how much?

c. Lavender Company follows the policy of writing off any under- or overapplied factory overhead balance to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the year. Make the entry necessary at the end of 2014 to dispose of the factory overhead balance (variance) determined in Part (b).

juicy manufacturing corporation incurred the following costs 492230

Juicy Manufacturing Corporation incurred the following costs.

Beginning direct materials inventory

$24,000

Beginning work-in-process inventory

$10,500

Beginning finished goods inventory

$28,500

Ending direct materials inventory

$24,000

Ending work in process

$21,000

Ending finished goods

$39,000

Factory supervisor’s salary

$42,000

Depreciation on plant

$18,000

Sales

$1,200,000

Selling and administrative expenses

$187,500

Plant maintenance

$9,000

Plant utilities

$16,500

Direct material purchases

$322,500

Direct labor

$360,000

Required: Calculate the following.

a. Direct materials used

b. Cost of goods manufactured

c. Cost of goods sold

d. Operating income

the condensed income statement and comparative balance sheet of jackson corporation 492231

Prepare a statement of cash flows.

The condensed income statement and comparative balance sheet of Jackson Corporation as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, are provided below. Other financial data is also given.

Jackson Corporation

Condensed Income Statement

Year Ended December 31, 2013

Revenues

675,500

Costs and Expenses

Cost of goods sold

429,000

Salaries expense

125,000

Depreciation expense

15,000

Advertising expense

14,900

Utilities expense

18,000

Total costs and expenses

601,900

Net income before income taxes

73,600

Income taxes expense

18,400

Net income after income tax

$55,200

Jackson Corporation

Comparative Balance Sheet

December 31, 2013 and 2012

Assets

2013

2012

Cash

81,000

70,000

Accounts receivable (net)

55,650

52,000

Merchandise Inventory

49,000

54,000

Prepaid advertising

8,000

10,000

Property, Plant and Equipment

120,000

100,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

(25,000)

(10,000)

Total Assets

$288,650

$276,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’Equity

Liabilities

Accounts payable

50,450

79,000

Salaries payable

4,500

3,500

Unearned Revenues

4,000

5,000

Income Taxes Payable

6,000

5,000

Notes payable, 2015

30,000

Total Liabilities

64,950

122,500

Stockholders’Equity

Common Stock, $2 par

75,000

50,000

Retained Earnings

148,700

103,500

Total Stockholders’Equity

223,700

153,500

Total Liabilities & Stockholders’Equity

$288,650

$276,000

Instructions:

Prepare a statement of cash flows for Jackson Corporation for 2013. Additional information for the year that is pertinent to its preparations follow:

a. No items of property, plant and equipment were disposed of during the year.

b. Paid cash for the additions to property, plant and equipment during the year.

c. Paid $10,000 dividends on the common stock in cash during the year.

d. Issued common stock at par value for cash.

e. Paid cash to retire the long-term note payable.

on august 31 the balance sheet of nashville veterinary clinic showed cash 9 000 acco 492232

On August 31, the balance sheet of Nashville Veterinary Clinic showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Office Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, Common Stock $13,000, and Retained Earnings $700. During September the following transactions occurred.

1. Paid $2,900 cash on accounts payable.

2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.

3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.

4. Earned revenue of $8,000 of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.

5. Paid cash dividends of $1,000.

6. Paid salaries $1,700 rent for September $900, and advertising expenses $300.

7. Incurred utility expenses for month on account $170.

8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank – money borrowed on a note payable.

Instructions:

(a) Complete the table below. (Show the amount of increase or decrease for each transaction using a + for an increase (+500) and a – for a decrease (-500) and a 0 for no change. Please do not leave any fields blank. List multiple entries from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

(b) Prepare an income statement for September, an retained earnings statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30. (If there is a net loss, record amount using either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45). Enter all other amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary. List amounts from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2. For balance sheet list assets in order of liquidity

nash company was organized on april 1 2011 of the current year after six months of s 492233

Nash Company was organized on April 1, 2011 of the current year. After six months of startup losses, management had expected to show a profit during October. Management was disappointed however, when the income statement for October showed a loss. October’s income statement follows:

Nash Company

Income Statement

For the month ended October 31, 2011

Sales

565,000

Less: Operating Expenses

Direct Labor Costs

103,000

Raw Materials Purchased

196,000

Manufacturing Overhead

113,000

Selling and Administrative Expenses

222,000

634,000

Net Operating Loss

(69,000)

After seeing the $69,000 loss for October, Nash’s president stated the following, “I expected to be profitable within the six month time frame and this loss for October is even worse than September’s. I am beginning to feel we should consider selling the company assets and if we do not sell the assets, we may not find a buyer. By the way, I do not believe we should look for a new controller. We will proceed with Barry for the time being.”

The company controller resigned back in September. Barry, is the new assistant in controller’s office was hired back in August, prepared the income statement above. Barry is very inexperienced when it comes to manufacturing operations.

Inventory balances at the beginning and end of September were:

Raw Materials, October 1, 2011

16,000

Raw Materials, October 31, 2011

19,000

Work In Process, October 1, 2011

22,000

Work in Process, October 31, 2011

25,000

Finished Goods, October 1, 2011

45,000

Finished Goods, October 31, 2011

59,000

The president has asked you to check over the income statement and make a recommendation as to whether the company should look for a buyer for its assets.

Requirements:

1. While gathering data for a recommendation to the president, prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for October.

2. As a second step, prepare a new income statement for October.

3. Based on your statements prepared in (1) and (2) above, would you recommend that the company look for a buyer?

the ledger of elburn company at the end of the current year shows accounts receivabl 492235

The ledger of Elburn Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $143,300, Sales Revenue $856,800, and Sales Returns and Allowances $29,900. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

a. If Elburn uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Elburn determines that T. Thum’s $2,000 balance is uncollectible.

b. If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,300 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 11% of accounts receivable.

c. If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $310 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 2% of net sales and (2) 8% of accounts receivable.

hunsicker corporation has provided the following data for the month of january 492236

Hunsicker Corporation has provided the following data for the month of January:

Inventories

Beginning

Ending

Raw materials

$30,000

$33,000

Work In process

$20,000

$18,000

Finished goods

$52,000

$60,000

Additional Information

Raw material purchases

$63,000

Direct labor costs

$92,000

Manufacturing overhead cost incurred

$75,000

Indirect materials included in manufacturing overhead costs incurred

$6,000

Manufacturing overhead cost applied to work in process

$69,000

Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold in good form.

tasha orin is unable to reconcile the bank balance at january 31 tasha s reconciliat 492237

Tasha Orin is unable to reconcile the bank balance at January 31. Tasha’s reconciliation is shown here.

Cash balance per bank

3,677.20

Add: NSF check

450.00

Less: Bank service charge

28.00

Adjusted balance per bank

4,099.20

Cash balance per books

3,975.20

Less: Deposits in transit

590.00

Add: Outstanding checks

770.00

Adjusted balance per books

4,155.20

Instructions
(a) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per bank?
(b) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per books?
(c) Prepare the adjusting journal entries necessary to determine the adjusted cash balance per books.

acc300 at reyes company checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent 492238

At Reyes Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor’s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by vendor and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills “paid,” files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Reyes Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.

Instructions

(a) List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.

(b) Identify improvements for correcting these weaknesses.

acc300 this information relates to the cash account in the ledger of hawkins company 492239

This information relates to the Cash account in the ledger of Hawkins Company.

Balance September 1-$16,400; Cash deposited-$64,000

Balance September 30-$17,600; Checks written-$62,800

The September bank statement shows a balance of $16,500 at September 30 and the following memoranda.

Credits Debits

Collection of $1,800 note plus interest $30 $1,830 NSF check: H. Juno $560 Interest earned on checking account 45 Safety deposit box rent 60

At September 30, deposits in transit were $4,738 and outstanding checks totaled $2,383.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at September 30, 2012.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries at September 30, assuming (1) the NSF check was from a customer on account, and (2) no interest had been accrued on the note.

acc300 you are employed by sunshine airlines and your boss has asked you to do some 492240

You are employed by Sunshine Airlines and your boss has asked you to do some price comparisons on competing airlines. Once you gather the data, you are required to prepare a business memo to your boss, Mr. Smith, with your findings.

Required:

1. Identify a minimum of two airlines that depart from a major airport located closest to you. This will be your departure city. Your destination will be Honolulu,HI.

2. Calculate round-trip fares for the following two dates. You may choose to go directly to the airline or use one of the Internet-based travel companies such as Expedia, Orbitz, Travelocity, etc.

1. Departing this Friday and returning the following Friday. Try to use any last-minute pricing sales if available.

2. Departing three weeks from this Friday and returning the following Friday.

3. Calculate the difference between the two fares for each airline.

4. Compare all of the fares and analyze the difference.

5. Decide whether these airlines are generating any positive contribution margin on either of these fares.

6. Identify examples of both fixed and variable costs that each airline would incur.

7. Analyze whether the costs are variable or fixed in relation to an individual passenger.

8. Prepare a business memo to your boss that includes the required information and conclude which of these two airlines is your closest competitor.

Remember to cite your sources in APA format.

acc300 ac speed company working papers and business memo june transactions company b 492241

AC Speed Company (Working Papers and Business Memo) – June Transactions Company Background & Scenario

The AC Speed Company is a well-established, publicly-held corporation, operating as a wholesaler in the auto parts industry. Specifically, AC Speed purchases auto parts from manufacturers and sells them to large business customers. Most purchases and sales are on account, with trade credit terms (specified below).

You’re a Davenport University student pursuing a bachelor’s degree in business and employed at the AC Speed Company this semester as an intern. You’ve worked in various departments and on several projects so far, learning a lot about the company’s business operations. Management seems impressed with your enthusiasm and the quality of your work.

The company’s accountant has just been called away for a family emergency and will likely be absent for a month or so. The General Manager asks you to take over the accountant’s regular duties on an interim basis. You’re nervous about doing so, but are confident that what you’ve learned in accounting class, plus your personal problem-solving skills, will make this a successful experience. What a great learning opportunity, not to mention an enhancement to your resume!

I. The excel tutorial file contains the following worksheet tabs:

Transactions, Products, Chart of Accounts GL, Chart of Accounts AR Ledger, Chart of Accounts AP Ledger

Sales Journal, Purchases Journal, Cash Receipts Journal, Cash Payments Journal General Ledger, AR Ledger, AP Ledger,

Worksheet

Income Statement

Statement of Retained Earnings

Balance Sheet

Post-Closing Trial Balance

Financial Ratios

Inventory Control

Adjusted Trial Balances Prior Years

II. The word tutorial file contains the business memo.

star corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 19×6 492197

Analysis of stockholders’ equity

Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 19X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 19X6 and 19X5 follow.

19X6

19X5

Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%

$580,000

$500,000

Common stock, $10 par value

2,350,000

1,750,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par value

Preferred

24,000

Common

4,620,000

3,600,000

Retained earnings

8,470,000

6,920,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$16,044,000

$12,770,000

1. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 19X6.

2. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 19X6.

3. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 19X6?

4. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 19X6? By what amount?

the costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several differen 492198

Product costs and period costs

The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:

1. Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker

2. Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler

3. Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile

4. Cost of president’s subscription to Fortune magazine

5. Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill

6. Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker

7. Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams

1. Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.

2. For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.

interstate manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs f 492199

Definitions of manufacturing concepts

Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:

Materials and supplies used

Brass

$75,000

Repair parts

16,000

Machine lubricants

9,000

Wages and salaries Machine operators

128,000

Production supervisors

64,000

Maintenance personnel

41,000

Other factory overhead Variable

35,000

Fixed

46,000

Sales commissions

20,000

1. Total direct materials consumed

2. Total direct labor

3. Total prime cost

4. Total conversion cost

tampa foundry began operations during the current year manufacturing various product 492200

Manufacturing statements and cost behavior

Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.

Per Unit

Variable Cost

Fixed Cost

Direct materials

$4.50

$ —

Direct labor

6.5

Factory overhead

9

50,000

Selling

70,000

Administrative

135,000

Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.

Instructions:

1. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.

2. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31

3. On the basis of the information presented:

1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.

2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?

acc561 pender has prepared the following list of statements about decision making an 492201

Pender has prepared the following list of statements about decision making and incremental analysis.

Identify each statement as true or false. For every false statement identified above indicate how to correct the statement.

1. The first step in management’s decision-making process is, “Determine and evaluate possible courses of action.”

2. The final step in management’s decision-making process is to actually make the decision.

3. Accounting’s contribution to management’s decision-making process occurs primarily in evaluating possible courses of action and in reviewing the results.

4. In making business decisions, management ordinarily considers only financial information because it is objectively determined.

5. Decisions involve a choice among alternative courses of action.

6. The process used to identify the financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called incremental analysis.

7. Costs that are the same under all alternative courses of action sometimes affect the decision.

8. When using incremental analysis, some costs will always change under alternative courses of action, but revenues will not.

9. Variable costs will change under alternative courses of action, but fixed costs will not.

acc561 collins systems inc is trying to develop an asset financing plan the firm has 492202

Conservative versus aggressive financing

Collins Systems, Inc., is trying to develop an asset-financing plan. The firm has $300,000 in temporary current assets and $200,000 in permanent current assets. Collins also has $400,000 in fixed assets.

a. Construct two alternative financing plans for the firm. One of the plans should be conservative, with 80 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the rest financed by short-term sources. The other plan should be aggressive, with only 30 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the remaining assets financed by short-term sources. The current interest rate is 15 percent on long-term funds and 10 percent on short-term financing. Compute the annual interest payments under each plan.

b.Given that Collins’s earnings before interest and taxes are $180,000, calculate earnings after taxes for each of your alternatives. Assume a tax rate of 40 percent.

on july 23 of the current year dakota mining co pays 4 836 000 for land estimated to 492204

On July 23 of the current year, Dakota Mining Co. pays $4,836,000 for land estimated to contain 7,800,000 tons of recoverable ore. It installs machinery costing $390,000 that has a 10-year life and no salvage value and is capable of mining the ore deposit in eight years.

The machinery is paid for on July 25, seven days before mining operations begin.

The company removes and sells 400,000 tons of ore during its first five months of operations ending on December 31. Depreciation of the machinery is in proportion to the mine’s depletion as the machinery will be abandoned after the ore is mined.

Required:

Prepare entries to record (a) the purchase of the land, (b) the cost and installation of machinery, (c) the first five months’ depletion assuming the land has a net salvage value of zero after the ore is mined, and (d) the first five months’ depreciation on the machinery.

on january 1 2011 randall construction decided to change from the completed contract 492205

On January 1, 2011, Randall Construction decided to change from the completed contract method of accounting for long-term construction contracts to the percentage-of-completion method. The company will continue to use the completed contract method for tax purposes.

The tax rate is 30%. The following are all relevant data concerning the change.

Year

Income before income tax % of Completion

Completed Contract

Before 2010

500,000

300,000

2010

400,000

250,000

2011

450,000

400,000

Required:

(1.) Prepare the journal entry to record the accounting change.

(2.) Determine the net income to be reported in the 2011-2010 comparative income statements.

manilow corporation operates in an industry that has a high rate of bad debts before 492206

(Bad-debt reporting – Aging).

Manilow Corporation operates in an industry that has a high rate of bad debts. Before any year-end adjustments, the balance in Manilow’s AR account was $555,000 and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a credit balance of $40,000. The year-end balance reported in the balance sheet for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts will be based on the aging schedule shown below.

Days Account Outstanding

Amount

Probability of Collection

Less than 16 days

300,000

98%

Between 16 and 30 days

100,000

90%

Between 31 and 45 days

80,000

85%

Between 46 and 60 days

40,000

80%

Between 61 and 75 days

20,000

55%

Over 75 days 15,000

0%

Instructions:

a) What is the appropriate balance for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at year-end?

b) Show how AR would be presented on the balance sheet.

c) What is the dollar effect of the year-end bad debt adjustment on the before-tax income?

maria chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and b 492207

Analysis of Mixed Costs in a Pricing Decision

Maria Chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and business functions. Chavez’s business is seasonal, with a heavy schedule during the summer months and holidays and a lighter schedule at other times. One of the major events Chavez’s customers request is a cocktail party. She offers a standard cocktail party and has estimated the cost per guest as follows:

Food and beverages 15.00

Labor (0.5 hrs. @ $10.00/hr.) 5.00

Overhead (0.5 hrs. @ $13.98/hr.) 6.99

Total cost per guest $26.99

The standard cocktail party lasts three hours and Chavez hires one worker for every six guests, so that works out to one-half hour of labor per guest. These workers are hired only as needed and are paid only for the hours they actually work.

When bidding on cocktail parties, Chavez adds a 15% markup to yield a price of about $31per guest. She is confident about her estimates of the costs of food and beverages and labor but is not as comfortable with the estimate of overhead cost. The $13.98 overhead cost per labor-hour was determined by dividing total overhead expenses for the last 12 months by total labor-hours for the same period. Monthly data concerning overhead costs and labor-hours follow:

maria chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and b 492208

Analysis of Mixed Costs in a Pricing Decision

Maria Chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and business functions. Chavez’s business is seasonal, with a heavy schedule during the summer months and holidays and a lighter schedule at other times. One of the major events Chavez’s customers request is a cocktail party. She offers a standard cocktail party and has estimated the cost per guest as follows:

Food and beverages 15.00

Labor (0.5 hrs. @ $10.00/hr.) 5.00

Overhead (0.5 hrs. @ $13.98/hr.) 6.99

Total cost per guest $26.99

The standard cocktail party lasts three hours and Chavez hires one worker for every six guests, so that works out to one-half hour of labor per guest. These workers are hired only as needed and are paid only for the hours they actually work.

When bidding on cocktail parties, Chavez adds a 15% markup to yield a price of about $31per guest. She is confident about her estimates of the costs of food and beverages and labor but is not as comfortable with the estimate of overhead cost. The $13.98 overhead cost per labor-hour was determined by dividing total overhead expenses for the last 12 months by total labor-hours for the same period. Monthly data concerning overhead costs and labor-hours follow:

Month

Labor- Hours

Overhead Expenses

January

2,500

55,000

February

2,800

59,000

March

3,000

60,000

April

4,200

64,000

May

4,500

67,000

June

5,500

71,000

July

6,500

74,000

August

7,500

77,000

September

7,000

75,000

October

4,500

68,000

November

3,100

62,000

December

6,500

73,000

Total

57,600

$805,000

Chavez has received a request to bid on a 180-guest fund-raising cocktail party to be given next month by an important local charity. (The party would last the usual three hours.) She would like to win this contract because the guest list for this charity event includes many prominent individuals that she would like to land as future clients. Maria is confident that these potential customers would be favorably impressed by her company’s services at the charity event.

Required:

1. Estimate the contribution to profit of a standard 180-guest cocktail party if Chavez charges her usual price of $31 per guest. (In other words, by how much would her overall profit increase?)

2. How low could Chavez bid for the charity event in terms of a price per guest and still not lose money on the event itself?

3. The individual who is organizing the charity’s fund-raising event has indicated that he has already received a bid under $30 from another catering company. Do you think Chavez should bid below her normal $31 per guest price for the charity event? Why or why not?

the following data are the actual results for marvelous marshmallow company for octo 492209

Straightforward Computation of Overhead Variances

The following data are the actual results for Marvelous Marshmallow Company for October.

Actual output 9,000 cases

Actual variable overhead

405,000

Actual fixed overhead

122,000

Actual machine time

40,500 machine hours

Standard cost and budget information for Marvelous Marshmallow Company follows:

Standard variable-overhead rate $9.00 per machine hour Standard quantity of machine hours 4 hours per case of marshmallows Budgeted fixed overhead $120,000 per month Budgeted output 10,000 cases per month

Required:

1. Use any of the methods explained in the chapter to compute the following variances.

Indicate whether each variance is favorable or unfavorable, where appropriate.

a. Variable-overhead spending variance.

b. Variable-overhead efficiency variance.

c. Fixed-overhead budget variance.

d. Fixed-overhead volume variance.

2. Build a spreadsheet: Construct an Excel spreadsheet to solve the preceding requirement. Show how the solution will change if the following information changes: actual output was 9,100 cases, and actual variable overhead was $395,000.

gunflint adventures operates an airplane service that takes fishing parties to a rem 492210

Gunflint Adventures operates an airplane service that takes fishing parties to a remote lake resort in North Manitoba, Canada. Individuals must purchase their tickets at least one month in advance during the busy summer season. The company adjusts its accounts only once each month.

Selected balances appearing in the company’s June 30 adjusted trail balance appear as follows:

Debit

Credit

Prepaid airport rent

$7,200

Unexpired insurance

3,500

Airplane

240,000

Accumulated Depreciation – Airplane

$36,000

Unearned passenger revenue

90,000

Other Information

1. The airplane is being depreciated over a 20-year life with no residual value.

2. Unearned passenger revenue represents advance ticket sales for bookings in July and August at $300 per ticket.

3. Six months airport rent had been prepaid on May 1.

4. The unexpired insurance is what remains of a 12-month policy purchased on February 1.

5. Passenger revenue earned in June totaled $75,000.

Instructions:

A. Determine the following

1. The age of the airplane in months

2. The monthly airport expense

3. The amount paid for the 12 month insurance policy on February 1

B. Prepare the adjusting entries made on June 30 involving the following accounts:

1. Depreciation Expense: airplane

2. Airport rent expense

3. Insurance expense

4. Passenger revenue earned

optix international is considering a significant expansion to its product line the s 492211

Optix International is considering a significant expansion to its product line. The sales force is excited about the opportunities that the new products will bring. The new products are a significant step up in quality above the company’s current offerings, but offer a complementary fit to its existing product line. Frank Renolds, senior production department manager, is very excited about the high-tech new equipment that will have to be acquired to produce the new products. Carol Fischer, the company’s CFO, has provided the following projections based on results with and without the new products.

Without New Products

With New Products

Sales

10,000,000

18,000,000

Net income

800,000

1,800,000

Average total assets

5,000,000

15,000,000

Instructions

(a) Compute the company’s return on assets ratio, profit margin ratio, and asset turnover ratio, both with and without the new product line.

(b) Discuss the implications that your findings in part (a) have for the company’s decision

for each of these five separate cases identify the principles of internal control th 492212

Analyzing Internal Control

For each of these five separate cases, identify the principles of internal control that is violated. recommend what the business should do to ensure adherence to principles of internal control.

1. Heather Flatt records all incoming customer cash receipts for her employer and posts the customer payments to their respective accounts.

2. At Netco Company, Jeff and Jose alternate lunch hours. Jeff is the petty cash custodian, but if someone needs petty cash when he is at lunch, jose fills in as custodian.

3. Nadine Cox posts all patient charges and payments at the Dole Medical Clinic. Each night Nadine backs up the computerized accounting system to a tape and stores the tape in a locked file at her desk.

4. Barto Sayles prides himself on hiring quality workers who require little supervision. As office manager, Barto gives his employees full discretion over their tasks and for years has seen no reason to perform independent reviews of their work.

5. Desi West’s manager has told her to reduce costs, Desi decides to raise the deductible on the plant’s property insurance from $5,000 to $10,000. This cuts the property insurance premium in half. In a related move, she decides that bonding the plant’s employees is a waste of money since the company has not experienced any losses due to employee theft.

Desi saves the entire amount of the bonding insurance premium by dropping the bonding insurance.

acc206 evaluate the comments that follow as being true or false if the comment is fa 492214

Overview of direct and indirect methods

Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.

a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities. n

b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.

c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.

d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.

e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.

acc206 equipment transaction and cash flow reporting 492215

Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting

Property, plant, & equipment

Dec. 31, 20X4

Dec. 31, 20X3

Land

94,000

94,000

Equipment

652,000

527,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

(316,000)

(341,000)

New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.

a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.

b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.

c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.

acc206 the comparative year end balance sheets of sign graphics inc revealed the fol 492216

Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods

The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:

20X5

20X4

Increase / (Decrease)

Current assets

Cash

55,400

35,200

20,200

Accounts receivable (net)

83,800

88,000

(4,200)

Inventory

243,400

233,800

9,600

Prepaid expenses

25,400

24,200

1,200

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

123,600

140,600

(17,000)

Taxes payable

43,600

49,200

(5,600)

Interest payable

9,000

6,400

2,600

Accrued liabilities

38,800

60,400

(21,600)

Note payable

44,000

44,000

The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.

SIGN GRAPHICS INC.

Income Statement

for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5

Sales

713,800

Less: Cost of goods sold

323,000

Gross profit

390,800

Less: Selling & administrative expenses

186,000

Depreciation expense

17,000

Interest expense

27,000

230,000

160,800

Add: gain on sale of land

21,800

Income before taxes

182,600

Income taxes

36,800

Net income

145,800

Other data:

1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.

2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.

3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.

4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.

5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.

6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.

Instructions:

a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:

1. The direct method.

2. The indirect method.

b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.

acc206 mary lynn corporation has been operating for several years selected data from 492217

Horizontal analysis.

Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

20X2

20X1

Current Assets

76,000

80,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

99,000

90,000

Intangibles

25,000

50,000

Current Liabilities

40,800

48,000

Long-Term Liabilities

143,000

160,000

Stockholders’ Equity

16,200

12,000

Net Sales

500,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

332,500

350,000

Operating Expenses

93,500

85,000

Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

acc206 a review of selected financial activities of visconti s during 20xx disclosed 492218

Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.

A review of selected financial activities of Visconti’s during 20XX disclosed the following:

1-Dec Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.

Interest and principal are due at maturity.

10-Feb Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.

22-Dec Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.

26-Dec Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.

31-Dec Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.

31-Dec Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest.

c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Visconti’s balance sheet as of December 31.

Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

abram haas and tidwell formed a partnership to practice law by combining their respe 492164

Investment by partners; financial statements.

Abram, Haas, and Tidwell formed a partnership to practice law by combining their respective sole proprietorships. The assets and liabilities contributed to the firm on January 2, 19X4, the date of formation, follow.

Book Value

Fair Market Value

Abram

Land

40,000

115,000

Mortgage payable

38,000

38,000

Haas

Office supplies

42,000

30,000

Office equipment

64,000

48,000

Tidwell

Cash

50,000

50,000

Accounts

20,000

18,000

Short-term investments

4,000

4,000

Instructions:

a. Prepare journal entries to record the investments of Abram, Haas, Tidwell in the new partnership.

b. Prepare a classified balance sheet for the partnership immediately after the investments are recorded.

c. The partners share profits and losses equally, and the first year’s n income was $66,000.

Cash withdrawals of $5,000 were made by Abram,$22,000 by Haas, and $17,000 by Tidwell. Prepare the December 31 19X4, statement of partners’ equity for the firm.

set up the following headings across a piece of paper 492166

Analysis of transactions.

Set up the following headings across a piece of paper:

Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity

By using “+” and “-,” indicate the effect of each of the following transactions on total assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity:

a. Processed a $5,000 cash withdrawal for the owner.

b. Recorded the receipt of May’s utility bill, to be paid in June.

c. Provided services to customers on account.

d. Paid the current month’s advertising charges.

e. Purchased a $27,000 delivery truck by paying $5,000 down and securing a loan for the remaining balance.

f. Received $11,000 cash from the owner as an investment in the business.

g. Returned a new computer and printer purchased earlier in the month on account. The bill had not as yet been paid.

h. Paid the utility bill recorded previously in (b).

the following data relate to preston company as of december 31 19xx 492167

Balance sheet preparation.

The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 19XX:

Building

44,000

Accounts receivable

24,000

Cash

17,000

Loan payable

30,000

J.Preston,

65,000

Land

21,000

Accounts

?

Prepare a balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 19XX.

the following information is taken from the accounting records of grimball cardiolog 492168

Statement preparation

The following information is taken from the accounting records of Grimball Cardiology at the close of business on December 31, 19X1:

Accounts payable

14,700

Surgery revenue

175,000

Surgical expenses

80,000

Cash

60,000

Surgical equipment

37,000

Office Equipment

118,000

Salaries expense

30,000

Rent expense

15,000

Accounts receivable

135,000

Loan payable

10,300

Utilities expense

5,000

All equipment was acquired just prior to year-end. Conversations with the practice’s bookkeeper revealed the data that follow.

Rose Grimball, capital (January 1, 19X1)

300,000

19X1 owner investments

2,000

19X1 owner withdrawals

22,000

Instructions

a. Prepare the income statement for Grimball Cardiology in good form.

b. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity in good form.

c. Prepare Grimball’s balance sheet in good form.

the following items appeared in the accounting records of triguero s a retail music 492169

Recognition of normal balances

The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.

a. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.

b. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.

c. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.

d. Daily receipts for merchandise sold,

e. Amounts due from customers,

f. Land held as an investment,

g. A new fax machine purchased for office use.

h. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers,

i. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.

the following transactions pertain to the jennifer royall company 492170

Basic journal entries

The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:

Apr. 1 Received cash of $15,000 and land valued at $10,000 from Jennifer Royall as an investment in the business.

5 Provided $1,200 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client. Ratchford agreed to pay $800 in 15 days and the remaining amount in May.

9 Paid $250 of salaries to an employee.

14 Acquired a new computer for $3,200; Royall will pay the dealer in May.

20 Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on April 5.

24 Borrowed $7,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.

Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.

on january 1 of the current year muniserv began operations with 100 000 cash 492171

Journal entry preparation

On January 1 of the current year, MuniServ began operations with $100,000 cash. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $70,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company acquired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($15,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $20,000 (an account payable) by February 15.

During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the following items: Purchases of store equipment 4,600

Loan payment, including $100 interest 500

Salaries expense 2,300

Advertising expense 700

The January utilities bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid on February 10. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month-end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.

Instructions

a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $100,000 raised from the owner investment and loan.

b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account.

c. Determine the amount that would be shown on the January 31 trial balance for Accounts Payable. Is the balance a debit or a credit?

hawaii blue began business on january 1 of the current year and offers deep sea fish 492173

Accounting for prepaid expenses and unearned revenues.

Hawaii-Blue began business on January 1 of the current year and offers deep sea fishing trips to tourists. Tourists pay $125 in advance for an all-day outing off the coast of Maui.

The company collected monies during January for 210 outings, with 30 of the tourists not planning to take their trips until early February. Hawaii-Blue rents its fishing boat from Pacific Yacht Supply. An agreement was signed at the beginning of the year, and $72,000 was paid for the rights to use the boat for two full years.

a. Prepare journal entries to record (1) the collection of monies from tourists and (2) the revenue generated during January.

b. Calculate Hawaii-Blue’s total obligation to tourists at the end of January. On what financial statement and in which section would this amount appear?

the following information is available to assist you in preparing a bank reconciliat 492174

Bank Reconciliation

The following information is available to assist you in preparing a bank reconciliation for Calico Corners on May 31, 2012:

a. The balance on the May 31, 2012, bank statement is $8,432.11.

b. Not included on the bank statement is a $1,250 deposit made by Calico Corners late on May 31.

c. A comparison between the canceled checks returned with the bank statement and the company records indicated that the following checks are outstanding at May 31:

No. 123

23.40

No. 127

145.00

No. 128

210.80

No. 130

67.32

d. The cash account on the company’s books shows a balance of $ 9,965.34.

e. The bank acts as a collection agency for interest earned on some municipal bonds held by Calico Corners. The May bank statement indicates interest of $465.00 earned during the month.

f. Interest earned on the checking account and added to Calico Corners’ account during May was $54.60. Miscellaneous bank service charges amounted to $50.00.

g. A customer’s NSF check in the amount of $166.00 was returned with the May bank statement.

h. A comparison between the deposits listed on the bank statement and the company books revealed that a customer’s check in the amount of $123.45 was recorded on the books during May but was never added to the company’s account. The bank erroneously added the check to the account of Calico Closet, which has an account at the same bank.

i. The comparison of deposits per the bank statement with those per the books revealed that another customer’s check in the amount of $101.10 was correctly added to the company’s account. In recording the check on the company’s books, however, the accountant erroneously increased the Cash account by $1,011.00

Required:

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation in good form.

2. Record the necessary journal entries on the company’s books resulting from the bank reconciliation prepared in part (1) above.

3. A friend says to you: “I don’t know why companies bother to prepare bank reconciliations it seems a waste of time. Why don’t they just do like I do and adjust the Cash account for any difference between what the bank shows as a balance and what shows up in the books?” Explain to your friend why a bank reconciliation should be prepared as soon as a bank statement is received.

edison stagg and thornton have the following financial information at the close of b 492176

Liquidity ratios.

Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

Edison

Stagg

Thornton

Cash

4,000

2,500

1,000

Short-term investments

3,000

2,500

2,000

Accounts receivable

2,000

2,500

3,000

Inventory

1,000

2,500

4,000

Prepaid expenses

800

800

800

Accounts payable

200

200

200

Notes payable: short-term

3,100

3,100

3,100

Accrued payables

300

300

300

Long-term liabilities

3,800

3,800

3,800

a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

b. Suppose Thornton is using FIFO for inventory valuation and Edison is using LIFO.

Comment on the comparability of information between these two companies.

c. If all short-term notes payable are due on July 11 at 8 a.m., comment on each company’s ability to settle its obligation in a timely manner.

digital relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding the com pany reported 492178

Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.

Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:

Net sales

1,500,000

Interest expense

120,000

Income tax expense

80,000

Preferred dividends

25,000

Net income

130,000

Average assets

1,100,000

Average common stockholders’ equity

400,000

a. Compute the profit margin on sales and the rates of return on assets and common stockholders’ equity, rounding calculations to two decimal places.

b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly explain.

the inventory of oheto company on december 31 2011 consists of the following items 492179

The inventory of Oheto Company on December 31, 2011, consists of the following items.

Part

No. Quantity

Cost Per Unit

Cost Per Unit

110

600

$95

$100

111

1,000

60

52

112

500

80

76

113

200

170

180

120

400

205

208

121

1,600

16

14

122

300

240

235

Part No. 121 is obsolete and has a realizable value of each as scrap: $0.50

Instructions:

Complete the table above by inserting the correct values or formulas into the yellow highlighted cells. From this data, answer the following two questions:

a. Determine the inventory as of December 31, 2011, by the lower-of-cost-ormarket method, applying this method directly to each item.

b. Determine the inventory by the lower-of-cost-or-market method, applying the method to the total of the inventory.

allegro supply company a newly formed corporation incurred the following expenditure 492180

Allegro Supply Company, a newly formed corporation, incurred the following expenditures related to Land, to Buildings, and to Machinery and Equipment.

Abstract company’s fee for title search

608

Architect’s fees

3,709

Cash paid for land and dilapidated building thereon

107,640

Removal of old building

23,400

Less: Salvage

6,435

16,965

Interest on short-term loans during construction

8,658

Excavation before construction for basement

22,230

Machinery purchased (subject to 2% cash discount, which was not taken)

76,050

Freight on machinery purchased

1,568

Storage charges on machinery, necessitated by noncompletion of building when machinery was delivered

2,551

New building constructed (building construction took 6 months from date of purchase of land and old building)

567,450

Assessment by city for drainage project

1,872

Hauling charges for delivery of machinery from storage to new building

725

Installation of machinery

2,340

Trees, shrubs, and other landscaping after completion of building

(permanent in nature)

6,318

Determine the amounts that should be debited to Land, to Buildings, and to Machinery and Equipment. Assume the benefits of capitalizing interest during construction exceed the cost of implementation.

sunflower architects incorporated as licensed architects on april 1 2010 492181

Sunflower Architects incorporated as licensed architects on April 1, 2010. During the first month of the operation of the business, these events and transactions occurred:

1-Apr Stockholders invested $15,000 cash in exchange for common stock of the corporation.

1 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $375 per week, payable monthly.

2 Paid office rent for the month $900.

3 Purchased architectural supplies on account from Spring Green Company $1,000.

10 Completed blueprints on a carport and billed client $1,500 for services.

11 Received $500 cash advance from J. Madison to design a new home.

20 Received $2,300 cash for services completed and delivered to M. Svetlana.

30 Paid secretary-receptionist for the month $1,500.

30 Paid $300 to Spring Green Company for accounts payable due.

Instructions:

(a) Journalize the transactions, including explanations. (If no entry is required type No entry for the account and 0 for the amount.)

(b) Post to the ledger T accounts.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

acc206 cleveland metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to produ 492184

Cost flows and overhead application

Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.

• Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.

• Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.

• Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.

• The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.

a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.

b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.

acc206 manufacturing corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours the 492185

Overhead application: Working backward

The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:

Division A

Division B

Actual machine hours

22,500

?

Estimated machine hours

20,000

?

Overhead application rate

$4.50

Actual overhead

$110,000

$4.50

Estimated overhead

?

?

Applied overhead

?

$86,000

Over- (under-) applied overhead

?

$6,500

FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.

acc206 the treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event which will be hel 492187

The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:

Room rental

$300

Dinner cost (per person)

25

Chartered buses

500

Favors and souvenirs (per person)

5

Band

900

Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.

a. Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.

b. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?

c. Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.

acc206 fast delivery is a small company that transports business packages between ne 492193

Using present value techniques to evaluate alternative investment opportunities

Fast Delivery is a small company that transports business packages between New York and Chicago. It operates a fleet of small vans that moves packages to and from a central depot within each city and uses a common carrier to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. Fast Delivery recently acquired approximately $6million of cash capital from it owners, and its president, Don is trying to identify the most profitable way to invest these funds.

1. One manager believes that the money should be used to expand the fleet of city van at a cost of $720.000. He argues that more vans would enable the company to expand its services into new markets, thereby increasing the revenue base. More specifically he expects cash inflow to increase by $280,000 per year. The additional vans are expected to have an average useful life of four years and a combined salvage value of $100,00 Operating the vans will require additional working capital of $40,000 which will be recovered at the end of the fourth year.

2. In contrast, the company chief accountant, believes that the funds should be used to purchased large trucks to deliver the package between the depots in the two cities. The conversion process would produce continuing improvement in operating saving with reductions in cash outflow as the following.

Year 1, $160,000, Year 2, $320,000, Year 3, $400,000, Year 4, $440,000.

The large trucks are expect to cost $800,000 and to have a 4 year useful life ans a $80,000 salvage value. the training cost are expect to amount to $16,000 Fast Delivery management has established a 16 percent desired rate of return.

Required:

a. Determine the net present value of the two investment alternatives

b. Calculate the present value index for each alternative.

c. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.

acc206 louis gallo owns a small retail ice cream parlor he is considering expanding 492194

Using the payback period and unadjusted rate of return to evaluate the alternative investment opportunities

Louis Gallo owns a small retail ice cream parlor. He is considering expanding the business and has identified two attractive alternatives. One involves purchasing a machine that would enable Mr. Gallo to offer frozen yogurt to customers. The machine would cost $8,100 and has an expected useful life of three years with no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling yogurt are expected to be $5,940 and $900, respectively. Alternatively, Mr. Gallo could purchase for $10,080 the equipment necessary to serve cappuccino. That equipment has an expected useful life of four years and no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling cappuccino are expected to be $8,280 and $2,430, respectively. Income before taxes earned by the ice cream parlor is taxed at an effective rate of 20 percent.

Required:

a. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate of return ( use average investment) for each alternative.

b. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.

acc206 veronica tanner the president of tanner enterprises is considering two invest 492195

Using net present value and internal rate of return to evaluate investment opportunities

Veronica Tanner, the president of Tanner Enterprises, is considering two investment opportunities. Because of limited resources, she will be able to invest in only one of them.

Project A is to purchase a machine that will enable factory automation; the machine is expected to have a useful life of four years and no salvage value. Project B supports a training program that will improve the skills of employees operating the current equipment.

Initial cash expenditures for Project A are $ 100,000 and for Project B are $ 40,000. The annual expected cash inflows are $ 31,487 for Project A and $ 13,169 for Project B. Both investments are expected to provide cash flow benefits for the next four years. Tanner Enterprise’s cost of capital is 8 percent.

Required

a. Compute the net present value of each project. Which project should be adopted based on the net present value approach?

b. Compute the approximate internal rate of return of each project. Which one should be adopted based on the internal rate of return approach?

c. Compare the net present value approach with the internal rate of return approach. Which method is better in the given circumstances? Why?

acc505 manning co manufactures and sells trophies for winners of athletic and other 492127

Manning Co. manufactures and sells trophies for winners of athletic and other events. Its manufacturing plant has the capacity to produce 18,000 trophies each month; current monthly production is 15,300 trophies. The company normally charges $141 per trophy. Cost data for the current level of production are shown below.

Variable Costs

Direct Materials

$948,600

Direct Labor

$290,700

Selling and Administrative

$41,300

Fixed Costs

Manufacturing

$579,870

Selling and Administrative

$134,640

The company has just received a special one-time order for 900 trophies at $73 each. For this particular order, no variable selling and administrative costs would be incurred. This order would also have no effect on fixed costs.

Required:

Should the company accept this special order? Why?

acc505 you re the accountant in charge of the collection of receivables for the duns 492128

You’re the accountant in charge of the collection of receivables for the Dunstone Company. An analysis of the year-end receivables shows the following:

Time Interval

Amount

Estimated Percentage Uncollectible

Not yet due

18,000

3%

1–30 days past due

21,000

5%

31–60 days past due

8,000

10%

61–90 days past due

3,000

20%

Over 90 days past due

2,500

40%

52,500

You’re to prepare an entry to adjust the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts to the proper balance using the aging of accounts receivable method. The credit balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account before adjustment is $500.

The correct journal entry is:

A. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 4,490

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 4,490

B. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 4,240

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 4,240

C. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 3,990

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,990

D. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 3,490

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,490

acc505 presented below is information related to rembrandt inc s inventory 492129

Presented below is information related to Rembrandt Inc.’s inventory.

(per unit)

Skis

Boots

Parkas

Historical cost

275.31

153.59

76.80

Selling price

314.43

210.11

106.86

Cost to distribute

27.53

11.59

3.62

Current replacement cost

294.15

152.15

73.90

Normal profit margin

46.37

42.02

30.79

Determine the following:

a. the two limits to market value (e.g., the ceiling and the floor) that should be used in the lower of cost or market computation for skis; (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)

b. the cost amount that should be used in the lower of cost or market comparison of boots; (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)

c. the market amount that should be used to value parkas on the basis of the lower of cost or market. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)

acc505 esplanade company was formed on december 1 2010 the following information is 492131

(FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost Inventory)

Esplanade Company was formed on December 1, 2010. The following information is available from Esplanade’s inventory records for Product BAP.

Units

Unit Cost

January 1, 2010 (beginning inventory)

600

8.00

Purchases:

January 5, 2010

1,100

9.00

January 25, 2010

1,300

10.00

February 6, 2010

800

11.00

March 26, 2010

600

12.00

A physical inventory on March 31, 2010, shows 1,500 units on hand.

Required:

Prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at March 31, 2010, under each of the following inventory methods. Assume Esplanade Company uses the periodic inventory method.

(a) FIFO

(b) LIFO

(c) Weighted average

akron inc owns all outstanding stock of toledo corporation amortization expense of 1 492132

(Prepare consolidated income statement with a wholly owned subsidiary, includes transfers)

Akron Inc., owns all outstanding stock of Toledo Corporation. Amortization expense of $15,000, per year for patented technology resulted from the original acquisition. For 2011, the companies had the following account balances:

Akron

Toledo

Sales

1,100,000

600,000

Cost of goods

500,000

400,000

Operating expenses

400,000

220,000

Investment income

not given

Dividends paid

80,000

30,000

Intra-entity sales of $320,000 occurred during 2010 and again in 2011. This merchandise cost $240,000 each year. Of the total transfers, $70,000 was still held on December 31, 2010, with $50,000 unsold on December 31, 2011.

a. In this business combination, the direction of the intercompany transfers (either upstream or downstream) is not important to the consolidated totals. Because Akron controls all of Toledo’s outstanding stock, no non controlling interest figures are computed.

If present, non-controlling interest balances are affected by upstream sales but not by downstream.

b. By including the impact of each of these four consolidation entries, the following income statement can be created from the individual account balances:

on january 1 2010 doone corporation acquired 60 percent of the outstanding voting st 492133

Consolidation entries and noncontrolling interest balances affected by inventory transfers

On January 1, 2010, Doone Corporation acquired 60 percent of the outstanding voting stock of Rockne Company for $300,000 consideration. At the acquisition date, the fair value of the 40 percent non-controlling interest was $200,000 and Rockne’s assets and liabilities had a collective net fair value of $500,000. Doone uses the equity method in its internal records to account for its investments in Rockne. Rockne reports net income of $160,000 in 2011. Since being acquired Rockne has regularly supplied inventory to Doone at 25 percent more than cost. Sales to Doone amounted to $250,000 in 2010 and $300,000 in 2011. Approximately 30 percent of the inventory purchased during any one year is not used until the following year.

a. What is the non-controlling interest’s share of Rockne’s 2011 income?

b. Prepare Doone’s 2011 consolidation entries required by the intra-entity inventory transfers.

centron inc has the following budgeted production costs 492134

Basic flexible budgeting

Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:

Direct materials

$0.40 per unit

Direct labor

1.80 per unit

Variable factory overhead

2.20 per unit

Fixed factory overhead

24,000

Supervision

18,000

Maintenance

12,000

The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter.

Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.

During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:

Direct Materials

10,710

Direct Labor

47,175

Variable factory overhead

51,940

Fixed factory overhead

Supervision

24,500

Maintenance

23,700

Other

16,800

Total production costs

174,825

Instructions:

a. Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.

b. Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare

an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.

c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the

measurement of performance.

arrow enterprises uses a standard costing system the standard cost sheet for product 492135

Straightforward variance analysis

Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.

Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50

26.00

Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50

68.00

Variable factory overhead: 8 hours @$7.00

56.00

Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours @2.5

20.00

Total standard cost per unit

170.00

The following information pertains to activity for December:

1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit.

All materials were consumed in operations.

2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.

3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.

4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.

a. Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.

b. Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.

c. Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.

rpr inc anticipates that 120 000 units of product k will be sold during may 492136

Production and cash-outlay computations

RPR, Inc., anticipates that 120,000 units of product K will be sold during May. Each unit of product K requires four units of raw material A. Actual inventories as of May 1 and budgeted inventories as of May 31 follow:

1-May 31-May

Product K (Units)

55,000

60,000

Rate Materials A (Units)

40,000

37,000

Each unit of raw material A costs $8; RPR pays for all purchases in the month of acquisition. Invoices that account for 80% of the cost of materials acquired will be paid within 10 days of receipt, entitling the company to a 2% cash discount.

a. Determine the number of units of product K to be manufactured in May.

b. Compute the May cash outlay for purchases of raw material A.

stl entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight seeing boat for summer t 492139

Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations

STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:

Cost of boat

$500,000

Service life

10 summer seasons

Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons

$100,000

Capacity per trip

300 passengers

Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)

$160,000

Variable operating costs per trip

$1,000

Ticket price

$5 per passenger

All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.

the city of bedford is studying a 600 acre site on route 356 for a new landfill the 492142

Straightforward net present value and internal rate of return

The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:

Purchase cost:

$450 per acre

Site preparation:

$175,000

The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.

Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.

on january 2 20×1 bruce greene invested 10 000 in the stock market and purchased 500 492143

Cash flow calculations and net present value

On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.

a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.

b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.

c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.

alliance company manufactures two products brushes and combs the overhead costs have 492144

Alliance Company manufactures two products (brushes and combs). The overhead costs have been divided into four cost pools that use the following activity drivers.

# of Setups

Brushes 30

Combs 10

Cost per Pool 20,000

Required

a. Compute the overhead rates for each of the overhead pools and activity drivers listed.

b. Allocate (assign) the overhead costs to Products Brushes and Combs using activitybased costing.

c. Compute the overhead rate using machine hours under the functional-based costing system (also called plant-wide rate or normal costing).

d. Allocate the overhead costs to Products Brushes and Combs using the functional-based costing system overhead rate calculated in part (c).

recently its main competitor reduced the price of its product to 48 492145

A company’s sales volume averages 4,000 units per year.

Recently, its main competitor reduced the price of its product to $48.

The company expects sales to drop dramatically unless it matches the competitor’s price.

In addition, the current profit per unit must be maintained.

Information about the product (for production of 4,000) is as follows.

Standard Quantity

Actual Quantity

Actual Cost

Materials (pounds)

5,800

6,000

60,000

Labor (hours)

1,800

2,000

20,000

Setups (hours) –

225

8,000

Material handling

400

5,000

Warranties (number

300

15,000

The current selling

Required

a. Calculate the target cost for maintaining current market share and profitability.

b. Calculate the non-value-added cost per unit.

c. If non-value-added costs can be reduced to zero, can the target cost be achieved?

the peace company has the following functional income statement for the prior month 492146

The Peace Company has the following functional income statement for the prior month.

Sales ($50 * 100,000 units)

Cost of goods sold

$5,000,000

Direct materials

$1,200,000

Direct labor

$950,000

Variable factory

$600,000

Fixed factory

$850,000

$3,600,000

Gross profit

$1,400,00

Selling and administrative expense

Variable

Fixed

Operating income

There were no beginning and ending inventories.

Required:

a. Calculate the contribution margin per unit.

b. Calculate the contribution margin ratio.

c. What is the break-even point in units?

d. What is the amount of sales in dollars needed to obtain a before-tax profit of $40,000?

mike s meats incurs costs of 4 000 while processing raw chicken meat into three prod 492149

Mike’s Meats incurs costs of $4,000 while processing raw chicken meat into three products: breasts, wings, and thighs. The meat is then sold to local grocery stores based on the following.

Sales Price per lb

Quantity produced (lbs)

Breast $2.00

$2.00

3,000

Wings $0.50

$0.50

1,000

Thighs

$1.00

2,000

Required: (Calculate relative quantity to three decimal points.)

a. Determine the cost and gross profit percentage for each type of chicken using the physical units method of joint cost allocation.

b. Repeat part (a) using the sales-value-at-split-off method of joint cost allocation.

c. The company has an opportunity to sell wings to local restaurants for $1.00 per pound but additional packaging is required, which will cost $300 per 1,000 lb. Assuming the physical unit method is used to allocate joint costs, should the offer be accepted?

wave riders surf board company began business on january 1 of the current year 492159

Inventory valuation methods. Computations and concepts.

Wave Riders Surf Board Company began business on January 1 of the current year.

Purchases of surf boards were as follows:

Jan. 3

100 boards @ $125

Mar. 17

50 boards @ $130

May 9

246 boards @ $140

July 3

400 boards @ $150

Oct. 23

74 boards @ $160

Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions:

a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:

First-in, first-out

Last-in, first-out

Weighted average

b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management’s goal is to

(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?

(2) approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer?

(3) report low earnings (for tax purposes) for a separate electronics company that has been experiencing declining purchase prices?

sentry security systems purchased 72 000 of office equipment on april 1 19×3 by sign 492160

Notes payable.

Sentry Security Systems purchased $72,000 of office equipment on April 1, 19X3, by signing a three-year, 12% note payable to Sharp, Inc. One-third of the principal, along with interest on the outstanding balance, is payable each April 1 until maturity. (The first payment is due in 19X4.)

a. Fill in the following table to reflect Sentry’s liabilities, assuming a March 31 year-end.

March 31

19X4

19X5

19X6

Current liabilities:

Current portion of long-term debt

Interest payable

Long-term liabilities:

Long-term debt

b. Assuming that interest is properly recorded at the end of each year, present the proper journal entry to record the last payment on April 1, 19X6.

red bank enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal ye 492161

Notes payable.

Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ended October 31:

Aug 2. Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note for $79,000.

20. Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 delivery truck.

The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.

Sept. 10 Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.

11. Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.

Oct. 10 The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.

11. The note to Datatex Equipment was due today, but insufficient funds were available for payment. Management authorized the issuance of a new 20-day, 18% note for $60,700, the maturity value of the original obligation.

31. The new note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.

Instructions:

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.

c. Prepare the current liability section of Red Bank’s balance sheet as of October 31.

Assume the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

the lp partnership was formed on january 1 19×7 by investments from bill levy and ma 492162

Partner investments; journal entries.

The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed various assets from a business that he had operated over the past five years. A balance sheet from that business disclosed the following:

Accounts receivable

27,000

Allowance for uncollectibles

(3,200)

Equipment

68,000

Accumulated depreciation

(24,000)

The partners confirmed that the allowance for uncollectible accounts should be decreased by $600. In addition, an independent appraisal determined that fair market values of the land and equipment on January 1 were $125,000 and $35,000, respectively.

Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.

hachey company has accounts receivable of 95 100 at march 31 2007 an analysis of the 492103

Hachey Company has accounts receivable of $95,100 at March 31, 2007. An analysis of the accounts shows these amounts.

Balance, March 31

Month of Sale

2007

2006

March

$65,000

$75,000

February

12,600

8,000

December and January

10,100

2,400

November and October

7,400

1,100

$95,100

$86,500

Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, 2007, there is a $2,200 credit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts prior to adjustments. The company uses the percentage of receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts.

Estimated Percentage

Age of Accounts

Uncollectible

Current

2%

1–30 days past due

7

31–90 days past due

30

Over 90 days

50

Instructions:

1. Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.

2. Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2007, to record bad debts expense.

3. Discuss the implications of the changes in the aging schedule from 2006 to 2007.

for several years a number of food lion inc grocery stores were unprofitable 492104

For several years, a number of Food Lion, Inc., grocery stores were unprofitable. The company closed, and continues to close, some of these locations. It is apparent that the company will not be able to recover the cost of the assets associated with the closed stores.

Thus, the current value of these impaired assets must be written down (see the Case in Point on page 381).

A recent Food Lion income statement reports a $9.5 million charge against income pertaining to the write-down of impaired assets.

Instructions:

a. Explain why Food Lion must write down the current carrying value of its unprofitable stores.

b. Explain why the recent $9.5 million charge to write down these impaired assets is considered a noncash expense.

the board of trustees at a local church is concerned about the internal accounting c 492106

The board of trustees at a local church is concerned about the internal accounting controls pertaining to the offering collections made at weekly services. They ask you to serve on a three-person audit team with the internal auditor of the university and a CPA who has just joined the church. At a meeting of the audit team and the board of trustees you learn the following.

1. The church’s board of trustees has delegated responsibility for the financial management and audit of the financial records to the finance committee. This group prepares the annual budget and approves major disbursements but is not involved in collections or recordkeeping. No audit has been made in recent years because the same trusted employee has kept church records and served as financial secretary for 15 years. The church does not carry any fidelity insurance.

2. The collection at the weekly service is taken by a team of ushers who volunteer to serve for 1 month. The ushers take the collection plates to a basement office at the rear of the church. They hand their plates to the head usher and return to the church service. After all plates have been turned in, the head usher counts the cash received. The head usher then places the cash in the church safe along with a notation of the amount counted. The head usher volunteers to serve for 3 months.

3. The next morning the financial secretary opens the safe and recounts the collection.

The secretary withholds $150 – $200 in cash, depending on the cash expenditures expected for the week, and deposits the remainder of the collections in the bank. To facilitate the deposit, church members who contribute by check are asked to make their checks payable to “Cash.”

4. Each month the financial secretary reconciles the bank statement and submits a copy of the reconciliation to the board of trustees. The reconciliations have rarely contained any bank errors and have never shown any errors per books.

Instructions

1. Indicate the weaknesses in internal accounting control in the handling of collections.

2. List the improvements in internal control procedures that you plan to make at the next meeting of the audit team for:

a. the ushers

b. the head usher

c. the financial secretary

d. the finance committee.

3. What church policies should be changed to improve internal control

hachey company has accounts receivable of 95 100 at march 31 2007 an analysis of the 492107

Hachey Company has accounts receivable of $95,100 at March 31, 2007. An analysis of the accounts shows these amounts.

Balance, March 31

Month of Sale

2007

2006

March

$65,000

$75,000

February

12,600

8,000

December and January

10,100

2,400

November and October

7,400

1,100

$95,100

$86,500

Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, 2007, there is a $2,200 credit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts prior to adjustments. The company uses the percentage of receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts.

Estimated Percentage

Age of Accounts

Uncollectible

Current

2%

1–30 days past due

7

31–90 days past due

30

Over 90 days

50

Instructions:

1. Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.

2. Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2007, to record bad debts expense.

3. Discuss the implications of the changes in the aging schedule from 2006 to 2007.

accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and direct write off metho 492108

Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and direct write-off methods, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet

On August 31, 2012, Daisy Floral Supply had a $155,000 debit balance in Accounts receivable and a $6,200 credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts. During September, Daisy made

sales on account, $590,000.

collections on account, $627,000.

write-offs of uncollectible receivables, $7,000.

Requirements

1. Journalize all September entries using the allowance method. Uncollectible account expense was estimated at 3% of credit sales. Show all September activity in Accounts receivable, Allowance for uncollectible accounts, and Uncollectible account expense (post to these T-accounts).

2. Using the same facts, assume instead that Daisy used the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible receivables. Journalize all September entries using the direct writeoff method. Post to Accounts receivable and Uncollectible account expense and show their balances at September 30, 2012.

3. What amount of uncollectible account expense would Daisy report on its September income statement under each of the two methods? Which amount better matches expense with revenue? Give your reason.

4. What amount of net accounts receivable would Daisy report on its September 30, 2012 balance sheet under each of the two methods? Which amount is more realistic? Give your reason.

accounting for uncollectible accounts aging of accounts method card sales notes rece 492109

Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method, card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue

Sleepy Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions:

2011

Jul 1 : Sold inventory to Go-Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine-month 12% note, Ignore cost of goods sold.

Oct 31: Recorded credit-and Debit-card sales for the period of 19,000.

Nov 3: Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $420.

Dec 31: Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on Go-Mart note 31: Made an Adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $14,100 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in allowance for uncollectible accounts is $10,200.

2012

Apr 1: Collected the Maturity Value of the Go- mart note.

June 23: Sold Merchandise to Appeal, Corp., receiving a 60-day, 12% note for $7,000.

Ignore cost of goods sold.

Aug 22: Appeal, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity; we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable.

Nov 16 : Loaned $23,000 cash to Creed, Inc, receiving a 90-day, 16% note.

Dec 5 : Collected in full on account from Appeal, Corp s31: Accrued the interest on the Creek, Inc, note.

Requirement:

1. Record the transactions in the journal of Sleepy recliner Chairs. Explanations are not required. ( for notes stated in days, used a 360- day year. Round to the nearest dollar).

drive and fly near an airport incurred the following cost to acquire land make land 492110

Capitalized asset cost and partial year depreciation

Drive and Fly, near an airport, incurred the following cost to acquire land, make land improvements, and construct and furnish a small building:

a. Purchase price of 3 acres of land

80,000

b. Delinquent real estate taxes on the land to be paid by Drive and fly

5,600

c. Additional dirt and earth moving

9,000

d. Title insurance on the Land acquisition

3,200

e. Fence around the boundary of the property

9,100

f. Building permit for the building

500

g. Architect fee’s for the design of the building

20,700

h. Sign near the front of the property

9,000

i. Material used to construct the building

215,000

j. Labor to construct the building

173,000

k. Interest cost on construction loan for the building

9,500

l. Parking lot on the property

29,000

m. Lights for the parking lots

11,300

n. Salary for the construction supervisor (80% to the building 20% to the parking lot and concrete walks)

80,000

o. Furniture

11,600

p. Transportation of furniture from seller to the building

2,200

q. Landscaping ( shrubs)

6,300

Drive and fly depreciates land improvement over 20 years, buildings over 40 years, and furniture over 10 years, all on a straight-line basis with zero residual value.

Requirements:

1. Set up columns for land, land improvements, building, and furniture. Show how to account for each cost by listing the cost under the correct account; determine the total cost of asset.

2. All construction was complete and the assets were placed in service on July 1. Record partial-year-depreciation for the year ended December 31.

midland telecom provides communication service in iowa nebraska the dakotas and mont 492111

Accounting for intangibles

Midland Telecom provides communication service in Iowa,Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Midland purchases goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shipley Wireless Company, which had the following.

Book value of assets

750,000

Market Value of assets

1,000,000

Liabilities

530,000

Requirements:

1. Journalize the entry to record Midland’s purchase of Shipley Wireless for $ 320,000 cash plus a $480,000 note payable.

2. What special asset does Midland’s acquisition of Shipley Wireless identify? How should Midland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shipley Wireless? Explain in detail.

specialty polymers inc processes a base chemical into plastic standard costs and act 492112

Direct Materials, Direct Labor, and Factory Overhead Cost Variance Analysis

Specialty Polymers, Inc., processes a base chemical into plastic. Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 19,000 units of product were as follows:

Standard Costs

Actual Costs

Direct materials

2,500 lbs at $8.10

2,440 lbs at $8.30

Direct labor

3,800 hrs at $17.50

3,750 hrs at $17.68

Factory overhead

Rates per direct labor hr

Based on 100% of normal capacity of 3,900 direct labor hrs:

Variable cost $2.20

$8,100 variable cost

Fixed cost $3.50

$13,650 fixed cost

Each unit requires 0.2 hour of direct labor.

Required:

a. Determine the price variance, quantity variance, and total direct materials cost variance.

Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

b. Determine the rate variance, time variance, and total direct labor cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

c. Determine variable factory overhead Controllable Variance, the fixed factory overhead volume variance, and total factory overhead cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.

copa company a manufacturer of stereo systems started its production in october 2012 492113

Copa Company, a manufacturer of stereo systems, started its production in October 2012.

For the preceding 3 years Copa had been a retailer of stereo systems. After a thorough survey of stereo system markets, Copa decided to turn its retail store into a stereo equipment factory.

Raw materials cost for a stereo system will total $74 per unit. Workers on the production lines are on average paid $12 per hour. A stereo system usually takes 5 hours to complete.

In addition, the rent on the equipment used to assemble stereo systems amounts to $4,900 per month. Indirect materials cost $5 per system. A supervisor was hired to oversee production; her monthly salary is $3,000. Janitorial costs are $1,300 monthly. Advertising costs for the stereo system will be $8,500 per month. The factory building depreciation expense is $7,200 per year. Property taxes on the factory building will be $9,000 per year.

Requirements:

A. Complete the answer sheet. Assuming that Copa manufactures, on average, 1,300 stereo systems per month, enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount per month under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.

B. Compute the cost to produce one stereo system.

relaxing recliner chairs completed the following selected transactions 492114

Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method, card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue

Relaxing Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions:

2011

Jul 1 : Sold inventory to Great-Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine-month 12% note, Ignore cost of goods sold.

Oct 31: Recorded credit-and debit-card sales for the period of 21,000.

Nov 3: Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $410.

Dec 31: Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on Great-Mart note

31: Made an Adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $15,200 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in allowance for uncollectible accounts is $11,600.

2012

Apr 1: Collected the Maturity Value of the Great-Mart note.

June 23: Sold Merchandise to Ambiance, Corp., receiving a 60-day, 9% note for $13,000.

Ignore cost of goods sold.

Aug 22: Ambiance, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity; we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable.

Nov 16 : Loaned $21,000 cash to Creed, Inc, receiving a 90-day, 8% note.

Dec 5 : Collected in full on account from Ambiance, Corp.

31: Accrued the interest on the Creek, Inc, note.

night watch company recently began production of a new product the halogen light whi 492116

Night Watch Company recently began production of a new product, the halogen light, which required the investment of $500,000 in assets. The costs of producing and selling 12,000 halogen lights are estimated as follows:

Variable costs per unit:

22

Fixed costs:

Direct materials

12

Factory overhead

120,000

Direct labor

6

Selling and administrative expense

60,000

Selling and administrative expenses

4

Total

$44

Night Watch Company is currently considering establishing a selling price for the halogen light. The president of Night Watch Company has decided to use the cost-plus approach to product pricing and has indicated that the halogen light must earn a 12% rate of return on invested assets.

Instructions

1. Determine the amount of desired profit from the production and sale of the halogen light.

2. Assuming that the total cost concept is used, determine:

(a) The cost amount per unit,

(b) The markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places), and

(c) The selling price of the halogen light (rounded to nearest whole dollar).

3. Assuming that the product cost concept is used, determine

(a) The cost amount per unit,

(b) The markup percentage, and

(c) The selling price of the halogen light.

4. Assuming that the variable cost concept is used, determine

(a) The cost amount per unit,

(b) The markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places), and

(c) The selling price of the halogen light (rounded to nearest whole dollar).

5. Comment on any additional considerations that could influence establishing the selling price for the halogen light.

6. Assume that as of September 1, 2010, 7,000 units of halogen light have been produced and sold during the current year. Analysis of the domestic market indicates that 3,000

additional units of the halogen light are expected to be sold during the remainder of the year at the normal product price determined under the total cost concept.

On September 5, Night Watch Company received an offer from Forever Glow Inc. for 2,000 units of the halogen light at $45 each. Forever Glow Inc. will market the units inJapanunder its own brand name, and no selling and administrative expenses associated with the sale will be incurred by Night Watch Company. The additional business is not expected to affect the domestic sales of the halogen light, and the additional units could be produced using existing capacity.

(a) Prepare a differential analysis report of the proposed sale to Forever Glow Inc.

(b) Based on the differential analysis report in part (a), should the proposal be accepted?

the standard quantity of materials required in the process is 8 000 pounds which cos 492117

Seattle Roast Coffee Company produces Colombian coffee in batches of 8,000 pounds.

The standard quantity of materials required in the process is 8,000 pounds,which cost $5.00 per pound. Colombian coffee can be sold without further processing for $10.80 per pound. Colombian coffee can also be processed further to yield Decaf Colombian, which can be sold for $12.50 per pound.The processing into Decaf Colombian requires additional processing costs of $10,500 per batch. The additional processing will also cause a 5% loss of product due to evaporation.

a. Prepare a differential analysis report for the decision to sell or process further.

b. Should Seattle Roast sell Colombian coffee or process further and sell Decaf Colombian?

c. Determine the price of Decaf Colombian that would cause neither an advantage or disadvantage for processing further and selling Decaf Colombian.

amoruso parts company sells vehicle parts to automotive companies the truck division 492119

Budget Performance Report for a Cost Center

Amoruso Parts Company sells vehicle parts to automotive companies. The Truck Division is organized as a cost center. The budget for the Truck Division for the month ended October 31, 2010, is as follows (in thousands):

Customer service salaries

260,450

Insurance and property taxes

54,600

Distribution salaries

415,400

Marketing salaries

489,700

Engineer salaries

398,500

Warehouse wages

279,100

Equipment depreciation

87,500

Total

1,985,250

During October, the costs incurred in the Truck Division were as follows:

Customer service salaries

333,370

Insurance and property taxes

52,960

Distribution salaries

411,250

Marketing salaries

548,460

Engineer salaries

390,530

Warehouse wages

267,930

Equipment depreciation

87,500

Total

2,092,000

Instructions

1. Prepare a budget performance report for the director of the Truck Division for the month of October.

2. For which costs might the director be expected to request supplemental reports?

on january 5 2010 phelps corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 492120

(Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation)

On January 5, 2010, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,000 shares of $100 par value, 8% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.

Jan. 11 Issued 20,000 shares of common stock at $16 per share.

Feb. 1 Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,000 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: machinery with a fair market value of $50,000; a factory building with a fair market value of $160,000; and land with an appraised value of $270,000.

July 29 Purchased 1,800 shares of common stock at $17 per share. (Use cost method.)

Aug. 10 Sold the 1,800 treasury shares at $14 per share.

Dec. 31 Declared a $0.25 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.

Dec. 31 Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $175,700 net income.

Instructions:

a. Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Phelps Corporation’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2010.

the exterminator inc provides on site residential pest extermination services 492121

Analyze a Performance Report

The Exterminator Inc. provides on-site residential pest extermination services. The company has several mobile teams who are dispatched from a central location in company-owned trucks. The company uses the number of jobs to measure activity. At the beginning of May, the company budgeted for 200 jobs, but the actual number of jobs turned out to be 208. A report comparing the budgeted revenues and costs to the actual revenues and costs appear below:

The Exterminator inc

Variance Report for the month ended May 31

Planning budget

Actual Results

Variances

Jobs

200

208

Revenue

$3,700

$36,400

$600 U

Expenses:

Mobile team operating costs

16,900

17,060

160 U

Exterminating supplies

4,000

4,350

350 U

Advertising

900

1,040

140 U

Dispatching costs

2,700

2,340

360 U

Office Rent

2,300

2,300

0

Insurance

3,600

3,600

0

Total Expense

30,400

30,690

290 U

Net Operating Income

$6,600

$5,710

$890 U

Required:

Is the above variance report useful for evaluating how well revenues and costs were controlled during May? Why or why not?

acc505 tjelmeland corporation is considering dropping product s85u data from the com 492122

Tjelmeland Corporation is considering dropping product S85U. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.

Sales

$360,000

Variable Expenses

$158,000

Fixed Manufacturing Expenses

$119,000

Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses

$94,000

All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $55,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $71,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product S85U is discontinued.

Required:

i. According to the company’s accounting system, what is the net operating income earned by product S85U? Show your work!

ii. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product S85U? Should the product be dropped? Show your work!

acc505 financial data for beaker company for last year appear below 492124

Financial data for Beaker Company for last year appear below:

Beaker Company

Statements of Financial Position

Assets

Beginning Balance

Ending Balance

Cash

50,000

70,000

Accounts Receivable

20,000

25,000

Inventory

30,000

35,000

Plant and equipment (net)

120,000

110,000

Investment in Cedar Company

80,000

100,000

Land (undeveloped)

170,000

170,000

Total Assets

470,000

510,000

Liabilities and Owners’ equity:

Accounts payable

70,000

90,000

Long-term debt

250,000

250,000

Owners’ equity

150,000

170,000

Total liabilities and owners equity

470,000

510,000

Beaker Company

Income Statement

Sales

414,000

Less Operating expenses

351,900

New Operating Income

62,100

Less Interest and taxes:

Interest expense

30,000

Tax Expense

10,000

40,000

Net Income

$22,100

The company paid dividends of $2,100 last year. The “Investment in Cedar Company” on the statement of financial position represents an investment in the stock of another company.

Required:

i. Compute the company’s margin, turnover, and return on investment for last year.

ii. The Board of Directors of Beaker Company has set a minimum required return of 20%.

What was the company’s residual income last year?

acc505 ferro wares is a division of a major corporation the following data are for t 492125

Ferro Wares is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations.

Sales

$33,040,000

Net Operating Income

$1,453,760

Average Operating Assets

$8,000,000

The company’s minimum required rate of return

18%

Required:

i. What is the division’s ROI?

ii. What is the division’s residual income?

acc505 rosiek corporation uses part a55 in one of its products the company s account 492126

Rosiek Corporation uses part A55 in one of its products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.

Per Unit

Direct Materials

$2.80

Direct Labor

$6.30

Variable Overhead

$8.50

Supervisor’s Salary

$2.60

Depreciation of Special Equipment

$6.80

Allocated General Overhead

$6.10

An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $32.30 each.

If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided. In addition, the space used to produce part A55 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $26,000 per year for that product.

Required:

i. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part A55 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.

ii. Which alternative should the company choose?

malone company estimates that 360 000 direct labor hours will be worked during the c 492078

Malone Company estimates that 360,000 direct labor hours will be worked during the coming year, 2008, in the Packaging Department. On this basis, the following budgeted manufacturing overhead cost data are computed for the year.

Fixed Overhead

Costs

Variable Overhead

Costs

Supervision

90,000

Indirect labor

126,000

Depreciation

60,000

Indirect materials

90,000

Insurance

30,000

Repairs

54,000

Rent

24,000

Utilities

72,000

Property taxes

18,000

Lubricants

18,000

222,000

360,000

It is estimated that direct labor hours worked each month will range from 27,000 to 36,000 hours.

During October, 27,000 direct labor hours were worked and the following overhead costs were incurred.

Fixed overhead costs: Supervision $7,500, Depreciation $5,000, Insurance $2,470, Rent $2,000, and Property taxes $1,500.

Variable overhead costs: Indirect labor $10,360, Indirect materials, $6,400, Repairs $4,000, Utilities $5,700, and Lubricants $1,640.

Instructions

a) Prepare a monthly manufacturing overhead flexible budget for each increment of 3,000 direct labor hours over the relevant range for the year ending December 31, 2008.

(b) Prepare a flexible budget report for October.

(c) Comment on management’s efficiency in controlling manufacturing overhead costs in October.

national products corporation participates in a highly competitive industry 492079

Ethics Case

National Products Corporation participates in a highly competitive industry. In order to meet this competition and achieve profit goals, the company has chosen the decentralized form of organization. Each manager of a decentralized investment center is measured on the basis of profit contribution, market penetration, and return on investment.

Failure to meet the objectives established by corporate management for these measures has not been acceptable and usually has resulted in demotion or dismissal of an investment center manager.

An anonymous survey of managers in the company revealed that the mangers feel the pressure to compromise their personal ethical standards to achieve the corporate objectives. For example, at certain plant locations there was pressure to reduce quality control to a level which could not assure that all unsafe products would be rejected. Also, sales personnel were encouraged to use questionable sales tactics to obtain orders, including gifts and other incentives to purchasing agents.

The chief executive officer is disturbed by the survey findings. In his opinion such behavior cannot be condoned by the company. He concludes that the company should do something about this problem.

Instructions:

(a) Who are the stakeholders (the affected parties) in this situation?

(b) Identify the ethical implications, conflicts, or dilemmas in the above described situation.

(c) What might the company do to reduce the pressure on managers and decrease the ethical conflicts?

trading securities 1 35 of the nonvoting preferred stock of american aircraft compan 492080

Reporting category Item

T. Trading securities ___ 1. 35% of the nonvoting preferred stock of American Aircraft Company.

M. Securities held-to-maturity ___ 2. Treasury bills to be held to maturity.

A. Securities available-for-sale ___ 3. Two-year note receivable from affiliate.

E. Equity method ___ 4. Accounts receivable.

C. Consolidation ___ 5. Treasury bond maturing in one week.

N. None of these ___ 6. Common stock held in trading account for immediate resale.

___ 7. Bonds acquired to profit from short-term differences in price.

___ 8. 35% of the voting common stock of Computer Storage Devices Company.

___ 9. 90% of the voting common stock of Affiliated Peripherals, Inc.

___ 10. Corporate bonds of Primary Smelting Company to be sold if interest rates fall 1/2%.

___ 11. 25% of the voting common stock of Smith Foundries Corporation: 51% family-owned by Smith family; fair value determinable.

___ 12. 17% of the voting common stock of Shipping Barrels Corporation; Investor’s CEO on the board of directors of Shipping Barrels Corporation.

Required:

Indicate (by letter) the way each of the investments listed below most likely should be accounted for based on the information provided.

miracle printers mp manufactures printers assume that mp recently paid 600 000 for a 492082

Miracle Printers (MP) manufactures printers. Assume that MP recently paid $600,000 for a patent on a new laser printer. Although it gives legal protection for 20 years, the patent is expected to provide a competitive advantage for only eight years.

Requirements

1. Assuming the straight-line method of amortization, make journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the patent and (b) amortization for year 1.

2. After using the patent for four years, MP learns at an industry trade show that another company is designing a more efficient printer. On the basis of this new information, MP decides, starting with year 5, to amortize the remaining cost of the patent over two remaining years, giving the patent a total useful life of six years. Record amortization for year 5.

the following transactions of denver pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012 492083

Journalizing liability transactions

The following transactions of Denver Pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012:

2011 Jan 9 Purchased computer equipment at a cost of $9,000, signing a six-month, 6% note payable for that amount.

Jan 29 Recorded the week’s sales of $64,000, three-fourths on credit, and one-fourth for cash. Sales amounts are subject to a 6% state sales tax.

Feb 5 Sent the last week’s sales tax to the state.

Feb 28 Borrowed $204,000 on a four-year, 10% note payable that calls for $51,000 annual installment payments plus interest. Record the current and long-term portions of the note payable in two separate accounts.

Jul 9 Paid the six-month, 6% note, plus interest, at maturity.

Aug 31 Purchased inventory for $12,000, signing a six-month, 9% note payable.

Dec 31 Accrued warranty expense, which is estimated at 2% of sales of $603,000.

Dec 31 Accrued interest on all outstanding notes payable. Make a separate interest accrual for each note payable.

2012 Feb 28 Paid the first installment and interest for one year on the four-year note payable.

Feb 29 Paid off the 9% note plus interest at maturity.

Requirement

1. Journalize the transactions inDenver’s general journal. Explanations are not required.

louis welch is general manager of united tanning salons during 2012 welch worked for 492084

Computing and journalizing payroll amounts

Louis Welch is general manager of United Tanning Salons. During 2012, Welch worked for the company all year at a $6,200 monthly salary. He also earned a year-end bonus equal to 10% of his salary.

Welch’s federal income tax withheld during 2012 was $850 per month, plus $924 on his bonus check. State income tax withheld came to $70 per month, plus $40 on the bonus.

The FICA tax withheld was 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. Welch authorized the following payroll deductions: Charity Fund contribution of 1% of total earnings and life insurance of $5 per month.

United incurred payroll tax expense on Welch for FICA tax of 7.65% of the first $106,800 in4 annual earnings. The company also paid state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8% on the first $7,000 in annual earnings. In addition, United provides Welch with health insurance at a cost of $150 per month. During 2012, United paid $4,000 into Welch’s retirement plan.

Requirements

1. Compute Welch’s gross pay, payroll deductions, and net pay for the full year 2012.

Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.

2. Compute United’s total 2012 payroll expense for Welch.

3. Make the journal entry to record United’s expense for Welch’s total earnings for the year, his payroll deductions, and net pay. Debit Salary expense and Bonus expense as appropriate. Credit liability accounts for the payroll deductions and Cash for net pay. An explanation is not required.

accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting recei 492085

Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet.

At December 31, 2012, the Accounts receivable balance of GPS Technology is $190,000.

The Allowance for doubtful accounts has an $8,600 credit balance. GPS Technology prepares the following aging schedule for its accounts receivable:

Age of Accounts

1-30 Days

31-60 Days

61-90 Days

Over 90 Days

Accounts Receivable 190,000

80,000

60,000

40,000

10,000

Estimated percent uncollectible

0.4%

5.0%

6.0%

50.0%

Requirements

1. Journalize the year-end adjusting entry for doubtful accounts on the basis of the aging schedule, Show the T-account for the Allowance for uncollectible accounts at December 31, 2012.

2. Show how GPS Technology will report its net Accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet.

accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting recei 492086

Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet

At September 30, 2011, Windy Mountain Flagpoles had Accounts receivable of $34,000 and Allowance for uncollectible accounts had a credit balance of $3,000. During October 2012, Windy Mountain Flagpoles recorded the following:

  • Sales of $189,000 ($165,000 on account; $24,000 for cash).

  • Collections on account, $133,000.

  • Uncollectible account expense, estimated as 1% of credit sales.

  • Write-offs of uncollectible receivables, $2,800.

Requirements

1. Journalize sales, collections, uncollectible account expense using the allowance method (percent-of-sales method), and write-offs of uncollectibles during October 2012.

2. Prepare T-accounts to show the ending balances in Accounts receivable and Allowance for uncollectible accounts. Compute net accounts receivable at October 31. How much does Windy Mountain expect to collect?

3. Show how Windy Mountain Flagpoles will report net Accounts receivable on its October 31, 2012 balance sheet.

deadwood properties bought 3 lots in a subdivision for a lump sum price an independe 492088

Lump-sum purchase of assets

Deadwood Properties bought 3 lots in a subdivision for a lump-sum price. An independent appraiser valued the lots as follows:

Lot

Appraisal Value

1

70,500

2

235,000

3

164,500

Requirement:

Record the purchase in the journal, identifying each lot’s cost in separate Land account.

Round decimals to two places, and use your computed percentages throughout.

when the accounts of constantine inc are examined the adjusting data listed below ar 492089

(Adjusting and Reversing Entries)

When the accounts of Constantine Inc. are examined, the adjusting data listed below are uncovered on December 31, the end of an annual fiscal period.

1. The prepaid insurance account shows a debit of $6,480, representing the cost of a 2-year fire insurance policy dated August 1 of the current year.

2. On November 1, Rental Revenue was credited for $3,240, representing revenue from a subrental for a 3-month period beginning on that date.

3. Purchase of advertising materials for $880 during the year was recorded in the Advertising Expense account. On December 31, advertising materials of $337 are on hand.

4. Interest of $837 has accrued on notes payable.

Instructions:

Prepare in general journal form: (a) the adjusting entry for each item and (b) the reversing entry for each item where appropriate. (If no journal entry is required, please choose No entry as the description and put 0 as the amount.)

woolford company has the following portfolio of available for sale securities at dec 492090

Woolford Company has the following portfolio of available for sale securities at Dec 31,2006.

Security

QTY

Present

Per Share Interest

Cost

Market

Favre, Inc.

2000

shares

8%

$11

$16

Brady Corp.

5000

shares

14%

23

17

McNabb Co.

4000

shares

2%

31

24

Instructions

a. What should be reported on Woolford’s Dec 31,2006, balance sheet relative to these long-term available for sale securities?

On December 31,2007, Woolfords portfolio of available for sale securites consisted of the following common stocks.

Security

QTY

Present

Per share Interest

Cost

Market

Brady Corp.

5,000

shares

14%

$23

$30

McNabb Company

4,000

shares

2%

31

23

Mc Nabb CO

2,000

shares

1%

25

23

At the end of the year 2007, Woolford Company changed its intent relative to its investment in Favre, Inc. and reclassified the shares to trading securities status when the shares were selling for $9 per share.

b. What should be reported on the face of Woolford’s Dec 31,2007, balance sheet relative to available for sale securities investments?

c. What should be reported to reflect the transactions above in Woolford’s 2007 income statement

d. Assuming the comparative financial statements for 2006 and 2007 are presented, draft the footnote necessary for full disclosure if Woolford’s transactions and position in equity securities.

at december 31 2006 the available for sale equity portfolio for steffi graf inc is a 492091

At December 31, 2006, the available-for-sale equity portfolio for Steffi Graf, Inc. is as follows.

Security

Cost

Fair Value

Unrealized Gain (Loss)

A

17,500

15,000

(2,500)

B

12,500

14,000

1,500

C

23,000

25,500

2,500

Total

53,000

54,500

1,500

Previous securities fair value adjustment balance—Dr. 400

Securities fair value adjustment—Dr. 1,100

On January 20, 2007, Steffi Graf, Inc. sold security A for $15,100. The sale proceeds are net of brokerage fees.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2006 to report the portfolio at FMV.

(b) Show the balance sheet presentation of the investment related accounts at December 31, 2006. (Ignore notes presentation.)

(c) Prepare the journal entry for the 2007 sale of security A.

the two following separate cases show the financial position of a parent company and 492093

Consolidated Workpaper: Two Cases

The two following separate cases show the financial position of a parent company and its subsidiary company on November 30, 2011, just after the parent had purchased 90% of the subsidiary’s stock:

Case I

Case II

P Company

S Company

P Company

S Company

Current assets

880,000

260,000

780,000

280,000

Investment in S Company

190,000

190,000

Long-term assets

1,400,000

400,000

1,200,000

400,000

Other assets

90,000

40,000

70,000

70,000

Total

2,560,000

700,000

2,240,000

750,000

Current liabilities

640,000

270,000

700,000

260,000

Long-term liabilities

850,000

290,000

920,000

270,000

Common stock

600,000

180,000

600,000

180,000

Retained earnings

470,000

(40,000)

20,000

40,000

Total

2,560,000

700,000

2,240,000

750,000

Prepare a November 30, 2011, consolidated balance sheet workpaper for each of the foregoing cases.

In Case I, any difference between book value of equity and the value implied by the purchase price relates to subsidiary long-term assets.

In Case II, assume that any excess of book value over the value implied by purchase price is due to overvalued long-term assets.

selk steel co which began operations on jan 4 2009 had the following subsequent tran 492094

Selk Steel Co., which began operations on Jan. 4, 2009, had the following subsequent transactions and events in its long – term investments.

2009

Jan. 5 Selk purchased 50,000 shares (20% of total) of Wulf’s common stock for $1,567,000.

Oct. 23 Wulf declared and paid a cash dividend of $3.20 per share.

Dec. 31 Wulf’s net income for 2009 is $1,164,000, and the market value of its stock at Dec.

31 is $34.00 per share.

2010

Oct 15 Wulf declared and paid a cash dividend of $2.50 per share.

Dec. 31 Wulf’s net income for 2010 is $1,476,000, and the market value of its stock at Dec.

31 is $36.00 per share.

2011

Jan. 2 Selk sold all of its investment in Kildaire for $1,895,500 cash.

Part 1

Assume that Selk has a significant influence over Wulf with its 20% share of stock

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events for Selk.

2. Compute the carrying (book) value per share of Selk’s investment in Wulf common stock as reflected in the investment account on Jan 1, 2011.

3. Compute the net increase or decrease in Selk’s equity from Jan. 5, 2009 trhough Jan. 2, 2011, resulting from its investment in Wulf.

Part 2

Assume that although Selk owns 20% of Wulf’s outstanding stock, circumstances indicate that it does not have a significant influence over the investee and that it is classified as an available-for-sale security investment

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceeding transaction and events for Selk. Also prepare an entry dated Jan. 2, 2011, to remove any balance related to the market adjustment.

2. Compute the cost per share of Selks’s investment in Wulf common stock as reflected in the investment account on Jan. 1, 2011.

3. Compute the net increase or decrease in Selk’s equity from Jan. 5, 2009, through Jan. 2, 2011, resulting from its investment in Wulf.

condensed balance sheets for phillips company and solina company on january 1 2010 a 492095

Condensed balance sheets for Phillips Company and Solina Company on January 1, 2010, are as follows:

Phillips

Solina

Current assets

180,000

85,000

Plant and equipment

450,000

140,000

Total assets

630,000

225,000

Total liabilities

95,000

35,000

Common stock, $10 par value

350,000

160,000

Other contributed capital

125,000

53,000

Retained earnings (deficit)

60,000

(23,000)

Total liabilities and equities

630,000

225,000

On January 1, 2007, the stockholders of Phillips and Solina agreed to a consolidation.

Because FASB requires that one party be recognized as the acquirer and the other as the acquiree, it was agreed that Phillips was acquiring Solina. Phillips agreed to issue 20,000 shares of its $10 par stock to acquire all the net assets of Solina at a time when the fair value of Phillips’ common stock was $15 per share. On the date of consolidation, the fair values of Solina’s current assets and liabilities were equal to their book values. The fair value of plant and equipment was, however, $150,000. Phillips will incur $20,000 of direct acquisition costs and $6,000 in stock issue costs.

santo birch opens a web consulting business called show me the money consultants and 492097

Fundamental Accounting Principles

Santo Birch opens a Web consulting business called Show-Me-the-Money Consultants and completes the following transactions in March:

March 1 Birch invested $150,000 cash along with $22,000 of office equipment in the business.

2 Prepaid $6,000 cash for six months’ rent for an office. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $6,000.)

3 Made credit purchases of office equipment for $3,000 and office supplies for $1,200.

Payment is due within 10 days.

6 Completed services for a client and immediately received $4,000 cash.

9 Completed a $7,500 project for a client, who must pay within 30 days.

10 Paid $4,200 cash to settle the account payable created on March 3.

19 Paid $5,000 cash for the premium on a 12-month insurance policy.

22 Received $3,500 cash as partial payment for the work completed on March 9.

25 Completed work for another client for $3,820 on credit.

29 Birch withdrew $5,100 cash for personal use.

30 Purchased $600 of additional office supplies on credit.

31 Paid $200 cash for this month’s utility bill.

Required

1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use the account titles listed in part 2).

2. Open the following accounts-their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Prepaid Insurance (128); Prepaid Rent (131); Office Equipment (163); Accounts Payable (201); S. Birch, Capital (301); S. Birch, Withdrawals (302); Services Revenue (403); and Utilities Expense (690). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the accounts and enter the balance after each posting.

3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of this month’s operations.

below are transactions related to fred couples company 492098

(Entries for Asset Acquisition, Including Self-Construction)

Below are transactions related to Fred Couples Company.

(a) The City of Pebble Beach gives the company 5 acres of land as a plant site. The market value of this land is determined to be $81,000.

(b) 13,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $50 per share are issued in exchange for land and buildings. The property has been appraised at a fair market value of $810,000, of which $180,000 has been allocated to land and $630,000 to buildings. The stock of Fred Couples Company is not listed on any exchange, but a block of 100 shares was sold by a stockholder 12 months ago at $65 per share, and a block of 200 shares was sold by another stockholder 18 months ago at $58 per share.

(c) No entry has been made to remove from the accounts for Materials, Direct Labor, and Overhead the amounts properly chargeable to plant asset accounts for machinery constructed during the year. The following information is given relative to costs of the machinery constructed.

Materials used 12,500

Factory supplies used 900

Direct labor incurred 15,000

Additional overhead (over regular) caused by construction of machinery, excluding factory supplies used 2,700

Fixed overhead rate applied to regular manufacturing operations 60% of direct labor cost Cost of similar machinery if it had been purchased from outside suppliers 44,000 Instructions

Prepare journal entries on the books of Fred Couples Company to record these

scott equipment organization is investigating various combinations of short and long 492099

Scott Equipment Organization is investigating various combinations of short- and long-term debt in financing assets. Assume the organization has decided to employ $30 million in current assets and $35 million in fixed assets in its operations next year, provided the level of current assets, anticipated sales, and EBIT for next year are $60 million and $6 million, respectively. The organization’s income tax rate is 40%. Stockholders’ equity will be used to finance $40 million of assets, with the remainder financed by short- and long-term debt.

The organization is considering implementing one of the policies in the diagram.

Amount of Short-Term Debt

Financial Policy

Millions of dollars

LTD (%)

STD (%)

Aggressive

$24

8.5%

5.5%

(large amount of short-term debt)

Moderate

$18

8.0%

5.0%

(moderate amount of short-term debt)

Conservative

$12

7.5%

4.5%

(small amount of short-term debt)

Determine the following for each policy:

· Expected rate of return on stockholders’ equity

· Net working capital position

  • Current ratio

on march 3 cornwell appliances sells 680 000 of its receivables to marsh factors inc 492100

Presented below are two independent situations.

a. On March 3, Cornwell Appliances sells $680,000 of its receivables to Marsh Factors Inc. Marsh Factors assesses a finance charge of 3% of the amount of receivables sold. Prepare the entry on Cornwell Appliances’ books to record the sale of the receivables. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

b. On May 10, Dale Company sold merchandise for $3,500 and accepted the customer’s America Bank MasterCard. America Bank charges a 4% service charge for credit card sales. Prepare the entry on Dale Company’s books to record the sale of merchandise. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

rob judson company had the following transactions involving notes payable 492055

Rob Judson Company had the following transactions involving notes payable.

1-Jul-11

Borrows $50,000 from Third National Bank by signing a 9-month, 12% note.

1-Nov-11

Borrows $60,000 from DeKalb State Bank by signing a 3-month, 10% note.

31-Dec-11

Prepares adjusting entries.

1-Feb-12

Pays principal and interest to DeKalb State Bank.

1-Apr-12

Pays principal and interest to Third National Bank.

firm b also has 10 000 in assets but these assets are financed by 5 000 in debt with 492056

Firm A has $10,000 in assets entirely financed with equity.

Firm B also has $10,000 in assets, but these assets are financed by $5,000 in debt (with a 10 percent rate of interest) and $5,000 in equity.

Both firms sell 10,000 units of output at $2.50 per unit. The variable costs of production are $1, and fixed production costs are $12,000. (To ease the calculation, assume no income tax.)

a. What is the operating income (EBIT) for both firms?

b. What are the earnings after interest?

c. If sales increase by 10 percent to 11,000 units, by what percentage will each firm’s earnings after interest increase? To answer the question determine the earnings after taxes and compute the percentage increase in these earnings from the answers you derived in part b.

d. Why are the percentage changes different?

securities held to maturity bond investment effective interest fuzzy monkey technolo 492057

Securities held-to-maturity; bond investment; effective interest Fuzzy Monkey Technologies, Inc., purchased as a long-term investment $80 million of 8% bonds, dated January 1, on January 1, 2011. Management has the positive intent and ability to hold the bonds until maturity. For bonds of similar risk and maturity the market yield was 10%.

The price paid for the bonds was $66 million. Interest is received semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Due to changing market conditions, the fair value of the bonds at December 31, 2011, was $70 million.

Required:

1. Prepare the journal entry to record Fuzzy Monkey’s investment on January 1, 2011.

2. Prepare the journal entry by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on June 30, 2011 (at the effective rate).

3. Prepare the journal entries by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on December 31, 2011 (at the effective rate).

4. At what amount will Fuzzy Monkey report its investment in the December 31, 2011, balance sheet? Why?

5. How would Fuzzy Monkey’s 2011 statement of cash flows be affected by this

amalgamated general corporation is a consulting firm that also offers financial serv 492058

Securities held-to-maturity, securities available for sale, and trading securities

Amalgamated General Corporation is a consulting firm that also offers financial services through its credit division. From time to time the company buys and sells securities intending to earn profits on short-term differences in price. The following selected transactions relate to Amalgamated’s investment activities during the last quarter of 2011 and the first month of 2012. The only securities held by Amalgamated at October 1 were $30 million of 10% bonds of Kansas Abstractors, Inc., purchased on May 1 at face value.

The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

2011

Oct 18 Purchased 2 million preferred shares of Millwork Ventures Company for $58 million as a speculative investment to be sold under suitable circumstances.

Oct 31 Received semiannual interest of $1.5 million from the Kansas Abstractors bonds.

Nov 1 Purchased 10% bonds of Holistic Entertainment Enterprises at their $18 million face value, to be held until they mature in 2018. Semiannual interest is payable April 30 and October 31.

Nov 1 Sold the Kansas Abstractors bond for $28 million because rising interest rates are expected to cause their fair value to continue to fall.

Dec 1 Purchased 12% bonds of Household Plastics Corporation at their $60 million face value, to be held until they mature in 2028. Semiannual interest is payable May 31 and November 30.

Dec 20 Purchased U.S. Treasury bonds for $5.6 million as trading securities, hoping to earn profits on short-term differences in prices.

Dec 21 Purchased 4 million common shares of NXS Corporation for $44 million as trading securities, hoping to earn profits on short-term differences in prices.

Dec 22 Sold the Treasury bonds for $5.7 million.

Dec 29 Received cash dividends of $3 million from the Millwork Ventures Company preferred shares.

Dec 30 Recorded any necessary adjusting entry(s) and closing entries relating to the investments. The market price of the Millwork Ventures Company preferred stock was $27.50 per share and $11.50 per share for the NXS Corporation common. The fair values of the bond investments were $58.7 million for Household Plastics Corporation and $16.7 million for Holistic Entertainment Enterprises.

2012

Jan. 7 Sold the NXS Corporation common shares for $43 million.

Required:

Prepare the appropriate journal entry for each transaction or event.

on january 4 2011 runyan bakery paid 324 million for 10 million shares of lavery lab 492059

Fair value option; equity method investments

On January 4, 2011, Runyan Bakery paid $324 million for 10 million shares of Lavery Labeling Company common stock. The investment represents a 30% interest in the net assets of Lavery and gave Runyan the ability to exercise significant influence over Lavery’s operations. Runyan chose the fair value option to account for this investment. Runyan received dividends of $2.00 per share on December 15, 2011, and Lavery reported net income of $160 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. The market value of Lavery’s common stock at December 31, 2011, was $31 per share. On the purchase date, the book value of Lavery’s net assets was $800 million and:

a. The fair value of Lavery’s depreciable assets, with an average remaining useful life of six years, exceeded their book value by $80 million.

b. The remainder of the excess of the cost of the investment over the book value of net assets purchased was attributable to goodwill.

Required:

1. Prepare all appropriate journal entries related to the investment during 2011, assuming Runyan accounts for this investment under the fair value option and accounts for the Lavery investment in a manner similar to what they would use for trading securities.

2. What would be the effect of this investment on Runyan’s 2011 net income?

indicate by letter the way each of the items listed below should be reported in a ba 492060

Disclosures of liabilities

Required:

Indicate (by letter) the way each of the items listed below should be reported in a balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

Item

Reporting Category

1. Commercial paper.

N. Not reported

2. Noncommitted line of credit.

C. Current liability

3. Customer advances.

L. Long-term liability

4. Estimated warranty cost.

D. Disclosure note only

5. Accounts payable.

A. Asset

6. Long-term bonds that will be callable by the creditor in ther upcoming year unless an existing violation is not corrected (there is a reasonable possibility the violation will be corrected within the grace period).

7. Note due March 3, 2012.

8. Interest accrued on note, Dec. 31, 2011.

9. Short-term bank loan to be paid with proceeds of sale of common stock.

10. A determinable gain that is contingent on a future event that appears extremely likely to occur in three months.

11. Unasserted assessment of back taxes that probably will be asserted, in which case there would probably be a loss in six months.

12. Unasserted assessment of back taxes with a reasonable possibility of being asserted, in which case there would probably be a loss in 13 months.

13. A determinable loss from a past event that is contingent on a future event that appears extremely likely to occur in three months.

14. Bond sinking fund.

15. Long-term bonds callable by the creditor in the upcoming year that are not expected to be called.

woodmier lawn products introduced a new line of commercial sprinklers in 2010 that c 492061

Warranty expense; change in estimate

Woodmier Lawn Products introduced a new line of commercial sprinklers in 2010 that carry a one-year warranty against manufacturer’s defects. Because this was the first product for which the company offered a warranty, trade publications were consulted to determine the experience of others in the industry. Based on that experience, warranty costs were expected to approximate 2% of sales. Sales of the sprinklers in 2010 were $2.5 million.

Accordingly, the following entries relating to the contingency for warranty costs were recorded during the first year of selling the product:

Accrued liability and expense

Warranty expense (2% x $ 2,500,000)

50,000

Estimated warranty liability

50,000

Actual expenditures (summary entry)

Estimated warranty liability

23,000

Cash, wages payable, parts and supplies, etc.

23,000

eastern manufacturing is involved with several situations that possibly involve cont 492062

Various contingencies

Eastern Manufacturing is involved with several situations that possibly involve contingencies. Each is described below. Eastern’s fiscal year ends December 31, and the 2011 financial statements are issued on March 15, 2012.

a. Eastern is involved in a lawsuit resulting from a dispute with a supplier. On February 3, 2012, judgment was rendered against Eastern in the amount of $107 million plus interest, a total of $122 million. Eastern plans to appeal the judgment and is unable to predict its outcome though it is not expected to have a material adverse effect on the company.

b. In November 2010, the State ofNevadafiled suit against Eastern, seeking civil penalties and injunctive relief for violations of environmental laws regulating hazardous waste. On January 12, 2012, Eastern reached a settlement with state authorities. Based upon discussions with legal counsel, the Company feels it is probable that $140 million will be required to cover the cost of violations. Eastern believes that the ultimate settlement of this claim will not have a material adverse effect on the company.

c. Eastern is the plaintiff in a $200 million lawsuit filed against United Steel for damages due to lost profits from rejected contracts and for unpaid receivables. The case is in final appeal and legal counsel advises that it is probable that Eastern will prevail and be awarded $100 million.

d. At March 15, 2012, the Environmental Protection Agency is in the process of investigating possible soil contamination at various locations of several companies including Eastern. The EPA has not yet proposed a penalty assessment. Management feels an assessment is reasonably possible, and if an assessment is made an unfavorable settlement of up to $33 million is reasonably possible.

Required:

1. Determine the appropriate means of reporting each situation. Explain your reasoning.

2. Prepare any necessary journal entries and disclosure notes.

acc301 mucky duck makes swimsuits and sells these suits directly to retailers 492063

Mucky Duck makes swimsuits and sells these suits directly to retailers. Although Mucky Duck has a variety of suits, it does not make the All-Body suit used by highly skilled swimmers. The market research department believes that a strong market exists for this type of suit. The department indicates that the All-Body suit would sell for approximately $110. Given its experience, Mucky Duck believes the All-Body suit would have the following manufacturing costs.

Direct materials

25

Direct labor

30

Manufacturing

45

Total costs

100

Instructions

(a) Assume that Mucky Duck uses cost-plus pricing, setting the selling price 25% above its costs. (1) What would be the price charged for the All-Body swimsuit? (2) Under what circumstances might Mucky Duck consider manufacturing the All-Body swimsuit given this approach?

(b) Assume that Mucky Duck uses target costing. What is the price that Mucky Duck would charge the retailer for the All-Body swimsuit?

(c) What is the highest acceptable manufacturing cost Mucky Duck would be willing to incur to produce the All-Body swimsuit, if it desired a profit of $25 per unit? (Assume target costing.)

acc301 allied company s small motor division manufactures a number of small motors u 492064

Allied Company’s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Allied then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.

Fixed cost per unit 5

Variable cost per unit 8

Selling price per unit 30

Instructions

(a) Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division.

(b) Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division.

(c) Explain why the level of capacity in the Small Motor Division has an effect on the transfer price.

acc301 merck amp co inc is a global research driven pharmaceutical company that disc 492065

Real World Focus

Merck & Co., Inc. is a global, research-driven pharmaceutical company that discovers, develops, manufacturers, and markets a broad range of human and animal health products. The following are excerpts from the financial review section of the company’s annual report.

MERCK & CO INC

Financial Review Section (partial)

In theUnited Statesthe Company has been working with private and governmental employers to slow the increase of health care costs.

Outside of theUnited Statesin difficult environments encumbered by government cost containment actions, the Company has worked with payers to help them allocate scarce resources to optimize healthcare outcomes, limiting potentially detrimental effects of government actions on sales growth.

Several products face expiration of product patents in the near term.

The Company along with other pharmaceutical manufacturers, received a notice from the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) that it was conducting an investigation into pricing practices.

Instructions

Answer each of the following questions.

a) In light of the above excerpts from Merck’s annual report, discuss some unique pricing issues faced by companies that operate in the pharmaceutical industry.

b) What are some reasons why the same company often sells identical drugs for dramatically different prices in different countries? How can the same drug used for both humans and animals cost significantly different prices?

c) Suppose that Merck has just developed a revolutionary new drug for the treatment of arthritis. Discuss the steps it would go through in setting a price. Include a discussion of the information it would need to gather, and the issues it would need to consider.

acc301 giant airlines operates out of three main hub airports in the united states 492066

Ethics Case

Giant Airlines operates out of three main “hub” airports in the United States. Recently Mosquito Airlines began operating a flight from Reno,Nevada, into Giant’s Metropolis hub for $190. Giant Airlines offers a price of $425 for the same route. The management of Giant is not happy about Mosquito invading its turf. In fact, Giant has driven off nearly every other competing airline from its hub, so that today 90% of flights into and out of Metropolis are Giant Airline flights. Mosquito is able to offer a lower fare because its pilots are paid less, it uses older planes, and it has lower overhead costs. Mosquito has been in business for only 6 months, and it services only two other cities. It expects the Metropolis route to be its most profitable.

Giant estimates that it would have to charge $210 just to break even on this flight. It estimates that Mosquito can break even at a price of $160. Within one day of Mosquito’s entry into the market, Giant dropped its price to $140, whereupon Mosquito matched its price. They both maintained this are for a period of 9 months, until Mosquito went out of business. As soon as Mosquito went out of business, Giant raised its fare back to $425.

Instructions

Answer each of the following questions.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this case?

(b) What are some of the reasons why Mosquito’s breakeven-point is lower than that of Giant?

(c) What are the likely reasons why Giant was able to offer this price for this period of time, while Mosquito couldn’t?

(d) What are some of the possible courses of action available to Mosquito in this situation?

(e) Do you think that this kind of pricing activity is ethical? What are the implications for the stakeholders in this situation?

acc301 the following data in thousands of dollars have been taken from the accountin 492068

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karmana Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$950

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$10

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$120

Direct labor

$200

Manufacturing overhead

$230

Administrative expenses

$100

Selling expenses

$140

Work in process inventory, beginning

$70

Work in process inventory, ending

$40

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$100

Finished goods inventory, ending

$80

Use these data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, elaborate on the relationship between these schedules as they relate to the flow of product costs in a manufacturing company.

acc301 escatel corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated la 492069

Escatel Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated labor hours for the upcoming year. Data for the most recently completed year appear below.

Estimates made at the beginning of the year :

Estimated labor hours

24,000

Estimated variable manufacturing overhead

$6.86 per labor hour

Estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead

$394,560

Actual labor hours for the year

24,500

Required:

Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the recently completed year.

acc301 summer company is considering three capital expenditure projects relevant dat 492070

Summer Company is considering three capital expenditure projects. Relevant data for the projects are as follows.

Project

Investment

Annual Income

Life of Project

22A

240,000

15,000

6 years

23A

270,000

24,400

9 years

24A

280,000

21,000

7 years

Annual income is constant over the life of the project. Each project is expected to have zero salvage value at the end of the project. Summer Company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

Instructions

(a) Determine the internal rate of return for each project. Round the internal rate of return factor to three decimals.

(b) If Summer Company’s required rate of return is 11%, which projects are acceptable?

acc301 the three stooges partnership is considering three long term capital investme 492072

The Three Stooges partnership is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Each investment has a useful life of 5 years. Relevant data on each project are as follows.

Project Moe

Project Larry

Project Curly

Capital investment

150,000

160,000

200,000

Annual net income:

Year 1

13,000

18,000

27,000

Year 2

13,000

17,000

22,000

Year 3

13,000

16,000

21,000

Year 4

13,000

12,000

13,000

Year 5

13,000

9,000

12,000

Total

$65,000

$72,000

$95,000

Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method with no salvage value. The company’s cost of capital is 15%. (Assume that cash flows occur evenly throughout the year.)

Instructions

(a) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)

(b) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(c) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to two decimals.) (Hint: Use average annual net income in your computation.)

(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?

acc301 carolina clinic is considering investing in new heart monitoring equipment 492073

Carolina Clinic is considering investing in new heart monitoring equipment. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 4 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were made of the cash flows. The company’s cost of capital is 11%.

Option A

Option B

Initial cost

160,000

227,000

Annual cash inflows

75,000

80,000

Annual cash outflows

35,000

30,000

Cost to rebuild (end of year 4)

60,000

Salvage value

12,000

Estimated useful

8 years

8 years

Instructions

(a) Compute the (1) net present value, (2) profitability index, and (3) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint: To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)

(b) Which option should be accepted?

acc301 danner farm supply company manufactures and sells a pesticide called snare 492075

Danner Farm Supply Company manufactures and sells a pesticide called Snare. The following data are available for preparing budgets for Snare for the first 2 quarters of 2009.

1. Sales: Quarter 1, 28,000 bags; quarter 2, 42,000 bags. Selling price is $60 per bag.

2. Direct materials: Each bag of Snare requires 4 pounds of Gumm at a cost of $4 per pound and 6 pounds of Tarr at $1.50 per pound.

3. Desired inventory levels:

Type of Inventory

January 1

April 1

July 1

Snare (bags)

8,000

12,000

18,000

Gumm (pounds)

9,000

10,000

13,000

Tarr (pounds)

14,000

20,000

25,000

4. Direct labor: Direct labor time is 15 minutes per bag at an hourly rate of $14 per hour.

5. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be 15% of sales plus $175,000 per quarter.

6. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income from operations.

Your assistant has prepared two budgets: (1) The manufacturing overhead budget shows expected costs to be 150% of direct labor cost. (2) The direct materials budget for Tarr shows the cost of Tarr purchases to be $297,000 in quarter 1 and $439,500 in quarter 2.

Instructions

Prepare the budgeted income statement for the first 6 months and all required operating budgets by quarters. (Note: Use variable and fixed in the selling and administrative expense budget). Do not prepare the manufacturing overhead budget or the direct materials budget for Tarr.

bedner amp flott manufactures ergonomic devices for computer users 492076

Bedner & Flott manufactures ergonomic devices for computer users. Some of their more popular products include glare screens (for computer monitors), keyboard stands with wrist rests, and carousels that allow easy access to discs. Over the past 5 years, they experienced rapid growth, with sales of all products increasing 20% to 50% each year.

Last year, some of the primary manufacturers of computers began introducing new products with some of the ergonomic designs, such as glare screens and wrist rests, already built in. As a result, sales of the Bedner & Flott’s accessory devices have declined somewhat. The company believes that the disc carousels will probably continue to show growth, but that the other products will probably continue to decline. When the next year’s budget was prepared, increases were built in to research and development so that the replacement products could be developed or the company could expand into some other product line. Some product lines being considered are general-purpose ergonomic devices including back supports, foot rests, and sloped writing pads.

The most recent results have shown that sales decreased more than was expected for the glare screens. As a result, the company may have a shortage of funds. Top management has therefore asked that all expenses be reduced to 10% to compensate for these reduced sales. Summary budget information is as follows.

Direct materials

240,000

Direct labor

110,000

Insurance

50,000

Depreciation

90,000

Machine repairs

30,000

Sales salaries

50,000

Office salaries

80,000

Factory salaries

50,000

Total

700,000

Instructions

Using the information above, answer the following questions.

a) What are the implications of reducing each cost? For example, if the company reduces direct materials costs, it may have to do so by purchasing lower-quality materials. This may affect sales in the long run.

b) Based on your analysis in (a), what do you think is the best way to obtain the $70,000 in cost savings requested? Be specific. Are there any costs that cannot or should not be reduced? Why?

raney company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labo 492077

Raney Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. Variable manufacturing overhead costs per direct labor hour are as follows:

Indirect labor

1.00

Indirect materials

0.50

Utilities

0.40

Fixed overhead costs per month are:

Supervision

4,000

Depreciation

1,500

Property Taxes

800

The company believes it will normally operate in a range of 7,000 to 10,000 direct labor hours per month.

Instructions:

Prepare a monthly flexible manufacturing overhead budget for 2010 for the expected range of activity, using increments of 1,000 direct labor hours.

hickory company manufactures two products 14 000 units of product y and 6 000 units 492033

Hickory Company manufactures two products – 14,000 units of Product Y and 6,000 units of Product Z. The company uses a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor-hours. It is considering implementing an activity-based costing (ABC) system that allocates all of its manufacturing overhead to four cost pools. The following additional information is available for the company as a whole and for Products Y and Z.

Activity Cost Pool

Activity Measure

Activity Measure

Expected

Activity

Machining

Machine Hours

$200,000.00

10,000

MHs

Machine Setups

Number of Setups

$100,000.00

200

setups

Production design

Number of products

$84,000.00

2

products

General Factory

Direct Labor Hours

$300,000.00

12,000

DLHs

Activity Measure

Product Y

Product Z

Machining

7,000

3,000

Machine Setups

50

150

Production design

1

1

General Factory

8,000

4,000

Required:

1. What is the company’s plantwide overhead rate?

2. Using the plantwide overhead rate, how much manufacturing overhead cost is allocated to Product Y? How much is allocated to Product Z?

3. What is the activity rate for the Machining activity cost pool?

4. What is the activity rate for the Machine Setups activity cost pool?

5. What is the activity rate for the Product Design activity cost pool?

6. What is the activity rate for the General Factory activity cost pool?

7. Which of the four activities is a batch-level activity? Why?

8. Which of the four activities is a product-level activity? Why?

9. Using the ABC system, how much total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Y?

10. Using the ABC system, how much total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Z?

11. Using the plantwide overhead rate, what percentage of the total overhead cost is allocated to Product Y? What percentage is allocated to Product Z?

12. Using the ABC system, what percentage of the Machining cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?

13. Using the ABC system, what percentage of Machine Setups cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?

14. Using the ABC system, what percentage of Product Design cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?

15. Using the ABC system, what percentage of General Factory cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?

martinez company s relevant range of production is 7 500 units to 12 500 units 492034

Martinez Company’s relevant range of production is 7,500 units to 12,500 units. When it produces and sells 10,000 units, its unit costs are as follows:

Amt per unit

Direct Material

$6.00

Direct Labor

$3.50

Variable manufacturing overhead

$1.50

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$4.00

Fixed selling expense

$3.00

Fixed administrative expense

$2.00

Sales commissions

$1.00

Variable administrative expense

$0.50

Required

1. For financial accounting purposes, what is the total amount of product costs incurred to make 10,000 units?

2. For financial accounting purposes, what is the total amount of period costs incurred to sell 10,000 units?

3. If 8,000 units are sold, what is the variable cost per unit sold?

4. If 12,500 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold?

5. If 8,000 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold?

6. If 12,500 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold?

7. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the average fixed manufacturing cost per unit produced?

8. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the average fixed manufacturing cost per unit produced?

9. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the total amount of fixed manufacturing cost incurred to support this level of production?

10. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the total amount of fixed manufacturing cost incurred to support this level of production?

11. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost incurred to support this level of production? What is this total amount expressed on a per unit basis?

12. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost incurred to support this level of production? What is the total amount expressed on a per unit basis?

13. If the selling price is $22 per unit, what is the contribution margin per unit sold?

14. If 11,000 units are produced, what are the total amounts of direct and indirect manufacturing costs incurred to support this level of production?

15. What total incremental costs will Martinez incur if it increases production from 10,000 to 10,001 units?

morganton company makes one product and it provided the following information to hel 492035

Morganton Company makes one product and it provided the following information to help prepare the master budget for its first four months of operation

a. The budget selling price per unit is $70. Budgeted unit sales for June, July, August and September are 8,400, 10,000, 12,000 and 13,000 units respectively. All sales are on credit

b. Forty percent of credit sales are collected in the month of sale and 60% in the following month

c. The ending finish goods inventory equals 20% of the following months unit sales

d. The ending raw materials inventory equals 10% if the following months raw production needs each unit of finished goods require 5 pounds of raw materials.

The raw materials cost $2 per pound

e. 30% of raw materials purchases are paid for the month of purchase and 70% in the following month

f. The direct labor wage is $15 per hour. Each unit of finished goods require 2 labor direct labor hours

g. The variable selling and administrative expense per unit sold is $1.80. The fixed selling and administrative expense per month is $60,000.

Required:

1. What are the budgeted sales for July?

2. What are the expected cash collections for July?

3. What is the accounts receivable balance at the end of July?

4. According to the production budget, how many units should be produced in July?

5. If 61,000 pounds of raw materials are needed to meet production in August, how many pounds of raw materials should be purchased in July?

6. What is the estimated cost of raw materials purchases for July?

7. If the cost of raw materials purchases in June is $88,000, what are the estimated cash disbursements for raw materials purchases in July?

8. What is the estimated accounts payable balance at the end of July?

9. What is the estimated raw materials inventory balance at the end of July?

10. What is the total estimated direct labor cost for July assuming the direct labor workforce is adjusted to match the hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced?

11. If the company always uses an estimated predetermined plant wide overhead rate of $10 per direct labor-hour, what is the estimated unit product cost?

12. What is the estimated finished goods inventory balance at the end of July?

13. What is the estimated cost of goods sold and gross margin for July?

14. What is the estimated total selling and administrative expense for July?

15. What is the estimated net operating income for July?

acc504 frederick clinic deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received 492036

Frederick Clinic deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011, its Cash account shows a $13,865 debit balance. Frederick Clinic’s June 30 bank statement shows $13,635 on deposit in the bank.

a. Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $2,557.

b. The June 30 bank statement included a $85 debit memorandum for bank services.

c. Check No. 919, listed with the canceled checks, was correctly drawn for $589 in payment of a utility bill on June 15. Frederick Clinic mistakenly recorded it with a debit to Utilities Expense and a credit to Cash in the amount of $598.

d. The June 30 cash receipts of $2,711 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement.

Prepare a bank reconciliation for Frederick Clinic using the above information (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response):

garth brooks specialty company a division of fresh horses inc manufactures three mod 492037

P9-9 (Statement and Note Disclosure, LCM, and Purchase Commitment)

Garth Brooks Specialty Company, a division of Fresh Horses Inc., manufactures three models of gear shift components for bicycles that are sold to bicycle manufacturers, retailers, and catalog outlets. Since beginning operations in 1975, Brooks has used normal absorption costing and has assumed a first-in, first-out cost flow in its perpetual inventory system. The balances of the inventory accounts at the end of Brooks’s fiscal ear, November 30, 2007, are shown below. The inventories are stated at cost before any year-end adjustments.

Finished goods

647,000

Work-in-process

112,500

Raw materials

240,000

Factory supplies

69,000

The following information relates to Brooks’s inventory and operations.

1.The finished goods inventory consists of the items analyzed below.

Cost

Market

Down tube shifter

Standard model

67,500

67,000

Click adjustment model

94,500

87,000

Deluxe model

108,000

110,000

Total down tube shifters

270,000

264,000

Bar end shifter

Standard model

83,000

90,050

Click adjustment model

99,000

97,550

Total bar end shifters

182,000

187,600

Head tube shifter

Standard model

78,000

77,650

Click adjustment model

117,000

119,300

Total head tube shifters

195,000

196,950

Total finished goods

647,000

648,550

2. One-half of the head tube shifter finished goods inventory is held by catalog outlets on consignment.

3. Three-quarters of the bar end shifter finished goods inventory has been pledged as collateral for a bank loan.

4. One-half of the raw materials balance represents derailleurs acquired at a contracted price 20 percent above the current market price. The market value of the rest of the raw materials is $127,400.

5. The total market value of the work-in-process inventory is $108,700.

6. Included in the cost of factory supplies are obsolete items with an historical cost of $4,200. The market value of the remaining factory supplies is $65,900.

7. Brooks applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to each of the three types of shifters in finished goods inventory. For each of the other three inventory accounts, Brooks applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to the total of each inventory account.

8. Consider all amounts presented above to be material in relation to Brooks’ financial statements taken as a whole.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the inventory section of Brooks’s balance sheet as of November 30, 2007, including any required note(s).

(b) Without prejudice to your answer to (a), assume that the market value of Brooks’s inventories is less than cost. Explain how this decline would be presented in Brooks’s income statement for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

(c) Assume the Brooks has a firm purchase commitment for the same type of derailleur included in the raw materials inventory as of November 30, 2012, and that the purchase commitment is at a contract priced 15% greater than the current market price. These derailleurs are to be delivered to Brooks after November 30, 2012. Discuss the impact, if any, that this purchase commitment would have on Brooks’s financial statements prepared for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

acc423 adriana lopez expected sales of her line of computer workstation furniture to 492038

Adriana Lopez expected sales of her line of computer workstation furniture to equal 300 workstations (at a sales price of $3,000) for 2010. The workstations’ manufacturing costs include the following.

Direct materials

$800 per unit

Direct labor

$400 per unit

Variable overhead

$100 per unit

Fixed overhead

$24,000 per year

The selling expenses related to these workstations follow.

Variable selling expenses

$50 per unit

Fixed selling expenses

$4,000 per year

Adriana is considering how many workstations to produce in 2010. She is confident that she will be able to sell any workstations in her 2010 ending inventory during 2011. However, Adriana does not want to overproduce as she does not have sufficient storage space for many more workstations.

Required

1. Compute Success Systems’ absorption costing income assuming

a. 300 workstations are produced.

b. 320 workstations are produced.

2. Compute Success Systems’ variable costing income assuming

a. 300 workstations are produced.

b. 320 workstations are produced.

3. Explain to Adriana any differences in the income figures determined in parts 1 and 2. How should Adriana use the information from parts 1 and 2 to help make production decisions?

brannon company manufactures ceiling fans and uses an activity based costing system 492039

Brannon Company manufactures ceiling fans and uses an activity-based costing system.

Each ceiling fan consists of 20 separate parts totaling $95 in direct materials, and requires 2.5 hours of machine time to produce. There are no direct labor costs. Additional information follows:

Activity

Allocation Base

Cost Allocation Rate

Materials handling

Number of parts

$ .08

Machining

Machine hours

$7.20

Assembling

Number of parts

$.35

Packaging

Number of finished units

$2.70

What is the total manufacturing cost per ceiling fan?

ace plastics produces many different kinds of products all in one manufacturing faci 492040

Ace Plastics produces many different kinds of products all in one manufacturing facility.

They have identified four activities for their costing system:

Materials management – allocated by number of purchase orders

Chemical processing – allocated on metric tons

Molding – allocated on direct labor hours

Packaging – allocated by number of units produced

The activity rates are as follows:

Materials management

$12.00

Per purchase order

Chemical processing

$ 7.50

Per metric ton

Molding

$24.00

Per direct labor hour

Packaging

$ 0.10

Per unit

Ace received an order for 3,000 plastic toys. The engineering design shows that the order will require $540 of direct material cost in total, $90 of direct labor cost, will require 4 purchase orders, will use 2 metric tons of chemical base, will need 8 direct labor hours, and will produce 3.000 units of product.

What will the full production cost of the order be?

freedo company s fiscal year ends on june 30 the following accounts are found in its 492041

Freedo Company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. The following accounts are found in its job order cost accounting system for the first month of the new fiscal year.

Other data:

1. On July 1, two jobs were in process: Job No. 4085 and Job No. 4086, with costs of $19,000 and $8,200, respectively.

2. During July, Job Nos. 4087, 4088, and 4089 were started. On July 31, only Job No. 4089 was unfinished. This job had charges for direct materials $2,000 and direct labor $1,000, plus manufacturing overhead. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 130% of direct labor cost.

3. On July 1, Job No. 4084, costing $135,000, was in the finished goods warehouse. On July 31, Job No. 4088, costing $143,000, was in finished goods.

4. Overhead was $3,000 underapplied in July.

Instructions

List the letters (a) through (n) and indicate the amount pertaining to each letter. Show computations

lester s home healthcare services lhhs was organized on january 1 2005 by four frien 492042

Determining Financial Statement Effects of Various

Transactions

Lester’s Home Healthcare Services (LHHS) was organized on January 1, 2005, by four friends. Each organizer invested $10,000 in the company and, in turn, was issued 8,000 shares of stock.

To date, they are the only stockholders. During the first month (January 2005), the company had the following six events:

a. Collected a total of $40,000 from the organizers and, in turn, issued the shares of stock.

b. Purchased a building for $65,000, equipment for $16,000, and three acres of land for $12,000; paid $13,000 in cash and signed a note for the balance, which is due to be paid in 15 years.

c. One stockholder reported to the company that 500 shares of his Lester’s stock had been sold and transferred to another stockholder for $5,000 cash.

d. Purchased supplies for $3,000 cash.

e. Sold one acre of land for $4,000 cash to another company.

f. Lent one of the shareholders $5,000 for moving costs, receiving a signed six-month note from the shareholder.

Required:

1. Was Lester’s Home Healthcare Services organized as a partnership or corporation?

Explain the basis for your answer.

2. During the first month, the records of the company were inadequate. You were asked to prepare the summary of the preceding transactions. To develop a quick assessment of their economic effects on Lester’s Home Healthcare Services, you have decided to complete the spreadsheet that follows and to use plus (+) for increases and minus (-) for decreases for each account. The first transaction is used as an example.

3. Did you include the transaction between the two stockholders-event c-in the spreadsheet? Why?

4. Based only on the completed spreadsheet, provide the following amounts (show computations):

a. Total assets at the end of the month.

b. Total liabilities at the end of the month.

c. Total stockholders’ equity at the end of the month.

d. Cash balance at the end of the month.

e. Total current assets at the end of the month.

5. As of January 31, 2005, has the financing for LHHS’S investment in assets primarily come from liabilities or stockholders’ equity?

santana rey owner of business solutions decides to diversify her business by also ma 492043

Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, decides to diversify her business by also manufacturing computer workstation furniture.

Required:

1. Classify the following manufacturing costs of Business Solutions by behavior and traceability.

Product Costs

Costs by Behavior

Costs by Traceability

Variable

Fixed Direct

Indirect

1. Monthly flat fee to clean workshop

2. Laminate coverings for desktops

3. Taxes on assembly workshop

4. Glue to assemble workstation component parts

5. Wages of desk assembler

6. Electricity for workshops

7. Depreciation on tools

2. Prepare a manufacturing statement for Business Solutions for the month ended January 31, 2012. Assume the following manufacturing costs:

Direct materials

2,200

Factory overhead

490

Direct labor

900

Beginning goods in process: none (December 31, 2011)

Ending goods in process: $540 (January 31, 2012)

Beginning finished goods inventory: none (December 31, 2011)

Ending finished goods inventory: $350 (January 31, 2012)

3. Preparing the cost of goods sold section of a partial income statement for Business Solutions for the month ended January 31, 2012.

use the following selected data from business solutions income statement for the thr 492044

Use the following selected data from Business Solutions’ income statement for the three months ended March 31, 2012, and from its March 31, 2012, balance sheet to complete the requirements below: computer services revenue, $25,307; net sales (of goods), $18,693; total sales and revenue, $44,000; cost of goods sold, $14,052; net income, $18,833; quick assets, $90,924; current assets, $95,568; total assets, $120,268; current liabilities, $875; total liabilities, $875; and total equity, $119,393.

Required

1. Compute the gross margin ratio (both with and without services revenue) and net profit margin ratio.

2. Compute the current ratio and acid-test ratio.

3. Compute the debt ratio and equity ratio.

4. What percent of its assets are current? What percent are long term?

santana rey owner of business solutions decides to prepare a statement of cash flows 492045

Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, decides to prepare a statement of cash flows for her business. (Although the serial problem allowed for various ownership changes in earlier chapters, we will prepare the statement of cash flows using the following financial data.)

Business Solutions

Income Statement

For Three Months Ended March 31, 2012

Computer service revenue

25,307

Net sales

18,693

Total revenue

44,000

Cost of goods sold

14,052

Depreciation expense – Office equipment

400

Depreciation expense – Computer equipment

1,250

Wages expense

3,250

Insurance expense

555

Rent expense

2,475

Computer supplies expense

1,305

Advertising expense

600

Mileage expense

320

Repairs expense

960

Total expenses

25,167

Net income

$18,833

Business Solutions

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31, 2011 and March 31, 2012

Assets

Cash

68,057

48,372

Accounts receivable

22,867

5,668

Merchandise inventory

704

Computer supplies

2,005

580

Prepaid insurance

1,110

1,665

Prepaid rent

825

825

Office equipment

8,000

8,000

Accumulated depreciation – Office equipment

(800)

(400)

Computer equipment

20,000

20,000

Accumulated depreciation – Computer equipment

(2,500)

(1,250)

Total Assets

$120,268

$83,460

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts payable

1,100

Wages payable

875

500

Unearned computer service revenue

1,500

Common stock

98,000

73,000

Retained earnings

21,393

7,360

Total Liabilities and Equity

$120,268

$83,460

Required:

Prepare a statement of cash flows for Business Solutions using the indirect method for the three months ended March 31, 2012. Recall that the owner Santana Rey contributed $25,000 to the business in exchange for additional stock in the first quarter of 2012 and has received $4,800 in cash dividends.

santana rey has consulted with her local banker and is considering financing an expa 492046

Santana Rey has consulted with her local banker and is considering financing an expansion of her business by obtaining a long-term bank loan. Selected account balances at March 31, 2012 for Business Solutions follow.

Total Assets 120,268

Total liabilities 875

Total equity 119,393

Required:

1. The bank has offered a long-term secured note to Business Solutions. The bank’s loan procedures require that a client’s debt-to-equity ratio not exceed 0.8. As of March 31, 2012, what is the maximum amount that Business Solutions could borrow from this bank (rounded to nearest dollar)?

2. If Business Solutions borrows the maximum amount allowed from the bank, what percentage of assets would be financed (a) by debt and (b) by equity?

3. What are some factors Santana Rey should consider before borrowing the funds?

adriana lopez had consulted with her local banker and is considering financing an ex 492047

Adriana Lopez had consulted with her local banker and is considering financing an expansion of her business by obtaining a long-term bank loan. Selected account balances at March 31, 2008, for Success Systems follows.

Total assets

$147,529

Total Liabilities

$1,050

Total Equity

$146,479

Required:

1. The boxing has offered a long-term secured note to Success Systems. The bank’s loan procedures require that a client’s debt-to-equity ration not exceed 0.8. As of March 31, 2008, what is the maximum amount that Success Systems could borrow from this bank?

2. If Success Systems borrows the maximum amount allowed from the bank, what percentage of assets would be financed (a) by debt, and (b) by equity?

3. What are some factors Lopez should consider before borrowing the funds?

adriana lopez created success systems on october 1 2007 the company had been success 492048

Adriana Lopez created Success Systems on October 1, 2007. The company had been successful, and Adriana plans to expand her business. She believes that an additional $100,000 is needed and is investigating three funding sources.

a. Adriana sister Cicely is willing to invest $100,000 in the business as a common shareholder. Since Adriana currently has $120,000 invested in the business. Cicely’s invest will mean that Adriana will maintain about 55% ownership, and Cicely will have 45% ownership of Success Systems.

b. Adriana’s uncle Marcello is willing to invest $100,000 in the business as a preferred shareholder. Marcello would purchase 1,000 shares of $100 par value, 7% preferred stock.

c. Adriana’s banker is willing to lend her $100,000 on a 7%, 10-year note payable. Adriana would make monthly payments of $1,160.00 per month for 10 years.

Required:

1. Prepare the journal entry to reflect the initial $100,000 investment under each of the options (a), (b), (c).

2. Evaluate the three proposals for expansion, providing the pros and cons of each option.

3. Which option do you recommend Adrian adopt? Explain.

the classic theater opened on april 1 all facilities were completed on march 31 492049

Financial Accounting

The Classic Theater opened on April 1. All facilities were completed on March 31. At this time, the ledger showed: No. 101 Cash $7,009, No. 140 Land $8,991, No. 145 Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $6,991, No. 157 Equipment $7,009, No. 201 Accounts Payable $3,009, No. 275 Mortgage Payable $6,991, and No. 311 Common Stock $20,000. During April, the following events and transactions occurred.

Apr. 2 Paid film rental of $1,023 on first movie.

3 Ordered two additional films at $1,709 each.

9 Received $2,798 cash from admissions.

10 Made $2,452 payment on mortgage and $1,430 for accounts payable due.

11 Classic Theater contracted with D. Zarle Company to operate the concession stand.

Zarle is to pay 16% of gross concession receipts (payable monthly) for the rental of the concession stand.

12 Paid advertising expenses $346.

20 Received one of the films ordered on April 3 and was billed $1,709. The film will be shown in April.

25 Received $5,289 cash from admissions.

29 Paid salaries $1,144.

30 Received statement from D. Zarle showing gross concession receipts of $1,900 and the balance due to The Classic Theater of $304 ($1,900 X 16%) for April. Zarle paid one-half of the balance due and will remit the remainder on May 5.

30 Prepaid $875 rental on special film to be run in May.

In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts shows No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 136 Prepaid Rent, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 429 Rent Revenue, No.610 Advertising Expense, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.

Instructions:

a. Enter the beginning balances in the ledger as of April 1. Insert a check mark (v) in the reference columns of the ledger for the beginning balance.

b. Journalize the April transactions.

c. Post the April journal entries to the ledger. Assume that all entries are posted from page 1 of the journal.

d. Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2008.

the monteiro manufacturing corporation manufactures and sells folding umbrellas 492051

Budgeted profit, what-if analysis

The Monteiro Manufacturing Corporation manufactures and sells folding umbrellas. The corporation’s condensed income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, follows:

Sales (200,000 units)

1,000,000

Cost of goods sold

600,000

Gross margin

400,000

Selling expenses

150,000

Administrative expenses

100,000

250,000

150,000

Monteiro’s budget committee has estimated the following changes for 2012:

30% increase in number of units sold

20% increase in material cost per unit

15% increase in direct labor cost per unit

10% increase in variable indirect cost per unit

5% increase in indirect fixed costs

8% increase in selling expenses, arising solely from increased volume 6% increase in administrative expenses, reflecting anticipated higher wage and supply price levels

Any changes in administrative expenses caused solely by increased sales volume are considered immaterial.

Because inventory quantities remain fairly constant, the budget committee considered that for budget purposes any change in inventory valuation can be ignored. The composition of the cost of a unit of finished product during 2011 for materials, direct labor, and manufacturing support, respectively, was in the ratio of 3:2:1. In 2011, $40,000 of manufacturing support was for fixed costs. No changes in production methods or credit policies were contemplated for 2012.

Required:

(a) Compute the unit sales price at which the Monteiro Manufacturing Corporation must sell its umbrellas in 2012 in order to earn a budgeted profit of $200,000.

(b) Unhappy about the prospect of an increase in selling price, Monteiro’s sales manager wants to know how many units must be sold at the old price to earn the $200,000 budgeted profit. Compute the number of units that must be sold at the old price to earn $200,000.

(c) Believing that the estimated increase in sales is overly optimistic, one of the company’s directors wants to know what annual profit is likely if the selling price determined in part a is adopted but the increase in sales volume is only 10%. Compute the budgeted profit in the case.

axillar beauty products corporation is considering the production of a new condition 492052

Axillar Beauty Products Corporation is considering the production of a new conditioning shampoo that will require the purchase of new mixing machinery. The machinery will cost $375,000, is expected to have a useful life of 10 years, and is expected to have a salvage value of $50,000 at the end of 10 years. The machinery will also need a $35,000 overhaul at the end of Year 6. A $40,000 increase in working capital will be needed for this investment project. The working capital will be released at the end of the 10 years. The new shampoo is expected to generate net cash inflows of $85,000 per year for each of the 10 years. Axillar’s discount rate is 16%.

Required:

a. What is the net present value of this investment opportunity?

b. Based on your answer to (a) above, should Axillar go ahead with the new conditioning shampoo?

industrial supply corporation uses the weighted average method in its process costin 492053

Industrial Supply Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.

Work in process, beginning:

Units in beginning work in process inventory

400

Materials costs

6,900

Conversion costs

2,500

Percentage complete for materials

80%

Percentage complete for conversion

15%

Units started into production during the month

6,000

Units transferred to the next department

5,200

Materials costs added during the month

112,500

Conversion costs added during the

210,300

Ending work in process:

Units in ending work-in-process inventory

1,200

Percentage complete for materials

75%

Percentage complete for conversion

30%

Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department.

acct344 for each of the following subsequent post balance sheet events indicate whet 492007

(Post-Balance-Sheet Events)

For each of the following subsequent (post-balance-sheet) events, indicate whether a company should (a) adjust the financial statements, (b) disclose in notes to the financial statements, or (c) neither adjust nor disclose.

Sr. No. Subsequent (post balance sheet) Events 1 Settlement of federal tax case at a cost considerably in excess of the amount expected at year-end

2 Introduction of a new product line.

3 Loss of assembly plant due to fire.

4 Sale of a significant portion of the company’s assets.

5 Retirement of the company president.

6 Issuance of a significant number of shares of common stock.

7 Loss of a significant customer.

8 Prolonged employee strike.

9 Material loss on a year-end receivable because of a customer’s bankruptcy.

10 Hiring of a new president.

11 Settlement of prior year’s litigation against the company.

12 Merger with another company of comparable size.

acct344 on july 1 2012 torvill construction company inc contracted to build an offic 492008

(Long-term Contract with an Overall Loss)

On July 1, 2012, Torvill Construction Company Inc. contracted to build an office building for Gumbel Corp. for a total contract price of $1,900,000. On July 1, Torvill estimated that it would take between 2 and 3 years to complete the building. On December 31, 2014, the building was deemed substantially completed. Following are accumulated contract costs incurred, estimated costs to complete the contract, and accumulated billings to Gumbel for 2012, 2013, and 2014.

At 12/31/12

At 12/31/13

At 12/31/14

Contract costs incurred

300,000

1,200,000

2,100,000

Estimated costs to complete the contract

1,200,000

800,000

Billings to Gumbel

300,000

1,100,000

1,850,000

Instructions:

a. Using the percentage-of-completion method, prepare schedules to compute the profit or loss to be recognized as a result of this contract for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, 2014. (Ignore income taxes).

b. Using the completed-contract method, prepare schedules to compute the profit or loss to be recognized as a result of this contract for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, and 2014 (Ignore income taxes).

assume that in year 1 the ending merchandise inventory is overstates by 30 000 492014

Assume that in year 1, the ending merchandise inventory is overstates by $30,000. If this is the only error in Years 1 and 2, fill in the items below, indicating which items will be understated, overstated, or correctly stated for Years 1 and 2.

Item

Year 1

Year 2

Ending Inventory

Beginning Inventory

Cost of Goods Sold

the following information was made available from the income statement and balance s 492015

The following information was made available from the income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company:

Item

40543

40178

Accounts Receivable

53400

58600

Accounts Payable

35600

32700

Merchandise Inventory

85,000

79,000

Sales

(2010)

243000

Interest Revenue

(2010)

5,600

Dividend Revenue

(2010)

1,200

Tax Expense

(2010)

12,300

Salaries Expense

(2010)

28,000

COGS

(2010)

65,000

Interest Expense

(2010)

3,600

Operating Expenses

28,500

Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.

delaware bay chemical company produces three products ethylene butane and ester 492016

Product pricing and profit analysis with bottleneck operations

Delaware Bay Chemical Company produces three products: ethylene, butane, and ester.

Each of these products has high demand in the market, and Delaware Bay Chemical is able to sell as much as it can produce of all three. The reaction operation is a bottleneck in the process and is running at 100% of capacity.Delaware Baywants to improve chemical operation profitability. The variable conversion cost is $7 per process hour. The fixed cost is $550,000. In addition, the cost analyst was able to determine the following information about the three products:

Ethylene

Butane

Ester

Budgeted units produced

9000

9,000

9,000

Total process hours per unit

3

3

2

Reactor hours per unit

1

0.8

0.5

Unit selling price

$165

$128

$115

Direct materials cost per unit

$110

$75

$85

The reaction operation is part of the total process for each of these three products. Thus, for example, 1.0 of the 3 hours required to process ethylene are associated with the reactor.

Instructions:

1. Determine the unit contribution margin for each product.

2. Provide an analysis to determine the relative product profitability, assuming that the reactor is a bottleneck.

3. Assume that management wishes to improve profitability by increasing prices on selected products. At what price would ethylene and ester need to be offered in order to produce the same relative profitability as butane?

bio care inc a manufacturer of disposable medical supplies prepared the following fa 492017

Standard factory overhead variance report

Bio-Care, Inc., a manufacturer of disposable medical supplies, prepared the following factory overhead cost budget for the Assembly Department for March 2010. The company expected to operate the department at 100% of normal capacity of 18,000 hours.

Variable Cost

Indirect factory wages

135,000

Power and lights

93,600

Indirect materials

25,200

Total variable cost

253,800

Fixed cost

Supervisory salaries

72,000

Depreciation of plant & equip

51,500

Insurance & property tax

24,100

Total fixed cost

147,600

Total factory overhead cost

401,400

During March, the department operated at 16,900 hours, and the factory overhead costs incurred were indirect factory wages, $126,320; power and light, $88,110; indirect materials, $23,220; supervisory salaries, $72,000; depreciation of plant and equipment, $51,500; and insurance and property taxes, $24,100.

Instructions:

Prepare a factory overhead cost variance report for March. To be useful for cost control, the budgeted amounts should be based on 16,900 hours.

on march 1 midway distribution company is considering leasing a building and buying 492018

Differential analysis report involving opportunity costs

On March 1, Midway Distribution Company is considering leasing a building and buying the necessary equipment to operate a public warehouse. Alternatively, the company could use the funds to invest in $750,000of 7% U.S. Treasury bonds that mature in 14 years. The bonds could be purchased at face value. The following data have been assembled: Cost of equipment $750,000

Life of equipment 14 years

Estimated residual value of equipment $76,000 Yearly costs to operate the warehouse, excluding depreciation of equipment $195,000 Yearly expected revenues—years 1–7 $330,000

Yearly expected revenues—years 8–14 $280,000

Instructions:

1. Prepare a report as of March 1, 2010, presenting a differential analysis of the proposed operation of the warehouse for the 14 years as compared with present conditions.

2. Based on the results disclosed by the differential analysis, should the proposal be accepted?

3. If the proposal is accepted, what is the total estimated income from operations of the warehouse for the 14 years?

presented here is information for willingham inc for 2010 492019

Presented here is information for Willingham Inc. for 2010.

Retained earnings, January 1

130,000

Revenue from legal services

400,000

Total expenses

170,000

Dividends

82,000

Instructions:

Prepare the 2010 retained earnings statement for Willingham Inc.

mellilo corporation issued 5 million of 20 year 9 5 percent bonds on july 1 2007 at 492021

Mellilo Corporation issued $5 million of 20-year, 9.5 percent bonds on July 1, 2007, at 98.

Interest is due on June 30 and December 31 of each year, and all of the bonds in the issue mature on June 30, 2027. Mellilo’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

Prepare the following journal entries:

a. July 1, 2007, to record the issuance of bonds.

b. December 31, 2007, to pay interest, amortize the bond discount.

c. June 30, 2027, to pay interest, amortize the bond discount, and retire the bonds at maturity (make two separate entries).

d. Briefly explain the effect of amortizing the bond discount upon (1) annual net income and (2) annual net cash flow from operating activities. (Ignore possible income tax effects)

the mill run golf amp country club details the following accounts in its financial s 492022

The Mill Run Golf & Country Club details the following accounts in its financial statements.

(a) (b)

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

Accounts receivable

Property, plant, and equipment

Food and beverage operations revenue

Golf course operations revenue

Inventory

Long-term debt

Office and general expense

Professional fees expense

Wages and benefits expense

Instructions

a) Classify each of the above accounts as an asset (A), liability (L), stockholders’ equity (SE), revenue (R), or expense (E) item.

b) Classify each of the above accounts as a financing activity (F), investing activity (I), or operating activity (O). If you believe a particular account doesn’t fit in any of these activities, explain why.

acc310 assume that the projected number of units sold for the year is 7 000 492023

Basic Decision Analysis Using CVP

Assume that the projected number of units sold for the year is 7,000. Consider requirements (b), (c), and (d) independently of each other.

Required

a. What will the operating profit be?

b. What is the impact on operating profit if the sales price decreases by 10 percent? Increase by 20 percent?

c. What is the impact on operating profit if variable costs per unit decrease by 10 percent? Increase by 20 percent?

d. Suppose that fixed costs for the year are 10 percent lower than projected, and variable costs per unit are 10 percent higher than projected. What impact will these cost changes have on operating profit for the year? Will profit go up? Down? By how much?

acc310 cambridge inc is considering the introduction of a new calculator with the fo 492024

Cambridge, Inc., is considering the introduction of a new calculator with the following price and cost characteristics:

Sales price (each)

18

Variable costs (each)

10

Fixed costs per month

20,000

Required

a. What number must Cambridge sell per month to break even?

b. What number must Cambridge sell to make an operating profit of $16,000 for the month?

during the month of january 20 2 tj s specialty shop engaged in the following transa 492025

During the month of January 20-2, TJ’s Specialty Shop engaged in the following transactions:

Jan. 1 Sold merchandise on account to Anne Clark, $3,000, plus tax of $150.SaleNo. 643.

2 Issued Check No. 818 to Nathen Co. in payment of January 1 balance of $800,

less 2% discount.

3 Purchased merchandise on account from West Wholesalers, $1,500. Invoice No. 678, dated January 3, terms 2/15, n/30.

4 Purchased merchandise on account from Owen Enterprises, $2,000. Invoice No. 767, dated January 4, terms 2/10, n/30.

4 Issued Check No. 819 in payment of telephone expense for the month of January, $180.

8 Sold merchandise for cash, $3,600, plus tax of $180.

9 Received payment from Lucy Greene in full settlement of account, $1,491.

10 Issued Check No. 820 to West Wholesalers in payment of January 1 balance of $1,200.

12 Sold merchandise on account to Martha Boyle, $1,000, plus tax of $50.SaleNo.644.

12 Received payment from Anne Clark on account, $2,100.

12 Issued Check No. 821 in payment of wages (Wages Expense) for the two-week period ending January 11, $1,100.

13 Issued Check No. 822 to Owen Enterprises in payment of January 4 purchase. Invoice No. 767, less 2% discount.

13 Martha Boyle returned merchandise for a credit, $800, plus sales tax of $40.

17 Returned merchandise to Evans Essentials for credit, $300.

22 Received payment from John Dempsey on account, $2,121.

Jan. 26 Issued Check No. 823 in payment of wages (Wages Expense) for the twoweek period ending January 25, $1,100.

27 Issued Check No. 824 in payment of utilities expense for the month of January, $630.

27 Sold merchandise on account to John Dempsey, $2,000, plus tax of $100. Sale No. 645.

Late in January, TJ’s agreed to sell the business to a competitor. To agree on a selling price, financial statements are needed as of January 31 and for the month of January 20-2. To prepare these financial statements, TJ’s must perform the same procedures it normally does at year-end.

At the end of January, the following adjustments (a)–(g) need to be made:

(a, b) Merchandise inventory as of January 31, $19,000.

(c) Unused supplies on hand, $115.

(d) Unexpired insurance on January 31, $968.

(e) Depreciation expense on the building for the month, $67.

(f) Depreciation expense on the store equipment for the month, $38.

(g) Wages earned but not paid as of January 31, $330.

if you are not using the working papers open a general ledger an accounts receivable 492026

For those not using working papers:

1. If you are not using the working papers, open a general ledger, an accounts receivable ledger, and an accounts payable ledger as of January 1. Enter the January 1 balance of each of the accounts, with a check mark in the Posting Reference column. The beginning balances for Part 2 are the same as the balances from your solution to Part 1 of Comprehensive Problem 2.

For working paper users and nonusers:

2. Enter transactions for the month of January in the general journal. Post immediately to the accounts receivable and accounts payable ledgers.

3. Post from the journal to the general ledger.

4. Prepare schedules of accounts receivable and accounts payable.

5. Prepare a month-end work sheet, income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet. The mortgage payable includes $600 that is due within one year.

6. Journalize and post adjusting entries.

7. Journalize and post closing entries.

8. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

acct344 glass company manufactures a product through a continuous single step proces 492027

Glass Company manufactures a product through a continuous single-step process. All materials are added at the beginning of processing. Production and cost data for the company for the current month are as follows.

Production

Units

In process, beginning of month (20% converted)

2,000

Started during current month

8,000

Completed and transferred to finished goods

5,500

In process, end of month (60% converted)

4,500

Manufacturing Costs

Work in process, beginning

-Materials

15,000

-Conversion

6,450

Production Costs Added

Materials

54,000

Direct labor cost

105,000

Factory overhead

36,150

Required:

Prepare a cost of production report for current month. Use Weighted-Average process costing.

acct344 all materials are added at the beginning of processing production and cost d 492028

Glass Company manufactures a product through a continuous single-step process.

All materials are added at the beginning of processing. Production and cost data for the company for the current month are as follows.

Production Data

Units

In process, beginning of month (20% converted)

2,000

Started during current month

8,000

Completed and transferred to finished goods

5,500

In process, end of month (60% converted)

2,500

Manufacturing Costs

Work in process, beginning

Materials

15,000

Conversion

6,450

21,450

Production Costs Added

Materials

54,000

Direct labor cost

105,000

Factory overhead cost

42,840

Required

Prepare a cost of production report for current month. Use FIFO process costing.

the inventory of oheto company on december 31 2013 consists of the following items 492029

The inventory of Oheto Company on December 31, 2013, consists of the following items.

Part No.

Quantity

Cost per unit

Cost to Replace per Unit

110

690

131

138

111

1,050

83

72

112

550

110

105

113

260

235

248

120

420

283

287

121a

$1,670

22-Jan-00

19

122

360

331

324

a Part No. 121 is obsolete and has a realizable value of $0.7 each as scrap.

Instructions:

(a) Determine the inventory as of December 31, 2013, by the lower-of-cost-ormarket method, applying this method directly to each item.

(b) Determine the inventory by the lower-of-cost-or-market method, applying the method to the total of the inventory.

astaire company uses the gross profit method to estimate inventory for monthly repor 492030

E9-12

Astaire Company uses the gross profit method to estimate inventory for monthly reporting purposes. Presented below is information for the month of May.

Inventory, May 1

172,000

Purchases (gross)

643,800

Freight-in

30,500

Sales

1,091,300

Sales returns

76,800

Purchase discounts

12,320

Instructions:

(a) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of sales.

(b) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of cost.

the city of pebble beach gives the company 5 acres of land as a plant site 492031

E10-12

Below are transactions related to Impala Company.

a. The City of Pebble Beach gives the company 5 acres of land as a plant site. The market value of this land is determined to be $90,000.

b. 14,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $55 per share are issued in exchange for land and buildings. The property has been appraised at a fair market value of $900,000, of which $186,500 has been allocated to land and $713,500 to buildings. The stock of Impala Company is not listed on any exchange, but a block of 100 shares was sold by a stockholder 12 months ago at $71 per share, and a block of 200 shares was sold by another stockholder 18 months ago at $63 per share.

c. No entry has been made to remove from the accounts for Materials, Direct Labor, and Overhead the amounts properly chargeable to plant asset accounts for machinery constructed during the year. The following information is given relative to costs of the machinery constructed.

Materials used

13,320

Factory supplies used

920

Direct labor incurred

16,820

Additional overhead (over regular) caused by construction of machinery, excluding factory supplies used 2,610

Fixed overhead rate applied to regular manufacturing operations 60% of direct labor cost

Cost of similar machinery if it had been purchased from outside suppliers 44,270

Instructions:

Prepare journal entries on the books of Impala Company to record these transactions. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

diego company manufactures one product that is sold for 80 per unit in two geographi 492032

Diego Company manufactures one product that is sold for $80 per unit in two geographic regions – The East and West Regions. The following information pertains to the company’s first year of operations in which it produced 40,000 units and sold 35,000.

Variable Cost Per Unit:

Manufacturing:

Direct Materials

$24.00

Direct Labor

$14.00

Variable Manufacturing Overhead

$2.00

Variable Selling/Admin

$4.00

Fixed Cost Per Year:

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead

$800,000.00

Fixed Selling and administrative

$496,000.00

The company sold 25,000 units in the East region and 10,000 units in the West region. It determined that $250,000 of its fixed selling and administrative expenses is traceable to the West region, $150,000 is traceable to the East region, and the remaining $96,000 is a common fixed cost. The company will continue to incur the total amount of its fixed manufacturing overhead costs as long as it continues to produce any amount of its only product.

Required: Answer each question independently based on the original data unless instructed otherwise. You do not need to prepare a segmented income statement until question 13.

1. What is the unit product cost under variable costing?

2. What is the unit product cost under absorption costing?

3. What is the company’s total contribution margin under variable costing?

4. What is the company’s net operating income under variable costing?

5. What is the company’s total gross margin under absorption costing?

6. What is the company’s net operating income under absorption costing?

7. What is the amount of the difference between the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes? What is the cause of this difference?

8. What is the company’s break even point in unit sales? Is it above or below the actual sales volume? Compare the break even sales volume to your answer for question 6 and comment.

9. If sales volumes in the East and West regions had been reversed, what would be the company’s overall break even point in unit sales?

10. What would have been the company’s variable costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question.

11. What would have been the company’s absorption costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question.

12. If the company produces 5,000 fewer units than it sells in its second year of operations, will absorption costing net operating income be higher or lower than variable costing net operating income in Year 2? Why? No calculations are necessary.

13. Prepare a contribution format segmented income statement that includes a Total column and columns for the East and West regions.

14. Diego is considering eliminating the West region because an internally generated report suggests the region’s total gross margin in the first year of operations was $50,000 less than its traceable fixed selling and administrative expenses. Diego believes that if it drops the West region, the East region’s sales will grow by 5% in Year 2. Using the contribution approach for analyzing segment profitability and assuming all else remains constant in Year 2, what would be the profit impact of dropping the West region in Year 2?

15. Assume the West region invests $30,000 in a new advertising campaign in Year 2 that increases its unit sales by 20%. If all else remains constant, what would be the profit impact of pursuing the advertising campaign?

adjusting entries posting and preparing an adjusted trial balance 491900

(Adjusting Entries, Posting, and Preparing an Adjusted Trial Balance)

Powerhouse Consulting

Chart of Accounts:

No. 101

Cash

No. 112

Accounts Receivable

No. 126

Supplies

No. 130

Prepaid Insurance

No. 149

Office Furniture

No. 150

Accumulated Depreciation – Office Furniture

No. 201

Accounts Payable

No. 209

Salaries Payable

No. 212

Travel Payable

No. 229

Unearned Revenue

No. 311

Common Stock

No. 400

Service Revenue

No. 717

Depreciation Expense

No. 722

Insurance Expense

No. 726

Rent Expense

No. 729

Salaries Expense

No. 731

Supplies Expense

No. 736

Travel Expense

Leo Drayton started his own consulting firm, Powerhouse Consulting, on August 1, 2010.

The trial balance at August 31, 2010 is as follows:

Powerhouse Consulting Trial Balance

August 31, 2010

Other Data:

1) $900 of supplies is on hand at the end of the month

2) Travel Expense incurred but not paid as of August 31, 2010 is $400

3) The insurance policy is for 2 years

4) $1,300 of the balance in the unearned revenue account has been earned at the end of the month.

5) Accrued salaries at the end of the month are $1,600

6) The office furniture is depreciated at a rate of $170 per month for 60 months

7) $1,200 of services earned has not been recorded or paid as of August 31, 2010.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for August on the tab labeled General Journal

(b) Enter the totals from the trial balance above as beginning balances on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts

(c) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts.

(Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)

(d) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at August 31, 2010 on the tab labeled Adjusted Trial Balance

the adjusted trial balance at march 31 2010 is as follows 491901

(Closing Entries and Preparing a Post-Closing Trial Balance)

The adjusted trial balance at March 31, 2010 is as follows:

Jazzy Manufacturing

Adjusted Trial Balance

March 31, 2010

Debit

Credit

Cash

11,400

Accounts Receivable

7,000

Prepaid Rent

2,000

Equipment

20,000

Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment

4,200

Notes Payable

5,000

Accounts Payable

4,950

Common Stock

20,000

Retained Earnings

5,800

Dividends

3,500

Service Revenue

14,500

Depreciation Expense

600

Rent Expense

500

Salaries Expense

9,450

Interest Expense

50

Interest Payable

50

Totals

54,500

54,500

Instructions

(a) Journalize the closing entries for Revenue and Expenses at March 31, 2010 on the tab labeled General Journal

(b) Post the closing entries for Revenue and Expenses to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts. (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)

(c) Journalize the closing entries for Income Summary and Dividends at March 31, 2010 on the tab labeled General Journal

(d) Post the closing entries for Income Summary and Dividends to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)

(e) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at March 31, 2010 on the tab labeled Post-Closing Trial Balance.

laughter landscaping has the following independent cases at the end of the year on d 491902

Journalizing adjusting entries

Laughter Landscaping has the following independent cases at the end of the year on December 31, 2014.

a. Each Friday, Laughter pays employees for the current week’s work. The amount of the weekly payroll is $7,000 for a five-day workweek. This year December 31 falls on a Wednesday.

b. Details of Prepaid insurance are shown in the account:

Prepaid Insurance

Jan 1. 4,500

Laughter prepays a full year’s insurance each year on January 1. Record insurance expense for the year ended December 31.

c. The beginning balance of Supplies was $4,000. During the year, Laughter purchased supplies for $5,200, and at December 31 the supplies on hand total $2,400.

d. Laughter designed a landscape plan, and the client paid Laughter $7,000 at the start of the project. Laughter recorded this amount as Unearned service revenue. The job will take several months to complete, and Laughter estimates that the company has earned 60% of the total revenue during the current year.

e. Depreciation for the current year includes Equipment, $3,700; and Trucks, $1,300.

Make a compound entry.

Requirement

1. Journalize the adjusting entry needed on December 31, 2014, for each of the previous items affecting Laughter Landscaping

issuing stock and preparing the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet 491904

Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet

Lincoln-Priest, Inc., was organized in 2011. At December 31, 2011, the Lincoln- Priest balance sheet reported the following stockholders’ equity:

Lincoln-Priest, Inc.

Stockholders’ Equity

December 31, 2011

Paid-in Capital:

Preferred Stock, 7%, $40 par, 110,000 shares authorized, none issued

Common stock, $1 par, 520,000 shares authorized, 61,000 shares issued and outstanding 61,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par – common

41,000

Total paid-in capital

102,000

Retained earnings

29,000

Total Stockholders’ Equity

$131,000

Requirements

1. During 2012, the company completed the following selected transactions.

Journalize each transaction. Explanations are not required.

a. Issued for cash 1,300 shares of preferred stock at par value.

b. Issued for cash 2,400 shares of common stock at a price of $5 per share.

c. Net income for the year was $74,000, and the company declared no dividends.

Make the closing entry for net income.

2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the Lincoln-Priest balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

connor company s budgeted prices for direct materials direct manufacturing labor and 491987

Flexible Budget

Connor Company’s budgeted prices for direct materials, direct manufacturing labor, and direct marketing (distribution) labor per attache case are $40, $8, $12, respectively. The president is pleased with the following performance report.

Actual Costs

Static Budget

Variance

Direct materials

364,000

400,000

36,000 F

Direct manufacturing labor

78,000

80,000

2,000 F

Direct marketing (distribution)labor

110,000

120,000

10,000 F

48,000 F

Actual output was 8,800 attache cases. Assume all three direct-cost items above are variable costs.

Is the president’s pleasure justified? Prepare revised performance report that uses flexible budget and a static budget.

utah utensil has developed a new kitchen utensil the firm has conducted significant 491988

Target Costing

Utah Utensil has developed a new kitchen utensil. The firm has conducted significant market research and estimated the following pattern for sales of the new product:

Year

Expected Volume (units)

Expected Price per unit

1

48,000

19

2

48,000

20

3

90,000

16

4

40,000

12

If the firm desires to net $3.50 per unit in profit over the life of the product, and selling and administrative expenses are expected to average $50,000 per year, what is the target cost to produce the new utensil?

ro day o inc manufactures belt buckles in a single step production process 491990

WA EUP & Cost Assignment.

Ro-day-o Inc. manufactures belt buckles in a single -step production process. The following information is available for June 2013:

Whole Units

Cost of Material

Beginning work in process

200,000

1,200,000

Units started during period

1,000,000

7,800,000

Units in ending inventory

300,000

Beginning inventory units were 100 percent complete as to material and 80% complete as to labor.

The ending inventory units were 100% complete as to material and 50% complete as to labor overhead is applied to production at the rate of 60% of direct labor cost.

a. Prepare a schedule to compute equivalent units of production by cost component assuming the weighted average method.

b. Determine the unit production costs for material and conversion.

Calculate the costs assigned to completed units and ending inventory for august 2013.

funtime inc makes small toys in a one department production process 491991

WA and FIFO EUP

Funtime Inc. makes small toys in a one-department production process. Plastic is added at the beginning of the process, all other materials are considered indirect.

The following information is available relative to September 2010 production activities: Beginning WIP Inventory: 15,000 toys (60% complete as to labor, 75% complete as to overhead).

Started into production: plastic for 620,000 toys. Ending WIP Inventory: 25,400 toys (35% complete as to labor, 60% complete as to overhead).

a. Compute the EUP for direct material, direct labor, and overhead using weighted average process costing.

b. Compute the EUP for direct material, direct labor, and overhead using FIFO process costing.

c. Reconcile the calculations in parts (a) and (b).

spruce enterprises operates a chain of lumber stores in 2008 corporate management ex 491992

Spruce Enterprises operates a chain of lumber stores. In 2008, corporate management examined industry-level data and determined the following performance targets for lumber retail stores:

Asset turnover

1.7

Profit margin

8.00%

The actual 2008 results for the company’s lumber retail stores area as follows:

Total assets at beginning of year

10,200,000

Total assets at end of year

12,300,000

Sales

28,250,000

Operating expenses

25,885,000

a. For 2008, how did the lumber retail stores perform relative to their industry norms?

b. Where, as indicated by the performance measures, are the most likely areas to improve performance in the retail lumber stores?

c. What are the advantages and disadvantages of setting a performance target at the start of the year compared with one that is determined at the end of the year based on actual industry performance?

the following transactions were completed by clark management company during the cur 491993

Entries related to uncollectible accounts

The following transactions were completed by Clark Management Company during the current fiscal year ended December 31:

July 5. Received 70% of the $21,000 balance owed by Dockins Co., a bankrupt business, and wrote off the remainder as uncollectible.

Sept. 21. Reinstated the account of Bart Tiffany, which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $4,875 cash in full payment of Tiffany’s account.

Oct. 19. Wrote off the $6,275 balance owed by Ski Time Co., which has no assets.

Nov. 6. Reinstated the account of Kirby Co., which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $4,750 cash in full payment of the account.

Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (compound entry): Maxie Co., $2,150; Kommers Co., $3,600; Helena Distributors, $5,500; Ed Ballantyne, $1,750.

Dec. 31. Based on an analysis of the $815,240 of accounts receivable, it was estimated that $16,750 will be uncollectible. Journalized the adjusting entry.

Instructions

1. Record the January 1 credit balance of $12,550 in a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

2. Journalize the transactions. Post each entry that affects the following selected T accounts and determine the new balances: Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Bad Debt Expense.

3. Determine the expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of

December 31.

4. Assuming that instead of basing the provision for uncollectible accounts on an analysis of receivables, the adjusting entry on December 31 had been based on an estimated expense of 1/4 of 1% of the net sales of $7,126,000 for the year, determine the following:

a. Bad debt expense for the year.

b. Balance in the allowance account after the adjustment of December 31.

c. Expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.

steelhead company supplies flies and fishing gear to sporting goods stores and outfi 491996

Allowance method for doubtful accounts

Steelhead Company supplies flies and fishing gear to sporting goods stores and outfitters throughout the western United States. The accounts receivable clerk for Steelhead prepared the following partially completed aging-of-receivables schedule as of the end of business on December 31, 2008.

Days Past Due Not Past Over

Customer Balance Due 1 – 30 31 – 60 61 – 90 91 – 120 120

Alexandria Fishery

15,000

15,000

Cutthroat Sports

5,500

5,500

Yellowstone Sports

2,900

2,900

Totals 895,900 454,800 249,500 101,700 33,900 32,100 23,900

Customer

Due Date

Balance

Baitfish Sports & Flies

21-Jun-07

$1,750

Kiwi Flies

9-Sep-07

$650

Adams Co.

30-Sep-07

$1,500

Bailey Sports

17-Oct-07

$600

Prince Sports

18-Nov-07

$950

Cahill Co.

28-Nov-07

$2,000

Wintson Company

1-Dec-07

$2,250

Goofus Bug Sports

6-Jan-08

$6,200

Steelhead Company has a past history of uncollectible accounts by age category.

Age Class Percent Uncollectible Not past due 2%

1-30 days past due 5

31-60 days past due 10

61-90 days past due 25

91-120 days past due 45

Over 120 days past due 90

Instructions:

1. Determine the number of days past due for each of the preceding accounts.

2. Complete the aging-of-receivables schedule.

3. Estimated the allowance for doubtful accounts, based on the aging-of-receivables schedule.

4. Assume that the allowance for doubtful accounts for Steelhead Company has a debit balance of $3,199 before adjustment on December 31, 2007. Journalize the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.

princeton fabrication inc produced and sold 1 200 units of the company s only produc 491998

Princeton Fabrication, Inc., produced and sold 1,200 units of the company’s only product in March. You have collected the following information from the accounting records:

Sales price (per unit)

$896

Manufacturing costs:

Fixed overhead (for the month)

100,800

Direct labor (per unit)

70

Direct materials (per unit)

224

Variable overhead (per unit).

140

Marketing and administrative costs:

Fixed costs (for the month)

134,400

Variable costs (per unit)

28

Required

a. Compute:

1. Variable manufacturing cost per unit.

2. Full cost per unit.

3. Variable cost per unit.

4. Full absorption cost per unit.

5. Prime cost per unit.

6. Conversion cost per unit.

7. Profit margin per unit.

8. Contribution margin per unit.

9. Gross margin per unit.

b. If the number of units decreases from 1,200 to 800, which is within the relevant range, will the fixed manufacturing cost per unit increase, decrease, or remain the same? Explain.

the following information relates to loveland company 491999

Comprehensive Income

The following information relates to Loveland Company:

Sales

600,000

Cost of goods sold

300,000

Other operating expenses

100,000

Interest expense

10,000

Income tax expense

70,000

In addition, the following events occurred during the year:

1. Loveland has an investment portfolio for long-term investment purposes. That portfolio decreased in value by $70,000 during the year.

2. Loveland owns a substantial amount of land. During the year, the land increased in value by $160,000.

3. Loveland has several foreign subsidiaries. The currencies in the countries where those subsidiaries are located declined in value (relative to the U.S. dollar) during the year. Accordingly, the computed value of the equity of those subsidiaries, in U.S. dollars, decreased by $60,000.

Required:

1. Compute Loveland’s comprehensive income for the year.

sunshine baking company is a diversified food products company with three operating 492000

Sunshine Baking Company is a diversified food products company with three operating divisions organized as investment centers. Condensed data taken from the records of the three divisions for the year ended June 30, 2010, are as follows:

Bread Division

Snack Cake

Division

Retail Bakeries

Division Sales

8100000

8700000

7800000

Cost of Goods Sold

4980000

5400000

4600000

Operating expenses

1,662,000

1,995,000

1,484,000

Invested assets

10,800,000

10,875,000

6,000,000

The management of Sunshine Baking Company is evaluating each division as a basis for planning a future expansion of operations.

Instructions

1. Prepare condensed divisional income statements for the three divisions, assuming that there were no service department charges.

2. Using the DuPont formula for rate of return on investment, compute the profit margin, investment turnover, and rate of return on investment for each division.

3. If available funds permit the expansion of operations of only one division, which of the divisions would you recommend for expansion, based on parts (1) and (2)?Explain.

justin zinder is a venture capitalist facing two alternative investment opportunitie 492001

P2-23A Analyzing operating leverage (Req A to C only)

Justin Zinder is a venture capitalist facing two alternative investment opportunities.

He intends to invest $1 million in a start-up firm. He is nervous, however, about future economic volatility. He asks you to analyze the following financial data for the past year’s operations of the two firms he is considering and give him some business advice.

Company Name

Ensley Kelley

Variable cost per unit (a) $21.00 $10.50

Sales revenue (8,000 units × $28.00) $224,000 $224,000

Variable cost (8,000 units × a) (168,000) (84,000)

Contribution margin $56,000 $140,000

Fixed cost (25,000) (109,000)

Net income $31,000 $31,000

Required:

a. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the operating leverage for each firm. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

b. If the economy expands in coming years, Ensley and Kelley will both enjoy a 10 percent per year increase in sales, assuming that the selling price remains unchanged. Compute the new net income for each firm and percentage change in net income. (Use unrounded values of operating leverage for calculation purpose.

Round your net income answers to the nearest dollar amount and percentage change answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)

c. If the economy contracts in coming years, Ensley and Kelley will both suffer a 10 percent decrease in sales volume, assuming that the selling price remains unchanged. Compute the new net income for each firm and percentage change in net income. (Use unrounded values of operating leverage for calculation purpose.

Negative values should be indicated by a minus sign. Round your net income answers to the nearest dollar amount and percentage change answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)

susan hicks operates a sales booth in computer software trade shows selling an accou 492002

Problem 2-20A Context-sensitive nature of cost behaviour classifications

Susan Hicks operates a sales booth in computer software trade shows, selling an accounting software package, Dollar System. She purchases the package from a software manufacturer for $175 each. Booth space at the convention hall costs $10,000 per show.

Required:

a. Sales at past trade shows have ranged between 200 and 400 software packages per show. Determine the average cost of sales per unit if Ms. Hicks sells 200,250, 300, 350 or 400 units of Dollar Systems at a trade show. Use the following chart to organize your answer. Is the cost of booth space fixed or variable?

b. If Ms. Hicks wants to earn a $50 profit on each package of software she sells at a trade show, what price must she charge at sales volumes of 200, 250, 300, 350 or 400 units?

c. Record the total cost of booth space if Ms. Hicks attends one, two, three, four or five trade shows. Record your answers in the following chart. Is the cost of booth space fixed or variable relative to the number of shows attended?

d. Ms. Hicks provides decorative shopping bags to customers who purchase software packages. Some customers take the bags; others do not. Some customers stuff more than one software package into a single bag. The number of bags varies in relation to the number of units sold, but the relationship is not proportional. Assume that Ms. Hicks uses $30 of bags for every 50 software packages sold. What is the additional cost per unit sold? Is the cost fixed or variable?

acct344 below is information from job card 506 for the bearing manufacturing company 492003

Below is information from Job Card 506 for the Bearing Manufacturing Company.

Date started: June 15, 2015 Date Completed: July 24, 2015

Date

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Applied Factory Overhead

Job Total

6/15/2015

5,000

6/25/2015

1,200

600

6/27/2015

2,300

7/6/2015

1,540

770

7/15/2015

2,600

7/24/2015

760

380

Job 506 was sold on credit on July 24, 2015, for 180% of its cost. Factory OH was applied on the basis of DL.

Required:

a. Prepare the journal entries to record the costs incurred for Job 506 in 2015 for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead.

b. Prepare the journal entry to record the completion of Job 506.

c. What is the predetermined factory overhead rate for Bearing Manufacturing?

d. Prepare the journal entries to record the sale of Job 506.

acct344 there are two problems to complete each worth 10 points the full assignment 492005

There are two problems to complete, each worth 10 points. The full assignment is worth 20 points. You may want to work several of the exercises from our chapter readings this week to start. In addition, work several problems from this week’s chapters in the graded Workout Room thread before attempting the Homework assignments. We will review several problems throughout the week in the workout room.

Able Corporation incurred the following costs.

Beginning direct materials inventory

16,000

Beginning work-in-process inventory

7,000

Beginning finished goods inventory

19,000

Ending direct materials inventory

16,000

Ending work in process

14,000

Ending finished goods

26,000

Factory supervisor’s salary

28,000

Depreciation on plant

12,000

Sales

800,000

Selling and administrative expenses

125,000

Plant maintenance

6,000

Plant utilities

11,000

Direct material

215,000

Direct labor

240,000

Calculate the following.

a. Direct materials used

b. Cost of goods manufactured

c. Cost of goods sold

d. Operating income

acct344 as loan analyst for madison bank you have been presented the following infor 492006

As loan analyst for Madison Bank, you have been presented the following information

Plunkett Co.

Herring Co.

Assets:

Cash

118,300

321,200

Receivables

225,800

302,700

Inventories

578,700

513,800

Total Current Assets

922,800

1,137,700

Other assets

504,100

610,900

Total Assets

$1,426,900

1,748,600

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity:

Current liabilities

297,100

349,500

Long-term liabilities

404,500

504,100

Capital stock and retained earnings

725,300

895,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$1,426,900

1,748,600

Annual sales

943,900

1,504,700

Rate of gross profit on sales 30% 35%

Each of these companies has requested a loan of $49,020 for 6 months with no collateral offered. In as much as your bank has reached its quota for loans of this type, only one of these requests is to be granted.

Compute the various ratios for each company. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25).

journalizing purchase and sale transactions perpetual inventory 491868

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions-perpetual inventory

Thelma’s Amusements completed the following transactions during November 2012 Nov 1 Purchased supplies for cash, $700.

4 Purchased inventory on credit terms of 3/10, n/eom, $9,600.

8 Returned half the inventory purchased on November 4. It was not the inventory ordered.

10 Sold goods for cash, $1,200 (cost, $700).

13 Sold inventory on credit terms of 2/15, n/45, $9,900 (cost, $5,300).

14 Paid the amount owed on account from November 4, less the return (November 8) and the discount.

17 Received defective inventory as a sales return from the November 13 sale, $600. Thelma’s cost of the inventory received was $450.

18 Purchased inventory of $4,100 on account. Payment terms were 2/10, net 30.

26 Paid the net amount owed for the November 18 purchase.

28 Received cash in full settlement of the account from the customer who purchased inventory on November 13, less the return and the discount.

29 Purchased inventory for cash, $12,000, plus freight charges of $200.

Requirement

1. Journalize the transactions on the books of Thelma’s Amusements.

suppose that on june 1 rockin gyrations a disc jockey service creates a petty cash f 491869

Accounting for petty cash transactions

Suppose that on June 1, Rockin’ Gyrations, a disc jockey service, creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $500. During June, Michael Martell, fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:

Petty Cash Ticket Number Item Amount

1 Postage for package received 20

2 Decoration and refreshments for office party 25

3 Two boxes of stationary 35

4 Printer cartridges 15

5 Dinner money for sales manager entertaining a customer 75

On June 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $325. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Entertainment expense, and Postage expense.

Requirements

1. On June 30, how much cash should this petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?

2. Journalize all required entries to (a) create the fund and (b) replenish it. Include explanations.

3. Make the entry on July 1 to increase the fund balance to $550. Include an explanation.

hebert industries uses a weighted average process costing system 491870

Weighted-Average, Normal vs Abnormal Spoilage

Hebert Industries uses a weighted average process costing system. Management has specified that the normal loss from shrinkage cannot exceed 3 percent of the units started in a period.

All raw material is added at the start of the production process. Spoilage is determined upon inspection at the end of the production process. March processing information follows.

Beginning WIP inventory (30% complete as to conversion) 20,000 units

Started during March 120,000 units

Completed during March 116,400 units

Ending WIP inventory (20% complete as to conversion) 16,000 units

a. How many total units are there to account for?

b. How many units were spoiled during processing? Of the spoiled units, how many should be treated as a normal loss? As an abnormal loss?

c. What are the equivalent units of production for direct material? For conversion?

d. How are costs associated with the company’s normal spoilage handled?

e. How are costs associated with the company’s abnormal spoilage handled?

showtime amusements owns movie theaters showtime engaged in the following business t 491873

Analyzing and journalizing transactions

Showtime Amusements owns movie theaters. Showtime engaged in the following business transactions:

1-Jul Darrell Palusky invested $350,000 personal cash in the business by depositing that amount in a bank account titled Showtime Amusements. The business gave Palusky owner’s equity in the company.

2 Paid $300,000 cash to purchase a theater building.

5 Borrowed $220,000 from the bank. Palusky signed a note payable to the bank in the name of Showtime Amusements.

10 Purchased theater supplies on account, $1,700.

15 Paid $800 on account.

15 Paid property tax expense on theater building, $1,200.

16 Paid employee salaries, $2,800, and rent on equipment, $1,800. Make a single compound entry.

28 Withdrew $6,000 from the business for personal use.

31 Received $20,000 cash from service revenue and deposited that amount in the bank.

Showtime Amusements uses the following accounts: Cash; Supplies; Building; Accounts Payable; Notes Payable; Darrel Palusky, Capital; Darrel Palusky, Withdrawals; Service Revenue; Salary Expense; Rent Expense; Property Tax Expense.

Requirement

Journalize each transaction of Showtime Amusements as shown for July 1. Explanations are not required.

upton computers makes bulk purchases of small computers stocks them in conveniently 491874

Upton Computers makes bulk purchases of small computers, stocks them in conveniently located warehouses, ships thme to its chain of retail stores and has a staff to advise customers and help them set up their new computers. Upton’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2010 is shown here (millions of dollars):

Cash

$3.50

Accounts payable

$9.00

Receivables

$26.00

Notes Payable

$18.00

Inventories

$58

Accruals

$8.50

Total current assets

$87.50

Total current liabilities

$35.50

Net fixed assets

$35.00

Mortgage loan

$6.00

Common stock

$15.00

Total

$122.50

Retained earnings

$66.00

Total liabilities and equity

$122.50

Sales for 2010 were $350 million and net income for the year was $10.5 million, so the firm’s profit margin was 3.0%. Upton paid dividends of $4.2 million to common stock holders, so its payout ratio was 40%. Its tax rate is 40% and it operated at full capacity.

Assume that all assets/sales ratios, spontaneous liabilities/sales ratios, the profit margin and the payout ratio remain constant in 2011.

1. If sales are projected to increase by $70 million, or 20% during 2011, use the AFN equation to determine Upton’s projected external capital requirements.

2. Using AFN equation, determine Upton’s self supporting growth rate. That is, what is the maximum growth ate the firm can achieve without having to employ nonspontaneous external funds?

3. Use the forecasted financial statement method to forecast Upton’s balance sheet for December 31, 2011. Assume that all additional external capital is raised as a bank loan at the end of the year and is reflected in notes payable (because the debt is added at the end of the year, there will be no additional interest expense due to the new debt). Assume Upton’s profit margin and dividend payout ratio will be the same in 2011 as they were in 2010. What is the amount of notes payable reported on 2011 forecasted balance sheet? (Hint: You don’t need to forecast the income statement because you were given the projected sales, profit margin, and dividends payout ratio; these figures allow you to calculate the 2011 addition to retained earnings for the balance sheet.)

hasselback company acquired a plant asset at the beginning of year 1 the asset has a 491875

(Depreciation-Conceptual Understanding)

Hasselback Company acquired a plant asset at the beginning of Year 1. The asset has an estimated service life of 5 years. An employee has prepared depreciation schedules for this asset using three different methods to compare the results of using one method with the results of using other methods. You are to assume that the following schedules have been correctly prepared for this asset using (1) the straight-line method, (2) the sum-of-theyears’- digits method, and (3) the double-declining balance method.

Year

Straight-Line

Sum-if-the-Years’- Digits

Double Declining Balance

1

9,000

15,000

20,000

2

9,000

12,000

12,000

3

9,000

9,000

7,200

4

9,000

6,000

4,320

5

9,000

3,000

1,480

Total

45,000

45,000

45,000

Answer the following questions.

a. What is the cost of the asset being depreciated?

b. What amount, if any, was used in the depreciation calculations for the salvage value for this asset?

c. Which method will produce the highest charge to income in Year 1?

d. Which method will produce the highest charge to income in Year 4?

e. Which method will produce the highest book value for the asset at the end of Year 3?

f. If the asset is sold at the end of Year 3, which method would yield the highest gain (or lowest loss) on disposal of the asset?

presented below is information related to morrow manufacturing corporation 491876

Presented below is information related to Morrow Manufacturing Corporation.

Asset

Cost

Estimated Salvage

Estimated Life (in years)

A

40,500

5,500

10

B

33,600

4,800

9

C

36,000

3,600

8

D

19,000

1,500

7

E

23,500

2,500

6

a. Compute the rate of depreciation per year to be applied to the plant assets under the composite method. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, i.e. 12.25.)

b. Prepare the adjusting entry necessary at the end of the year to record depreciation for the year.

c. Prepare the entry to record the sale of fixed asset D for cash of $5,000. It was used for 6 years, and depreciation was entered under the composite method. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

brooks corp is a medium sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for buildi 491877

(Fair Value and Equity Methods)

Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70%market penetration. During prosperous years, the company’s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company’s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.

Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2010 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the “fair value” rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks’ pertinent accounts.

1. Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks’ investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2010 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000.

2. Prior to 2010, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2009. Brooks’ 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000.

Instructions:

a. Prepare the appropriate adjusting entries for Brooks as of December 31, 2010, to reflect the application of the “fair value” rule for both classes of securities described above.

b. For both classes of investments presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made in (a) would be reflected in Brooks’ 2010 financial statements.

c. Prepare the entries for the Norton investment, assuming that Brooks owns 25% of Norton’s shares. Norton reported income of $500,000 in 2010 and paid cash dividends of $100,000.

at the year end 2010 bertin inc s total assets were 1 2 million and its account paya 491880

At the year-end 2010, Bertin Inc’s total assets were $1.2 million and its account payable was $375,000. Sales, which in 2010 were $2.5 million, are expected to increase by 25% in 2011. Total assets and accounts payable are proportional to sales and that relationship will be maintained. Bertin typically uses no current liabilities other than the accounts payable. Common stock amounted to $425,000 in 2010, and retained earnings were $295,000. Bertin has arranged to sell $75,000 of new common stocks in 2011 to meet some of its financing needs. The remainder of its financing needs will be met by issuing new long term debt at the end of 2011. (Because the debt is added at the end of the year, there will be no additional interest expense due to the new debt.) Its profit margin on sales is 6% and 40% of earnings will be paid out as dividends.

a. What were Bertin’s total long term debt and total liabilities in 2010?

b. How much new longer debt financing will be needed in 2011? (Hint: AFN-New stock=New long term debt.)

identify the following expenditures as capital expenditures or revenue expenditures 491881

Identify the following expenditures as capital expenditures or revenue expenditures:

a. Immediately after acquiring a new delivery truck, paid $195 to have the name of the store and other advertising material painted on the vehicle.

b. Painted delivery truck at a cost of $450 after two years of use.

c. Purchased new battery at a cost of $40 for two year old delivery truck.

d. Installed an escalator at a cost of $17,500 in a three story building that had been used for some years without escalators or elevators.

e. Purchased a pencil sharpener at a cost of $15.00

f. Original life of the delivery truck has been estimated at four years, and straight line depreciation of 25 percent yearly had been recognized. After three years of use, however, it was decided to recondition the truck thoroughly, including adding a new engine.

required use the following format to classify each cost as a product cost or a gener 491882

Classifying costs: product or G, S, & A/asset or expense.

Required Use the following format to classify each cost as a product cost or a general, selling, and administrative (G, S, & A) cost. Also indicate whether the cost would be recorded as an asset or an expense. The first item is shown as an example.

Cost Category

Research and development costs

Cost to set up manufacturing facility

Utilities used in factory

Cars for sales staff

Distributions to stockholders

General office supplies

Raw materials used in the manufacturing process

Cost to rent office equipment

Wages of production workers

Advertising costs

Promotion costs Production supplies

Depreciation on administrative building

Depreciation on manufacturing equipment

selected transactions for h burns inc an interior decorating firm in its first month 491884

Selected transactions for H. Burns, Inc., an interior decorating firm, in its first month of business, are as follows.

Jan. 2 Invested $15,000 cash in business in exchange for common stock.

3 Purchased used car for $4,000 cash for use in business.

9 Purchased supplies on account for $500.

11 Billed customers $1,800 for services performed.

16 Paid $200 cash for advertising.

20 Received $700 cash from customers billed on January 11.

23 Paid creditor $300 cash on balance owed.

28 Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend. Instructions

For each transaction indicate the following.

(a) The basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, stockholders’ equity).

(b) The specific account debited and credited (cash, rent expense, service revenue, etc.).

(c) Whether the specific account is increased or decreased.

(d) The normal balance of the specific account.

Use the following format, in which the January 2 transaction is given as an example.

the following information was taken from the 2006 financial statements of pharmaceut 491887

The following information was taken from the 2006 financial statements of pharmaceutical giant Merck and Co. All dollar amounts are in millions.

Retained earnings, January 1, 2006

37,980

Materials and production expense

6,001

Marketing and administrative expense

8,165

Dividends 3,318.70 Sales revenue

22,636

Research and development expense

4,783

Tax expense 1,787.60 Other revenue

2,677

Instructions:

a. After analyzing the data, complete the following Income Statement and Retained Earnings Statement for the year ending December 31, 2006. (List revenues and expenses from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2. Round answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 2,550.0.)

b. Suppose that Merck decided to reduce its research and development expense by 50%.

What would be the short-term implications? What would be the long-term implications? How do you think the stock market would react?

letter co produces and sells two products t and o it manufactures these products in 491888

Letter Co. produces and sells two products, T and O. It manufactures these products in separate factories and markets them through different channels. They have no shared costs. This year, the company sold 50,000 units of each product. Sales and costs for each product follow.

Product T

Product o

Sales

800000

800000

Variable Costs

560000

560000

Contribution margin

240,000

700,000

Fixed Costs

100,000

560,000

Income before taxes

140,000

140,000

Income taxes (32% rate)

44,800

44,800

Net Income

95,200

95,200

Instructions:

1. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for each product

2. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to decline to 33,000 units next year with no change in unit sales price. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement as just shown with columns for each of the two products (assume a 32% tax rate). Also, assume that any loss before taxes yields a 32% tax savings.

3. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to increase to 64,000 units next year with no change in unit sales price. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement shown with columns for each of the two products (assume a 32%income tax rate).

4. If sales greatly decrease, which product would experience a greater loss? Explain

5. Describe some factors that might have created the different cost structures for these two products

jetson company sold 20 000 units of its only product and incurred a 50 000 loss igno 491889

Jetson Company sold 20,000 units of its only product and incurred a $50,000 loss (ignoring taxes) for the current year as shown here. During a planning session for year 2012’s activities, the production manager notes that the variable costs can be reduced by 50% by installing a machine that automates several operations. To obtain these savings, the company must increase its annual fixed costs by $150,000. The maximum output capacity of the company is 40,000 units per year.

Jetson Company

Contribution Margin

Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

750,000

Variable

600,000

Contribution margin

150,000

Fixed Costs

200,000

Net loss

(50,000)

Required

1. Compute the break-even point dollar sales for year 2011

2. Compute the predicted break-even point in dollar sales for year 2012 assuming the machine is installed and there is no change in the unit sales price.

3. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement for 2012 that shows the expected results with the machine installed. Assume that the unit sales price and the number of units sold will not change, and no income tax will be due.

4. Compute the sales level required in both dollars and units to earn $140,000 of after tax income in 2012 with the machine installed and no change in the unit sales price. Assume that the income tax rate is 30% (Hint: Use the procedures in exhibits 18.21 and 18.23)

5. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement that shows the results at the sales level computed in part 4. Assume an income tax rate of 30%

prince machine tool company produces tools on a job order basis during may two jobs 491891

Overtime Allocation

Prince Machine Tool Company produces tools on a job order basis. During May two jobs were completed, and the following costs were incurred:

Job 401

Job 402

Direct materials

28,000

37,000

Direct labor, regular

18,000

23,000

Overtime premium

6,000

Other factory costs for the month totaled $16,800. Factory overhead costs are allocated one-third to Job 401 and two-thirds to Job 402.

Required:

a. Describe two alternative methods for assigning the overtime premium cost to Jobs 401 and 402 and explain how the appropriate method would be determined.

b. Compute the cost of Job 401 and Job 402 under each of the two methods described in part a.

a weekly payroll summary made from labor time records shows the following data for v 491892

Employees’ earnings and taxes

A weekly payroll summary made from labor time records shows the following data for Victory

Parkway Inc.:

Employee

Hours Classification

Hourly Rate

Regular

Overtime

Holloway, T.

Direct

12

40

2

Jackson, D.

Direct

12

40

3

McLean, J.

Direct

15

40

4

Lyons, M.

Indirect

9

40

Taylor, A.

Indirect

18

40

Overtime is payable at one-and-a-half times the regular rate of pay and is distributed to all jobs worked on during the period.

a. Determine the net pay of each employee. The income taxes withheld for each employee amount to 15% of the gross wages.

b. Prepare journal entries for the following:

1. Recording the payroll.

2. Paying the payroll.

3. Distributing the payroll. (Assume that the overtime premium will be charged to all jobs worked during the period).

4. The employer’s payroll taxes. (Assume that none of the employees has achieved the maximum wage bases for FICA and unemployment taxes).

the following data were taken from the general ledgers and other sources of charlie 491897

The following data were taken from the general ledgers and other sources of Charlie Manufacturing Inc. and Delta Merchandising Co. on April 30 of the current year:

Merchandise Inventory, April 1

38,000

Finished goods, April 1

67,000

Purchases

121,000

Cost of goods manufactured

287,000

Merchandise Inventory, April 30

33,000

Finished goods, April 30

61000

Required:

1. Compute the cost of goods sold for Delta Merchandising Co., selecting the appropriate items from the previous list.

2. Compute the cost of goods sold for Charlie Manufacturing Co., selecting the appropriate items from the previous list.

presented below is a condensed version of the comparative balance sheets for sonderg 491898

(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows)

Presented below is a condensed version of the comparative balance sheets for Sondergaard Corporation for the last two years at December 31.

2010

2019

Cash

157,000

78,000

Accounts receivable

180,000

185,000

Investments

52,000

74,000

Equipment

298,000

240,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

(106,000)

(89,000)

Current liabilities

134,000

151,000

Capital stock

160,000

160,000

Retained earnings

287,000

177,000

Additional information:

Investments were sold at a loss (not extraordinary) of $7,000; no equipment was sold; cash dividends paid were $50,000; and net income was $160,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2010 for Sondergaard Corporation.

(b) Determine Sondergaard Corporation’s free cash flow.

daisy florist has a beginning balance in supplies of 5 400 on may 31 daisy florist t 491899

Daisy Florist

Chart of Accounts:

No. 101

Cash

No. 112

Accounts Receivable

No. 126

Supplies

No. 201

Accounts Payable

No. 205

Unearned Revenue

No. 311

Common Stock

No. 400

Service Revenue

No. 726

Rent Expense

No. 729

Supplies Expense

Daisy Florist has a beginning balance in Supplies of $5,400. On May 31 Daisy Florist took a physical count of supplies on hand. Daisy Florist made an adjusting entry for $2,300 for supplies used during the month.

Instructions:

(a) Journalize the adjusting entry on May 31 on the tab labeled General Journal

(b) Post the adjusting entry to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts. (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction).

(c) Journalize the closing entry for Supplies Expense on May 31 on the tab labeled General Journal

(d) Post the closing entry to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts. (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)

(e) Journalize the reversing entry on June 1 on the tab labeled General Journal

(f) Post the reversing entry to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)

(g) Indicate if the balance of Supplies and Supplies Expense is a debit or a credit balance

the following information pertains to fixation enterprises 491859

Adjusting Entries and Financial Statements.

The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises:

· The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned.

· Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.

  • Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650.

· The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.

· The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property

Management. The payment was for 6 months’ rent of Fixation’s headquarters, beginning on November 1.

Fixation’s accounting year ends on December 31.

Instructions

Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:

a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjustment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)

b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts

c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)

match each of the following terms with the phrase that it best matches 491861

Match each of the following terms with the phrase that it best matches.

a. Quality of earnings

d. Pro forma income

b. Current ratio

e. Discontinued operations

c. Horizontal analysis

f. Comprehensive income

1. A measure used to evaluate a company’s liquidity

2. Usually excludes items that a company thinks are unusual or nonrecurring.

3. Indicates the level of full and transparent information provided to users of the financial statements.

4. The disposal of a significant segment of a business.

5. Determines increases or decreases in a series of financial statement data.

6. Includes all changes in stockholders’ equity during a period except those resulting from investments by stockholders and distributions to stockholders.

fiorella and sanchez physicians budgeted for the following revenues and expenses for 491863

Preparing a budgeted income statement

Fiorella and Sanchez, physicians, budgeted for the following revenues and expenses for September:

Depreciation – equipment

$1,850

Fringe benefits

3,300

Lease expense

2,500

Nursing wages

4,500

Physicians’ salaries

28,000

Patient revenue

58,500

Secretarial support

2,200

Utilities

650

Prepare a budgeted income statement for the month ending September 30, 2013.

comparing cost of goods sold in a perpetual system fifo lifo and average cost method 491864

Comparing cost of goods sold in a perpetual system—FIFO, LIFO, and average-cost methods

Assume that a JR Tire Store completed the following perpetual inventory transactions for a line of tires:

Beginning inventory

16 tires @ $65

Purchase

10 tires @ $78

Sale

12 tires @ $90

Requirements

1. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using FIFO.

2. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using LIFO.

3. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using average-cost. (Round average cost per unit to the nearest cent and all other amounts to the nearest dollar.)

4. Which method results in the largest gross profit and why?

kelly realty loaned money and received the following notes during 2012 491865

Kelly Realty loaned money and received the following notes during 2012.

Principal Amount

Interest Rate

Term

1) Aug 1

24,000

17%

1 year

2) Nov 30

18,000

6%

6 months

3) Dec 19

12,000

12%

30 days

Requirements

For each note, compute interest using a 360-day year. Explanations are not required.

1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.

2. Journalize the entry to record the inception of each of the three notes and also journalize a single adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, the fiscal year end, to record accrued interest revenue on all three notes.

3. Journalize the collection of principal and interest at maturity of all three notes.

on july 1 2008 tardis company issued 4 000 000 face value 8 10 year bonds at 3 501 5 491867

On July 1, 2008, Tardis Company issued $4,000,000 face value, 8%, 10-year bonds at $3,501,514.This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 10% on the bonds.

Tardis uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount.

The bonds pay semiannual interest July 1 and January 1.

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the following transactions.

(1) The issuance of the bonds on July 1, 2008.

(2) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2008.

(3) The payment of interest and the amortization of the discount on July 1, 2009, assuming no accrual of interest on June 30.

(4) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2009.

(b) Show the proper balance sheet presentation for the liability for bonds payable on the December 31, 2009, balance sheet.

werth company asks you to review its december 31 2012 inventory values and prepare t 491839

E8-5 Inventoriable Costs—Error Adjustments

Werth Company asks you to review its December 31, 2012, inventory values and prepare the necessary adjustments to the books. The following information is given to you.

1. Werth uses the periodic method of recording inventory. A physical count reveals $333,779 of inventory on hand at December 31, 2012.

2. Not included in the physical count of inventory is $14,807 of merchandise purchased on December 15 from Browser. This merchandise was shipped f.o.b. shipping point on December 29 and arrived in January. The invoice arrived and was recorded on December 31.

3. Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Bubbey on December 30, f.o.b. destination. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale on account for $18,189 on December 31. The merchandise cost $10,444, and Bubbey received it on January 3.

4. Included in inventory was merchandise received from Dudley on December 31 with an invoice price of $22,210. The merchandise was shipped f.o.b. destination.

The invoice, which has not yet arrived, has not been recorded.

5. Not included in inventory is $12,135 of merchandise purchased from Minsky Industries. This merchandise was received on December 31 after the inventory had been counted. The invoice was received and recorded on December 30.

6. Included in inventory was $14,832 of inventory held by Werth on consignment from Jackel Industries.

7. Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Sims f.o.b. shipping point. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale for $26,857 on December 31. The cost of this merchandise was $16,370, and Sims received the merchandise on January 5.

8. Excluded from inventory was a carton labeled. “Please accept for credit.” This carton contains merchandise costing $2,132 which had been sold to a customer for $3,695. No entry had been made to the books to reflect the return, but none of the returned merchandise seemed damaged.

Instructions:

(a) Determine the proper inventory balance for Werth Company at December 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare any correcting entries to adjust inventory to its proper amount at December 31, 2012. Assume the books have not been closed. (If no entry is required, select “No entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

draper consulting inc began operations and completed the following transactions duri 491840

Analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements

Draper Consulting, Inc., began operations and completed the following transactions during the first half of December:

2-Dec Received $18,000 cash and issued 100 shares of no-par common stock.

2 Paid monthly office rent, $550.

3 Paid cash for a Dell computer, $1,800. This equipment is expected to remain in service for five years.

4 Purchased office furniture on account, $4,200. The furniture should last for five years.

5 Purchased supplies on account, $900.

9 Performed consulting service for a client on account, $1,500.

12 Paid utility expenses, $250.

18 Performed service for a client and received cash of $1,100.

Requirements

1. Analyze the effects of Draper Consulting’s transactions on the accounting equation. Use the format of Exhibit 1-6, and include these headings: Cash, Accounts receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Furniture, Accounts payable, Common stock, and Retained earnings.

2. Prepare the income statement of Draper Consulting for the month ended December 31, 2012.

3. Prepare the statement of retained earnings for the month ended December 31, 2012

4. Prepare the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

the bakery department of an albertson s supermarket reports income for the current y 491841

a. The bakery department of an Albertson’s supermarket reports income for the current year.

b. Pace Foods is a subsidiary of Campbell Soup Company.

c. The personnel department of USAA Life Insurance Company prepares its budget and subsequent performance report on the basis of its expected expenses for the year.

d. The shopping section of Burpee.com reports both revenues and expenses.

e. Burpee.com’s investor relations Web site provides operating and financial information to investors and other interested parties.

f. The manager of a car service station is evaluated based on the station’s revenues and expenses.

g. A charter airline records revenues and expenses for each airplane each month.

The airplane’s performance report shows its ratio of operating income to average book value.

h. The manager of the Southwest sales territory is evaluated based on a comparison of current period sales against budgeted sales.

Requirement:

1. Identify each responsibility center as a cost center (C), a revenue center (R), a profit center (P), or an investment center (I). (pp. 1121–1122) Identifying different types of responsibility centers

ideal manufacturing company of sycamore illinois has supported a research and develo 491842

Managerial Analysis

Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore,Illinois has supported a research and development (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company’s new farm machinery products.

The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.

The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success, larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably, Ideal’s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb the increasing costs.

But, (1) management doesn’t have any cost basis for charging R&D services to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the in-house users of the department’s services.

R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.

Market analysis

1,050,000

Product design

2,280,000

Product development

3,600,000

Prototype testing

1,400,000

Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are:

Activities

Cost Drivers

Total Estimated

Drivers

Market analysis

Hours of analysis

15,000

hours

Product design

Number of designs

2,500

designs

Product development

Number of products

90

products

Prototype testing

Number of tests

700

tests

Instructions

A.) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.

B.) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed 1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and requested 92 engineering tests?

C.) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to 3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?

D.) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity for both in-house and outside charging purposes?

potomac inc acquired 10 of the 500 000 shares of common stock of maryland corporatio 491844

Presented below are two independent situations:

1. Potomac Inc. acquired 10% of the 500,000 shares of common stock of Maryland Corporation at a total cost of $11 per share on June 17, 2011. On September 3, Maryland declared and paid a $160,000 dividend. On December 31, Maryland reported net income of $550,000 for the year.

2. Andy Fisher Corporation obtained significant influence over Bandit Company by buying 30% of Bandit’s 100,000 outstanding shares of common stock at a cost of $18 per share on January 1, 2011. On May 15, Bandit declared and paid a cash dividend of $150,000. On December 31, Bandit reported net income of $270,000 for the year.

Prepare all necessary journal entries for 2011 for (1) Potomac and (2) Andy Fisher.

general corporation employs a job order cost system on may 1 the following balances 491850

Computations using a job order system

General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;

Work in process

35,200

Finished goods

86,900

Cost of goods sold

128,700

Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:

Document*

Date

Department

Hours

Amount

MR 1165

19-Mar

Machining

5,600

MR 1169

21-Mar

Machining

3,500

TT 1450-52

23-Mar

Machining

45

400

MUR46

23-Mar

Machining

105

MR 4330

27-Mar

Finishing

700

TT 1475-76

31-Mar

Machining

30

300

MUR47

31-Mar

Machining

50

TT 6608-13

31-Mar

Finishing

200

2,000

Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.

General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.

Instructions:

a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.

b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.

c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.

d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.

assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to brookhaven pu 491851

Payroll accounting.

Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:

  • Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
  • Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
  • Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
  • State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
  • Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
  • State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
  • Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned

The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.

a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven’s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:

  • Social Security taxes
  • Medicare taxes
  • Federal income taxes withheld
  • State income taxes
  • Insurance withholdings

b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven’s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:

  • Matching Social Security taxes
  • Matching Medicare taxes
  • State unemployment taxes
  • Federal unemployment taxes

greenland enterprises began a new magazine in the fourth quarter of 19×2 491852

Prepayments by customers.

Greenland Enterprises began a new magazine in the fourth quarter of 19X2. Annual subscriptions, which cost $18 each, were sold as follows:

Month Number of Subscriptions Sold

October

400

November

700

December

1,000

If subscriptions begin (and magazines are sent) in the month of sale:

a. Present the necessary journal entry to record the magazine subscriptions sold during the fourth quarter.

b. Determine how much subscription revenue Greenland earned by the end of 19X2.

c. Compute Greenland’s liability to subscribers at the end of 19X2.

the income statements of diamond company for the years ended december 31 19×1 and 19 491853

Inventory Errors.

The income statements of Diamond Company for the years ended December 31, 19X1, and 19X2 follow.

19X1

19X2

Net sales

440,000

483,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

95,000

109,000

Add: Net purchases

380,000

404,000

Goods available for sale

475,000

513,000

Less: Ending inventory

109,000

127,000

Cost of goods sold

366,000

386,000

Gross profit

74,000

97,000

Operating expenses

58,000

67,000

Net income

16,000

30,000

Diamond uses a periodic inventory system. A detailed review of the accounting records disclosed the following:

a. A review of 19X1 purchase invoices revealed that a clerk had incorrectly recorded a $12,600 purchase as $1,260.

b. A $4,800 purchase was made on December 30, 19X2, terms F.O.B. shipping point. The invoice was not recorded in 19X2 nor were the goods included in the 19X2 ending physical inventory count. Both the goods and invoice were received in early 19X3, with the invoice being recorded at that time.

c. Goods costing $3,000 were accidentally excluded from the 19X1 ending physical inventory count. These goods were sold during 19X2, and all aspects of the sale were properly recorded.

Instructions:

a. Prepare corrected income statements for 19X1 and 19X2.

b. Determine the impact of the preceding errors on the December 31, 19X2, owner’s equity balance.

boston galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation 491854

Specific identification method.

Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation.

Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.

Painting

Cost

1/2 Beginning inventory

Woods

11,000

4/19 Purchase Sunset

21,800

6/7 Purchase Earth

31,200

12/16 Purchase

Moon

4,000

Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm’s:

a. Cost of goods sold.

b. Gross profit.

c. Ending inventory.

the following pre adjusted information for the maverick company is available on dece 491855

Allowance Method: Estimation and Balance Sheet Disclosure.

The following pre-adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31:

  • Accounts receivable $107,000
  • Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance)
  • Credit sales 250,000

a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick’s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions:

(1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales.

(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable.

b. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)?

c. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)?

at a january 20×2 meeting the president of sonic sound directed the sales staff to m 491857

Allowance Method: Analysis of Receivables.

At a January 20X2 meeting, the president of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff “to move some product this year.” The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded because it had restricted the company’s growth.

Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.

By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:

Sales

20X2

20X1

Accounts Receivable, 12/31

23,987,000

8,423,000

Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 ?

12,444,000

1,056,000

Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31

?

23,000 cr.

The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:

Age of Receivable

Amount

Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected

Under 31 days

5,321,000

99%

31 to 60 days

3,890,000

90%

61 to 90 days

1,067,000

80%

Over 90 days

2,166,000

60%

Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.

Instructions

a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.

b. What is the company’s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?

c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.

d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president’s decision to close the credit evaluation department.

you have been retained to examine the records of kathy s day care center as of decem 491858

Adjusting Entries.

You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy’s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:

· On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.

· Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.

· All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.

· Depreciation on the school’s van was $3,000 for the year.

· On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000.

Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Prepaid Rent, a new account.

· Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.

· Kathy’s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Prepaid Insurance:

Date Paid

Policy No.

Length of Policy

Amount

Feb. 1, 20X2

1033MCM19

1 year

540

Jan. 1, 20X3

7952789HP

1 year

912

Aug. 1, 20X3

XQ943675ST

2 years

840

Instructions

The center’s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.

acc362 the comparative condensed income statements of hendi corporation are shown be 491807

The comparative condensed income statements of Hendi Corporation are shown below:

HENDI CORPORATION
Comparative Condensed Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31

 

2014

2013

Net sales

600,000

500,000

Cost of goods sold

468,000

400,000

Gross profit

132,000

100,000

Operating expenses

60,000

54,000

Net income

72,000

46,000

Instructions:
(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation using 2013 as a base. (Show the amounts of increase or decrease.) (If amount and percentage are a decrease show the numbers as negative, e.g. -55,000, -20% or (55,000). (20%). Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 12.3%.)
(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation in columnar form for both years. (Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 12.3%.)

acc362 the comparative condensed balance sheets of garcia corporation are presented 491808

The comparative condensed balance sheets of Garcia Corporation are presented below:

GARCIA CORPORATION

Comparative Condensed Balance Sheets

December 31

2014

2013

Assets

Current assets

76,000

80,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

100,000

90,000

Intangibles

24,000

40,000

Total assets

200,000

210,000

Liabilities and stockholders’ equity

Current liabilities

40,000

48,000

Long-term liabilities

140,000

150,000

Stockholders’ equity

20,000

12,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

200,000

210,000

Instructions:

(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the balance sheet data for Garcia Corporation using 2013 as a base. (If amount and percentage are a decrease show the numbers as negative, e.g. -55,000, -20% or (55,000). (20%). Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 12.3%.)

(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the balance sheet data for Garcia Corporation in columnar form for 2014. (Round percentages to 0 decimal places, e.g. 12%.)

acc362 the following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions 491809

The following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions.

1. Julia Company owns buildings that are worth substantially more than they originally cost.

In an effort to provide more relevant information, Julia reports the buildings at fair value in its accounting reports.

2. Dekalb Company includes in its accounting records only transaction data that can be expressed in terms of money.

3. Omar Shariff, president of Omar’s Oasis, records his personal living costs as expenses of the Oasis.

Instructions:

For each of the three situations, state if the accounting method used is correct or incorrect.

If correct, identify which principle or assumption supports the method used. If incorrect, identify which principle or assumption has been violated.

acc362 on january 1 2014 the ledger of shumway company contains the following liabil 491813

On January 1, 2014, the ledger of Shumway Company contains the following liability accounts.

Accounts Payable

52,000

Sales Taxes Payable

5,800

Unearned Service Revenue

14,000

During January, the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 5 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $22,470, which includes 7% sales taxes.

12 Provided services for customers who had made advance payments of $10,000. (Credit Service Revenue.)

14 Paid state revenue department for sales taxes collected in December 2013 ($5,800).

20 Sold 600 units of a new product on credit at $50 per unit, plus 7% sales tax.

21 Borrowed $14,000 from DeKalb Bank on a 3-month, 8%, $14,000 note.

25 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $12,947, which includes 7% sales taxes.

Instructions:

a. Journalize the January transactions. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

b. Journalize the adjusting entries at January 31 for the outstanding notes payable. (Hint: Use one-third of a month for the DeKalb Bank note.) (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

c. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at January 31, 2014. Assume no change in accounts payable. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

acc362 listed below are five procedures followed by parson company 491815

Listed below are five procedures followed by Parson Company.

1. Several individuals operate the cash register using the same register drawer.

2. A monthly bank reconciliation is prepared by someone who has no other cash responsibilities.

3. Fran Vorbeck writes checks and also records cash payment journal entries.

4. One individual orders inventory, while a different individual authorizes payments.

5. Unnumbered sales invoices from credit sales are forwarded to the accounting department every four weeks for recording.

Indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak internal control. If it is an example of good internal control, indicate which internal control principle is being followed. If it is an example of weak internal control, indicate which internal control principle is violated.

acc362 on december 31 2008 ramey associates owned the following securities held as a 491818

On December 31, 2008, Ramey Associates owned the following securities, held as a longterm investment. The securities are not held for influence or control of the investee.

Common Stock

Shares

Cost

Hurst Co.

2,000

60,000

Pine Co.

5,000

45,000

Scott Co.

1,500

30,000

On December 31, 2008, the total fair value of the securities was equal to its cost. In 2009, the following transactions occurred.

1-Jul Received $1 per share semiannual cash dividend on Pine Co. common stock.

1-Aug Received $0.50 per share cash dividend on Hurst Co. common stock.

1-Sep Sold 1,500 shares of Pine Co. common stock for cash at $8 per share, less brokerage fees of $300.

1-Oct Sold 800 shares of Hurst Co. common stock for cash at $33 per share, less brokerage fees of $500.

1-Nov Received $1 per share cash dividend on Scott Co. common stock.

15-Dec Received $0.50 per share cash dividend on Hurst Co. common stock.

31-Dec Received $1 per share semiannual cash dividend on Pine Co. common stock.

At December 31, the fair values per share of the common stocks were: Hurst Co. $32, Pine Co. $8, and Scott Co. $18.

Required:

a. Journalize the 2009 transactions and post to the account Stock Investments. (Use the Taccount form.) (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

b. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2009, to show the securities at fair value.

The stock should be classified as available-for-sale securities.

c. Show the balance sheet presentation of the investments at December 31, 2009. At this date, Ramey Associates has common stock $1,500,000 and retained earnings $1,000,000. (If there is a loss, use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)

acc362 on january 1 2014 thao company purchased the following two machines for use i 491819

On January 1, 2014, Thao Company purchased the following two machines for use in its production process.

Machine A: The cash price of this machine was $35,000. Related expenditures included: sales tax $1,700, shipping costs $150, insurance during shipping $80, installation and testing costs $70, and $100 of oil and lubricants to be used with the machinery during its first year of operations. Thao estimates that the useful life of the machine is 5 years with a $5,000 salvage value remaining at the end of that time period. Assume that the straight-line method of depreciation is used.

Machine B: The recorded cost of this machine was $80,000. Thao estimates that the useful life of the machine is 4 years with a $5,000 salvage value remaining at the end of that time period.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the following for Machine A.

(1) The journal entry to record its purchase on January 1, 2014.

(2) The journal entry to record annual depreciation at December 31, 2014.

(b) Calculate the amount of depreciation expense that Thao should record for Machine B each year of its useful life under the following assumptions. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,125. Round cost per unit to 2 decimal place, e.g. 1.25.)

(1) Thao uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

(2) Thao uses the declining-balance method. The rate used is twice the straight-line rate.

(3) Thao uses the units-of-activity method and estimates that the useful life of the machine is 125,000 units. Actual usage is as follows: 2014, 42,000 units; 2015, 35,000 units; 2016, 28,000 units; 2017, 20,000 units.

(c) Which method used to calculate depreciation on Machine B reports the highest amount of depreciation expense in year 1 (2014)? The highest amount in year 4 (2017)? The highest total amount over the 4-year period?

acc362 given the following balance sheet complete a horizontal analysis compute the 491822

Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a percent.

Jill’s Bikes
Comparative Balance Sheet
For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010

(in thousands

2011

2010

Difference

Percentage

Assets

Current Assets

Cash and Equivalents

$72

$94

Accounts Receivable, net

122

104

Inventory

288

232

Total Current Assets

482

430

Property, plant and Equipment

638

358

Total Assets

$1,120

$788

Liabilities

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable

242

148

Accrued Liabilities

48

66

Total Current Liabilities

290

214

Long-Term Liabilities

346

208

Total Liabilities

636

422

Stockholders’ Equity

Common Stock

70

60

Retained Earnings

414

306

Total Stockholders’ Equity

484

366

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$1,120

$788

the board of directors of xiaping trading company is meeting to discuss the past yea 491826

Ethical Issue 1-1

The board of directors of Xiaping Trading Company is meeting to discuss the past year’s results before releasing financial statements to the bank. The discussion includes this exchange:

Wai Lee, company owner: “This has not been a good year! Revenue is down and expenses are way up. If we are not careful, we will report a loss for the third year in a row. I can temporarily transfer some land that I own into the company’s name, and that will beef up our balance sheet. Brent, can you shave $500,000 from expenses?

Then we can probably get the bank loan that we need.”

Brent Ray, company chief accountant: “Wai Lee, you are asking too much.

Generally accepted accounting principles are designed to keep this sort of thing from happening.”

Requirements

1. What is the fundamental ethical issue in this situation?

2. How do the two suggestions of the company owner differ?

the net income of steinbach amp sons a department store decreased sharply during 201 491827

Ethical Issue 3-1

The net income of Steinbach & Sons, a department store, decreased sharply during 2014. Mort Steinbach, manager of the store, anticipates the need for a bank loan in 2015. Late in 2014, Steinbach instructs the store’s accountant to record a $2,000 sale of furniture to the Steinbach family, even though the goods will not be shipped from the manufacturer until January 2015. Steinbach also tells the accountant not to make the following December 31, 2014, adjusting entries:

Salaries owed to employees 900

Prepaid insurance that has expired 400

Requirements

1. Compute the overall effects of these transactions on the store’s reported income for 2014.

2. Why is Steinbach taking this action? Is his action ethical? Give your reason, identifying the parties helped and the parties harmed by Steinbach’s action. (Challenge)

3. As a personal friend, what advice would you give the accountant? (Challenge)

levon helm was a kind of one man mortgage broker he would drive around tennessee loo 491828

Fraud Case 7-1

Levon Helm was a kind of one-man mortgage broker. He would drive around Tennessee looking for homes that had second mortgages, and if the criteria were favorable, he would offer to buy the second mortgage for “cash on the barrelhead.” Helm bought low and sold high, making sizable profits. Being a small operation, he employed one person, Cindy Patterson, who did all his bookkeeping. Patterson was an old family friend, and he trusted her so implicitly that he never checked up on the ledgers or the bank reconciliations. At some point, Patterson started “borrowing” from the business and concealing her transactions by booking phony expenses. She intended to pay it back someday, but she got used to the extra cash and couldn’t stop. By the time the scam was discovered, she had drained the company of funds that it owed to many of its investors. The company went bankrupt, Patterson did some jail time, and Helm lost everything.

Requirements

1. What was the key control weakness in this case?

2. Many small businesses cannot afford to hire enough people for adequate separation of duties. What can they do to compensate for this?

rae philippe was a warehouse manager for atkins oilfield supply a business that oper 491829

Fraud Case 5-1

Rae Philippe was a warehouse manager for Atkins Oilfield Supply, a business that operated across eight Western states. She was an old pro and had known most of the other warehouse managers for many years. Around December each year, auditors would come to do a physical count of the inventory at each warehouse.

Recently, Rae’s brother started his own drilling company, and persuaded Rae to “loan” him 80 joints of 5-inch drill pipe to use for his first well. He promised to have it back to Rae by December, but the well encountered problems and the pipe was still in the ground. Rae knew the auditors were on the way, so she called her friend Andy, who ran another Atkins warehouse. “Send me over 80 joints of 5-inch pipe tomorrow and I’ll get them back to you ASAP” said Rae. When the auditors came, all the pipe on the books was accounted for, and they filed a “no-exception” report.

Requirements

1. Is there anything the company or the auditors could do in future to detect this kind of fraudulent practice?

2. How would this kind of action impact the financial performance of the company?

dobbs wholesale antiques makes all sales under terms of fob shipping point 491830

Ethical Issue 5-1

Dobbs Wholesale Antiques makes all sales under terms of FOB shipping point. The company usually ships inventory to customers approximately one week after receiving the order. For orders received late in December, Kathy Dobbs, the owner, decides when to ship the goods. If profits are already at an acceptable level, Dobbs delays shipment until January. If profits for the current year are lagging behind expectations, Dobbs ships the goods during December.

Requirements

1. Under Dobbs’ FOB policy, when should the company record a sale?

2. Do you approve or disapprove of Dobbs’ manner of deciding when to ship goods to customers and record the sales revenue? If you approve, give your reason. If you disapprove, identify a better way to decide when to ship goods. (There is no accounting rule against Dobbs’ practice.)

on january 3 2012 trusty delivery service purchased a truck at a cost of 90 000 491831

P9-28A Capitalized asset cost and first year depreciation, and identifying depreciation results that meet management objectives

On January 3, 2012, Trusty Delivery Service purchased a truck at a cost of $90,000. Before placing the truck in service, Trusty spent $3,000 painting it, $1,500 replacing tires, and $4,500 overhauling the engine. The truck should remain in service for five years and have a residual value of $9,000. The truck’s annual mileage is expected to be 22,500 miles in each of the first four years and 10,000 miles in the fifth year—100,000 miles in total. In deciding which depreciation method to use, Mikail Johnson, the general manager, requests a depreciation schedule for each of the depreciation methods (straight-line, units-of-production, and doubledeclining- balance).

Requirements

1. Prepare a depreciation schedule for each depreciation method, showing asset cost, depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation, and asset book value.

2. Trusty prepares financial statements using the depreciation method that reports the highest net income in the early years of asset use. For income tax purposes, the company uses the depreciation method that minimizes income taxes in the early years. Consider the first year that Trusty uses the truck. Identify the depreciation methods that meet the general manager’s objectives, assuming the income tax authorities permit the use of any of the methods.

midland telecom provides communication services in iowa nebraska the dakotas and mon 491833

P9-31A Accounting for intangibles

Midland Telecom provides communication services in Iowa, Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Midland purchased goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shipley Wireless Company, which had the following figures:

Book value of assets

$750,000

Market value of assets

1,000,000

less Liabilities

530,000

Requirements

1. Journalize the entry to record Midland’s purchase of Shipley Wireless for $320,000 cash plus a $480,000 note payable.

2. What special asset does Midland’s acquisition of Shipley Wireless identify? How should Midland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shipley Wireless? Explain in detail.

on may 31 2010 deliver it the overnight shipper had total assets of 24 billion and t 491834

On May 31, 2012, Express Delivery, the overnight shipper, had total assets of $21,000,000,000 and total liabilities of $13,000,000,000. Included among assets were property, plant, and equipment with a cost of $17,000,000,000 and accumulated depreciation of $10,000,000,000. During the year ended May 31, 212, Express Delivery earned total revenues of $28,000,000,000 and had total expenses of $25,000,000,000, of which $8,000,000,000 was depreciation expenses. The CFO and the controller are concerned that the results of 2012 will make investors unhappy. Additionally, both hold stock options to purchase shares at a reduced price, so they would like to see the market price continue to grow. They decide to “extend” the life of assets so that depreciation will be reduced to $5,000,000,000 for 2012.

1. What is the change to net income due to their decision?
2. What appears to be their motivation for the change in asset lives? Is this ethical? Explain.

on may 31 2010 deliver it the overnight shipper had total assets of 24 billion and t 491835

P9-32A Ethics

On May 31, 2010 Deliver it, the overnight shipper, had total assets of $24 billion and total liabilities of $17 billion included among the assets were property, plant, and equipment with a cost of $19 billion and accumulated depreciation of $11 Billion. during the year ended May 31, 2010, Deliver it earned total revenues of $32 billion and had total expenses of $27 billion, of which $5 billion was depreciation expenses. The CFO and controller are concerned that the result of 2010 will make investors unhappy. Additionally, both hold stock options to purchase shares at a reduced price, so they would like to see the market price continue to grow. They decided to “extend” the life of assets so that depreciation will be reduced to three billion for 2010.

Requirements

1. What is the change to net income due to their decision?

2. What appears to be their motivation for the change in asset lives? Is this ethical?

Explain

midland telecom provides communication service in iowa nebraska the dakotas and mont 491836

P9-31A Accounting for intangibles [20-25min]

Midland Telecom provides communication service in Iowa, Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Midland purchases goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shipley Wireless Company, which had the following.

Book value of assets

750,000

Market Value of assets

1,000,000

Liabilities

530,000

Requirements:

1. Journalize the entry to record Midland’s purchase of Shipley Wireless for $ 320,000 cash plus a $480,000 note payable.

2. What special asset does Midland’s acquisition of Shipley Wireless identify? How should Midland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shipley Wireless? Explain in detail.

presented below are a number of independent situations 491837

E7-2 Determine cash balance

Presented below are a number of independent situations.

For each individual situation, determine the amount that should be reported as cash.

1. Checking account balance $943,570; certificate of deposit $1,408,800; cash advance to subsidiary of $982,960; utility deposit paid to gas company $195.

2. Checking account balance $502,890; an overdraft in special checking account at same bank as normal checking account of $18,000; cash held in a bond sinking fund $216,550; petty cash fund $353; coins and currency on hand $1,490.

3. Checking account balance $621,060; postdated check from customer $12,190; cash restricted due to maintaining compensating balance requirement of $104,100; certified check from customer $9,560; postage stamps on hand $654.

4. Checking account balance at bank $42,490; money market balance at mutual fund (has checking privileges) $49,400; NSF check received from customer $810.

5. Checking account balance $706,750; cash restricted for future plant expansion $504,890; short-term Treasury bills $183,800; cash advance received from customer $984 (not included in checking account balance); cash advance of $8,050 to company executive, payable on demand; refundable deposit of $30,900 paid to federal government to guarantee performance on construction contract.

acc362 premier bank and trust is considering giving alou company a loan 491775

Premier Bank and Trust is considering giving Alou Company a loan. Before doing so, management decides that further discussions with Alou’s accountant may be desirable. One area of particular concern is the inventory account, which has a year-end balance of $297,000. Discussions with the accountant reveal the following.

1. Alou sold goods costing $38,000 to Comerico Company, FOB shipping point, on December 28. The goods are not expected to arrive at Comerico until January 12. The goods were not included in the physical inventory because they were not in the warehouse.

2. The physical count of the inventory did not include goods costing $95,000 that were shipped to Alou FOB destination on December 27 and were still in transit at year-end.

3. Alou received goods costing $19,000 on January 2. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on December 26 by Grant Co. The goods were not included in the physical count.

4. Alou sold goods costing $35,000 to Emerick Co., FOB destination, on December 30. The goods were received at Emerick on January 8. They were not included in Alou’s physical inventory.

5. Alou received goods costing $44,000 on January 2 that were shipped FOB shipping point on December 29. The shipment was a rush order that was supposed to arrive December 31. This purchase was included in the ending inventory of $297,000.

Determine the correct inventory amount on December 31.

acc362 the cost of goods sold computations for silver company and gold company are s 491777

The cost of goods sold computations for Silver Company and Gold Company are shown below.

Silver Company

Gold Company

Beginning inventory

47,000

71,000

Cost of goods purchased

200,000

290,000

Cost of goods available for sale

247,000

361,000

Ending inventory

55,000

69,000

Cost of goods sold

192,000

292,000

Instructions:

(a) Compute inventory turnover for each company. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)

(b) Compute days in inventory for each company. (Round inventory turnover values to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

acc362 milo company had a beginning inventory of 400 units of product kimbo at a cos 491778

Milo Company had a beginning inventory of 400 units of Product Kimbo at a cost of $8 per unit. During the year, purchases were:

20-Feb 300

@

$9

12-Aug

600

@ $11

5-May 500

@

$10

8-Dec 200

@

$12

Milo Company uses a periodic inventory system. Sales totaled 1,500 units.

Instructions:

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Calculate the weighted-average unit cost. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. $2.25.)

(c) Determine (1) the ending inventory, and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average-cost). (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,120.)

(d) Which cost flow method results in (1) the lowest inventory amount for the balance sheet, and (2) the lowest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

acc362 on june 10 rebecca company purchased 7 600 of merchandise from clinton compan 491779

On June 10, Rebecca Company purchased $7,600 of merchandise from Clinton Company, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30. Rebecca pays the freight costs of $400 on June 11. Damaged goods totaling $300 are returned toClintonfor credit on June 12. The fair value of these goods is $70. On June 19, Rebecca pays Clinton Company in full, less the purchase discount. Both companies use a perpetual inventory system.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare separate entries for each transaction on the books of Rebecca Company. (Record journal entries in the order in which they must have occurred. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

(b) Prepare separate entries for each transaction for Clinton Company. The merchandise purchased by Rebecca on June 10 had costClinton$4,300. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

acc362 presented below is information related to taylor co for the month of january 491780

Presented below is information related to Taylor Co. for the month of January 2014.

Ending inventory per perpetual records

21,600

Insurance expense

12,000

Ending inventory actually on hand

21,000

Rent expense

20,000

Cost of goods sold

208,000

Salaries and wages expense

59,000

Freight-out

7,000

Sales discounts

8,000

Sales returns and allowances

13,000

Sales revenue

378,000

Instructions:

(a) Prepare the necessary adjusting entry for inventory. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

(b) Prepare the necessary closing entries.

acc362 presented below is financial information for two different companies 491781

Presented below is financial information for two different companies.

Lee Company

Lee Company

Sales

90,000

(d)

Sales return

(a)

5,000

Net sales

81,000

95,000

Cost of goods sold

56,000

(e)

Gross profit

(b)

41,500

Operating

15,000

(f)

Net income

(c )

15,000

*(a) Determine the missing amounts.

*(b) Determine the gross profit rates. (Round answer to 1 decimal place, e.g. 25.2%.)

acc362 two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet a 491783

Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two corporations for the year 2014, Steven Craig and Georgia Enterprises.

Steven Craig

Georgia Enterprises

Beginning of year:

Total assets

108,359

144,106

Total liabilities

94,954

(c)

Total stockholders’ equity

(a)

83,783

End of year:

Total assets

178,736

201,078

Total liabilities

134,052

55,855

Total stockholders’

44,684

145,223

Changes during year in stockholders’ equity:

Additional investment

(b)

27,928

Dividends

26,810

(d)

Total revenues

240,177

111,710

Total expenses

195,493

61,441

Determine the missing amounts.

acc362 kara shin is a licensed cpa during the first month of operations of her busin 491785

Kara Shin is a licensed CPA. During the first month of operations of her business, Kara Shin, Inc., the following events and transactions occurred.

1-May Stockholders invested $20,000 cash in exchange for common stock.
2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $2,000 per month.
3 Purchased $1,500 of supplies on account from Hartig Supply Company.
7 Paid office rent of $900 cash for the month.
11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $2,800 for services provided.
12 Received $3,500 advance on a management consulting engagement.
17 Received cash of $1,200 for services completed for Lucille Co.
31 Paid secretary-receptionist $2,000 salary for the month.
31 Paid 40% of balance due Hartig Supply Company.

Kara uses the following chart of accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 126 Supplies, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 209 Unearned Service Revenue, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions. (If there is no transaction, enter No entry as the description and 0 for the amount.)
(b) Post to the ledger accounts. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
(c) Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2008. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

acc362 nayak company has recorded the following items in its financial records 491789

Nayak Company has recorded the following items in its financial records

Cash in bank

41,000

Cash in plant expansion fund

100,000

Cash on hand

8,000

Highly liquid investments

34,000

Petty cash

500

Receivables from customers

89,000

Stock investments

61,000

The cash in bank is subject to a compensating balance of $5,000. The highly liquid investments had maturities of 3 months or less when they were purchased. The stock investments will be sold in the next 6 to 12 months. The plant expansion project will begin in 3 years.

Instructions:

(a) What amount should Nayak report as “Cash and cash equivalents” on its balance sheet?

(b) Where should the items not included in part (a) be reported on the balance sheet?

(c) What disclosures should Nayak make in its financial statements concerning “cash and cash equivalents”?

acc362 the ledger of elburn company at the end of the current year shows accounts re 491790

The ledger of Elburn Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $110,000, Sales Revenue $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $28,000. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) (a) If Elburn uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Elburn determines that T. Thum’s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.

(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.

(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.

acc362 collins computer timeshare company entered into the following transactions du 491792

Collins Computer Timeshare Company entered into the following transactions during May 2014.

1. Purchased computer terminals for $20,000 from Digital Equipment on account.

2. Paid $3,000 cash for May rent on storage space.

3. Received $15,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.

4. Provided computer services to Schmidt Construction Company for $2,400 cash.

5. Paid Central States Power Co. $11,000 cash for energy usage in May.

6. Stockholders invested an additional $32,000 in the business.

7. Paid Digital Equipment for the terminals purchased in (1) above.

8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $900 on account.

Instructions

Indicate with the appropriate letter whether each of the transactions above results in:

(a) An increase in assets and a decrease in assets.

(b) An increase in assets and an increase in stockholders’ equity.

(c) An increase in assets and an increase in liabilities.

(d) A decrease in assets and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.

(e) A decrease in assets and a decrease in liabilities.

(f) An increase in liabilities and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.

(g) An increase in stockholders’ equity and a decrease in liabilities.

acc362 on august 31 the balance sheet of donahue veterinary clinic showed cash 9 000 491793

On August 31, the balance sheet of Donahue Veterinary Clinic showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, Common Stock $13,000, and Retained Earnings $700. During September, the following transactions occurred.

1. Paid $2,900 cash for accounts payable due.

2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.

3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.

4. Earned revenue of $7,300, of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.

5. Declared and paid a $400 cash dividend

6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $200.

7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.

8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank on a 6-month note payable.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash 1 Accounts Receivable 1 Supplies 1 Equipment 5 Notes Payable 1 Accounts Payable 1 Common Stock 1 Retained Earnings 1 Revenues 2 Expenses 2 Dividends.

(b) Prepare an income statement for September, a retained earnings statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.

acc362 orwell company accumulates the following adjustment data at december 31 491794

Orwell Company accumulates the following adjustment data at December 31.

1. Services provided but not recorded total $1,420.

2. Supplies of $300 have been used.

3. Utility expenses of $225 are unpaid.

4. Unearned service revenue of $260 is recognized for services performed.

5. Salaries of $800 are unpaid.

6. Prepaid insurance totaling $380 has expired.

For each of the above items indicate the following. (Answer for account balances before adjustment should be entered in alphabetical order.)

(a) The type of adjustment (prepaid expense, unearned revenue, accrued revenue, or accrued expense).

(b) The status of accounts before adjustment (overstatement or understatement).

acc362 on may 31 2014 terrell company had a cash balance per books of 6 781 50 491795

On May 31, 2014, Terrell Company had a cash balance per books of $6,781.50. The bank statement from Home Town State Bank on that date showed a balance of $6,804.60. A comparison of the statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The statement included a debit memo of $40 for the printing of additional company checks.

2. Cash sales of $836.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $886.15. The bank credited Terrell Company for the correct amount.

3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $276.25. Deposits in transit were $1,916.15.

4. On May 18, the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to Barry Dietz on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Terrell Company for $658.

5. A $3,000 note receivable was collected by the bank for Terrell Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $20. No interest has been accrued on the note.

6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Bridges Company to Jon Newton for $600 that was incorrectly charged to Terrell Company by the bank.

7.On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $680 for a check issued by Sandy Grifton, a customer, to Terrell Company on account.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2014. (Reconcile the bank balance first and then the book balance.)

(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Terrell Company at May 31, 2014. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

acc362 on january 1 2014 derek company had accounts receivable 139 000 notes receiva 491797

On January 1, 2014, Derek Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $30,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200. The note receivable is from Kaye Noonan Company. It is a 4-month, 12% note dated December 31, 2013. Derek Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year, the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 5 Sold $24,000 of merchandise to Zwingle Company, terms n/15.

20 Accepted Zwingle Company’s $24,000, 3-month, 9% note for balance due.

Feb. 18 Sold $8,000 of merchandise to Gerard Company and accepted Gerard’s $8,000, 6- month, 8% note for the amount due.

Apr. 20 Collected Zwingle Company note in full.

30 Received payment in full from Kaye Noonan Company on the amount due.

May 25 Accepted Isabella Inc.’s $4,000, 3-month, 7% note in settlement of a past-due balance on account.

Aug. 18 Received payment in full from Gerard Company on note due.

25 The Isabella Inc. note was dishonored. Isabella Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.

Sept. 1 Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Fernando Company and accepted a $12,000, 6- month, 10% note for the amount due.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions.

acc362 presented below are selected transactions at tomas company for 2014 491798

Presented below are selected transactions at Tomas Company for 2014.

Jan. 1 Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2004. The machine cost $58,000 on that date. It had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.

30-Jun Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2011. The computer cost $40,000. It had a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $14,000.

Dec. 31 Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2010. The truck cost $33,000. It was depreciated based on a 6-year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.

Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation, where applicable, on assets disposed of. Tomas Company uses straight-line depreciation. (Assume depreciation is up to date as of December 31, 2013.) (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

acc362 on january 1 chevon corporation had 98 000 shares of no par common stock issu 491801

On January 1, Chevon Corporation had 98,000 shares of no-par common stock issued and outstanding. The stock has a stated value of $4 per share. During the year, the following occurred.

Apr. 1 Issued 25,000 additional shares of common stock for $17 per share.

Jun 15 Declared a cash dividend of $1 per share to stockholders of record on June 30.

Jul 10 Paid the $1 cash dividend.

Dec. 1 Issued 2,000 additional shares of common stock for $19 per share.

Dec 15 Declared a cash dividend on outstanding shares of $1.20 per share to stockholders of record on December 31.

Instructions:

a. Prepare the entries, if any, on each of the three dividend dates. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

acc362 chicory cosmetics acquired 15 of the 200 000 shares of common stock of racine 491803

Presented below are two independent situations.

1. Chicory Cosmetics acquired 15% of the 200,000 shares of common stock of Racine Fashion at a total cost of $13 per share on March 18, 2014. On June 30,Racine declared and paid a $60,000 dividend. On December 31,Racine reported net income of $122,000 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Racine Fashion was $15 per share. The stock is classified as non-trading.

2. Frank, Inc., obtained significant influence over Nowak Corporation by buying 30% of Nowak’s 30,000 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $9 per share on January 1, 2014. On June 15, Nowak declared and paid a cash dividend of $30,000. On December 31, Nowak reported a net income of $80,000 for the year.

Instructions:

Prepare all the necessary journal entries for 2014 for (a) Chicory Cosmetics and (b) Frank, Inc. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

acc362 zippydah company has the following data at december 31 2014 491804

Zippydah Company has the following data at December 31, 2014.

Securities

Cost

Fair Value

Trading

120,000

124,000

Non-trading

100,000

94,000

The non-trading securities are held as a long-term investment.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare the adjusting entries to report 1. Trading securities at fair value and 2. Non-trading securities at fair value. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

(b) Indicate the statement presentation of each class of securities.

acc362 in january 2014 the management of stefan company concludes that it has suffic 491805

In January 2014, the management of Stefan Company concludes that it has sufficient cash to permit some short-term investments in debt and stock securities. During the year, the following transactions occurred.

Feb. 1 Purchased 600 shares of Superior common stock for $31,800, plus brokerage fees of $600.

Mar. 1 Purchased 800 shares of Pawlik common stock for $20,000, plus brokerage fees of $400.

Apr. 1 Purchased 50 $1,000, 7% Venice bonds for $50,000, plus $1,000 brokerage fees.

Interest is payable semiannually on April 1 and October 1.

July 1. Received a cash dividend of $0.60 per share on the Superior common stock.

Aug. 1 Sold 200 shares of Superior common stock at $58 per share less brokerage fees of $200.

Sept. 1 Received a $1 per share cash dividend on the Pawlik common stock.

Oct. 1 Received the semiannual interest on the Venice bonds.

Oct. 1 Sold the Venice bonds for $50,000 less $1,000 brokerage fees.

At December 31, the fair value of the Superior common stock was $55 per share. The fair value of the Pawlik common stock was $24 per share.

Instructions:

a. Journalize the transactions and post to the accounts Debt Investments and Stock Investments. (Use the T-account form.) (Record entries in the order displayed in the problem statement. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

b. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2014, to report the investment securities at fair value. All securities are considered to be trading securities. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

c. Show the balance sheet presentation of investment securities at December 31, 2014.

acc407 complete the following problem sets from the introduction to management accou 491735

2-65 CVP and Break-Even

Complete the following problem sets from the Introduction to Management Accounting text: CVP and Break-Even, on p. 89 EXCEL Application Exercise Goal: Create an Excel spreadsheet to perform CVP analysis and show the relationship between price, costs, and break-even points in terms of units and dollars. Use the results to answer questions about your

findings.

Scenario: Phonetronix is a small manufacturer of telephone and communications devices. Recently, company management decided to investigate the profitability of cellular phone production. They have three different proposals to evaluate. Under all the proposals, the fixed costs for the new phone would be $110,000. Under proposal A, the selling price of the new phone would be $99 and the variable cost per unit would be $55. Under proposal B, the selling price of the phone would be $129 and the variable cost would remain the same. Under proposal C, the selling price would be $99 and the variable cost would be $49.

When you have completed your spreadsheet, answer the following questions:

1. What are the break-even points in units and dollars under proposal A?

2. How did the increased selling price under proposal B impact the break-even points in units and dollars compared to the break-even points calculated under proposal A?

3. Why did the change in variable cost under proposal C not impact the break-even points in units and dollars as significantly as proposal B did?

Step-by-Step:

1. Open a new Excel spreadsheet.

2. In column A, create a bold-faced heading that contains the following:

Row 1: Chapter 2 Decision Guideline

Row 2: Phonetronix

Row 3: Cost-Volume-Profit (CVP) Analysis

Row 4: Today’s Date

3. Merge and center the four heading rows across columns A through D.

4. In Row 7, create the following bold-faced, right-justified column headings: Column

B: Proposal A Column C: Proposal B Column D: Proposal C Note: Adjust cell widths when necessary as you work.

5. In Column A, create the following row headings: Row 8: Selling price Row 9: Variable cost Row 10: Contribution margin Row 11: Contribution margin ratio Skip a row Row 13: Fixed cost Skip a row Row 15: Break-even in units Skip a row Row 17: Break-even in dollars

6. Use the scenario data to fill in the selling price, variable cost, and fixed cost amounts for the three proposals.

7. Use the appropriate formulas from this chapter to calculate contribution margin, contribution margin ratio, break-even in units, and break-even in dollars.

8. Format all amounts as: Number tab: Category: Currency Decimal places: 0 Symbol: None Negative numbers: Red with parenthesis

9. Change the format of the selling price, contribution margin, fixed cost, and breakeven in dollars amounts to display a dollar symbol.

10. Change the format of both contribution margin headings to display as indented: Alignment tab: Horizontal: Left (Indent) Indent: 1

11. Change the format of the contribution margin amount cells to display a top border, using the default line style. Border tab: Icon: Top Border

12. Change the format of the contribution margin ratio amounts to display as a percentage with two decimal places. Number tab: Category: Percentage Decimal places: 2

13. Change the format of all break-even headings and amounts to display as boldfaced.

14. Activate the ability to use heading names in formulas under Tools ? Options: Calculation tab: Check the box: Accept labels in formulas

15. Replace the cell-based formulas with “word-based” equivalents for each formula used in Proposal A. Example: Contribution margin for proposal B would be: = (‘Selling price’ ‘Proposal B’) – (‘Variable cost’ ‘Proposal B’) Read more: CVP and Break-Even Goal: Create an Excel spread…

acc362 bristol sales had the following transactions for dvds in 2012 its first year 491736

5-5A Effect of inventory cost flow on ending inventory balance and gross margin.

Bristol Sales had the following transactions for DVDs in 2012, its first year of operations.

Jan. 20 Purchased 75 units @ $17 = $1,275

Apr. 21 Purchased 450 units @ $19 = $8,550

July 25 Purchased 200 units @ $23 = $4,600

Sept. 19 Purchased 100 units @ $29 = $2,900

During this year, Bristol Sales sold 775 DVDs for $60 each.

Required:

A. Compute the amount of ending inventory Bristol would report on the balance sheet, assuming the following cost flow assumptions: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted average.

B. Record the above transactions in general journal form and post to T-accounts using (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted average. Use a separate set of journal entries and T-accounts for each method. Assume all transactions are cash transactions.

C. Compute the difference in gross margin between the FIFO and LIFO cost flow assumptions.

acc362 the following information pertains to porter company for 2011 491737

5-4A Effect of inventory cost flow ( FIFO, LIFO and weighted average) on gross margin

The following information pertains to Porter Company for 2011.

Beginning Inventory 70 units @ $13

Units Purchased 280 units @ $18

Ending inventory consisted of 30 units. Porter sold 320 units at $30 each. All purchases and sales were made with cash.

Required:

A. Compute the gross margin for Porter Company using the following cost flow assumptions:

B. What is the dollar amount of difference in net income between using FIFO versus LIFO? (Ignore income tax considerations.)

C. Determine the cash flow from operating activities, using each of the three cost flow assumptions listed in Requirement A. Ignore the effect of income taxes. Explain why these cash flows have no differences.

acc362 the russo theater will begin operations in march the russo will be unique in 491739

P2-5A

The Russo Theater will begin operations in March. The Russo will be unique in that it and prepare a trial balance. will show only triple features of sequential theme movies. As of March 1, the ledger of Russo showed: No. 101 Cash $16,000; No. 140 Land $42,000; No. 145 Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $18,000; No. 157 Equipment $16,000; No. 201 Accounts Payable $12,000; and No. 311 Common Stock $80,000. During the month of March the following events and transactions occurred.

Mar. 2 Rented the three Star Wars movies (Star Wars, The Empire Strikes Back, and The Return of the Jedi) to be shown for the first 3 weeks of March. The film rental was $9,000; $3,000 was paid in cash and $6,000 will be paid on March 10.

3 Ordered the first three Star Trek movies to be shown the last 10 days of March. It will cost $300 per night.

9 Received $6,500 cash from admissions.

10 Paid balance due on Star Wars movies rental and $3,000 on March 1 accounts payable.

11 Russo Theater contracted with M. Brewer Company to operate the concession stand. Brewer is to pay 10% of gross concession receipts (payable monthly) for the right to operate the concession stand.

12 Paid advertising expenses $800.

20 Received $7,200 cash from customers for admissions.

20 Received the Star Trek movies and paid the rental fee of $3,000.

31 Paid salaries of $4,800.

31 Received statement from M. Brewer showing gross receipts from concessions of $8,000 and the balance due to Russo Theater of $800 ($8,000 x 10%) for March.

Brewer paid one-half the balance due and will remit the remainder on April 5.

31 Received $12,000 cash from customers for admissions.

In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts includes: No. 112

Accounts Receivable, No. 405 Admission Revenue, No. 406 Concession Revenue,

No. 610 Advertising Expense, No. 632 Film Rental Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense.

Instructions

(a) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger. Insert a check mark (.) in the reference column of the ledger for the beginning balance.

(b) Journalize the March transactions.

(c) Post the March journal entries to the ledger. Assume that all entries are posted from page 1 of the journal.

acc362 mike greenberg opened clean window washing inc on july 1 2014 during july the 491742

P4-8A

Mike Greenberg opened Clean Window Washing Inc. on July 1, 2014. During July, the following transactions were completed.

July 1 Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $12,000 cash.

1 Purchased used truck for $8,000, paying $2,000 cash and the balance on account.

3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account.

5 Paid $1,800 cash on a 1-year insurance policy effective July 1.

12 Billed customers $3,700 for cleaning services.

18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.

20 Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries.

21 Collected $1,600 cash from customers billed on July 12.

25 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.

31 Paid $290 for maintenance of the truck during month.

31 Declared and paid $600 cash dividend.

The chart of accounts for Clean Window Washing contains the following accounts:

Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Equipment, Accumulated

Depreciation— Equipment, Accounts Payable, Salaries and Wages Payable,

Common Stock, Retained Earnings, Dividends, Income Summary, Service Revenue,

Maintenance and Repairs Expense, Supplies Expense, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the July transactions.

(b) Post to the ledger accounts. (Use T-accounts.)

(c) Prepare a trial balance at July 31.

(d) Journalize the following adjustments.

(1) Services performed but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,700.

(2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $180.

(3) One-twelfth of the insurance expired.

(4) An inventory count shows $320 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31.

(5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400.

(e) Post adjusting entries to the Taccounts.

(f) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified balance sheet at July 31.

(h) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process.

(i) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.

acc362 mike paul is the bookkeeper for benelli company mike has been trying to get t 491745

Mike Paul is the bookkeeper for Benelli Company. Mike has been trying to get the balance sheet of Benelli Company to balance. It finally balanced, but now he’s not sure it is correct.

BENELLI COMPANY

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2010

Assets

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

20,500

Accounts payable

16,000

Supplies

9,500

Accounts receivable

(12,000)

Equipment

40,000

Common stock

40,000

Dividends

8,000

Retained earnings

34,000

Total assets

78,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

Complete the corrected balance sheet below. (List assets in order of liquidity.)

acc362 some of grand junction corporation s investment securities are classified as 491746

Some of Grand Junction Corporation’s investment securities are classified as trading securities and some are classified as available-for-sale. The cost and market value of each category at December 31, 2011, was as follows.

Cost

Fair Value

Unrealized Gain (Loss)

Trading securities

96,300

84,900

(11,400)

Available-for-sale securities

59,000

63,200

4,200

At December 31, 2010, the Market Adjustment-Trading account had a debit balance of $2,200, and the Market Adjustment-Available-for-Sale account had a credit balance of $7,750.

Prepare the required journal entries for each group of securities for December 31, 2011.

acc362 if soule company had net income of 585 000 in 2011 and it experienced a 30 in 491750

If Soule Company had net income of $585,000 in 2011 and it experienced a 30% increase in net income over 2010, what was its 2010 net income?

PERKINS INC.

Balance Sheet (partial)

Cash

8,041,000

Short-term investments

4,947,000

Accounts receivable

12,545,000

Inventories

14,814,000

Other current assets

5,571,000

Total current assets

45,918,000

Total current liabilities

40,644,000

What are the (a) working capital, (b) current ratio, and (c) acid-test ratio? (Round ratios to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)

acc362 the following data are from the income statements of huntsinger company 491752

The following data are from the income statements of Huntsinger Company.

2011

2010

Sales

6,420,000

6,240,000

Beginning inventory

980,000

860,000

Purchases

4,340,000

4,661,000

Ending inventory

1,020,000

980,000

Compute for each year (1) the inventory turnover and (2) the average days to sell the inventory. (Round answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5. Use rounded answers for future calculations.)

acc362 tomlin company begins operations on april 1 information from job cost sheets 491756

Tomlin Company begins operations on April 1. Information from job cost sheets shows the following.

Manufacturing Costs Assigned

Job

Number

April

May

June

Month Completed

10

5,200

4,400

May

11

6,100

3,900

3,000

June

12

1,200

April

13

4,700

4,500

June

14

3,900

3,600

Not complete

Job 12 was completed in April. Job 10 was completed in May. Jobs 11 and 13 were completed in June. Each job was sold for 50% above its cost in the month following completion.

Instructions

1. What is the balance in Work in Process Inventory at the end of each month?

2. What is the balance in Finished Goods Inventory at the end of each month?

3. What is the gross profit for May, June, and July?

acc362 jim thome has prepared the following list of statements about bonds 491759

Jim Thome has prepared the following list of statements about bonds.

1. Bonds are a form of interest-bearing notes payable.

2. When seeking long-term financing, an advantage of issuing bonds over issuing common stock is that stockholder control is not affected.

3. When seeking long-term financing, an advantage of issuing common stock over issuing bonds is that tax savings result.

4. Secured bonds have specific assets of the issuer pledged as collateral for the bonds.

5. Secured bonds are also known as debenture bonds.

6. Bonds that mature in installments are called term bonds.

7. A conversion feature may be added to bonds to make them more attractive to bond buyers.

8. The rate used to determine the amount of cash interest the borrower pays is called the stated rate.

9. Bond prices are usually quoted as a percentage of the face value of the bond.

10. The present value of a bond is the value at which it should sell in the marketplace.

Instructions

Identify each statement above as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

acc362 an analysis of comparative balance sheets the current year s income statement 491762

An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year’s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Conard Corp. uncovered the following items.

Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary. Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using the four major classifications listed to the right.

ITEMS

a. Payment of interest on notes payable

b. Exchange of land for patent

c. Sale of building at book value

d. Payment of dividends

e. Depreciation

f. Receipt of dividends on investment in stock

g. Receipt of interest on notes receivable

h. Issuance of capital stock

i. Amortization of patent

j. Issuance of bonds for land

k. Purchase of land

l. Conversion of bonds into common stock

m. Loss on sale of land

n. Retirement of bonds

NOTE: You will associate each item to the appropriate number (representing classification) using the center column.

acc362 summary financial information for holland company is as follows 491765

Summary financial information for Holland Company is as follows.

December 31, 2012

December 31, 2011

Current assets

199,000

220,000

Plant assets

821,000

780,000

Total assets

1,020,000

1,000,000

Compute the amount and percentage changes in 2012 using horizontal analysis, assuming 2011 is the base year. (For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45). Round percent to 1 decimal place, e.g. 7.5.)

acc362 ronald distributors is a growing company whose ability to raise capital has n 491766

Ronald Distributors is a growing company whose ability to raise capital has not been growing as quickly as its expanding assets and sales. Ronald’s local banker has indicated that the company cannot increase its borrowing for the foreseeable future.

Ronald’s suppliers are demanding payment for goods acquired within 30 days of the invoice date, but Ronald’s customers are slow in paying for their purchases (60-90 days). As a result, Ronald has a cash flow problem.

Ronald needs $960,000 to cover next Friday’s payroll. Its balance of outstanding accounts receivable totals $1,000,000. What might Ronald do to alleviate this cash crunch?

Record the entry that Ronald would make when it raises the needed cash. (Assume a 2% service charge.) (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

acc362 the condensed financial statements of eau fra che company for the years 2010 491770

The condensed financial statements of Eau Fraîche Company for the years 2010 and 2011 are presented below.

EAU FRAÎCHE COMPANY

Balance Sheets

December 31

2011

2010

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

330

360

Accounts receivable (net)

470

400

Inventories

460

390

Prepaid expenses

120

160

Total current assets

1,380

1,310

Property, plant, and equipment

420

380

Investments

10

10

Intangibles and other assets

530

510

Total assets

2,340

2,340

Current liabilities

900

790

Long-term liabilities

410

380

Stockholders’equity – common

1,030

1,040

Total liabilities and stockholders’equity

2,340

2,210

EAU FRAÎCHE COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Years Ended December 31

2011

2010

Revenues

3,800

3,480

Costs and expenses

Cost of goods sold

970

890

Selling and administrative expenses

2,400

2,330

Interest expense

10

20

Total costs and expenses

3,380

3,240

Income before income taxes

420

220

Income tax expense

168

132

Net income

252

88

Compute the following ratios for 2010 and 2011. (Round current ratio and inventory turnover to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.50. Round all other answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 5.2.)

acc362 after the accounts are closed on july 3 2008 prior to liquidating the partner 491772

After the accounts are closed on July 3, 2008, prior to liquidating the partnership, the capital accounts of Ann Daniels, Harold Burton, and Carla Ramariz are $27,000, $4,500, and $32,000, respectively. Cash and noncash assets total $9,500 and $84,000, respectively. Amounts owed to creditors total $30,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 2:1:1. Between July 3 and July 29, the noncash assets are sold for $54,000, the partner with the capital deficiency pays his deficiency to the partnership, and the liabilities are paid.

Instructions

1. Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, indicating (a) the sale of assets and division of loss, (b) the payment of liabilities, (c) the receipt of the deficiency (from the appropriate partner), and (d) the distribution of cash.

2. If the partner with the capital deficiency declares bankruptcy and is unable to pay the deficiency, explain how the deficiency would be divided between the partners.

acc362 lebo hardware reported the cost of goods sold as follows 491773

Lebo Hardware reported the cost of goods sold as follows:

2008

2009

Beginning Inventory

20,000

30,000

Cost of goods purchased

150,000

175,000

Cost of goods available for sale

170,000

205,000

Ending inventory

30,000

35,000

Cost of goods sold

140,000

170,000

Lebo made two errors: (1) 2008 ending inventory was overstated by $3,000 and (2) 2009 ending inventory was understated $6,000.

Instructions

Compute the correct cost of goods sold for each year.

acc362 the adjusted trial balance of quad cities tours inc as of october 31 2008 its 491774

The adjusted trial balance of Quad Cities Tours Inc. as of October 31, 2008 (its year end) contains the following information.

Accounts Payable

170,000

Accounts Receivable

15,000

Accumulated Depreciation-Buildings

144,000

Accumulated Depreciation Equipment

715,000

Bonds Payable

600,000

Buildings—Offices and Cabins

660,000

Cash

36,000

Common Stock

300,000

Equipment

840,000

Income Taxes Payable

56,250

Interest Payable

30,000

Inventories

485,000

Investment in Iowa Trading Post(Trading-shrt term

140,000

Land

653,000

Mortgage payable(on fishing cabins-lng term)

247,750

Notes payable (short term)

164,000

Prepaid advertising

17,000

Prepaid insurance

9,000

Retained earnings

440,000

Supplies

12,000

Instructions:

(a) Prepare in good form a classified balance sheet for quad cities tours in.

(b) Calculate the following balance sheet relationships: current ratio, debt to total assets ratio, and working capital.

(c) Assume the Quad cities has come to you, as the senior loan officer of Big Woods Credit Union, seeking a $500,000 loan to help defray the costs of replacing much of its rental camping gear and canoes. Would you be willing to approve the loan? Is there any additional information you would like to have before making your decision?

mike kite company a small melbourne firm that sells kites on the web wants a master 491704

7-B1 Prepare a Master Budget

* $ refers to New Zealand dollars.

Mike Kite Company, a small Melbourne firm that sells kites on the Web, wants a master budget for the three months beginning January 1, 2008. It desires an ending minimum cash balance of $5,000 each month. Sales are forecasted at an average wholesale selling price of $8 per kite. Merchandise costs average $4 per kite. All sales are on credit, payable within 30 days, but experience has shown that 60% of current sales are collected in the current month, 30% in the next month, and 10% in the month thereafter. Bad debts are negligible.

In January, Mike Kite is beginning just in time (JIT) delivery from suppliers, which means that purchases will equal expected sales. On January 1, purchases will cease until inventory decreases to $6,000, after which time purchases will equal sales. Purchases during any given month are paid in full during the following month.

Monthly operating expenses are as follows:

Wages and Salaries

15,000

Insurance Expired

125

Depreciation

250

Miscellaneous

2,500

Rent

$250

per month plus 10% of quarterly sales over $10,000

Cash dividends of $1,500 are to be paid quarterly, beginning January 15, and are declared on the 15th of the previous month. All operating expenses are paid as incurred, except insurance, depreciation, and rent. Rent of $250 is paid at the beginning of each month, and the additional 10% of sales is paid quarterly on the 10th of the month following the end of the quarter. The next rent settlement date is January 10.

The company plans to buy some new fixtures for $3,000 cash in March. Money can be borrowed and repaid in multiples of $500 at an interest rate of 10% per annum.

Management wants to minimize borrowing and repay rapidly. Interest is compounded monthly but paid when the principal is repaid. Assume that borrowing occurs at the beginning, and repayments at the end, of the months in question.

Compute interest to the nearest dollar.

Assets as of December 31, 2007:

Cash

5,000

Accounts Receivable

12,500

Inventory*

39,050

Unexpired Insurance

1,500

Fixed Assets, Net

12,500

Total

70,550

*November 30 Inventory Balance equals $16,000.

Liabilities as of December 31, 2007:

Accounts Payable (Merchandise)

35,550

Dividends Payable

1,500

Rent Payable

7,800

44,850

Recent and Forecasted Sales:

October

38,000

November

25,000

December

25,000

January

62,000

February

70,000

March

38,000

April

45,000

1. Prepare a master budget using the template below, including a budgeted income statement, balance sheet, cash budget, and supporting schedules for the months January through March 2008.

2. Explain why there is a need for a bank loan and what operating sources provide the cash for the repayment of the bank loan?

let s examine a case using greg s tunes and another company sal s silly songs 491707

Acc225 Fundamental Accounting Principles

Decision Case 1-1 (pg.58)

Let’s examine a case using Greg’s Tunes and another company, Sal’s Silly Songs. It is now the end of the first year of operations, and both owners— Sally Siegman and Greg Moore— want to know how well they came out at the end of the year. Neither business kept complete accounting records and neither owner made any drawings.

Moore and Siegman throw together the following data at year end:

Sal’s Silly Songs:

Total assets

23,000

Siegman, capital

8,000

Total revenues

35,000

Total expenses

22,000

Greg’s Tunes:

Total liabilities

10,000

Moore, capital

6,000

Total expenses

44,000

Net income

9,000

Working in the music business, Moore has forgotten all the accounting he learned in college. Siegman majored in English literature, so she never learned any accounting. To gain information for evaluating their businesses, they ask you several questions.

For each answer, you must show your work to convince Moore and Siegman that you know what you are talking about.

1. Which business has more assets?

2. Which business owes more to creditors?

3. Which business has more owner’s equity at the end of the year?

4. Which business brought in more revenue?

5. Which business is more profitable?

6. Which of the foregoing questions do you think is most important for evaluating these two businesses? Why?

7. Which business looks better from a financial standpoint?

the following costs result from the production and sale of 4 000 drum sets manufactu 491708

The following costs result from the production and sale of 4,000 drum sets manufactured by Vince Drum Company for the year ended December 31, 2011. The drum sets sell for $250 each. The company has a 25% income tax rate.

Variable production costs

Plastic for casing

68,000

Wages of assembly workers

328,000

Drum stands

104,000

Variable selling costs

Sales commissions

60,000

Fixed manufacturing costs

Taxes on factory

10,000

Factory maintenance

20,000

Factory machinery depreciation

80,000

Fixed selling administrative costs

Lease of equipment for sales staff

20,000

Accounting staff salaries

70,000

Administrative management salaries

150,000

Required

1. Prepare a contribution margin income statement for the company

2. Compute its contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio.

3. Interpret the contribution margin ratio from part 2.

rpm music center had the following petty cash transactions in march of the current y 491710

Establish, Reimburse, and Increase petty cash

RPM Music Center had the following petty cash transactions in March of the current year:

March 5 Wrote a $200 check, cashed it, and gave the proceeds and the petty cash box to Liz Buck, the petty cashier.

6 Paid $14.50 COD shipping charges on merchandise purchased for resale, terms FOB shipping point. RPM uses the perpetual system to account for merchandise inventory.

11 Paid $8.75 delivery charges on merchandise sold to a customer, terms FOB destination.

12 Purchased file folders for $12.13 that are immediately used.

14 Reimbursed Will Nelson, the manager, $9.65 for office supplies purchased and used.

18 Purchased printer paper for $22.54 that is immediately used.

27 Paid $47.10 COD shipping charges on merchandise purchased for resale, terms FOB shipping point.

28 Paid postage expenses of $16.

30 Reimbursed Nelson $58.80 for business car mileage.

31 Cash of $11.53 remained in the fund. Sorted the petty cash receipts by accounts affected and exchanged them for a check to reimburse the fund for expenditures. The fund amounts also increased to $250.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to establish the petty cash fund.

2. Prepare a petty cash payments report for March with these categories: delivery expense, mileage expense, postage expense, merchandise inventory (for transportation-in), and office supplies expense. Sort the payments into the appropriate categories and total the expenses in each category.

3. Prepare the journal entries for part 2 to both (a) reimburse and (b) increase the fund amount.

acc407 parker inc acquires 70 percent of sawyer company for 420 000 491712

Problem 4-22(a)

Parker, Inc, acquires 70 percent of Sawyer Company for $420,000. The remaining 30 percent of Sawyer’s outstanding shares continue to trade at a collective value of $174,000. On the acquisition date, Sawyer has the following accounts:

Book Value

Fair Value

Current assets

210,000

$210,000

Land

170,000

180,000

Buildings

300,000

330,000

Liabilities

(280,000)

(280,000)

The buildings have a 10-year life. In addition, Sawyer holds a patent worth $140,000 that has a five-year life but is not recorded on its financial records. At the end of the year, the two companies report the following balances:

Parker

Sawyer

Revenues

(900,000)

(600,000)

Expenses

600,000

400,000

a. Assume that the acquisition took place on January 1. What figures would appear in a consolidated income statement for this year?

acc407 the following book and fair values were available for westmont company as of 491713

P2-14 The following book and fair values were available for Westmont Company as of March 1.

Book Value

Fair Value

Inventory

630,000

600,000

Land

750,000

990,000

Buildings

1,700,000

2,000,000

Customer relationships –

800,000

Accounts Payable

(80,000)

(80,000)

Common stock

(2,000,000)

Additional paid-in capital

(500,000)

Retained earnings 1/1

(360,000)

Revenues

(420,000)

Expenses

280,000

Arturo Company pays $4,000,000 cash and issues 20,000 shares of its $2 par value common stock (fair value of $50 per share) for all of Westmont’s common stock in a merger, after which Westmont will cease to exist as a separate entity. Stock issue costs amount to $25,000 and Arturo pays $42,000 for legal fees to compete the transaction.

acc407 on january1 beckman inc acquires 60 percent of the outstanding stock of calvi 491714

On January1, Beckman, Inc., acquires 60 percent of the outstanding stock of Calvin for $36,000. Calvin Co. has one recorded asset, a specialized production machine with a book value of $10,000 and no liabilities. The fair value of the machine is $50,000, and the remaining useful life is estimated to be 10 years. Any remaining excess fair value is attributable to an unrecorded process trade secret with an estimated future life of 4 years. Calvin’s total acquisition-date fair value is $60,000.

At the end of the year, Calvin reports the following in its financial statements:

Revenues

50,000

Machine

9,000

Common stock

10,000

Expenses

20,000

Other assets

26,000

Retained earnings

25,000

Net income

30,000

Total assets

35,000

Total equity

35,000

Determine the amounts that Beckman should report in its year-end consolidated financial statements for noncontrolling interest in subsidiary income, total noncontrolling interest, Calvin’s machine (net of accumulated depreciation), and the process trade secret.

acc407 purkerson smith and traynor have operated a bookstore for a number of years a 491715

Purkerson, Smith, and Traynor have operated a bookstore for a number of years as a partnership. At the beginning of 2011, capital balances were as follows:

Purkerson

60,000

Smith

40,000

Traynor

20,000

Due to cash shortage, Purkerson invests and additional $8,000 in the business on April 1, 2011.

Each partner is allowed to withdraw $1,000 cash each month. The partners have used the same method of allocating profits and losses since the business’s inception. Each partner is given the following compensation allowance for work done in the busiiness. Purkerson, $18,000; Smith, $25,000 and Traynor, $8,000. Each partner is credited with interest equal to 10 percent of the average monthly capital balance for the year without regard for normal drawings. Any remaining profit or loss is allocated 4:2:4 to Purkerson, Smith, and Traynor, respectively. The net income for 2011 is $23,600. Each partner withdraws the allotted amount each month.

acc407 the distance plus partnership has the following capital balances at the begin 491716

The Distance Plus partnership has the following capital balances at the beginning of the current year:

Tiger (50% of profits and losses)

85,000

Phil (30%)

60,000

Ernie (20%)

55,000

200,000

Each of the following questions ashould be viewed independently.

a. If Sergio invest $100,000 in cash in the business for a 25 percent interest, what journal entry is recorded? Assume that the bonus method is used.

b. If Sergio invests $60,000 in cash in the business for a 25 percent interest, what journal entry is recorded? Assume that the bonus method is used.

c. If Sergio invests $72,000 in cash in the business for a 25 percent interest, what journal entry is recorded? Assume that the goodwill method is used.

acc407 the following are partial income statement account balances taken from the de 491721

Acc304 Intermediate Accounting

BE4-5 Separately reported items

The following are partial income statement account balances taken from the December 31, 2009, year-end trial balance of White and Sons, Inc.:

Restructuring costs

300,000

Interest revenue

40,000

Loss from earthquake (unusual and infrequent)

400,000

Loss on sale of investments

50,000

Income tax expense has not yet been accrued. The income tax rate is 40%.

Prepare the lower portion of the 2009 income statement beginning with $850,000 income before income taxes and extraordinary item. Include appropriate basic EPS disclosures. The company had 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year.

acc407 the adjusted trial balance of pacific scientific corporation on december 31 2 491722

BE4-3 Multi-step Income Statement

Refer to the situation described in BE4-1.

The adjusted trial balance of Pacific Scientific Corporation on December 31, 2009, the end of the company’s fiscal year, contained the following income statement items ($ in millions):

Sales revenue

2,106

Cost of goods sold

1,240

Selling expenses

126

General and administrative expenses

105

Interest expense

35

Gain on sale of investments

45

Income tax expense has not yet been accrued. The income tax rate is 40%.

Prepare a multi-step income statement for 2009. Ignore EPS disclosures.

acc407 the adjusted trial balance of pacific scientific corporation on december 31 2 491723

BE4-2 Multi-step Income Statement

The adjusted trial balance of Pacific Scientific Corporation on December 31, 2009, the end of the company’s fiscal year, contained the following income statement items ($ in millions):

Sales revenue

2,106

Cost of goods sold

1,240

Selling expenses

126

General and administrative expenses

105

Interest expense

35

Gain on sale of investments

45

Income tax expense has not yet been accrued. The income tax rate is 40%.

If the company’s accountant prepared a multi-step income statement, what amount would appear in the statement for:

(a) operating income

(b) nonoperating income

acc407 study appendix 13 consider the following data regarding factory overhead 491725

Acc561 Introduction to Management Accounting

13-49 Variances

Study Appendix 13. Consider the following data regarding factory overhead:

Variable

Fixed

Budget for actual hours of input

45,000

70,000

Applied

41,000

64,800

Budget for standard hours allowed for actual output achieved

41,000

70,000

Actual incurred

48,500

68,500

Using the above data, fill in the following blanks with the variance amounts. Use F for favorable or U for unfavorable for each variance.

acc407 all sales of carol s jeans and uniforms cju are made on credit sales are bill 491728

7-29 Purchases and Sales Budgets

All sales of Carol’s Jeans and Uniforms (CJU) are made on credit. Sales are billed twice monthly, on the fifth of the month for the last half of the prior month’s sales and on the twentieth of the month for the first half of the current month’s sales. For accounts paid within the first 10 days after the billing date, CJU gives customers a 2% discount; otherwise the full amount is due within 30 days of billing date, and customers that do not pay within the 10-day period generally wait the full 30 days before making payment. Based on past experience, the collection experience of accounts receivable is:

Within the 10-day discount period

80%

At 30 days after billing

18%

Uncollectible

2%

Sales for May 20X8 were $750,000. The forecast sales for the next four months are

June

800,000

July

900,000

August

900,000

September

600,000

CJU’s average markup on its products is 40% of the sales price. CJU purchase merchandise for resale to meet the current month’s sales demand and to maintain a desired monthly ending inventory of 25% of the next month’s cost of goods sold. All purchases are on credit. CJU pays for one-half of a month’s purchases in the month of purchases and the other half in the month following the purchase. All sales and purchases occur uniformly throughout the month.

1. How much cash can CJU plan to collect from accounts receivable collections during July 20X8?

2. Compute the budgeted dollar value of CJU inventory on May 31, 20X8.

3. How much merchandise should CJU plan to purchase during June 20X8?

4. How much should CJU budget in August 20X8 for cash payments for merchandise purchased?

acc407 the trapani company had the following actual data for 20×4 and 20×5 491729

13-58 Absorption and Variable Costing

The Trapani Company had the following actual data for 20X4 and 20X5:

20X4

20X5

Units of finished goods

Opening inventory

2,000

Production

15,000

13,000

Sales

13,000

14,000

Ending Inventory

2,000

1,000

The basic production data at standard unit costs for the two years were

Direct materials

$22

Direct labor

18

Variable factory overhead

4

Standard variable costs per unit

44

Fixed factory overhead was budgeted at $98,000 per year. The expected volume of production was 14,000 units so the fixed overhead rate was $98,000 ÷ 14,000 = $7 per unit.

Budgeted sales price was $75 per unit. Selling and administrative expenses were budgeted at variable, $9 per unit sold, and fixed, $80,000 per year.

Assume that there were absolutely no variances from any standard variable costs or budgeted selling prices or budgeted fixed costs in 20X4.

There were no beginning or ending inventories of work in process.

1. For 20X4, prepare income statements based on standard variable (direct) costing and standard absorption costing. (The next problem deals with 20X5.)

2. Explain why operating income differs between variable costing and absorption costing. Be specific

acc407 the pickle department of a major food manufacturer has an overhead rate of 5 491730

13-54 Overhead Accounting for Control and for Product Costing

The pickle department of a major food manufacturer has an overhead rate of $5 per direct-labor hour, based on expected variable overhead of $150,000 per year, expected fixed overhead of $350,000 per year, and expected direct-labor hours of 100,000 per year.

Data for the year’s operations follow:

Direct Labor Hours Used

Overhead Costs Incurred*

First six months

55,000

262,000

Last six months

41,000

236,500

*Fixed costs incurred were exactly equal to budgeted amounts throughout the year.

1. What is the under applied or over applied overhead for each six-month period?

Label your answer as under applied or over applied.

2. Explain briefly (not more than 50 words for each part) the probable causes for the under applied or over applied overhead. Focus on variable and fixed costs separately. Give the exact figures attributable to the causes you cite.

acc407 the cost of the joint input including processing costs before the split off p 491731

Hernandez Chemical Company’s production process for two of its solvents can be diagrammed using a process map as shown in Exhibit 12-25.

The cost of the joint input, including processing costs before the split-off point, is $400,000. Solvent A can be sold at the split-off point for $20 per gallon and solvent B for $60 per gallon.

Indirect materials (Pounds)

55,000

Base materials (gallons)

220,000

Processing machine (machine hours)

80,000

Labor (labor hours)

45,000

Total Costs

$400,000

at split-off point:

Yield

Selling Price

Solvent A

20,000

$20

Solvent B

10,000

$60

Total

30,000

1. Allocate the $400,000 joint cost to solvents A and B by the physical-units method.

2. Allocate the $400,000 joint cost to solvents A and B by the relative-sales-value method.

acc407 chan manufacturing company data for 20×7 follow 491732

13-45 Variable and Absorption Costing

Chan Manufacturing Company data for 20X7 follow:

Sales: 12,000 units at $17 each

Actual production (units)

15,000

Expected volume of production (units)

18,000

Manufacturing costs incurred

Variable

120,000

Fixed

63,000

Nonmanufacturing costs incurred

Variable

24,000

Fixed

18,000

1. Determine operating income for 20X7, assuming the firm uses the variablecosting approach to product costing. (Do not prepare a statement.)

2. Assume that there is no January 1, 20X7, inventory; no variances are allocated to inventory; and the firm uses a “full absorption” approach to product costing.

Compute: (a) the cost assigned to December 31, 20X7, inventory, (b) operating income for the year ended December 31, 20X7.(Do not prepare a statement.)

acc407 consider the following information pertaining to a year s operations of young 491733

13-B3 Comparison of Variable Costing and Absorption Costing

Consider the following information pertaining to a year’s operations of Youngstown Manufacturing:

Units sold

= 1,400

Units produced

= 1,600

Direct labor

= $4,200

Direct materials used

= 3,500

Fixed manufacturing overhead

= 2,200

Variable manufacturing overhead

= 300

selling and administrative expenses (all fixed)

= 700

Beginning inventorie

= 0

Contribution margin

= 5,600

Direct-material inventory, end

= 800

There are no work-in-process inventories.

1. What is the ending finished-goods inventory cost under absorption costing?

2. What is the ending finished-goods inventory cost under variable costing?

acc407 procter amp gamble company is a cincinnati based company that produces househ 491734

2-48 CVP and Financial Statements for a Mega-Brand

Company

Procter & Gamble Company is a Cincinnati-based company that produces household products under brand names such as Gillette, Bounty, Crest, Folgers, and Tide. The company’s 2006 income statement showed the following (in millions):

Net sales = $68,222

Costs of products sold = 33,125

Selling, general, and administrative expense = 21,848

Operating income = $13,249

Suppose that the cost of products sold is the only variable cost; selling, general, and administrative expenses are fixed with respect to sales.

Assume that Procter & Gamble had a 10% increase in sales in 2007 and that there was no change in costs except for increases associated with the higher volume of

a. Compute the predicted 2007 operating income for Procter & Gamble and its percentage increase.

b. Explain why the percentage increase in income differs from the percentage increase in sales.

assume draper has created a standard cost card for each job standard direct material 491673

Assume Draper has created a standard cost card for each job. Standard direct materials include 124 software packages at a cost of $900 per package. Standard direct labor costs per job include 90 hours at $120 per hour. Draper plans on completing 12 jobs during October.

Actual direct materials costs for October included 90 software packages at a total cost of $81,450. Actual direct labor costs included 100 hours per job at an average rate of $125 per hour. Draper completed all 12 jobs in October.

Requirements:

1. Calculate the direct materials price and efficiency variances.

2. Calculate the direct labor price and efficiency variances.

3. Prepare journal entries to record the use of both materials and labor for October for the company.

airmeals inc prepares in flight meals for a number of major airlines one of the comp 491674

Alternative E10–2 Direct Labor Variances

AirMeals, Inc., prepares in-flight meals for a number of major airlines. One of the company’s products is stuffed cannelloni with roasted pepper sauce, fresh baby corn, and spring salad. During the most recent week, the company prepared 11,000 f these meals using 2,930 direct labor-hours. The company paid these direct labor workers a total of $28,275 for this work, or $9.65 per hour.

According to the standard cost card for this meal, it should require 0.27 direct laborhours at a cost of $9.40 per hour.

Required:

1a. According to the standards, what direct labor cost should have been incurred to prepare 11,000 meals?

1b. How much does this differ from the actual direct labor cost? (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.

Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.). Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)

2. Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a labor efficiency variance and a labor rate variance. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)

airmeals inc prepares in flight meals for a number of major airlines one of the comp 491675

AirMeals, Inc., prepares in-flight meals for a number of major airlines. One of the company’s products is stuffed cannelloni with roasted pepper sauce, fresh baby corn, and spring salad. During the most recent week, the company prepared 6,000 of these meals using 1,150 direct labor-hours. The company paid these direct labor workers a total of $11,500 for this work, or $10 per hour.

According to the standard cost card for this meal, it should require 0.20 direct laborhours at a cost of $9.50 per hour.

Required:

1a. According to the standards, what direct labor cost should have been incurred to prepare 6,000 meals?

1b. How much does this differ from the actual direct labor cost? (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.

Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.). Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)

2. Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a labor efficiency variance and a labor rate variance. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)

jake palermo has prepared the following list of statements about budgetary control 491677

Jake Palermo has prepared the following list of statements about budgetary control.

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

1. Budget reports compare actual results with planned objectives.

2. All budget reports are prepared on a weekly basis.

3. Management uses budget reports to analyze differences between actual and planned results and determine their causes.

4. As a result of analyzing budget reports, management may either take corrective action or modify future plans.

5. Budgetary control works best when a company has an informal reporting system.

6. The primary recipients of the sales report are the sales manager and the vice president of production.

7. The primary recipient of the scrap report is the production manager.

8. A static budget is a projection of budget data at one level of activity.

9. Top management’s reaction to unfavorable differences is not influenced by the materiality of the difference.

10. A static budget is not appropriate in evaluating a manager’s effectiveness in controlling costs unless the actual activity level approximates the static budget activity level or the behavior of the costs is fixed.

an analysis of comparative balance sheets the current year s income statement and th 491678

An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year’s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Conard Corp. uncovered the following items. Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary. Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using the four major classifications listed to the right.

ITEMS

a. Payment of interest on notes payable

b. Exchange of land for patent

c. Sale of building at book value

d. Payment of dividends

e. Depreciation

f. Receipt of dividends on investment in stock

g. Receipt of interest on notes receivable

h. Issuance of capital stock

i. Amortization of patent

j. Issuance of bonds for land

k. Purchase of land

l. Conversion of bonds into common stock

m. Loss on sale of land

n. Retirement of bonds

NOTE: You will associate each item to the appropriate number (representing classification) using the center column.

elder company is a manufacturer of personal computers various costs and expenses ass 491679

Elder Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are below. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into categories.

Match the Cost and Expenses with the appropriate Category.

Cost and Expenses

1. Property taxes on the factory building

2. Production superintendents’ salaries

3. Memory boards and chips used in assembling computers.

4. Depreciation on the factory equipment.

5. Salaries for assembly line quality control inspectors

6. Sales commissions paid to sell personal computers.

7. Electrical components used in assembling computers.

8. Wages of workers assembling personal computers

9. Soldering materials used on factory assembly line.

10. Salaries for the night security guards for the factory building.

NOTE: You will associate each cost and expense to the appropriate letter (representing categories) using the center column.

scully corporation s comparative balance sheets are presented below 491680

Scully Corporation’s comparative balance sheets are presented below.

SCULLY CORPORATION

Balance Sheets

2011

2010

Cash

4,300

3,700

Accounts receivable

21,200

23,400

Inventory

10,000

7,000

Land

20,000

26,000

Building

70,000

70,000

Accumulated depreciation

(15,000)

(10,000)

Total

110,500

120,100

Accounts payable

12,370

31,100

Common stock

75,000

69,000

Retained earnings

23,130

20,000

Total

110,500

120,100

Scully’s 2011 income statement included net sales of $100,000, cost of goods sold $60,000, and net income of $15,000.

Show computation (equation) for the following:

allen labinski has prepared the following list of statements about process cost acco 491681

Allen Labinski has prepared the following list of statements about process cost accounting. Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

1. Process cost systems are used to apply costs to similar products that are mass-produced in a continuous fashion.

2. A process cost system is used when each finished unit is indistinguishable from another.

3. Companies that produce soft drinks, motion pictures, and computers chips would all use process cost accounting.

4. In a process cost system, costs are tracked by individual jobs.

5. Job order costing and process costing track different manufacturing costs elements.

6. Both job order costing and process costing account for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.

7. Costs flow through the accounts in the same basic way for both job order costing and process costing.

8. In a process cost system, only one work in process account is used.

9. In a process cost system, costs are summarized in a job cost sheet.

10. In a process cost system, the unit cost is total manufacturing costs for the period divided by the units produced during the period.

NOTE: Fill in the table below with your responses; write correction for false statements below the table:

tharp and kostrivas is a law firm that is initiating an activity based costing syste 491682

Tharp and Kostrivas is a law firm that is initiating an activity-based costing system.

Ben Tharp, the senior partner and strong supporter of ABC, has prepared the following list of activities performed by a typical attorney in a day at the firm. Classify each of the activities listed by Ben Tharp as value-added or non-value-added and defend your classification. How much was value-added and how much was nonvalue- added?

Activities

Hours

Writing contracts and letters

1.00

Attending staff meetings

0.50

Taking depositions

1.00

Doing research

1.00

Traveling to/from court

1.00

Contemplating legal strategy

1.00

Eating lunch

1.00

Litigating a case in course

2.50

Entertaining a prospective client

2.00

elder company is a manufacturer of personal computers various costs and expenses ass 491683

Elder Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are below. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into categories.

Match the Cost and Expenses with the appropriate Category.

Cost and Expenses

1. Property taxes on the factory building

2. Production superintendents’ salaries

3. Memory boards and chips used in assembling computers.

4. Depreciation on the factory equipment.

5. Salaries for assembly line quality control inspectors

6. Sales commissions paid to sell personal computers.

7. Electrical components used in assembling computers.

8. Wages of workers assembling personal computers

9. Soldering materials used on factory assembly line.

10. Salaries for the night security guards for the factory building.

NOTE: You will associate each cost and expense to the appropriate letter (representing categories) using the center column.

bjerg corporation incurred several costs prepare entries for manufacturing costs 491684

Bjerg Corporation incurred several costs. Prepare entries for manufacturing costs.

Journalize the following transactions.

1. Purchased raw materials on account $46,300

2. Raw Materials of $36,000 were requisitioned to the factory. An analysis of the materials requisition slips indicates that $6,800 was classified as indirect materials.

3. Factory labor costs incurred were $53,900, of which $49,000 pertained to factory wages payable and $4,900 pertained to employer payroll taxes payable.

4. Time tickets indicated that $48,000 was direct labor and $5,900 was indirect labor.

5. Overhead costs incurred on account were $80,500.

6. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost.

7. Goods costing $88,000 were completed and transferred to finished goods.

8. Finished goods costing $75,000 to manufacture were sold on account for $103,000.

webber fabricating estimated the following annual costs 491687

Allocating Manufacturing Overhead to Jobs

Webber Fabricating estimated the following annual costs.

Expected annual direct labor hours

40,000

Expected annual direct labor cost

625,000

Expected machine hours

20,000

Expected material cost for the year

800,000

Expected manufacturing overhead

1,000,000

Required

a. Calculate overhead allocation rates using each of the four possible allocation bases provided.

b. Determine the cost of the following job (number 253) using each of the four overhead allocation rates. Job 253 Direct materials $3,000 Direct labor (150 hrs @ $12/hr)

fireout inc manufactures steel cylinders and nozzles for two models of fire extingui 491688

FireOut, Inc. manufactures steel cylinders and nozzles for two models of fire extinguishers:

(1) a home fire extinguisher and (2) a commercial fire extinguisher. The home 1 model is a high-volume (54,000 units), half-gallon cylinder that holds 2 1/2 pounds of multipurpose dry chemical at 480 PSI. The commercial model is a low-volume (10,200 units), two-gallon cylinder that holds 10 pounds of multi-purpose dry chemical at 390 PSI. Both products require 1.5 hours of direct labor for completion. Therefore, total annual direct labor hours are 96,300 or [1.5 hrs × (54,000 + 10,200)]. Expected annual manufacturing overhead is $1,496,600. Thus, the predetermined overhead rate is $15.54 or ($1,496,600 ÷ 96,300) per direct labor hour. The direct materials cost per unit is $18.50 for the home model and $26.50 for the commercial model. The direct labor cost is $19 per unit for both the home and the commercial models.

The company’s managers identified six activity cost pools and related cost drivers and accumulated overhead by cost pool as follows.

Activity Cost Pool

Cost Driver

Estimated Overhead

Expected Use of Cost Drivers

Expected Use of Drivers by Product

Home Commercial

Receiving

Pounds

70,350

335,000

215,000

120,000

Forming

Machine hours

150,500

35,000

27,000

8,000

Assembling

Number of parts

390,600

217,000

165,000

52,000

Testing

Number of tests

$51,000

$25,500

15,500

10,000

Painting

Gallons

52,580

5,258

3,680

1,578

Packing and shipping

Pounds

787,250

335,000

215,000

120,000

Instructions:

(a) Under traditional product costing, compute the total unit cost of both products. Prepare a single comparative schedule of the individual costs by products, in the format provided below.

(b) Under ABC, prepare a schedule showing the computations of the activity-based overhead rates (per cost driver).

(c) Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost pool to each product based on the use of cost drivers. (Include a computation of overhead cost per unit, rounding to the nearest cent.)

(d) Compute the total cost per unit for each product under ABC.

(e) Classify each of the activities as a value-added activity or a non-value-added activity.

(f1) Comment on the comparative overhead cost per unit for the two products under ABC.

(f2) Comment on the comparative total costs per unit under traditional costing and ABC.

garcia manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production 491690

Garcia Manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production on the basis of direct labor costs. On January 1, 2012, Job No. 50 was the only job in process.

The costs incurred prior to January 1 on this job were as follows: direct materials $20,000, direct labor $12,000, and manufacturing overhead $16,000. As of January 1, Job No. 49 had been completed at a cost of $90,000 and was part of finished goods inventory. There was a $15,000 balance in the Raw Materials Inventory account. During the month of

January, Garcia Manufacturing began production on Jobs 51 and 52, and completed Jobs 50 and 51. Jobs 49 and 50 were also sold on account during the month for $122,000 and $158,000, respectively. The following additional events occurred during the month.

Purchased additional raw materials of $90,000 on account.

Incurred factory labor costs of $65,000. Of this amount $16,000 related to employer payroll taxes.

Incurred manufacturing overhead costs as follows: indirect materials $17,000; indirect labor $15,000; depreciation expense $19,000, and various other manufacturing overhead costs on account $20,000.

Assigned direct materials and direct labor to jobs as follows.

Job No.

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

50

10,000

5,000

51

39,000

25,000

52

30,000

20,000

Instructions:

a. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for 2012, assuming Garcia Manufacturing estimates total manufacturing overhead costs of $1,050,000, direct labor costs of $700,000, and direct labor hours of 20,000 for the year.

b. Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of raw materials, the factory labor costs incurred, and the manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month of January.

c. Prepare the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to production. In assigning manufacturing overhead costs, use the overhead rate calculated in the first part of the question.

d. Open job cost sheets for Jobs 50, 51, and 52. Enter the January 1 balances on the job cost sheet for Job No. 50. Post all costs to the job cost sheets as necessary. Total the job cost sheets for any job(s) completed during the month. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the completion of any job(s) during the month.

e. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the sale of any job(s) during the month.

f. What is the balance in the Finished Goods Inventory account at the end of the month?

g. What does this balance consist of?

h. What is the amount of over- or underapplied overhead?

farm labs inc provides mad cow disease testing for both state and federal government 491691

Farm Labs, Inc. provides mad cow disease testing for both state and federal governmental agricultural agencies. Because the company’s customers are governmental agencies, prices are strictly regulated. Therefore, Farm Labs must constantly monitor and control its testing costs. Shown below are the standard costs for a typical test.

Direct materials (2 test tubes @ 1.50 per tube) 3.00

Direct labor (1 hour @ 25.00 per hour) 25.00

Variable overhead (1 hour @ 5.00 per hour) 5.00

Fixed overhead (1 hour @ 10.00 per hour) 10.00

Total standard cost per test 43.00

The lab does not maintain an inventory of test tubes. Therefore, the tubes purchased each

month are used that month. Actual activity for the month of November 2010, when 1,500

tests were conducted, resulted in the following:

Direct materials (3,050 test tubes) 4,270

Direct labor (1,600 hours) 36,800

Variable overhead 7,400

Fixed overhead 14,000

Monthly budgeted fixed overhead is $14,000. Revenues for the month were $75,000, and

selling and administrative expenses were $4,000.

Compute the overhead controllable variance and the overhead volume variance.

at home publications inc is considering two new magazine products 491692

Cash payback period, net present value method and analysis

At Home Publications Inc. is considering two new magazine products. The estimated net cash flows from each product are as follows:

Year

Home &Garden

Music Beat

1

150,000

125,000

2

120,000

145,000

3

105,000

100,000

4

84,000

70,000

5

41,000

60,000

Total

$500,000

$500,000

Each product requires an investment of $270,000.A rate of 10% has been selected for the net present value analysis.

Instructions:

1. Compute the following for each product:

a. Cash payback period.

b. The net present value. Use the present value of $1 table appearing in this chapter.

2. Prepare a brief report advising management on the relative merits of each of the two products.

the management of quest media inc is considering two capital investment projects 491694

The management of Quest Media Inc. is considering two capital investment projects. The estimated net cash flows from each project are as follows:

Year

Radio Station

TV Station

1

350,000

700,000

2

350,000

700,000

3

350,000

700,000

4

350,000

700,000

The radio station requires an investment of $999,250,while the TV station requires an investment of $2,125,900.No residual value is expected from either project.

Instructions

1. Compute the following for each project:

a. The net present value. Use a rate of 10% and the present value of an annuity of $1 table appearing in this chapter.

b. A present value index. Round to two decimal places.

2. Determine the internal rate of return for each project by (a) computing a present value factor for an annuity of $1 and (b) using the present value of an annuity of $1 table appearing in this chapter.

3. What advantage does the internal rate of return method have over the net present value method in comparing projects?

abc inc purchased new machinery in order to improve its production process 491700

ABC, Inc. purchased new machinery in order to improve its production process.

Classify each of the following expenditures incurred last year as a capital expenditure (CE) or an immediate expense (IE) :

a. $42,000 purchase price

b. $2,520 sales tax paid on the purchase price

c. $4,000 transportation costs

d. $1,850 installation

e. $385 training of personnel for initial operation of the machinery

f. $6,855 wages paid to employees that operate the machinery during production

g. $280 periodic lubrication after the machinery is placed in service.

h. $150 ordinary repairs to maintain the machinery in working order Give the value of the new machine, and list the financial statement in which it will be shown at fiscal year

the comparative balance sheet of stuart company appears below 491701

The comparative balance sheet of Stuart Company appears below:

a. Using horizontal analysis, show the percentage change for each balance sheet item using 2006 as a base year. (please show this in columnar form by item.)

b. Using vertical analysis, prepare a common size comparative balance sheet. (please show this in columnar form by item. You may add two more appropriately labeled columns for this information. In other words, column 1 should list each item; column two – show the horizontal analysis (change percentage); columns three and four – show the vertical analysis for each year.) (note that is it not necessary to list the dollar values for each item in your answer.)

c. Comments on any significant changes observed from your analysis.

wallaby kite company a small melbourne firm that sells kites on the web wants a mast 491703

7-B1 Prepare A Master Budget

Wallaby Kite Company, a small Melbourne firm that sells kites on the web, wants a master budget for the 3 months beginning January 1, 2013. It desires an ending minimum cash balance of $20,000 each month. Sales are forecasted at an average wholesale selling price of $8 per kite. Merchandise costs average $4 per kite. All sales are on credit, payable within 30 days, but experience has shown that 60% of current sales are collected in the current month, 30% in the next month , and 10% in the month thereafter. Bad debts are negligible.

In January, Wallaby kite is beginning just-in-time (JIT) deliveries from suppliers, which means that purchases will equal expected sales. On January 1, purchases will cease until inventory decreases to $24,000, after which time purchases will equal sales. Purchases during any given month are paid in full during the following month.

Monthly operating expenses are as follows:

Wages and salaries

60,000

Insurance expired

500

Depreciation

1,000

Miscellaneous

10,000

Rent

$1,000/month + 10% of quarterly sales over $40,000

Cash dividends of $6,000 are to be paid quarterly, beginning January 15, and are declared on the fifteenth of the previous month. All operating expenses are paid incurred, except insurance, depreciation, and rent. Rent of $1,000 is paid at the beginning of each month, and the additional 10% of sales is settled quarterly on the tenth of the month following the end of the quarter. The next rent settlement date is January 10.

The company plans to buy some new fixtures for $12,000 cash in March.

Money can be borrowed and repaid in multiples of $2,000. Management wants to minimize borrowed and repay rapidly. Simple interest of 10% per annum is computed monthly but paid when the principal is repaid. Assume that borrowing occurs at the beginning, and repayments at the end of the months in question.

Compute interest to the nearest dollar.

Assets as of December 31, 2012

Cash

20,000

Accounts Receivable

50,000

Inventory*

156,200

Unexpired Insurance

6,000

Fixed assets, net

50,000

Total

282,200

Liabilities and Equities as of December 31,2012

Accounts payable (Merchandise)

142,200

Dividends payable

6,000

Rent payable

31,200

Owners equity

102,800

Total

282,200

Recent and forecasted sales:

October

152,000

November

100,000

December

100,000

January

248,000

February

280,000

March

152,000

April

180,000

Requirement:

a. Prepare a master budget including a budgeted income statement, balance sheet, cash budget and schedules for the months of January to March 2013.

b. Explain why there is a need for a bank loan and what operating sources provide the cash for the repayment of the bank loan.

acc423 on june 10 meredith company purchased 8 000 of merchandise from leinert compa 491648

On June 10, Meredith Company purchased $8,000 of merchandise from Leinert Company FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30. Meredith pays the freight costs of $400 on June 11. Damaged goods totaling $300 are returned to Leinert for credit on June 12. The scrap value of these goods is $150. On June 19, Meredith pays Leinert Company in full, less the purchase discount. Both companies use a perpetual inventory system. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

Instructions

(a)Prepare separate entries for each transaction on the books of Meredith Company.

(b)Prepare separate entries for each transaction for Leinert Company. The merchandise purchased by Meredith on June 10 had cost Leinert $5,000.

acc423 sheryl crow equipment company sold 500 rollomatics during 2007 at 6 000 each 491649

Sheryl Crow Equipment Company sold 500 Rollomatics during 2007 at $6,000 each. During 2007, Crow spent $20,000 servicing the 2-year warranties that accompany the Rollomatic. All applicable transactions are on a cash basis.

Instructions

(a) Prepare 2007 entries for Crow using the expense warranty approach. Assume that Crow estimates the total cost of servicing the warranties will be $120,000 for 2 years.

(b) Prepare 2007 entries for Crow assuming that the warranties are not an integral part of the sale. Assume that of the sales total, $150,000 relates to sales of warranty contracts.

Crow estimates the total cost of servicing the warranties will be $120,000 for 2 years.

Estimate revenues earned on the basis of costs incurred and estimated costs.

acc423 the information below pertains to barkley company for 2010 491650

Computation of Basic and Diluted EPS

The information below pertains to Barkley Company for 2010.

Net income for the year 1,200,000 8% convertible bonds issued at par ($1,000 per bond). Each bond is convertible into 30 shares of common stock. 2,000,000 6% convertible, cumulative preferred stock, $100 par value, each share is convertible into 3 shares of common stock. 4,000,000

Common stock, $10 par value 6,000,000

Tax rate for 2010 40%

Average market price of common stock $25 per share

There were no changes during 2010 in the number of common shares, preferred shares, or convertible bonds outstanding. There is no treasury stock. The company also has common stock options (granted in a prior year) to purchase 75,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share.

Instructions:

a. Compute basic earnings per share for 2010.

b. Compute diluted earnings per share for 2010.

acc423 santana rey is considering the purchase of equipment for business solutions t 491651

Santana Rey is considering the purchase of equipment for Business Solutions that would allow the company to add a new product to its computer furniture line. The equipment is expected to cost $300,000 and to have a six-year life and no salvage value. It will be depreciated on a straight-line basis. Business Solutions expects to sell 100 units of the equipment’s product each year. The expected annual income related to this equipment follows.

Sales

375,000

Costs

Materials, labor and overhead (except depreciation)

200,000

Depreciation on new equipment

50,000

Selling and administrative expenses

37,500

Total costs and expenses

287,500

Pretax income

87,500

Income taxes (30%)

26,250

Net income

61,250

Required:

Compute the (1) payback period and (2) accounting rate of return for this equipment (Record answers as percents, rounded to one decimal).

acc423 business solutions second quarter 2012 fixed budget performance report for it 491652

Business Solutions’ second quarter 2012 fixed budget performance report for its computer furniture operations follows. The $156,000 budgeted expenses include $108,000 in variable expenses for desks and $18,000 in variable expenses for chairs, as well as $30,000 fixed expenses. The actual expenses include $31,000 fixed expenses.

Fixed Budget

Actual Results

Desk sales (in units)

144

150

Chair sales (in units)

72

80

Desk sales (in dollars)

180,000

186,000

Chair sales (in dollars)

36,000

41,200

Total expenses

156,000

163,880

Income from operations

60,000

63,320

Prepare flexible budget performance report that shows any variances between budgeted results and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately.

acc423 adriana lopez expects second quarter 2010 sales of her new line of computer f 491653

Adriana Lopez expects second quarter 2010 sales of her new line of computer furniture to be the same as the first quarter’s sales (reported below) without any changes in strategy.

Monthly sales averaged 40 desk units (sales price of $1,250) and 20 chairs (sales price of $500).

SUCCESS SYSTEMS

Segment Income Statement*

For Quarter Ended March 31, 2010

Sales†

180,000

Cost of goods sold‡

115,000

Gross profit

65,000

Expenses

Sales commissions (10%)

18,000

Advertising expenses

9,000

Other fixed expenses

18,000

Total expenses

45,000

Net income

$20,000

* Reflects revenue and expense activity only related to the computer furniture segment.

† Revenue (120 desks x $1,250) + (60 chairs x $500) = $150,000 + $30,000 = $180,000 ‡ Cost of goods sold: (120 desks x $750) + (60 chairs x $250) + $10,000 = $115,000 Lopez believes that sales will increase each month for the next three months (April, 48 desks, 32 chairs; May, 52 desks, 35 chairs; June, 56 desks, 38 chairs) if selling prices are reduced to $1,150 for desks and $450 for chairs, and advertising expenses are increased by 10% and remain at that level for all three months. The products’ variable cost will remain at $750 for desks and $250 for chairs. The sales staff will continue to earn a 10% commission, the fixed manufacturing costs per month will remain at $10,000 and other fixed expenses will remain at $6,000 per month.

Required

1. Prepare budgeted income statements for each of the months of April, May, and June that show the expected results from implementing the proposed changes. Use a three-column format, with one column for each month.

2. Use the budgeted income statements from part 1 to recommend whether Lopez should implement the proposed changes. Explain.

acc423 after reading an article about activity based costing in a trade journal for 491655

After reading an article about activity-based costing in a trade journal for the furniture industry, Santana Rey wondered if it was time to critically analyze the overhead costs at Business Solutions. In a recent month, Rey found that setup costs, inspection costs, and utility costs made up most of its overhead. Additional information about overhead follows.

Activity

Cost

Driver

Setting up machines

2,000

25 batches

Inspecting components

7,500

5,000 parts

Providing utilities

10,000

5,000 machine hours

Overhead has been applied to output at a rate of 50% of direct labor costs. The following data pertain to Job 6.15.

Direct materials 2,500 Number of parts

Direct labor 3,500 Machine hours

Batches 2 batches

Required:

1. What is the total cost of Job 6.15 if Business Solutions applies overhead at 50% of direct labor cost? 2. What is the total cost of Job 6.15 if Business Solutions uses activity-based costing?

3. Which approach to assigning overhead gives a better representation of the costs incurred to produce Job 6.15? Explain.

acc423 santana rey expected sales of her line of computer workstation furniture to e 491657

Santana Rey expected sales of her line of computer workstation furniture to equal 300 workstations (at a sales price of $3,000) for 2012. The workstations’ manufacturing costs include the following.

Direct materials

$800 per unit

Direct labor

$400 per unit

Variable overhead

$100 per unit

Fixed overhead

$24,000 per year

The selling expenses related to these workstations follow.

Variable selling expenses $50 per unit

Fixed selling expenses $4,000 per year

Santana is considering how many workstations to produce in 2012. She is confident that she will be able to sell any workstations in her 2012 ending inventory during 2013. However, Santana does not want to overproduce as she does not have sufficient storage space for many more workstations.

Required:

1. Compute Business Solutions’ absorption costing income assuming.

a. 300 workstations are produced.

b. 320 workstations are produced.

2. Compute Business Solutions’ variable costing income assuming.

a. 300 workstations are produced.

b. 320 workstations are produced.

3. Explain to Santana any differences in the income figures determined in parts 1 and 2.

How should Adriana use the information from parts 1 and 2 to help make production decisions?

acc423 uncovertible preferred stock treasury shares shares sold stock dividend optio 491658

uncovertible preferred stock; treasury shares; shares sold; stock dividend; options; convertible bonds; contingently issuable shares On December 31, 2010, Dow Steel Corporation had 800,000 shares of common stock and 300,000 shares of 8%, noncumulative, nonconvertible preferred stock issued and outstanding. Dow issued a 5% common stock dividend on May 15 and paid cash dividends of $400,000 and $75,000 to common and preferred shareholders, respectively, on

December 15, 2011.

On February 28, 2011, Dow sold 80,000 common shares. Also, as a part of a 2010 agreement for the acquisition of Merrill Cable Company, another 23,000 shares (already adjusted for the stock dividend) are to be issued to former Merrill shareholders on December 31, 2012, if Merrill’s 2012 net income is at least $500,000. In 2011, Merrill’s net income was $630,000.

In keeping with its long-term share repurchase plan, 2,000 shares were retired on July 1. Dow’s net income for the year ended December 31, 2011, was $1,500,000. The income tax rate is 40%.

As part of an incentive compensation plan, Dow granted incentive stock options to division managers at December 31 of the current and each of the previous two years. Each option permits its holder to buy one share of common stock at an exercise price equal to market value at the date of grant and can be exercised one year from that date. Information concerning the number of options granted and common share prices follows:

Date Granted Options Granted Share Price

(adjusted for the stock dividend)

December 31, 2009 5,000 $ 33

December 31, 2010 10,000 $ 24

December 31, 2011 8,500 $ 31

The market price of the common stock averaged $32 per share during 2011.

On July 12, 2009, Dow issued $600,000 of convertible 10% bonds at face value. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 30 common shares (adjusted for the stock dividend).

Required:

Compute Dow’s basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2011. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

acc423 identify the effect if any that each of the following transactions would have 491660

Transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash.

Identify the effect, if any, that each of the following transactions would have upon cash and net income. The first transaction has been completed as an example. (If an amount has a decreasing effect use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45). Do not use a dollar sign $ for negative answers.)

Purchased $100 of supplies for cash.

Recorded an adjusting entry to record use of $40 of the above supplies.

Made sales of $1,300 all on account.

Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts.

Purchased capital asset for cash, $2,500.

Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600.

acc423 theobtained for the gocker corporation 491661

(Second Year of Depreciation Difference, Two Differences, Single Rate, Extraordinary Item)

The following information has been obtained for the Gocker Corporation.

1. Prior to 2010, taxable income and pretax financial income were identical.

2. Pretax financial income is $1,700,000 in 2010 and $1,400,000 in 2011.

3. On January 1, 2010, equipment costing $1,200,000 is purchased. It is to be depreciated on a straight-line basis over 5 years for tax purposes and over 8 years for financial reporting purposes. (Hint: Use the half-year convention for tax purposes, as discussed in Appendix 11A.)

4. Interest of $60,000 was earned on tax-exempt municipal obligations in 2011.

5. Included in 2011 pretax financial income is an extraordinary gain of $200,000, which is fully taxable.

6. The tax rate is 35% for all periods.

7. Taxable income is expected in all future years.

Instructions:

a. Compute taxable income and income tax payable for 2011.

b. Prepare the journal entry to record 2011 income tax expense, income tax payable, and deferred taxes.

c. Prepare the bottom portion of Gocker’s 2011 income statement, beginning with “Income before income taxes”.

d. Indicate how deferred income taxes should be presented on the December 31, 2011, statement of financial position.

acc423 melton corporation is preparing the comparative financial statements for the 491662

(Basic EPS: Two-Year Presentation)

Melton Corporation is preparing the comparative financial statements for the annual report to its shareholders for fiscal years ended May 31, 2010, and May 31, 2011.

The income from operations for each year was $1,800,000 and $2,500,000, respectively. In both years, the company incurred a 10% interest expense on $2,400,000 of debt, an obligation that requires interest-only payments for 5 years.

The company experienced a loss of $600,000 from a fire in its Scotsland facility in February 2011, which was determined to be an extraordinary loss. The company uses a 40% effective tax rate for income taxes.

The capital structure of Melton Corporation on June 1, 2009, consisted of 1 million shares of common stock outstanding and 20,000 shares of $50 par value, 6%, cumulative preferred stock. There were no preferred dividends in arrears, and the company had not issued any convertible securities, options, or warrants.

On October 1, 2009, Melton sold an additional 500,000 shares of the common stock at $20 per share. Melton distributed a 20% stock dividend on the common shares outstanding on January 1, 2010. On December 1, 2010, Melton was able to sell an additional 800,000 shares of the common stock at $22 per share. These were the only common stock transactions that occurred during the two fiscal years.

Instructions

a. Identify whether the capital structure at Melton Corporation is a simple or complex capital structure, and explain why.

b. Determine the weighted-average number of shares that Melton Corporation would use in calculating earnings per share for the fiscal year ended

a. May 31, 2010.

b. May 31, 2011.

c. Prepare, in good form, a comparative income statement, beginning with income from operations, for Melton Corporation for the fiscal years ended May 31, 2010, and May 31, 2011. This statement will be included in Melton’s annual report and should display the appropriate earnings per share presentations.

acc423 ron stein company recently signed a lease for a new office building for a lea 491664

(Future and Present Value Problems)

Presented below are three unrelated situations.

a. Ron Stein Company recently signed a lease for a new office building, for a lease period of 12 years. Under the lease agreement, a security deposit of $12,820 is made, with the deposit to be returned at the expiration of the lease, with interest compounded at 10% per year. What amount will the company receive at the time the lease expires? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $458,581.)

b. Kate Greenway Corporation, having recently issued a $20,137,000, 15-year bond issue, is committed to make annual sinking fund deposits of $615,400. The deposits are made on the last day of each year and yield a return of 10%. Will the fund at the end of 15 years be sufficient to retire the bonds?

If not, what will the deficiency be? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $458,581.)

c. Under the terms of his salary agreement, president Juan Rivera has an option of receiving either an immediate bonus of $52,000, or a deferred bonus of $97,500 payable in 10 years. Ignoring tax considerations, and assuming a relevant interest rate of 8%, which form of settlement should Rivera accept?

acc423 hardy fiber company is the creator of y go a technology that weaves silver in 491666

Hardy Fiber, Company is the creator of Y-Go, a technology that weaves silver into its fabrics to kill bacteria and odor on clothing while managing heat. Y-Go has become very popular as an undergarment for sports activities. Operating at capacity, the company can produce 1,000,000 undergarments of Y-Go a year. The per unit and the total costs for an individual garment when the company operates at full capacity are as follows.

Per Garment

Total

Direct materials

2.0

2000000

Direct labor

0.50

500,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

1.00

1,000,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

1.50

1,500,000

Variable selling expenses

0.25

250,000

Total

$5.25

$5,250,000

The U.S. Army has approached Hardy Fiber and expressed an interest in purchasing 200,000 Y-Go undergarments for soldiers in extremely warm climates. The Army would pay the unit cost for direct materials, direct labor, and variable manufacturing overhead costs. In addition, the Army has agreed to pay an additional $1 per undergarment to cover all other costs and provide a profit.

Presently, Hardy Fiber is operating at 70 percent capacity and does not have any other potential buyers for Y-Go. If Hardy Fiber accepts the Army’s offer, it will not incur any variable selling expenses related to this order.

Using incremental analysis, determine whether Hardy Fiber should accept the Army’s offer.

(If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank. If amount decreases the income, use either a negative sign preceding the number eg -45 or parentheses eg (45).)

adrian sonnetson the owner of adrian motors is considering the addition of a paint a 491667

P 9-7 Net Present Value, Internal Rate of Return, Payback, Accounting Rate of Return, and Taxes

Adrian Sonnetson, the owner of Adrian Motors, is considering the addition of a paint and body shop to his automobile dealership. Construction of a building and the purchase of necessary equipment is estimated to cost $800,000, and both the building and equipment will be depreciated over 10 years using the straight-line method. The building and equipment have zero estimated residual value at the end of 10 years. Sonnetson’s required rate of return for this project is 12 percent.

Net income related to each year of the investment is as follows:

Revenue

500,000

Less:

Material cost

70,000

Labor

150,000

Depreciation

80,000

Other

10,000

Income before taxes

190,000

Taxes at 40%

76,000

Net income

114,000

Required:

a. Determine the net present value of the investment in the paint and body shop. Should Sonnetson invest in the paint and body shop?

b. Calculate the internal rate of return of the investment (approximate).

c. Calculate the payback period of the investment.

d. Calculate the accounting rate of return.

van doren corporation is considering producing a new product autodial 491668

P9-12. Comprehensive Capital Budgeting Problem

Van Doren Corporation is considering producing a new product, Autodial.Marketing data indicate that the company will be able to sell 45,000 units per year at $30. The product will be produced in a section of an existing factory that is currently not in use. To produce Autodial, Van Doren must buy a machine that costs $500,000. The machine has an expected life of five years and will have an ending residual value of $15,000. Van Doren will depreciate the machine over five years using the straight-line method for both tax and financial reporting purposes. In addition to the cost of the machine, the company will incur incremental manufacturing costs of $370,000 for component parts, $425,000 for direct labor, and $200,000 of miscellaneous costs. Also, the company plans to spend $150,000 annually to advertise Autodial. Van Doren has a tax rate of 40 percent, and the company’s required rate of return is 12 percent.

in the course of routine checking of all journal entries prior to preparing year end 491669

BYP2-2 Managerial Analysis

In the course of routine checking of all journal entries prior to preparing year-end reports, Diane Riser discovered several strange entries. She recalled that the president’s son Ron had come in to help out during an especially busy time and that he had recorded some journal entries. She was relieved that there were only a few of his entries, and even more relieved that he had included rather lengthy explanations. The entries Ron made were:

1. Work in Process Inventory

25,000

Cash

25,000

(This is for materials put into process. I don’t find the record that we paid for these, so I’m crediting Cash, because I know we’ll have to pay for them sooner or later.)

.

2. Manufacturing Overhead

12,000

Cash

12,000

(This is for bonuses paid to salespeople. I know they’re part of overhead, and I can’t find an account called “Non-factory Overhead” or “Other Overhead” so I’m putting it in Manufacturing Overhead. I have the check stubs, so I know we paid

3. Wages Expense

120,000

Cash

120,000

(This is for the factory workers’ wages. I have a note that payroll taxes are $15,000. I still think that’s part of wages expense, and that we’ll have to pay it all in cash sooner or later, so I credited Cash for the wages and the taxes.)

4. Work in Process Inventory

3,000

Raw Materials Inventory

3,000

Instructions

a. How should Ron have recorded each of the four events?

b. If the entry was not corrected, which financial statements (income statement or balance sheet) would be affected? What balances would be overstated or understated?

the controller of dugan industries has collected the following monthly expense data 491670

E22-2 (a)

The controller of Dugan Industries has collected the following monthly expense data for use in analyzing the cost behavior of maintenance costs.

Month

Total

Maintenance

Costs

Total Machine Hours

January

2,400

300

February

3,000

400

March

3,600

600

April

4,500

790

May

3,200

500

June

4,900

800

Instructions

a. Determine the fixed and variable cost components using the high-low method.

the sparkly corporation has the following budget and actual results 491671

The Sparkly Corporation has the following budget and actual results.

Budgeted data:

Unit sales

$30,000.00

Unit production

$30,000.00

Fixed overhead

Supervision

54,000

Depreciation

60,000

Rent

30,000

Variable costs per unit

Direct materials

18

Direct labor

25

Supplies

0.25

Indirect labor

1.2

Electricity

0.15

Actual results:

Unit sales

33,000

Unit production

36,000

Fixed overhead

53,550

Supervision

60,000

Depreciation

30,000

Variable costs

Direct materials

642,000

Direct labor

960,000

Supplies

7,500

Indirect labor

30,000

Electricity

4,500

Required:

a. Prepare a performance report for all costs, showing static budget variances (indicate F or U).

b. Prepare a performance report for all costs, showing flexible budget variances (indicate F or U).

phillips company purchased a 90 interest in standards corporation for 2 340 000 on j 491672

Phillips Company Purchased a 90% interest in Standards Corporation for $2,340,000 on January 1, 2010. Standards Corporation had $1,650,000 of common stock and $1,050,000 of retained earnings on that date. The following values were determined for Standards Corporation on the date of purchase:

Book Value

Fair Value

Difference

Inventory

240,000

300,000

60,000

Land

2,400,000

2,700,000

300,000

Equipment

1,620,000

1,800,000

180,000

Required

A. Prepare a computation and allocation schedule for the difference between the implied and

book value in the consolidated statements work paper.

B. Prepare the January 1, 2010 work paper entries to eliminate the investment account and allocate the difference between implied and book value.

acc423 presented below is information related to martin company 491617

E8-25 Dollar-Value LIFO

Presented below is information related to Martin Company.

Date

Ending Inventory (End-of-Year Prices)

Price Index

31-Dec-09

80,000

100

31-Dec-10

111,300

105

31-Dec-11

108,000

120

31-Dec-12

122,200

130

31-Dec-13

147,000

140

31-Dec-14

176,900

$145

Instructions

Compute the ending inventory for Martin Company for 2009 through 2014 using the dollar-value LIFO method.

acc423 wenner furnace corp purchased machinery for 633 330 on may 1 2012 it is estim 491618

E11-4 (Depreciation Computations-Five Methods)

Wenner Furnace Corp. purchased machinery for $633,330 on May 1, 2012. It is estimated that it will have a useful life of 10 years, salvage value of $34,050, production of 544,800 units, and working hours of 25,000. During 2013, Wenner Corp. uses the machinery for 2,650 hours, and the machinery produces 57,885 units.

From the information given, compute the depreciation charge for 2013 under each of the following methods. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $45,892)

a. Straight-line.

b. Units-of-output. (Round depreciation cost per unit to 2 decimal places, i.e. 12.25 and and final answer to 0 decimal places, i.e. 25,240.)

c. Working hours.

d. Sum-of-the-years’-digits.

e. Declining-balance (use 20% as the annual rate).

acc423 conan o brien logging and lumber company owns 3 200 acres of timberland on th 491619

P11-6 (Depletion, Timber, and Extraordinary Loss)

Conan O’Brien Logging and Lumber Company owns 3,200 acres of timberland on the north side of Mount Leno, which was purchased in 2000 at a cost of $600 per acre. In 2012, O’Brien began selectively logging this timber tract. In May of 2012, Mount Leno erupted, burying the timberland of O’Brien under a foot of ash. All of the timber on the O’Brien tract was downed. In addition, the logging roads, built at a cost of $160,000, were destroyed, as well as the logging equipment, with a net book value of $349,200.

At the time of the eruption, O’Brien had logged 20% of the estimated 530,000 board feet of timber. Prior to the eruption, O’Brien estimated the land to have a value of $310 per acre after the timber was harvested. O’Brien includes the logging roads in the depletion base.

O’Brien estimates it will take 3 years to salvage the downed timber at a cost of $712,000. The timber can be sold for pulp wood at an estimated price of $2 per board foot. The value of the land is unknown, but must be considered nominal due to future uncertainties.

a. Determine the depletion cost per board foot for the timber harvested prior to the eruption of Mount Leno. (Round answer to 2 decimal places.)

b. Prepare the journal entry to record the depletion prior to the eruption. (Round

per unit answer to 2 decimal places,e.g. 0.45 for computation purposes and final answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. $45,892. If no entry is required, select “No entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually)

c. If this tract represents approximately half of the timber holdings of O’Brien, determine the amount of the extraordinary loss due to the eruption of Mount Leno for the year ended December 31, 2012. (Do not round intermediate computations and round your answer to 0 decimal places, i.e. 25,250.)

acc423 margaret avery company from time to time embarks on a research program when a 491620

E12-16 (Accounting for R & D Costs)

Margaret Avery Company from time to time embarks on a research program when a special project seems to offer possibilities. In 2011, the company expends $341,880 on a research project, but by the end of 2011 it is impossible to determine whether any benefit will be derived from it.

a. The project is completed in 2010, and a successful patent is obtained. The R & D costs to complete the project are $131,580. The administrative and legal expenses incurred in obtaining patent number 472-1001-84 in 2012 total $22,900.

The patent has an expected useful life of 5 years. Record these costs in journal entry form. Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2012.

b. In 2013, the company successfully defends the patent in extended litigation at a cost of $55,120, thereby extending the patent life to December 31, 2020. What is the proper way to account for this cost? Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2013.

acc423 reichenbach co organized in 2011 has set up a single account for all intangib 491621

P12-1 (Correct Intangible Asset Account)

Reichenbach Co., organized in 2011, has set up a single account for all intangible assets. The following summary discloses the debit entries that have been recorded during 2012 and 2013.

Intangible Assets

01-Jul-12

8-year franchise; expiration date 6/30/19

51,840

01-Oct-12

Advance payment on laboratory space (2-year lease)

$26,080

31-Dec-12

Net loss for 2011 including state incorporation fee,

1,960,

and related legal fees of organizing, $4,620 (all fees

incurred in 2011)

16,030

02-Jan-13

Patent purchased (10-year life)

84,280

01-Mar-13

Cost of developing a secret formula (indefinite life)

79,370

01-Apr-13

Goodwill purchased (indefinite life)

275,060

01-Jun-13

Legal fee for successful defense of patent

22,885

01-Sep-13

Research and development costs

153,900

Prepare the necessary entries to clear the Intangible Assets account and to set up separate accounts for distinct types of intangibles. Make the entries as of December 31, 2013, recording any necessary amortization and reflecting all balances accurately as of that date. (Ignore income tax effects.) (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

acc423 evergreen company sells lawn and garden products to wholesalers the company s 491622

Evergreen Company sells lawn and garden products to wholesalers. The company’s fiscal year-end is Dec. 31. During 2006, the following transactions related to receivables occurred:

Feb.28 Sold merchandise to Lennox, Inc. for $10,000 and accepted a 10%, 7-month note. 10% is an appropriate rate for this type of note.

Mar. 31 Sold merchandise to Maddox Co. and accepted a noninterest-bearing note with a discount rate of 10%. The $8,000 payment is due on March 31, 2007.

Apr. 3 Sold merchandise to Carr Co. for $7,000 with terms 2/10, n/30. Evergreen uses the gross method to account for cash discounts.

Apr 11 Collected the entire amount due from Carr Co.

Apr 17 A customer returned merchandise costing $3,200. Evergreen reduced the customer’s receivable balance by $5,000, the sales price of the merchandise. Sales returns are recorded by the company as thet occur.

Apr 30 Transferred receivables of $50,000 to a factor without recourse. The factor changed Evergreen a 1% finance charge on the receivables transferred. The sale criteria are met.

Jun 30 Discounted the Lennox, Inc. note at the bank. The bank’s discount rate is 12%. The note was discounted without recourse.

Aug 31 Lennox, Inc. paid the note amount plus interest to the bank.

Required:

1. Prepare the necessary journal entries for Evergreen for the cash of the above dates. For all transactions involving the sale of merchandise, ignore the entry for the cost of goods sold (round all calculations to the nearest dollar).

2. Prepare any necessary adjusting entries at Dec. 31, 2006. Adjusting entries are only recorded at year-end (round all calculations to the nearest dollar).

3. Prepare a schedule showing the effect of the journal entries in requirements 1 and 2 on 2006 income before taxes.

acc423 ace inc produces electronic components for sale to manufacture of radios tele 491623

(Disclosure Required in Various Situations)

Ace Inc. produces electronic components for sale to manufacture of radios, television sets, and digital sound systems. In connection with her examination of Ace’s financial statement fo the year ended December 31, 2013, Gloria Rodd, CPA, completed field work 2 weeks ago. Ms Rodd now is evaluating the significance of the following items prior to preparing her auditor’s report. Except as noted, none of these items have been disclosed in the financial statements or notes.

Item 1

A 10-year loan agreement, which the company entered into 3 years ago, provides that dividend payments may not exceed net income earned after taxes subsequent to the date of the agreement. The balance of retained earnings at the date of the loan agreement was $420,000. From that date through December 31, 2013, net income after taxes has totaled $570,000 and cash dividends have totaled $320,000.

On the basis of these data, the staff auditor assigned to this review concluded that there was no retained earnings restriction at December 31, 2013.

Item 2

Recently Ace interrupted its policy of paying cash dividends quarterly to its stockholders. Dividends were paid regularly through 2012, discontinued for all of 2013 to finance purchase of equipment for the company’s new plant, and resumed in the first quarter of 2014. In the annual report, dividend policy is to be discussed in the president’s letter to stockholders.

Item 3

A major electronics firm has introduced a line of products that will compete directly with Ace’s primary line, now being produced in the specially designed new plant.

Because of manufacturing innovations, the competitor’s line will be of comparable quality but priced 50% below Ace’s line. The competitor announced its new line during the week following completion of field work. Ms. Rodd read the announcement in the newspaper and discussed the situation by telephone with Ace executives. Ace will meet the lower prices that are high enough to cover variable manufacturing and selling expenses but will permit recovery of only a portion of fixed costs.

Item 4

The company’s new manufacturing plant building, which cost $2,400,000 and has an estimated life of 25 years, is leased from Wichita National Bank at an annual rental of $600,000. The company is obligated to pay property taxes, insurance, and maintenance. At the conclusion of its 10-year noncancellable lease, the company has the option of purchasing the property for $1. In Ace’s income statement the rental payment is reported on a separate line.

Instructions

For each of the items above discuss any additional disclosures in the financial statements and notes that the auditor should recommend to her client. (The cumulative effect of the four items should not be considered.)

acc423 chapman company a major retailer of bicycles and accessories operates several 491624

(SCF – Direct and Indirect Methods from Comparative Financial Statements)

Chapman Company, a major retailer of bicycles and accessories, operates several stores and is a publicly traded company. The comparative balance sheet and income statements for Chapman as of May 31, 2012, are shown on the next page.

The company is preparing its statement of cash flows.

Chapman Company

Comparative Balance Sheet

As of May 31

2012

2011

Current assets

Cash

28,250

20,000

Accounts receivable

75,000

58,000

Inventory

220,000

250,000

Prepaid expenses

9,000

7,000

Total current assets

332,250

335,000

Plant assets

Plant assets

600,000

502,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation – plant assets

150,000

125,000

Net plant assets

450,000

377,000

Total Assets

$782,250

$712,000

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

123,000

115,000

Salaries and wages payable

47,250

72,000

Interest payable

27,000

25,000

Total current liabilities

197,250

212,000

Long-term debt

Bonds payable

70,000

100,000

Total Liabilities

$267,250

$312,000

Stockholders’Equity

Common Stock, $10 par

370,000

280,000

Retained Earnings

145,000

120,000

Total Stockholders’Equity

515,000

400,000

Total Liabilities & Stockholders’Equity

$782,250

$712,000

Chapman Company

Income Statement

For the Year Ended May 31, 2012

Sales

1,255,250

Cost of Goods Sold

722,000

Gross Profit

533,250

Expenses:

Salaries and Wages Expense

252,100

Interest Expense

75,000

Depreciation Expense

25,000

Other Expenses

8,150

Total Expenses

360,250

Operating Income

173,000

Income Tax Expense

43,000

Net Income

$130,000

The following is additional information concerning Chapman’s transaction during the year ended May 31, 2012.

1. All sales during the year were made on account.

2. All merchandise was purchased on account, comprising the total accounts payable account.

3. Plant assets costing $98,000 were purchased by paying $28,000 in cash and issuing 7,000 shares of stock.

4. The “other expenses” are related to prepaid items.

5. All income taxes incurred during the year were paid during the year.

6. In order to supplement its cash, Chapman issued 2,000 shares of common stock at par value.

7. Cash dividends of $105,000 were declared and paid at the end of the fiscal year.

Instruction:

a. Compare and contrast the direct method and the indirect method for reporting cash flows from operating activities.

b. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Chapman Company for the year ended May 31, 2012, using the direct method. Be sure to support the statement with appropriate calculations. (A reconciliation of net income to net cash provided is not required.)

c. Using the indirect method, calculate only the net cash flow from operating activities from Chapman Company for the year ended May 31, 2012.

acc423 chenowith co reports revenue of 194 340 and operating expenses of 112 340 in 491627

Present below are two independent situations.

Situation A:

Chenowith Co. reports revenue of $194,340 and operating expenses of $112,340 in its first year of operations, 2012. Accounts receivable and accounts payable at year-end were $78,680 and $40,480, respectively. Assume that the accounts payable related to operating expenses. Ignore income taxes.

Instructions:

Using the direct method, compute net cash provided (used) by operating activities. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter with negative sign.)

Situation B:

The income statement for Edgebrook Company shows cost of goods sold $305,400 and operating expenses (exclusive of depreciation) $227,830. The comparative balance sheet for the year shows that inventory increased $21,810, prepaid expenses decreased $7,650, accounts payable (related to merchandise) decreased $15,190, and accrued expenses payable increased $13,590.

Instructions

Compute (a) cash payments to suppliers and (b) cash payments for operating expenses.

acc423 springsteen co had the following activity in its most recent years of operati 491628

Springsteen Co. had the following activity in its most recent years of operations.

Items

a. Pension expense exceeds amount funded.

b. Redemption of bonds payable.

c. Sale of building at book value.

d. Depreciation.

e. Exchange of equipment for furniture.

f. Issuance of capital stock.

g. Amortization of intangible assets.

h. Purchase of treasuryt stock.

i. Issuance of bonds for land.

k. Increase in interest receivable on notes receivable.

l. Purchase of equipment.

Classify the items as (1) operating – add to net income; (2) operating – deduct from net income; (3) investing; (4) financing; or (5) significant noncash investing and financing activities. Use the indirect method.

acc423 condensed financial data of fairchild company for 2012 and 2011 are presented 491629

Condensed financial data of Fairchild Company for 2012 and 2011 are presented below.

FAIRCHILD COMPANY

COMPARATIVE BALANCE SHEET

AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2012 AND 2011

2012

2011

Cash

1,795

1,104

Receivables

1,753

1,290

Inventory

1,595

1,908

Plant assets

1,906

1,695

Accumulated depreciation

(1,203)

(1,167)

Long-term investments (held-to-maturity)

1,305

1,480

$7,151

$6,310

Accounts payable

1,215

789

Accrued liabilities

213

234

Bonds payable

1,414

1,636

Common stock

1,905

1,693

Retained earnings

2,404

1,958

$7,151

$7,151

FAIRCHILD COMPANY

INCOME STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012

Sales

6,795

Cost of goods sold

4,694

Gross margin

2,101

Selling and administrative expenses

939

Income from operations

1,162

Other revenues and gains

Gain on sale of investments

85

Income before tax

1,247

Income tax expense

531

Net income

$716

Additional information:

During the year, $74 of common stock was issued in exchange for plant assets. No plant assets were sold in 2012. Cash dividends were $270.

Instructions:

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter negative sign)

acc423 the accountant of weatherspoon shoe co has compiled the following information 491630

The accountant of Weatherspoon Shoe Co. has compiled the following information from the company’s records as a basis for an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Rental revenue

$30,370

Interest expense

$19,370

Market appreciation on land above cost

$32,370

Wages and salaries-sales

116,170

Materials and supplies-sales

18,970

Income tax

31,970

Wages and salaries-administrative

137,270

Other administrative expenses

53,070

Cost of goods sold

517,370

Net sales

981,370

Depreciation on plant assets (70% selling, 30% administrative)

66,370

Dividends declared

17,370

There were 19,500 shares of common stock outstanding during the year.

Instructions:

1. Prepare a single-step income statement. (Round earnings per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. 5.25. For multiple entries list from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 1. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.) estimates that it can change its production process, adding $4 million to investment and $500,000 to fixed operating costs. This change will (1) reduce variable costs per unit by $10,000 and (2) increase output by 20 units, but (3) the sales price on all units will have to be lowered to $95,000 to permit sales of the additional output. The firm has tax loss carryforwards that cause its tax rate to be zero, its cost of equity is 16%, and it uses no debt.

a. What is the incremental profit? To get a rough idea of the project’s profitability, what is the project’s expected rate of return for the next year (defined as the incremental profit divided by the investment)? Should the firm make the investment?

b. Would the firm’s break-even point increase or decrease if it made the change?

c. Would the new situation expose the firm to more or less business risk than the old one?

acc423 the accounts of consolidated can contain the following amounts at december 31 491631

The accounts of Consolidated Can contain the following amounts at December 31, 2008:

Cost of products sold

410000

Dividends

3000

Extraordinary gain (net of tax)

1,000

Income taxes

9,300

Interest expense

8,700

Other income

1,600

Retained earnings,

270,000

Sales

480,000

Selling and administrative expense

42,000

Required:

Prepare a multiple-step income statement combined with a reconciliation of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2008.

acc423 tiller company s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year end 491632

Tiller Company’s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended December 31, 20-2, were as follows:

Units Unit Price Total Cost

January 1, 20-2 Beginning inventory 1,500 $10.00 $15,000

January 12 1st purchase 500 11.50 5,750

February 28 2nd purchase 600 14.50 8,700

June 29 3rd purchase 1,200 15.00 18,000

August 31 4th purchase 800 16.50 13,200

October 29 5th purchase 300 18.00 5,400

November 30 6th purchase 700 18.50 12,950

December 21 7th purchase 400 20.00 8,000

6,000 $87,000

There are 1,200 units of inventory on hand on December 31, 20-2.

REQUIRED

1. Calculate the total amount to be assigned to the cost of goods sold for 20-2 and ending

inventory on December 31 under each of the following periodic inventory methods:

(a) FIFO

(b) LIFO

(c) Weighted-average (round calculations to two decimal places)

2. Assume that the market price per unit (cost to replace) of Tiller’s inventory on December 31 was $18. Calculate the total amount to be assigned to the ending inventory on December 31 under each of the following methods:

(a) FIFO lower-of-cost-or-market

(b) Weighted-average lower-of-cost-or-market

3. In addition to taking a physical inventory on December 31, Tiller decides to estimate the ending inventory and cost of goods sold. During the fiscal year ended December 31, 20-2, net sales of $100,000 were made at a normal gross profit rate of 35%. Use the gross profit method to estimate the cost of goods sold for the fiscal year ended December 31 and the inventory on December 31.

acc423 dominique fouque owns and operates dominique s doll house she has a small sho 491633

College Accounting

Dominique Fouque owns and operates Dominique’s Doll House. She has a small shop in which she sells new and antique dolls. She is particularly well known for her collection of antique Ken and Barbie dolls. A completed work sheet for 20-3 is shown on the next page. Fouque made no additional investments during the year and the long-term note payable is due in 20-9. No portion of the long-term note is due within the next year. Net credit sales for 20-3 were $35,300, and receivables on January 1 were $2,500.

Required:

1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement.

2. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity.

3. Prepare a balance sheet.

4. Compute the following measures of performance and financial condition for 20-3:

(a) Current ratio

(b) Quick ratio

(c) Working capital

(d) Return on owner’s equity

(e) Accounts receivable turnover and average number of days required to collect receivables

(f) Inventory turnover and the average number of days required to sell inventory

5. Prepare adjusting entries and indicate which should be reversed and why.

6. Prepare closing entries.

7. Prepare reversing entries for the adjustments where appropriate.

acc423 the following information was taken from the records of gibson inc for the ye 491634

The following information was taken from the records of Gibson Inc. for the year 2012: income tax applicable to income from continuing operations $127,600; income tax applicable to loss on discontinued operations $31,500; income tax applicable to extraordinary gain $33,592; income tax applicable to extraordinary loss $21,726; and unrealized holding gain on available-for-sale securities $23,900.

Extraordinary gain

$98,800

Loss on discontinued operations

75,700

Administrative expenses

245,900

Rent revenue

46,300

Extraordinary loss

63,900

Cash dividends declared

158,100

Retained earnings January 1, 2012

600,800

Cost of goods sold

852,600

Selling expenses

304,500

Sales

1,719,600

Shares outstanding during 2012 were

100,800.

a. Prepare a single-step income statement for 2012. (Round earnings per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. $1.48.)

b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for 2012.

c. Show how comprehensive income is reported using the income statement format

acc423 schweser satellites inc produces satellite earth stations that sell for 100 0 491635

Schweser Satellites Inc. produces satellite earth stations that sell for $100,000 each. The firm’s fixed costs, F, are $2 million; 50 earth stations are produced and sold each year; profits total $500,000; and the firm’s assets (all equity financed) are $5 million. The firm estimates that it can change its production process, adding $4 million to investment and $500,000 to fixed operating costs. This change will (1) reduce variable costs per unit by $10,000 and (2) increase output by 20 units, but (3) the sales price on all units will have to be lowered to $95,000 to permit sales of the additional output. The firm has tax loss carryforwards that cause its tax rate to be zero, its cost of equity is 16%, and it uses no debt.

a. What is the incremental profit? To get a rough idea of the project’s profitability, what is the project’s expected rate of return for the next year (defined as the incremental profit divided by the investment)? Should the firm make the investment?

b. Would the firm’s break-even point increase or decrease if it made the change?

c. Would the new situation expose the firm to more or less business risk than the old one?

acc423 the trial balance of the sterling company shown below does not balance 491645

The trial balance of the Sterling Company shown below does not balance.

STERLING COMPANY

Trial Balance

May 31, 2008

Debit

Credit

Cash

$5,850

Accounts Rcvbl

$2,750

Prepaid Insurance

700

Equipment

8,000

Accounts Payable

4,500

Property Taxes Payable

560

Common Stock

11,700

Service Revenue

6,690

Salaries Revenue

4,200

Advertising Expense

1,100

Property Tax Expense

800

$26,800

$20,050

Your review of the ledger reveals that each account has a normal balance. You also discover the following errors.

(a) The totals of the debit sides of Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, and Property Tax Expense were each understated $100.

(b) Transposition errors were made in Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue. Based on postings made, the correct balances were $2,570 and $6,960, respectively.

(c) A debit posting to Salaries Expense of $200 was omitted.

(d) A $1,000 cash dividend was debited to Common Stock for $1,000 and credited to Cash for $1,000.

(e) A $520 purchase of supplies on account was debited to Equipment for $520 and credited to Cash for $520.

(f) A cash payment of $450 for advertising was debited to Advertising Expense for $45 and credited to Cash for $45.

(g) A collection from a customer for $210 was debited to Cash for $210 and credited to Accounts Payable for $210.

Instructions:

Prepare a correct trial balance. Note that the chart of accounts includes the following: Dividends, and Supplies. (Hint: It helps to prepare the correct journal entry for the transaction described and compare it to the mistake made.)

acc423 presented below is information related to dickinson company for 2010 491646

Presented below is information related to Dickinson Company for 2010.

Retained earnings balance, January 1, 2010

995,700

Sales for the year

26,425,000

Cost of goods sold

16,195,000

Interest revenue

77,600

Selling and administrative expenses

4,734,200

Write-off of goodwill (not tax deductible)

837,600

Income taxes for 2010

966,140

Gain on the sale of investments (normal

112,500

Loss due to flood damage-extraordinary

397,500

Loss on the disposition of the wholesale

445,900

Loss on operations of the wholesale

93,000

Dividends declared on common stock

253,200

Dividends declared on preferred stock

81,200

Required:

Prepare a multiple-step income statement and a retained earnings statement. Dickinson Company decided to discontinue its entire wholesale operations and to retain its manufacturing operations. On September 15, Dickinson sold the wholesale operations to Rogers Company. During 2010, there were 500,000 shares of common stock outstanding all year.

acc423 mauer construction company inc entered into a firm fixed price contract with 491647

Completed-Contract Method

Mauer Construction Company, Inc., entered into a firm fixed-price contract with Trillini Clinic on July 1, 2005, to construct a four-story office building. At that time, Mauer estimated that it would take between 2 and 3 years to complete the project. The total contract price for construction of the building is $4,500,000. Mauer appropriately accounts for this contract under the completed-contract method in its financial statements and for income tax reporting. The building was deemed substantially completed on December 31, 2007.

Estimated percentage of completion, accumulated contract costs incurred, estimated costs to complete the contract, and accumulated billings to the Trillini Clinic under the contract are shown below.

At December 31, 2005

At December 31, 2006

At December 31, 2007

Percentage of completion

30%

65%

100%

Contract costs incurred

1140000

3,055,000

4,800,000

Estimated costs to complete contract

2660000

1,645,000

– Billings to Trillini Clinic

1500000

2,500,000

4,300,000

Required:

a. Prepare schedules to compute the amount to be shown as “Cost of uncompleted contract in excess of related billings” or “Billings on uncompleted contract in excess of related costs” at December 31, 2005, 2006, and 2007. Ignore income taxes. Show supporting computations in good form.

b. Prepare schedules to compute the profit or loss to be recognized as a result of this contract for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2006, and 2007. Ignore income taxes. Show supporting computations in good form.

acc423 brooks corp is a medium sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for 491593

P17-8(b) Fair Value and Equity Methods (Essay)

Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70% market penetration. During prosperous years, the company’s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company’s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.

Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2012 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the “fair value” rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks’ pertinent accounts.

1. Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks’ investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2012 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000.

2. Prior to 2012, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2011. Brooks’ 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000.

Instructions:

b. For both classes of investments presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made in (a) would be reflected in Brooks’ 2012 financial statements

acc423 the following two items appeared on the internet concerning the gaap requirem 491594

CA16-4 Stock Compensation Plans

The following two items appeared on the Internet concerning the GAAP requirement to expense stock options.

WASHINGTON, D.C.-February 17, 2005 Congressman David Dreier (R-CA), Chairman of the House Rules Committee, and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D-CA) reintroduced legislation today that will preserve broad-based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares.

Last year, the U.S. House of Representatives overwhelmingly voted for legislation that would have ensured the continued ability of innovative companies to offer stock options to rank-and-file employees, Dreier stated. “Both the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) continue to ignore our calls to address legitimate concerns about the impact of FASB’s new standard on workers’ ability to have an ownership stake in the New Economy, and its failure to address the real need of shareholders: accurate and meaningful information about a company’s use of stock options.”

In December 2004, FASB issued a stock option expensing standard that will render a huge blow to the 21st century economy, Dreier said. “Their action and the SEC’s apparent lack of concern for protecting shareholders, requires us to once again take a firm stand on the side of investors and economic growth. Giving investors the ability to understand how stock options impact the value of their shares is critical. And equally important is preserving the ability of companies to use this innovative tool to attract talented employees.”

On February 17, Congressman David Dreier (R-CA), and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D-CA), officially entered Silicon Valley’s bid to gum up the launch of honest reporting of stock option compensation: They co-sponsored a bill to “preserve broad-based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares.” You know what “critical information” they mean: stuff like the stock compensation for the top five officers in a company, with a rigged value set as close to zero as possible. Investors crave this kind of information. Other ways the good Congresspersons want to “help” investors: The bill “also requires the SEC to study the effectiveness of those disclosures over three years, during which time, no new accounting standard related to the treatment of stock options could be recognized. Finally, the bill requires the Secretary of Commerce to conduct a study and report to Congress on the impact of broad-based employee stock option plans on expanding employee corporate ownership, skilled worker recruitment and retention, research and innovation, economic growth, and international competitiveness.”

It’s the old “four corners” basketball strategy: stall, stall, stall. In the meantime, hope for regime change at your opponent, the FASB.

Instructions

a. What are the major recommendations of the stock-based compensation pronouncement?

b. How do the provisions of GAAP in this area differ from the bill introduced by members of Congress (Dreier and Eshoo), which would require expensing for options issued to only the top five officers in a company? Which approach do you think would result in more useful information? (Focus on comparability.)

c. The bill in Congress urges the FASB to develop a rule that preserves “the ability of companies to use this innovative tool to attract talented employees.” Write a response to these Congress-people explaining the importance of neutrality in financial accounting and reporting.

acc423 on january 5 2012 phelps corporation received a charter granting the right to 491596

P15-1 Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation

On January 5, 2012, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,300 shares of $101 par value, 7% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 50,700 shares of $11 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.

Jan. 11 Issued 20,260 shares of common stock at $18 per share.

Feb. 1 Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,400 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: machinery with a fair market value of $59,350; a factory building with a fair market value of $170,600; and land with an appraised value of $332,400.

Jul 29 Purchased 1,890 shares of common stock at $17 per share. (Use cost method.)

Aug. 10 Sold the 1,890 treasury shares at $14 per share.

Dec. 31 Declared a $0.30 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.

Dec. 31 Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $180,640 net income.

Instructions:

a. Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (Round the answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Record entries in the order displayed in the problem statement.

b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Phelps Corporation’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2012. (For preferred stock, common stock and treasury stock enter the account name only and do not provide the descriptive information provided in the question.)

acc423 on january 1 2012 bailey industries had stock outstanding as follows 491597

E16-20 EPS: Simple Capital Structure

On January 1, 2012, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.

6% Cumulative preferred stock $108 par value issued and outstanding 10,100 shares 1,090,800 Common stock, $11 par value, issued and outstanding 236,400 shares 2,600,400

To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 261,600 common shares. The acquisitions took place as shown below.

Date of Acquisition

Shares Issued

Company A April 1, 2012

103,200

Company B July 1, 2012

126,000

Company C October 1, 2012

32,400

On May 14, 2012, Bailey realized a $142,800 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000.

On December 31, 2012, Bailey recorded net income of $336,000 before tax and exclusive of the gain.

Assuming a 47% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2012. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.55.)

acc423 charles austin of the controller s office of thompson corporation was given t 491598

P16-7 Computation of Basic and Diluted EPS

Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 2013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.

1. The company is authorized to issue 7,992,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 1,998,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.

2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.

Price per Share

1-Jul-12

20.00

1-Jan-13

21.00

1-Apr-13

25.00

1-Jul-13

11.00

1-Aug-13

10.50

1-Nov-13

9.00

31-Dec-13

10.00

3. A total of 776,400 shares of an authorized 1,359,600 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.

4. Thompson Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.

5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $11,840,000.

The following specific activities took place during 2013.

1. January 1-A 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.

2. April 1-A total of 460,800 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.

3. July 1-A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.

4. August 1-A total of 301,200 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.

5. November 1-A total of 32,100 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.

6. Common stock cash dividends-Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.

April 15 – $0.30 per share

October 15 – $0.20 per share

7. Preferred stock cash dividends-Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.

Instructions:

a. Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013. (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500)

b. Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2011. (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500)

c. Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.

acc423 on january 5 2010 phelps corporation received a charter granting the right to 491600

P15-1 (Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation)

On January 5, 2010, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,000 shares of $100 par value, 8% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.

Jan. 11 Issued 20,000 shares of common stock at $16 per share.

Feb. 1 Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,000 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: machinery with a fair market value of $50,000; a factory building with a fair market value of $160,000; and land with an appraised value of $270,000.

Jul 29 Purchased 1,800 shares of common stock at $17 per share. (Use cost method.)

Aug. 10 Sold the 1,800 treasury shares at $14 per share.

Dec. 31 Declared a $0.25 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.

Dec. 31 Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $175,700 net income.

Instructions:

a. Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Phelps Corporation’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2010.

acc423 on january 1 2010 bailey industries had stock outstanding as follows 491601

E16-20 (EPS: Simple Capital Structure)

On January 1, 2010, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.

6% Cumulative preferred stock $100 par value issued and outstanding 10,000 shares

1,000,000

Common stock, $10 par value, issued and outstanding 200,000 shares

2,000,000

To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 170,000 common shares. The acquisitions took place as follows.

Date of Acquisition

Shares

Issued

Company

A April 1, 2010

60,000

Company B

July 1, 2010

80,000

Company C

October 1, 2010

30,000

On May 14, 2010, Bailey realized a $90,000 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000.

On December 31, 2010, Bailey recorded net income of $300,000 before tax and exclusive of the gain.

Assuming a 40% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2010. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary.

acc423 greig landscaping began construction of a new plant on december 1 2012 491603

P10-6 Interest during Construction

Greig Landscaping began construction of a new plant on December 1,2012. On this date, the company purchased a parcel of land for $139,000 in cash. In addition it paid $2,000 in survey cost and $4,000 for title insurance policy. An old dwelling on the premises was demolished at a cost of $3,000 with $1,000 being received from the sale of materials.

Architectural plans were also on December 1, 2012 when the architect was paid $30,000. The necessary building permits costing $3,000 were obtained from the city and paid for on December 1 as well. The excavation work began during the first week in December with payments made to the contractor as follows:

Date of payment Amount of payment

March 1 240,000

May 1 330,000

July 1 60,000

The building was completed on July 1, 2013. To finance consturction of this plant, Greig borrowed $600,000 from the bank on December 1, 2012. Greig had no other borrowings. The $600,000 was a 10-year loan bearing interest at 8%.

Instructions:

Compute the balance in each of the following accounts at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar).

a. Land

b. Buildings

c. Interest Expense

acc423 altira corporation uses a periodic inventory system the following information 491604

E8-13 Inventory cost flow methods; periodic system

Altira Corporation uses a periodic inventory system. The following information related to its merchandise inventory during the month of August 2011 is available:

Aug.1 Inventory on hand -2,000 units; cost $6.10 each.

8 Purchased 10,000 units for $5.50 each

14 Sold 8,000 units for $12.00 each.

18 Purchased 6,000 units for $5.00 each.

25 Sold 7,000 units for $11.00 each.

31 Inventory on hand – 3,000 units.

Required:

Determine the inventory balance Altira would report in its August 31, 2011, balance sheet and the cost of goods sold it would report in its August 2011 income statement using each of the following cost flow methods: 1. First-in, first-out (FIFO) 2. Last-in, first-out (LIFO) 3. Average cost

acc423 the following transactions affected its merchandise inventory during the mont 491605

E8-14 Inventory cost flow methods; perpetual system ?

[This is a variation of Exercise 8-13 modified to focus on the perpetual inventory system and alternative cost flow methods.]

Altira Corporation uses a perpetual inventory system. The following transactions affected its merchandise inventory during the month of August 2011:

Aug.1 Inventory on hand -2,000 units; cost $6.10 each.

8 Purchased 10,000 units for $5.50 each

14 Sold 8,000 units for $12.00 each.

18 Purchased 6,000 units for $5.00 each.

25 Sold 7,000 units for $11.00 each.

31 Inventory on hand – 3,000 units.

Required:

Determine the inventory balance Altira would report in its August 31, 2011, balance sheet and the cost of goods sold it would report in its August 2011 income statement using each of the following cost flow methods:

1. First-in, first-out (FIFO)

2. Last-in, first-out (LIFO)

3. Average cost

acc423 san jose flights s a of panama has a small truck that it uses for intracity d 491606

San Jose Flights, S.A., of Panama, has a small truck that it uses for intracity deliveries. The truck is worn out and must be either overhauled or replaced with a new truck. The company has assembled the following information. (Panama uses the U.S. dollar as its currency):

Present Truck

New Truck

Purchase cost new

28,000

42,000

Remaining book value

18,000

Overhaul needed now

9,500

Annual cash operating costs

14,000

11,000

Salvage value-now

10,000

Salvage value-10 years from now

2,000

4,000

If the company keeps and overhauls its present delivery truck, then the truck will be usable for 10 more years. If a new truck is purchased, it will be used for 10 years, after which it will be traded in on another truck. The new truck would be dieseloperated, resulting in a substantial reduction in annual operating costs, as shown above.

The company computes depreciation on a straight-line basis. All investment projects are evaluated using a 16% discount rate.

Required:

1. Should San Jose Flights, S.A. keep the old truck or purchase the new one? Use the total-cost approach to net present value in making your decision. Round to the nearest whole dollar.

2. Redo (1) above, this time using the incremental-cost approach.

acc423 five years ago the city of paranoya spent 30 000 to purchase a computerized r 491607

(TCO G) (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:

Old System

New System

Cost of radar system

30,000

50,000

Current salvage value

10,000

Salvage value in 10 years

5,000

8,000

Annual operating costs

34,000

29,000

Upgrade required in 5 years

4,000

Discount rate

14%

14%

Required:

(a) What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.

(b) Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system? (Points : 35)

acc423 tco c the following overhead data are for a department of a large company 491608

(TCO C) The following overhead data are for a department of a large company.

Actual Costs Incurred

Static Budget

Activity level (in units)

360

340

Variable costs:

Indirect materials

4,182

4,148

Electricity

2,536

2,414

Fixed costs:

Administration

6,540

6,500

Rent

6,310

6,400

Required:

Construct a flexible budget performance report that would be useful in assessing how well costs were controlled in this department.

acc423 maverick s attorneys have indicated that they believe it is probable that mav 491610

E13-13 Contingencies

Presented below are three independent situations. Answer the question at the end of each situation.

1. During 2012, Maverick Inc. became involved in a tax dispute with the IRS.

Maverick’s attorneys have indicated that they believe it is probable that Maverick will lose this dispute. They also believe that Maverick will have to pay the IRS between $800,000 and $1,400,000. After the 2012 financial statements were issued, the case was settled with the IRS for $1,200,000. What amount, if any, should be reported as a liability for this contingency as of December 31, 2012?

2. On October 1, 2012, Holmgren Chemical was identified as a potentially responsible party by the Environmental Protection Agency. Holmgren’s management along with its counsel have concluded that it is probable that Holmgren will be responsible for damages, and a reasonable estimate of these damages is $6,000,000. Holmgren’s insurance policy of $9,000,000 has a deductible clause of $500,000. How should Holmgren Chemical report this information in its financial statements at December 31, 2012?

3. Shinobi Inc. had a manufacturing plant in Darfur, which was destroyed in the civil war. It is not certain who will compensate Shinobi for this destruction, but Shinobi has been assured by governmental officials that it will receive a definite amount for this plant. The amount of the compensation will be less than the fair value of the plant, but more than its book value. How should the contingency be reported in the financial statements of Shinobi Inc.?

acc423 sycamore candy company offers a cd single as a premium for every five candy b 491611

P13-9 Premium Entries and Financial Statement Presentation

Sycamore Candy Company offers a CD single as a premium for every five candy bar wrappers presented by customers together with $3.20. The candy bars are sold by the company to distributors for 30 cents each. The purchase price of each CD to the company is $2.95; in addition it costs 50 cents to mail each CD. The results of the premium plan for the years 2012 and 2013 are as follows. (All purchases and

2012

2013

CDs purchased

392,500

518,100

Candy bars sold

2,940,100

2,817,700

Wrappers redeemed

1,884,000

2,355,000

2012 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2013

455,300

2013 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2014

549,500

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries that should be made in 2012 and 2013 to record the transactions related to the premium plan of the Sycamore Candy Company. (If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

(b) Indicate the account names, amounts, and classifications of the items related to the premium plan that would appear on the balance sheet and the income statement at the end of 2012 and 2013.

acc423 on december 31 2012 the american bank enters into a debt restructuring agreem 491612

E14-22 Term Modification without Gain-Debtor’s Entries

On December 31, 2012, the American Bank enters into a debt restructuring agreement with Barkley Company, which is now experiencing financial trouble. The bank agrees to restructure a 14%, issued at par, $3,186,000 note receivable by the following modifications:

1. Reducing the principal obligation from $3,186,000 to $2,548,000.

2. Extending the maturity date from December 31, 2012, to January 1, 2016.

3. Reducing the interest rate from 14% to 10%.

Barkley pays interest at the end of each year. On January 1, 2016, Barkley Company pays $2,548,800 in cash to Firstar Bank.

Instructions

(a) Will the gain recorded by Barkley be equal to the loss recorded by American Bank under the debt restructuring?

(b) Can Barkley Company record a gain under the term modification mentioned above? Explain.

(c) Assuming that the interest rate Barkley should use to compute interest expense in future periods is 1.4276%, prepare the interest payment schedule of the note for Barkley Company after the debt restructuring. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548).

(d) Prepare the interest payment entry for Barkley Company on December 31, 2014. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

(e) What entry should Barkley make on January 1, 2016? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

acc423 on january 1 2012 palmer company leased equipment to woods corporation 491613

E21-7(b) Lessee-Lessor Entries, Sales-Type Lease

On January 1, 2012, Palmer Company leased equipment to Woods Corporation. The following information pertains to this lease.

1. The term of the noncancelable lease is 6 years, with no renewal option. The equipment reverts to the lessor at the termination of the lease.

2. Equal rental payments are due on January 1 of each year, beginning in 2012.

3. The fair value of the equipment on January 1, 2012, is $197,600, and its cost is $164,008.

4. The equipment has an economic life of 8 years, with an unguaranteed residual value of $11,070. Woods depreciates all of its equipment on a straight-line basis.

5. Palmer sets the annual rental to ensure an 10% rate of return. Woods’s incremental borrowing rate is 11%, and the implicit rate of the lessor is unknown.

6. Collectibility of lease payments is reasonably predictable, and no important uncertainties surround the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.

Instructions

(Both the lessor and the lessee’s accounting period ends on December 31.)

(b) Calculate the amount of the annual rental payment. (Round present value factor calculations to 5 decimal places, e.g. 1.25124 and the final answer to 0 decimal places e.g. 58,971.)

acc423 maddox specialty company a division of lost world inc manufactures three mode 491614

P9-9 Statement and Note Disclosure, LCM and Purchase Commitment

Maddox Specialty Company, a division of Lost World Inc., manufactures three models of gear shift components for bicycles that are sold to bicycle manufacturers, retailers, and catalog outlets. Since beginning operations in 1988 Maddox has used normal absorption costing and has assumed a first-in, first-out cost flow in its perpetual inventory system. The balances of the inventory accounts at the end of Maddox’s fiscal year, November 30, 2012, are shown below. The inventories are stated at cost before any year-end adjustments.

Finished goods

647,000

Work in process

112,500

Raw materials

264,000

Factory supplies

69,000

The following information, shown on page 536, relates to Maddox’s inventory and operations.

1. The finished goods inventory consists of the items analyzed below.

Cost

Market

Down tube shifter

Standard model

67,500

67,000

Click adjustment model

94,500

89,000

Deluxe model

110,000

Total down tube shifters

270,000

266,000

Bar end shifter

Standard model

83,000

90,050

Click adjustment model

99,000

97,550

Total bar end shifters

182,000

187,600

Head tube shifter

Standard model

78,000

77,650

Click adjustment model

117,000

119,300

Total head tube shifters

195,000

196,950

Total finished goods

$647,000

$650,550

2. One-half of the head tube shifter finished goods inventory is held by catalog outlets on consignment.

3. Three-quarters of the bar end shifter finished goods inventory has been pledged as collateral for a bank loan.

4. One-half of the raw materials balance represents derailleurs acquired at a contracted price 20 percent above the current market price. The market value of the rest of the raw materials is $127,400.

5. The total market value of the work in process inventory is $108,700.

6. Included in the cost of factory supplies are obsolete items with an historical cost of $4,200. The market value of the remaining factory supplies is $65,900.

7. Maddox applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to each of the three types of shifters in finished goods inventory. For each of the other three inventory accounts, Maddox applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to the total of each inventory account.

8. Consider all amounts presented above to be material in relation to Maddox’s financial statements taken as a whole.

Instructions:

a. Prepare the inventory section of Maddox’s balance sheet as of November 30, 2012, including any required note(s).

b. Without prejudice to your answer to (a), assume that the market value of Maddox’s inventories is less than cost. Explain how this decline would be presented in Maddox’s income statement for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

c. Assume the Maddox has a firm purchase commitment for the same type of derailleur included in the raw materials inventory as of November 30, 2012, and that the purchase commitment is at a contract priced 15% greater than the current market price. These derailleurs are to be delivered to Maddox after November 30, 2012. Discuss the impact, if any, that this purchase commitment would have on Maddox’s financial statements prepared for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

acc423 on january 1 2012 blair corporation purchased for 500 000 a tract of land sit 491615

P10-5 Classification of Costs and Interest Capitalization

On January 1, 2012, Blair Corporation purchased for $500,000 a tract of land (site number 101) with a building. Blair paid a real estate broker’s commission of $36,000, legal fees of $6,000, and title guarantee insurance of $18,000. The closing statement indicated that the land value was $500,000 and the building value was $100,000. Shortly after acquisition, the building was razed at a cost of $54,000.

Blair entered into a $3,000,000 fixed-price contract with Slatkin Builders, Inc. on March 1, 2012, for the construction of an office building on land site number 101. The building was completed and occupied on September 31, 2013. Additional construction costs were incurred as follows.

Plans, specifications, and blueprints 21,000

Architect’s fees for design and supervision 82,000

The building is estimated to have a 40-year life from date of completion and will be depreciated using the 150% declining-balance method.

To finance construction costs, Blair borrowed $3,000,000 on March 1, 2012. The loan is payable in 10 annual installments of $300,000 plus interest at the rate of 10%. Blair’s weighted-average amounts of accumulated building construction expenditures were as follows.

For the period March 1 to December 31, 2012 1,300,000

For the period January 1 to September 30, 2013 1,900,000

Instructions:

1. Prepare a schedule that discloses that individual costs making up the balance in the land account in respect of land site number 101 as of September 30, 2013.

2. Prepare a schedule that discloses the individual costs that should be capitalized in the office building account as of September 30, 2013. Show supporting computations in good form.

acc423 presented below is information related to choctaw company 491616

E8-25 Dollar-Value LIFO

Presented below is information related to Choctaw Company.

Date

Ending Inventory (End-of-Year Prices)

Price Index

31-Dec-07

70,000

100

31-Dec-08

88,200

105

31-Dec-09

95,120

116

31-Dec-10

108,000

120

31-Dec-11

100,000

125

Instructions

Compute the ending inventory for Choctaw Company for 2007 through 2011 using the dollar-value LIFO method.

echeverria sa is an argentinian manufacturing company whose total factory overhead c 491454

Echeverria SA is an Argentinian manufacturing company whose total factory overhead costs fluctuate somewhat from year to year according to the number of machine-hours worked in its production facility. These costs (in Argentinian pesos) at high and low levels of activity over recent years are given below:

Level of Activity

Low High

Machine-hours 60,000 80,000

Total factory overhead costs 274,000 pesos 312,000 pesos

The factory overhead costs above consist of indirect materials, rent, and maintenance. The company has analyzed these costs at the 60,000 machine-hours level of activity as follows:

Indirect materials (variable) 90,000 pesos

Rent (fixed) 130,000

Maintenance (mixed) 54,000

Total factory overhead costs 274,000 pesos

For planning purposes, the company wants to break down the maintenance cost into its variable and fixed cost elements.

Requirement1:

Estimate how much of the factory overhead cost of 312,000 pesos at the high level of activity consists of maintenance cost. (Hint: To do this, it may be helpful to first determine how much of the 312,000 pesos cost consists of indirect materials and rent. Think about the behavior of variable and fixed costs.)

Maintenance cost ____________ pesos

Requirement2:

Using the high-low method, estimate a cost formula for maintenance where X represents the per machine-hour. Round the variable portion of the formula to 2 decimal places.)

Y = ____________ pesos + ____________ peso X

Requirement3:

What total overhead costs would you expect the company to incur at an operating level of 65,000 machine-hours?

Total overhead cost ____________ pesos

grady and associates performs a variety of activities related to information systems 491457

Grady and Associates performs a variety of activities related to information systems and e-commerce consulting in Toronto, Canada. The firm, which bills $125 per hour for services performed, is in a very tight local labor market and is having difficulty finding quality help for its overworked professional staff. The cost per hour for professional staff time is $45. Selected information follows.

Billable hours to clients for the year totaled 5,000, consisting of information systems services, 3,100; e-commerce consulting, 1,900.

Administrative cost of $342,000 was (and continues to be) allocated to both services based on billable hours. These costs consist of staff support, $180,000; in-house computing, $136,400; and miscellaneous office charges, $25,600.

A recent analysis of staff support costs found a correlation with the number of clients served. In-house computing and miscellaneous office charges varied directly with the number of computer hours logged and number of client transactions, respectively. A tabulation revealed the following data:

Information Systems Services

E-Commerce Consulting

Total

Number of clients

200

50

250

Number of computer hours

2,600

1,800

4,400

Number of client transactions

400

600

1,000

Required:

1. Activity-based costing (ABC) is said to result in improved costing accuracy when compared with traditional costing procedures. Briefly explain how this improved accuracy is attained.

2. Assume that the firm uses traditional costing procedures, allocating total costs on the basis of billable hours. Determine the profitability of the firm’s information systems and e-commerce activities, expressing your answer both in dollars and as a percentage of activity revenue. Repeat requirement (2), using activity-based costing.

3. Jeffrey Grady, one of the firm’s partners, doesn’t care where his professionals spend their time because, as he notes, “many clients have come to expect both services and we need both to stay in business. Also, information systems and e-commerce professionals are paid the same hourly rate.” Should Grady’s attitude change? Explain.

4. Is an aggressive expansion of either service currently desirable? Briefly discuss.

high tech inc old time co understanding operating leverage 491458

High Tech Inc Old time Co: Understanding operating leverage

See attached Excel file.

Understanding the effects of operating leverage

High Tech Inc and Old time Co. compete within the same industry and had the following operating results in 2010:

High Tech Inc Old Time Inc

Sales

$2,100,000

$2,100,000

Variable expenses

$ 420,000

1,260,000

Contribution margin

$1,680,000

$840,000

Fixed Expenses

1,470,000

630,000

Operating Income

$ 210,000

$210,000

Required:

A) Calculate the break- even point for each firm in terms of revenue.

B) What observation can you draw by examining the break- even point of each firm given that they earned an equal amount of operating income on identical sales volume in 2010?

C) Calculate the amount of operating income (or loss) that you would expect each firm to report in 2011 if sales were to 1. INCREASE BY 20% 2. DECREASE BY 20%.

D) Using the amounts computed in requirement C, calculate the increase or decrease in the amount of operating income expected in 2011 from the amount reported in 2010.

E) Explain why an equal percentage increase (or decrease) in sales for each firm would have such differing effects on operating income.

F) Calculate the ratio of contribution margin to operating income for each firm in 2010. (hint: divide contribution margin by operating income).

G) Multiply the expected increase in sales of 20% for 2011 by the ratio of contribution margin to operating income for 2010 computed in requirement (F) for each firm. (hint : multiply your answer in requirement (F) by 0.2).

H) Multiply your answer in requirement (G) by the operating income of $210,000 reported in 2010 for each firm.

I) Compare your answer in requirement (H) with your answer in requirement (D). What conclusion can you draw about the effects of operating leverage from the steps you perform in requirements (f) (g) and (h)?

the following information pertains to bright toy company s operating activities for 491475

The following information pertains to Bright Toy Company’s operating activities for 2012. The company sells light box toys and sold 10,000 units in 2012.

Purchases

$126,000

Selling and Administrative Expenses

90,000

Merchandise inventory, 1/1/2012

14,000

Merchandise inventory, 12/31/2012

10,000

Sales Revenue

250,000

What is the cost of goods sold for 2012?

A) $104,000

B) $124,000

C) $130,000

D) $140,000

a us based corporation has decided to make an investment in sweden for which it will 491510

A US-based corporation has decided to make an investment in Sweden, for which it will require a sum of 100 million Swedish kronor (SEK) in three-months time. The company wishes to hedge changes in the US dollar (USD)-SEK exchange rate using forward contracts on either the euro (EUR) or the Swiss franc (CHF) and has made the following estimates: If EUR forwards are used: The standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/SEK spot exchange rate is 0.007, the standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/EUR forward rate is 0.018, and the correlation between the changes is 0.90. If CHF forwards are used: The standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/SEK spot exchange rate is 0.007, the standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/CHF forward rate is 0.023, and the correlation between the changes is 0.85.

time lost because of employee absenteeism is an important problem for various compan 491511

Time lost because of employee absenteeism is an important problem for various companies. The human resources department of Western Electronics has studied the allocation of time lost due to absenteeism by individual employees. Through a one-year period, the department found a mean of 21 days and a standard deviation of 10 days based on data for all the employees.

a) If you pick an employee at random, what is the possibility that the number of absences for this one employee would exceed 25 days?

b) If various samples of 36 employees each are taken and sample means computed, a distribution of sample means could result. What could be the mean, standard shape and deviation of the distribution of sample means for samples of size 36?

c) A group of 36 employees is chosen at random to participate in a program that allows a flexible work schedule, which the human resources department hopes may decrease, the employee absenteeism in the future. What is the possibility that the mean for the sample of 36 employees arbitrarily selected for the study would exceed 25 days?

quantitative methods mat540test quiz 1 in general an increase in price increases the 491512

Quantitative Methods Mat540Test.Quiz 1 In general, an increase in price increases the break even point if all costs are held constant. If variable costs increase, but price and fixed costs are held constant, the break even point will decrease. Parameters are known, constant values that are usually coefficients of variables in equations Probabilistic techniques assume that no uncertainty exists in model parameters. P(A| B) is the probability of event A, if we already know that event B has occurred. A binomial probability distribution indicates the probability of r successes in n trials. A continuous random variable may assume only integer values within a given interval. The purpose of break-even analysis is to determine the number of units of a product to sell that will The indicator that results in total revenues being equal to total cost is called the If fixed costs increase, but variable cost and price remain the same, the break even point If the price increases but fixed and variable costs do not change, the break even point The area under the normal curve represents probability, and the total area under the curve sums to In a binomial distribution, for each of n trials, the event The expected value of the standard normal distribution is equal to A production process requires a fixed cost of $50,000. The variable cost per unit is $25 and the revenue per unit is projected to be $45. Find the break-even point. Administrators at a university will charge students $158 to attend a seminar. It costs $2160 to reserve a room, hire an instructor, and bring in the equipment. Assume it costs $50 per student for the administrators to provide the course materials. How many students would have to register for the seminar for the university to break even? Note please report the result as a whole number, omitting the decimal point. Administrators at a university are planning to offer a summer seminar. The costs of reserving a room, hiring an instructor, and bringing in the equipment amount to $3000. Suppose that it costs $25 per student for the administrators to provide the course materials. If we know that 20 people will attend, what price should be charged per person to break even?

Note please report the result as a whole number, rounding if necessary and omitting the decimal point. Wei is considering pursuing an MS in Information Systems degree. She has applied to two different universities. The acceptance rate for applicants with similar qualifications is 20% for University X and 45% for University Y. What is the probability that Wei will be accepted by at least one of the two universities? {Express your answer as a percent. Round (if necessary) to the nearest whole percent and omit the decimal. For instance, 20.1% would be written as 20} Employees of a local company are classified according to gender and job type. The following table summarizes the number of people in each job category. Male (M) Female (F) Job Administrative (AD) 110 10 Salaried staff (SS) 30 50 Hourly staff (HS) 60 40 If an employee is selected at random, what is the probability that the employee is female or works as a member of the administration? An inspector correctly identifies defective products 90% of the time. For the next 10 products, what is the probability that he makes fewer than 2 incorrect inspections? Note Please report your answer with two places to the right of the decimal, rounding if appropriate.

document the trend in mexico s key economic indicators such as the balance of paymen 491521

Document the trend in Mexico’s key economic indicators, such as the balance of payments, the exchange rate, and foreign reserve holdings, during the period 1994.1 through 1995.12.

a. The Mexican peso was pegged to the US dollar

i. Made Mexico attractive destination for foreign Capital and lead to surge in portfolio investment

ii. Flows initially helped to support Mexico’s economic reforms, but later undermined them

b. The peso’s appreciation combined with unilateral trade liberalization fed a surge in imports, which outpaced exports

i. Trade deficit coincided with foreign investment boom of the US during the early 1990s

ii. Allowed Mexico to cover growing trade imbalance and run

unprecedented current account deficits

c. Primary component of Mexico’s anti-inflationary policy

was its exchange rate regime

i. Exchange rate regime was effective in curbing inflationary pressures

ii. But resulted in the appreciation of the peso

job 827 was recently completed the following data have been recorded on its job cost 491542

Job 827 was recently completed. The following data have been recorded on its job cost sheet:

Direct materials

61,050

Direct labor hours

1,332 labor hours

Direct laborwage rate

14 per labor-hour

Machine Hours

1,480 machine hours

Number of units completed

3,700 units

The company applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours. The predetermined overhead rate is $13 per machine-hour.

Compute the unit product cost that would appear on the job cost sheet for this job.

you plan to analyze the value of a potential investment by calculating the sum of th 491582

You plan to analyze the value of a potential investment by calculating the sum of the present values of its expected cash flows. Which of the following would lower the calculated value of

the investment?

Answer

a The total amount of cash flows remains the same, but more of the cash flows are

. received in the earlier years and less are received in the later years.

b The discount rate increases.

.

c. The discount rate decreases.

d The riskiness of the investment’s cash flows decreases.

.

e The cash flows are in the form of a deferred annuity, and they total to $100,000.

. You learn that the annuity lasts for only 5 rather than 10 years, hence that each

payment is for $20,000 rather than for $10,000.

acc423 the pretax financial income or loss figures of synergetics company are as fol 491583

E19-9 (Carryback and Carryforward of NOL, No Temporary Differences)

The pretax financial income (or loss) figures of Synergetics Company are as follows.

2008

160,000

2009

250,000

2010

90,000

2011

(160,000)

2012

(350,000)

2013

120,000

2014

100,000

Pretax financial income (or loss) and taxable income (loss) were the same for all years involved. Assume a 45% tax rate for 2008 and 2009 and a 40% tax rate for the remaining years.

Prepare the journal entries for the years 2010 to 2014 to record income tax expense and the effects of the net operating loss carrybacks and carryforwards, assuming Synergetics Company uses the carryback provision. All income and losses relate to normal operations. (In recording the benefits of a loss carryforward, assume that no valuation account is deemed necessary.)

acc423 brennan corporation began 2010 with a 90 000 balance in the deferred tax liab 491584

E19-3 (One Temporary Difference, Future Taxable Amounts, One Rate, Beginning Deferred Taxes)

Brennan Corporation began 2010 with a $90,000 balance in the Deferred Tax Liability account. At the end of 2010, the related cumulative temporary difference amounts to $350,000, and it will reverse evenly over the next 2 years. Pretax accounting income for 2010 is $525,000, the tax rate for all years is 40%, and taxable income for 2010 is $400,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute income taxes payable for 2010.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record income tax expense, deferred income taxes, and income taxes payable for 2010.

(c) Prepare the income tax expense section of the income statement for 2010 beginning with the line “Income before income taxes.”

acc423 the following information is available for remmers corporation for 2010 491585

P19-1 (Three Differences, No Beginning Deferred Taxes, Multiple Rates)

The following information is available for Remmers Corporation for 2010.

1. Depreciation reported on the tax return exceeded depreciation reported on the income statement by $120,000. This difference will reverse in equal amounts of $30,000 over the years 2011-2014.

2. Interest received on municipal bonds was $10,000.

3. Rent collected in advance on January 1, 2010, totaled $60,000 for a 3-year period. Of this amount, $40,000 was reported as unearned at December 31, for book purposes.

4. The tax rates are 40% for 2010 and 35% for 2011 and subsequent years.

5. Income taxes of $320,000 are due per the tax return for 2010.

6. No deferred taxes existed at the beginning of 2010.

Instructions:

a. Compute taxable income for 2010.

b. Compute pretax financial income for 2010.

c. Prepare the journal entries to record income tax expense, deferred income taxes, and income taxes payable for 2010 and 2011. Assume the taxable income was $980,000 in 2011.

d. Prepare the income tax expense section of the income statement for 2010, beginning with “Income before income taxes”.

acc423 the following information is available for remmers corporation for 2012 491586

P19-1(a) Three Differences, No Beginning Deferred Taxes, Multiple Rates

The following information is available for Remmers Corporation for 2012.

1. Depreciation reported on the tax return exceeded depreciation reported on the income statement by $131,200. This difference will reverse in equal amounts of $32,800 over the years 2013-2016.

2. Interest received on municipal bonds was $11,600.

3. Rent collected in advance on January 1, 2012, totaled $62,700 for a 3-year period. Of this amount, $41,800 was reported as unearned at December 31, 2012 for book purposes.

4. The tax rates are 40% for 2012 and 35% for 2013 and subsequent years.

5. Income taxes of $322,200 are due per the tax return for 2012.

6. No deferred taxes existed at the beginning of 2012.

Instructions:

a. Compute the taxable income for 2012.

acc423 the following information has been obtained for the gocker corporation 491587

P19-3(a) Second Year of Depreciation Difference, Two Differences, Single Rate, Extraordinary Item

The following information has been obtained for the Gocker Corporation.

1. Prior to 2010, taxable income and pretax financial income were identical.

2. Pretax financial income is $1,718,300 in 2012 and $1,405,100 in 2013.

3. On January 1, 2010, equipment costing $1,264,000 is purchased. It is to be depreciated on a straight-line basis over 5 years for tax purposes and over 8 years for financial reporting purposes. (Hint: Use the half-year convention for tax purposes, as discussed in Appendix 11A.)

4. Interest of $69,800 was earned on tax-exempt municipal obligations in 2013.

5. Included in 2013 pretax financial income is an extraordinary gain of $206,200, which is fully taxable.

6. The tax rate is 39% for all periods.

7. Taxable income is expected in all future years.

Instructions:

1. Compute taxable income and income taxes payable for 2013.

acc423 listed below are items that are commonly accounted for differently for financ 491588

E19-6 Identify Temporary or Permanent Differences

Listed below are items that are commonly accounted for differently for financial reporting purposes than they are for tax purposes.

For each item below, indicate whether it involves:

1. A temporary difference that will result in future deductible amounts and, therefore will usually give rise to a deferred income tax asset.

2. A temporary difference that will result in future taxable amounts and therefore, will usually give rise to a deferred income tax liability.

3. A permanent difference.

Use the appropriate number to indicate your answer for each.

a. The MACRS depreciation system is used for tax purposes, and the straight-line depreciation method is used for financial reporting purposes for some plant assets.

b. A landlord collects some rents in advance. Rents received are taxable in the period when they are received.

c. Expenses are incurred in obtaining tax-exempt income.

d. Costs of guarantees and warranties are estimated and accrued for financial reporting purposes.

e. Installment sales of investments are accounted for by the accrual method for financial reporting purposes and the installment method for tax purposes.

f. Interest is received on an investment in tax-exempt municipal obligations.

g. For some assets, straight-line depreciation is used for both financiaal reporting purposes and tax purposes, but the assets’ lives are shorter for tax purposes.

h. Proceeds are received from a life insurance company because of the death of a key officer. (The company carries a policy on key officers).

i. The tax return reports a deduction for 80% of the dividends received from U.S. Corporations. The cost method is used in accounting for the related investments for financial reporting purposes.

j. Estimated losses on pending lawsuits and claims are accrued for books. These losses are tax deductible in the period(s) when the related liabilities are settled.

k. Expenses on stock options are accrued for financial reporting purposes.

acc423 the pretax financial income or loss figures of synergetics company are as fol 491589

E19-9 (Carryback and Carryforward of NOL, No Temporary Differences)

The pretax financial income (or loss) figures of Synergetics Company are as follows.

2008

177,400

2009

259,300

2010

85,600

2011

(177,400)

2012

(388,500)

2013

125,000

2014

105,800

Pretax financial income (or loss) and taxable income (loss) were the same for all years involved. Assume a 40% tax rate for 2008 and 2009 and a 35% tax rate for the remaining years.

Prepare the journal entries for the years 2010 to 2014 to record income tax expense and the effects of the net operating loss carrybacks and carry forwards, assuming Synergetic Company uses the carryback provision. All income and losses relate to normal operations. (In recording the benefits of a loss carry forward, assume that no valuation account is deemed necessary.)

acc423 on december 21 2012 zurich company provided you with the following informatio 491590

E17-7 Trading Securities Entries

On December 21, 2012, Zurich Company provided you with the following information regarding its trading securities.

December 31, 2012

Investments (Trading)

Cost

Fair Value

Unrealized Gain (Loss)

Stargate Corp. stock

20,380

19,380

(1,000)

Carolina Co. stock

12,980

11,980

(1,000)

Vectorman Co. stock

20,380

20,910

530

Total Portfolio

53,740

52,270

(1,470)

Previous securities fair value adjustment balance – Securities fair value adjustment—Cr.

$(1,470)

During 2013, Carolina Company stock was sold for $12,550. The fair value of the stock on December 31, 2013, was: Stargate Corp. stock – $19,780; Vectorman Co. stock – $20,770.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the Carolina Company stock during 2013.

(c) Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2013.

acc423 hatcher cosmetics acquired 10 of the 221 000 shares of common stock of ramire 491591

E17-12 Journal Entries for Fair Value and Equity Methods

Presented below are two independent situations.

Situation 1

Hatcher Cosmetics acquired 10% of the 221,000 shares of common stock of Ramirez Fashion at a total cost of $15 per share on March 18, 2012. On June 30, Ramirez declared and paid a $77,800 cash dividend. On December 31, Ramirez reported net income of $127,900 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Ramirez Fashion was $16 per share. The securities are classified as available-for-sale.

Situation 2

Holmes, Inc. obtained significant influence over Nadal Corporation by buying 25% of Nadal’s 34,000 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $11 per share on January 1, 2012. On June 15, Nadal declared and paid a cash dividend of $37,000. On December 31, Nadal reported a net income of $93,500 for the year

Instruction:

Prepare all necessary journal entries in 2012 for each situation.

acc423 cardinal paz corp carries an account in its general ledger called investments 491592

P17-3 Available-for-Sale Investments

Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.

Feb. 1, 2012 Sharapova Company common stock, $105 par, 210 shares 36,700

1-Apr U.S. government bonds, 12%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 111 bonds of $1,000 par each 111,000

1-Jul McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $50,600, dated March 1, 2012 purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032 54,648

Instructions:

a. Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale.

b. Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest and the amortization of premium on December 31, 2010, using the straight-line method. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually).

c. The fair values of the securities on December 31, 2010, were: Sharapova Company common stock 32,130

U.S. government bonds

147,820

McGrath Company bonds

59,750

What entry or entries, if any, would you recommend be made? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 25,000.)

d. The U.S. government bonds were sold on July 1,2013, for $120,100 plus accrued interest. Give the proper entry.

on december 31 2013 nanotech company invests 20 000 in softplus 483885

(1) On December 31, 2013, Nanotech Company invests $20,000 in SoftPlus, a variable interest entity. In contractual agreements completed on that date, PanTech established itself as the primary beneficiary of SoftPlus. Previously, PanTech had no equity interest in SoftPlus. Immediately after PanTech’s investment, SoftPlus presents the following balance sheet: Cash $ 20,000 Long-term debt $120,000 Marketing software 140,000 Non-controlling interest 60,000 Computer equipment 40,000 PanTech equity interest 20,000 Total assets $200,000 Total liabilities and equity 200,000 Each of the above amounts represents an assessed fair value at December 31, 2013, except for the marketing software. a. If the marketing software was undervalued by $20,000, what amounts for SoftPlus would appear in PanTech’s December 31, 2013, consolidated financial statements? b. If the marketing software was overvalued by $20,000, what amounts for SoftPlus would appear in PanTech’s December 31, 2013, consolidated financial statements? (2) On January 1, 2012, Travers Company acquired 90 percent of Yarrow Company’s outstanding stock for $720,000. The 10 percent non-controlling interest had an assessed fair value of $80,000 on that date. Any acquisition-date excess fair value over book value was attributed to an unrecorded customer list developed by Yarrow with a remaining life of 15 years. On the same date, Yarrow acquired an 80 percent interest in Stookey Company for $344,000. At the acquisition date, the 20 percent non-controlling interest fair value was $86,000. Any excess fair value was attributed to a fully amortized copyright that had a remaining life of 10 years. Although both investments are accounted for using the initial value method, neither Yarrow nor Stookey have distributed dividends since the acquisition date. Travers has a policy to pay cash dividends each year equal to 40 percent of operating earnings. Reported income totals for 2012 follow: Travers Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000 Yarrow Company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,000 Stookey Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,000 Following are the 2013 financial statements for these three companies. Stookey has transferred numerous amounts of inventory to Yarrow since the takeover amounting to $80,000 (2012) and $100,000 (2013). These transactions include the same markup applicable to Stookey’s outside sales. In each year, Yarrow carried 20 percent of this inventory into the succeeding year before disposing of it. An effective tax rate of 45 percent is applicable to all companies. Travers Yarrow Stookey Company Company Company Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (900,000) $ (600,000) (500,000) Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,000 320,000 260,000 Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,000 80,000 40,000 Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (320,000) $ (200,000) $(100,000) Retained earnings, 1/1/13 . . . . . . . . . .$ (700,000) $ (600,000) $(300,000) Net income (above). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (320,000) (200,000) (100,000) Dividends paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,000 –0– –0– Retained earnings, 12/31/13 . . . . . . $ (892,000) $ (800,000) $(400,000) Current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 444,000 $ 380,000 $ 280,000 Investment in Yarrow Company . . . . . 720,000 –0– –0– Investment in Stookey Company . . . . . –0– 344,000 -0– Land, buildings, and equipment (net). 949,000 836,000 520,000 Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 2,113,000 $ 1,560,000 $ 800,000 Liabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (721,000) $ (460,000) $(200,000) Common stock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (500,000) (300,000) 200,000) Retained earnings, 12/31/13. . . . . . . . (892,000) (800,000) (400,000) Total liabilities and equities . . . . . . . $(2,113,000) $(1,560,000) $(800,000) a. Prepare the business combination’s 2013 consolidation worksheet; ignore income tax effects. b. Determine the amount of income tax for Travers and Yarrow on a consolidated tax return for 2013. c. Determine the amount of Stookey’s income tax on a separate tax return for 2013. d. Based on the answers to requirements (b) and (c), what journal entry does this combination make to record 2013 income tax? (3) Following is financial information describing the six operating segments that make up Fairfield, Inc. (in thousands): Segments Red Blue Green Pink Black White Sales to outside parties . . . . $1,811 $812 $514 $309 $121 $ 99 Intersegment revenues . . . . . . 16 91 109 –0– 16 302 Salary expense . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 379 402 312 317 62 Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 166 81 92 42 31 Interest expense . . . . . . . . . . . 65 59 82 49 14 5 Income tax expense (savings) 141 87 61 (86) (64) –0– Consider the following questions independently. None of the six segments has a primarily financial nature. a. What minimum revenue amount must any one segment generate to be of significant size to require disaggregated disclosure? b. If only Red, Blue, and Green necessitate separate disclosure, is Fairfield disclosing disaggregated data for enough segments? c. What volume of revenues must a single client generate to necessitate disclosing the existence of a major customer? d. If each of these six segments has a profit or loss (in thousands) as follows, which warrants separate disclosure? Red. . . . . . . . . . $1,074 Pink . . . . . . . . $ (94) Blue . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Black . . . . . . . . . (222) Green . . . . . . . . . . 140 White. . . . . . . . . 308

Attachments:

variable interest entities segment reporting 483897

Please, provide detailed as possible explanation

Document Preview:

(1) On December 31, 2013, Nanotech Company invests $20,000 in SoftPlus, a variable interest entity. In contractual agreements completed on that date, PanTech established itself as the primary beneficiary of SoftPlus. Previously, PanTech had no equity interest in SoftPlus. Immediately after PanTech’s investment, SoftPlus presents the following balance sheet: Cash $ 20,000 Long-term debt $120,000 Marketing software 140,000 Non-controlling interest 60,000 Computer equipment 40,000 PanTech equity interest 20,000 Total assets $200,000 Total liabilities and equity 200,000 Each of the above amounts represents an assessed fair value at December 31, 2013, except for the marketing software. a. If the marketing software was undervalued by $20,000, what amounts for SoftPlus would appear in PanTech’s December 31, 2013, consolidated financial statements? b. If the marketing software was overvalued by $20,000, what amounts for SoftPlus would appear in PanTech’s December 31, 2013, consolidated financial statements? (2) On January 1, 2012, Travers Company acquired 90 percent of Yarrow Company’s outstanding stock for $720,000. The 10 percent non-controlling interest had an assessed fair value of $80,000 on that date. Any acquisition-date excess fair value over book value was attributed to an unrecorded customer list developed by Yarrow with a remaining life of 15 years. On the same date, Yarrow acquired an 80 percent interest in Stookey Company for $344,000. At the acquisition date, the 20 percent non-controlling interest fair value was $86,000. Any excess fair value was attributed to a fully amortized copyright that had a remaining life of 10 years. Although both investments are accounted for using the initial value method, neither Yarrow nor Stookey have distributed dividends since the acquisition date. Travers has a policy to pay cash dividends each year equal to 40 percent of operating earnings. Reported income totals for 2012…

Attachments:

bank reconciliation 484083

Xenon, Inc.’s August 31 Banl Statement had an ending cash balance of $2,657. On August 31, Xenon’s general ledger showed a balance of $860. After comparing the general ledger to the bank statement, the following items were noted:

– Outstanding checks, $2,250

– Interest paid by the bank, $12

– An NSF check from one of Xenon’s customers, $32

– Deposits in transit, $1,900

– Service fee charged by the bank, $8

– A direct deposit from a customer, $1,400

– Check #345 was written to Acme Insurance; the amount of the check was $615. It was recorded in the general ledger for $600.

Prepare a bank reconciliation for Xenon, Inc.

Make the required journal entries associated with the bank reconciliation.

selected transactions from the journal of roberta mendez investment broker are prese 484296

Selected transactions from the journal of Roberta Mendez, investment broker, are presented below.

Date

 

Account Titles and Explanation

 

Ref.

 

Debit

 

Credit

Aug.1

 

Cash

     

5,000

   
   

Common Stock

         

5,000

   

(Investment of cash for stock)

           

10

 

Cash

     

2,700

   
   

Service Revenue

         

2,700

   

(Received cash for services provided)

           

12

 

Equipment

     

5,000

   
   

Cash

         

1,000

   

Notes Payable

         

4,000

   

(Purchased office equipment for cash and notes payable)

           

25

 

Accounts Receivable

     

1,600

   
   

Service Revenue

         

1,600

   

(Billed clients for services provided)

           

31

 

Cash

     

850

   
   

Accounts Receivable

         

850

   

(Receipt of cash on account)

Instructions

(a) Post the transactions to T-accounts.

(b) Prepare a trial balance at August 31,2014.

slbc100 accounting 1 assessment ratio analysis report 484592

1 SLBC100 Accounting 1 Teaching Period 3, 2013 SLBC100 Accounting 1 Assessment 2: Ratio analysis report Word limit: 1000 (+/-10%) Weighting: 25% Due date: 9am AEDT Monday 27 January (Week 10) Assessment overview You are a bank manager, assessing whether or not you will approve a $50,000 finance facility for Simon Sergio, the owner of Safety Styles Pty Ltd. The bank’s procedures require you to assess the profitability, efficiency, liquidity and capital structure of the business using financial ratios.

investment property ias 40 1 a brief overview of the standard 2 positive internation 484660

For my final thesis, I was provided with the following topic: IAS2: Inventories

The instructions as follow:

You are required to research the current critique that exists with respect to the following International Accounting Standard.

DO NOT provide a long overview of the Standard itself. A brief description may be provided, but the purpose is to summarise international critique with respect to the particular Standard. Your dissertation should clearly indicate proper research on the following:

> A brief overview of the Standard
> Positive international critique with respect to the Standard (perceived strengths)
> Negative international critique with respect to the Standard (perceived weaknesses)
> Practical evidence supporting your findings (may be cited)
> A summary of international recommendations as to how the standard can be improved.

requires a group to undertake some research the assignment aims to develop understan 486237

Requires a group to undertake some research, the assignment aims to develop understanding of

financial statements and their use in decision-making.

The task is to analyse and compare 2 publicly listed companies specifically in the same industry,

(use ASX’s website to select a company) and be able to understand the structure of financial

statements.

1) The group needs to give a general overview of the company regarding its Mission Statement,

Vision Statement and business structure. (9 marks)

2) Review (Compare) the Last 2 years balance sheet (pref: 2011 and 2010) of the 2 companies

and indicate the following: (3 marks)

? The amount of total current assets

? The amount of total non-current assets

? The amount of total current liabilities

? The amount of total non-current liabilities

? The amount of total stockholder’s equity

Document Preview:

Assessment 2 Accounting for Business Decisions –HI5001 Note: This assignment carries 30% weightage. Students not to worry about the marks shown in each section as the marks shown in each section are to help the lecturers mark. Due Date: Week 10 before 5.00 pm. Group Assignment is divided into 2 Sections: Section A and Section B. Each with 15% marks with a total of 30%. Students are advised to use Microsoft Excel wherever necessary. Section A. Requires a group to undertake some research, the assignment aims to develop understanding of financial statements and their use in decision-making. The task is to analyse and compare 2 publicly listed companies specifically in the same industry, (use ASX’s website to select a company) and be able to understand the structure of financial statements. 1) The group needs to give a general overview of the company regarding its Mission Statement, Vision Statement and business structure. (9 marks) 2) Review (Compare) the Last 2 years balance sheet (pref: 2011 and 2010) of the 2 companies and indicate the following: (3 marks) ? The amount of total current assets ? The amount of total non-current assets ? The amount of total current liabilities ? The amount of total non-current liabilities ? The amount of total stockholder’s equity 3) Review the most recent year’s(pref: 2011 and 2010) income statement and indicate the following: (3 marks) • total (operating) revenues • cost of goods sold (if listed) • total expenses (before income taxes) • any non-operating (or extraordinary) gains and losses; and • Earnings per common share. 4) Review the statement of cash flows for the most recent year (pref: 2011 and 2010) and indicate the following: (3 marks) • net cash inflow (outflow) from operating activities; • net cash inflow (outflow) from financing activities; • net cash inflow (outflow) from investing activities; and • net increase (decrease) in cash during the year. 5) With…

Attachments:

holton central holding inc 488757

how to get the journal entries

Document Preview:

BS Part II IS Part II JE Part II Balance Sheet Part I Income Statement Part I JE Part I Cash Accounts Receivable Furniture & Equipment Accumulated Depreciation Total Assets Liabilities: Accounts Payable Stockholders’ Equity: Common Stock Retained Earnings Total Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity Dublin Small Animal Clinic Balance Sheet July 31, 2009 Revenues Service Revenue Expenses Rent Depreciation Expense Administrative Expense Office Supplies Expense Payroll Expense Drugs & Medical Supplies Exp Total Expenses Net Loss Income Statement For Month Ended July 31, 2009 Journal Entries Cr. Dr. Common Stock Principle Payments Principle Payments Payable Interest Interest Payable Land Drilling Bldg and equipment Accounts Receivable Wages Wages Payable Delivery Service Services Payable Sales Revenue Inventory Principle Loan Loan payable 0.00 0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $500,000.00 $500,000.00 $60,000.00 $60,000.00 $18,000.00 $18,000.00 $525,000.00 $525,000.00 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 $240,000.00 $240,000.00 $6,300.00 $6,300.00 $500.00 $500.00 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 $1,500.00 $1,500.00 $900.00 $900.00 $300,000.00 $300,000.00 BS Part II IS Part II JE Part II Balance Sheet Part I Income Statement Part I JE Part I Cash Accounts Receivable Furniture & Equipment Accumulated Depreciation Total Assets Liabilities: Accounts Payable Stockholders’ Equity: Common Stock Retained Earnings Total Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity Dublin Small Animal Clinic Balance Sheet July 31, 2009 Revenues Service Revenue Expenses Rent Depreciation Expense Administrative Expense Office Supplies Expense Payroll Expense Drugs & Medical Supplies Exp Total Expenses Net Loss Income Statement For Month Ended July 31, 2009 Journal Entries Cr. Dr. Common Stock Principle Payments Principle Payments Payable Interest Interest Payable Land Drilling Bldg and…

Attachments:

homework journal help 490345

Prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of Sheng Company.

Aug.1

Purchased merchandise from Arotek Company for $7,000 under credit terms of 1/10, n/30, invoice dated august1.

8

Purchased merchandise from waters corporation for $5,400 under credit terms of 1/10, n/45, FOB shipping point, invoice dated August 8. The invoice showed that sheng’s request, waters paid the $140 shipping charges and added that amount to the bill.

12

After negotiations with waters corporation concerning problems with the merchandise purchased on august 8, Sheng received a credit memorandum from Waters granting a price reduction of $700.

30

Paid Arotek Company the amount due from the August 1 purchase.

click the link above to submit your assignment 490893

Click the link above to submit your assignment.

Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.

Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.

Assignment 1: Review of Accounting Ethics

Due Week 3 and worth 200 points

Many organizations have been in the news over the past few years due to accounting ethical breaches that have affected their customers, employees, or the general public. Search the Internet or the Strayer Library to locate a story in the news that depicts an accounting ethical breach. You may select from any type of organization about which you have information or a curiosity.

Write a four to five (4-5) page paper in which you:

  1. Given the corporate ethical breaches in recent times, assess whether or not you believe that the current business and regulatory environment is more conducive to ethical behavior. Provide support for your answer.
  2. Based on your research, describe the organization, the accounting ethical breach and the impact to the organization related to ethical breach.
  3. Determine how the organizational ethical issue was detected and how management failed to create an ethical environment.
  4. Analyze the accounts impacted and / or accounting guidelines violated and the resulting impact to the business operation.
  5. As a CFO, recommend which measures could have been taken to prevent this ethical breach and how each measure should be implemented in the future.
  6. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student’s name, the professor’s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

  • Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
  • Prepare and record financial transactions in the accounting cycle according to GAAP and IFRS accounting methodology.
  • Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
  • Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

Clickhereto view the grading rubric for this assignment.

stratford company distributes a lightweight lawn chair that sells for 120 per unit v 491020

Stratford Company distributes a lightweight lawn chair that sells for $120 per unit. Variable expenses are $60.00 per unit, and fixed expenses total $200,000 annually.

Required:
1.

What is the product’s CM ratio?(Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

CM ratio %

2.

Use the CM ratio to determine the break-even point in sales dollars.(Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Break-even point in sales dollars $

4 problems 491117

Journalizing Transactions in a Perpetual Inventory System

One Price is Nice sells various types of jeans and uses a perpetual inventory system. All jeans, regardless of style, are sold for $35 per pair. Following are selected transactions of the One Price is Nice for April 2009.

April 6 – Purchased 30 pairs of style #256 jeans with terms of 2/10, n/30; the per unit cost was $22.

April 9 – Returned ten pairs of the #256 jeans purchased on April 6 due to fabric laws

April 13 – Sold two pairs of style #321 jeans for cash; the per-unit cost of these jeans was $21

April 16 – Paid amount due to the supplier for jeans purchased on April 6.

April 17 – Purchased 12 pairs of style #157 jeans with terms of 2/10, n/30; the per-unit cost was $18.

April 20 – Sold one pair of #155 jeans on credit; the cost of this pair was $24.

April 21 – A customer returned a pair of style #808 jeans because it was the wrong size; the jeans, which cost $20, were returned to inventory.

April 27 – Sold two pairs of style &101 jeans on credit; the per-unit cost of these jeans was $17.

April 27 – Paid amount due to the supplier for jeans purchased on April 17.

Prepare the journal entries necessary to record these transactions for One Price is Nice.

Inventory Costing Methods

The following schedule summarizes the inventory purchases and sales of Brooks Street Enterprises during January 2009.

Per unit Per Unit

# of Unitscost Selling Price

BI 400 $40

Jan 2 purchase 200 44

Jan 5 sale 300 $80

Jan 9 purchase 200 48

Jan 14 sale350 90

Jan 18 purchase 200 50

Jan 21 sale 15090

Jan 25 purchase 50052

Jan 31 sale450 100

Determine Brook Street’s ending inventory, cost of goods sold, and gross profit for January 2009, assuming the company uses a perpetual inventory system and the following inventory costing methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) moving-average.

shareholders and lenders whilst not being the only stakeholders provide capital to c 491169

Shareholders and lenders, whilst not being the only stakeholders, provide capital to companies because they seek a return commensurate with the level of risk that they are willing to take.

It is within this context that Volkswagen AG, registered in Germany, manufactures and sells vehicles.

The price of Volkswagen AG’s ordinary shares have experienced a mixed performance over recent years and after the global recession the company has not returned to its share price high of late 2009.

Recent share price performance can be seen on the graph below:

However, as can be seen from the brief article overleaf, there may be some good news for Volkswagen:

VW cracks 6m in eight months Roberts, Graeme.
just – auto global news [Bromsgrove] 13 Sep 2013.

Volkswagen Group has sold over 6m vehicles in the first eight months of a year for the first time.

Sales from January to August 2013 rose 4.5% to 6.17m though August volume inched up just 0.1% to 720,400 units.

“The Volkswagen Group is in robust shape despite the economic uncertainty, and our development in the period to August remained satisfactory,” sales chief Christian Klingler said. “Notwithstanding the difficult conditions, we still expect deliveries for the full year to exceed the prior year level.”

For full details, click on ‘press release’.

Press release follows:

Volkswagen Group delivers over 6 million vehicles in period to August

* 4.5 percent increase in January – August deliveries to 6.17 million units*

* Situation in August on difficult world markets remained stable with deliveries running at 720,400 units (+0.1 percent)*

* Group Board Member for Sales Christian Klingler: “Satisfactory development despite economic uncertainties. Still expect to grow worldwide deliveries for full year.”

Wolfsburg, September 13, 2013 – For the first time the Volkswagen Group delivered over 6 million vehicles in the first eight months of a year. The company grew deliveries from January to August 2013 to 6.17 (January-August 2012: 5.91; +4.5 percent)* million vehicles. Deliveries in the month of August remained stable at 720,400 units (August 2012: 719,500; +0.1 percent)*. “The Volkswagen Group is in robust shape despite the economic uncertainty, and our development in the period to August remained satisfactory. For the first time, we delivered over six million vehicles to customers in the first eight months of a year,” Group Board Member for Sales Christian Klingler said in Wolfsburg on Friday, and added: “Notwithstanding the difficult conditions, we still expect deliveries for the full year to exceed the prior-year level.”

The Group brands delivered a total of 2.39 (2.47; -3.3 percent) million vehicles to customers on the overall European market from January to August. In Western Europe (excluding Germany), 1.22 (1.25; -2.7 percent) million customers took possession of a new vehicle. 757,300 (792,300; -4.4 percent) vehicles were delivered on the home market of Germany. The Group handed over 415,000 (426,700; -2.7 percent) vehicles to customers in the Central and Eastern Europe region in the period to August, of which 199,800 (206,800; -3.4 percent) units were delivered in Russia.

Trends varied in the Americas. Deliveries in the North America region in the period to August grew by 10.9 percent to 593,700 (535,300) vehicles, of which 414,800 (379,900; +9.2 percent) units were handed over to customers in the United States. The Volkswagen Group delivered 605,600 (678,500; -10.8 percent) vehicles in the South America region during the same period, of which 447,600 (518,700; -13.7 percent) units were handed over to customers in Brazil.

Group delivery figures for the Asia-Pacific region remained encouraging. 2.30 (1.98; +16.2 percent) million vehicles were handed over to customers there in the first eight months. In China (excluding Hong Kong), the region’s largest single market, deliveries topped the two million mark for the first time in an eight-month period, with 2.05 (1.74; +17.9 percent) million customers taking possession of a new vehicle. In India 63,600 (77,400; -17.9 percent) customers took delivery of a new Group model.

Outline of developments at Group brands

The Volkswagen Passenger Cars brand delivered 3.84 (3.72; +3.1 percent) million vehicles worldwide from January to August. The brand developed particularly well in China, where 1.56 (1.31; +18.4 percent) million units were handed over to customers, and in Mexico, where 92,100 (77,800; +18.3 percent) customers took possession of a new Volkswagen.

Audi delivered 1.03 (0.96) vehicles worldwide in the period to August; this not only represented an increase of 7.2 percent, but was also a new record for this period. The premium brand from Ingolstadt benefited inter alia from significant growth in China, where 310,300 (259,700; +19.5 percent) vehicles were handed over to customers. The brand also grew deliveries in the United States by 14.7 percent compared with the same prior-year period, handing over 101,300 (88,400) automobiles.

The sports car manufacturer Porsche, which became a Volkswagen Group brand on August 1, 2012, delivered a total of 106,800 vehicles in the first eight months. At 32,500 units, the Asia-Pacific region accounted for the largest share, with a further 31,400 units handed over to customers in the North America region.

The SKODA brand delivered 598,400 (633,300; -5.5 percent) vehicles worldwide from January to August. The company handed over 393,200 (415,000; -5.2 percent) models on the overall European market. 156,300 (159,400; -1.9 percent) vehicles were delivered in China during the same period.

SEAT delivered 234,200 (210,100; +11.4 percent) vehicles worldwide in the period to August. The company handed over 191,700 (176,700; +8.5 percent) vehicles to customers on the overall European market. Developments on the German market were particularly encouraging, with deliveries there increasing by 26.4 percent to 50,600 (40,000) units.

Volkswagen Commercial Vehicles continued to record stable development in the period to August, delivering 358,400 (362,200; -1.1 percent) vehicles. 104,200 (106,100; -1.8 percent) vehicles were delivered to customers in Western Europe (excluding Germany) under difficult market conditions. In contrast, deliveries in the South America region developed well, with customers taking delivery of 104,100 (96,100; +8.2 percent) units.

*) including deliveries by the Porsche brand from August 1, 2012; excluding MAN and Scania

Original source: VW

Credit: Graeme Roberts

You have requested “on-the-fly” machine translation of selected content from our databases. This functionality is provided solely for your convenience and is in no way intended to replace human translation. Show full disclaimer

Neither ProQuest nor its licensors make any representations or warranties with respect to the translations. The translations are automatically generated “AS IS” and “AS AVAILABLE” and are not retained in our systems. PROQUEST AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES FOR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, TIMELINESS, COMPLETENESS, NON-INFRINGMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Your use of the translations is subject to all use restrictions contained in your Electronic Products License Agreement and by using the translation functionality you agree to forgo any and all claims against ProQuest or its licensors for your use of the translation functionality and any output derived there from. Hide full disclaimer Translations powered by LEC.

Translations powered by LEC.

Copyright Aroq Limited Sep 13, 2013

It is possible to see a great deal of background information on Volkswagen AG at the corporate website:

http://www.volkswagenag.com/content/vwcorp/content/en/homepage.html

In addition, there are almost limitless articles concerning Volkswagen AG within the DMU library databases.

You are required to do as follows:

Task One

Using the Annual Report and Accounts of VOLKSWAGEN AG:

(available at: http://www.volkswagen.co.uk/about-us/company/annual-reports)

You should:

  1. Evaluate the performance of VOLKSWAGEN in the following areas, using ratio analysis:
  • Profitability
  • Liquidity/Solvency
  • Working capital efficiency
  • Long term financial structure
  • Investors’ perspective

You should summarise your findings and make
particular reference to the interests of the different stakeholders of the company.

  1. You may use earlier years’ financial accounts to supplement your analysis if you wish to be specific with certain trends that you have identified.
  2. In addition you could also consider the performance of VOLKSWAGEN in comparison with its peer group of competitors.

Note: Any accounting ratios for VOLKSWAGEN
must be calculated (and workings shown) and
not extracted from external databases, although, further analysis may be supported by downloading ratios from external databases for competitor companies.

(60% weighting)

Task Two

Considering your response to Task One and any other, well-researched, ‘fundamental’ information that may impact on VOLKSWAGEN, you are required to provide advice, accompanied by rationale, as to whether you would recommend a buy, sell or hold (if they are already owned) policy for investors/potential investors in VOLKSWAGEN shares.

Note that the ‘fundamental’ information may relate to the car manufacturing industry, in general, as well as to VOLKSWAGEN, specifically.

(40% weighting)

(Total 100%)

Additional Information

You are required to present well structured answers of no more than 2,000 words (excluding calculations) in total. The words should be allotted according to the percentage marks awarded for each task.

Learning Outcomes specifically assessed:

Subject Specific Knowledge and Skills

  1. Identify and critically appraise the different components of a financial report, and assess the adequacy of current international financial reporting requirements for a greater understanding of company performance
  2. Analyse and interpret financial data and information, evaluate their relevance and validity, and synthesise a range of information in the context of business situations
  3. Demonstrate the ability to use conventional management accounting and financial management techniques to produce appropriate information for management to aid planning, control and decision making
  4. Evaluate the usefulness of contemporary management accounting techniques in measuring business performance
  5. Critically appraise management accounting techniques with respect to their effectiveness and identify any weaknesses inherent in their use

Non Subject Specific and Cognitive Skills

  1. Manage own learning, using the available range of resources, and ability to conduct research into business and management issues
  2. Ability to collect relevant information relating to a given situation, analyse that information and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives
  3. Demonstrate a practical and integrative approach to a problem area or issue
  4. Demonstrate rigour of academic arguments as well as the application of theory

Assignments will be graded according to the general postgraduate assessment criteria and you should also bear the following in mind:

  • Evidence of critical judgement in selecting, ordering and analysing content in order to present a sound argument
  • The demonstration and understanding of relevant concepts and models
  • The demonstration of insight and originality in responding to the assignment
  • The provision of well-referenced evidence

Attachments:

case study accounting cycle 491210

There is an instruction page on sheet 1 of the excel document. Please provide solutions on all tabs. Grading rubric is also on this document.

Document Preview:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 General Journal Date Debit Credit Cash (111) Prepaid Insurance (117) Accounts Payable (212) Common Stock (311) Retained Earnings (312) Dividends (313) Insurance Expense (513) Trial Balance a) One month’s insurance has expired. Description(Account Name) Requirement #4: Prepare adjusting entries using the following information in the General Journal Requirement #5: Requirement #6: Adjusted Trial Balance Requirement #7: Income Statement Statement of Retained Earnings Balance Sheet Requirement #8: Trial Balance for your closing entries. Description (Account Name) Requirement #9: Requirement #10: Post-Closing Trial Balance Posting is done poorly or not at all, leading to inaccurate or no trial balance. Posting has several errors leading to a trial balance with several errors. Posting is mostly correct leading to a mostly correct trial balance. Posting is correct leading to an accurate trial balance. One or fewer of four Financial Statements are prepared accurately and mostly in an appropriate format, three or all statements have some errors. Very Poor Poor Good Criteria Post the closing entries to the General Ledger T-accounts and compute ending balances. Just add to the balances that are already listed. Just add to the adjusted balances already listed. Post the adjusting entries to the General Ledger T-accounts and compute adjusted balances. Requirements Sheet in Workbook General Ledger Adjusting Entries Financial Statements Closing Entries Post Closing TB Adjusted TB Revenues: Assets: Add: Net Income Cash Subtotal Prepaid Insurance Expenses: Less: Dividends Less: Accum. Depr. Insurance Expense Total Assets Liabilities: Accounts Payable Total Expenses Total Liabilities Net Income Stockholders’ Equity: Common Stock Retained Earnings Total Stockholders’ Equity Stockholders’ Equity Name: ___________________________________ MAKE SURE TO COMPLETE ALL REQUIREMENTS WHICH ARE LISTED BELOW. Assets Liabilities Revenue Expenses Use the following…

Attachments:

enter the missing valuesin the following financial statements assume the company sta 491244

Enter the missing valuesin the following financial statements. Assume the company started operations January 1, 2013, and all transactions involve cash. (Amounts in parentheses do not require a minus sign in front of them.)

For the Years

2013 2014 2015
Income Statements
Revenue $ 430 $ 530 $ 830
Expense (265 ) ( ) (440 )









Net income $ $ 115 $ 390


















Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity
Beginning common stock $ 0 $ $ 9,700
Plus: Common stock issued 1,400 340









Ending common stock $ 8,300 $ 9,700









Beginning retained earnings 0 31 81
Plus: Net income 115 390
Less: Dividends ( ) (65 ) (159 )









Ending retained earnings 31 312









Total stockholders’ equity $ $ 9,781 $


















Balance Sheets
Assets
Cash $ $ $
Land 0 2,650









Total assets $ 12,000 $ 12,650 $ 11,500


















Liabilities $ $ $ 1,148









Stockholders’ equity
Common stock $ $ $ 10,040
Retained earnings 81 312









Total stockholders’ equity 8,331 9,781 10,352









Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 12,000 $ 12,650 $ 11,500


















Statements of Cash Flows
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers $ $ 530 $
Cash payments for expenses ( ) (415 ) ( )









Net cash flows from operating activities 165 115 390









Cash flows from investing activities
Cash payments for land 0 (5,300 ) 0
Cash receipt from sale of land 0 0 2,650









Net cash flows from investing activities 0 (5,300 ) 2,650









Cash flows from financing activities
Cash receipts from borrowed funds 3,669 0 0
Cash payments to reduce debt 0 (800 ) ( )
Cash receipts from stock issue 8,300 1,400
Cash payments for dividends (134 ) (65 ) ( )









Net cash flows from financing activities 11,835 535 (1,540 )









Net change in cash 12,000 (4,650 ) 1,500
Plus: Beginning cash balance 0 12,000 7,350









Ending cash balance $ 12,000 $ 7,350 $ 8,850


















$

depreciation problems 491279

Alternative Depreciation Methods

Brad Jolie recently decided to open a restaraunt specializing in New Orleans cuisine. He purchased a restaraunt building on January 2, 2009, at a cost of $650,000, paying 10 percent of the purchase price in cash and signing a note for the balance. The building has an estimated useful life of 25 years and an estimated salvage value of $150,000. Also on January 2, 2009, Jolie paid cash of $80,000 for used kitchen equipment with an estimated four-year useful life and $8,000 salvage value.

a. Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of the building and the kitchen equipment.

b. Compute depreciation expense for 2009 and 2010 on the restaraunt using the following methods:

(1) Straight line

(2) Double-declining balance

c. Prepare the year-end adjusting journal entries to record the depreciation expense amounts computed in part (a)

Comprehensive Problem

A partial balance sheet is presented for Withers Industries

Partial Balance Sheet

December 31, 2008

Property, Plant & Equipment

Delivery Truck $35,000

Less Accumulated Depreciation (18,750) 16,250

Office Equipment $45,000

Less Accumulated Depreciation (35,280)9,720

Factory Machinery$100,000

Less Accumulated Depreciation (36,800) 63,200

Total Property, Plant, & Equipment$89,170

Intangible Assets

Patents $7,000

Notes

The delivery truck was purchased on June 30, 2006, and is being depreciated over four years usingthe straight-line method. Salvage value wasestimated at $5,000.

The office equipment was purchased on January 2, 2006, and isbeing depreciated over five years using the double-declining balance method. Salvage was estimated at $4,000.

The factory machinery was purchased onJanuary 2, 2005, and is being depreciated over ten years using the straight-line method. Salvage value was estimated at $8,000.

The remaining useful life on the patent is seven years.

(a) On July 31, 2009, Withers sold the delivery truck for $9,000 cash. Prepare any necessary journal entries to record this sale.

(b) OnDecember 1, 2009, Withers purchased land and a building for a combined cost of $400,000 by paying $100,000 cash and signing a note for the balance. An appraiser estimates the values of the building and land are, respectively, $302,500 and $247,500. Withers plans to use the building for ten years, atwhich time the building will probably be worth $50,000. Withers plans to use straight-line depreciation on the building. Journalize this purchase.

(c)Record all necessary depreciation and amortization entries on December 31, 2009.

(d) Prepare a partial balance sheet for Withers on December 31, 2009.

accounting 491341

E10-9Northeast Airlines is considering two alternatives for the financing of a purchase of a

fleet of airplanes.These two alternatives are:

1. Issue 60,000 shares of common stock at $45 per share. (Cash dividends have not been paid nor

is the payment of any contemplated.)

2. Issue 10%, 10-year bonds at par for $2,700,000.

It is estimated that the company will earn $800,000 before interest and taxes as a result of this

purchase.The company has an estimated tax rate of 30% and has 90,000 shares of common stock

outstanding prior to the new financing.

Instructions

Determine the effect on net income and earnings per share for these two methods of financing.

E10-10On January 1, Neuer Company issued $500,000, 10%, 10-year bonds at par. Interest is

payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.

Instructions

Present journal entries to record the following.

(a) The issuance of the bonds.

(b) The payment of interest on July 1, assuming that interest was not accrued on June 30.

(c)The accrual of interest on December 31

E10-11On January 1, Flory Company issued $300,000, 8%, 5-year bonds at face value.

Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries to record the following events.

(a) The issuance of the bonds.

(b) The payment of interest on July 1, assuming no previous accrual of interest.

(c)The accrual of interest on December 31.

E10-15Leoni Co. receives $240,000 when it issues a $240,000, 10%, mortgage note payable to

finance the construction of a building at December 31, 2011. The terms provide for semiannual

installment payments of $20,000 on June 30 and December 31.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record the mortgage loan and the first two installment payments.

*E10-18Hrabik Corporation issued $600,000, 9%, 10-year bonds on January 1, 2011, for

$562,613.This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 10% on the bonds. Interest is payable

semiannually on July 1 and January 1. Hrabik uses the effective-interest method to amortize

bond premium or discount.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record the following. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(a) The issuance of the bonds.

(b) The payment of interest and the discount amortization on July 1, 2011, assuming that interest

was not accrued on June 30.

(c)The accrual of interest and the discount amortization on December 31, 2011.

*P10-8ASoprano Electric sold $3,000,000, 10%, 10-year bonds on January 1, 2011. The bonds

were dated January 1 and pay interest July 1 and January 1. Soprano Electric uses the straightline

method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds were sold at 104. Assume no

interest is accrued on June 30.

Instructions

(a)Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2011.

(b)Prepare a bond premium amortization schedule for the first 4 interest periods.

(c)Prepare the journal entries for interest and the amortization of the premium in 2011 and

2012.

(d)Show the balance sheet presentation of the bond liability at December 31, 2012.

printing error forvariable overheadin the master budget 491344

For written assignment Ch7 P3 page 279 in the textbook there is a printing error forVariable Overheadin the Master Budget Column, it should be(40,000)instead of (90,000) that is printed

The Contribution Margin is correct 90,000

Also, there are quite a few issues/errors with the Author provided templates.

So please use the attached templates provided forCh7 Problem 3( with hints and steps to follow) andCh13 P5(provided with check figure) both worksheets are attached within one file.

Let me know if you have any question or concerns

Link to book:

Document Preview:

4900 0 4900 -100 5000 254800 9800 245000 -5000 250000 -137200 -19600 -117600 2400 -120000 -45000 11300 40000 13200 40000 15000 40000 11300 12000 11300 12000 15000 12000 0 0 0 0 0 0 100000 0 0 P 07-03 Name : Section : Enter appropriate amount or item in the shaded cells. Use the drop-down lists when available. An asterisk (*) will appear next to an incorrect entry in the outlined cells. Leave no cells blank. Ensure to enter “0” wherever applicable. Enter the unfavorable variances as a negative value . 1. Sewell, Bagan, and Clark, LLP City Branch Performance Report For the Year Ended December 31 Partner in Charge: Vanessa Smith Actual results Variance Flexible budget Master budget Billed hours Revenue Controllable variable costs: Direct labor Variable overhead Contribution margin Controllable fixed costs: Rent Other administrative expenses Branch operating income 3. a. Actual Flexible Master ROI = = Residual Income = U =250,000/5,000 = 50 Per Unit Master Budget to be used to Calculate Flexible Budget F =120000/5000 = 24 / – P-13-05 Name: Section: Enter the appropriate amount or item in the shaded cells. Use the drop-down lists when available. Enter any cash outflows and deductible values with minus sign. Yong Company Statement of Cash Flows For the Year Ended December 31, 2014 Cash flows from operating activities: Cash at beginning of year Depreciation, equipment Amortization, patent Net income Depreciation Purchase of equipment Issue of notes payable Adjustments to reconcile net income to net Payment of dividends Sale of equipment Issue of mortgage for land cash flows from operating activities: Sale of furniture and fixtures Purchase of patent Gain on sale of furniture and fixtures Decrease in accounts receivable Increase in accounts receivable Decrease in merchandise inventory Changes in current assets and current liabilities: Purchase of furniture and fixtures Decrease in prepaid rent Decrease in accounts payable Decrease in income…

Attachments:

journalizing and posting adjustments to the t accounts 491408

I need an excell forma answers for this problem

Journalizing and posting adjustments to the T-accounts and preparing an adjusted trial balance The unadjusted trial balance of Arlington Air Purification System at December 31, 2014, and the data needed for the adjustment% follow.

ARLINGTON AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM Unadjusted Trial Balance December 31. 2014

Balance Account Title Debit Credit Cash S 7,700 Accounts Receivable 19.200 Piebald Rent 2.400 Office Supplies 1,300 Equesment 19,900 Accumulated DePrecabon—Eciuroment S 4,300 Accounts Payable 3.600 Salarres Payable Unearned Revenue 2.600 Arington, CapItal 39.500

Attachments:

chippewas company sells one product presented below is information for january for t 491447

Chippewas Company sells one product. Presented below is information for January for the Chippewas Company.

Jan. 1 Inventory 100 units at $6 each

4 Sale 80 units at $8 each

11 Purchase 150 units at $6.50 each

13 Sale 120 units at $8.75 each

20 Purchase 160 units at $7 each

27 Sale 100 units at $9 each

Chippewas uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. All purchases and sales are on account.

(a) Assume Chippewas uses a periodic system. Prepare all necessary journal entries, including the end-of-month closing entry to record cost of goods sold. A physical count indicates that the ending inventory for January is 110 units. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

Date Description/Account Debit Credit

Jan. 4

Jan. 11

Jan. 13

Jan. 20

Jan. 27

Jan. 31

(b) Compute gross profit using the periodic system.

$

(c) Assume Chippewas uses a perpetual system. Prepare all necessary journal entries.

Date Description/Account Debit Credit

Jan. 4

Inventory

Jan. 11

Jan. 13 Accounts receivable

Jan. 20

Jan. 27 Accounts receivable

(d) Compute gross profit using the perpetual system.

$

assignment case study 474228

I have attached the Case Study below.

Document Preview:

Case Study: Assume Polaris invested $2.12 million to expand its manufacturing capacity. Assume that these projects have a ten-year life and that management requires a 10% internal rate of return on these assets. What is the amount of annual cash flows that Polaris must earn from these projects to have a 10% internal rate of return? (Hint: Identify the ten-period, 10% factor from the present value of an annuity table, and then divide $2.12 million by the factor to get the annual required cash flows.) Assess Polaris’s most recent annual financial statements, from its website (? HYPERLINK “http://www.polaris.com/” o “website opens in a new window” t “_new” ?polaris.com?) or the SEC’s website (? HYPERLINK “http://www.sec.gov/” o “website opens in a new window” t “_new” ?sec.gov?). a. Determine the amount that Polaris invested in capital assets for that year. (Hint:  Refer to the statement of cash flows.) b. Assume a ten-year life and a 10% internal rate of return. What is the amount of cash flows that Polaris must earn on these new projects?

Attachments:

how to do verona springs mineral water income statement 474897

How to do Verona springs mineral water income statement?

Journal Entries Dr. Cr.
Cash $500,000
Common Stock $ 500,000
Principle Payments $ 60,000
Principle Payments Payable $ 60,000
Interest $ 18,000
Interest Payable $ 18,000
Land $ 525,000
Cash $ 525,000
Drilling $ 1,000
Cash $ 1,000
Bldg and equipment $ 240,000
Cash $ 240,000
Inventory $ 6,300
Accounts Payable $ 6,300
Inventory $500
Accounts Payable $500
Accounts Receivable $5,000
Cash $5,000
Accounts Receivable $10,000
Sales Revenue $10,000
Wages $1,500
Wages Payable $1,500
Delivery Service $900
Services Payable $900
Principle Loan $300,000
Loan payable $300,000

Attachments:

nickelson inc this company manufacture and sell one product the data below show the 475026

variable cost per unit/direct material=25dollar; direct labor=6 dollar; variable manufacture overhead=5 dollar; varaiable selling adm=2 dollar fix cost per yr-fix manufacturing overhead=300;000; fix selling/adm exp=180;000 -During the ist-iyr of operation; this company produce 60;000 unit and sold 60;000 unit/ during the 2nd yr it produce 70,000 unit and sold 50;00 unit. in the third yr;this company produce 40,000 unit and sold 65;00 unit. the selling price of the company product is 56 dollar per unit/ question i need to answer- i need to find the breakeven point that it sold. assume the company use variable costing 1. comute the unit product cost for ist yr; 2nd yr; and 3rd yr i need to prepare a income statement for the ist yr; 2nd yr and 3 rd yr/ question-Assume this company use absorption cost i need to compute the unit cost for 1st yr; 2nd yr and 3rd yr/ question i need to compare the net operation income figure that require 2nd yr; 3rd yr to get the breaing point/ question which net operating income figure seem counteeintutes and why/ can u assit me with facts and solution please jacdumb

linden inc manufacture and sell a single product below are the data of this company 475061

Variable cost per unit-direct material=6 dollar; direct labor=12 dollar; variable factory overhead=4 dollar; variable selling=3 dollar/ total variable cost per unit=25 dollar– fix cost per month-fix manufacturing overhead=240,000; fix selling=180.000 total fix cost per month=420,000– the product sell for 40 dollar per unit; production and sale data for month of may and june-unit produce-may=30,000- june=30,000/unit sold may=26,00 in june 34,000/ LIncome statement prepare by the account dept using absorbition cost- Sale may=1040.000 june=1,360.00/ cost of good sold in may=780.00 in june=1020.000/ gross margin in may =260.000 in june=540;000/ selling exp in may=258.000 in june =282,000/ question- i need to determine the unit product cost under a. absorption cost ansd variable costing/ question i need to prepare contrbustion format variable costing income statement for may and june/ question i need to reconcile the variable costing and absortion costing net operation income/ question-the company account dept has determined the break even point to be 28,000 unit- per month- fix cost per month = 420, 000-unit cost margin=15 per unit= 28,000. upon reviewing the data the company president say something is fisht with theses data. the company account dept says the breakeven point is 28,000 unit per month. yet we only saw 26;000 unit in may. yet the income recieve show only 2;000 profit/ which figure do we believe/ question i needto prepare a brief expain what happen on the income statement 4 the month of may

sandy scott obtain a patent and a small electrial device then set up scott product i 475108

During the ist month of operation the device was selling on the market very well.. ms scott was looking forward to a healty profit. yet she was angry to see a loss 4 the month on the income statement. the statement was prepare by her account service– Scott product inc- sale 40,000 unit=200.000 — vaiable exp- variable cost of good sold=80,000; variable selling exp=30,000=80k plus 30k=110k – contribition margin= 90,000– fix man- overhead=75,000- fix seeling exp=20,000 total=95,000 net operating took a loss of 5000/ ms scott is angry because of the loss 4 the month . She was plan to use her statement to show investor to purchase stock in hercompany/ a cpa friend of ms scott said she should use the absorption cost rather then the variable cost, the cpa inform ms scott if she use the absorption cost rather then variable then she would have made a profit for the month. base on the data of the company operation/ scott product inc- unit produce=60,000; unit sold =40,000- variable cost per unit– direct material=1.00; direct labor= 80 cents; variable overhead = 20 cents; variable selling exp= 75 cents/ question i need to complete the following-1. compare the unit product cost under absorpotion costing/2. redo the company income statement 4 the month using absorotion costing. 3. Was ms scott cpa friend was telling her the truth that she would make a profit; i need to explain/ question during the 2nd month of operation the company again produce 50,000 unit but sold 60,000 unit assume no change in total fix cost/ i need o prepare a contribtion format income statement 4 the month using variable costing/ i needto prepare a income statement 4 the month using absorption costing/ i need to reconcile the variable costing and cost operation income

annie pix inc this company is a small cpmpany that makes animalial 4 filmsand televi 475158

3 major activities are carry out 4 the company animal concept; production and contract admin / the animal concept was carry out early stage when the company bid on the project. this is a tense activity that nvolve eveyone in the company so they can show their futureclient- the activity cost and the date / 1. Active cost pool-ainnal concept- animal production contract adm-/ activity- number of proosal; number of animation and number of contract/ Activity rate- 6,000 per prosal; 7,770 per min at animation 6,6000 per contract. there activity rate include all of the cost of the company expect 4 the cost of the company; there are no direct labor or direct material cost/ the analysis using the activity rate show the local market is not profitable/ the producer ask the company to bid which result in low rate. because of the work it is bill at a standard rate/ data activity- numbers of proprose-20- min=12 number of contract =8 – the total sale 4 local commerial amount is 240;000/ question i need to determined the cost of serving the local market/ question i need to prepare a report showing the margin serving the local market; the company has no direct material or direct labor cost/ question what would you recommend to management corcern the local market

precios manufactur inc 475195

this company makes 2 type of parts 1. ex300 2. tx500 absortion costing income is show below – precious manfacturing inc – income statement- Sale= 1,700.000; cost of good-sold =1.200.000/ gross margin- 5000.00 selling exp=550.000 net opertion =5000 a loss. this company produce and sold 60,000 unit of ex 300 at a price of 20 dollar per unit and 12.500 unit of tx 500at a price of 40 dollar per unit this company cost system manaufacturing over head product using overhead rate and direct labor as te base,/ ex300- direct material=366.325; direct labor= 120;000/ tx 500 direct material 162,550; direct labor = 42; 500 total directmaterial = 528;875 direct labor= 162500; total manu overhead = 508.625 total= 1.200.000. this company has create a active base cost system to evulate the profit of its product. a team survey show that the company that 50,000 and 100;000 of the company advertising couldbe divert to ex 300 and tx 500 by didtribute the company manufacture overhead to itsactivity/ Activity cost pool- manufacture overhead Activity ex 300 tx 500 total — 1 machines hrs – 198.250 – ex300= 90,000 tx 500= 62.500 total 152.500 setup hr=150.000 ex 300= 75 tx 500 300 tota 375 product numbers of production 100;000 ex 300= 1 tx 500= 1 total= 2 operation cost= 60;375 total overhead cost= 508,625 question i need to computer the product margin for ex 300 and tx 500 under the company traditon cost system/ question i need to compute the product margin for ex 300 and tx 500 under the activity base cost sytems/ question i need to prepare a comprasion of the traditional and active base cost assigment i need to explain why the tradtion and active base cost are different

rocky mountain inc 475238

this company make 2 type of boots 1. xactive 2 pathbreaker 1. AXactive boot- selling price per unit = 127.00; direct material per unit= 64.80 direct labor per unit= 18.20 direct labor per hr= 1.4 d4t estimat annual product = 25.000 unit/ path breaker boot- selling price per unit= 89.90; directmaterial per unit = 51.00 direct labor per unit = 13.000 direct labor hr per unit = 1.0 estimate annual product – 75.000/ this company has a traditional cost in which manufacture overhead is applied to unit base on direct labor hrs. daa concerning overhead anddirect labor hrs 4 the upcoming yr/ estimated total overhead=2,200.000 estimated total direct labor hours is 110.000// question compute the product margin 4 the xactive and the patbreaker product under the traditional cost sytem// question / this company is considering replacing it traditional costing system with a active base cost system that would assign it s manufactor overhead to the following 4 active cost and capacity cost- Active— estimated over head cost; expect activity total/ direct labor hrs est overhead cost = 797.500 expect activity xactive boot=35;00 pathbreak = 75,00 total =110.000/ both set up= 680.000 xactive=250 patbreak=150 total=400 / numbers of products= 650;000 estimate activity 1-xactiv/ path breaker=1 total=2 /others = 72.500 total manufacture over head is 2.200.000/ question i need to complete the project margin 4 Xactive boot and pathbreaker product under the actvity base cost system// question i need to prepare comparision of the direct and activity basecost assigment / explain why the traditional and activity base cost assigment are different

i prepare a cash flow statement using the direct method for operating cash flows 475305

Principles of Accounting BAP 11 Assignment 1 2013 Semester 3 Class Day/Time: ________________ Due Date: Week 6 Friday 17th January 2014 Time: 5 PM Total marks for all questions 75 Weight: 25% This is an individual assignment. The assignment consists of 6 questions all of which are to be attempted. Please submit into Moodle directly, by the due date. Late submissions will attract a penalty of 5% for each day it is late. This assignment must be your own work and submitted with an assignment cover sheet. Question 1. 25 marks The following questions are required to be answered relate to the course text Questions a) Statement of Cash flows direct method Chapter 18 ; Required i. Prepare a cash flow statement using the direct method for operating cash flows ii. Prepare a reconciliation of the [profit and cash provided by the operations b) Bank reconciliation 5 marks Required prepare a bank reconciliation for the Month ended the 31 March 2001 c) Accounting for Shares 10 marks Demons Ltd issued a prospectus for the issue of 100,000 $5.00 shares on 1 January2012.The prospectus required payment of $3.00 per share on application and $2.00 to be paid when called. The company received applications for 120,000 shares by the closing date of 28February 2012.100,000 shares were issued on 1 March 2012 with excess application money being refunded. On 30 April 2012 the company called the balance of $2.00 on the shares. All call money was received by 15 May 2012.On 30 June 2012 Demons Ltd declared and paid a dividend of 5 cents per share. Required: Prepare the journal entries for the year ended 30 June 2012 to account for the above transactions. d) Accounting for Liabilities 5 Marks Easy Company Ltd issues a debenture at a premium for a period of 10 years the company pays interest on 31 December and 1 July. The debenture has a par value of $1,000,000.00 and is issued at premium of 105 at an interest rate of 9% Prepare journal entries to reflect the following; i. issue of debentures on 1-July ii. payment of interest on 1 January iii. accrual on 31 March e) Accounting for Inventory 10 marks f) Analysis of Accounting Information 10 Marks g) Preparation of production and cash budget 10 marks Budget data unit sales January 25,000.00 February 30,000.00 March 32,000.00 selling price $ 10.00 per unit cash sales 20% during month of sale Collections on account 50% in month of sale Collections on account 25% after month of sale Amount uncollectable 5% balance on accounts receivable at 1 January $ 420,000.00 Of which $350,000 relates to December sales and the remainder related to November sales 5% of the total balance is uncollectable 1 prepare sales budget for the quarter 2 prepare cash collections budget for the quarter 3 Calculate the balance in accounts receivable at the end of March

Attachments:

herbert inc acquired all of rambis company s outstanding stock on january 1 2012 475849

Herbert, Inc., acquired all of Rambis Company’s outstanding stock on January 1, 2012, for $574,000 in cash. Annual excess amortization of $12,000 results from this transaction. On the date of the takeover, Herbert reported retained earnings of $400,000, and Rambis reported a $200,000 balance. Herbert reported internal income of $40,000 in 2012 and $50,000 in 2013 and paid $10,000 in dividends each year. Rambis reported net income of $20,000 in 2012 and $30,000 in 2013 and paid $5,000 in dividends each year.

a. Assume that Herbert’s internal income figures above do not include any income from the subsidiary.

• If the parent uses the equity method, what is the amount reported as consolidated retained earnings on December 31, 2013?

• Would the amount of consolidated retained earnings change if the parent had applied either the initial value or partial equity method for internal accounting purposes?

b. Under each of the following situations, what is the Investment in Rambis account balance on Herbert’s books on January 1, 2013?

• The parent uses the equity method.

• The parent uses the partial equity method.

• The parent uses the initial value method.

c. Under each of the following situations, what is Entry
*C on a 2013 consolidation worksheet?

• The parent uses the equity method.

• The parent uses the partial equity method.

• The parent uses the initial value method.

(2) The Krause Corporation acquired 80 percent of the 100,000 outstanding voting shares of Leahy, Inc., for $6.30 per share on January 1, 2012. The remaining 20 percent of Leahy’s shares also traded actively at $6.30 per share before and after Krause’s acquisition. An appraisal made on that date determined that all book values appropriately reflected the fair values of Leahy’s underlying accounts except that a building with a 5-year life was undervalued by $45,000 and a fully amortized trademark with an estimated 10-year remaining life had a $60,000 fair value

At the acquisition date, Leahy reported common stock of $100,000 and retained earnings balance of $280,000.

Following are the separate financial statements for the year ending December 31, 2013:

Krause

Corporation Leahy, Inc.

Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. $ (584,000) $(250,000)

Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,000 95,000

Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,000 65,000

Dividend income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (16,000) –0–

Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . $ (160,000) $ (90,000)

Retained earnings, 1/1/13 . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . $ (700,000) $(350,000)

Net income (above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . (160,000) (90,000)

Dividends paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,000 20,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (790,000) $(420,000)

Current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 296,000 $ 191,000

Investment in Leahy, Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,000 –0–

Buildings and equipment (net) . . . . . . . . . . .. . 680,000 390,000

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,000 144,000

Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1,580,000 $ 725,000

Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (470,000) $(205,000)

Common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (320,000) (100,000)

Retained earnings, 12/31/13 (above) . . . . .. . (790,000) (420,000)

Total liabilities and equities . . . . . . . . . . . $(1,580,000) $(725,000)

a. Prepare a worksheet to consolidate these two companies as of December 31, 2013.

b. Prepare a 2013 consolidated income statement for Krause and Leahy.

c. If instead the non-controlling interest shares of Leahy had traded for $4.85 surrounding

Krause’s acquisition date, how would the consolidated statements change?

(3) Parker, Inc., acquires 70 percent of Sawyer Company for $420,000. The remaining 30 percent of Sawyer’s outstanding shares continue to trade at a collective value of $174,000. On the acquisition date, Sawyer has the following accounts:

Book Value Fair Value

Current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 210,000 $ 210,000

Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,000 180,000

Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000 330,000

Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (280,000) (280,000)

The buildings have a 10-year life. In addition, Sawyer holds a patent worth $140,000 that has a five-year life but is not recorded on its financial records. At the end of the year, the two companies report the following balances:

Parker Sawyer

Revenues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. $(900,000) $(600,000)

Expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600,000 400,000

a. Assume that the acquisition took place on January 1. What figures would appear in a consolidated income statement for this year?

b. Assume that the acquisition took place on April 1. Sawyer’s revenues and expenses occurred uniformly throughout the year. What amounts would appear in a consolidated income statement for this year?

(4) Placid Lake Corporation acquired 80 percent of the outstanding voting stock of Scenic, Inc., on January 1, 2012, when Scenic had a net book value of $400,000. Any excess fair value was assigned to intangible assets and amortized at a rate of $5,000 per year.

Placid Lake’s 2013 net income before consideration of its relationship with Scenic (and before adjustments for intra-entity sales) was $300,000. Scenic reported net income of $110,000.

Placid Lake distributed $100,000 in dividends during this period; Scenic paid $40,000. At the end of 2013, selected figures from the two companies’ balance sheets were as follows:

Placid Lake Scenic

Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . $140,000 $ 90,000

Land. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600,000 200,000

Equipment (net) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,000 300,000

During 2012, intra-entity sales of $90,000 (original cost of $54,000) were made. Only

20 percent of this inventory was still held within the consolidated entity at the end of 2012. In

2013, $120,000 in intra-entity sales were made with an original cost of $66,000. Of this merchandise, 30 percent had not been resold to outside parties by the end of the year.

Each of the following questions should be considered as an independent situation for the year 2013.

a. What is consolidated net income for Placid Lake and its subsidiary?

b. If the intra-entity sales were upstream, how would consolidated net income be allocated to the controlling and non-controlling interest?

c. If the intra-entity sales were downstream, how would consolidated net income be allocated to the controlling and non-controlling interest?

d. What is the consolidated balance in the ending Inventory account?

e. Assume that no intra-entity inventory sales occurred between Placid Lake and Scenic. Instead, in 2012, Scenic sold land costing $30,000 to Placid Lake for $50,000. On the 2013 consolidated balance sheet, what value should be reported for land?

f. Assume that no intra-entity inventory or land sales occurred between Placid Lake and Scenic.

Instead, on January 1, 2012, Scenic sold equipment (that originally cost $100,000 but had a $60,000 book value on that date) to Placid Lake for $80,000. At the time of sale, the equipment had a remaining useful life of five years. What worksheet entries are made for a December 31, 2013, consolidation of these two companies to eliminate the impact of the intra-entity transfer? For 2013, what is the non-controlling interest’s share of Scenic’s net income?

Attachments:

positive accounting theory 476354

Required:

Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for the case study.

Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your

opinion?) (1000 words).

Note: Please use appropriate referencing style. For this assignment, you may need to use Proquest.

Use recent academic journal articles in referencing( in-text referencing is mandatory).

7.17. Read Accounting Headline 7.7 below, and, adopting a Positive Accounting theory perspective, consider the following issues:

a) If a new accounting standard impacts on profits, should this impact on the value of the firm, and if so, why?

b) Will the imposition of a particular accounting method have implications for the efficiency of the organisation?

Accounting Headline 7.7 Implications of the release of new Accounting Standards

Foster’s: les goodwill, higher earnings

Anthony Hughes

The challenges facing investors seeking a true picture of a company’s earnings during the impending profit reporting season were underlined again on Friday when Foster’s flagged it would report a $1.2 billion reduction in the net assets under new accounting standards.

The transition to international financial reporting standards (IFRS) means Foster’s net assets will fall from $4.6 billion to $3.37 billion based on its last reported balance sheet, mainly as a result of the internally generated goodwill on brand names not being recognised.

The other major contributor to the reduction is the requirement to allow for deferred tax liabilities based on the difference between the carrying value of assets and their cost base.

Despite scepticism about the likely success of Foster’s recent $3 billion acquisition of winemaker Southcorp and Foster’s ability to extract sufficient merger synergies, the changes to the reported accounts do not relate to any issues with that acquisition. The brewing and winemaking group told analysts the balance sheet adjustments wouldn’t affect in cash flows or ability to pay dividends.

But reported profits will be higher than they otherwise would be because of the removal of goodwill amortisation charges.

Under the standards, goodwill is instead subject to an annual ‘impairment test’, with the elimination of amortisation expenses boosting reported profits. If the new standards were applied to Foster’s half-year accounts to December 31, 2004, the company would have made a net profit of $783.2 million versus the $757 million reported.

The reduced asset base reported by companies such as Foster’s will also mean they will report more favourable returns on these written-down asset values.

The transition to new standards has raised concerns that companies will announce potentially misleading profit numbers and will be reluctant to predict future profits because of the uncertainty around some aspects of the standards. There is also concern about how credit ratings agencies will react to such wild swings in balance sheet values.

But the adoption of the standards will make it easier for investment analysts to compare companies to their global peers. In Foster’s case, this means investment analysts will be able to better discern whether it is outperforming global wine and brewing peers such as Diageo and Pernod Richard.

ABN Amro Asset Management’s Mark Nathan said: ‘It differs by company and industry. There will be some concern over whether the new standards result in a less realistic portrayal of what’s happening than the current Australian standards, but by and large it’s an improvement.’

However, Goldman Sachs JBWere said in a note to clients that given the shortened period in which companies must now report their results, the new standards ‘would only add to the data overload during the last two or three weeks of August.’ Foster’s closed 2? higher at $5.46.

your detailed question here…

Attachments:

the crimson press curriculum center the crimson group inc 477463

THE CRIMSON PRESS CURRICULUM CENTER THE CRIMSON GROUP, INC.Jefferson Multi Media, Inc. I’m sorry, but I’m having a very difficult time using the information on this cost report. I mean, salary totals and the average developmental cost per product may be useful to you and the people in the central office, but I need to know more detail. We have so many different types of activities in the Audio Division that I need to know the unit cost for each if I’m going to do anything about cost control. The speaker was Adam King, General Manager of the Audio Division of Jefferson Multi Media, Inc. (JMMI). Mr. King was discussing JMMI’s cost accounting system with Michael Abbot, the company’s assistant controller. Mr. King had requested the meeting because he felt he needed more information than that contained on his division’s cost report, contained in Exhibit 1. Interested in improving cost control methods in the division, Mr. King was arguing that the average perproduct cost calculation was not an accurate measure of the division’s costs because the type and content of products varied depending on recording studio hours, special effects used, concept and design activities, and the amount of time and effort spent with the recording artist. According to Mr. King, JMMI’s cost accounting system needed to be revised to identify the specific unit costs of these various activities. During the discussion, Mr. Abbott became interested in Mr. King’s approach, and agreed to help him design a cost accounting system that made these distinctions. BACKGROUND About two years ago, in conjunction with JMMI’s move toward decentralizing its media activities, a divisional cost accounting system had been developed. As one of the company’s largest divisions, the Audio Division was among the first to implement the new system, which required division general managers (DGMs) to monitor their division’s expenditures. By involving DGMs in the budgeting and expenditure review process, Nell Chamberlain, JMMI’s president, hoped to gain more control over divisional costs and to improve the company’s overall financial performance. The Division-Based Cost Accounting System (DBCAS) [pronounced Debcas] was based on a standard costing unit that each division could use to measure its overall costs. For the Audio Division, the DBCAS used a completed product as the basic cost calculation unit. At that point, the product was transferred to the manufacturing stage where it was produced in large quantity and shipped to distributors. To calculate an average cost per product for the division, the DBCAS first collected the direct costs on the Divisional Cost Report (DCR), as shown in Exhibit 1. The Controller’s Office then allocated the company’s central office costs, such as depreciation, health and life insurance and administration to each division according to a predetermined method. These allocation methods had been determined by Mr. Abbott, and included space, number of employees, and salary dollars. The basis of allocation for any given cost was designed to provide the fairest means possible for distributing it to the various divisions in the company. After all costs had been allocated to divisions, the controller’s staff would calculate the average cost per unit in each division by dividing the division’s total costs by the appropriate unit of activity. These calculations also are shown on Exhibit 1. The unit of activity for the Audio Division was a completed product, which included audio cassettes, computerized disks (CDs), and digital sound tracks (DSTs) prepared for the company’s Video Division. According to Mr. Abbott, the main advantage of this system was that it allowed him to quickly compare the cost of producing a unit of activity in different divisions. For the Audio Division, he also thought the system could be used to calculate the cost of developing a product of a particular type. For example, to determine the cost of producing a CD, Mr. Abbott could multiply the number of CDs produced by the division’s average cost per product. HBSP Product Number TCG 015 TFor Ms. Chamberlain, the DBCAS was to be the basis for greater fiscal accountability, and she had notified the DGMs that she expected them to work with the DBCAS data in attempting to control costs. This was the main source of concern for Mr. King, since he thought the average cost per product was not an accurate measure for most of the division’s products. According to him, the actual cost of a product varied because different types of products required different types and levels of resources. Mr. King argued that the average cost per product misrepresented the resource needs of most products, and, because of this, the DBCAS did not provide him with the data he needed for accurate budgeting and planning. Product Type-Based System In an effort to address this problem, Mr. Abbott suggested that the DBCAS for the Audio Division be based on product distinctions. He divided the division’s products into three categories: audio cassettes, CDs, and DSTs. With Mr. King’s help, he calculated personnel and supply estimates for each product. For example, he estimated that although there were fewer DSTs produced, most required greater time and effort with artist relations personnel. This was because they were still relatively new as a medium and the recording artists had not yet learned some of the new approaches being used. In most instances, cassettes and CDs did not require this level of effort. From these estimates, Mr. Abbott assigned the division’s direct costs to each product type. Next, Mr. Abbott set about devising a method for allocating overhead costs to product categories. After much discussion with Mr. King and his staff, they decided to allocate all these costs so that they were roughly proportional to direct production costs. The resulting calculations are contained in Exhibit 2. Although the new system maintained a product as the standard costing unit, Mr. Abbott argued that it was a more accurate approach than the system currently in use. Instead of an average cost per product, he now had three average cost figures: one for each product category. In evaluating these revisions to the system, Mr. King and Mr. Abbott explored the differences in cost calculations resulting from the two methods. Some quick computations by the two pointed out the differences in the cost per product under different accounting procedures. From these findings, Mr. Abbott concluded that his “product-type” system could greatly increase Mr. King’s ability to budget and control costs. As Mr. King reflected on the new system, he was bothered by a few continuing problems. While he agreed that product-type costs were more accurate than division-wide calculations, he felt there were further distinctions in resource use that the system did not sufficiently address. He was particularly disturbed by the varying amounts of recording studio hours, special effect hours, concept and design activities, and artist relation activities needed for each product type. Mr. King explained to Mr. Abbott that, according to the new accounting system, it appeared as though all DSTs received the same amount of resources, but from his perspective this clearly was not the case. He pointed out by way of example that a DST recording of a new artist received far more concept and design resources than one for an established artist. Similarly, an artist who needed more time and assistance on the part of Mr. King’s Artist Relations staff used more of the staff’s resources than an artist who needed little assistance. These sorts of distinctions could be made, he argued, for special effects as well. As such, the product-type breakdown was not a sufficiently accurate measure. Service-Based System Unable to convince Mr. Abbott of the importance of this additional refinement, Mr. King himself began experimenting with a third cost accounting method—based on levels of services received—that he thought might be more accurate. As the first step in his calculations, he divided the division’s costs according to the type of service provided: recording studio, special effects, concept/design, and artists relations. He decided that a product’s use of the recording studio could be measured most easily in terms of the number of hours spent in the studio. Examining the division’s records, he decided that it was more complicated to measure special effects. He consulted with some of the special effects personnel and, with them, developed a system based on levels of special effects needed. They decided to define special effects in terms of units on three levels: one unit represented minimal special effects; two units were for moderate special effects; three units represented extensive special effects. Concept/design and artists relations were measured in a similar fashion. Products that required only minor modifications to the concept and design used in a prior recording received one unit. Two units were given for extensive modifications to the prior concept/design, and three units were _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Jefferson Multi=Media , Inc. • June 2012 2 of 6 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 assigned for a new concept/design. Products that required minimal artists relations received one unit; those that required artists relations more regularly received two units; those who used them continually received three units. Having developed these classifications, Mr. King solicited Mr. Abbott’s assistance in allocating indirect costs to these four types of service. Their cost summary is contained in Exhibit 3. In this analysis, Mr. King expected to use more than the number of products as the costing unit. For each product, he would need to calculate the number of hours in the recording studio, and estimate the number of units required for special effects, concept and design, and artists relations. To compare this system with the others, Mr. King chose three products at random in order to determine their costs. According to his calculations, each required the following: Recording Special Concept/ Artist Studio Effects Design Relations Product Type (Hours) (Units) (Units) (Units) C101 Cassette 170 2 0 1 D3420 CD 111 0 2 1 S466 DST 321 3 3 3 Mr. King was satisfied with the results of this cost accounting system. He thought that it accurately distinguished among the various types of resources provided, and that the differences in costs reflected actual differences in resources used. Moreover, because he could now isolate costs by both the nature and intensity of the resources used, he would be able to locate and manage cost problems in the division more easily, thereby complying more effectively with Ms. Chamberlain’s expectations. Mr. Abbott, however, remained skeptical. Although he thought Mr. King might be able to make effective use of the system in the Audio Division, he doubted that it could be transferred to other divisions since, in his view, other divisions would not be able to develop utilization units for their various resources. Furthermore, he was afraid that the system was too complicated to be implemented in all divisions. Finally, he seriously questioned the ability of DGMs to use this more complex system effectively. Assignment: 1. What is the cost for each of the three products Mr. King chose at random? What explains the differences? 2. Which of the three systems is the best? Why? 3. How might you improve upon the system you identified in Question 2? 4. What should Mr. King do? _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Jefferson Multi=Media , Inc. • June 2012 3 of 6 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 JEFFERSON MULTI-MEDIA Exhibit 1. Division-Based Cost Report (for most recent year) Number of products produced 22 Direct costs—Production Professional salaries $1,755,000 Clerical salaries 158,000 Contract services 68,000 Supplies and materials 85,200 Other services 97,700 Total $2,163,900 Direct costs—Administration Administrative salaries $215,000 Administrative supplies 58,000 Operations and maintenance 120,000 Other 25,000 Total $418,000 Total direct costs $2,581,900 Indirect costs allocated from central office Administration $43,300 Health/life insurance 135,200 Operation and maintenance 7,400 Rent and depreciation 3,500 Contract services 2,200 Travel 4,350 Total $195,950 Total direct and indirect costs $2,777,850 Average cost per product (rounded) $126,266 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 JEFFERSON MULTI-MEDIA Exhibit 2. Product-Type Cost Report Cassettes CDs DSTs Total Direct costs—Production Professional salaries $710,000 $555,250 $489,750 $1,755,000 Clerical salaries 51,000 55,600 51,400 158,000 Contract services 20,300 19,800 27,900 68,000 Supplies and materials 34,080 29,820 21,300 85,200 Other services 37,000 28,550 32,150 97,700 Total $852,380 $689,020 $622,500 $2,163,900 Direct costs—Administration Administrative salaries $75,300 $68,900 $70,800 $215,000 Administrative supplies 22,650 15,800 19,550 58,000 Operations and maintenance 45,000 32,300 42,700 120,000 Other 8,640 7,320 9,040 25,000 Total $151,590 $124,320 $142,090 $418,000 Indirect costs allocated from central office Administration $17,320 $15,126 $10,854 $43,300 Health/life insurance 53,700 43,500 38,000 135,200 Operation and maintenance 2,960 2,585 1,855 7,400 Rent and depreciation 1,400 1,223 877 3,500 Contract services 880 769 551 2,200 Travel 1,740 1,520 1,090 4,350 Total $78,000 $64,723 $53,227 $195,950 Total direct and indirect costs $1,081,970 $878,063 $817,817 $2,777,850 Number of products 5 15 2 Average cost per product (rounded) $216,394 $58,538 $408,909 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 JEFFERSON MULTI-MEDIA Exhibit 3. Resource-Based Cost Report Recording Special Concept/ Artist Studio Effects Design Relations Total Direct costs—Production Professional salaries $895,000 $380,000 $235,000 $245,000 $1,755,000 Clerical salaries 35,200 35,000 42,000 45,800 158,000 Contract services 6,500 25,600 22,600 13,300 68,000 Supplies and materials 25,200 25,000 20,000 15,000 85,200 Other services 28,200 17,500 26,000 26,000 97,700 Total $990,100 $483,100 $345,600 $345,100 $2,163,900 Direct costs—Administration Administrative salaries $55,300 $52,000 $55,000 $52,700 $215,000 Administrative supplies 9,500 19,500 25,150 3,850 58,000 Operations and maintenance 33,200 28,500 33,277 25,023 120,000 Other 8,562 7,755 3,680 5,003 25,000 Total $106,562 $107,755 $117,107 $86,576 $418,000 Indirect costs allocated from central office Administration $24,648 $12,216 $5,336 $1,100 $43,300 Health/life insurance 76,956 38,144 16,663 3,437 135,200 Operation and maintenance 4,212 2,088 912 188 7,400 Rent and depreciation 1,992 987 431 90 3,500 Contract services 1,252 621 271 56 2,200 Travel 2,476 1,227 536 111 4,350 Total $111,536 $55,283 $24,149 $4,982 $195,950 Total direct and indirect costs $1,208,198 $646,138 $486,856 $436,658 $2,777,850 Total number of hours or units 3,500 280 180 220 Cost per hour or unit (rounded) $345 $2,308 $2,705 $1,985

Attachments:

1 explain why the common stock is classified as part of the stockholder s equity 477930

1) Stocks and Bonds Intel Inc. is the pioneer in the manufacture of microprocessor for computers. The company’s fiscal year runs from April 1 to March 31. On 4/1/2013, Intel Issued $5,000,000 of 11% Bonds due in 10 years. The interest is payable annually on April 1. The market rate of interest on that date for bonds of similar risk is 10% 1. Prepare the journal entry for the issuance of the bonds and on the first interest payment date. 2. Use spreadsheet to prepare an amortization schedule for the bonds. Exercise 2 Presented below is the stockholders equity section of Delta Inc. All amounts are in million except for number of shares and par value Stockholders’ Equity (Deficit) Current Year Prior Year Preferred stock-20,000,000 shares authorized; none issued $ -0- $ -0- Common stock-$1 par value; 750,000,000 shares authorized; 182,350,259 shares issued 182 182 Additional paid-in capital 2,521 2,605 Treasury shares at cost: current year-21,194,312; prior year-22,768,027 (1,308) (1,405) Accumulated other comprehensive loss (664) (785) Accumulated deficit (1,312) (551) $ (581) $ 46 1. Explain why the common stock is classified as part of the stockholder’s equity. 2. Explain why treasury stock is not classified as an asset. 3. Explain what is meant by “Accumulated other comprehensive loss.” 4. Why is the accumulated deficit larger in the current year than in the prior year? 5. Compute book value per share for Delta for the current year. Provide reference in APA format if available. Financial Investments • As auditor for Banquo & Associates, you have been assigned to check Duncan Corporation’s computation of earnings per share for the current year. The controller, Mac Beth, has supplied you with the following computations. Net income $3,374,960 Common shares issued and outstanding: Beginning of year 1,285,000 End of year 1,200,000 Average 1,242,500 Earnings per share: $3,374,960 = $2.72 per share 1,242,500 • You have developed the following additional information. 1. There are no other equity securities in addition to the common shares. 2. There are no options or warrants outstanding to purchase common shares. 3. There are no convertible debt securities. 4. Activity in common shares during the year was as follows. Outstanding, Jan. 1 1,285,000 Treasury shares acquired, Oct. 1 1,035,000 Shares reissued, Dec. 1 1,165,000 Outstanding, Dec. 31 1,200,000 • Required: 1. On the basis of the information above, do you agree with the controller’s computation of earnings per share for the year? If you disagree, prepare a revised computation of earnings per share 2. Assume the same facts as those presented above, except that options had been issued to purchase 140,000 shares of common stock at $10 per share. These options were outstanding at the beginning of the year, and none had been exercised or canceled during the year. The average market price of the common shares during the year was $25, and the ending market price was $35. What earnings per share amounts will be reported? • 1) Income Tax Calculations Johnny Bravo Company began operations in 2012 and has provided the following information. 1. Pretax financial income for 2012 is $100,000. 2. The tax rate enacted for 2012 and future years is 40%. 3. Differences between the 2012 income statement and tax return are listed below. (a) Warranty expense accrued for financial reporting purposes amounts to $5,000. Warranty deductions per the tax return amount to $2,000. (b) Gross profit on construction contracts using the percentage-of-completion method for book purposes amounts to $92,000. Gross profit on construction contracts for tax purposes amounts to $62,000. (c) Depreciation of property, plant, and equipment for financial reporting purposes amounts to $60,000. Depreciation of these assets amounts to $80,000 for the tax return. (d) A $3,500 fine paid for violation of pollution laws was deducted in computing pretax financial income. (e) Interest revenue earned on an investment in tax-exempt municipal bonds amounts to $1,400. 4. Taxable income is expected for the next few years. a. Prepare the journal entry to record income tax expense, deferred taxes, and income taxes payable for 2012. b. Draft the income tax expense section of the income statement, beginning with “Income before income taxes”

the condensed financial statements of westward corporation for 2009 478918

FINAL EXAM: ACC/400

K. Smith

The condensed financial statements of Westward Corporation for 2009 and 2008 are presented below.

Westward Corporation Westward Corporation

Balance Sheet Income Statement

December 31, 2009 For the Year Ended December 31, 2009

Assets Revenues $2,000,000

Current assets Expenses

Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,080,000

investments $ 30,000 Selling and administrative

Accounts receivable 70,000 expenses 495,000

Inventories 120,000 Interest expense 30,000

Total current assets 220,000 Total expenses 1,605,000

Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 395,000

equipment (net) 780,000 Income tax expense 140,000

Total assets $1,000,000 Net income $ 255,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities $ 80,000

Long-term liabilities 300,000

Common stockholders’ equity 620,000

Total liabilities and

stockholders’ equity $1,000,000

Westward Corporation Westward Corporation

Balance Sheet Income Statement

December 31, 2008 For the Year Ended December 31, 2008

Assets Revenues $2,500,000

Current assets Expenses

Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,750,000

investments $ 40,000 Selling and administrative

Accounts receivable 90,000 expenses 500,000

Inventories 150,000 Interest expense 30,000

Total current assets 280,000 Total expenses 2,280,000

Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 220,000

equipment (net) 800,000 Income tax expense 77,000

Total assets $1,080,000 Net income $ 143,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities $ 140,000

Long-term liabilities 320,000

Common stockholders’ equity 620,000

Total liabilities and

stockholders’ equity $1,080,000

Select data from fiscal year 2007:

Inventory: $100,000

Total assets: $900,000

Stockholders’ Equity: $540,000

Instructions

  1. Compute the following listed ratios for 2009 and 2008 showing supporting calculations. (5.2 points)
    1. Current ratio
    2. Debt to total Assets
    3. Times interest earned
    4. Inventory turnover
    5. Profit margin ratio
    6. Return on common stockholders’ equity
    7. Return on assets
  1. Perform horizontal and vertical analysis on Westward’s financial statements, show your results. (3.0 points)
  1. Assess the financial performance of Westward, given the analysis tools used in questions 1 and 2 above. (5.3 points)
  1. If the company wanted to perform industry comparison analysis, what references would you recommend it use? (1.5 points)

Attachments:

prepare answers for the case study 3 30 page 95 from the textbook financial accounti 480181

Assignment Instructions
Prepare answers for the case study 3.30 (Page 95) from the textbook: Financial Accounting Theory Edition 3 (Craig Deegan)
Required:
Critically analyze and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for the case study. Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your opinion?)(1000 words).

Document Preview:

Assignment Instructions Prepare answers for the case study 3.30 (Page 95) from the textbook: Financial Accounting Theory Edition 3 (Craig Deegan) Required: Critically analyze and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for the case study. Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your opinion?)(1000 words).

Attachments:

writing assignments must not exceed the word counts indicated 481924

RESEARCH ESSAY INFORMATION Your research essay must be submitted at the beginning of your seminar in week 10. Week 10 commences Monday 27 January at partner locations. Penalties will apply for late submission. The following matters should be given particular attention: 1. Writing assignments must not exceed the word counts indicated. Double space your pages, use a 12-pt Times New Roman font, use 2 cm margins on all four sides of your page. 2. Your essay must include an abstract/synopsis, introduction, essay body that clearly addresses the problem areas, a conclusion and a properly referenced bibliography. (refer to the research essay marking rubric for further guidance) 3. Evidence of extensive research beyond the prescribed text is required. Ensure these are referenced appropriately in your bibliography. Refer to the statement regarding plagiarism. 4. NO extensions will be granted unless supported by appropriate documentation prior to the due date. 5. This assignment must be handed in for successful completion of the course and will count 20 marks towards the final mark. 6. The word count for the research essay is 3000 words. Please refer to the Research Essay Marking Rubric for the specific allocation of word count for each specific section of your research essay (refer point 2 above). 7. Points (fractional marks) have also been allocated to each specific section of your research essay. 8. The research essay is to be conducted in groups of two. Students do not have the option to extend or reduce the size of the group. If the class has an odd number of students then one student must undertake the assignment on their own. RESEARCH ESSAY TOPIC “The degree to which accounting ‘messages’ contained in financial reports are understood and convey the exact meanings which were intended by their senders seems a natural issue of interest. … A fundamental issue in such research is whether expressions of agreement or disagreement with an intended message by sender and receiver do, in fact, lead to distortions in the intended decisions the messages were designed to induce.” Adelberg, A. H., 1979, ‘Methodology for Measuring the Understandability of Financial Report Messages’, Journal of Accounting Research, Vol. 7, No. 2, Autumn 1979, pp. 565-592. 1. With reference to the research describe what you understand by understandability. 2. Discuss understandability in the context of the present IASB framework. 3. Select a company from the Australian Securities Exchange website and download the 2013 annual report. Evaluate how the selected standard affects the understandability of the annual report. 4. Select a standard from the IASB and analyse how it contributes and/or detracts from the decision usefulness of the selected annual report. TUTOR ENGAGEMENT 1. Week 5 – Tutor to advise students just before the test that the research essay is available and over the coming week they should think about forming groups of 2. 2. Week 6 – EMPHASISE TO STUDENTS TO BEGIN THE WORK EARLY. All students to form groups of two. A discussion of the ASX sectors to take place. Students should discuss the selection of a sector and company that interests them. Tutor to record the groups. No groups are to have the same company. Banks are not allowed as they have particular problems. Over the week groups should select a company. 3. Week 7 – Groups are to advise the tutor of the company selected. Tutor to record the company selected by each group ensuring no group has the same company. A discussion of appropriate standards for each sector to take place. Over the week groups should select a standard relevant to the company and sector. Within each sector groups must choose different standards. 4. Week 8 – Tutor to record standards chosen by groups and ensure compliance with the requirement of (2) above. Tutor should stress the importance to groups of beginning the work early and following the marking rubric. ESSAY DUE WEEK 10

prepare answers to these two case studies from the set text 482052

prepare answers to these two case studies from the set text:

3.30

7.17

Required:

Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for each of the case studies.

Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your

opinion?) (1000 words each).

Document Preview:

Q- 7.7) Would managers who have negotiated debt contracts with accounting based covenants based around “Rolling GAAP” be relatively more likely to lobby an accounting standard –setter about a proposed accounting standard than would a manager from a firm who has negotiated accounting based debt covenants that use ‘frozen GAAP’? WHY? Read accounting headline 7.7 and adopting a positive accounting theory perspective consider the following issues If a new accounting standard impact on profits, should this impact on the value of the firm, and if so, why? Will the imposition of a particular accounting method have implication for the efficiency of the organization? Q -3.30) READ accounting headline 3.9 and using a particular theory of regulation (choose the most appropriate one) explain what factors might be motivating the then president Jacque chirac to lobby against the accounting standards in question Assignment Instructions prepare answers to these two case studies from the set text: 3.30 7.17 Required: Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for each of the case studies. Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your opinion?) (1000 words each). ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for and against for each of the case s 482062

prepare answers to these two case studies from the set text:
3.30
7.17
Required:
Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for each of the case studies.
Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your
opinion?)

Document Preview:

Q- 7.7) Would managers who have negotiated debt contracts with accounting based covenants based around “Rolling GAAP” be relatively more likely to lobby an accounting standard –setter about a proposed accounting standard than would a manager from a firm who has negotiated accounting based debt covenants that use ‘frozen GAAP’? WHY? Read accounting headline 7.7 and adopting a positive accounting theory perspective consider the following issues If a new accounting standard impact on profits, should this impact on the value of the firm, and if so, why? Will the imposition of a particular accounting method have implication for the efficiency of the organization? Q -3.30) READ accounting headline 3.9 and using a particular theory of regulation (choose the most appropriate one) explain what factors might be motivating the then president Jacque chirac to lobby against the accounting standards in question Assignment Instructions prepare answers to these two case studies from the set text: 3.30 7.17 Required: Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for each of the case studies. Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your opinion?) (1000 words each). ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

steelcase inc is one of the largest manufacturers of office furniture in the united 482265

)Steelcase Inc. is one of the largest manufacturers of office furniture in the United States.In Grand Rapids, Michigan, it produces filing cabinets in two departments: Fabrication and Trim Assembly.Assume the following information for the Fabrication Department:

Steel per filing cabinet

50 pounds

Direct labor per filing cabinet

18 minutes

Supervisor salaries

$130,000 per month

Depreciation

$20,000 per month

Direct labor rate

$16 per hour

Steel Cost

$1.25 per pound

Prepare a flexible budget for 12,000, 15,000, and 18,000 filing cabinets for the month of October 2008, similar to Exhibit 5, assuming that inventories are not significant.

3f plc manufactures an executive office chair which has proved to be very popular in 482537

3F PLC manufactures an executive office chair, which has proved to be very popular in the ADDIS market. The management team is considering the company’s operating plan for the forthcoming year and has asked for your assistance in evaluating a number of scenarios. The budgeted selling price for each chair is Birr 200, the variable cost per unit is Birr 120 and the total expected fixed costs are Birr 8,000,000.

Requirement

(i) Determine the breakeven point in units and sales revenue.

(ii) Determine the operating profit earned, if 200,000 chairs are sold in the forthcoming year.

(iii) If 200,000 chairs are sold in the forthcoming year, by what percentage could the variable costs per unit increase before the company would generate an operating loss.

(iv) The company has the option to produce a second product throughout the forthcoming year. This second product, a supreme office chair, would have a selling price of Birr 300 and variable costs per unit of Birr 140. It is expected that producing a second product would increase the total fixed costs of the business to Birr 12,000,000. It is planned that sales of the supreme chair will make up 35% of the mix of total sales.

matthew kelly and tammy each own one third of the stock of avis and best 467728

Avis’s taxable income for the year is $300,000 and Best’s taxable income for the year is $425,000. For each of the scenarios provided, (a) state if a control group has been created and, if so, define the controlled and (b) compute the combined tax liability of the two corporations. Be sure to show your work in order to get full credit.
Scenarios:

  1. Matthew, Kelly, and Tammy each own one-third of the stock of Avis and Best.
  2. Matthew, Kelly, and Tammy each own one-third of the stock of Avis and Matthew and Joshua each own 50 percent

of the stock of Best.
3. Avis owns 85 percent of Best’s stock on the last day of the year. Avis and Best file separate (as opposed to
consolidated) tax returns.

Document Preview:

Avis’s taxable income for the year is $300,000 and Best’s taxable income for the year is $425,000. For each of the scenarios provided, (a) state if a control group has been created and, if so, define the controlled and (b) compute the combined tax liability of the two corporations. Be sure to show your work in order to get full credit. Scenarios: Matthew, Kelly, and Tammy each own one-third of the stock of Avis and Best. Matthew, Kelly, and Tammy each own one-third of the stock of Avis and Matthew and Joshua each own 50 percent of the stock of Best. 3. Avis owns 85 percent of Best’s stock on the last day of the year. Avis and Best file separate (as opposed to consolidated) tax returns.

Attachments:

1065 return of partnership income 467744

Form 1065

Department of the Treasury

Internal Revenue Service

U.S. Return of Partnership Income

For calendar year 2011, or tax year beginning , 2011, ending , 20 .

? See separate instructions.

OMB No. 1545-0099

2011

Print

or

type.

Name of partnership

Number, street, and room or suite no. If a P.O. box, see the instructions.

City or town, state, and ZIP code

A Principal business activity

B Principal product or service

C Business code number

D Employer identification number

E Date business started

F Total assets (see the

instructions)

$

G Check applicable boxes: (1) Initial return (2) Final return (3) Name change (4) Address change (5) Amended return

(6) Technical termination – also check (1) or (2)

H Check accounting method: (1) Cash (2) Accrual (3) Other (specify) ?

I Number of Schedules K-1. Attach one for each person who was a partner at any time during the tax year ?

J Check if Schedules C and M-3 are attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Caution. Include only trade or business income and expenses on lines 1a through 22 below. See the instructions for more information.

Income

1a Merchant card and third-party payments (including amounts

reported on Form(s) 1099-K). For 2011, enter -0- . . . . 1a

b Gross receipts or sales not reported on line 1a (see instructions) 1b

c Total. Add lines 1a and 1b . . . . . . . . . . . 1c

d Returns and allowances plus any other adjustments to line 1a

(see instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1d

e Subtract line 1d from line 1c . . . . . . . . . . . 1e

2 Cost of goods sold (attach Form 1125-A) . . . . . . 2

3 Gross profit. Subtract line 2 from line 1e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

4 Ordinary income (loss) from other partnerships, estates, and trusts (attach statement) . . 4

5 Net farm profit (loss) (attach Schedule F (Form 1040)) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

6 Net gain (loss) from Form 4797, Part II, line 17 (attach Form 4797) . . . . . . . . 6

7 Other income (loss) (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

8 Total income (loss). Combine lines 3 through 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Deductions (see the instructions for limitations)

9 Salaries and wages (other than to partners) (less employment credits) . . . . . . . 9

10 Guaranteed payments to partners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

11 Repairs and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

12 Bad debts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

13 Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

14 Taxes and licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

15 Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

16a Depreciation (if required, attach Form 4562) . . . . . . 16a

b Less depreciation reported on Form 1125-A and elsewhere on return 16b 16c

17 Depletion (Do not deduct oil and gas depletion.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

18 Retirement plans, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

19 Employee benefit programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

20 Other deductions (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

21 Total deductions. Add the amounts shown in the far right column for lines 9 through 20 . 21

22 Ordinary business income (loss). Subtract line 21 from line 8 . . . . . . . . . 22

Sign

Here

Under penalties of perjury, I declare that I have examined this return, including accompanying schedules and statements, and to the best of my

knowledge and belief, it is true, correct, and complete. Declaration of preparer (other than general partner or limited liability company member manager)

is based on all information of which preparer has any knowledge.

May the IRS discuss this return with the

preparer shown below (see

instructions)? Yes No

?

Signature of general partner or limited liability company member manager

?

Date

Paid

Preparer

Use Only

Print/Type preparer’s name Preparer’s signature Date

Check if

self- employed

PTIN

Firm’s name ?

Firm’s address ?

Firm’s EIN ?

Phone no.

For Paperwork Reduction Act Notice, see separate instructions. Cat. No. 11390Z Form 1065 (2011)

Form 1065 (2011) Page 2

Schedule B Other Information

1 What type of entity is filing this return? Check the applicable box: Yes No

a Domestic general partnership b Domestic limited partnership

c Domestic limited liability company d Domestic limited liability partnership

e Foreign partnership f Other ?

2 At any time during the tax year, was any partner in the partnership a disregarded entity, a partnership (including

an entity treated as a partnership), a trust, an S corporation, an estate (other than an estate of a deceased partner),

or a nominee or similar person? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 At the end of the tax year:

a Did any foreign or domestic corporation, partnership (including any entity treated as a partnership), trust, or

tax-exempt organization, or any foreign government own, directly or indirectly, an interest of 50% or more in the

profit, loss, or capital of the partnership? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” attach

Schedule B-1, Information on Partners Owning 50% or More of the Partnership . . . . . . . . . . .

b Did any individual or estate own, directly or indirectly, an interest of 50% or more in the profit, loss, or capital of

the partnership? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” attach Schedule B-1, Information

on Partners Owning 50% or More of the Partnership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 At the end of the tax year, did the partnership:

a Own directly 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total voting power of all classes of

stock entitled to vote of any foreign or domestic corporation? For rules of constructive ownership, see

instructions. If “Yes,” complete (i) through (iv) below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(i) Name of Corporation (ii) Employer Identification

Number (if any)

(iii) Country of

Incorporation

(iv) Percentage

Owned in Voting Stock

b Own directly an interest of 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, an interest of 50% or more in the profit, loss,

or capital in any foreign or domestic partnership (including an entity treated as a partnership) or in the beneficial

interest of a trust? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” complete (i) through (v) below . .

(i) Name of Entity

(ii) Employer

Identification

Number (if any)

(iii) Type of

Entity

(iv) Country of

Organization

(v) Maximum

Percentage Owned in

Profit, Loss, or Capital

Form 1065 (2011)

Form 1065 (2011) Page 3

Yes No

5 Did the partnership file Form 8893, Election of Partnership Level Tax Treatment, or an election statement under

section 6231(a)(1)(B)(ii) for partnership-level tax treatment, that is in effect for this tax year? See Form 8893 for

more details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Does the partnership satisfy all four of the following conditions?

a The partnership’s total receipts for the tax year were less than $250,000.

b The partnership’s total assets at the end of the tax year were less than $1 million.

c Schedules K-1 are filed with the return and furnished to the partners on or before the due date (including

extensions) for the partnership return.

d The partnership is not filing and is not required to file Schedule M-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If “Yes,” the partnership is not required to complete Schedules L, M-1, and M-2; Item F on page 1 of Form 1065;

or Item L on Schedule K-1.

7 Is this partnership a publicly traded partnership as defined in section 469(k)(2)? . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 During the tax year, did the partnership have any debt that was cancelled, was forgiven, or had the terms

modified so as to reduce the principal amount of the debt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Has this partnership filed, or is it required to file, Form 8918, Material Advisor Disclosure Statement, to provide

information on any reportable transaction? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 At any time during calendar year 2011, did the partnership have an interest in or a signature or other authority over

a financial account in a foreign country (such as a bank account, securities account, or other financial account)?

See the instructions for exceptions and filing requirements for Form TD F 90-22.1, Report of Foreign Bank and

Financial Accounts. If “Yes,” enter the name of the foreign country. ?

11 At any time during the tax year, did the partnership receive a distribution from, or was it the grantor of, or

transferor to, a foreign trust? If “Yes,” the partnership may have to file Form 3520, Annual Return To Report

Transactions With Foreign Trusts and Receipt of Certain Foreign Gifts. See instructions . . . . . . . . .

12a Is the partnership making, or had it previously made (and not revoked), a section 754 election? . . . . . .

See instructions for details regarding a section 754 election.

b Did the partnership make for this tax year an optional basis adjustment under section 743(b) or 734(b)? If “Yes,”

attach a statement showing the computation and allocation of the basis adjustment. See instructions . . . .

c Is the partnership required to adjust the basis of partnership assets under section 743(b) or 734(b) because of a

substantial built-in loss (as defined under section 743(d)) or substantial basis reduction (as defined under section

734(d))? If “Yes,” attach a statement showing the computation and allocation of the basis adjustment. See instructions.

13 Check this box if, during the current or prior tax year, the partnership distributed any property received in a

like-kind exchange or contributed such property to another entity (other than disregarded entities

wholly-owned by the partnership throughout the tax year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

14 At any time during the tax year, did the partnership distribute to any partner a tenancy-in-common or other

undivided interest in partnership property? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 If the partnership is required to file Form 8858, Information Return of U.S. Persons With Respect To Foreign

Disregarded Entities, enter the number of Forms 8858 attached. See instructions ?

16 Does the partnership have any foreign partners? If “Yes,” enter the number of Forms 8805, Foreign Partner’s

Information Statement of Section 1446 Withholding Tax, filed for this partnership. ?

17 Enter the number of Forms 8865, Return of U.S. Persons With Respect to Certain Foreign Partnerships, attached

to this return. ?

18 a Did you make any payments in 2011 that would require you to file Form(s) 1099? See instructions . . . . .

b If “Yes,” did you or will you file all required Form(s) 1099? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 Enter the number of Form(s) 5471, Information Return of U.S. Persons With Respect To Certain Foreign

Corporations, attached to this return. ?

Designation of Tax Matters Partner (see instructions)

Enter below the general partner designated as the tax matters partner (TMP) for the tax year of this return:

Name of

designated

TMP

?

Identifying

number of TMP

?

If the TMP is an

entity, name

of TMP representative

?Phone number

of TMP

?

Address of

designated

TMP ?

Form 1065 (2011)

Form 1065 (2011) Page 4

Schedule K Partners’ Distributive Share Items Total amount

Income (Loss)

1 Ordinary business income (loss) (page 1, line 22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 Net rental real estate income (loss) (attach Form 8825) . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3a Other gross rental income (loss) . . . . . . . . 3a

b Expenses from other rental activities (attach statement) 3b

c Other net rental income (loss). Subtract line 3b from line 3a . . . . . . . . . 3c

4 Guaranteed payments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

5 Interest income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

6 Dividends: a Ordinary dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6a

b Qualified dividends . . . . . . 6b

7 Royalties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

8 Net short-term capital gain (loss) (attach Schedule D (Form 1065)) . . . . . . . 8

9 a Net long-term capital gain (loss) (attach Schedule D (Form 1065)) . . . . . . . 9a

b Collectibles (28%) gain (loss) . . . . . . . . . 9b

c Unrecaptured section 1250 gain (attach statement) . . 9c

10 Net section 1231 gain (loss) (attach Form 4797) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

11 Other income (loss) (see instructions) Type ? 11

Deductions

12 Section 179 deduction (attach Form 4562) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

13a Contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13a

b Investment interest expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13b

c Section 59(e)(2) expenditures: (1) Type ? (2) Amount ? 13c(2)

d Other deductions (see instructions) Type ? 13d

Self-

Employment

14a Net earnings (loss) from self-employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14a

b Gross farming or fishing income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14b

c Gross nonfarm income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14c

Credits

15a Low-income housing credit (section 42(j)(5)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15a

b Low-income housing credit (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15b

c Qualified rehabilitation expenditures (rental real estate) (attach Form 3468) . . . . 15c

d Other rental real estate credits (see instructions) Type ? 15d

e Other rental credits (see instructions) Type ? 15e

f Other credits (see instructions) Type ? 15f

Foreign Transactions

16a Name of country or U.S. possession ?

b Gross income from all sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16b

c Gross income sourced at partner level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16c

Foreign gross income sourced at partnership level

d Passive category ? e General category ? f Other ? 16f

Deductions allocated and apportioned at partner level

g Interest expense ? h Other . . . . . . . . . . ? 16h

Deductions allocated and apportioned at partnership level to foreign source income

i Passive category ? j General category ? k Other ? 16k

l Total foreign taxes (check one): ? Paid Accrued . . . . . . . . 16l

m Reduction in taxes available for credit (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . 16m

n Other foreign tax information (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alternative

Minimum Tax

(AMT) Items

17a Post-1986 depreciation adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17a

b Adjusted gain or loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17b

c Depletion (other than oil and gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17c

d Oil, gas, and geothermal properties—gross income . . . . . . . . . . . . 17d

e Oil, gas, and geothermal properties—deductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17e

f Other AMT items (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17f

Other Information

18a Tax-exempt interest income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18a

b Other tax-exempt income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18b

c Nondeductible expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18c

19a Distributions of cash and marketable securities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19a

b Distributions of other property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19b

20a Investment income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20a

b Investment expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20b

c Other items and amounts (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Form 1065 (2011)

Form 1065 (2011) Page 5

Analysis of Net Income (Loss)

1 Net income (loss). Combine Schedule K, lines 1 through 11. From the result, subtract the sum of

Schedule K, lines 12 through 13d, and 16l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 Analysis by

partner type:

(i) Corporate

(ii) Individual

(active)

(iii) Individual

(passive)

(iv) Partnership

(v) Exempt

organization

(vi)

Nominee/Other

a General partners

b Limited partners

Schedule L Balance Sheets per Books Beginning of tax year End of tax year

Assets (a) (b) (c) (d)

1 Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2a Trade notes and accounts receivable . . .

b Less allowance for bad debts . . . . .

3 Inventories . . . . . . . . . . .

4 U.S. government obligations . . . . .

5 Tax-exempt securities . . . . . . .

6 Other current assets (attach statement) . .

7a Loans to partners (or persons related to partners)

b Mortgage and real estate loans . . . .

8 Other investments (attach statement) . . .

9a Buildings and other depreciable assets . .

b Less accumulated depreciation . . . .

10a Depletable assets . . . . . . . . .

b Less accumulated depletion . . . . .

11 Land (net of any amortization) . . . . .

12a Intangible assets (amortizable only) . . .

b Less accumulated amortization . . . .

13 Other assets (attach statement) . . . .

14 Total assets . . . . . . . . . . .

Liabilities and Capital

15 Accounts payable . . . . . . . . .

16 Mortgages, notes, bonds payable in less than 1 year

17 Other current liabilities (attach statement) .

18 All nonrecourse loans . . . . . . . .

19a Loans from partners (or persons related to partners)

b Mortgages, notes, bonds payable in 1 year or more

20 Other liabilities (attach statement) . . . .

21 Partners’ capital accounts . . . . . .

22 Total liabilities and capital . . . . . .

Schedule M-1 Reconciliation of Income (Loss) per Books With Income (Loss) per Return

Note. Schedule M-3 may be required instead of Schedule M-1 (see instructions).

1 Net income (loss) per books . . . .

2

Income included on Schedule K, lines 1, 2, 3c,

5, 6a, 7, 8, 9a, 10, and 11, not recorded on

books this year (itemize):

3 Guaranteed payments (other than

health insurance) . . . . . . .

4

Expenses recorded on books this year

not included on Schedule K, lines 1

through 13d, and 16l (itemize):

a Depreciation $

b Travel and entertainment $

5 Add lines 1 through 4 . . . . . .

6

Income recorded on books this year not included

on Schedule K, lines 1 through 11 (itemize):

a Tax-exempt interest $

7

Deductions included on Schedule K, lines

1 through 13d, and 16l, not charged

against book income this year (itemize):

a Depreciation $

8 Add lines 6 and 7 . . . . . . . .

9 Income (loss) (Analysis of Net Income

(Loss), line 1). Subtract line 8 from line 5 .

Schedule M-2 Analysis of Partners’ Capital Accounts

1 Balance at beginning of year . . .

2 Capital contributed: a Cash . . .

b Property . .

3 Net income (loss) per books . . . .

4 Other increases (itemize):

5 Add lines 1 through 4 . . . . . .

6 Distributions: a Cash . . . . . .

b Property . . . . .

7 Other decreases (itemize):

8 Add lines 6 and 7 . . . . . . . .

9 Balance at end of year. Subtract line 8 from line 5

Form 1065 (2011)

Attachments:

managerial account 4 managers 467780

merlin ic/ a whole sale inc has been operation few months. this companyproduct is sink; mirror and vanity. budget sale by product and total for the month/ sale-240,00, variable exp 72,000/ contribite magin is 168,000./ mirror sale=100,000; varable exp=80,000/ contribute margin is 20,000/ vanity sale is 160;00; variable expe=88,000, contribite margin is 72,000/ total sale=500,000/ total variable exp=240,00/ total contibute margin = 260;000 fix exp=223,00/ net operation =36,000/ question 1. if variable expenes increase as percent of sale then the contrubition margin will decrease as perent of sale/ is this true or fales and why.. From this data net operation income is at 36,000 4 the month and breakeven sale at 430,00. Say the actual sale 4 the month total 500,000 as plan. Actual sale by product are sink=160,000; mirror is 200,000 and vanity is 140,000. i need to prepare a income statement 4 the month on actual sale. also need to show the income statement. question 2. i need to know the breakeven point in sale 4 the month on this data./ question 3.the company net sale 4 the month is 500,000, the owner of the company is shock of the result./ the breakeven point in sale are different and why / can u please answer these question and give me the solution to the answer please dumb jac 2022567021

managerial account 4 managers 467782

Terri hall inc/ this company a fashion store that sells sheer elegences. this owner ms terri/ wants to adapt the cost volumme profit -cvp terri hall inc prepare anaysis/ Sale-price per stocking 2.00/ Varabl expenes per sale of stocking 80 cents/ contribut margin= 1.20 cents/ Expeneses per yr=12,000/ equpiment deperication=3,000/sale=30,000/ Admin=15,000 total= 60,000/ qiestion1-how many pair of stocking must be sold to breakeven/question 2.I need to prepare a cvp from pair up to 70,000 pair of stocking sold each yr/ and what is the breakeven point/ question 3 how many pair of stocking must be sold to earn 9,000 target profit 4 the year/ question 4. terri hall wants to hire i full time staff and 1 partime staff. by hiring fulltime and partime staff at salary pf 8,000 ys; she think it will bring 20;000 in sale each yr should ms terri hall hire staff or not and why teri hall inc data Sale=125.000/ Varable expe =50.000/ contribute margin = 75,000/ fix expenes = 60;000/ noi net operation income = 15.000question 4 what is the store degree of operation levarage; this owner think with this plan; sale will increase 20 percent/ question 5. what will be the percent of operation income/ can u answer these question 4 me and give me the solution please jacdumb 2022567021

managarial account 4 managers 467784

Durham inc this company use job costing system; the following took place last year/ a. raw material require 4 use in production; 40,000 80 percent direct and 20 percent indirect/ b. factory cost incurred= 14,600/ c. deprecication on plant and equpiment=28,00 3/4 of deperication relate to factory equipment/ d. Cost 4 salary and wages direct labor=40,00 indirect 18,000 sale commision = 25,00/ e. insurance cost =3,000/ f. mis expe= 18.000/g overhead was apply to production on the business of 15 percent of direct labor cost/ h. goods that cost =130;00 were transefer to warehose/i goods that cost 120,00 to manfacture were sold 4 200,000/ question 1. i need to determine the overhead for the year/ question 2 i need to prepare a income statement 4 the year/ can u assit me with these question please jac dumb 2022567021

managerial account 4 managers 467790

Law firm inc/ this small law firm has 10 partners and 10 support partner. this firm use a job orde costing system to accumlate change to each department they have 2 dept/ 1. reserach dept and 2. document dept/ this firm prorate to charge department / spo dept can charge clients/ 1. Dept/ reserch/ document- resrech hours 20,000/ 2. direct attorney hrs =9,000/ 3. material and suplly= 10;0004. direct attorney cost=430,00/ 4. direct overhead cost=700,000/ Litagtion/ 1. reserch hr=0 2. direct attorney hrs= 16,000/ 3. material and supply- 5000/ 4. direct attorney cost= 800.000/ 45 direct overheadcost=320,00/ the cost charge to each client are made up of material and supply needs; direct attorney cost; cost income and amount of overhead for each deptDept-record hrs 18rs/ ligation =0/ 2. direct attorney hrs=94hr/ ligation= 42hrs/ material and supply =30hrs for ligation =30hrs/ Direct attorney cost is 410/ ligation direct cost is 2,100/ question 1. compare the overhead rate using the ist year/ question 2. would would be the total cost charge/ question 3.At the end of the yr the law firm record reveal actual operation data during the year/ Dept-research hrs-23,00, directattorney hrs-8,000, material and supply =19,000, direct attorney hrs =400,00. dept overhead cost=770.00/ ligation-research hrs=0; direct attorney hrs=15,00; material and supply=6,00; direct attorney cost=275;00; direct overhead cost-300,000 i need to determine the amount in each dept for the yrs / can u assit me jacdumb

managerial account 4 managers 467792

Hertige inc/ this company provide garden design; lanscape service. the company use job order company system to track cost of its landscape progect/. the data below provide 3 landscape project that were in process in the month of may/ William-design hrs 200/ direct material 4,800/ direct labor 2,400/ Chandler- design hrs=80; direct matariel=1,800; direct labor=1,000/ Smith- design hrs=120; direct material=3,600 direct labor=1,500/ overhead unit was 16;00 in may. base on the hrs of design hrs relate to the cost of garden design. The overhead rate is 45 dollar per design hrs. the william and chandler project was completed in may/ yet smith was not completed in may/ question 1.compare the amount of overhead cost that would have been apply to each project durning the month of may./ question 2. Determine the cost of goods 4 the month of may/ question 3 what is the accumalate cost of the work in process at the end of month/ question 4/ i need to determined the overhead in may/ can u assit me jacdumb 2022567021

what should albert henry do to avoid widening the pension fund gap 468444

Albert Henri is the fixed-income manager of a large Canadian pension fund. The present value of the pension fund’s portfolio of assets is CAD 4 billion while the expected present value of the fund’s liabilities is CAD 5 billion. The respective modified durations are 8.254 and 6.825 years. The fund currently has an actuarial deficit (assets

The most liquid interest rate futures contract has a present value of CAD 68,336 and a duration of 2.1468 years. Analyzing both scenarios separately, what should Albert Henry do to avoid widening the pension fund gap? Choose the best option.

First Scenario Second Scenario

A. Do nothing. Buy 7,559 contracts.

B. Do nothing. Sell 7,559 contracts.

C. Buy 7,559 contracts. Do nothing.

D. Do nothing. Do nothing.

variance analysis 468784

the jinwa corporation sells two brands of wine glasses: Plain and Chic. jinwa provides the following information for sales in the month of June 2009:

Static -budget total contribution margin $5,600

Budgeted units to be sold of all glasses 2,000 units

Budgeted contribution margin per unit of Plain $2 per unit

Budgeted contribution margin per unit of Chic $6 per unit

Total Sales-quantity variance $1400 U

Actual sales-mix % of Plain 60%

All variances are to be computed in contribution -margin terms

Required:

1. Calculate the sales-quantity variance for each product for june 2009

2. Calculate the individual-product and total sales mix variances for june 2009. Calculate the individual product and total sales volume variances for June 2009

taxation law assignment 468792

there are 5 scenarios in the assignment and each scenario has 2 or 3 issues that should be responded in respect to that issues.

Document Preview:

? Business School BULAW 5916 TAXATION LAW & PRACTICE ASSIGNMENT [Summer2014] ?? INSTRUCTIONS See the Instructions and Assessment Criteria in the Course Description and make sure you follow them! Please answer all parts of the question Attached to this document is a Checklist to be filled in by you and attached to your essay/assignment. Read this now before you start your research. If you have followed this checklist, there is a good chance you will do well. All work presented for assessment in this Unit must comply with the format outlined in the University’s Presentation of Academic Work publication, available from the bookshop or on-line at ? HYPERLINK “http://www.ballarat.edu.au/generalguide” ?www.ballarat.edu.au/generalguide?. All assignments must be accompanied by a signed official cover sheet (‘Plagiarism Declaration Form’), available at www.ballarat.edu.au/ard/business/student_info_webct.shtml and lodged as appropriate for your campus. You MUST reference in the body of the essay every time you use information from other people. This requires you to keep a track of where you are taking information from and then writing the reference up. You should use the Harvard/APA style; and use the University’s new Presentation of Academic Work. The Library’s website also has a citation style guide site. If you plagiarise (intentionally OR unintentionally) you will be given zero: see Regulation 6.1.1 for more details. Assignments must be 1,500 to 2,000 words. You will probably write more initially but you should then look to see if you are making your points directly and clearly. LAST DUE DATE: [Insert date due] If you need an extension you must ask for one BEFORE the due date (unless this is impossible), and you will goods grounds. The essay/assignment is worth 25% (ie 25 marks). Assignment John Jones runs a small practice providing accounting and taxation services to local businesses. During 2009/10 he billed fees of $35,000…

Attachments:

prepare the statement of financial position statement of profit or loss and other co 468823

Page 1 of 5 ACC222 EXTERNAL REPORTING Session 201390 ASSIGNMENT 2– STUDENT COPY IT IS IMPORTANT TO SHOW NECESSARY WORKINGS IN ALL QUESTIONS BELOW WHEN APPLICABLE. Question 1 [25 marks] Preparation of a statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income and a statement of financial position The summarised trial balance of Matthew Ltd, a manufacturing company, for the year ended 30 June 2013 is provided below: DR ($) CR ($) Sales revenue 5,000,000 Interest income 22,000 Sundry income 25,000 Change in inventory of work in progress 125,000 Change in inventory of finished goods 60,000 Raw materials used 2,200,000 Employee benefit expense 950,000 Depreciation expense 226,000 Amortisation – patent 25,000 Rental expense 70,000 Advertising expense 142,000 Insurance expense 45,000 Freight out expense 133,000 Doubtful debt expense 10,000 Interest expense 30,000 Other expenses 8,000 Income tax expense 320,000 Cash 4,000 Cash on deposit, on call 80,000 Trade debtors 495,000 Allowance for doubtful debts 18,000 Other debtors 27,000 Raw materials inventory, 30 June 2013 320,000 Finished goods inventory, 30 June 2013 385,000 Land 94,000 Buildings 220,000 Accumulated depreciation – land and buildings 52,000 Plant and equipment 1,380,000 Accumulated depreciation – plant and equipment 320,000 Patents 140,000 Accumulated amortisation – patent 50,000 Goodwill 620,000 Bank loans 92,000 Other loans 450,000 Trade creditors 452,000 Provision for employee benefits 120,000 Page 2 of 5 DR ($) CR ($) Income tax payable 35,000 Deferred tax liability 140,000 Retained earnings, 30 June 2012 245,000 Dividends paid 210,000 Share capital 1,178,000 8,259,000 8,259,000 Additional information: (a) $20,000 of bank loans is repayable within 1 year. (b) $90,000 of other loans is repayable within 1 year. (c) Matthew Ltd uses the single statement format for the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and presents an analysis of expenses by nature in the statement. Required: Prepare the statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of changes in equity of Matthew Ltd for the year ended 30 June 2013 in accordance with the requirements of AASB101. In preparing the above statements, use captions that a listed company is likely to use and provide any relevant workings and/or explanations where appropriate. Notes to the accounts are not required. MARKING GUIDE: Question 1 Max. marks allocated SPLOCI Line items provided on face of statement and title 8.5 Explanation 0.5 SFP Line items provided on face of statement and title 7.5 Explanation/workings 5 SCE Items provided on statement and title 2.5 Overall presentation 1 Total 25 Page 3 of 5 Question 2 [15 marks] Company formation – Issue by instalments, oversubscription, forfeiture and reissue Prime Ltd was incorporated on 28 December 2012 and the following events took place during the financial year ended 30 June 2013. 1 January Issued a prospectus inviting the public to subscribe for 1,000,000 ordinary shares of $5 each, with $3.00 is to be paid on application, $1.00 within one month of allotment and the balance is to be paid by 1 May. 1 February Applications closed with the share issue being oversubscribed by 200,000 shares. 15 February The directors allotted the 1,000,000 shares on a first come first served basis and returned the excess money to the unsuccessful applicants on the same date. 1 March All outstanding allotment monies were received. 1 May All monies were received for the final call except for the holders of 200,000 shares. 10 May The directors decided to forfeit the 200,000 shares of the defaulting shareholders. 20 May The forfeited shares were resold for $4.50 per share as fully paid. Share reissue costs amounted to $5,000. The defaulting shareholders are to bear all costs of the reissue and any surplus is to be refunded to them. Required: Provide the journal entries necessary to account for the above transactions and events for the year ended 30 June 2013. Show all relevant dates and narrations. MARKING GUIDE: Question 2 Max. marks allocated Journal entries 11.5 Dates 1.5 Narrations 1 Workings 1 Total 15 Page 4 of 5 Question 3 [20 marks] Recognition and measurement for intangible assets Optical Ltd, a diversified company, has been expanding its operations over the past decade. The company has been involved in the following activities over the past year: (a) Acquisition of a licence to import the ePhone brand of mobile phone. The licence had an acquisition cost of $250,000, and the company spent a further $20,000 for promotion of the new phone. Legal fees for acquisition of the licence amounted to $15,000. While the licence is for ten year period, the company estimates the mobile phone will produce net cash flows for a five-year period, with net cash flows decreasing steadily over that period. (b) Research and development activities for a new electronic switching gear that the company believes will be suitable for use in a wide variety of applications and products. Costs incurred during the year comprised of the following: $ Staff salaries for obtaining knowledge of possible electronic configurations for the switching gear 30,000 Design and construction of a pre-production prototype 40,000 Outside consultant’s fees: – relating to obtaining knowledge of possible configurations – relating to the pre-production prototype 14,000 16,000 General administrative overhead expenses 10,000 Legal and professional fees to register a patent over the switching gear design 25,000 The company believes the switching gear will have a potential life of ten years. (c) Development of a customer list database of the company’s customers. Due to its diversified operations, and to approaches by a number of direct marketing companies, Optical Ltd compiled a database of its own customers during the year. The database contains details such as customer banes, addresses, telephone and email contact details, and annual dollar amount and product type of sales to each customer. The company believes it could derive income from the sale of this customer list to the direct marketing companies that have already approached it and also to other marketing companies. The salary costs of the sales department staff involved in developing the database amounted to $27,500, and Optical Ltd conservatively estimates the value of the customer list at $100,000. Required: (1) Discuss which of the above costs can be recognised as intangible assets in Optical Ltd’s statement of financial position in accordance with AASB138. Provide relevant paragraph numbers from the standard to support your answer. (2) For any of the costs above that may be recognised as an intangible asset, discuss any issues of relevance to their measurement after initial recognition. MARKING GUIDE: Question 3 Max. marks allocated (a) 7 (b) 10 (c) 3 Total 20 Page 5 of 5 Question 4 [20 marks] Revaluation of depreciable assets Yoko Ltd acquired a machine on 1 July 2011 at a cost of $240,000. At the date of acquisition, Yoko Ltd’s directors determine to depreciate the machine on a straight-line basis over a period of six years. The company elects to adopt the revaluation model subsequent to acquisition. The directors estimated the fair values for the machine would be $190,000 and $165,000 for the years ended 30 June 2012 and 2013 respectively. There is no change in the originally estimated useful life for the machine. Assume a tax rate of 30%. Required: Prepare journal entries to account for the above transactions for the years ending 2012 and 2013. MARKING GUIDE: Question 4 Max. marks allocated Appropriate workings shown 4 Journal entries 15 Narrations 1 Total 20

Attachments:

business and corporation law assignment questions 468835

Assignment should be 1800-2000 words.

Oxford referencing.

according to the Australian law

Just over two years ago, Jane bought a rundown coffee shop business and the premises at which the business was carried on. Soon after buying the business and premises, she had the shop refitted. This was done by her husband, Edward, who runs a redecorating business. The cost of refitting the shop was $40,000. Jane did not pay this amount to Edward despite the fact that the original term orally agreed between them was that Jane would pay the full amount to Edward within a year. It was also orally agreed at the time that no interest would be payable on the debt. The coffee shop business has proved very successful. Six months ago, the shop next door to Jane’s was put on the market for sale. Jane saw this as a great opportunity to expand her business. She spoke to her bank manager about obtaining a loan to finance the purchase and redecoration of the adjoining shop. The bank manager was concerned that Jane had not yet paid her outstanding debt to Edward. Furthermore, if Jane did pay this debt, it seemed that she would not have quite enough capital to meet the bank’s lending rules. Jane explained this situation to Edward. She said she was very keen to buy the shop but she could only do so if he would accept $10,000 in full and final settlement of the outstanding debt. Edward agreed to this and they wrote their agreement on a sheet of paper and both signed it. Edward’s reason for agreeing to this arrangement was partly because he wanted to help his wife and partly because he assumed that she would hire him to redecorate the new shop. Jane produced the signed written agreement to her bank and, because of it, was able to get a bank loan and go ahead with the purchase of the shop next door. Jane then arranged for the shop to be redecorated but she did not engage Edward to do this. Instead, she hired Max who operates a decorating business across the road from Jane’s coffee shop business. Jane has paid Max $25,000 for redecorating the shop. Jane has since spent a lot of time socially with Max and has now declared her wish to end her marriage to Edward and start a new relationship with Max. Edward is outraged at Jane’s declaration and his first response has been to sue her for the $30,000 that he claims is outstanding from his refitting the coffee shop.

Attachments:

auditing 468855

Semester 3 2013-14

ASSIGNMENT

This assignment is to be completed in groups of three and comprises twenty per-cent of the

marks for this course. There are 4 parts to discuss.

Assessment Criteria:

Student work will generally be assessed in terms of the following criteria:

1. Effectiveness of communication – ie readability, legibility, grammar, spelling, neatness,

completeness and presentation will be a minimum threshold requirement for all written

work submitted for assessment.Work that is illegible or incomprehensible and does not

meet the minimum requirement will be awarded a fail grade.

2. Demonstrated understanding – This will be evidenced by the student’s ability to be

dialectical in the discussion of contentious issues.

3. Evidence of research – This will be evidenced by the references made to the statutes,

auditing standards, books, journal articles and inclusion of a bibliography.

Note:

1. All written work must conform with the University of Ballarat General Guide for the

Presentation of Academic Work.

2. For all written work students must ensure that they submit their own original work. Any

act of plagiarism will be severely penalised.

Plagiarism is presenting someone else work as your own and is a serious offence with serious

consequences. As set out in the University Regulation 6.1.1, students who are caught

plagiarising will, for a first offence, be given a zero mark for that task. A second offence will

result in a failing grade for the course(s) involved and any subsequent offence will be referred

to the Student Discipline Committee. Student must be aware of the University Regulation 6.1.1

Student Plagiarism, available at http://www.ballarat.edu.au/legislation/6.1.1-plagiarism. The

link to the library website for more information is:

http://www.ballarat.edu.au/library/assignment-and-research-help/referencing

Students must:

? fully reference the source(s) of all material, even if you have re-expressed the ideas,

facts or descriptions;

? acknowledge all direct quotations; and

? not submit work that has been researched and written by another person.

The Business School

BUACC3701: Auditing

Note – You will need to resource beyond the identified documents

PART A. (5 marks)

Auditor conservatism following audit failures

Stephan A. Fafatas

Williams School of Commerce, Economics and Politics,

Washington and Lee University, Lexington, Virginia, USA

Extract:

Findings – Empirical results indicate that auditor response to audit failure has

changed over time. Auditors implicated in audit failure events occurring in the post-

Enron and Sarbanes-Oxley period enforce more conservative accounting choices in

the year following the event. Specifically, clients of the implicated firm’s office

report a significant decline in discretionary accounting accruals relative to clients of

other auditors in the same city location. However, a significant change in client

discretionary accounting accruals is not found following audit failures that occurred

prior to 2001, the year of the Enron bankruptcy.

Under GAAP a company’s reported net income includes both an operating cash

flow component and a component related to accounting accrual adjustments. The

amount and timing of these accrual adjustments are subject to management’s

discretion over accounting policies

Auditor Conservatism after Enron

Dorothy A. Feldmann , William J. Read

Extract:

Corporate scandals and the resulting passage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act

(SOX) in 2002 significantly affected the auditing profession. The quality of

financial statement audits was called into questioned and the media and

regulators held audit firms responsible. Several studies found evidence of an

increase in the issuance of going-concern opinions after the passage of SOX

relative to earlier time periods (Geiger et al. 2005; Nogler 2008; Myers et al.

2008). Auditors, it appears, behave more conservatively when the profession

is in the headlines.

Discuss how the auditing profession behaved after the Enron collapse and the

introduction of the Sarbanes-Oxley legislation.

PART B. . (5 marks)

Financial crisis and the silence of the auditors

Prem Sikka

Accounting, Organisations and Society (2009)

Abstract:

Against the backdrop of the current financial crisis, this paper seeks to stimulate debates about

contemporary auditing practices. It notes that many financial enterprises have sought state

support within a short period of receiving unqualified audit opinion. Auditors collected large

amounts in audit and non-audit fees. The events raise questions about the value of company

audits, auditor independence and quality of audit work, economic incentives for good audits

and the knowledge base of auditors.

Extract

Accountants, as auditors, have cemented their status and privileges on the

basis of claims that their expertise enables them to mediate uncertainty and

construct independent, objective, true, and fair accounts of corporate affairs.

This expertise, it is claimed, enables markets, investors, employees, citizens,

and the state to limit and manage risks. Such claims, however, are precarious

as measures of revenues, costs, assets, liabilities, and profits are contested

technically as well as politically and also because capitalist economies are

inherently prone to crises (O’Connor, 1987). The claims of expertise are

frequently punctured by unexpected corporate collapses, frauds, and failures.

Such events fuel the suspicions that auditors lack the requisite independence,

expertise and incentives to construct the promised ‘true’ and ‘fair’ account of

corporate affairs.

Accounting firms have been accused of delivering ‘dodgy auditing’ Discuss

PART C. (3.5 marks)

None of the Big Four accounting firms is a single firm; rather, they are accounting networks.

What is an accounting network and what benefits are there for the big accounting firms?

Discuss and explain

PART D. (6.5 marks)

Extracted from Australian Government – The Treasury

Auditors are currently exposed to unlimited liability for professional default.

Auditors, and other professional groups have traditionally dealt with their unlimited liability

exposure for professional default through professional indemnity insurance. Professional

indemnity insurance insures against loss arising from professional services offered by the

insured professional.

Australia is currently experiencing a ‘hard insurance market’, that is, a market characterised

by tougher risk selection by insurers. The recent submissions by the two professional

accounting bodies to the ACCC indicate that the position in relation to the availability and

cost of professional indemnity insurance has deteriorated in the current ‘hard insurance

market’:

The backdrop to the CLERP 9 consideration of the issues relating to the professional liability

of auditors is the important role that the independent audit function performs in relation to

Australia’s corporate governance framework and the efficiency of the capital market.

The following policy options have been raised by the accounting profession for the purpose

of establishing an appropriate framework to address the profession’s concerns in relation to

the present system of auditor liability:

? The incorporation of auditors.

? The law of joint and several liability in relation to actions for negligence causing property

damage or purely economic loss and its replacement by proportionate liability.

? The capping of professional liability within the framework of State and Territory

Professional Standards legislation.

Discuss each of the aforementioned three points (i.e. could or should these changes be

made)

Attachments:

the business school buacc3701 financial management 468856

The Business School BUACC3701: Financial Management 2 Infinite period model with supernormal growth The Brown Company has a current dividend of $2 per share. The following are the expected annual growth rates for dividends. The required rate of return for the stock is 14%. Year 1-3: 25% Year 4-6: 20% Year 7-9: 15% Year 10 on: 9% ? Estimate the value of this stock. Part B (5 marks) In contrast to various discounted cash-flow techniques that attempt to estimate a specific value for a stock based on its estimated growth rates and its discount rate, the relative valuation techniques implicitly contend that it is possible to determine the value of an economic entity (i.e., the market, an industry, or a company) by comparing it to similar entities on the basis of several relative ratios that compare its stock price to relevant variables that effect a stock’s value, such as earnings, cash flow, book value and sales. Consider the following four approaches. 1. Earnings Multiplier Model Assume a stock has an expected dividend payout of 50%, a required rate of return of 12% and an expected growth rate for dividends of 9%. Current earnings are $2.00 per share and the expected growth rate for earnings is 9%. ? Calculate the earnings multiplier and stock price Briefly explain the following methods (for and against) 2. Price/Cash Flow Ratio 3. Price/Book Value Ratio 4. Price/Sales Ratio Part C (5 marks) Bent ltd has a bond issue that will mature to its $1000 par value in 12 years. It pays interest annually and has a coupon rate of 11%. a) Find the value of the bond if the required rate of return is ? 11% ? 15% ? 8% 3 b) Plot your finding on a set of required return (x-axis) and market value of bond (y-axis) c) Use your findings in parts a and b to discuss the relationship between the coupon interest rate on a bond and the required return and the market value of the bond relative to its par value. d) What possible reasons could cause the required rate to differ from the coupon interest rate Part D (13 marks) You are required to evaluate the risk and return of the following two assets – A and B individually and see how they might fit into a diversifiable portfolio. Equal halves would be shared between both assets if included in a portfolio Each asset’s risk can be assessed in two ways: in isolation and as part the firm’s diversified portfolio of assets. The risk-free rate is currently 5%. Return data for assets A and B, 2001-2010 are as follows Asset A Asset B Year Cash Value Cash Value flow Beginning Ending flow Beginning Ending 2001 1000 20000 22000 1500 20000 19000 2002 1500 22000 21000 1600 20000 19500 2003 1400 21000 24000 1700 20000 21000 2004 1700 24000 22000 1800 21000 21000 2005 1900 22000 23000 1900 21000 22000 2006 1600 23000 26000 2000 22000 23000 2007 1700 26000 25000 2100 23000 23000 2008 2000 25000 24000 2200 23000 24000 2009 2100 24000 27000 2300 24000 25000 2010 2200 27000 30000 2400 25000 25000 The market index is as follows: Market Index 2000 200.00 2001 227.00 2002 250.00 2003 283.00 2004 312.00 2005 352.00 2006 387.00 2007 412.00 2008 447.00 2009 503.00 2010 541.00 Year 4 Required a) Calculate the annual rate of return for each asset in each of the 10 preceding years, and those values to find the average annual return for each asset over the 10-year period. b) Use the returns to find the standard deviation and the coefficient of variation of the returns for each asset over the 10-year period 2001-2010. c) Use your findings in questions a and b to evaluate and discuss the return and risk associated with each asset. Which asset appears to be preferable? Explain. d) Use the CAPM to find the required return for each asset. Compare this value with average annual returns calculated in question a. e) Calculate the portfolio return and standard deviation of a portfolio consisting of both stock A and Stock B f) Calculate the weights of the minimum variance portfolio. g) Calculate the weights of the optimal risky portfolio h) What recommendations would you make with regard to investing in either of the two assets or in a portfolio together?

Attachments:

intermediate accounting 472867

1. The property, plant, and equipment accounts of Robertson Inc. had the following balances at December 31, 2014.

Account NameAmount

Land $ 300,000

Land improvements 140,000

Buildings 1,100,000

Equipment 960,000

Transactions that occurred during 2014 include the following:

i. A tract of land was acquired for $150,000 as a potential future building site.

ii. A plant facility consisting of land and building was acquired from Pellum Company in exchange for 20,000 shares of Robertson’s common stock. On the acquisition date, Robertson’s stock had a closing market price of $37 per share on a national stock exchange. The plant facility was carried on Pellum’s books at $110,000 for land and $320,000 for the building at the exchange date. Current appraised value for the land is $230,000 and building is $690,000.

iii. Expenditures totaling $95,000 were made for new parking lots, streets, and sidewalks at the corporation’s various plant locations. These expenditures had an estimated useful life of 15 years.

iv. Items of machinery and equipment were purchased at a total cost of $400,000. Additional costs were incurred as follows.

a. Freight and unloading $13,000
Sales taxes 20,000

b. Installation 26,000

v. A machine costing $80,000 on January 1, 2007, was scrapped on June 30, 2015. Double-declining- balance depreciation has been recorded on the basis of a 10-year life.

vi. A machine was sold for $20,000 on July 1, 2015. Original cost of the machine was $44,000 on January 1, 2012, and it was depreciated on the straight-line basis over an estimated useful life of 7 years and a salvage value of $2,000.

Required:

1. Prepare a schedule analyzing the changes in each of the property, plant, and equipment accounts for 2014.

2. Prepare a schedule showing the gain or loss from each property, plant, and equipment’s disposal that would be recognized in the company’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2014.

2. On December 1, 2014, PhiferLandcaping Corp. began construction of a new plant on. On that date, the company purchased a parcel of land for $139,000 in cash. In addition, it paid

$2,000 in surveying costs and $4,000 for a title insurance policy. An old dwelling on the premises was demolished at a cost of $3,000, with $1,000 being received from the sale of materials.

Architectural plans were also formalized on December 1, 2014, when the architect was paid $30,000.

In addition, the necessary building permits that cost $3,000 were obtained from the city and paid for on December 1. The excavation work began during the first week in December with payments made to the contractor as follows.

Date Payment Amount

March 1, 2015$240,000

May 1, 2015330,000

July 1, 2015 60,000

The building was completed on July 1, 2015.

To finance construction of this plant, Phifer borrowed $600,000 from the bank on December 1, 2014. The $600,000 was a 10-year loan bearing interest at 8%.Phifer had no other borrowings.

Required:

1. What is the balance of land in 2013 and 2014?

2. What is the balance of building in 2013 and 2014?

3. What is the interest expense amount in 2013 and 2014?

4. Calculate the amount of interest Phifer should capitalize in 2013 and 2014. (Hint use the specific interest method).

3. This is a continuation of problem 1 (Robertson Inc.)

Required:

For each property, plant, and equipment account prepare a schedule showing depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2014. Use the following depreciation methods and useful lives:

Land improvements-Straight line; 15 years

Buildings-150% declining balance; 20 years

Equipment-Straight line; 10years

Depreciation is computed to the nearest month and no residual values are used.

one item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income s 473178

One item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for the following four differentcorporations.
Enter the missing amounts. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease instockholders’ equityduring the year.)

Aquarius Libra Scorpio Taurus
Beginning of the year:
Assets $505,500 $576,300 $212,300
Liabilities 303,300 299,700 161,300 $275,300
End of the year:
Assets 626,800 806,800 191,100 568,900
Liabilities 273,000 253,600 169,800 312,000
During the year:
Additional issuance of capital stock 115,300 21,200 91,800
Dividends 35,400 34,600 134,600
Revenue 166,800 244,200 256,900
Expenses 91,000 149,800 261,100 293,600

santos company currently manufactures one of its crucial parts at a cost of 3 40 per 473900

Santos Company currently manufactures one of its crucial parts at a cost of $3.40 per

unit. This cost is based on a normal production rate of 50,000 units per year. Variable

costs are $1.50 per unit, fixed costs related to making this part are $50,000 per year,

and allocated fixed costs are $45,000 per year. Allocated fixed costs are unavoidable

whether the company makes or buys the part. Santos is considering buying the part from

a supplier for a quoted price of $2.70 per unit guaranteed for a three-year period. Should

the company continue to manufacture the part, or should it buy the part from the outside

supplier? Support your answer with analyses.

Document Preview:

Module 8 Review Questions I. Relevant costs Fill in each of the blanks below with the correct term. 1. Relevant costs are also known as _____________. 2. An ___________ requires a future outlay of cash and is relevant for current and future decision making. 3. An ___________ is the potential benefit lost by taking a specific action when two or more alternative choices are available. 4. A ___________ arises from a past decision and cannot be avoided or changed; it is irrelevant to future decisions. 5. ___________ refer to the incremental revenue generated from taking one particular action over another. II. Make or buy decision Santos Company currently manufactures one of its crucial parts at a cost of $3.40 per unit. This cost is based on a normal production rate of 50,000 units per year. Variable costs are $1.50 per unit, fixed costs related to making this part are $50,000 per year, and allocated fixed costs are $45,000 per year. Allocated fixed costs are unavoidable whether the company makes or buys the part. Santos is considering buying the part from a supplier for a quoted price of $2.70 per unit guaranteed for a three-year period. Should the company continue to manufacture the part, or should it buy the part from the outside supplier? Support your answer with analyses. III. Sell of process decision Cantrell Company has already manufactured 20,000 units of Product A at a cost of $20 per unit. The 20,000 units can be sold at this stage for $500,000. Alternatively, the units can be further processed at a $300,000 total additional cost and be converted into 4,000 units of Product B and 8,000 units of Product C. Per unit selling price for Product B is $75 and for Product C is $50. Prepare an analysis that shows whether or not the 20,000 units of Product A should be processed further. IV. Sell or rework decision Varto Company has 7,000 units of its sole product in inventory that it produced…

Attachments:

compute operating income for rim and tip separately and the total operating income f 473921

Compute operating income for RIM and TIP, separately, and the total operating income for both.

  1. If the results in part 1 for TIP are typical, why do you believe RIM decided to sell off its interest in TIP?
    I have attached the assignemnt below.
Document Preview:

CASE STUDY ASSIGNMENT: Assume that next year, Research in Motion sells off its interest in TIP Communications (one of its subsidiaries). Forecasted information about the operations for RIM and TIP for that future fiscal year immediately prior to the proposed sale follows:? ?*Does not include TIP results. Includes cost of goods sold???Required: Compute operating income for RIM and TIP, separately, and the total operating income for both. If the results in part 1 for TIP are typical, why do you believe RIM decided to sell off its interest in TIP?

Attachments:

students will calculate the cost that should be assigned to land buildings and equip 474150

Students will calculate the cost that should be assigned to land, buildings, and equipment and provide the journal entry to record the acquisition of these assets.

Sam’s Corporation paid $550,000 to acquire land, building, and equipment. At the time of the acquisition, Sam paid $50,000 to have the property appraised. The following values were determined from the appraisal:

Land

180,000

Building

285,000

Equipment

175,000

Respond to the following questions:

  • What cost should Sam assign to the land, buildings, and equipment, respectively?
  • How should the journal entry be recorded on the corporation’s books to describe this acquisition?
  • Why is it necessary to allocate a lump sum purchase amount among the individual assets acquired?
  • What are the characteristics that an asset must have for it to be classified as property, plant, and equipment?
  • Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) requires that property, plant, and equipment should be recorded at historical cost. What are the advantages of recording property, plant, and equipment at historical cost?

module 9 review questions i payback period and computation even cash flows 474222

Module 9 Review Questions I. Payback period and computation; even cash flows Compute the payback period for each of the following two separate investments (round the payback period to two decimals): 1. A new operating system for an existing machine is expected to cost $260,000 and have a useful life of five years. The system yields an incremental after-tax income of $75,000 each year after deducting its straight-line depreciation. The predicted salvage value of the system is $10,000. 2. A machine costs $190,000, has a $10,000 salvage value, is expected to last nine years II. Payback period computation; uneven cash flows Wenro Company is considering the purchase of an asset for $90,000. It is expected to produce the following net cash flows. The cash flows occur evenly throughout each year. Compute the payback period for this investment. III. Accounting Rate of Return A machine costs $500,000 and is expected to yield an after-tax net income of $15,000 each year. Management predicts this machine has a 10-year service life and a $100,000 salvage value, and it uses straight-line depreciation. Compute this machine’s accounting rate of return. IV. Computing Net Present Value K2B Company is considering the purchase of equipment that would allow the company to add a new product to its line. The equipment is expected to cost $240,000 with a 12- year life and no salvage value. It will be depreciated on a straight-line basis. The company expects to sell 96,000 units of the equipment’s product each year. The expected annual income related to this equipment follows: K2B concludes that the investment must earn at least an 8% return. Compute the net present value of this investment. (Round the net present value to the nearest dollar.) V. Net Present Value Interstate Manufacturing is considering either replacing one of its old machines with a new machine or having the old machine overhauled. Information about the two alternatives follows. Management requires a 10% rate of return on its investments. Alternative 1: Keep the old machine and have it overhauled. If the old machine is overhauled, it will be kept for another five years and then sold for its salvage value. (Continued next page) Alternative 2: Sell the old machine and buy a new one. The new machine will be more efficient and will yield substantial operating cost savings with more products produced and sold. 1. Determine the net present value of alternative 1. 2. Determine the net present value of alternative 2. 3. Which alternative do you recommend management select? Explain.

Attachments:

on january 1 2012 palmer company leased equipment to woods corporation the following 467698

On January 1, 2012, Palmer Company leased equipment to Woods Corporation. The following information pertains to this lease.

1. The term of the noncancelable lease is6years, with no renewal option. The equipment reverts to the lessor at the termination of the lease.
2. Equal rental payments are due on January 1 of each year, beginning in 2012.
3. The fair value of the equipment on January 1, 2012, is $233,000, and its cost is $195,720.
4. The equipment has an economic life of 8 years, with an unguaranteed residual value of $10,560. Woods depreciates all of its equipment on a straight-line basis.
5. Palmer sets the annual rental to ensure an8% rate of return. Woods’s incremental borrowing rate is9%, and the implicit rate of the lessor is unknown.
6. Collectibility of lease payments is reasonably predictable, and no important uncertainties surround the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.

(Both the lessor and the lessee’s accounting period ends on December 31.) I need the annual rent payment.

comparing amounts for ending inventory perpetual inventory fifo and 467712

Comparing amounts for ending inventory—perpetual inventory—FIFO and LIFO (5-10 min] Models store bought and sold a line of dolls during December as follows: Beginning inventory 13 units •g.) $11 Sale 9 units Purchase 17 units of S13 Sale 13 units

Models uses the perpetual inventory system. Requirements 1 Calculate the cost of ending inventory using FIFO. 2 Calculate the cost of ending inventory using LIFO. 3 Which method results in a higher cost of ending inventory? E6-8 Comparing cost of sales in a perpetual system—FIFO and LIFO (15-20 min( Review the data in Exercise 6-7. Requirements I Calculate the cost of sales under FIFO. 2 Calculate the cost of sales under LIFO. 3 Which method results in the higher cost of sales?

ocur aws•i: ••101‘11 01111UUI1l ID IIIVIV !CUMULI Vlve rJUI 11Cd1U11.

P9-4 U ing the allowance method for bad debts (20-35 min] t 30 ptember, the accounts of South Terrace Medical Centre (STMC) include the following:

Accounts receivable 5145000 Allowance for doubtful debts (credit balance) 3 500

During October to December, STMC completed the following selected transactions:

01″/ V•%•/*/•••• ¦•¦¦•¦¦¦•

Dec 28 Wrote off accounts receivable as uncollectable: Regan Ltd. $1300; Owen White. $900; and Rain Ltd, $700. Dec 31 Recorded bad debt expense bawd on the ageing of accounts receivable, as follows:

.¦•••••¦¦•¦•• Age of accounts Accounts receivable 1-30 days 31-60 days 61-90 days Over 90 days $165000 597000 $37000 514000 $17000 Estimated 16 uncollectable 0.3% 3% 30% 35% Requirements

1 Journalise the transaction. 2 Open the Allowance for doubtful debts T-accounts, and post entries affecting that account. Keep a running balance. 3 Show how South Terrace Medical Centre should report net accounts receivable on its 31 December balance sheet. Use the three line reporting format.

P11-5 ournalising, posting and reporting liabilities [30 min) The hside Inn general ledger at 30 September 2014, the end of its financial year, includes the following account balances before adjusting entries.

Accounts payable Current portion of non-current debt Interest payable Salary payable Employee income taxes payable

$36 210 Employer payroll tax payable – Unearned rent revenue – Non-current debt

3 900

10′ 000

The additional data needed to prepare the adjusting entries at 30 September are as follows: a The non-current debt is payable in annual instalments of $50000, with the next instalment due on 31 January 2015. On that date, Northsidc will also pay one year’s interest at 6%. Interest was last paid on 31 January. Make the adjusting entry to shift the current instalment of the non-current debt to a current liability. Also accrue interest expense at year-end. b Gross salaries for the last payroll of the financial year were S4 300. Of this amount, employee income taxes payable were 5900. c Employer payroll tax payable was 5850. d On 1 August, the business collected six months’ rent of S3 900 in advance.

1 What value would eagle report on the balance sheet at 3(l June 1014 for Inventory! E6-11 Applying the lower-of-cost-and-net-realisable-value rule to inventories (5 min] y Good Foods reports inventory at the lower of average cost or NRV. Prior to releasing its March 2012 financial statements, Naturally’s preliminary income statement, before the year-end adjustments, appears as follows:

NATURALLY GOOD FOODS Income statement—partial for the year ended 31 March 2012

Sales revenue 5117 000 Cost of sales 45 000 Gross profit S 72 000

,

Naturally has determined that the NRV of ending inventory is S17000. Cost is $18000. Requirements 1 Journalise the adjusting entry for inventory, if any is required. 2 Prepare a revised income statement to show how Naturally Good Foods should report sales, cost of sales and gross profit.

Attachments:

troy ridgell incorporated ridgell consulting an accounting practice on may 1 2012 465571

Troy Ridgell incorporated Ridgell Consulting, an accounting practice, on May 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, these events and transactions occurred. May 1 Stockholders invested $40,000 cash in exchange for common stock of the corporation.

2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $2,000 per month.

3 Purchased $800 of supplies on account from Fleming Supply Company.

7 Paid office rent of $1,400 for the month.

11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $1,500 for services provided.

12 Received $4,200 advance on a management consulting engagement.

17 Received cash of $3,300 for services completed for Goodman Co.

31 Paid secretary-receptionist $2,000 salary for the month.

31 Paid 50% of balance due Fleming Supply Company.

The company uses the following chart of accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Rent Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.

(b) Post to the ledger T accounts.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2012.

special delivery was started on may 1 with an investment of 45 000 cash 465572

Special Delivery was started on May 1 with an investment of $45,000 cash. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2012, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May, its first month of operations.

Accounts receivable $ 6,200 Notes payable $28,000

Service revenue 10,400 Salaries and wages expense 2,000

Advertising expense 800 Equipment 56,000

Accounts payable 2,400 Maintenance and repairs expense 2,900

Cash 15,800 Insurance expense 400

No additional common stock was issued in May, but a dividend of $1,700 in cash was paid.

Instructions

a. Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31, 2012.

b. Briefly discuss whether the company’s first month of operations was a success.

c. Discuss the company’s decision to distribute a dividend.

on august 31 the balance sheet of donahue veterinary clinic showed cash 9 000 accoun 465573

On August 31, the balance sheet of Donahue Veterinary Clinic showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, Common Stock $13,000, and Retained Earnings $700. During September, the following transactions occurred.

1. Paid $2,900 cash for accounts payable due.

2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.

3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.

4. Earned revenue of $7,300, of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.

5. Declared and paid a $400 cash dividend

6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $200.

7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.

8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank on a 6-month note payable.

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances. (If a transaction causes a decrease in Assets, Liabilities or Stockholders’ Equity, place a negative sign (or parentheses) in front of the amount entered for the particular Asset, Liability or Equity item that was reduced. See Illustration 1-8 for example.)

(b) Prepare an income statement for September, a retained earnings statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.

selected year end financial statements of mccord corporation follow 465574

Selected year-end financial statements of McCord Corporation follow. (Note: All sales are on credit; selected balance sheet amounts at December 31, 2004, were inventory, $32,400; total assets, $182,400; common stock, $90,000; and retained earnings, $31,300.)

McCORD CORPORATION

Income Statement

For Year Ended December 31, 2005

Sales

$348,600

Cost of goods sold

229,150

Gross profit

119,450

Operating expenses

52,500

Interest expense

3,100

Income before taxes

63,850

Income taxes

15,800

Net income

$48,050

McCORD CORPORATION

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2005

Assets Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$ 9,000

Accounts payable

$16,500

Short-term investments

7,400

Accrued wages payable

2,200

Accounts receivable, net

28,200

Income taxes payable

2,300

Notes receivable (trade)*

3,500

Merchandise inventory

31,150

Long-term note payable, sec by mortgage on plant asset

62,400

Prepaid expenses

1,650

Common stock, $1 par value

90,000

Plant assets, net

152,300

00 Retained earnings

59,800

Total assets

$233,200

00 Total liabilities and equity

$233,200

watson technical institute wti a school owned by tom watson provides training to ind 465575

Watson Technical Institute (WTI), a school owned by Tom Watson, provides training to individuals who pay tuition directly to the school. WTI also offers training to groups in off-site locations. Its unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2005, follows. WTI initially records prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. Descriptions of items a through h that require adjusting entries on December 31, 2005, follow.

Additional Information Items

a. An analysis of the school’s insurance policies shows that $3,000 of coverage has expired.

b. An inventory count shows that teaching supplies costing $2,600 are available at year-end 2005.

c. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $12,000.

d. Annual depreciation on the professional library is $6,000.

e. On November 1, the school agreed to do a special six-month course (starting immediately) for a client. The contract calls for a monthly fee of $2,200, and the client paid the first five months’ fees in advance. When the cash was received, the Unearned Training Fees account was credited. The fee for the sixth month will be recorded when it is collected in 2006.

f. On October 15, the school agreed to teach a four-month class (beginning immediately) for an individual for $3,000 tuition per month payable at the end of the class. The services are being provided as agreed, and no payment has yet been received. g. The school’s two employees are paid weekly. As of the end of the year, two days’ wages have accrued at the rate of $100 per day for each employee.

h. The balance in the Prepaid Rent account represents rent for December.

Required

1. Prepare T-accounts (representing the ledger) with balances from the unadjusted trial balance.

2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries for items a through h and post them to the T-accounts. Assume that adjusting entries are made only at year-end.

3. Update balances in the T-accounts for the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

4. Prepare Watson Technical Institute’s income statement and statement of owner’s equity for the year 2005 and prepare its balance sheet as of December 31, 2005.

matthews delivery service inc completed the following transactions during its first 465576

Matthews Delivery Service, Inc., completed the following transactions during its first month of operations for January 2012:

a. Matthews Delivery Service, Inc., began operations by receiving $6,000 cash and a truck valued at $11,000. The business issued common stock to acquire these assets.

b. Paid $300 cash for supplies.

c. Prepaid insurance, $700.

d. Performed delivery services for a customer and received $800 cash.

e. Completed a large delivery job, billed the customer $1,500, and received a promise to collect the $1,500 within one week.

f. Paid employee salary, $700.

g. Received $12,000 cash for performing delivery services.

h. Collected $600 in advance for delivery service to be performed later.

i. Collected $1,500 cash from a customer on account.

j. Purchased fuel for the truck, paying $200 with a company credit card. (Credit Accounts payable)

k. Performed delivery services on account, $900.

l. Paid office rent, $600. This rent is not paid in advance.

m. Paid $200 on account.

n. Paid cash dividends of $2,100.

Requirements

1. Record each transaction in the journal. Key each transaction by its letter. Explanations are not required.

2. Post the transactions that you recorded in Requirement 1 in the T-accounts.

Cash

Accounts receivable

Supplies

Prepaid insurance

Delivery truck

Accumulated depreciation

Accounts payable

Salary payable

Unearned service revenue

Common stock

Retained earnings

Dividends

Income summary

Service revenue

Salary expense

Depreciation expense

Insurance expense

Fuel expense

Rent expense

Supplies expense

3. Enter the trial balance in the worksheet for the month ended January 31, 2012.

Complete the worksheet using the adjustment data given at January 31.

a. Accrued salary expense, $700.

b. Depreciation expense, $60.

c. Prepaid insurance expired, $250.

d. Supplies on hand, $200.

e. Unearned service revenue earned during January, $500.

4. Prepare Matthews Delivery Service?s income statement and statement of retained earnings for the month ended January 31, 2012, and the classified balance sheet on that date. On the income statement, list expenses in decreasing order by amount?that is, the largest expense first, the smallest expense last.

5. Journalize and post the adjusting entries beginning with a.

6. Journalize and post the closing entries.

7. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at January 31, 2012.

accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting recei 465577

Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet

At September 30, 2012, the accounts of Mountain Terrace Medical Center (MTMC) include the following:

Accounts receivable $145,000

Allowance for uncollectible accounts (credit balance) 3,500

Dec 28 During the last quarter of 2012, MTMC completed the following selected transactions:

Dec 31 Wrote off accounts receivable as uncollectible: Regan, Co., $1,300; Owen Mac, $900; and Rain, Inc., $700.

Recorded uncollectible account expense based on the aging of accounts receivable, as follows:

Age of Accounts

Accounts receivable 1–30 Days 31–60 Days 61–90 Days Over 90 Days

$165,000 $97,000 $ 37,000 $14,000 $ 17,000

Estimated percent uncollectible 35% 0.3% 3% 30%

Requirements

1. Journalize the transactions.

2. Open the Allowance for uncollectible accounts T-account, and post entries affecting that account. Keep a running balance.

3. Show how Mountain Terrace Medical Center should report net accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet. Use the three line reporting format.

on june 24th of year 1 alec bryce and connor form triplets corporation they transfer 465578

On June 24th of year 1, Alec, Bryce, and Connor form Triplets Corporation. They transfer the following assets: Property Transferred Transferor Asset Basis to Transferor FMV Number of Common Shares Issued Alec Land $200,000.00 $50,000.00 500 Bryce Production Equipment – 25,000.00 250 Connor Accounting Services – 25,000.00 250 Alec purchased the land 5 years ago for $200,000. Bryce purchase the production equipment 3 years ago for $48,000 and it is fully depreciated.

(a) Does the transaction meet the requirements of section 351?

(b) What are the amounts of the gains or losses recognized by Alec, Bryce, Connor, and Triplets?

(c) What is each shareholders basis in their stock? When does the holding period for the stock begin?

(d) What is Triplets’ basis in each asset? When does the holding period begin for each asset?

(e) How might they restructure this transaction to make it more beneficial from a tax perspective?

on february 1 of year 1 richard mike patrick and sean form brothers corp and transfe 465579

On February 1 of year 1, Richard, Mike, Patrick, and Sean form Brothers Corp and transfer the following items: Property Transferred Transferor Asset Basis to Transferor FMV Number of Common Shares Issued Richard Land 12000 30000 400 Building 38000 70000 Mortgage on Land and Building 60000 60000 Mike Machines 25000 40000 300 Patrick Truck 15000 10000 50 Sean Legal Services 0 10000 100 Richard purchased the building and land several years ago, $50,000 for the building, and $12,000 for the land. Depreciation has been claimed using the straight line method. In addition to the machines, Mike received a note from Brothers corp. due in 3 years for $10,000 at the market interest rate. Mike originally purchase the machines 3 years ago for $50,000. In addition to the truck, Patrick received a cash payment of $5,000. Patrick’s truck is 2 years old with an original price of $20,000.

(a) Does the transaction meet the requirements of section 351?

(b) What are the amounts of the gains or losses recognized by Richard, Mike, Patrick, Sean, and Brothers?

(c) What is each shareholder’s basis in their Brothers stock? When does the holding period for the stock begin?

(d) What is Brothers’ basis in its property and services? When does the holding period for each property begin?

riviera theater inc was recently formed all facilities were completed on march 31 465581

Riviera Theater Inc. was recently formed. All facilities were completed on March 31. On April 1, the ledger showed: Cash $6,300; Land $10,000; Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $8,000; Equipment $6,000; Accounts Payable $2,300; Mortgage Payable $8,000; and Common Stock $20,000. During April, the following events and transactions occurred.

Apr. 2 Paid film rental fee of $800 on first movie.

3 Ordered two additional films at $750 each.

9 Received $4,700 cash from admissions.

10 Paid $2,000 of mortgage payable and $1,200 of accounts payable.

11 Hired M. Gavin to operate the concession stand. Gavin agrees to pay Riviera Theater 17% of gross receipts, payable monthly.

12 Paid advertising expenses $410.

20 Received one of the films ordered on April 3 and was billed $750. The film will be shown in April.

25 Received $3,000 cash from customers for admissions.

29 Paid salaries $1,900.

30 Received statement from M. Gavin showing gross receipts of $2,000 and the balance due to Riviera Theater of $340 for April. Gavin paid half of the balance due and will remit the remainder on May 5.

30 Prepaid $1,200 rental fee on special film to be run in May.

In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts shows: Accounts Receivable, Prepaid Rent, Service Revenue, Sales Revenue, Advertising Expense, Rent Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

(a) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger T accounts as of April 1.

(b) Journalize the April transactions, including explanations. (Note: Riviera records admission revenue as service revenue, concession revenue as sales revenue, and film rental expense as rent expense.)

(c) Post the April journal entries to the ledger T accounts.

(d) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.

danner farm supply company manufactures and sells a pesticide called snare 465583

Danner Farm Supply Company manufactures and sells a pesticide called Snare. The following data are available for preparing budgets for Snare for the first 2 quarters of 2009.

1. Sales: Quarter 1, 28,000 bags; quarter 2, 42,000 bags. Selling price is $60 per bag.

2. Direct materials: Each bag of Snare requires 4 pounds of Gumm at a cost of $4 per pound and 6 pounds of Tarr at $1.50 per pound.

3. Desired inventory levels:

Type of Inventory January 1 April 1 July 1

Snare (bags) 8,000 12,000 18,000

Gumm (pounds) 9,000 10,000 13,000

Tarr (pounds) 14,000 20,000 25,000

4. Direct labor: Direct labor time is 15 minutes per bag at an hourly rate of $14 per hour.

5. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be 15% of sales plus $175,000 per quarter.

6. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income from operations.

Your assistant has prepared two budgets: (1) The manufacturing overhead budget shows expected costs to be 150% of direct labor cost. (2) The direct materials budget for Tarr shows the cost of Tarr purchases to be $297,000 in quarter 1 and $439,500 in quarter 2.

Instructions

Prepare the budgeted income statement for the first 6 months and all required operating budgets by quarters. (Note: Use variable and fixed in the selling and administrative expense budget). Do not prepare the manufacturing overhead budget or the direct materials budget for Tarr.

on may 31 six brothers decided to form the grimm brothers partnership to publish and 465586

On May 31, six brothers decided to form the Grimm Brothers Partnership to publish and print children’s stories. The contributions of the brothers and their partnership interests are listed below. They share the economic risk of loss from liabilities according to their partnership interests.

Individual Asset Basis FMV Partnership to Partner Interest

Al Cash $15,000 $15,000 15%

Bob accounts Receiv. 0 20,000 20%

Clay Office equip. 13,000 15,000 15%

Dave Land 50,000 15,000 15%

Ed Building 15,000 150,000 20%

Fred Services ? 15,000 15%

The following other information about the contributions may be of interest:

1. Bob contributes accounts receivable from this proprietorship, which uses the cash method of accounting.

2. Clay uses the office equipment in a small business he owns. When he joins the partnership, he sells the remaining business assets to an outsider. He has claimed $8,000 of MACRS depreciation on the office equipment.

3. The partnership assumes a $130,000 mortgage on the building Ed contributes. Ed claimed $100,000 of straight-line MACRS depreciation on the commercial property.

4. Fred, an attorney, drew up all the partnership agreements and filed the neccessary paperwork. He receives a full 15% capital and profits interest for his services.

a. How much gain, loss or income must each partner recognize as a result of the formation?

b. How much gain, loss, or income must the partnership recognize as a result of the formation?

c. What is each partner’s basis in the partnership interest?

d. What is the partnership’s basis in its assets?

e. What is the partnership’s initial book value of each asset?

f. What effects do the depreciation recapture provisions have on the property contributions?

g. How would your answer to Part a change if Fred received only a profits interest?

h. What are the tax consequences to the partners and the partnership when the partnership sells for $9,000 the land contributed by Dave? Prior to the sale, the partnership held the land as an investment for two years.

woodland industries manufactures and sells custom made windows 465587

Woodland Industries manufactures and sells custom-made windows. Its job costing system was designed using an activity-based costing approach. Direct materials and direct labor costs are accumulated separately, along with information concerning three manufacturing overhead cost drivers (activities). Assume that the direct labor rate is $15 per hour and that there were no beginning inventories. The following information was available for 2013, based on an expected production level of 50,000 units for the year, which will require 200,000 direct labor hours:

Activity cost Driver

Budgeted
Costs for 2013

Cost Driver Used
as Allocation Base

Cost
Allocation Rate

Materials handling

$250,000

Number of parts used

$0.20

per part

Cutting and lathe work

1,750,000

Number of parts used

1.40

per part

Assembly and inspection

4,000,000

Direct labor hours

20.00

the following production, costs, and activities occurred during the month of July:

Units
Produced

Direct
Materials Costs

Number
of Parts Used

Direct
Labor Hours

3,200

$107,200

70,400

13,120

1, Calculate the total manufacturing costs and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of July (using the activity-based costing approach). (Round “”cost per unit produced”” to 2 decimal places.)

Total Manufacturing Cost:

Cost Per Unit Produced:

2. Assume instead that Woodland Industries applies manufacturing overhead on a direct labor hours basis (rather than using the activity-based costing system previously described). Calculate the total manufacturing cost and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of July. (Hint: You will need to calculate the predetermined overhead application rate using the total budgeted overhead costs for 2013.) (Round “”cost per unit produced”” to 2 decimal places.)

Total Manufacturing cost:

Cost Per Unit Produced:

joint cost allocation ending work in process inventories taste 465670

Joint cost allocation, ending work in process inventories. Tastee Freez, Inc., produces two specialty ice cream mix flavors for soft serve ice cream machines. The two flavors, Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry, both start with a vanilla base. The vanilla base can be sold for $2 per gallon. The company did not have any beginning inventories but produced 8,000 gallons of the vanilla base during the most recent month at a cost of $5,200. The 8,000 gallons of base was used to begin production of 5,000 gallons of Extreme Chocolate and 3,000 gallons of Very Strawberry.

At the end of the month, the company had some of its ice cream mix still in process. There were

1,200 gallons of Extreme Chocolate 30% complete and 200 gallons of Very Strawberry 80% complete. Processing costs during the month for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry were $9,152 and $8,880, respectively. The selling prices for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry are $4 and $5, respectively.

Required

1. Allocate the joint costs to Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry under the following methods:

a. Sales value at splitoff

b. Net realizable value

c. Constant gross margin percentage NRV

2. Compute the gross margin percentages for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry under each of the methods in requirement 1.

preparation of merchandise purchases budgets for three periods 465691

Preparation of merchandise purchases budgets (for three periods) Formworks Company prepares monthly budgets. The current budget plans for a September ending inventory of 15,000 units. Company policy is to end each month with merchandise inventory equal to a specified percent of budgeted sales for the following month. Budgeted sales and merchandise purchases for the three most recent months follow. 1. Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for the months of July, August, and September. 2. Compute the ratio of ending inventory to the next month’s sales for each budget prepared in part 1. 3. How many units are budgeted for sale in October? II. Preparation of cash budgets (for three periods) Kasik Company budgeted the following cash receipts and cash disbursements for the first three months of next year. According to a credit agreement with the company’s bank, Kasik promises to have a minimum cash balance of $30,000 at each month-end. In return, the bank has agreed that the company can borrow up to $150,000 at an annual interest rate of 12%, paid the last day of each month. The interest is computed based on the beginning balance of the loan for the month. The company has a cash balance of $30,000 and a loan balance of $60,000 at January 1. Prepare monthly cash budgets for each of the first three months of next year. III. Computing budgeted cash payments for purchases Powerdyne Company’s cost of goods sold is consistently 60% of sales. The company plans to carry ending merchandise inventory for each month equal to 40% of the next month’s budgeted cost of goods sold. All merchandise is purchased on credit, and 50% of the purchases made during a month is paid for in that month. Another 35% is paid for during the first month after purchase, and the remaining 15% is paid for during the second month after purchase. Expected dollar sales are: August (actual), $150,000 September (actual), $350,000 October (estimated), $200,000 November (estimated) $300,000. Use this information to determine October’s expected cash payments for purchases. IV. Budgeted Cash Receipts Emily Company has sales on account and sales for cash. Specifically, 60% of its sales are on account and 40% are for cash. Credit sales are collected in full in the month following the sale. The company forecasts sales of $525,000 for April, $535,000 for May, and $560,000 for June. The beginning balance of Accounts Receivable on April 1 is $300,000. Prepare a schedule of budgeted cash receipts for April, May, and June.

Attachments:

to prepare a master budget for january february and march of 2014 management has gat 465697

To prepare a master budget for January, February, and March of 2014, management has gathered the following information: • Simid Sports’ single product is purchased for $30 per unit and resold for $55 per unit. The expected inventory level of 2,500 units on December 31, 2013, is more than management’s desired level for 2014 which is 20% of the next month’s expected sales (in units). Expected sales are: o January, 3,500 units; o February, 4,500 units; o March, 5,500 units; and o April, 5,000 units. • Cash sales and credit sales represent 25% and 75%, respectively, of total sales. Of the credit sales, 60% is collected in the first month after the month of sale and 40% in the second month after the month of sale. For the December 31, 2013, accounts receivable balance, $62,500 is collected in January and the remaining $200,000 is collected in February. • Merchandise purchases are paid for as follows: 20% in the first month after the month of purchase and 80% in the second month after purchase. For the December 31, 2013, accounts payable balance, $40,000 is paid in January and the remaining $140,000 is paid in February. • Sales commissions equal to 20% of sales are paid each month. Sales salaries (excluding commissions) are $30,000 per year. • General and administrative salaries are $72,000 per year. Maintenance expense equals $1,000 per month and is paid in cash. • Equipment reported in the December 31, 2013, balance sheet was purchased in January 2013. It is being depreciated over eight years using the straight-line method with no salvage value. The following amounts for new equipment purchases are planned in the coming quarter: January, $18,000; February, $48,000; and March, $14,400. This equipment will be depreciated using the straight-line method over eight years with no salvage value. A full month’s depreciation is taken for the month in which equipment is purchased. • The company plans to acquire land at the end of March at a cost of $75,000, which will be paid for with cash on the last day of the month. • Simid Sports has a working arrangement with its bank to obtain additional loans as needed. The interest rate is 12% per year, and interest is paid at each month-end based on the beginning balance. Partial or full payments on these loans can be made on the last day of the month. The company has agreed to maintain a minimum ending cash balance of $12,500 each month. • The income tax rate for the company is 40%. Income taxes on the first quarter’s income will not be paid until April 15.

Attachments:

preparation of flexible budgets mesa company s fixed budget for the first quarter of 465701

Preparation of flexible budgets Mesa Company’s fixed budget for the first quarter of calendar year 2014 reveals the following. Prepare flexible budgets, following the format of Exhibit 8.3, that show variable costs per unit, fixed costs, and three different flexible budgets for sales volumes of 7,500, 10,000, and 12,500 units. II. Computation and interpretation of labor variances After evaluating Zero Company’s manufacturing process, management decided to establish standards of 1.5 hours of direct labor per unit of product and $11 per hour for the labor rate. During October, the company used 3,780 hours of direct labor at $45,360 total cost to produce 2,700 unit of product. In November, the company used 4,480 hours of direct labor at a $47,040 total cost to produce 2,800 units of product. 1. Compute the labor rate variance, the labor efficiency variance, and the total direct labor cost variance for October and for November. 2. Interpret the October direct labor variances. III. Computation and interpretation of materials variances BTS Company made 6,000 bookshelves using 88,000 board feet of wood costing $607,200. The company’s direct materials standards for one bookshelf are 16 board feet of wood at $7 per board foot. 1. Compute the direct material variances incurred in manufacturing these bookshelves. 2. Interpret the direct materials variances IV. Computation of total overhead rate and total overhead variance Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product. The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available. During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 42,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 250,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs: Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow: 1. Compute the direct materials cost variances, including its price and quantity variances. 2. Compute the direct labor variances, including its rate and efficiency variances. 3. Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances. 4. Compute the variable overhead spending and efficiency variance 5. Compute the fixed overhead spending and volume variance.

Attachments:

what are the primary lines of business of these two companies as shown in their not 467004

ACT350 Portfolio Project

Page 1 of 2

Using these 2007 annual reports for The Coca-Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc., answer the following

questions. Write these up in a Word document, clearly identifying your response to each lettered item.

Show supporting calculations for the items lettered c, f, h, l, m, o, p, r, s and u.

a. What are the primary lines of business of these two companies as shown in their notes to the

financial statements?

b. Which company has the dominant position in beverage sales?

c. Which company has the greater percentage increase in total assets from 2006 to 2007?

d. Which company had more depreciation and amortization expense for 2007? Provide a rationale

as to why there is a difference in these amounts between the two companies.

e. What type of income format(s) is used by these two companies? Identify any differences in

income statement format between these two companies.

f. What are the gross profits, operating profits, and net incomes for these two companies over the

three-year period 2005-2007? Which company has had better financial results over this period

of time?

g. What format(s) did these companies use to present their balance sheets?

h. How much working capital did each of these companies have at the end of 2007? Speculate as

to their rationale for the amount of working capital they maintain.

i. What is the most significant difference in the asset structure of the two companies? What

causes this difference?

j. What were the two companies’ trends in net cash provided by operating activities over the

period 2005 to 2007?

k. What were the cash and cash equivalents reported by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo at the end of

2007? What does each company classify as cash equivalents?

l. What were the accounts receivable (net) for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo at the end of 2007? Which

company reports the greater allowance for doubtful accounts receivable (amount and

percentage of gross receivable) at the end of 2007?

m. What is the amount of inventory reported by Coca-Cola at December 31, 2007, and by PepsiCo

at December 29, 2007? What percent of total assets is invested in inventory by each company?

n. What inventory costing methods are used by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo? How does each company

value its inventories?

o. Compute and compare the inventory turnover ratios and days to sell inventory for Coca-Cola

and PepsiCo for 2007. Indicate why there might be a significant difference between the two

companies.

ACT350 Portfolio Project

Page 2 of 2

p. What amount is reported in the balance sheets as property, plant, and equipment (net) of CocaCola at December 31, 2007, and of PepsiCo at December 29, 2007? What percentage of total

assets is invested in property, plant, and equipment by each company?

q. What depreciation methods are used by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo for property, plant, and

equipment? How much depreciation was reported by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo in 2007, 2006, and

2005?

r. Compute and compare the following ratios for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo for 2007: Asset turnover,

Profit margin on sales, and Rate of return on assets.

s. What amounts for intangible assets were reported in their respective balance sheets by CocaCola and PepsiCo? What percentage of total assets is each of these reported amounts?

t. On what basis and over what periods of time did Coca-Cola and PepsiCo amortize their

intangible assets?

u. What were Coca-Cola’s and PepsiCo’s net revenues (sales) for the year 2007? Which company

increased its revenues more (dollars and percentage) from 2006 to 2007?

v. Are the revenue recognition policies of Coca-Cola and PepsiCo similar? Explain.

Attachments:

the controller of santa fe housewares inc instructs you to prepare a monthly cash bu 465538

The Controller of Santa Fe Housewares Inc. instructs you to prepare a monthly cash budget for the next three months. You are presented with the following budget information:

March

April

May

Sales

70,000

84,000

84,000

Manufacturing cost

32,000

39,000

42,500

Selling and Administrative expenses

12,000

18,000

21,000

The company expects to sell about 10% of its merchandise for cash. Of sales on account, 70% are expected to be collected in full in the month following the sale and the remainder the following month. Depreciation, insurance, and property tax expense represent $3,000 of the estimated monthly manufacturing costs. The annual insurance premium is paid in July, and the annual property taxes are paid in November. Of the remainder of the manufacturing costs, 80% are expected to be paid in the month in which they are incurred and the balance in the following month. Current assets as of August 1 include cash of $10,000, marketable securities of $40,000, and accounts receivable of $75,600 ($60,000 from February sales and $15,600 from January sales).Sales on account for January and February were $52,000 and $60,000, respectively.

Current liabilities as of August 1 include s $12,000, 15%, 90-day note payable due May 20 and $4,000 of accounts payable incurred in July for manufacturing costs. All selling and administrative expenses are paid in cash in the period they are incurred. It is expected that $1,800 in dividends will be received in March. An estimated income tax payment of $16,000 will be made in April. Santa Fe’s regular quarterly dividend of $3,000 is expected to be declared in April and paid in May. Management desires to maintain a minimum cash balance of $30,000.

Instructions:

1. Prepare a monthly cash budget and supporting schedules for August, September, and October. Input all amounts as positive values except overall cash decrease and deficiency which should be indicated with a minus sign. Assume 360 days per year for interest calculation.

2. On the basis of the cash budget prepared in part (1), what recommendation should be made to the controller?

on july 1 20×1 littleton inc loaned a key supplier of raw material 2 000 000 to cons 465540

On July 1, 20×1, Littleton Inc. loaned a key supplier of raw material $2,000,000 to construct a new processing facility. The loan is due on July 1, 20×3 and pays interest each December 31 and June 30. The supplier insisted on a variable rate loan. The controller of Littleton wants to avoid the risk of variable rate fluctuation and entered into an interest rate swap in which it will pay the variable rate on $2,000,000 in exchange for a fixed rate of 8.3%. The swap is settled on the interest payment dates. Variable interest rates and the value of the swap on selected dates are as follow:

Variable rate Value of the swap

July1, 20×1 7.9%

December 31, 20×1 7.75% 10,400

Prepare all journal entries to record this hedge through December 20×1.

james hardy recently rejected a 20 000 000 five year contract with the vancouver sea 465541

James Hardy recently rejected a $20,000,000, five-year contract with the Vancouver Seals. The contract offer called for an immediate signing bonus of $5,000,000 and annual payments of $3,000,000. To sweeten the deal, the president of player personnel for the Seals has now offered a $22,000,000, five-year contract. This contract calls for annual increases and a balloon payment at the end of five years.

Year 1 $ 3,000,000

Year 2 3,100,000

Year 3 3,200,000

Year 4 3,300,000

Year 5 3,400,000

Year 5 balloon payment 6,000,000

Total $22,000,000

Required

Suppose you are Hardy’s agent and you wish to evaluate the two contracts using a required rate of return of 12 percent. In present value terms, how much better is the second contract?

marsha andersen a product manager at spencer is charged with recommending a price fo 465542

Marsha Andersen, a product manager at Spencer, is charged with recommending a price for the item. Based on her experience with similar items, focus group responses, and survey information, she has estimated the number of units that can be sold at various prices:

Price:

Quantity:

$79.99

15,000

$69.99

20,000

$59.99

30,000

$49.99

45,000

$39.99

65,000

Required:

a) Calculate expected profit for each price.

b) Which price maximizes company profit.

durkee corporation keeps careful track of the time required to fill orders 465544

Durkee Corporation keeps careful track of the time required to fill orders. The times required for a particular order appear below:

Wait time

Hours: 10.7

Process time

Hours: 0.9

Inspection time

Hours: 0.4

Move time

Hours: 2.3

Queue time

Hours: 4.5

Required:

A.) Determine the throughput time. Show your work!

B.) Determine the manufacture cycle efficiency (MCE), show your work!

C.) Determine the delivery cycle time. Show your work!

you are the vice president of finance for exploratory resources headquartered in hou 465545

You are the vice-president of finance for Exploratory Resources, headquartered in Houston, Texas. In January 2007, your firm’s Canadian subsidiary obtained a six-month loan of 100,000 Canadian dollars from a bank in Houston to finance the acquisition of a titanium mine in Quebec province. The loan will also be repaid in Canadian dollars. At the time of the loan, the spot exchange rate was U.S. $0.8180/Canadian dollar and the Canadian currency was selling at a discount in the forward market. The June 2007 contract(Face value = $100,000 per contract) was quoted at U.S. $0.8120/Canadian dollar.

a. Explain how the Houston bank could lose on this transaction assuming no hedging.

b. If the bank does hedge with the forward contract, what is the maximum amount it can lose

the wall street journal reported the following spot and forward rates for the swiss 465547

The Wall Street Journal reported the following spot and forward rates for the Swiss franc:

Spot

$0.7876

30-day forward

$0.7918

90-day forward

$0.7968

180-day forward

$0.8039

a. Was the Swiss franc selling at a discount or a premium in the forward market?

b. What was the 30-day forward premium (or discount)?

c. What was the 90-day forward premium (or discount)?

d. Suppose you executed a 90-day forward contract to exchange 100,000 Swiss francs into U.S. dollars. How many dollars would you get 90 days hence?

e. Assume a Swiss bank entered into a 180-day forward contract with Citicorp to buy $100,000. How many francs will the Swiss bank deliver in six months to get the U.S. dollars?

fabricator inc a specialized equipment manufacturer uses a job order costing system 465548

Fabricator Inc., a specialized equipment manufacturer, uses a job order costing system. The overhead is allocated to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours. The overhead rate is now $ 3,000 per direct labor hour. The design engineer thinks that this is illogical. The design engineer has stated the following: Our accounting system doesn’t make any sense to me. It tells me that every labor hour carries an additional burden of $3,000. This means that while direct labor makes up only 5% of our total product cost, it drives all our costs. In addition, these rates give my design engineers incentives to “design out” direct labor by using machine technology. Yet, over the past years as we have had less and less direct labor, the overhead rate keeps going up and up. I won’t be surprised if next year the rate is $4,000 per direct labor hour. I’m also concerned because small errors in our estimates of the direct labor content can have a large impact on our estimated costs. Just a 30-minute error in our estimate of assembly time is worth $1,500. Small mistakes in our direct labor time estimates really swing our bids around. I think this puts us at a disadvantage when we are going after business.

1. What is the engineer’s concern about the overhead rate going “up and up”?

2. What did the engineer mean about the large overhead rate being a disadvantage when placing bids and seeking new business?

3. What do you think is a possible solution?

hoover inc uses a job order coding system the company s inventory balances on februa 465549

Hoover Inc. uses a job-order coding system. The company’s inventory balances on February 1, the start of its fiscal year, were as follows:

Raw Materials Inventory $69,325

Work in Process Inventory $55,100

Finished Goods Inventory $81,256

During the year, the following transactions were completed:

a. Raw materials were purchased on account, $215,221.

b. Raw materials were issued from the storeroom for use in production, $198,000 (70% direct and 30% indirect).

c. Employee salaries and wages were accrued as follows: direct labor, $243,300; indirect labor, $98,750; and selling and administrative salaries, $72,340.

d. Utility costs were incurred in the factory, $79,233.

e. Advertising costs were incurred. $110,600.

f. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $35,000 (80% related to factory operations, and 20% related to selling and administrative activities).

g. Depreciation was recorded, $192,100 (75% related to factory assets, and 25% related to selling and administrative assets).

h. Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs at the rate of 160% of direct labor cost.

i. Goods that cost $720,200 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were transferred to the finished goods warehouse.

j. Sales for the year totaled $1,293,300 and were all on account. The total cost to manufacture these goods according to their job cost sheets was $725,825.

Submit your assignment as an Excel spreadsheet with each tab labeled by item number. Demonstrate the following:

1. Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions for the year.

2. Prepare the T-accounts for raw materials inventory, work in process inventory, finished goods inventory, manufacturing overhead, and cost of goods sold. Don’t forget to enter the beginning balances in the inventory accounts.

3. Is manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close this balance to cost of goods sold.

at the end of 2013 dub s wind generator co had a 40 000 debit balance in its manufac 465550

(Underapplied or overapplied overhead) At the end of 2013, Dub’s Wind Generator Co. had a $40,000 debit balance in its manufacturing overhead control account. Overhead is applied to products based on direct labor cost. Relevant account balance information at year end follows:

Work in process inventory finished inventory cost of goods sold

Direct material $20,000 $80,000 $120,000

Direct labor $10,000 $40,000 50,000

Factory overhead 20,000 80,000 100,000

Total 50,000 200,000 270,000

a. What predetermined OH rate was used during the year?

b. Provide arguments to be used for deciding whether to prorate the balance in the overhead account at the year end

c. Prorate the overhead account balance based on the relative balances of the appropriate accounts

d. Identify some possible reasons that the company had a debit balance in the overhead account at the end of the year.

the management of drummer corporation is considering dropping product d84l data from 465553

The management of Drummer Corporation is considering dropping product D84L. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.

Sales $800,000

Variable Expenses $440,000

Fixed Manufacturing Expenses $248,000

Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses $184,000

All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $201,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $156,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product D84L is discontinued.

Required:

What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income if product D84L were dropped? Should the product be dropped?

the information that follows pertains to consumer products for the year ended decemb 465554

The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 19X6.

Inventory, 1/1/X6 24,000 units

Units manufactured 80,000

Units sold 82,000

Inventory, 12/31/X6 ? units

Manufacturing costs:

Direct materials $3 per unit

Direct labor $5 per unit

Variable factory overhead $9 per unit

Fixed factory overhead $280,000

Selling & administrative expenses:

Variable $2 per unit

Fixed $136,000

The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.

Instructions:

a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.

b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:

1. Direct costing.

2. Absorption costing.

c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using direct costing.

d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using absorption costing.

the following cost data pertain to 19×6 operations of heritage products 465557

The following cost data pertain to 19X6 operations of Heritage Products:

Quarter 1

Quarter 2

Quarter 3

Quarter 4

Quarter 5

Shipping costs

$58,200

$58,620

$60,125

$59,400

Orders shipped

120

140

175

150

The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.

a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.

b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.

c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 19X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.

general corporation employs a job order cost system on may 1 the following balances 465558

Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;

Work in process

$35,200

Finished goods

86,900

Cost of goods sold

128,700

Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Job No.

Amount

Job No.

Amount

101

$5,000

101

$7,800

115

19,500

103

20,800

116

36,200

115

42,000

Other

35,800

116

18,000

$96,500 Other 25,900 $114,500

Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “”other”” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “”other”” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.

General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.

Instructions:

a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.

b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.

c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.

d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.

cleveland metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production a 465560

Cost flows and overhead application

Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.

• Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.

• Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.

• Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.

• The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.

a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.

b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.

shelton engineering completed the following transactions in the month of june 465561

Shelton Engineering completed the following transactions in the month of June.

a. Shania Shelton, the owner, invested $105,000 cash, office equipment with a value of $6,000, and $45,000 of drafting equipment to launch the business.

b. Purchased land worth $54,000 for an office by paying $5,400 cash and signing a long-term note payable for $48,600.

c. Purchased a portable building with $75,000 cash and moved it onto the land acquired in b.

d. Paid $6,000 cash for the premium on an 18-month insurance policy.

e. Completed and delivered a set of plans for a client and collected $5,700 cash.

f. Purchased $22,500 of additional drafting equipment by paying $10,500 cash and signing a longterm note payable for $12,000.

g. Completed $12,000 of engineering services for a client. This amount is to be received in 30 days.

h. Purchased $2,250 of additional office equipment on credit.

i. Completed engineering services for $18,000 on credit.

j. Received a bill for rent of equipment that was used on a recently completed job. The $1,200 rent must be paid within 30 days.

k. Collected $7,200 cash in partial payment from the client described in transaction g.

l. Paid $1,500 cash for wages to a drafting assistant.

m. Paid $2,250 cash to settle the account payable created in transaction h.

n. Paid $675 cash for minor repairs to the drafting equipment.

o. Shelton withdrew $9,360 cash for personal use.

p. Paid $1,500 cash for wages to a drafting assistant.

q. Paid $3,000 cash for advertisements in the local newspaper during June.

Required

1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use the account titles listed in part 2).

2. Open the following accounts—their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Prepaid Insurance (108); Office Equipment (163); Drafting Equipment (164); Building (170); Land (172); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable (250); S. Shelton, Capital (301); S. Shelton, Withdrawals (302); Engineering Fees Earned (402); Wages Expense (601); Equipment Rental Expense (602); Advertising Expense (603); and Repairs Expense (604). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the accounts and enter the balance after each posting.

3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of this month’s operations.

anderson corporation was organized early in 2000 the articles of incorporation autho 465563

Anderson Corporation was organized early in 2000. The articles of incorporation authorize 30,000 shares of $100 par value, 10% cumulative preferred stock and 600,000 shares of $5 par value common stock. The following transactions affecting stockholders’ equity were completed during the first year:

1. Issued 50 shares of preferred stock at par value as payment for legal services.

2. Issued 4,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share and 800 shares of preferred stock at par.

3. Exchanged 10,000 shares of common stock for land with an appraised value of $120,000 and a building with an appraised value of $90,000

4. Declared the required cash dividend on preferred stock and a $2 per share dividend on common stock.

5. Closed the $200,000 credit balance in the Income Summary Account.

Required

a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.

b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet.

portia carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters 465565

Portia Carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters. Carter has delegated decision-making authority to the theater managers for all decisions except those relating to capital expenditures and film selection. The theater managers’ compensation depends on the profitability of their theaters. Max Burgman, the manager of the Park Theater, had the following master budget and actual results for the month.

Master Actual

Budget Results

Tickets sold 120,000 110,000

Revenue–tickets $ 840,000 $ 880,000

Revenue–concessions 480,000 330,000

Total revenue $1,320,000 $1,210,000

Controllable variable costs

Concessions 120,000 99,000

Direct labor 420,000 330,000

Variable overhead 540,000 550,000

Contribution margin $ 240,000 $ 231,000

Controllable fixed costs

Rent 55,000 55,000

Other administrative expenses 45,000 50,000

Theater operating income $ 140,000 $ 126,000

1. Assuming that the theaters are profit centers, prepare a performance report for the Park Theater using the chart below. Include a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget.

2. Evaluate Burgman’s performance as a manager.

3. Assume that the managers are assigned responsibility for capital expenditures and that the theaters are thus investment centers. Park Theater is expected to generate a desired ROI of at least 6 percent on average invested assets of $2,000,000.

a. Compute the theater’s return on investment and residual income using the chart below.

b. Using the ROI and residual income, evaluate Burgman’s performance as a manager.

in january 2012 the management of sarah company concludes that it has sufficient cas 465569

PE-2 In January 2012, the management of Sarah Company concludes that it has sufficient cash to purchase some short-term investments in debt and stock securities. During the year, the following transactions occurred.

Feb. 1 Purchased 1,200 shares of NJF common stock for $50,600 plus brokerage fees of $1,000.

Mar. 1 Purchased 500 shares of SEK common stock for $18,000 plus brokerage fees of $500.

Apr. 1 Purchased 70 $1,000, 8% CRT bonds for $70,000 plus $1,200 brokerage fees. Interest is payable semiannually on April 1 and October 1.

July 1 Received a cash dividend of $0.80 per share on the NJF common stock.

Aug. 1 Sold 200 shares of NJF common stock at $42 per share less brokerage fees of $350.

Sept. 1 Received $2 per share cash dividend on the SEK common stock.

Oct. 1 Received the semiannual interest on the CRT bonds.

Oct. 1 Sold the CRT bonds for $77,000 less $1,300 brokerage fees.

At December 31, the fair values of the NJF and SEK common stocks were $39 and $30 per share, respectively.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions and post to the accounts Debt Investments and Stock Investments. (Use the T account form.)

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, to report the investments at fair value. All securities are considered to be trading securities.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of investment securities at December 31, 2012.

(d) Identify the income statement accounts and give the statement classification of each account.

the comparative statements of jetson company are shown below 465570

The comparative statements of Jetson Company are shown below.

JETSON COMPANY

Income Statements

For the Years Ended December 31

2012

2011

Net sales

$780,000

$624,000

Cost of goods sold

440,000

405,600

Gross profit

340,000

218,400

Selling and administrative expense

176,880

149,760

Income from operations

163,120

68,640

Other expenses and losses

Interest expense

9,920

7,200

Income before income taxes

153,200

61,440

Income tax expense

38,000

14,000

Net income

$115,200

$ 47,440

JETSON COMPANY

Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Current assets Cash

$23,100

$ 21,600

Short-term investments

44,800

33,000

Accounts receivable

106,200

83,800

Inventory

116,400

74,000

Total current assets

290,500

212,400

Plant assets (net)

485,300

439,600

Total assets

775,800

$652,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

$138,200

$132,000

Income taxes payable

$25,300

24,000

Total current liabilities

163,500

156,000

Bonds payable

132,000

120,000

Total liabilities

295,500

276,000

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock ($10 par)

150,000

130,000

Retained earnings

330,300

246,000

Total stockholders’ equity

480,300

376,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$775,800

$652,000

All sales were on account. Net cash provided by operating activities was $108,000. Capital expenditures were $47,000, and cash dividends were $30,900.

Instructions

Compute the following ratios for 2012.

(a) Earnings per share.

(b) Return on common stockholders’ equity.

(c) Return on assets.

(d) Current.

(e) Receivables turnover.

(f) Average collection period.

(g) Inventory turnover.

(h) Days in inventory.

(i) Times interest earned.

(j) Asset turnover.

(k) Debt to total assets.

(l) Current cash debt coverage.

(m) Cash debt coverage.

(n) Free cash flow.

gagliano is introducing a new product using either a capital intensive method or a l 465504

Gagliano is introducing a new product using either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method, which will not affect the quality of the product. Estimated manufacturing costs as follows:

Capital-Intensive

Direct Materials $5/unit

Direct Labor $6/unit

Variable Overhead $3/unit

Fixed Manufacturing Costs $2,508,000.

Labor-Intensive

Direct Materials $5.50/unit

Direct Labor $8.00/unit

Variable Overhead $4.50/unit

Manufacturing Costs $1,538,000

Introductory unit sales price of $30. Incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2/unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method.

Instructions:

(a) Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Gagliano Company uses the: (1) capital-intensive method (2) labor-intensive method.

(b) Determine annual unit sales volume at which they would be indifferent between the two methods.

(c) Explain when both should be employed.

this is the trial balance of slocombe company on september 30 465505

P3-6A This is the trial balance of Slocombe Company on September 30.

SLOCOMBE COMPANY

Trial Balance

September 30, 2010

Debit Credit

Cash $8,300

Accounts Receivable 2,600

Supplies 2,100

Equipment 8,000

Accounts Payable $ 5,100

Unearned Revenue 900

Common Stock 15,000

$21,000 $21,000

The October transactions were as follows.

Oct. 5 Received $1,300 in cash from customers for accounts receivable due.

10 Billed customers for services performed $5,100.

15 Paid employee salaries $1,400.

17 Performed $600 of services for customers who paid in advance in August.

20 Paid $1,500 to creditors for accounts payable due.

29 Paid a $300 cash dividend.

31 Paid utilities $500.

Hint: Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a general ledger using T accounts. Enter the opening balances in the ledger accounts as of October 1. Provision should be made for these additional accounts: Dividends, Service Revenue, Salaries Expense, and Utilities Expense.

(b) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.

(c) Post to the ledger accounts.

(d) Prepare a trial balance on October 31, 2010.

a tabular analysis of the transactions made during august 2010 by witten company dur 465506

A tabular analysis of the transactions made during August 2010 by Witten Company during its first month of operation.

Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

Office Accounts Common Retained Earnings

Cash + A/R + Supp. + Equip. = Payable + Stock + Rev. – Exp. – Div.

1. +$20,000 +$20,000 Com. Stock

2. -1,000 +$5,000 +$4,000

3. -750 +$750

4. +4,400 +$5,400 +$9,800 Serv. Rev.

5. -1,500 -1,500

6. -2,000 -$2,000 Div.

7. -800 -$ 800 Rent Exp.

8. +450 -450

9. -3,000 -3,000 Sal. Exp.

10. +500 -500 Util. Exp.

Hint: Analyze transaction and compare net income (SO 1)

Instructions

(a) describe each transaction

(b) Determine how much stockholder’s equity increased for the month

(c) Compute the net income for the month

the management of pacific utilities inc is considering two capital investment projec 465507

The management of Pacific Utilities Inc. is considering two capital investment projects. The estimated net cash flows from each project are as follows:

Year

Generating Unit

Distribution

Network Expansion

1

$370,000

$280,000

2

370,000

280,000

3

370,000

280,000

4

370,000

280,000

The generating unit requires an investment of $1,172,900, while the distribution network expansion requires an investment of $850,360. No residual value is expected from either project.

Required:

1a. Compute the net present value for each project. Use a rate of 6% and the present value of an annuity of $1 in above table. If required, round to the nearest dollar.

1b. Compute a present value index for each project. If required, round your answers to two decimal places.

2. Determine the internal rate of return for each project by (a) computing a present value factor for an annuity of $1 and (b) using the present value of an annuity of $1 in above table. If required, round your present value factor answers to three decimal places and internal rate of return to the nearest percent.

3. What advantage does the internal rate of return method have over the net present value method in comparing projects?

world tec company sells electronics over the internet the international division is 465508

World-Tec Company sells electronics over the Internet. The International Division is organized as a cost center. The budget for the International Division for the month ended March 31, 2012, is as follows (in thousands):

Customer service salaries

$ 325,000

Insurance and property taxes

68,250

Distribution salaries

519,250

Marketing salaries

612,125

Engineer salaries

498,125

Warehouse wages

348,800

Equipment depreciation

109,400

Total

$2,481,450

During March, the costs incurred in the International Division were as follows:

Customer service salaries

$ 416,700

Insurance and property taxes

66,200

Distribution salaries

514,000

Marketing salaries

685,500

Engineer salaries

488,100

Warehouse wages

334,900

Equipment depreciation

109,375

Total

$2,614,775

Required:

1. Prepare a budget performance report for the director of the International Division for the month of March. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.

2. For which costs might the director be expected to request supplemental reports?

tiger equipment inc a manufacturer of construction equipment prepared the following 465509

Tiger Equipment Inc., a manufacturer of construction equipment, prepared the following factory overhead cost budget for the Welding Department for May 2012. The company expected to operate the department at 100% of normal capacity of 7,000 hours.

Variable Costs:

Indirect factory wages

$22,050

Power and light

12,600

Indirect Materials

10,500

Total Variable Cost

$45,150

Fixed Costs:

Supervisory salaries

$12,000

Depreciation of plant and equipment

31,450

Insurance and property taxes

9,750

Total fixed costs

$53,200

Total factory overhead

$98,350

During May, the department operated at 7,400 standard hours, and the factory overhead costs incurred were indirect factory wages, $23,580; power and light, $13,120; indirect materials, $11,310; supervisory salaries, $12,000; depreciation of plant and equipment, $31,450; and insurance and property taxes, $9,750.

Required:

Prepare a factory overhead cost variance report for May. To be useful for cost control, the budgeted amounts should be based on 7,400 hours.

extreme camping company manufactures three sizes of extreme weather tents small s me 465510

Extreme Camping Company manufactures three sizes of extreme weather tents—small (S), medium (M), and large (L). The income statement has consistently indicated a net loss for the M size, and management is considering three proposals: (1) continue Size M, (2) discontinue Size M and reduce total output accordingly, or (3) discontinue Size M and conduct an advertising campaign to expand the sales of Size S so that the entire plant capacity can continue to be used.

If Proposal 2 is selected and Size M is discontinued and production curtailed, the annual fixed production costs and fixed operating expenses could be reduced by $57,600 and $40,300, respectively. If Proposal 3 is selected, it is anticipated that an additional annual expenditure of $43,200 for the rental of additional warehouse space would yield an increase of 130% in Size S sales volume. It is also assumed that the increased production of Size S would utilize the plant facilities released by the discontinuance of Size M.

AND SO ON

1. Prepare an income statement for the past year in the variable costing format.

2. Based on the income statement prepared in (1) and the other data presented, determine the amount by which total annual income from operations would be reduced below its present level if Proposal 2 is accepted.

3. Prepare an income statement in the variable costing format, indicating the projected annual income from operations if Proposal 3 is accepted. The expenditure of $43,200 for the rental of additional warehouse space can be added to the fixed operating expenses.

4. By how much would total annual income increase above its present level if Proposal 3 is accepted?

the demand for solvent one of numerous products manufactured by hipp industries inc 465511

The demand for solvent, one of numerous products manufactured by Hipp Industries Inc., has dropped sharply because of recent competition from a similar product. The company’s chemists are currently completing tests of various new formulas, and it is anticipated that the manufacture of a superior product can be started on June 1, one month in the future. No changes will be needed in the present production facilities to manufacture the new product because only the mixture of the various materials will be changed.

The controller has been asked by the president of the company for advice on whether to continue production during May or to suspend the manufacture of solvent until June 1. The controller has assembled the following pertinent data:

Hipp Industries Inc.

Income Statement-Solvent

For the Month Ended April 31,2013

Sales (2,800 units)

$215,600

Cost of good sold

187,320

Gross profit

$28,280

Selling and administrative expenses

41,780

Loss from operations

$(13,500)

The production costs and selling and administrative expenses, based on production of 2,800 units in April, are as follows:

Direct Materials $30.00 Per unit

Direct labor 10.50 per unit

Variable manufacturing cost 9.90 per unit

Variable selling and administrative expenses 5.60 Per unit

Fixed manufacturing cost $46,200 for April

Fixed selling and administrative expense 26,100 For April

Sales for May are expected to drop about 25% below those of the preceding month. No significant changes are anticipated in the fixed costs or variable costs per unit. No extra costs will be incurred in discontinuing operations in the portion of the plant associated with solvent. The inventory of solvent at the beginning and end of May is expected to be inconsequential.

1. Prepare an estimated income statement in absorption costing form for May for solvent, assuming that production continues during the month. Round amounts to two decimals. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.

2. Prepare an estimated income statement in variable costing form for May for solvent, assuming that production continues during the month. Round amounts to two decimals. Enter all amounts as positive numbers

3. What would be the estimated loss in income from operations if the solvent production were temporarily suspended for May?

the budget director of outdoor chef grill company requests estimates of sales produc 465512

The budget director of Outdoor Chef Grill Company requests estimates of sales, production, and other operating data from the various administrative units every month. Selected information concerning sales and production for May 2012 is summarized as follows:

a. Estimated sales for May by sales territory:

b. Estimated inventories at May 1:

c. Desired inventories at May 31:

d. Direct materials used in production:

e. Anticipated purchase price for direct materials:

f. Direct labor requirements:

Required;

1. Prepare a sales budget for May.

2. Prepare a production budget for May.

3. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for May.

4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for May

leekee shipyards has a new barnacle removing product for ocean going vessels 465515

Leekee Shipyards has a new barnacle removing product for ocean going vessels. The company invests $1,200,000 in operating assets and plans to produce and sell 400,000 units per year. Leekee wants to make a return on investment of 20% each year. Leekee needs to know what price to charge for this product.

Use the absorption costing approach to determine the markup necessary to make the desired return on investment based on the following information:

Per Unit Total

Direct Materials $ 2.00

Direct Labor $ 1.50

Variable Manufacturing Overhead $ 1.00

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead $ 100,000

Variable Selling and Administrative Expense $ 0.10

Fixed Selling and Administrative Expense $ 100,000

following are selected financial data in thousands of dollars for the hunter corpora 465518

Following are selected financial data in thousands of dollars for the Hunter Corporation.

2012

2011

Current assets

$500

$400

Fixed assets, net

700

600

Total assets

1,200

1,000

Current liabilities

300

200

Long-term debt

200

200

Common equity

700

600

Total liabilities and equity

$1,200

$1,000

Net sales

$1,500

$1,200

Total expenses

1,390

1,100

Net income

110

100

a. Calculate Hunter’s rate of return on total assets in 2012 and in 2011. Did the ratio improve or worsen?

b. Diagram the expanded Du Pont system for Hunter for 2012. Insert the appropriate dollar amounts wherever possible.

c. Use the Du Port system to calculate the return on assets for the two years, and determine why they changed.

use the following information to construct an income statement 465520

Use the following information to construct an income statement:

Interest

$25,000

Sales

$950,000

Income tax rate

25%

Selling and marketing expenses

$16,000

General & administrative expenses

$200,000

Gross profit

$550,000

Depreciation

$30,000

Cost of Goods sold

$400,000

you expect to receive a payment of 1 000 000 in british pounds after six months the 465525

You expect to receive a payment of 1,000,000 in British pounds after six months the pound is currently worth $1.60 (i.e. 1 pound = $1.60), but the six-month futures price is $1.56 (i.e. 1 pound = $1.56). You expect the price of the pound to decline (i.e. the value of the dollar to rise.) If this expectation is fulfilled, you will suffer a loss when the pounds are converted into dollars when you receive them six months in the future.

a. Given the current price, what is the expected payment in dollars?

b. Given the futures price, how much would you receive in dollars?

c. If, after six months the pound is worth $1.35, what is your loss from the decline in the value of the pound?

d. To avoid this potential loss, you decide to hedge and sell a contract for the future delivery of pounds at the going futures price of $1.56. What is the cost to you of this protection from the possible decline in the value of the pound?

e. If, after hedging, the price of the pound falls to $1.35, what is the maximum amount that you lose? Why is your answer different from (c)?

f. If, after hedging the price of the pound rises to $1.80, how much do you gain from your position?

g. How would your answer to part (f) be different if you had not hedged and the price of the pound had risen to $1.80?

esplanade company s credit sales have the following historical pattern 465531

Esplanade Company’s credit sales have the following historical pattern:

70% Collected in the month of sale

15% Collected in the first month after sale

10% Collected in the second month after sale

4% Collected in the third month after sale

1% Uncollectible

These sales on open account (credit sales) have been budgeted for the last six months in 2010:

July

$60,000

August

$70,000

September

$80,000

October

$90,000

November

$100,000

December

$85,000

1) Determine the estimated total cash collections from accounts receivable during

October 2010.

2) Compute the estimated total cash collections during the fourth quarter from credit sales of the fourth quarter.

on january 1 20×1 prange company acquired 80 of the common stock of seaman company f 465532

On January 1, 20X1, Prange Company acquired 80% of the common stock of Seaman Company for $500,000. On this date Seaman had total owners’ equity of $400,000. Any excess of cost over book value is attributable to patent, which is to be amortized over 20 years.

During 20X1 and 20X2, Prange has appropriately accounted for its investment in Seaman using the simple equity method.

On January 1, 20X2, Prange held merchandise acquired from Seaman for $30,000. During 20X2, Seaman sold merchandise to Prange for $100,000, of which $20,000 is held by Prange on December 31, 20X2. Seaman’s gross profit on all sales is 40%.

On December 31, 20X2, Prange still owes Seaman $20,000 for merchandise acquired in December.

Required:

Complete the Figure 4-2 worksheet for consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X2.

jensen company forecasts a need for 200 000 pounds of cotton in may 465533

Jensen Company forecasts a need for 200,000 pounds of cotton in May. On April 11, the company acquires a call option to buy 200,000 pounds of cotton in May at a strike price of $0.3765 per pound for a premium of $814. Spot prices and options values at selected dates follow:

April 11 April 30 May 3

Spot price per pound $0.3718 $0.3801 $0.3842

Fair value of option 814 1,137 1,689

Jensen Company settled the option on May 3 and purchased 200,000 pounds of cotton on May 17 at a spot price of $0.3840 per pound. During the last half of May and the beginning of June the cotton was used to produce cloth. One third of the cloth was sold in June. The change in the option’s time value is excluded from the assessment of hedge effectiveness.

Required:

a. Prepare all journal entries necessary through June to record the above transactions and events.

b. What would the effect on earnings have been if the forecasted purchase were not hedged?

north shore railroad operates between chicago and upper michigan and wisconsin 465534

North Shore Railroad operates between Chicago and upper Michigan and Wisconsin. Dallas Ingold, purchasing manager of North Shore Railroad, anticipates the price of diesel fuel will increase over the next few months. On September 4th, Ingold purchased an out-of-the-money November call option for $1,100. The option has a notional amount of 80,000 barrels and a strike price of $2.16 per barrel. Diesel fuel spot rates and option values at selected dates follow:

Spot Rate Option

Date per Barrel Value

September 30 $2.17 $1,130

October 31 2.13 1,026

November 27 2.19 2,400

a. For each of the above dates, calculate the intrinsic value and the time value of the option.

b. How much is the Intrinsic Value on September 4th.

oneida furniture company deposits all cash receipts each wednesday and friday in a n 465535

Oneida Furniture Company deposits all cash receipts each Wednesday and Friday in a night depository, after banking hours. The data required to reconcile the bank statement as of June 30 have been taken from various documents and records and are reproduced as follows. The sources of the data are printed in capital letters. All checks were written for payments on account.

Instructions

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of June 30. If errors in recording deposits or checks are discovered, assume that the errors were made by the company. Assume that all deposits are from cash sales. All checks are written to satisfy accounts payable.

2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.

3. What is the amount of Cash that should appear on the balance sheet as of June 30?

4. Assume that a canceled check for $270 has been incorrectly recorded by the bank as $720. Briefly explain how the error would be included in a bank reconciliation and how it should be corrected.

the cash account for online medical co at june 30 2012 indicated a balance of 9 375 465536

The cash account for Online Medical Co. at June 30, 2012, indicated a balance of $9,375. The bank statement indicated a balance of $10,760 on June 30, 2012. Comparing the bank statement and the accompanying canceled checks and memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:

a. Checks outstanding totaled $3,900.

b. A deposit of $4,000, representing receipts of June 30, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.

c. The bank had collected $2,100 on a note left for collection. The face of the note was $2,000.

d. A check for $550 returned with the statement had been incorrectly recorded by Online Medical Co. as $500. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Hirsch Co. for the purchase on account.

e. A check drawn for $60 had been erroneously charged by the bank as $600.

f. Bank service charges for June amounted to $25.

Instructions

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation

2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.

3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Online Medical Co. on June 30, 2012, what amount should be reported as cash?

transactions for petty cash cash short and over 465537

Transactions for petty cash, cash short and over

Picasso Restoration Company completed the following selected transactions during

August 2012:

Aug. 1. Established a petty cash fund of $750.

10. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $9,780. The actual cash received from cash sales was $9,800.

31. Petty cash on hand was $240. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following disbursements, each evidenced by a petty cash receipt:

Aug. 3. Store supplies, $251.

7. Express charges on merchandise sold, $60 (Delivery Expense).

9. Office supplies, $20.

13. Office supplies, $30.

19. Postage stamps, $11 (Office Supplies).

21. Repair to office file cabinet lock, $40 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).

Aug. 22. Postage due on special delivery letter, $18 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).

24. Express charges on merchandise sold, $50 (Delivery Expense).

30. Office supplies, $15.

31. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled

$11,200. The actual cash received from cash sales was $11,130.

31. Decreased the petty cash fund by $100.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions.

a good bit of relatively simple arithmetic is involved in some of these problems and 465408

A good bit of relatively simple arithmetic is involved in some of these problems, and although the calculations are simple, it will take students some time to set up the problem and do the arithmetic. We allow for this when assigning problems for a timed test.

Also, students must use a number of definitions to answer some of the questions. To avoid excessive memorization, we provide students with a list of formulas and definitions for use on exams. Problems with * in the topic line are nonalgorithmic.

Bauer Software’s current balance sheet shows total common equity of $5,125,000. The company has 530,000 shares of stock outstanding, and they sell at a price of $27.50 per share. By how much do the firm’s market and book values per share differ?

a. $17.83

b. $18.72

c. $19.66

d. $20.64

e. $21.67

for managerial purposes i e making decisions regarding the firm s operations 465411

For managerial purposes, i.e., making decisions regarding the firm’s operations, the standard financial statements as prepared by accountants under generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) are often modified and used to create alternative data and metrics that provide a somewhat different picture of a firm’s operations. Related to these modifications, which of the following statements is CORRECT?

a. The standard statements make adjustments to reflect the effects of inflation on asset values, and these adjustments are normally carried into any adjustment that managers make to the standard statements.

b. The standard statements focus on accounting income for the entire corporation, not cash flows, and the two can be quite different during any given accounting period. However, the firm’s value is based on its future cash flows. After all, future cash flows tells us how much the firm can distribute to its investors.

c. The standard statements provide useful information on the firm’s individual operating units, but management needs more information on the firm’s overall operations than the standard statements provide.

d. The standard statements focus on cash flows, but managers should be less concerned with cash flows than with accounting income as defined by GAAP.

e. The best feature of standard statements is that, if they are prepared under GAAP, the data are always consistent from firm to firm. Thus, under GAAP, there is no room for accountants to “adjust” the results to make earnings look better.

assume that besley golf equipment commenced operations on january 1 2008 465413

Assume that Besley Golf Equipment commenced operations on January 1, 2008, and it was granted permission to use the same depreciation calculations for shareholder reporting and income tax purposes. The company planned to depreciate its fixed assets over 15 years, but in December 2008 management realized that the assets would last for only 10 years. The firm’s accountants plan to report the 2008 financial statements based on this new information. How would the new depreciation assumption affect the company’s financial statements?

a. The firm’s reported net fixed assets would increase.

b. The firm’s EBIT would increase.

c. The firm’s reported 2008 earnings per share would increase.

d. The firm’s cash position in 2008 and 2009 would increase.

e. The provision will increase the company’s tax payments.

the nantell corporation just purchased an expensive piece of equipment 465414

The Nantell Corporation just purchased an expensive piece of equipment. Assume that the firm planned to depreciate the equipment over 5 years on a straight-line basis, but Congress then passed a provision that requires the company to depreciate the equipment on a straight-line basis over 7 years. Other things held constant, which of the following will occur as a result of this Congressional action? Assume that the company uses the same depreciation method for tax and stockholder reporting purposes

a. Nantell’s taxable income will be lower.

b. Nantell’s operating income (EBIT) will increase.

c. Nantell’s cash position will improve (increase).

d. Nantell’s reported net income for the year will be lower.

e. Nantell’s tax liability for the year will be lower.

assume that besley golf equipment commenced operations on january 1 2008 and it was 465415

Assume that Besley Golf Equipment commenced operations on January 1, 2008, and it was granted permission to use the same depreciation calculations for shareholder reporting and income tax purposes. The company planned to depreciate its fixed assets over 15 years, but in December 2008 management realized that the assets would last for only 10 years. The firm’s accountants plan to report the 2008 financial statements based on this new information. How would the new depreciation assumption affect the company’s financial statements?

a. The firm’s reported net fixed assets would increase.

b. The firm’s EBIT would increase.

c. The firm’s reported 2008 earnings per share would increase.

d. The firm’s cash position in 2008 and 2009 would increase.

e. The provision will increase the company’s tax payments.

the nantell corporation just purchased an expensive piece of equipment 465416

The Nantell Corporation just purchased an expensive piece of equipment. Assume that the firm planned to depreciate the equipment over 5 years on a straight-line basis, but Congress then passed a provision that requires the company to depreciate the equipment on a straight-line basis over 7 years. Other things held constant, which of the following will occur as a result of this Congressional action? Assume that the company uses the same depreciation method for tax and stockholder reporting purposes

a. Nantell’s taxable income will be lower.

b. Nantell’s operating income (EBIT) will increase.

c. Nantell’s cash position will improve (increase).

d. Nantell’s reported net income for the year will be lower.

e. Nantell’s tax liability for the year will be lower.

assume that congress recently passed a provision that will enable bev s beverages in 465417

Assume that Congress recently passed a provision that will enable Bev’s Beverages Inc. (BBI) to double its depreciation expense for the upcoming year but will have no effect on its sales revenue or the tax rate. Prior to the new provision, BBI’s net income was forecasted to be $4 million. Which of the following best describes the impact of the new provision on BBI’s financial statements versus the statements without the provision? Assume that the company uses the same depreciation method for tax and stockholder reporting purposes.

a. The provision will reduce the company’s cash flow.

b. The provision will increase the company’s tax payments.

c. The provision will increase the firm’s operating income (EBIT).

d. The provision will increase the company’s net income.

e. Net fixed assets on the balance sheet will decrease.

below are the 2007 and 2008 year end balance sheets for tran enterprises 465420

Below are the 2007 and 2008 year-end balance sheets for Tran Enterprises:

Assets :

2008

2007

Cash

$ 200,000

$ 170,000

Accounts receivable

864,000

700,000

Inventories

2,000,000

1,400,000

Total current assets

$3,064,000

$2,270,000

Net fixed assets

6,000,000

5,600,000

Total assets

$9,064,000

$7,870,000

Liabilities and equity:

Accounts payable

$1,400,000

$1,090,000

Notes payable

1,600,000

1,800,000

Total current liabilities

$3,000,000

$2,890,000

Long-term debt

2,400,000

2,400,000

Common stock

3,000,000

2,000,000

Retained earnings

664,000

580,000

Total common equity

$3,664,000

$2,580,000

Total liabilities and equity

$9,064,000

$7,870,000

The firm has never paid a dividend on its common stock, and it issued $2,400,000 of 10-year, non-callable, long-term debt in 2007. As of the end of 2008, none of the principal on this debt had been repaid. Assume that the company’s sales in 2007 and 2008 were the same. Which of the following statements must be CORRECT?

a. The firm increased its short-term bank debt in 2008.

b. The firm issued long-term debt in 2008.

c. The firm issued new common stock in 2008.

d. The firm repurchased some common stock in 2008.

e. The firm had negative net income in 2008.

the budget committee of clipboard office supply has assembled the following data 465446

The budget committee of Clipboard Office Supply has assembled the following data. As the business manager, you must prepare the budgeted income statements for May and June 2011.

a. Sales in April were $50,000. You forecast that monthly sales will increase 2.0% in May and 2.4% in June.

b. Clipboard maintains inventory of $9,000 plus 25% of sales revenue budgeted for the following month. Monthly purchases average 50% of sales revenue in that same month. Actual inventory on April 30 is $13,000, sales budgeted for July are $65,000.

c. Monthly salaries amount to $3,000. Sales commissions equal 4% of sales for that month. Combine salaries and commissions into a single figure.

d. Other monthly expenses are as follows:

Rent expense $2,600, paid as incurred

Depreciation expense $ 300

Insurance expense $ 200, expiration of prepaid amount

Income tax 20% of operating income

Requirement:

1. Prepare Clipboard Office Supply’s budgeted income statements for May and June. Show cost of goods sold computations. (Round all amounts to the nearest $100. (Round amounts ending in $50 or more upward, and amounts ending in less than downward). For example, budgeted May sales are $51,000 ($50,000 x 1.02), and June sales are $52,200 ($51,000 x 1.024)

consider the following balance sheet for games inc because games has 800 000 of reta 465449

Consider the following balance sheet, for Games Inc. Because Games has $800,000 of retained earnings, we know that the company would be able to pay cash to buy an asset with a cost of $200,000.

Cash

$50,000

Accounts payable

$100,000

Inventory

200,000

Accruals

100,000

Account receivable

250,000

Total CL

$200,000

Total CA

$500,000

Debt

200,000

Net fixed assets

$900,000

Common stock

200,000

Retained earnings

800,000

Total assets

$1,400,000

Total L & E

$1,400,000

a. True

b. False

you have the following data on three stocks shown below you decide to use the data o 465460

You have the following data on three stocks shown below. You decide to use the data on these stocks to form an index, and you want to find the average earned rate of return for 2008 on your index. If you follow the averaging procedure used to calculate the S&P 500 Index return, what would your index’s rate of return be? Hints: Rates of return are based on beginning-of-year prices, and the S&P Index is weighted by market values of the companies in the index.

Shares

Beginning Ending Outstanding

Stock Dividend Price Price (millions)

A $1.50 $30.00 $32.00 5.00

B $2.00 $28.50 $27.00 4.50

C $0.75 $20.00 $24.00 20.00

a. 16.07%

b. 16.92%

c. 17.76%

d. 18.65%

e. 19.59%

you recently sold 100 shares of microsoft stock to your brother at a family reunion 465466

You recently sold 100 shares of Microsoft stock to your brother at a family reunion. At the reunion your brother gave you a check for the stock and you gave your brother the stock certificates. Which of the following best describes this transaction?

a. This is an example of a direct transfer of capital.

b. This is an example of a primary market transaction.

c. This is an example of an exchange of physical assets.

d. This is an example of a money market transaction.

e. This is an example of a derivative market transaction.

You recently sold 100 shares of Microsoft stock to your brother at a family reunion. At the reunion your brother gave you a check for the stock and you gave your brother the stock certificates. Which of the following best describes this transaction?

a. This is an example of a direct transfer of capital.

b. This is an example of a primary market transaction.

c. This is an example of an exchange of physical assets.

d. This is an example of a money market transaction.

e. This is an example of a derivative market transaction.

which of the following actions would be likely to encourage a firm s managers to mak 465485

Which of the following actions would be likely to encourage a firm’s managers to make decisions that are in the best interests of shareholders

a. The percentage of executive compensation that comes in the form of cash is increased and the percentage coming from long-term stock options is reduced.

b. The state legislature passes a law that makes it more difficult to successfully complete a hostile takeover.

c. The percentage of the firm’s stock that is held by institutional investors such as mutual funds, pension funds, and hedge funds rather than by small individual investors rises from 10% to 80%.

d. The firm’s founder, who is also president and chairman of the board, sells 90% of her shares.

e. The firm’s board of directors gives the firm’s managers greater freedom to take whatever actions they think best without obtaining board approval.

which of the following actions would be likely to reduce conflicts of interest betwe 465487

Which of the following actions would be likely to reduce conflicts of interest between stockholders and managers

a. Congress passes a law that severely restricts hostile takeovers.

b. A firm’s compensation system is changed so that managers receive larger cash salaries but fewer long-term options to buy stock.

c. The company changes the way executive stock options are handled, with all options vesting after 2 years rather than having 20% of the options awarded vest every 2 years over a 10-year period.

d. The company’s outside auditing firm is given a lucrative year-by-year consulting contract with the company.

e. The composition of the board of directors is changed from all inside directors to all outside directors, and the directors are compensated with stock rather than cash.

which of the following actions would be most likely to reduce potential conflicts of 465488

Which of the following actions would be most likely to reduce potential conflicts of interest between stockholders and managers

a. Pay managers large cash salaries and give them no stock options.

b. Change the corporation’s formal documents to make it easier for outside investors to acquire a controlling interest in the firm through a hostile takeover.

c. Beef up the restrictive covenants in the firm’s debt agreements.

d. Eliminate a requirement that members of the board of directors must hold a high percentage of their personal wealth in the firm’s stock.

e. For a firm that compensates managers with stock options, reduce the time before options are vested, i.e., the time before options can be exercised and the shares that are received can be sold.

which of the following statements would most people in business agree with 465490

Which of the following statements would most people in business agree with?

a. A corporation’s short-run profits will almost always increase if the firm takes actions that the government has determined are in the best interests of the nation.

b. Firms and government agencies almost always agree with one another regarding the restrictions that should be placed on hiring and firing employees.

c. “Whistle blowers,” because of the courage it takes to blow the whistle, are generally promoted more rapidly than other employees.

d. It is not useful for large corporations to develop a formal set of rules defining ethical and unethical behavior.

e. Although people’s moral characters are probably developed before they are admitted to a business school, it is still useful for business schools to cover ethics, if only to give students an idea about the adverse consequences of unethical behavior to themselves, their firms, and the nation

which of the following actions would be most likely to reduce conflicts of interest 465491

Which of the following actions would be most likely to reduce conflicts of interest between stockholders and bondholders?

a.If a lower level person in a firm does something illegal, like “”cooking the books”” to understate costs and thereby artificially increase profits because he or she was ordered to do so by a superior, the lower level person cannot be prosecuted but the superior can be prosecuted.

b.There are many types of unethical business behavior. One example is where executives provide information that they know is incorrect to outsiders. It is illegal to provide such information to federally regulated banks, but it is not illegal to provide it to stockholders because they are the owners of the firm.

c. The bankruptcy of Enron Corporation, and the fraud committed by some of its officers, was much discussed, but it did not lead to any important changes in business practices.

d. If someone deliberately understates costs and thereby causes reported profits to increase, then this can cause the price of the stock to rise above its intrinsic value. The stock will probably fall in the future. Both those who participated in the fraud and the firm itself can be prosecuted.

e. Ethical behavior is not influenced by training and auditing procedures. People are either ethical or they are not, and this is what determines ethical behavior in business

the primary operating goal of a publicly owned firm trying to best serve its stockho 465492

The primary operating goal of a publicly-owned firm trying to best serve its stockholders should be to

a. Maximize managers’ own interests, which are by definition consistent with maximizing shareholders’ wealth.

b. Maximize the firm’s expected EPS, which must also maximize the firm’s price per share.

c. Minimize the firm’s risks because most stockholders dislike risk. In turn, this will maximize the firm’s stock price.

d. Use a well-structured managerial compensation package to reduce conflicts that may exist between stockholders and managers.

e. Since it is impossible to measure a stock’s intrinsic value, the text states that it is better for managers to attempt to maximize the current stock price than its intrinsic value.

the zygon corporation was recently formed to produce a semiconductor chip that forms 465497

The Zygon Corporation was recently formed to produce a semiconductor chip that forms an essential part of the personal computer manufactured by a major corporation. The direct materials are added at the start of the production process while conversion costs are added uniformly throughout the production process. June is Zygon’s first month of operations, and therefore, there was no beginning inventory. Direct materials cost for the month totaled $895,000, while conversion costs equaled $4,225,000. Accounting records indicate that 475,000 chips were started in June, and that 425,000 chips were completed.

Ending inventory was 50% complete as to conversion costs.

Required:

a. What is the total manufacturing cost per chip for June?

b. Allocate the total costs between the completed chips and the chips in ending inventory.

maverick corporation uses the weighted average method in its process costing system 465499

Maverick Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.

Work in process, beginning:

Units in beginning work-in-process inventory 400

Materials costs $6,900

Conversion costs $2,500

Percent complete for materials 80%

Percent complete for conversion 15%

Units started into production during the month 6,000

Units transferred to the next department during the month 5,600

Materials costs added during the month $112,500

Conversion costs added during the month $210,300

Ending work in process:

Units in ending work-in-process inventory 800

Percentage complete for materials 70%

Percentage complete for conversion 30%

Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department.

taxation 461843

Assignment File 1

Assignment 2

Due date: 31 December 2013

Important note

You must use word processing software (such as Microsoft Word) to prepare the

TMAs, and submit the TMAs via the Online Learning Environment (OLE). All

assignments must be uploaded to the OLE by the due date.

Failure to upload a TMA in the required format to the OLE may result in the score

of the TMA being adjusted to zero.

According to the University’s policy, no extension of the due date will be allowed

for the final TMA. This policy will be strictly enforced. Any late submission of the

final TMA will result in the score of the TMA being adjusted to zero.

Question 1 (35 marks)

You are an independent tax advisor and one of your clients, Triceratops

Toys Manufacturing Limited, has provided you with the following

information.

Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited was incorporated in Hong Kong

in 2002. The company was formed to take over the partnership business

owned by the Cheung brothers, Albert Cheung and Bernard Cheung.

Albert and Bernard each own 40% of the shares of the company and the

remaining 20% of the shares are owned by their sister, Crystal. The

original board of directors consists of the Cheung brothers and their

sister, Crystal. In addition to being directors of the company, Albert and

Bernard are responsible for the running of the company. Albert is the

managing director and is responsible for the sales operations. Bernard

holds the title of finance manager and is in charge of the company’s

finances. Their brother-in-law, Dickson Tang, is employed as the

production manager to oversee the manufacturing operations.

The company has been profitable with an annual turnover of over HK$20

million. The profits of the company have mainly been derived from

exporting toys to overseas countries. The manufacturing operations had

been carried out in Hong Kong until 31 July 2012, when the company

moved its manufacturing operations to mainland China.

The manufacturing operations in China began in August 2012. Although

the manufacturing operations are now in China, the company maintains

its purchase, sales and other administrative functions in Hong Kong.

Materials for production are either purchased in Hong Kong or imported

from overseas. They are stored in Hong Kong until they are required for

production. Then the required materials will be delivered to the factory in

China. Workers for the manufacturing operations are employed in China

except for two supervisors who have been employed by the company in

Hong Kong since 2009. Dickson Tang, as the production manager,

2 ACT B415 Taxation II

supervises the China operations. The production machines were

transferred from Hong Kong. Finished products are shipped to Hong

Kong where they are put into bags and boxes. Usually they are stored in

Hong Kong for one to two weeks before they are loaded into containers

for shipment. The shipping arrangements are made in Hong Kong. Credit

arrangement is made with a Hong Kong bank to finance the working

capital.

Being in charge of the manufacturing operations, Dickson and his wife,

Crystal, have lived in China since January 2012. Dickson was given the

responsibility of looking for an appropriate location for the new factory

in China and of arranging the necessary registrations for the company to

operate in China. A Chinese resident, Liu Chang, was appointed as a

director of the company in January 2012, assisting the company to

establish its China operations. A fee of $100,000 was paid to Liu Chang

as remuneration for the year ended 31 March 2012. Because two of the

directors, Crystal Cheung and Liu Chang, lived in China, meetings of the

board of directors have been held in China for ease of administration.

Dickson Tang has been in charge of the China production operations

since July 2012 and seldom returns to Hong Kong. He communicates

with the Hong Kong office via telephone or email. Occasionally he

returns to Hong Kong to report to Albert and was in Hong Kong for 45

days for business purposes and another 20 days for holidays during the

year ended 31 March 2013. His salaries and bonus for the year ended 31

March 2013 amount to $800,000. The company rented a flat in China for

his family to stay in and purchased medical insurance for his family. The

costs to the company of providing him with a flat and medical insurance

were $50,000 and $10,000 respectively.

Required:

a Discuss whether Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited’s profits

are subject to Hong Kong profits tax for the year of assessment

2012/13. The financial year of Triceratops Toys Manufacturing

Limited ends on 31 March each year. (12 marks)

b Is Dickson Tang liable to salaries tax for the year of assessment

2012/13? Discuss with reference to the relevant tax exemptions and

tax cases where appropriate. (8 marks)

c Assume that Dickson Tang’s income from Triceratops Toys

Manufacturing Limited is fully taxable under Hong Kong salaries tax

for the year of assessment 2012/13, determine his assessable income.

Explain your calculation and treatment of significant items.

(7 marks)

d Is Liu Chang liable to Hong Kong salaries tax for the year of

assessment 2011/12? Discuss with reference to the relevant tax

provision and/or tax case where appropriate. (8 marks)

Assignment File 3

Question 2 (25 marks)

a Tax avoidance and tax evasion are two very different concepts.

Compare and contrast the differences between tax avoidance and tax

evasion. Give two examples of each to support your discussion.

(16 marks)

b Under the Inland Revenue Ordinance, there are many provisions

targeting anti-avoidance activities. While specific anti-avoidance

provisions tackle specific situations or industries, there are the

general anti-avoidance provisions that have wide application in

different situations. Briefly explain the general anti-avoidance

provisions and cite examples or cases where the general antiavoidance

provisions are applicable. (9 marks)

Question 3 (20 marks)

A Korean Company is considering selling certain electronic gadgets to

Hong Kong in an effort to develop its overseas market. His business

consultant has advised him of the following options from a commercial

perspective:

• Option 1: Sell the products to a wholesaler in Hong Kong who would

then market the product and sell to the consumers in Hong Kong

• Option 2: Set up a wholly owned subsidiary in Hong Kong, who

would then sell products to consumers in Hong Kong

• Option 3: Set up a branch in Hong Kong for the purpose of selling to

Hong Kong consumers

• Option 4: Engage a consignment agent in Hong Kong to sell the

products through this consignment agent.

In evaluating the options, the directors of this company would like to take

into account the taxation implications of the various options as well and

come to you, a tax consultant, for advice.

Required:

Advise the directors as to the Hong Kong profits tax implications in

relation to the taxability of profits of the Korean Company, as well as the

profits accruing to the Hong Kong entity involved. You are not required

to conclude which option is the best option, as the information provided

at this stage is not detailed enough to do a thorough comparison and

determination.

Question 4 (20 marks)

For many years Mr Leung has been employed as a sales representative of

a real estate company, Hit and Run Limited (‘HAR’). At all relevant

times, he has paid salaries tax on his earnings at the standard rate. His

earnings consist of a basic salary (which must be repaid if his sales

4 ACT B415 Taxation II

results do not reach a prescribed minimum level) plus commission. His

commission earned over the past two years has been very high. He has a

wife who operates a trading business. The couple has two young children

attending schools in Hong Kong.

Mr Leung has been told that the test of deductibility for outgoings and

expenses for salaries tax purposes is ‘notoriously rigid, narrow and

restrictive.’ Mr Leung thinks that if he were subject to profits tax instead

of salaries tax he would be able to claim many deductions for outgoings

and expenses that are presently not allowable to him for salaries tax

purposes.

Mr Leung therefore approached the accountant of HAR for advice. The

accountant advised him to resign from his job with the company,

incorporate a new company, Leung Fun Limited (‘LFL’), and arrange for

LFL to enter into a new contract with HAR to provide Mr Leung’s

services as a sales representative. Under this arrangement, LFL would

receive income from HAR and claim against this all allowable expenses.

LFL would employ Mr Leung at a reasonable salary to provide the

agreed sales services on its behalf to HAR.

A few days ago, HAR’s accountant informed Mr Leung that the company

will agree to enter into the proposed arrangement on basically the same

terms as it now employs Mr Leung, but without any obligation to pay any

minimum monthly sum to LFL.

Required:

a Evaluate the comment by the accountant of HAR in respect of the

deductibility of expenses and outgoings under Hong Kong salaries

tax and profits tax. (6 marks)

b Explain in detail to Mr Leung whether there is any danger of the

Commissioner challenging the suggested arrangement and the

possible consequences, quoting the relevant sections of the Inland

Revenue Ordinance where appropriate. Further, advise Mr Leung on

what he can do to lessen the chance of the application of the relevant

Inland Revenue Ordinance provisions in a situation like this.

(14 marks)

Attachments:

amdahl corporation manufactures large scale high performance computer systems in a r 461849

Amdahl Corporation manufactures large-scale, high performance computer systems. In a recent annual report, the balance sheet included the following information (dollars in thousands):

Real World Financials

In addition, the income statement reported sales revenue of $2,158,755 ($ in thousands) for the current year. All sales are made on a credit basis. The statement of cash flows indicates that cash collected from customers during the current year was $2,230,065 ($ in thousands). There were no recoveries of accounts receivable previously written off.

Required:

1.

Compute the following (dollar amounts in thousands):

a.

The amount of uncollectibles written off by Amdahl during the current year.

b.

The amount of bad debt expense that Amdahl would include in its income statement for the current year.

c.

The approximate percentage that Amdahl used to estimate uncollectibles for the current year, assuming that it uses the income statement approach.

2.

Suppose that Amdahl had used the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles. Compute the following (dollars in thousands):

a.

The accounts receivable information that would be included in the year-end balance sheet.

b.

The amount of bad debt expense that Amdahl would include in its income statement for the current year.

case study read headline health rates as top social issue would you expect managemen 461910

Case Study Question 1 (20 marks) (500 words)

Read headline
“Health rates as top social issue”. Would you expect management to worry about attitudinal surveys, such as the one described in Headline below. Explain you answer, as well explaining how such surveys might impact on the disclosure policies of an organisation.

CANBERRA: Health has taken over from crime as the most important social issue seen to be facing Australia, figures showed yesterday.

The survey of people’s views of environmental issues found the environment rated fifth in importance—–even though three in four Australians had at least one environment concern.

The Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS) figures showed 29% of respondents believed health was the most important social issue.

This was followed by crime (24%) education and unemployment (both 16%) and environmental problems (16 %).

In 1996, crime was seen as the most important social issue, followed by health, education, unemployment, the environment.

In the latest survey, dated March 1998, health was the most important issue to older people and least important to people aged 35-44.

In general, younger people were more concerned about long-term environmental problems although 19-24 year olds, as well as 45-54 year olds were most concerned about unemployment.

But the survey said 71% of Australians were concerned with at least one specific environmental problem.

The figure was up from 68% in 1996 but down from 75% in 1992.

People living in ACT were most concerned while Tasmanians were the least concerned about environmental problems.

Air pollution continued to be the problem of greatest worry for Australians, with 32% reporting it as their major concern.

The Chronicle,

Case Study Question 2 (20 marks) 500 words

Read headline
“Think before you spend” and then, drawing on material covered in this subject, Accounting Theory, identify some ways in which you think corporations would respond to such allegations.

Here are some of the products “The Rough Guide to Ethical Shopping” believes we should think about before buying:

Beverages: Maxwell House. One of the thousands of familiar brands —-Bird’s, Jacobs, Ritz and Toblerone are others— owned by tobacco giant Philip Morris of Marlboro cigarette fame, which recently changed its name to Altria.

It denies to this day that smoking is addictive, was fined for failing to disclose political donations and was one of George Bush’s largest corporate campaign contributors.

Clothing: Nike trainers. Nike is said to have petitioned the Indonesia government for exemption from the minimum wage and has been accused of lying about labour conditions at its contractor factories.

According to Sweatshop Watch, an average Nike worker would need to put in 72,000 years of work to receive what Tiger Woods gets for one five-year contract to publicise the brand.

Food: Tiger prawns. Hugely popular nowadays in restaurants and supermarkets, tiger prawns are mostly raised in man-made pools in Bangladesh and the Philippines.

It takes 50,000 litres of water to produce a kilogram of prawn meat and the chemical additives to promote rapid growth ends up polluting the surrounding farming land.

People are routinely displaced to make way for these farms. Rape and murder have been reported in some cases.

Sport: Snooker cues. Thousands of snooker cues are made every year using wood from the Indonesian ramin tree. The ramin, which is also used for furniture and window blinds, is a rare and endangered tree listed under the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species, but continues to be logged illegally at an alarming rate.

(Irish Independent, 1 December 2004, Independent Newspapers Ireland Ltd)

CASE STUDY QUESTION 3 (20 MARKS) 500 words

Read headline “
Lay off Big Macs, radio boss tells staff” and using Legitimacy Theory as the basis of your argument, explain why a company such as McDonald’s would not want a radio station to make adverse comments about it. If the station does make adverse statements, how might McDonald’s react from a corporate disclosure perspective?

Top management at radio 2UE ordered the station’s broadcaster not to make derogatory comments about McDonald’s on air or the station would lose its $170,000 advertising account with the fast-food chain, according to a leaked in internal memo.

The memo from program director John Brennan in February reveals for the first time that the practice of tailoring editorial comment to suit 2UE’s advertisers in an internal part of the top-rating radio station’s culture.

‘It’s going to be a tough year for revenue and we need all the help we can get from everyone concerned’ the management memo says.

‘It is obviously imperative that no derogatory comments about McDonald’s are made be any broadcaster on the station. Any such comment would see an immediate cancellation of the contract’

The memo will be investigated by the Australian Authority’s inquiry into the radio station next month.

Mr Brennan’s directive appears to contravene the Commercial Radio Code of Practice, under which a radio must promote accuracy and fairness in news and current affairs programs. The code may be reviewed by the ABA in separate public hearings and may result in moves away from self-regulation.

The memo contradicts statements by 2UE chief John Conde this week about the role of station management in the scandal involving John Laws and the now defunct $1.2 million deal with Australian Bankers’ Association.

The banks’ deal with Laws also involved refraining from negative comments about the client on air.

McDonald’s spokesman John Blyth said the company was unaware the 2UE directive had issued and would never make its advertising contracts conditional on editorial comment.

The memo was addressed to Alan Jones, John Laws, John Stanley, Mike Carlton, Peter Bosly, Ray Hadly, Stan Zemanek and eight other on-air presenters.

Senior management was also party to the directive.

In a letter to the Australian yesterday, Mr Conde confirmed Mr Brennan wrote the memo, which had ‘reflected (his) exuberance’. He said Mr Brennan had promptly clarified the memo, telling staff he only intended to avoid any announcer ‘sending up’ the McDonald’s ads. ‘It was made plain 2UE was not seeking to curtail editorial comment’

In a separate statement, Mr Conde said 2UE and its affiliates were to receive $707,000 from the

Bank deal. Laws says his share was $303,000.

Amanda Meade (Australian, 22 July 1999 p.1)

Attachments:

managerial accounting 461911

Castle Company produces throw blankets that are popular holiday gifts. Standard variable costs relating to a single blanket are given below

Standard Quantity or Hours

Standard Price or Rate

Standard Cost

Direct materials

2.62 yards

$5 per yard

$?

Direct labor

1.35 DLH

$6.80 per DLH

$?

Variable manufacturing overhead

1.35 DLH

$2 per direct labor-hour

$?

Total standard cost

$?

Overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours. During March, 924 blankets were manufactured and sold.

Selected information related to the month’s production is given below:

Materials Used

Direct Labor

Variable Manufacturing Overhead

Actual costs incurred

$11,500

$8,408

$3,100

Direct materials price variance

?

Actual

2,620 yards

1400 hours

Direct materials quantity variance

$1,000 U

Direct labor rate variance

?

Direct labor efficiency variance

?

Variable overhead rate variance

?

Variable overhead efficiency variance

?

*For this month’s production of 924 blankets

Submit an Excel document with each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following through your calculations:

1.What is the standard cost of a single blanket?

2.What was the actual cost per blanket produced during March?

3.What was the direct materials price variance for March?

4.What was the direct labor rate variance for March? The direct labor efficiency variance?

5.What was the variable overhead rate variance for March? The variable overhead efficiency variance?

    act300 portfolio project kelly consulting practice set you are given the following i 462313

    ACT300 Portfolio Project: Kelly Consulting Practice Set

    You are given the following information:
    1. Post closing trial balance for April 30, 2008
    2. Transactions for the month of May 2008
    3. Adjustments for May 31,2008
    The following can be download from the Module 8 Assignment page or the Course Information page
    4. Journal page to copy and use
    5. Ledger page to copy and use
    6. Portfolio Project Excel Spreadsheet template with accounts pre-entered
    Kelly Consulting Transactions for May 2008
    May 3 Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $1,550.
    May 5 Received cash from clients on account, $1,750.
    May 9 Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $100
    May 13 Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $400
    May 15 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 1-15, $5,100.
    May 16 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary including the amount owed on April 13, $750.
    May 17 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period May 1-16, $7,380
    May 20 Purchased supplies on account, $500.
    May 21 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 16-20, $2,900.
    May 25 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 17-23, $4,200.
    May 27 Received cash from clients on account, $6,600.
    May 28 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
    May 30 Paid telephone bill for May, $150.
    May 31 Paid electricity bill for May, $225.
    May 31 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 25-31, $2,875.
    May 31 Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of May, $2,200.
    May 31 Kelly withdrew $7,500 for personal use.
    Instructions are as follows:
    1. Record the ending balances from the April 30 post closing trial balance into the ledger sheets or alternatively, you may create T-accounts on an excel spreadsheet.
    2. Record journal entries for the May transactions on the journal sheets given or create a spreadsheet configured as a journal sheet.
    3. Post the journal entries to the ledger sheets or if you created T-accounts post the entries to your T-accounts.
    4. Enter the ending balances from the ledger or T-accounts on to the worksheet trial balance columns.
    5. Enter the adjustments directly on to the worksheet.
    6. Extend to the adjusted trial balance columns.
    7. Extend to the financial statement columns.
    8. Prepare the financial statements.
    9. Enter the closing entries on to the worksheet.
    10. Prepare the post closing trial balance for May.

    Submit your work in a Portfolio Project Excel worksheet that you can download from the Course Information page or the Module 8 Assignments page.
    Make sure you include the following in your final Excel Workbook:
    1. The completed Worksheet on the given downloadable spreadsheet.
    2. Formal income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet. These may be prepared on separate tabs on the Excel Workbook where the “Worksheet” is the first tab.
    3. Post Closing Trial Balance for May 31.

    prepare a list of the factors that are assumed to have contributed 462331

    AIS in Assessing and addressing the Perfect Storm in the higher education sector
    The university system is under severe stress on four fronts. Student-staff ratios are blowing out, export income is evaporating, access to research grants is at demoralisation levels and universities are struggling to replace an ageing academic workforce.
    “The higher education sector is facing a perfect storm,” director of the University of Melbourne’s Centre for the Study of Higher Education Richard James says.
    Source: Healy, G. 2010, Universities facing crisis of confidence, The Australian, October 23. Available at: http://www.theaustralian.com.au/opinion/universities-facing-crisis-of-confidence/story-e6frg6zo-1225942072796
    Required:
    Read the above article, identify three more media or academic journal articles that explained similar phenomena, and then write a report addressing the following requirements:

    1. Prepare a list of the factors that are assumed to have contributed to the perfect storm in the higher education sector in Australia.
    1. As a student studying accounting information systems (AIS), identify and explain the salient factors affecting the business processes (transaction cycles) of a university during the perfect storm.
    1. Explain how a well-designed Accounting Information System can help university management in taking strategic decisions reducing the impact of the perfect storm.

    Presentation:

    Use the report format to address the above requirements. Marks will also be provided for an executive summary, a conclusion, grammar and references.

    Word limit: 2,000 words (approximately).

    Marking guideline and assignment submission criteria

    Requirements Description and analysis Allocated marks
    1 List of the factors that are assumed to have contributed to the perfect storm. 3
    2 Explanation of the salient factors affecting the business processes (transaction cycles) of a university. 6
    3 Role of the AIS in helping University management in taking strategic decisions. 5
    Presentation Executive summary.
    Conclusion.
    Grammar and punctuation.
    References in appropriate style (both in-text and in the list of references).
    2
    1
    1
    2
    Total marks 20% of the course. 20
    Word limit 2,000 words (approximately)
    Submission Please see the deadline and other submission information available in the course profile and moodle.

    * Please note that further guideline may be provided about contribution of the participants in the group.

    Guidelines for writing assignment report:

    • Read carefully the context of the assessment item 2.
    • Try to understand the requirements.
    • Be familiar with the relevant concepts. See week 1 study materials.
    • Download relevant articles.
    • Although not obligatory, download annual reports of two or three Australian universities other than Group 8 universities in Australia.Choose regional and metropolitan universities to download annual reports. See CEO/Presidents Report, Income Statement and Cash flow Statement. These will help you understand business processes, some clues for Perfect Storm, and strategic decisions/plans of the universities to overcome the situation.
    • Use a Report Format (not an Essay Format). See a template below:

    Template of the Report

    Name and Student Id

    Name of lecturer/tutor (flex students should mention CC’s name)

    • Executive summary (purpose, methods/how you proceeded and gist of findings)
    • Requirement 1: give a title and discuss underneath
    • Requirement 2: give a title and discuss underneath
    • Requirement 3: give a title and discuss underneath
    • Conclusions (key findings and suggestions)
    • References in appropriate style (Harvard referencing). References are required in-text (in the body) and in-list (at the end of the report). Do not include any reference that has not been used in the text of the report.

    Some notes:
    *Marking criteria will help you plan how much you need to write for each requirement.
    **Word limit: 2,000 words.
    ****Remember the deadline.

    Attachments:

    compute bad debts amounts 462936

    P9-2A Information related

    Total credit sales 2,500,000

    Accounts receivable at December 31 970,000

    Bad debts written off 66,000

    Instructions

    (a)a) Assume that Hamilton Company estimates its bad debt expense based on 3% of credit sales. What amounts of bad debt expense will Hamilton record of it has Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $4000.00?

    Assume that Hamilton Company estimates its bad debt expense based on 7%of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debt expense will Hamilton record if it has an Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $3000.00?

    a) Assume the same facts as in ©, except that there is a $3000.00 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debt expense will Hamilton record?

    the kgv blood bank a private charity partly supported by government grants is locate 463391

    TheKGV Blood Bank, a private charity partly supported by government grants, is located on the Caribbean island of St. Lucia. The blood bank has just finished its operations for September, which was a particularly busy month due to a powerful hurricane that hit neighboring islands causing many injuries. The hurricane largely bypassed St. Lucia, but residents of St. Lucia willingly donated their blood to help people on other islands. As a consequence, the blood bank collected and processed about 20% more blood than had been originally planned for the month.

    A report prepared by a government official comparing actual costs to budgeted costs for the blood bank appears below. (The currency on St. Lucia is the East Caribbean dollar.) Continued support from the government depends on the blood bank’s ability to demonstrate control over its costs.

    KGV Blood Bank

    Cost Control Report

    For the Month Ended September 30

    Planning Budget

    Actual Results

    Variances

    Liters of blood collected . .

    600

    780

    Medical supplies . . . . . . . .

    $7,110

    $9,252

    $2,142

    U

    Lab tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    8,610

    10,782

    2,172

    U

    Equipment depreciation . .

    1,900

    2,100

    200

    U

    Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    1,500

    1,500

    0

    Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    300

    324

    24

    U

    Administration . . . . . . . . .

    14,310

    14,575

    265

    U

    Total expense . . . . . . . . . .

    $33,730

    $38,533

    $4,803

    U

    The managing director of the blood bank was very unhappy with this report, claiming that his costs were higher than expected due to the emergency on the neighboring islands. He also pointed out that the additional costs had been fully covered by payments from grateful recipients on the other islands. The government official who prepared the report countered that all of the figures had been submitted by the blood bank to the government; he was just pointing out that actual costs were a lot higher than promised in the budget.

    The following cost formulas were used to construct the planning budget:

    Cost Formulas

    Medical supplies . . . . . . . . . . . .

    $11.85q

    Lab tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    $14.35q

    Equipment depreciation . . . . . . .

    $1,900

    Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    $1,500

    Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    $300

    Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    $13,200 + $1.85q

    Required:

    1. Prepare a new performance report for September using the flexible budget approach.

    2. Do you think any of the variances in the report you prepared should be investigated? Why?

    material accounting 464016

    Material cost accounting The Malbim Company uses a process costing system. Materials are added at the beginning of the process. On July 1 there are 400 units in the beginning inventory that are 100% complete as to materials. With regard to labor and overhead, however, the units in beginning inventory (July 1) are only 75% complete. During July, 10,000 units were placed in production; of these, 7,400 were completed and transferred to the next department. On July 31, the remaining 3,000 units were 20% complete with regard to labor and overhead.

    Document Preview:

    Material cost accounting The Malbim Company uses a process costing system. Materials are added at the beginning of the process. On July 1 there are 400 units in the beginning inventory that are 100% complete as to materials. With regard to labor and overhead, however, the units in beginning inventory (July 1) are only 75% complete. During July, 10,000 units were placed in production; of these, 7,400 were completed and transferred to the next department. On July 31, the remaining 3,000 units were 20% complete with regard to labor and overhead. Required: (Be sure to show your calculations for each) Using the Weighted Average method, calculate the equivalent units of Direct Materials?Direct Labor and Factory Overhead ?Using the FIFO method, calculate the equivalent units of Direct Materials?Direct Labor and Factory Overhead

    Attachments:

    tuna company set the following standard unit costs for its single product 464059

    Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.
    Direct materials (27 Ibs. @ $4 per Ib.) $ 108.00
    Direct labor (8 hrs. @ $8 per hr.) 64.00
    Factory overhead—variable (8 hrs. @ $5 per hr.) 40.00
    Factory overhead—fixed (8 hrs. @ $7 per hr.) 56.00


    Total standard cost $ 268.00





    The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 60% of the productive capacity of 40,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.
    Operating Levels

    50% 60% 70%
    Production in units 20,000 24,000 28,000
    Standard direct labor hours 160,000 192,000 224,000
    Budgeted overhead
    Fixed factory overhead $ 1,344,000 $ 1,344,000 $ 1,344,000
    Variable factory overhead $ 800,000 $ 960,000 $ 1,120,000

    During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 28,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 222,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:
    Direct materials (756,000 Ibs. @ $4 per Ib.) $ 3,024,000
    Direct labor (224,000 hrs. @ $8 per hr.) 1,792,000
    Factory overhead (224,000 hrs. @ $12 per hr.) 2,688,000


    Total standard cost $ 7,504,000





    Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:
    Direct materials (751,000 Ibs. @ $4.10) $ 3,079,100
    Direct labor (222,000 hrs. @ $7.75) 1,720,500
    Fixed factory overhead costs 1,968,679
    Variable factory overhead costs 1,843,019


    Total actual costs $ 8,611,298





    references

    1. Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances.(Do not round your intermediate calculations. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
    Direct materials cost variance $
    Price variance $
    Quantity variance $

    Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.(Do not round your intermediate calculations. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
    Direct labor cost variance $
    Rate variance $
    Efficiency variance $

    Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances.(Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
    Controllable variance $
    Fixed overhead volume variance $

    Attachments:

    prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a per unit and 12 mont 464645

    MOD000897 Introduction to Accounting and Finance

    Assignment Brief 2013/14 Semester 1

    NEW HAIR CARE PRODUCT

    SCENARIO:

    You have developed a new hair care product, which you believe could revolutionise the hair care market.

    Following on from the Dragon’s Den success of Levi Root’s Reggae Reggae Sauce – (search the internet if you are unfamiliar with this story), you have decided to make a pitch to a small group of potential investors.

    You know that any potential investor will expect you to have a good knowledge of how much your product will cost to produce and also of the expected level of sales and profit your product is predicted to make.

    REQUIRED:

    1. Prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a ‘per unit’ and 12 months sales/production basis. 5 marks
    1. Produce the following financial documents for the first 12 months of trading:
      1. Cash Budget(month by month)15 marks
      2. Forecast Income Statement(for the year)10 marks
      3. Forecast Balance Sheet(for the year)10 marks
    1. Write a 1,000 word ‘pitch’ explaining the costing and financial data from tasks 1 and 2 above, to your potential investors.35 marks

    Total 75 ma

    MOD000897 Introduction to Accounting and Finance

    Assignment Brief 2013/14 Semester 1

    NEW HAIR CARE PRODUCT

    SCENARIO:

    You have developed a new hair care product, which you believe could revolutionise the hair care market.

    Following on from the Dragon’s Den success of Levi Root’s Reggae Reggae Sauce – (search the internet if you are unfamiliar with this story), you have decided to make a pitch to a small group of potential investors.

    You know that any potential investor will expect you to have a good knowledge of how much your product will cost to produce and also of the expected level of sales and profit your product is predicted to make.

    REQUIRED:

    1. Prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a ‘per unit’ and 12 months sales/production basis. 5 marks

    1. Produce the following financial documents for the first 12 months of trading:
      1. Cash Budget(month by month)15 marks
      2. Forecast Income Statement(for the year)10 marks
      3. Forecast Balance Sheet(for the year)10 marks

    1. Write a 1,000 word ‘pitch’ explaining the costing and financial data from tasks 1 and 2 above, to your potential investors.35 marks

    Total 75 marks

    rk

    MOD000897 Introduction to Accounting and Finance

    Assignment Brief 2013/14 Semester 1

    NEW HAIR CARE PRODUCT

    SCENARIO:

    You have developed a new hair care product, which you believe could revolutionise the hair care market.

    Following on from the Dragon’s Den success of Levi Root’s Reggae Reggae Sauce – (search the internet if you are unfamiliar with this story), you have decided to make a pitch to a small group of potential investors.

    You know that any potential investor will expect you to have a good knowledge of how much your product will cost to produce and also of the expected level of sales and profit your product is predicted to make.

    REQUIRED:

    1. Prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a ‘per unit’ and 12 months sales/production basis. 5 marks

    1. Produce the following financial documents for the first 12 months of trading:
      1. Cash Budget(month by month)15 marks
      2. Forecast Income Statement(for the year)10 marks
      3. Forecast Balance Sheet(for the year)10 marks

    1. Write a 1,000 word ‘pitch’ explaining the costing and financial data from tasks 1 and 2 above, to your potential investors.35 marks

    Total 75 marks

    s

    Attachments:

    in concluding the chapter on accounting for intangibles to many 465372

    In concluding the chapter on accounting for intangibles, to many observers it does appear that for the sake of enhancing international comparability Australia has embraced a less than ideal accounting standard” (Deegan 2012, p.383).

    Document Preview:

    1 MAA725 – ADVANCED ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE COMPULSORY WRITTEN ASSIGNMENT TRIMESTER 3 -2013 DUE DATE: MONDAY 13 th January, 2014, BEFORE 11.59PM (AEST) MARKS: 40% Assignment Task: “In concluding the chapter on accounting for intangibles, to many observers it does appear that for the sake of enhancing international comparability Australia has embraced a less than ideal accounting standard” (Deegan 2012, p.283). You are required to: -Discuss and analyse the above statement relating it back to the qualitative characteristics in the IASB Conceptual Framework such as relevance, reliability, comparability, verifiability, timeliness and understandability whilst relying on a theoretical framework which was discussed in Topic 1. -Your discussion should address intangible assets (AASB 138) and examine the immediate expensing of all expenditure of the research component of R&D and explain how capitalisation of development expenditure is met. Additional Information: Since this is a group assignment a clear segregation of tasks can be initiated from the beginning. One member can handle the IASB Conceptual Framework. Another member can examine and explain AASB 138 and the third member can link both the IASB Conceptual Framework and AASB 138 into a theoretical framework using theories discussed in Topic 1. General requirement: This assignment comprises 40% of the total assessment in MAA725. The assignment is to be completed as a Group assignment (maximum 3 people per group). The number of words is 3,000 excluding the reference list, appendices and the cover page. The actual word count must be stated on the cover page of the assignment. A deduction of 2 marks from marks allocated to this assignment will apply if the number of words is under by more than 10% of 3,000 words or over by more than 20% of 3000 words. Word limits allow the student to structure the assignment to allow for the preparation of an informative yet succinct report. 2 The formation of a group must be…

    Attachments:

    appalachian airlines began operating in 2004 the company lost money the first year b 465375

    Appalachian Airlines began operating in 2004. The company lost money the first year but has been profitable ever since. The company’s taxable income (EBT) for its first five years is listed below. Each year the company’s corporate tax rate has been 40%.

    Year

    Taxable Income

    2004

    -$4,000,000

    2005

    $1,000,000

    2006

    $2,000,000

    2007

    $3,000,000

    2008

    $5,000,000

    assessing roche publishing company s cash management efficiency 465377

    Assessing Roche Publishing Company’s Cash Management Efficiency

    Lisa Pinto, vice president of finance at Roche Publishing Company, a rapidly growing publisher of college texts, is concerned about the firm’s high level of short-term resource investment. She believes that the firm can improve the management of its cash and, as a result, reduce this investment. In this regard, she charged Arlene Bessenoff, the treasurer, with assessing the firm’s cash management efficiency. Arlene decided to begin her investigation by studying the firm’s operating and cash conversion cycles.

    Roche Publishing Company is currently spending $12,000,000 per year on its operating-cycle investment, but it expects that initiating a cash discount will increase its operating-cycle investment to $13,100,000 per year. (Note: The operating-cycle investment per dollar of inventory, receivables, and payables is assumed to be the same.) Arlene’s concern was whether the firm’s cash management was as efficient as it could be. Arlene knew that the company paid 12% annual interest for its resource investment and therefore viewed this value as the firm’s required return. For this reason, she was concerned about the resource investment cost resulting from any inefficiencies in the management of Roche’s cash conversion cycle. (Note: Assume a 365-

    day year.)

    To Do

    a. Assuming a constant rate for purchases, production, and sales throughout the year, what are Roche’s existing operating cycle (OC), cash conversion cycle (CCC), and resource investment need?

    b. If Roche can optimize operations according to industry standards, what would its operating cycle (OC), cash conversion cycle (CCC), and resource investment need be under these more efficient conditions?

    c. In terms of resource investment requirements, what is the annual cost of Roche’s operational inefficiency?

    d. Evaluate whether Roche’s strategy for speeding its collection of accounts receivable would be acceptable. What annual net profit or loss would result from implementation of the cash discount?

    e. Use your finding in part d, along with the payables and inventory costs given, to determine the total annual cost the firm would incur to achieve the industry level of operational efficiency.

    f. Judging on the basis of your findings in parts c and e, should the firm incur the annual cost to achieve the industry level of operational efficiency? Explain why or why not.

    on january 1 20×1 pep company acquired 80 of the common stock of sky company for 195 465378

    On January 1, 20X1, Pep Company acquired 80% of the common stock of Sky Company for $195,000. On this date Sky had total owners’ equity of $200,000 (common stock, other paid-in capital, and retained earnings of $10,000, $90,000, and $100,000 respectively).

    Any excess of cost over book value is attributable to inventory (worth $6,250 more than cost), to equipment (worth $12,500 more than book value), and to patents. FIFO is used for inventories. The equipment has a remaining life of five years and straight-line depreciation is used. The excess attributable to the patents is to be amortized over 20 years.

    During 20X1 and 20X2, Pep has appropriately accounted for its investment in Sky using the simple equity method.

    On January 1, 20X2, Pep held merchandise acquired from Sky for $10,000. During 20X2, Sky sold merchandise to Pep for $50,000, $20,000 of which is still held by Pep on December 31, 20X2. Sky’s usual gross profit on affiliated sales is 50%.

    On December 31, 20X1, Pep sold equipment to Sky at a gain of $10,000. During 20X2, the equipment was used by Sky. Depreciation is being computed using the straight-line method, a five-year life, and no salvage value.

    Required:

    a. Using the information above or on the Figure 4-6 worksheet, prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule.

    b. Complete the Figure 4-6 worksheet for consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X2.

    wu systems has the following balance sheet how much net working capital does the fir 465392

    Wu Systems has the following balance sheet. How much net working capital does the firm have?

    Cash

    $ 100

    Accounts payable

    $ 200

    Accounts receivable

    650

    Accruals

    350

    Inventory

    550

    Notes payable

    350

    Current assets

    $1,300

    Current liabilities

    $900

    Net Fixed assets

    1,000

    Long-term debt

    600

    Common equity

    300

    Retained earnings

    500

    Total assets

    $2,300

    Total liab. & equity

    $2,300

    a. $675

    b. $750

    c. $825

    d. $908

    e. $998

    your corporation has the following cash flows 465398

    Your corporation has the following cash flows:

    Operating income

    $250,000

    Interest received

    $10,000

    Interest paid

    $45,000

    Dividends received

    $20,000

    Dividends paid

    $50,000

    If the applicable income tax rate is 40% (federal and state combined), and if 70% of dividends received are exempt from taxes, what is the corporation’s tax liability?

    a. $83,980

    b. $88,400

    c. $92,820

    d. $97,461

    e. $102,334

    byp 18 1 martinez company has decided to introduce a new product 465402

    BYP 18-1 Martinez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can be manufactured by either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows.

    Capital-Intensive

    Labor-Intensive

    Direct materials $5 per unit

    $5.50 per unit

    Direct labor $6 per unit

    $8.00 per unit

    Variable overhead $3 per unit

    $4.50 per unit

    Fixed manufacturing costs $2,508,000

    Martinez’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method.

    (a) Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Martinez Company uses the:

    (1) Capital-intensive manufacturing method.

    (2) Labor-intensive manufacturing method.

    (b) Determine the annual unit sales volume at which Martinez Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods.

    (c) Explain the circumstance under which Martinez should employ each of the two manufacturing methods.

    help me pretty please 461502

    WCP16 Because most of the parts for its irrigation systems are standard, Waterways handles the majority of its manufacturing as a process cost system. There are multiple process departments.Three of these departments are the Molding, Cutting, and Welding departments. All items eventually end up in the Package department which prepares items for sale in kits or individually.

    The following information is available for the Molding department for January.

    Work in process beginning:

    Units in process 24,000

    Stage of completion for materials 80%

    Stage of completion for labor and overhead 30%

    Costs in work in process inventory:

    Materials $168,360

    Labor 67,564

    Overhead 16,892

    Total costs in beginning work in process $252,816

    Units started into production in January 60,000

    Units completed and transferred in January 58,000

    Costs added to production:

    Materials $265,450

    Labor 289,468

    Overhead 60,578

    Total costs added into production in January $615,496

    Work in process ending:

    Units in process 26,000

    Stage of completion for materials 50%

    Stage of completion for labor and overhead 10%

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a production cost report for Waterways using the weighted-average method.

    *(b) Show the equivalent units for materials and conversion costs if Waterways used FIFO instead of weighted- average.

    preferred stock entries and dividends 461503

    Weisberg Corporation has 10,900 shares of $100 par value, 8%, preferred stock and 52,100 shares of $10 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2010.

    Answer the questions in each of the following independent situations.

    (a) If the preferred stock is cumulative and dividends were last paid on the preferred stock on December 31, 2007, what are the dividends in arrears that should be reported on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet as a note in the stockholders’ equity section?

    (b) If the preferred stock is convertible into 8 shares of $10 par value common stock and 4,300 shares are converted, what entry is required for the conversion assuming the preferred stock was issued at par value?

    (c) If the preferred stock was issued at $107 per share, how should the preferred stock be reported in the stockholders’ equity section?

    help please 461504

    William Severs has been the manager for two years of the production department of a company manufacturing toys made of plastic-coated cardboard. One of the toys is paper dolls, whose “clothes” are made of acetate, and stay on the doll with static electricity. The company’s sales were mainly to large educational institutions until last year, when the dolls were sold for the first time to a large discount retailer. The dolls were sold out immediately, and enough orders received to keep the department at full capacity for the immediate future.

    The fixed costs for the department are $50,000, with $1 per unit variable costs. The dolls and one set of clothes sells for $3. The maximum volume is 80,000 units. With the increased volume, Mr. Severs is considering two options to improve profitability. One would reduce variable costs to $0.75, and the other would reduce fixed costs to $35,000.

    Given the fact that sales are increasing, make a recommendation to Mr. Severs about which option he should choose? Support your recommendation with a clear explanation and calculations showing him how profitability will change with each option..

    needed asap please accounting is not my strong subject 461507

    Show work please:

    Pert Corporation manufactures state-of-the-art DVD players. It is a division of Vany TV, which manufactures televisions. Pert sells the DVD players to Vany, as well as to retail stores. The following information is available for Pert’s DVD player: variable cost per unit $200; fixed costs per unit $150; a selling price of $500 to outside customers. Vany currently purchases DVD players from an outside supplier for $460 each. Top management of Vany would like Pert to provide 50,000 DVD players per year at a transfer price of $200. Instructions: Compute the minimum transfer price that Pert should accept under each of the following assumptions: 1. Pert is operating at full capacity. 2. Pert has sufficient excess capacity to provide the 50,000 players to Vany. Also indicate whether the proposed internal transfer should occur.

    i need major help 461509

    Worksheet data for Pisa Company are presented below.

    PISA COMPANY

    Worksheet (Partial)

    For the Month Ended April 30, 2012

    Adjusted Trial Balance

    Account Titles

    Dr.

    Cr.

    Cash 13,826

    Accounts Receivable 8,175

    Prepaid Rent 2,326

    Equipment 23,296

    Accumulated Depreciation 5,178

    Notes Payable 5,725

    Accounts Payable 5,532

    Pisa, Capital 30,960

    Pisa, Drawing 3,749

    Service Revenue 15,804

    Salaries Expense 10,522

    Rent Expense 738

    Depreciation Expense 567

    Interest Expense 82

    Interest Payable

    82

    Totals 63,281

    63,281

    Instructions

    (a) Journalize the closing entries at April 30. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2.)

    (b) Post the beginning balances and closing entries to Income Summary and Pisa, Capital. (Post entries in the order presented above. If there is no transaction, enter NA as the account and 0 for the amount.)

    c) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at April 30. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

    worksheet for e20 13 461510

    (Worksheet for E20-13)

    Erikson Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan. The corporation’s actuary provides the following information about the plan.

    January 1 December 31

    2012

    2012

    Vested benefit obligation $1,500 $1,900

    Accumulated benefit obligation 1,900 2,730

    Projected benefit obligation 2,500 3,300

    Plan assets (fair value) 1,700 2,620

    Settlement rate and expected rate of return 10%

    Pension asset/liability 800 ?

    Service cost for the year 2012 400

    Contributions (funding in 2012) 700

    Benefits paid in 2012 200

    Prepare a 2012 pension worksheet with supplementary schedules of computations. Prepare the journal entries at December 31, 2012, to record pension expense and related pension transactions. Also, indicate the pension amounts reported in the balance sheet. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2. If answer is zero, please enter 0 do not leave any fields blank.))

    Erikson Company

    Pension Worksheet-2012

    Items

    General Journal Entries

    Memo Record Entries

    Annual

    Pension Expense

    Cash

    OCI – Gain/Loss

    Pension Asset/Liability

    Projected

    Benefit Obligation

    Plan

    Assets

    Balance, Jan. 1, 2012

    Cr.

    Cr.

    Dr.

    Service cost

    Dr.

    Cr.

    Interest cost

    Dr.

    Cr.

    Actual return

    Cr.

    Dr.

    Unexpected gain

    Dr.

    Cr.

    Contributions

    Cr.

    Dr.

    Benefits

    Dr.

    Cr.

    Liability increase

    Dr.

    Cr.

    Journal entry for 2012 Dr. Cr. Dr. Dr.

    Acc. OCI, Dec. 31, 2011 Dr.

    Balance, Dec. 31, 2012

    Dr.

    Cr.

    Cr.

    Dr.

    Journal entries 12/31/12

    Description/Account Debit Credit

    Balance Sheet at December 31, 2012

    Liabilities

    Pension Liability

    $

    Stockholder’s Equity

    Accumulated other comprehensive loss – G/L

    $

    question 1 total profit variance sales price and sales quantity variance 461515

    XYZ Company’s budgeted and actual results for last year are as follows:

    Master Budget Actual Results
    Price $450 $600
    Sales Volume (units) 6,000 4,000
    Unit VC $150 $150
    Fixed Costs $250,000 $250,000

    Required:

    (a) Compute budgeted and actual revenue, costs and profits:

    Master Budget Actual
    Sales Volume (units) _____________ ____________
    Revenue $____________ $___________
    Variable costs $____________ $___________
    Contribution margin $_____________ $___________
    Fixed costs $_____________ $____________
    Profit $_____________ $____________

    In (b)-(d) below, enter favorable and unfavorable variances as positive and negative numbers, without F or U.

    (b) How much is the total profit variance?
    (enter negative numbers with a minus, i.e. enter negative $100 as -100 not ($100) ) $

    (c) How much is the sales volume variance?
    (enter negative numbers with a minus) $

    (d) How much is the sales price variance?
    (enter negative numbers with a minus) $

    accounting help compute the project profitability index for each project 461516

    Yancey Company has limited funds available for investment and must ration the funds among four competing projects. Selected information on the four projects follows:

    Project Investment

    Required Net

    Present

    Value Life of

    the

    Project

    (years) Internal

    Rate

    of Return

    A $950,000 $330,400 8 19%

    B $720,000 $203,390 13 15%

    C $650,000 $363,650 8 24%

    D $850,000 $259,500 4 23%

    The net present values above have been computed using a 10% discount rate. The company wants your assistance in determining which project to accept first, which to accept second, and so forth. The company’s investment funds are limited.

    Required:

    1. Compute the project profitability index for each project. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

    Project Profitability

    Index

    A ?

    B ?

    C ?

    D ?

    2.

    In order of preference, rank the four projects in terms of net present value, project profitability index and internal rate of return.

    1.Net PresentValue

    2.Project Profitability Index

    3.Internal Rate of Return

    First preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?

    Second preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?

    Third preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?

    Fourth preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?

    activity based costing 461522

    Silicon Optics has supplied the following data for use in its activity-based costing system:

     

    Overhead Costs

    Wages and Salaries

    $350,000

    Other overhead costs

    $200,000

    Total overhead costs

    $550,000

    Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Total Activity

    Direct labour support Number of direct labour hours 10,000 DLHs

    Order processing Number of orders 500 orders

    Customer support Number of customers 100 customers

    Other These costs are not allocated to products or customers Not applicable

     

    Distribution of Resource Consumption Across Activity Cost Pools

    Direct Labour Support Order Processing Customer Support Other Total

    Wages and salaries 30% 35% 25% 10% 100%`

    Other overhead costs 25% 15% 20% 40% 100%

    During the year, Silicon Optics completed an order for a special optical switch for a new customer, Indus Telecom. This customer did not order any other products during the year. Data concerning that order follow:

    Data Concerning the Indus Telecom Order

    Selling Price $295 per unit

    Units ordered 100 units

    Direct materials $264 per unit

    Direct labour hours 0.5 DLH per unit

    Direct labour rate $25 per DLH

     

    Required 3 :

    Prepare a report showing the overhead costs for the order from Indus Telecom, including customer support costs.

    Required 4:

    Prepare a report showing the customer margin for Indus Telecom.

    margaret avery company from time to time embarks on a research program when a specia 461633

    Margaret Avery Company from time to time embarks on a research program when a special project seems to offer possibilities. In 2011, the company expends $325,000 on a research project, but by the end of 2011 it is impossible to determine whether any benefit will be derived from it.

    Instructions

    (a) What account should be charged for the $325,000, and how should it be shown in the financial statements?

    (b) The project is completed in 2012, and a successful patent is obtained. The R&D costs to complete the project are $130,000. The administrative and legal expenses incurred in obtaining patent number(NNN) NNN-NNNN84 in 2012 total $24,000. The patent has an expected useful life of 5 years. Record these costs in journal entry form. Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2012.

    (c) In 2013, the company successfully defends the patent in extended litigation at a cost of $47,200, thereby extending the patent life to December 31, 2020. What is the proper way to account for this cost? Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2013.

    (d) Additional engineering and consulting costs incurred in 2013 required to advance the design of a product to the manufacturing stage total $60,000. These costs enhance the design of the product considerably. Discuss the proper accounting treatment for this cost.

    the balance sheet and income statement shown below are for pettijohn inc 461638

    The balance sheet and income statement shown below are for Pettijohn Inc. Note that the firm has no amortization charges, it does not lease any assets, none of its debt must be retired during the next 5 years, and the notes payable will be rolled over.

    Balance Sheet (Millions of $)

    Assets 2010

    Cash and securities $ 1,554.0

    Accounts receivable 9,660.0

    Inventories 13,440.0

    Total current assets $24,654.0

    Net plant and equipment 17,346.0

    Total assets $42,000.0

    Liabilities and Equity

    Accounts payable $ 7,980.0

    Notes payable 5,880.0

    Accruals 4,620.0

    Total current liabilities $18,480.0

    Long-term bonds 10,920.0

    Total debt $29,400.0

    Common stock 3,360.0

    Retained earnings 9,240.0

    Total common equity $12,600.0

    Total liabilities and equity $42,000.0

    Income Statement (Millions of $) 2010

    Net sales $58,800.0

    Operating costs except depr’n $54,978.0

    Depreciation $ 1,029.0

    Earnings bef int and taxes (EBIT) $ 2,793.0

    Less interest 1,050.0

    Earnings before taxes (EBT) $ 1,743.0

    Taxes $ 610.1

    Net income $ 1,133.0

    Other data:

    Shares outstanding (millions) 175.00

    Common dividends $ 509.83

    Int rate on notes payable & L-T bonds 6.25%

    Federal plus state income tax rate 35%

    Year-end stock price $ 77.69

    Refer to Multi-Part 3-1. What is the firm’s days sales outstanding? Assume a 360-day year for this calculation.

    classify each of the following expenditures as a deduction for agi a deduction from 461704

    LO.1 Classify each of the following expenditures as a deduction for AGI, a deduction from AGI, or not deductible:

    a. Amos contributes to his H.R. 10 plan (i.e., a retirement plan for a self-employed individual).

    b. Keith pays child support to his former wife, Renee, for the support of their son, Chris.

    c. Judy pays for professional dues that are reimbursed by her employer.

    d. Ted pays $500 as the monthly mortgage payment on his personal residence. Of this amount, $100 represents a payment on principal, and $400 represents an interest payment.

    e. Lynn pays a moving company for moving her household goods to Detroit, where she is starting a new job. She is not reimbursed by her employer.

    f. Ralph pays property taxes on his personal residence.

    kirby and his wife melinda own all of the stock of thrush melinda is the president a 461735

    LO.1 Kirby and his wife Melinda own all of the stock of Thrush. Melinda is the president, and Kirby is the vice president. Melinda and Kirby are paid salaries of $500,000 and $350,000, respectively, each year. They consider the salaries to be reasonable based on a comparison of salaries paid for comparable positions in comparable companies. They project Thrush’s taxable income for next year, before their salaries, to be $975,000. They decide to place their three teenage children on the payroll and to pay them total salaries of $125,000. The children will each work about five hours per week for Thrush.

    a. What are Kirby and Melinda trying to achieve by hiring the children? b. Calculate the tax consequences on Thrush and on Kirby and Melinda’s family of hiring the children.

    trevor a friend of yours from high school works as a server at the st caf 461741

    LO.3 Trevor, a friend of yours from high school, works as a server at the ST Café. He asks you to help him prepare his Federal income tax return. When you inquire about why his bank deposits substantially exceed his tip income, he confides to you that he is a bookie on the side. Trevor then provides you with the following documented income and expenses for the year: Tip income $16,000 Gambling income 52,000 Gambling expenses Payouts to winners 29,000 Employee compensation 8,000 Bribe to police officer who is aware of Trevor’s bookie activity 7,500

    a. How will these items affect Trevor’s AGI? b. His taxable income? c. If Trevor’s business was an illegal drug operation and the cost of the illegal drugs sold was $6,200, how would your answers to parts (a) and (b) differ?

    amber a publicly held corporation not a tarp recipient currently pays its president 461743

    LO.3, 4 Amber, a publicly held corporation (not a TARP recipient), currently pays its president an annual salary of $900,000. In addition, it contributes $20,000 annually to a defined contribution pension plan for him. As a means of increasing company profitability, the board of directors decides to increase the president’s compensation. Two proposals are being considered. Under the first proposal, the salary and pension contribution for the president would be increased by 30%. Under the second proposal, Amber would implement a performance-based compensation program that is projected to provide about the same amount of additional compensation and pension contribution for the president.

    a. Evaluate the alternatives from the perspective of Amber, Inc. b. Prepare a letter to Amber’s board of directors that contains your recommendations. Address the letter to the board chairperson, Agnes Riddle, whose address is 100 James Tower, Cleveland, OH 44106.

    terry traveled to a neighboring state to investigate the purchase of two hardware st 461747

    LO.3 Terry traveled to a neighboring state to investigate the purchase of two hardware stores. His expenses included travel, legal, accounting, and miscellaneous expenses. The total was $52,000. He incurred the expenses in June and July 2012. Under the following circumstances, what can Terry deduct in 2012?

    a. Terry was in the hardware store business and did not acquire the two hardware stores. b. Terry was in the hardware store business and acquired the two hardware stores and began operating them on October 1, 2012. c. Terry did not acquire the two hardware stores and was not in the hardware store business. d. Terry acquired the two hardware stores but was not in the hardware store business when he acquired them. Operations began on October 1, 2012.

    sandra an orthodontist is single and has net earnings of 90 000 from her practice in 461749

    LO.3 Sandra, an orthodontist, is single and has net earnings of $90,000 from her practice. In addition, she collects antique books that she buys and sells at antique shows. She participates in six to eight weekend shows per year. Her income and expenses for the current year are as follows: Revenue from sale of antique books $22,000 Expenses Cost of goods sold 12,000 Show registration costs 3,000 Advertising 1,000 Dealer’s license—annual fee 500 Insurance 900 Depreciation of display cases 1,200 Sandra has no other items that would affect her AGI. Itemized deductions consisting of taxes, interest, and charitable contributions are $19,000. Calculate Sandra’s taxable income if the antique book activity is classified as:

    a. A hobby. b. A business.

    elisa and clyde operate a retail sports memorabilia shop for the current year sales 461754

    LO.1, 3, 4 Elisa and Clyde operate a retail sports memorabilia shop. For the current year, sales revenue is $55,000 and expenses are as follows: Cost of goods sold $21,000 Advertising 1,000 Utilities 2,000 Rent 4,500 Insurance 1,500 Wages to Boyd 8,000 Elisa and Clyde pay $8,000 in wages to Boyd, a part-time employee. Because this amount is $1,000 below the minimum wage, Boyd threatens to file a complaint with the appropriate Federal agency. Although Elisa and Clyde pay no attention to Boyd’s threat, Chelsie (Elisa’s mother) gives Boyd a check for $1,000 for the disputed wages. Both Elisa and Clyde ridicule Chelsie for wasting money when they learn what she has done. The retail shop is the only source of income for Elisa and Clyde.

    a. Calculate Elisa and Clyde’s AGI. b. Can Chelsie deduct the $1,000 payment on her tax return? c. How could the tax position of the parties be improved?

    jay s sole proprietorship has the following assets basis fair market value cash 10 0 461756

    LO.3, 4 Jay’s sole proprietorship has the following assets: Basis Fair Market Value Cash $ 10,000 $ 10,000 Accounts receivable 18,000 18,000 Inventory 25,000 30,000 Patent 22,000 40,000 Land 50,000 75,000 $125,000 $173,000

    The building in which Jay’s business is located is leased. The lease expires at the end of the year. Jay is 70 years old and would like to retire. He expects to be in the 35% tax bracket. Jay is negotiating the sale of the business with Lois, a key employee. They have agreed on the fair market value of the assets, as indicated previously, and agree that the total purchase price should be about $200,000.

    a. Advise Jay regarding how the sale should be structured. b. Advise Lois regarding how the purchase should be structured. c. What might they do to achieve an acceptable compromise?

    for each of the following independent transactions calculate the recognized gain or 461759

    LO.3 For each of the following independent transactions, calculate the recognized gain or loss to the seller and the adjusted basis to the buyer.

    a. Bonnie sells Parchment, Inc. stock (adjusted basis $17,000) to Phillip, her brother, for its fair market value of $12,000. b. Amos sells land (adjusted basis $85,000) to his nephew, Boyd, for its fair market value of $70,000. c. Susan sells a tax-exempt bond (adjusted basis $20,000) to her wholly owned corporation for its fair market value of $19,000. d. Ron sells a business truck (adjusted basis $20,000) that he uses in his sole proprietorship to his cousin, Agnes, for its fair market value of $18,500. e. Martha sells her partnership interest (adjusted basis $175,000) in Pearl Partnership to her adult daughter, Kim, for $220,000.

    intermediate accounting 461434

    Below you will find two situations involving revenue recognition related to separate divisions of the Jamestown Corporation, the paperback book division and the alarm systems division. For each situation:

    ‘ Explain the revenue recognition issue presented. Provide codification references.

    ‘ Compute the revenue to be recognized in the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

    Situation 1: Paperback book division

    The paperback book division sells large quantities of novels to a few book distributors that in turn sell to several national chains of bookstores. The division allows distributors to return up to 30% of sales, and distributors give the same terms to bookstores. While returns from individual titles fluctuate greatly, the returns from distributors have averaged 20% in each of the past 5 years. A total of $7,000,000 of paperback novel sales were made to distributors during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. On November 30, 2012, $2,200,000 of fiscal 2012 sales was still subject to return privileges over the next six months. The remaining $4,800,000 of fiscal 2012 sales had actual returns of 21%. Sales from fiscal 2011 totaling $2,500,000 were collected in fiscal 2012, with less than 18% of sales returned. All of the criteria for revenue recognition when the right of return exists are applicable to the paperback book division.

    Situation 2: The alarm systems division works through manufacturers’ agents in various cities. Orders for alarm systems and down payments are forwarded from agents and the division ships the goods f.o.b. shipping point. Customers are billed for the balance due plus actual shipping costs. The firm received orders for $6,000,000 of goods during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. Down payments of $600,000 were received, and $5,000,000 of goods were billed and shipped. Actual freight costs of $100,000 were also billed. Commissions of 10% on product price were paid to manufacturers’ agents after the goods were shipped to customers. Such goods are warranted for 90 days after shipment, and warranty returns have been about 1% of sales. Revenue is recognized at the point of sale by the alarm division.

    f. Assume that you are the corporate controller for Jamestown Corporation. Write a business memo, in good form to President Jeffrey Simmons explaining the accounting issues involved in the two situations. Your memo should not exceed one typewritten page.

    treasuary stock transactions multiple choice question 461437

    Sosa Co.’s stockholders’ equity at January 1, 2010 is as follows:

    Common stock, $10 par value; authorized 300,000 shares;

    Outstanding 225,000 shares

    $2,250,000

    Paid-in capital in excess of par

    900,000

    Retained earnings

    2,190,000

    Total

    $5,340,000

    During 2010, Sosa had the following stock transactions:

    Acquired 6,000 shares of its stock for $270,000.

    3,600 treasury shares at $50 a share.

    Sold the remaining treasury shares at $41 per share.

    No other stock transactions occurred during 2010. Assuming Sosa uses the cost method to record treasury stock transactions, the total amount of all additional paid-in capital accounts at December 31, 2010 is:

    a) $870,000.

    b) $891,600.

    c) $908,400

    d) $927,600.

    prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method of presenting cash flows 461444

    statement of Cash Flows – Indirect Method
    The comparative balance sheets of Jorge, Inc at December 31, 201 I and 20 I0 are as follows:

    Assets 12/31/11 12/31/10

    Cash 476,880 292,960

    A/R 113,920 104,480

    Merchandise inventory 320,880 308,560

    Investments 0 120,000

    Equipment (at cost) 352,560 276,560

    Accumulated total Deprec. (83,200) (74,000)

    Total Assets $1,181,040 $1,028,560

    Liabilities & Owners Equity

    A/P (operations) 247,360 238,400

    Common Stock $10 Par 64,000 48,000

    Additonal paid in Capital 240,000 140,000

    Retained Earnings 629,680 602,160

    Total Liabilites & Owners 1,181,040 1,028,560

    a. Net income during 2011 was $75,520
    b. The equipment was acquired for cash and there were no disposals of equipment.
    c. The inv stments were sold for $120,000.
    d. 1,600 s ares of common stock were issued at $72.50 each
    e. Cash div idends declared and paid, $48,000.

    **Please preare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method of presenting cash
    flows from operating activities.

    budgeting 461446

    Stein Apparel is a retail store specializing in women’s fashions. Stein’s management accountant has gathered the following information for Stein Apparel.

    Month Sales Purchases

    June $42,000 $17,640

    July $48,000 $20,160

    August $54,000 $22,680

    September $50,000 $21,000

    Cash is collected from customers in the following manner:

    Month of the sale 25%

    First month following the sale 40%

    Second month following the sale 20%

    Third month following the sale 10%

    Uncollectable 5%

    Purchases of inventory are paid as follows:

    Cash payment in month of purchase 40%

    Cash payment in month following purchase 60%

    Additional information:

    Labor costs equal 19% of sales

    Other operating costs are $15,000 per month which includes $4,000 of depreciation.

    Labor and operating costs are paid in the month incurred.

    The cash balance on August 1 is $4,000.

    Required: Show all supporting calculations for credit.

    1. Calculate the amount of cash receipts for July, August and September.

    2. Calculate the amount of cash disbursements for July, August and September.

    3. Calculate the cash balance at September 30.

    4. Discuss two important reasons why Stein Apparel should prepare cash budgets.

    stratey an the master budget 461447

    Stein Apparel is a retail store specializing in women’s fashions. Stein’s management accountant has gathered the following information for Stein Apparel.

    Month Sales Purchases

    June $42,000 $17,640

    July $48,000 $20,160

    August $54,000 $22,680

    September $50,000 $21,000

    Cash is collected from customers in the following manner:

    Month of the sale 25%

    First month following the sale 40%

    Second month following the sale 20%

    Third month following the sale 10%

    Uncollectable 5%

    Purchases of inventory are paid as follows:

    Cash payment in month of purchase 40%

    Cash payment in month following purchase 60%

    Additional information:

    Labor costs equal 19% of sales

    Other operating costs are $15,000 per month which includes $4,000 of depreciation.

    Labor and operating costs are paid in the month incurred.

    The cash balance on August 1 is $4,000.

    Required: Show all supporting calculations for credit.

    1. Calculate the amount of cash receipts for July, August and September.

    2. Calculate the amount of cash disbursements for July, August and September.

    3. Calculate the cash balance at September 30.

    4. Discuss two important reasons why Stein Apparel should prepare cash budgets.

    identifying and analyzing financial statement effects of stock transactions 461450

    The stockholders’ equity of Verrecchia Company at December 31, 2008, follows:

    Common stock, $5 par value, 350,000 shares authorized;
    170,000 shares issued and outstanding

    $850,000

    Paid-in capital in excess of par value

    600,000

    Retained earnings

    346,000

    During 2009, the following transactions occurred:

    Jan. 5

    Issued 10,000 shares of common stock for $11 cash per share.

    Jan. 18

    Purchased 4,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $15 cash per share.

    Mar. 12

    Sold one-fourth of the treasury shares acquired January 18 for $19 cash per share.

    July 17

    Sold 500 shares of the remaining treasury stock for $14 cash per share.

    Oct. 1

    Issued 5,000 shares of 8%, $24 par value preferred stock for $40 cash per share.
    This is the first issuance of preferred shares from the 50,000 authorized shares.

    Prepare the December 31, 2009, stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet assuming that the company reports net income of $72,500 for the year.

    Stockholders’ Equity

    Paid-in capital:

    8% Preferred stock, $24 par value,
    50,000 shares authorized, 5,000
    shares issued and outstanding:

    Common stock, $5 par value, 350,000
    shares authorized; 180,000 shares
    issued:

    Additional paid-in capital
    Paid-in capital in excess of par
    value-preferred stock:

    Paid-in capital in excess of par
    value-common stock:

    Paid-in capital from treasury stock:

    Total paid-in capital:

    Retained earnings:

    Less: Treasury stock (2,500 shares) at cost

    :

    Total Stockholders’ Equity:

    expenses quadriple formula 461454

    Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:

    (All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)

    Oscar Corp

    Felix Corp

    Sales revenue

    800,000

    600,000

    Total expenses

    400,000

    200,000

    Cash

    90,000

    25,000

    Accounts receivable

    120,000

    75,000

    Property plant and equipment, net

    250,000

    225,000

    Accounts payable

    95,000

    60,000

    Salaries payable

    75,000

    35,000

    Long term liabilities

    150,000

    75,000

    Common shares outstanding, beginning of year

    50,000

    25,000

    Common shares outstanding, end of year

    100,000

    40,000

    No dividends were paid during 2008.

    Compute the following for both companies:

    1. Working capital

    oscar and felix corp 461455

    Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:

    (All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)

    Oscar Corp

    Felix Corp

    Sales revenue

    800,000

    600,000

    Total expenses

    400,000

    200,000

    Cash

    90,000

    25,000

    Accounts receivable

    120,000

    75,000

    Property plant and equipment, net

    250,000

    225,000

    Accounts payable

    95,000

    60,000

    Salaries payable

    75,000

    35,000

    Long term liabilities

    150,000

    75,000

    Common shares outstanding, beginning of year

    50,000

    25,000

    Common shares outstanding, end of year

    100,000

    40,000

    Find current ratio

    quadripant ration expense problem accounting 461456

    Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:

    (All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)

    Oscar Corp

    Felix Corp

    Sales revenue

    800,000

    600,000

    Total expenses

    400,000

    200,000

    Cash

    90,000

    25,000

    Accounts receivable

    120,000

    75,000

    Property plant and equipment, net

    250,000

    225,000

    Accounts payable

    95,000

    60,000

    Salaries payable

    75,000

    35,000

    Long term liabilities

    150,000

    75,000

    Common shares outstanding, beginning of year

    50,000

    25,000

    Common shares outstanding, end of year

    100,000

    40,000

    No dividends were paid during 2008.

    Which company appears more liquid? (Name a ratio used to determine)

    acounting fin data 461457

    Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:

    (All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)

    Oscar Corp

    Felix Corp

    Sales revenue

    800,000

    600,000

    Total expenses

    400,000

    200,000

    Cash

    90,000

    25,000

    Accounts receivable

    120,000

    75,000

    Property plant and equipment, net

    250,000

    225,000

    Accounts payable

    95,000

    60,000

    Salaries payable

    75,000

    35,000

    Long term liabilities

    150,000

    75,000

    Common shares outstanding, beginning of year

    50,000

    25,000

    Common shares outstanding, end of year

    100,000

    40,000

           

    No dividends were paid during 2008.

    Which company appears more liquid? (Name a ratio used to determine)

    help please 461463

    (TCO 1) Which of the following is not a difference between financial accounting and managerial accounting? (Points : 4)

    Financial accounting is primarily concerned with reporting the past, while managerial accounting is more concerned with the future.

    Managerial accounting uses more nonmonetary information than is used in financial accounting.

    Managerial accounting is primarily concerned with providing information for external users while financial accounting is concerned with internal users.

    Financial accounting must follow GAAP while managerial accounting is not required to follow GAAP.

    2. (TCO 1) Which of the following costs does not change when the level of business activity changes? (Points : 4)

    total fixed costs

    total variable costs

    total direct materials costs

    fixed costs per unit

    3. (TCO 1) You own a car and are trying to decide whether or not to trade it in and buy a new car. Which of the following costs is an opportunity cost in this situation? (Points : 4)

    the trip to Cancun that you will not be able to take if you buy the car

    the cost of the car you are trading in

    the cost of your books for this term

    the cost of your car insurance last year

    4. (TCO 1) Shula’s 347 Grill has budgeted the following costs for a month in which 1,600 steak dinners will be produced and sold: materials, $4,080; hourly labor (variable), $5,200; rent (fixed), $1,700; depreciation, $800; and other fixed costs, $600. Each steak dinner sells for $14.00 each. How much is the budgeted variable cost per unit? (Points : 4)

    $5.80

    $7.74

    $6.68

    $3.25

    5. (TCO 1) Which of the following is an example of a manufacturing overhead cost? (Points : 4)

    security at the manufacturing plant

    fabric used to produce shirts

    cost of shipping product to customers

    the salary of the president of the company

    6. (TCO 1) Which of the following is a period cost? (Points : 4)

    rent on a factory building

    depreciation on production equipment

    raw materials cost

    commissions paid on each unit sold

    7. (TCO 1) At December 31, 2010, WDT Inc. has a balance in the Work in Process Inventory account of $62,000. At January 1, 2010, the balance was $55,000. Current manufacturing costs for the year are $292,000, and cost of goods sold is $284,000. How much is cost of goods manufactured? (Points : 4)

    $292,000

    $299,000

    $277,000

    $285,000

    8. (TCO 2) BCS Company applies manufacturing overhead based on direct labor cost. Information concerning manufacturing overhead and labor for August follows:

    Estimated

    Actual

    Overhead cost

    $174,000

    $171,000

    Direct labor hours

    5,800

    5,900

    Direct labor cost

    $87,000

    $89,975

    How much is the predetermined overhead rate? (Points : 4)

    $2.00

    $1.90

    $30.00

    $1.93

    9. (TCO 2) During 2011, Madison Company applied overhead using a job-order costing system at a rate of $12 per direct labor hours. Estimated direct labor hours for the year were 150,000, and estimated overhead for the year was $1,800,000. Actual direct labor hours for 2011 were 140,000 and actual overhead was $1,670,000.

    What is the amount of under or over applied overhead for the year? (Points : 4)

    $10,000 underapplied

    $10,000 overapplied

    $130,000 underapplied

    $130,000 overapplied

    10. (TCO 3) Which of the following describes the differences between job-order and process costing? (Points : 4)

    Job-order costing is used in financial accounting while process costing is used in managerial accounting.

    Job-order costing can only be used by manufacturers; service enterprises must use process costing.

    Job-order costing is voluntary while process costing is mandatory.

    Job-order costing traces costs to jobs while process costing traces costs to departments and averages the costs among the units worked on during the period.

    11. (TCO 3) Caliente Company uses process costing. At the beginning of the month, there were 3,000 units in process, 70% complete with respect to material and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. 20,000 units were started during the month and 20,000 units were completed. The units in ending work in process inventory were 90% complete with respect to material and 30% complete with respect to conversion costs. How many equivalent units will be used in calculating the cost per unit for materials? (Points : 4)

    22,700

    23,000

    9,700

    18,300

    12. (TCO 3) Ranger Glass Company manufactures glass for French doors. At the start of May, 2,000 units were in-process. During May, 11,000 units were completed and 3,000 units were in process at the end of May. These in-process units were 90% complete with respect to material and 50% complete with respect to conversion costs. Other information is as follows:

    Work in process, May 1:

    Direct material

    $36,000

    Conversion costs

    $45,000

    Costs incurred during May:

    Direct material

    $186,000

    Conversion costs

    $255,000

    How much is the cost per equivalent unit for direct materials? (Points : 4)

    $24.00

    $16.20

    $15.86

    $13.58

    13. (TCO 4) Total costs were $75,800 when 30,000 units were produced and $95,800 when 40,000 units were produced. Use the high-low method to find the estimated total costs for a production level of 32,000 units. (Points : 4)

    $80,115

    $76,000

    $79,800

    $91,800

    activity based costing 461477

    Transvaal Mining Tools Ltd. of South Africa makes specialty tools used in the mining industry. The company uses an activity-based costing system for internal decision-making purposes. The company has four activity cost pools as listed below: Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Activity Rate Order size Number of direct labor-hours R 17.60 per direct labor-hour* Customer orders Number of customer orders R 360 per customer order Product testing Number of testing hours R 79 per testing hour Selling Number of sales calls R 1,494 per sales call * (The currency in South Africa is the rand, denoted here by R.) The managing director of the company would like information concerning the cost of a recently completed order for hard-rock drills. The order required 150 direct labor-hours, 18 hours of product testing, and three sales calls. Required: a. Prepare a report summarizing the overhead costs assigned to the order for hard-rock drills. (Omit the “R” sign in your response.) Activity Cost Pool ABC Cost Order size R Customer orders Product testing Selling Total R b. What is the total overhead cost assigned to the order? (Omit the “R” sign in your response.) Total overhead cost R

    question 1 cost allocation product profit margin killing products in the long term 461484

    Use the following contribution margin statement:

    Product A Product B Total
    sales volume (units) 100 180 280
    Revenue $16,000 $96,000 $112,000
    Variable costs:
    direct materials $3,200 $6,400 $9,600
    direct labor $6,400 $16,000 $22,400
    Contribution margin $6,400 $73,600 $80,000
    Fixed costs $67,200
    Profit $12,800

    Required:

    (a) allocate the shared fixed costs ($67,200) among product A and product B, using direct labor dollars as the allocation basis.
    allocation rate=$_________________ per DL$
    FC allocated to A=$_______________
    FC allocated to B=$_________________

    (b) using the allocated costs from (a), compute the profit margin for product A and product B.
    If you get a negative number, enter it with a minus sign, i.e., enter negative $1000 as -1000, not as ($1000)
    profit margin for A=$________________
    profit margin for B=$________________

    c) based on the profit margins from (b), should you kill product A or product B in the long term? Explain your decision.

    help with example 461486

    Use the information provided below to prepare the Cost of Good Manufactured Schedule:Bravo had the following costs as of Dec 31, 2010. Enter the correct values in the Green shaded cells.

    Table C

    Materials used in baking bread ?

    Factory Supervisor Salaries 20,000

    Bakers wages $32,000

    Rent for Executive Offices 36,000

    Sales Commissions 10000

    Utilities used in the factory 5000

    Advertising costs 12000

    Delivery truck costs 25000

    Depreciation on bake ovens 500

    Interest on bank loan 250

    Beginning Inventory Materials 10,000

    Beginning Work in Process 8000

    Ending Inventory Materials 4000

    Inventory Purchases 26000

    Ending Work in Process 2500

    Other Overhead costs 1200

    Beginning Finished Goods Inventory 7500

    Ending Finished Goods Inventory 6000

    Rent for Factory 7500

    Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule

    Beginning Work In Process ?

    Materials ?

    Beginning Inventory Materials ?

    Plus: Purchases ?

    Materials Available ?

    Less: Ending Inventory Materials ?

    Materials Used ?

    Direct Labor ?

    Overhead

    Factory Rent ?

    Depreciation on bake ovens ?

    Utilities used in Factory ?

    Other Overhead costs ?

    Total Overhead ?

    Total Manufacturing Costs ?

    Total Work in Process ?

    Less: Ending Work in Process ?

    Cost of Goods Manufactured ?

    Goods Available for Sale ?

    Less: Ending Finished Goods Inventory ?

    Cost of Goods Sold Schedule ?

    abe18 4 accounting question 461488

    Using the following data from the comparative balance sheet of Rodenbeck Company, illustrate vertical analysis. (Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5.)

    December 31, 2011 December 31, 2010
    Accounts receivable $ 527,990 $ 406,800
    Inventory $ 852,960 $ 603,240
    Total assets $ 3,029,000 $2,441,700

    Vertical Analysis

    Dec. 31, 2011

    Dec. 31, 2010

    Amount

    Percentage

    Amount

    Percentage

    Accounts receivable $ % $ %
    Inventory $ % $ %
    Total assets $ % $ %

    need help with this question below 461493

    Valmont, Inc. experienced the following events in 2012, in its first year of operation.

    1. Received $20,000 cash from the issue of common stock.

    2. Performed services on account for $50,000.

    3. Paid utility expense of $12,500.

    4. Collected $39,000 of the accounts receivable.

    5. Recorded $9,000 of accrued salaries at the end of the year.

    6. Paid a $5,000 cash dividend to the shareholders.

    a. Record the events in general ledger accounts under an accounting equation. In the last column of the table, provide appropriate account titles for the Retained Earnings amounts.

    b. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in stockholder’s equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for the 2012 accounting period.

    c. Why is the amount of net income different from the amount of net cash flow from operating activities?

    problem 16 18 using net present value and internal rate of return to evaluate invest 461496

    Veronica Tanner, the president of Tanner Enterprises is considering two investment opportunities. Because of limited resources, she will be able to invest in only one of them. Project A is to purchase a machine that will enable factory automation; the machine is expected to have a useful life of four years and no salvage value. Project B supports a training program that will improve the skills of employees operating the current equipment. Initial cash expenditures for Project A are $100,000 and for Project B is $40,000. The annual expected cash inflows are $31,487 for Project A and $13,169 for Project B. Both investments are expected to provide cash flow benefits for the next four years. Tanner Enterprises cost of capital is 8 percent.

    Required.

    a. Compute the net present value of each project. Which project should be adopted based on the net present value approach?

    preparing closing enteries 461497

    The Village of Seaside Pines prepared the following enterprise fund Trial Balance as of

    December 31, 2009, the last day of its fiscal year. The enterprise fund was

    established this year through a transfer from the General Fund.

    Debits Credits

    Accounts payable 110,000

    Accounts receivable 102,000

    Accrued interest payable 4,000

    Accumulated depreciation 45,000

    Administrative and selling expenses 175,000

    Allowance for uncollectible accounts 12,000

    Capital assets 550,000

    Cash 95,000

    Charges for sales and services 503,000

    Cost fo sales and services 347,000

    Depreciation expense 45,000

    Due from General Fund 40,000

    Interest expense 18,000

    Interest revenue 28,000

    Transfer in from General Fund 202,000

    Revenue bonds payable 475,000

    Supplies inventory 7,000

    Totals 1,379,000 1,379,000

    Prepare the closing entries for December 31.

    managerial accounting 461498

    Vinnie Morelli Corporation has the following overhead costs and cost drivers. Direct labor hours are estimated at 100,000 for the year.

    Activity Cost Pool Cost Driver Est. Overhead Cost Driver Activity

    Ordering and Receiving Orders $120,000 500 orders

    Machine Setup Setups 297,000 450 setups

    Machining Machine hours 1,500,000 125,000 MH

    Assembly

    Parts 1,200,000 1,000,000 parts

    Inspection Inspections 300,000 500 inspections

    If overhead is applied using activity-based costing, the overhead application rate for ordering and receiving is

    A) $1.20 per direct labor hour.

    B) $240 per order.

    C) $0.12 Per part.

    D) $6,834 per order.

    If overhead is applied using traditional costing based on based on direct labor hours, the overhead application rate is

    A) $9.60

    B) $12.00

    C) $15.00

    D) $34.17

    help me 461500

    Waterways puts much emphasis on cash flow when it plans for capital investments.

    The company chose its discount rate of 8% based on the rate of return it must pay its owners and

    creditors. Using that rate,Waterways then uses different methods to determine the best decisions

    for making capital outlays.

    In 2009 Waterways is considering buying five new backhoes to replace the backhoes it now

    has. The new backhoes are faster, cost less to run, provide for more accurate trench digging,

    have comfort features for the operators, and have 1-year maintenance agreements to go with

    them.The old backhoes are working just fine, but they do require considerable maintenance.The

    backhoe operators are very familiar with the old backhoes and would need to learn some new

    skills to use the new backhoes.

    The following information is available to use in deciding whether to purchase the new

    backhoes.

    Old Backhoes New Backhoes

    Purchase cost when new $90,000 $200,000

    Salvage value now $42,000

    Investment in major overhaul needed in next year $55,000

    Salvage value in 8 years $15,000 $90,000

    Remaining life 8 years 8 years

    Net cash flow generated each year $40,425 $53,900

    (a) Evaluate in the following ways whether to purchase the new equipment or overhaul the old

    equipment. (Hint: For the old machine, the initial investment is the cost of the overhaul. For

    the new machine, subtract the salvage value of the old machine to determine the initial cost

    of the investment.)

    (1) Using the net present value method for buying new or keeping the old.

    (2) Using the payback method for each choice. (Hint: For the old machine, evaluate the payback

    of an overhaul.)

    (3) Comparing the profitability index for each choice.

    (4) Comparing the internal rate of return for each choice to the required 8% discount rate.

    (b) Are there any intangible benefits or negatives that would influence this decision?

    (c) What decision would you make and why?

    what is the lowest transfer price that would not reduce the profits of the post divi 461387

    The readings in my accounting book doesn’t really help me solve this question. Please help. Thank you!

    The Post Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company produces basic posts which can be sold to outside customers or sold to the Lamp Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company. Last year the Lamp Division bought all of its 29,400 posts from Post at $1.50 each. The following data are available for last year’s activities of the Post Division:

    Capacity in units 305,000 posts

    Selling price per cost to outside customers $1.90

    Variable costs per post $0.80

    Fixed costs, total $241,000

    The total fixed costs would be the same for all the alternatives considered below. Suppose the transfers of posts to the Lamp Division cut into sales to outside customers by 17,500 units. What is the lowest transfer price that would not reduce the profits of the Post Division? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places.)

    * $0.80

    * $1.45

    * $1.90

    * $1.25

    exam 461388

    For what reason would retailers like The Gap select an accounting period that ends on or near the end of January?
    a. The company originally started business operations on that date.
    b. Business activity has reached a slow period that is suited to the preparation of its financial statements at the end of the year.
    C. The company’s CPAs are attempting to spread out the workload.
    d. The Internal Revenue Service requires merchandise companies to select such a date for their fiscal year.

    Question 2 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following accounts most likely would appear on the income statement of a merchandise company, but not on the income statement of a service company?
    a. Cost of Goods Sold
    b. Selling Expenses
    c. Administrative Expenses
    d. Income Tax Expense

    Question 3 1.5 points Save
    Gerald’s Department Store

    Gerald’s Department Store. is a merchandising company that uses the periodic inventory system. Selected account balances are listed below:

    Sales $175,000
    Purchases 90,000
    Inventory (Beginning) 23,000
    Inventory (Ending) 17,000
    Purchase returns and allowances 3,000
    Purchase discounts 7,000
    Transportation-in 4,000
    Sales discounts 8,000
    Sales returns and allowances 5,000

    Refer to Gerald’s Department Store. Calculate Gerald’s net sales.
    a. $162,000
    b. $167,000
    c. $170,000
    d. $175,000

    Question 4 1.5 points Save
    Silvertone Corp. sold merchandise to a customer on credit. The invoice amount was $1,000; the invoice date was June 10; credit terms were 1/10, n/30. Which one of the following statements is true?
    a.The customer can take a $10 discount if the invoice is paid on June 30
    b. The customer should pay $1,000 if the invoice is paid on July 9
    c. The customer must pay a $10 penalty if payment is made after July 9.
    d. The customer must pay $1,010 if payment is made after June 20.

    Question 5 1.5 points Save
    The recognition of cost of goods sold expense in the same period that sales revenue is recognized from the sale of merchandise is a good example of the
    a. matching principle
    b. full disclosure principle
    c. revenue realization principle
    d. historical cost principle

    Question 6 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following statements is false?
    a. The inventory account is updated after every sale and after every merchandise purchase under the perpetual inventory system.
    b. The inventory account is updated only at the end of the accounting period under the periodic inventory system.
    c. A cost of goods sold account is updated after each sale of merchandise under the periodic inventory system.
    d. A purchases account is used only under the periodic inventory system.

    Question 7 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following is correct?
    a. Inventory losses can be identified and controlled better under the perpetual system.
    b. Inventory can only be sold at the end of an accounting period under the periodic system.
    c. There is no difference in cost to implement a perpetual as compared to a periodic system.
    D, The perpetual system eliminates the need for an annual inventory count

    Question 8 1.5 points Save
    At the year end inventory count, if goods in transit are shipped FOB destination, they should be included in the inventory count of
    a. The seller
    b.The buyer
    c. The shipping company
    d. Neither the buyer nor the seller

    Question 9 1.5 points Save
    Which method assigns the cost of the most recent items purchased to ending inventory?
    a. Specific identification
    b.Weighted average cost
    c.FIFO
    d. LIFO

    Question 10 1.5 points Save
    Which method assigns the cost of the most recent items purchased to cost of goods sold?
    a. Specific identification
    b. Weighted average cost
    c. FIFO
    d. LIFO

    Question 11 1.5 points Save
    For which type of inventory would a company most likely use the specific identification method?
    a. Barbie dolls
    b. Cartons of milk
    c.Custom designed diamond rings
    d. Gasoline in storage tanks at a gasoline station
    Question 12 1.5 points Save
    Which inventory costing method results in the highest inventory balance during a period of rising prices?
    a. Weighted average cost
    b. FIFO
    c. LIFO
    d. Both FIFO and LIFO result in the same inventory balance

    Question 13 1.5 points Save
    During a period of increasing cost prices, which inventory costing method will yield the lowest cost of goods sold?
    a. Any method in which the company uses a periodic inventory system
    b. FIFO
    c. LIFO
    d. Weighted Average Cost
    Question 14 1.5 points Save
    If the amount assigned to ending inventory is incorrect,
    a. The balance sheet is affected, but the income statement is not
    b. The income statement is affected, but the balance sheet is not
    c. The balance sheet is affected, but cost of goods sold is not
    d. Both the balance sheet and the income statement are affected
    Question 15 1.5 points Save
    When the market value of inventory items has declined below its cost, which method would be the most appropriate in complying with GAAP?
    a.Gross Profit
    b. LIFO
    c. Lower of Cost or market
    d. Retail

    Question 16 1.5 points Save
    In which one of the following situations is the gross profit method of estimating inventory value useful?
    a. In determining the replacement cost of inventory for year-end financial statements
    b. In calculating the amount of inventory destroyed in a fire when periodic inventory records also are destroyed.
    c. In converting ending inventory valued at cost to retail for interim financial statements.
    d. In estimating the amount of inventory that should be purchased for the upcoming year.

    Question 17 1.5 points Save
    How are cash equivalents reported or disclosed in the financial statements?
    a.They appear only on the statement of cash flows
    b.They are included with short-term investments under current assets on the balance sheet.
    c.They are included with cash under current assets on the balance sheet.
    d.They are disclosed only in a footnote to the balance sheet.

    Question 18 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following is not a cash equivalent?
    a. 30-day certificate of deposit
    b. 60-day Corporate commercial
    c. 90-day U. S. treasury bill
    d. 180-day note issued by a local or state government

    Question 19 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following procedures is not part of preparing a bank reconciliation of a checking account
    a. Tracing deposits listed on the bank statement to the books to identify deposits in transit
    b. Arranging canceled checks in numerical order and tracing them to the books to identify outstanding checks
    c. Identifying items added on the bank statement which have not been recorded as cash receipts by the company
    d. Preparing adjustments to reverse the transactions recorded for checks that are still outstanding

    Question 20 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following items would be added to the balance per bank statement in a bank reconciliation?
    a. Outstanding checks
    b. Deposits in transit
    c. Service charge
    d. Interest on customer note

    Question 21 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following items would be subtracted from the balance per bank statement in a bank reconciliation?
    a. Outstanding checks
    b. Deposit in transit
    c. Service charges
    d. Interest on customer note

    Question 22 1.5 points Save
    Which one of the following procedures is incorrect for setting up and maintaining a petty cash fund?
    a. A check is prepared for a fixed amount; when the check is cashed, the money is entrusted to a petty cash custodian.
    b. An entry is recorded to establish the fund and obtain the cash.
    c. When appropriate documentation is presented, cash payments are made from the fund; the petty cash custodian retains the documentation.
    d. When the petty cash fund is replenished, an entry is recorded to recognize an increase in the petty cash account.

    Question 23 1.5 points Save
    If a company erroneously records a $500 deposit as $400 in its books, which of the following must occur when reconciling the bank statement?
    a. The company will have to increase the balance per the bank statement by $100.
    b. The company will have to increase the balance per the books by $100.
    c.The company will have to decrease the balance per bank statement by $100.
    d. None of the above

    Question 24 1.5 points Save
    Which internal control procedure is followed when management authorizes the purchasing department to order goods and services for the company?
    a. Segregation of duties
    b. Safeguarding of assets and records
    c. Independent verifications
    d. Proper authorizations

    Question 25 1.5 points Save
    Which internal control procedure is followed when storage areas are secured with limited access?
    a. Segregation duties
    b. Safeguarding assets and records
    c. Independent verifications
    d. Proper authorizations

    Question 26 1.5 points Save
    Which internal control procedure is violated when the cashier at the checkout stand also records the daily receipts in the journal?
    a. Segregation of duties
    b. Independent review and appraisal
    c. Independent verifications
    d. Proper authorizations

    Question 27
    Zenephia Corp. invested cash in a 9-month certificate of deposit (CD) on October 1, 2010. If Zenephia has an accounting period which ends on December 31, 2010, when would it most likely recognize interest revenue from the CD?
    a. On December 31, 2010 only
    b. On July 1, 2011 only
    c. Both December 31, 2010 and July 1, 2011
    d. On October 1, 2010

    Question 28 1.5 points Save
    What are the effects on the accounting equation from the purchase of a short-term investment?
    a.Assets and owners’ equity decrease
    b. No effects–assets increase and decrease by the same amount
    c. Assets and liabilities decrease
    d.Owners’ equity decreases and liabilities increase

    Question 29
    Which one of the following is an accurate description of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts?
    a. Contra Account
    b.Liability Account
    c. Revenue Account
    d. Expense Account

    Question 30
    If a company uses the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts,
    a. It is applying the matching principle
    b. It will record bad debt expense only when an account is determined to be uncollectible
    c. It will reduce the accounts receivable account at the end of the accounting period for estimated uncollectible accounts
    d. It will report accounts receivable in the balance sheet at their net realizable value

    Question 31
    Which one of the approaches for the allowance method of accounting for bad debts emphasizes the net realizable value of accounts receivable on the balance sheet?
    a. The percentage of accounts receivable approach
    b. The percentage of net credit sales approach
    c.The direct write-off method
    d.The uncollectible approach

    Question 32 Beginning accounts receivable were $10,000. All sales were on account and totaled $700,000. Cash collected from customers totaled $650,000. Calculate the ending accounts receivable balance.
    a. $40,000
    b.$50,000
    c. $60,000
    d.$70,000

    Question 33
    The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts represents:
    a. Cash set aside to make up for bad debt losses
    b. The amount of uncollectible accounts written off to date
    c. The difference between total sales made on credit and the amount collected from those credit sales
    d. The difference between the face value of accounts receivable and the net realizable value of accounts receivable

    Question 34
    Victory Corporation

    The data presented below is for Victory Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2010.
    .Sales (100% on credit) $1,500,000
    Sales returns 60,000
    Accounts Receivable (December 31, 2010) 250,000
    Allowance for Doubtful Accounts (Before adjustment at December 31, 2010) 3,000
    Estimated amount of uncollectible accounts based on an aging analysis 31,000

    Refer to Victory Corp. If Victory estimates its bad debts at 2% of net credit sales, what amount will be reported as bad debt expense for 2010?
    a. $25,800
    b. $27,000
    c. $28,800
    d. $30,000

    Question 35
    During 2010, the accounts receivable turnover rate for Stern Company increased from 10 to 14 times per year. Which one of the following statements is the most likely explanation for the change?
    a. The company’s credit department has followed up with customers whose account balances are past due in order to generate quicker collections
    b. The company has decreased sales to its most credit worthy customers
    c. The company has increased the amount of time customers have to pay their accounts before they are past due
    d. The company has extended credit to more risky customers in order to increase sales

    Question 36
    The party to a promissory note that agrees to repay money on the maturity date of the note is called the
    a. Lender
    b. Maker of the note
    c. Payee of the note
    d. Recipient of the note

    Question 37
    How will the payee of the promissory note record the note on its books?
    A. The promissory note will be recorded as an asset
    b.The promissory note will be recorded as a liability
    c. The promissory note will be recorded as revenue
    d.The promissory note will be recorded as an expense
    Question 38
    Discounting a note receivable
    a. Requires using an account called discount on notes receivable
    b. Is the process of lending money
    c. Slows the collection process
    d. Is the process of selling a promissory note

    Question 39
    Walnut Farm received a promissory note from a customer on March 1, 2010. The face amount of the note is $8,000; the terms are 90 days and 9% interest.
    Refer to the Walnut Farm. What is the total amount of interest that Walnut Farm will receive when the note is paid?
    a. $ 60
    b. $ 90
    c. $180
    d. $720

    Question 40 Whitecloud, Inc.
    The data presented below is for Whitecloud, Inc. for 2010.
    a.Credit sales during the year $2,100,000
    b.Accounts receivable – December 31, 2010 295,000
    c.Allowance for doubtful accounts – December 31, 2010 28,000
    d.Bad debt expense for the year 17,000

    Refer to Whitecloud, Inc. What amount will Whitecloud show on its year-end balance sheet for the net realizable value of its accounts receivable?
    a. $295,000
    b. $267,000
    c. $250,000
    d. $ 28,000

    Question 41 1.5 points Save
    Exhibit 8-1 Use the information concerning Lamory, Inc. to answer the questions that follow:

    Lamory, Inc. purchased a crane at a cost of $80,000. The crane has an estimated residual value of $5,000 and an estimated life of 8 years, or 12,500 hours of operation. The crane was purchased on January 1, 2009 and was used 2,700 hours in 2009 and 2,600 hours in 2010.

    Refer to Exhibit 8-1. What amount will Lamory, Inc. report as depreciation expense over the 8-year life of the equipment?
    a. $60,000
    b. $72,000
    c. $75,000
    d. $80,000

    Question 42 1.5 points Save
    Exhibit 8-1 Use the information concerning Lamory, Inc. to answer the questions that follow:

    Lamory, Inc. purchased a crane at a cost of $80,000. The crane has an estimated residual value of $5,000 and an estimated life of 8 years, or 12,500 hours of operation. The crane was purchased on January 1, 2009 and was used 2,700 hours in 2009 and 2,600 hours in 2010.

    Refer Exhibit 8-1. If Lamory uses the straight-line method, what is the book value at December 31, 2011?
    a. $46,875
    d. $51,875
    c. $62,500
    d. $67,500

    Question 43 1.5 points Save
    Which of the following accounts would not be reported in the Property, Plant, and Equipment section of a balance sheet?
    a.Accumulated Depreciation–Buildings
    b.Buildings
    c. Depreciation Expense–Buildings
    d. Land

    Question 44 1.5 points Save
    On the balance sheet, the cumulative amount of plant and equipment already expensed is reported in an account called
    a. Accumulated Amortization
    b.Accumulated Depreciation
    c. Amortization Expense
    d. Depreciation Expense

    Question 45 1.5 points Save
    Which of the following costs related to the purchase of production equipment incurred by SAB Company during 2009 would be considered a revenue expenditure?
    a.Installation costs for equipment
    b.Purchase price of the equipment less the cash discount
    c. Repair and maintenance costs during the equipment’s first year of service
    d. Transportation charges to deliver the equipment to SAB Company

    Question 46 1.5 points Save
    Current accounting standards indicate that the costs of intangible assets with an indefinite life, such as goodwill, should
    a. not be amortized.
    b. be reported on the statement of retained earnings in the year in which acquired.
    c. be amortized over a reasonable period of time not to exceed 40 years.
    d. be debited to an expense account entirely in the year in which acquired.

    Question 47 1.5 points Save
    Goodwill can be recorded as an asset when a(n)
    a. business has above normal profitability compared to other businesses in its industry.
    B.business can determine that it has created customer goodwill and name recognition.
    c. offer is received to purchase the business at a price in excess of the value of the assets.
    d. business is purchased and payment is made in excess if the value of the net assets.

    Question 48 1.5 points Save
    Which of the following sets of factors is needed to calculate depreciation on plant and equipment?
    a. The asset’s acquisition cost, replacement cost, and its estimated residual value
    b. The estimated residual value of the asset, its replacement cost, and its market value
    c. The asset’s replacement cost, its estimated life, and its estimated residual value
    d. The estimated life of the asset, its acquisition cost, and its estimated residual value

    Question 49 1.5 points Save
    If a company constructs an asset over a period of time and borrows money, the amount of interest incurred during construction on the borrowed money is
    a.capitalized as part of the cost of the plant asset.
    b.amortized over the construction period.
    c. reported as interest expense on the income statement.
    d. reported as depletion on the income statement.

    Question 50 1.5 points Save
    Research and development costs are
    a. treated as an expense when incurred.
    b. capitalized but not amortized.
    c. capitalized and amortized over the periods that will probably benefit from the research and development.
    d. included with the cost of the patent resulting from the research and development.

    Question 51 1.5 points Save
    Paul Gibbs bought a pub. The purchase price was $695,000. An appraiser provided the following appraisal values: land $320,000: building $370,000 and equipment $60,000. What cost should be allocated to the building?
    a. $370,000
    b. $695,000
    c. $342,867
    d. $399,281

    Question 52 1.5 points Save
    Cookeville Transportation Company sold an old truck on December 31, 2007, for $18,400 cash. The following data was available when the truck sold:
    Acquisition cost $75,000
    .Estimated residual value at time of acquisition 8,000
    .Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 2007 after adjustment 53,600

    When this transaction is recorded, it should include a
    a. debit of $3,000 to the Loss on Disposal account
    b. credit of $21,400 to the Truck account
    c.credit of $3,000 to the Gain on Disposal account
    d. credit of $5,000 to the Gain on Disposal account

    Question 53 1.5 points Save
    All of the following are intangible assets except
    a. patents
    b.goodwill
    c.franchises
    d. accounts receivable

    Question 54 1.5 points Save
    Exhibit 8-5 Use the information provided for the Pegleg Shrimp Company to answer the questions that follow.

    On January 1, 2009, Pegleg Shrimp Company purchased a ship for $2,000,000. It has a ten-year useful life and a residual value of $50,000. The company uses the double-declining-balance method.

    Refer to Exhibit 8-5. What was the depreciation expense for Pegleg Shrimp for the year ended December 31, 2009?
    a. $ -0-
    b. $195,000
    c. $390,000
    d. $400,000

    the most recent monthly income statement for kennaman stores is given below 461389

    The most recent monthly income statement for Kennaman Stores is given below:

    Total

    Store I

    Store II

    Sales

    $2,000,000

    $1,200,000

    $800,000

    Less variable expenses

    1,200,000

    840,000

    360,000

    Contribution margin

    800,000

    360,000

    440,000

    Less traceable fixed expenses

    400,000

    220,000

    180,000

    Segment margin

    400,000

    140,000

    260,000

    Less common fixed expenses

    300,000

    180,000

    120,000

    Net operating income

    $ 100,000

    $( 40,000)

    $140,000

    Kennaman is considering closing Store I. If Store I is closed, one-fourth of its traceable fixed expenses would continue unchanged. Also, the closing of Store I would result in a 20% decrease in sales in Store II. (The decrease in sales would be the result of selling fewer units in store II, not due to reduced selling prices. In addition to sales, what other elements in the budget will be affected?) Kennaman allocates common fixed expenses on the basis of sales dollars.

    Required:

    Compute the overall increase or decrease in Kennaman’s net operating income if Store I is closed.

    monthly income statement net operating income 461390

    The most recent monthly income statement for Kennaman Stores is given below:

    Total

    Store I

    Store II

    Sales

    $2,000,000

    $1,200,000

    $800,000

    Less variable expenses

    1,200,000

    840,000

    360,000

    Contribution margin

    800,000

    360,000

    440,000

    Less traceable fixed expenses

    400,000

    220,000

    180,000

    Segment margin

    400,000

    140,000

    260,000

    Less common fixed expenses

    300,000

    180,000

    120,000

    Net operating income

    $ 100,000

    $( 40,000)

    $140,000

    Kennaman is considering closing Store I. If Store I is closed, one-fourth of its traceable fixed expenses would continue unchanged. Also, the closing of Store I would result in a 20% decrease in sales in Store II. (The decrease in sales would be the result of selling fewer units in store II, not due to reduced selling prices. In addition to sales, what other elements in the budget will be affected?) Kennaman allocates common fixed expenses on the basis of sales dollars.

    Required:

    Compute the overall increase or decrease in Kennaman’s net operating income if Store I is closed.

    managerial acccounting net present value 461393

    Renfree Mines, Inc., owns the mining rights to a large tract of land in a mountainous area. The tract contains a mineral deposit that the company believes might be commercially attractive to mine and sell. An engineering and cost analysis has been made, and it is expected that the following cash flows would be associated with opening and operating a mine in the area:

    Cost of equipment required $ 850,000

    Annual net cash receipts $ 305,000*

    Working capital required $ 225,000

    Cost of road repairs in eight years $ 66,000

    Salvage value of equipment in nine years $ 200,000

    *Receipts from sales of ore, less out-of-pocket costs for salaries, utilities, insurance, and so forth.

    The mineral deposit would be exhausted after nine years of mining. At that point, the working capital would be released for reinvestment elsewhere. The company’s required rate of return is 15%. (Ignore income taxes.)

    Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 and Exhibit 13B-2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

    Required:

    a.

    Determine the net present value of the proposed mining project. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net present value $

    b. Should the project be accepted?

    No?

    Yes?

    trying to solve for trial balance and adjusted trial balance 461397

    REQUIREMENT #1:

    During its first month of operation, the Parkview Landscaping Corporation, which specializes in residential landscaping,completed the following transactions:

    July 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $24,000, in exchange for 4,800 shares of $5 par value common stock.

    July 1 Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $2,400.

    July 1 Paid the current month’s rent, $2,080.

    July 3 Purchased landscaping equipment from Brookwood Company, $8,800. Paid $1,200 down and the balance was placed on account. Payments will be $400.00 per month for nineteen months. The first payment is due 8/1. Note: Use Accounts Payable for the Balance Due.

    July 8 Purchased landscaping supplies from Lakeside Company on credit, $780.

    July 12 Paid utility bill for July, $308.

    July 16 Received cash for landscaping revenue for the first half of July, $2,724.

    July 19 Made payment on account to Lakeside Company, $400.

    July 31 Received cash for landscaping revenue for the last half of July, $2,620.

    July 31 Declared and paid cash dividend of $1,600.

    Prepare journal entries to record the July transactions in the General Journal below and a trial balance; adjusted trial balance

    perform the 7 calculations 461399

    Retained Earnings

    2010 2009

    R/E @ the beginning 407,000 61,000

    Add net income 395,000 373,000

    Total 802,000 434,000

    Deduct Dividends

    On preferred stock 3,000 3,000

    On common stock 24,000 24,000

    Total 27,000 27,000

    R/E @ the End 775,000 407,000

    Income Statements

    2010 2009

    GROSS sales 1,502,000 1,403,000

    Returns & Allowances 2,000 3,000

    NET sales 1,500,000 1,400,000

    Cost of Goods sold 480,000 450,000

    Gross Profit 1,020,000 950,000

    Selling Expenses 300,000 275,000

    Administrative Exp. 200,000 198,000

    Total Op. Exp. 500,000 473,000

    Income from Ops 520,000 477,000

    Other Income 24,000 5,000

    544,000 482,000

    Interest expense 100,000 70,000

    Income Before taxes 444,000 412,000

    Income tax expense 49,000 39,000

    Net Income 395,000 373,000

    Assets

    2010 2009

    Current Assets:

    Cash 200,000 100,000

    Temp Investments 350,000 300,000

    A/R 250,000 200,000

    Inventories 200,000 100,000

    Prepaid Exp. 103,000 23,000

    Total current Assets 1,103,000 723,000

    Long term Investments 250,000 250,000

    PP&E(net) 1,000,000 975,000

    Total assets 2,353,000 1,948,000

    Liabilities

    2010 2009

    Current liabilities 278,000 241,000

    Long-term Liabilities

    Mortgage Note 6% 200,000

    Bonds payable 9% 800,000 1,000,000

    Total LT liabilities 1,000,000 1,000,000

    Total liabilities 1,278,000 1,241,000

    Stockholder’s Equity

    2010 2009

    Preferred $3 stock, $50 Par 100,000 100,000

    Common Stock $5 Par 200,000 200,000

    Retained Earnings 775,000 407,000

    Total Stockholder’s equity 1,075,000 707,000

    Total Liabilities & Stockholders equity 2,353,000 1,948,000

    *The stock is selling at $50 a share

    1. Working Capital for year end 2010 ____________________

    2.Current Ratio for year end 2010____________________

    3.Quick ratio for year end 2010__________________

    4. A/R turnover for 2010____________________

    5. Days to collect average A/R for 2010 _____________

    6. Inventory turnover for 2010___________________

    7. Days to sell Average inventory for 2010___________________

    homework 461400

    Reynolds Corp is a manufacturing company of kayaks. On June 1, 2011 the company’s ledger contains the following data:

    Raw Material Inventory $18,000

    Work in Process Inventory $7,320

    Manufacturing Overhead Incurred $1,500

    Job Cost Sheet

    Customer Dir Material Dir Lab Mfg Ovh

    Dicks $1,500 $1,200 $840

    Sports Authority $1,200 $720 $504

    Bass Pro shop $540 $480 $336

    $3,240 $2,400 $1,680

    During the month of June the following costs were incurred: (a) raw materials purchased on account $2,400,
    (b) labor paid $4,560, (c) manufacturing overhead paid $840.

    A summary of materials requisition slips and time tickets for the month of June are:

    Customer Mat Req Time Ticket

    Dicks $300 $240

    Sports Authority $360 $600

    Bass Pro Shop $1,380 $780

    Sears $1,140 $1,740

    $3,180 $3,360

    General Use $900 $1,200

    $4,080 $4,560

    Overhead was charged to jobs on the basis of $0.40 per dollar of direct labor cost. The kayaks for Dicks, Sports Authority and Bass Pro Shop were completed during June. The jobs for Dicks and Bass Pro Shop were sold on account for $11,100 and 8,300 respectively.

    1. Prepare journal entries for the June transactions: (a) for purchase of raw materials, factory labor costs incurred, and manufacturing overhead cost incurred, (b) assignment of raw material, labor and overhead to production, (c) completion of jobs and sale of goods.

    2. Post the entries to Work in process Inventory.

    3. Prepare the job cost sheets for all jobs worked during the month.

    4. Prepare the journal entries for the sales to Dicks and Bass Pro Shop.

    5. What is the balance of the Finished Goods Inventory? What is the total balance of the Work in Process inventory?

    6. What is the amount of over or under applied overhead?

    d v lifo and correction of errors 461403

    Roberts Company manufactures one product. On December 31, 2004, Roberts adopted the dollar-value LIFO inventory method. The inventory on that date using the dollar-value LIFO inventory method was $200,000. Inventory data are as follows:
    Inventory at Price index
    Year year-end prices (base year 2004)
    2005 $205,000 1.05
    2006 240,000 1.10
    2007 270,000 1.23

    Instructions
    Compute the inventory at December 31, 2005, 2006, & 2007 using the dollar-value LIFO method for each year. (round all computations to the nearest dollar)

    Part B

    Martin Co. inadvertently overstates its 2005 ending inventory by $2,000 and understates its 2006 ending inventory by $5,000. Determine the effect of this error on the following accounts over the following period. State whether the account is overstated, understated or correct and by how much if over- or understated.
    1. Cost of goods sold in 2005 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.
    2. Retained earnings at end of 2005 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.
    3. Net income in 2006 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦
    4. Cost of goods sold in 2007 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.
    5. Retained Earnings at end of 2007 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.

    help with inventory accounting question 461404

    Rodman Company has the following balances as of December 31, 20×7.

    Materials inventory $ 15 000 dr.

    Work in process inventory 35,200 dr.

    Finished goods inventory 50,100 dr.

    Manufacturing overhead (after allocation) 3,500 dr.

    Cost of goods sold 74,500 dr.

    Additional information is as follows:

    Cost of materials purchased during 20X7 $ 41,000

    Cost of direct materials requisitioned in 20×7 47,000

    Cost of indirect materials requisitioned in 20X7 8,000

    Cost of goods completed in 20X7 105,000

    Manufacturing overhead allocated (120% of direct labor) 51,000

    Required:

    a) January 1, 20X7, materials inventory

    b) January 1, 20×7, work in process inventory

    c) January 1, 20X7, finished goods inventory

    d) Actual manufacturing overhead incurred

    accounting help please 461405

    Rodman Company has the following balances as of December 31, 20×7.
    Materials inventory $ 15 000 dr.
    Work in process inventory 35,200 dr.
    Finished goods inventory 50,100 dr.
    Manufacturing overhead (after allocation) 3,500 dr.
    Cost of goods sold 74,500 dr.

    Additional information is as follows:
    Cost of materials purchased during 20X7 $ 41,000 ‘
    Cost of direct materials requisitioned in 20×7 47,000
    Cost of indirect materials requisitioned in 20X7 8,000
    Cost of goods completed in 20X7 105,000 .
    Manufacturing overhead allocated (l20% of direct labor) 51,000 1

    Required:
    a) January 1, 20X7, materials inventory
    b) January 1, 20×7, work in process inventory
    c) January 1, 20X7, finished goods inventory
    d) Actual manufacturing overhead incurred

    managerial accounting 461407

    Roland Company operates a small factory in which it manufactures two products: A and B. Production and sales result for last year were as follow:

    A B

    Units sold 8,000 20,000

    Selling price per unit 65 52

    Variable costs per unit 35 30

    Fixed costs per unit 15 15

    For purposes of simplicity, the firm allocates total fixed costs over the total number of units of A and B produced and sold.

    The research department has developed a new product (C) as a replacement for product B. Market studies show that Roland Company could sell 11,000 units of C next year at a price of $80, the variable costs per unit of C are $29. The introduction of product C will lead to a 10% increase in demand for product A and discontinuation of product B. If the company does not introduce the new product, it expects next year’s result to be the same as last year’s.

    Instructions

    Should Roland Company introduce product C next year? Explain why or why not. Show calculations to support your decision.

    future value and present value 461408

    Ron Stein Company recently signed a lease for a new office building, for a lease period of 10 years. Under the lease agreement, a security deposit of $12,000 is made, with the deposit to be returned at the expiration of the lease, with interest compounded at 10% per year. What amount will the company receive at the time the lease expires? (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10,250.20.)

    $

    (b) Kate Greenway Corporation, having recently issued a $20 million, 15-year bond issue, is committed to make annual sinking fund deposits of $620,000. The deposits are made on the last day of each year and yield a return of 10%. Will the fund at the end of 15 years be sufficient to retire the bonds? If not, what will the deficiency be? (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 100,250.20.)

    $

    (c) Under the terms of his salary agreement, president Juan Rivera has an option of receiving either an immediate bonus of $40,000, or a deferred bonus of $75,000 payable in 10 years. Ignoring tax considerations, and assuming a relevant interest rate of 8%, which form of settlement should Rivera accept?

    Accept bonus nowAccept deferred bonus in 10 years

    Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question

    acounting calculations 461415

    Sales revenue

    800,000

    600,000

    Total expenses

    400,000

    200,000

    Cash

    90,000

    25,000

    Accounts receivable

    120,000

    75,000

    Property plant and equipment, net

    250,000

    225,000

    Accounts payable

    95,000

    60,000

    Salaries payable

    75,000

    35,000

    Long term liabilities

    150,000

    75,000

    Common shares outstanding, beginning of year

    50,000

    25,000

    Common shares outstanding, end of year

    100,000

    40,000

    No dividends were paid during 2008.

    Compute the following for both companies:

    1. Working capital

    2. Current ratio

    3. Debt to assets ratio

    4 Earnings per share

    5. Which company appears more liquid? (Name a ratio used to determine)

    6. Which company appears more solvent? (Name a ratio used to determine.)

    exercise 20 5 461423

    ScooterSport Inc. manufactures and sells two styles of scooter, Mountain Cat and City Dawg. These scooters are sold in two regions, the Colorado and Northern California region. Information about the two scooters is as follows:??

    The sales unit volume for the territories and products for the period is as follows:??

    Mountain Cat City Dawg

    sales price $250 $150

    Variable Cost of goods sold per unit 92 75

    Manufacturing margin per unit $158 $ 75

    Variable selling expenses per unit 104 30

    Contribution margin per unit $ 54 $ 45

    The sales unit volume for the territories and products for the period is as follows:

    Colorado North California

    Mountain Cat 6,000 3,000

    City Dawg 0 3,000

    a. Prepare a contribution margin by sales territory report. Round the contribution margin ratio for each product to two decimal places if required. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.

    SCOOTERSPORT INC.

    Contribution Margin by Territory

    Colorado Northern California

    Sales $ $

    Variable cost of goods sold

    Manufacturing margin $ $

    Variable selling expenses

    Contribution margin $ $

    Contribution margin ratio (as a percent) % %

    recording adjusting and reporting long term available for sale securities 461428

    Shaq Security, which began operations in 2011, invests in long-term available-for-sale securities. Following is a series of transactions and events determining its long-term investment activity.

    2011

    Jan. 20 Purchased 1,500 shares of Johnson & Johnson at $20.00 per share plus a $240 commission.

    Feb. 9 Purchased 1,100 shares of Sony at $46.20 per share plus a $245 commission.

    June 12 Purchased 1,600 shares of Mattel at $27 per share plus an $195 commission.

    Dec. 31

    Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are Johnson & Johnson, $21.00; Mattel, $25.50; Sony, $38.

    2012

    Apr. 15 Sold 1,500 shares of Johnson & Johnson at $23.00 per share less a $685 commission.

    July 5 Sold 1,600 shares of Mattel at $25.50 per share less a $491 commission.

    July 22 Purchased 620 shares of Sara Lee at $22.50 per share plus a $470 commission.

    Aug. 19 Purchased 900 shares of Eastman Kodak at $17 per share plus a $198 commission.

    Dec. 31

    Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Kodak, $19.25; Sara Lee, $20.00; Sony, $35.00.

    2013

    Feb. 27 Purchased 2,600 shares of Microsoft at $69 per share plus a $525 commission.

    June 21 Sold 1,100 shares of Sony at $48.00 per share less a $2,640 commission.

    June 30 Purchased 1,500 shares of Black & Decker at $35.00 per share plus a $435 commission.

    Aug. 3 Sold 620 shares of Sara Lee at $31.25 per share less a $435 commission.

    Nov. 1 Sold 900 shares of Eastman Kodak at $22.75 per share less a $2,309 commission.

    Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Black & Decker, $38.00; Microsoft, $71.00.

    1.

    Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events and any year-end fair value adjustments to the portfolio of long-term available-for-sale securities.

    2.

    Prepare a table that summarizes the (a) total cost, (b) total fair value adjustment, and (c) total fair value of the portfolio of long-term available-for-sale securities at each year-end.

    3.

    Prepare a table that summarizes (a) the realized gains and losses and (b) the unrealized gains or losses for the portfolio of long-term available-for-sale securities at each year-end. …..

    * please answer it with the same numbers ( Thank you )

    variable costs 461430

    Sharpens Inc. produces knife sets for use in commercial kitchens. They sell them for $400 each. Selected data for the company’s operations last year follow:

    Units in beginning inventory 0

    Units produced 3,000

    Units sold 2,500

    Units in ending inventory 500

    Variable costs per unit:

    Direct materials $120

    Direct labor 80

    Variable manufacturing overhead 40

    Variable selling and administrative 20

    Fixed costs:

    Fixed manufacturing overhead $300,000

    Fixed selling and administrative $200,000

    a. Assume that the company uses variable costing, compute the unit cost for one knife set. Show computations.

    b. Assuming that the company uses absorptions costing, compute the unit cost for the one knife set. Show computations.

    regular tax and amt calculation 461431

    Sheldon Corp. reports regular taxable income of $150,000 in the current year. It’s regular tax is $41,750. Sheldon takes into account the following facts when calculating the $150,000 amount.

    * Sheldon deducts $90,000 of MACRS depreciation for regular tax purposes. Depreciation for AMT purposes. Depreciation for AMT purposes is $60,000.

    * Sheldon sells equipment for $28,000. THe equipment regular tax basis at the time of sake is $16,000, and its AMT basis is $25,000.

    * Sheldons ACE is $340,000.

    Sheldon is NOT a small corporation exempt from the AMT and has NO AMT adjustment for the US Production Activities deduction.

    1. What is Sheldons AMT?

    2. What minimum tax credit does Sheldon obtain in the current year? In what years can Sheldon use it?

    inventroy cost flow allocation 461432

    Shin Company sells one product. Presented below is information

    for January for Shin Company.

    Jan. 1 Inventory 300 units at $10 each

    4 Sale 100 units at $16 each

    5 Sale 140 units at $16 each

    11 Purchase 450 units at $12 each

    13 Sale 360 units at $17.50 each

    20 Purchase 480 units at $14 each

    27 Sale 300 units at $18 each

    1. Assume Shin uses a periodic system and FIFO. Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.

    2. Assume Shin uses a periodic system and LIFO. Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.

    3. Assume Shin uses a perpetual system and the average cost assumption (moving average). Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.

    4. Assume Shin uses a perpetual system and LIFO. Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.

    5. If you were to recalculate Q.1 using a perpetual system rather than the stated periodic system, indicate whether you feel that cost of goods sold for the period will be higher, lower, or the same as you calculated for Q.1.

    write a letter including proper citations to relevant authority to mr smith explaini 461433

    Sidney Smith, an attorney, paid $30,000 during the year for his children to attend Jewish schools. On his

    tax return, Mr. Smith deducted $18,000, based on the argument that 60% of his children’s instruction

    was religious and that payments related to that type of instruction constituted contributions to the

    temple for conducting its religious functions. He did not attempt to deduct the 40% of the tuition that

    was related to secular education. Further, Smith argued that the IRS had allowed members of the

    Church of Scientology to deduct the portion of fees paid to the church that were related to religious and

    education, and that disallowance of his deduction would constitute unequal application of the law.

    Write a letter, including proper citations to relevant authority, to Mr. Smith explaining whether the

    $18,000 is deductible or nondeductible. He lives at 1142 Southshore Avenue, Tampa, Florida 33192.

    tax 461349

    Problem 2

    Two officers of Corporation B disguised dividends as commissions and thus lowered the income tax on Corporation B’s corporate income tax return. Their objective was to reduce the possibility that of governmental regulation for having “windfall profits”; although their intent was not to evade taxes, they were aware that characterizing dividends as “commissions” would reduce taxable income. Officer 1 changed the accounting records so that the dividends were reclassified as commissions and took the records to the tax preparer. Officer 2 did nothing except encourage Officer 1 to do what he did. Can Officer 2 be charged with any wrongdoing since he didn’t commit an overt act?

    Required: For the above situation, provide the code sections under Title 26 and Title 18 that you believe are applicable and give brief reasons for each charge you recommend. If you believe a section is appropriate but do not believe the taxpayer is likely to be found guilty under that section, please briefly state the reason(s) you believe the taxpayer is unlikely to be found guilty. (Please avoid using a “scattergun” approach, i.e., listing sections in hopes that they will “stick”.)

    high low profit equation 461350

    Problem 4.9. High Low, Profit Equation [Lo 2] Rhetorix, Inc. produces stereo speakers. Each unit (a pair of speakers) sells for $900. Below is information on production/sales and costs for 2010.
    Production and sales in unit productn costs Selling and Admin Costs
    January 105 $88,860 $23,570
    February 117 $97,600 $25,200
    March 95 $83,007 $22,495
    April 106 $89,600 $23,720
    May 115 $96,200 $24,950
    June 125 $103,500 $26,250
    July 128 $105,670 $26,690
    August 132 $108,550 $27,200
    September 138 $112,978 $28,030
    October 126 $104,200 $26,400
    November 124 $102,750 $26,150
    December 108 $91,050 $23,900
    Total 1421 $1,183,965 $304,645
    Average cost per unit $83,319,141 $21,438,776

    “B. The company estimates that production and sales in 2011 will be 1,550 units. Based on this estimate, forecast income before taxes for 2011.

    purchased merchandise from black company for 6 000 under credit terms of 1 15 n 30 f 461351

    Problem 5-2A Preparing journal entries for merchandising activities-perpetual system L.O. P1, P2

    July 1

    Purchased merchandise from Black Company for $6,000 under credit terms of 1/15, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 1.

    2

    Sold merchandise to Coke Co. for $800 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 2. The merchandise had cost $500.

    3

    Paid $100 cash for freight charges on the purchase of July 1.

    8 Sold merchandise that had cost $1,200 for $1,600 cash.

    9

    Purchased merchandise from Lane Co. for $2,300 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB destination, invoice dated July 9.

    11

    Received a $200 credit memorandum from Lane Co. for the return of part of the merchandise purchased on July 9.

    12

    Received the balance due from Coke Co. for the invoice dated July 2, net of the discount.

    16

    Paid the balance due to Black Company within the discount period.

    19

    Sold merchandise that cost $900 to AKP Co. for $1,250 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 19.

    21

    Issued a $150 credit memorandum to AKP Co. for an allowance on goods sold on July 19.

    24

    Paid Lane Co. the balance due after deducting the discount.

    30

    Received the balance due from AKP Co. for the invoice dated July 19, net of discount.

    31

    Sold merchandise that cost $3,200 to Coke Co. for $5,000 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 31.

    Prepare journal entries to record the above merchandising transactions of Bask Company, which applies the perpetual inventory system. (Identify each receivable and payable; for example, record the purchase on July 1 in Accounts Payable”Black.) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    accounting 101 461352

    Problem 9-5 Warranties

    Bombeck Company sells a product for $1500. When the customer buys it, Bombeck provides a one-year warranty Bombeck sold 120 products during 2010. Based on analysis of past warranty records, Bombeck estimates that repairs will average 3% of total sales.

    Required:

    1. Prepare a journal entry to record the estimated liability.

    2. Assume that during 2010, products under warranty must be repaired using repair parts from inventory costing 4950. Prepare the journal entry to record the repairs of products.

    Problem 9-10 Contingent Liabilities

    Several independent items are listed for which the outcome of events is unknown at year end.

    a. A company offers a two year warranty on sales of new computers. It believes that 4% of the computers will require repairs.

    b. A company is involved in a trademark infringement suit. The company’s legal experts believe that an award of $500,000 in the company’s favor will be made.

    c. A company is involved in an environmental cleanup lawsuit. The company’s legal counsel believes that the outcome may be unfavorable but has not been able to estimate the costs of the possible loss.

    d. A soap manufacturer has included a coupon offer in the Sunday newspaper supplements. The manufacturer estimates that 25% of the 50c coupons will be redeemed.

    e. A company has been sued by the federal government for price fixing. The company’s legal counsel believes that there will be an unfavorable verdict and has made an estimate of the probable loss.

    Required:

    1. Identify which of the items (a) through (e) should be recorded at year-end

    2. Identify which of the items (a) through (e) should not be recorded but should be disclosed in the year-end financial statements.

    need help 461353

    Problem P1-1 Budgets in Managerial Accounting

    Santiago’s Salsa is in the process of preparing a production cost budget for May. Actual costs in April were:

    Santiago’s Salsa

    Production Cost Budget

    April 2011

    Production – Jars of salsa $25,000

    Ingredient cost (variable) $20,000

    Labor cost (variable) $12,000

    Rent (fixed) $5,000

    Depreciation (fixed) $6,000

    Other (fixed) $1,000

    Total $44,000

    Required:

    Part a: Using this information, prepare a budget for May. Assume that production will increase to 30,000 jars of salsa, reflecting an anticipated sales increase related to a new marketing campaign.

    Part b.1: Does the budget suggest that additional workers are needed? Suppose the wage rate is $20 per hour. How many additional labor hours are needed in May?

    Part b.2: What would happen if management did not anticipate the need for additional labor in May? Narrative answer:

    need help on hw 461354

    Problem P1-3 Budgets in Managerial Accounting
    Matthew Gabon, the sales manager Office Furniture Solutions, prepared the following budget for 2011:

    Sales Department
    Budgeted Costs, 2011 (Assuming Sales of $11,000,000)

    Salaries $400,000 Fixed
    Commissions $150,000 Variable
    Advertising $75,000 Fixed
    Charge for Office Space $3,000 Fixed
    Office Supplied & Forms $2,000 Variable
    Total $630,000

    After he submitted his budget, the president of Office Furniture Solutions reviewed it and recommended that advertising be increased to $100,000. Further she wanted Matthew to assume a sales level of $11,000,000. The level of sales is to be achieved without adding to the sales force.
    Matthew’s sales group occupies approximately 250 square feet of office space out of total administrative office space of 20,000 square feet. The $3,000 space charge in Matthew’s budget is his share (allocated based on relative square feet) of the company’s total cost of rent, utilities, and janitorial costs for the administrative office building.

    Provide a revised budget consistent with the president’s recommendation.

    help on hw 461355

    Problem P1-5 Performance Reports

    At the end of 2011, Cyril Fedako, CFO for Fedako Products, received a report comparing budgeted and actual production costs for the company’s plant in Forest Lake, Minnesota:

    Units 60,000

    Original Budget Actual Costs Actual – Original

    Material (variable) $3,200,000 $3,500,000 $300,000

    Direct labor (variable) $2,300,000 $2,500,000 $200,000

    Supervisory salaries (fixed) $475,000 $500,000 $25,000

    Utilities (variable) $125,000 $135,000 $10,000

    Machine maintenance (fixed) $350,000 $380,000 $30,000

    Depreciation of building (fixed) $90,000 $90,000 $0

    Depreciation of equipment (fixed) $250,000 $255,000 $5,000

    Janitorial (fixed) $220,000 $235,000 $15,000

    Total $7,010,000 $7,595,000 $585,000

    His first thought was that costs must be out of control since actual costs exceed the budget by $ 585,000. However, he quickly recalled that the budget was set assuming a production level of 60,000 units. The Forest Lake plant actually produced 65,000 units in 2011.

    a. Given that production was greater than planned, should Cyril expect that all actual costs will be greater than budgeted? Which costs would you expect to increase, and which costs would you expect to remain relatively constant?

    b. Cyril is extremely busy” the company has six other plants. Therefore, he cannot spend time investigating every departure from the budget. With this in mind, which cost( s) should Cyril concentrate on in his investigation of budget differences?

    Cyril should only investigate significant departures from the budget. Only three of the differences are more than 5 percent of the revised budget amounts. Assuming he defines differences in excess of 5 percent to be significant, Cyril should investigate supervisory salaries, machine maintenance, and janitorial costs.

    question 2 cost allocation evaluating changes in the product mix in the long term 461357

    You have two product lines, Basic and Premium. You currently sell 700 units of Basic at a price of $25/unit, and 350 units of Premium at a price of $50/unit. Basic requires $2.5 of direct materials per unit and $5 of direct labor per unit. Premium requires $5 of direct materials per unit and $15 of direct labor per unit. There is no variable overhead, for simplicity. The total fixed costs (shared by Basic and Premium) are $17,500.

    Required:

    a) allocate the shared fixed costs ($17,500) among Basic and Premium, using direct labor dollars as the allocation basis (hint: notice that the direct labor numbers above are per unit. To do the allocation, you will have to compute the total amounts of direct labor $ used by each product line).

    allocation rate = $___________________ per DL$

    FC allocated to Basic = $__________________ (total, not per unit)

    FC allocated to Premium = $_________________ (total, not per unit)

    b) using the allocated costs from (a), compute the profit margin for each product line.

    profit margin for Basic = $_____________________

    profit margin for Premium = $__________________

    Additional information for c)-d) below: You are thinking of changing the product mix to 350 units of Basic, 700 units of Premium. This is a long-term change.

    c) Estimate the fixed costs (capacity costs) for the new product mix. Use direct labor $ as the allocation basis.

    (hint: Compute the allocation rate using the original product mix. After that, multiply by the new amounts of the cost driver.)

    allocation rate = $___________________ per DL$

    FC allocated to Basic = $_____________

    FC allocated to Premium = $__________

    d) Compute the profit margin for Basic and Premium for the new product mix.

    profit margin for Basic = $______________________

    profit margin for Premium = $___________________

    Is it a good idea to change the product mix? (enter 1=yes, 2=no) _________________

    accounting please help 461359

    A prominent law firm that has more than 30 offices located worldwide is considering going to a cloud service for all of its document desktop applications, storage and information management needs. Desktops will not possess any applications or stored files and all mobile activity will require web access or use of a jump drive. The firm partners expect client billing revenue will increase by 35% while costs will be reduced by 20%. Identify the revenue and costs considerations and other relevant issues that should be considered. What do you reccommend the firm do with relation to the cloud. Discuss quantitative/qualitative aspects. (This is a make or buy decision). Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.

    auditing 461370

    Q. Cindy CPA completed field work on September 23, 2008, and issued the following report to the directors of The CMA Corporation:

    To the Directors of The CMA Corporation:

    We have audited the balance sheet of The CMA Corporation as of July 31, 2008 and the related statements of income and retained earnings. In accordance with your instructions, a complete audit was conducted.

    We conducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. We believe that our audit was appropriate in the circumstances.

    In many respects, this was an unusual year for The CMA Corporation. The weakening of the economy in the early part of the year and the strike of plant employees in the summer of 2008 led to a decline in sales and net income. After making several tests of sales records, nothing came to our attention that would indicate that sales have not been properly recorded.

    In our opinion, with the explanation given above and the exception of some minor errors that are considered immaterial, the aforementioned financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of The CMA Corporation at July 31, 2008, and the results of its operations for the year then ended, in conformity with pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board.

    Cindy CPA, CPA

    September 23, 2008

    Required: List and explain deficiencies and omissions in Cindy’s report. Do not discuss the type of opinion (unqualified, qualified, adverse, or disclaimer). Organize your answer by paragraph (introductory, scope, explanatory, and opinion).

    auditing 461371

    QAssume you are considering a client’s controls over purchases and cash disbursements. System documentation was accomplished through flowcharts and narratives and, in conA?¬junction with a transaction walkthrough, revealed the following potential deficiencies:

    a. Costs of carrying inventory have increased significantly since the prior year.

    b. Purchase prices are sometimes unusually high or fluctuate significantly from month to month.

    c. Purchase discounts are frequently not taken.

    d. During lunch, the controller commented to you that on two occasions during the year duplicate payments had been made for a single transaction.

    e. Cash disbursements records do not always reconcile with general ledger control accounts.

    Required: For each potential deficiency, indicate a control or controls that manageA?¬ment could implement to reduce the likelihood of errors or frauds

    auditing 461372

    Q.Jerry Jacks, engagement partner for the December 31, 2007, CMA, Ine., financial statement audit, is aware that events and transactions that took place after December 31, 2007 (but before he issues his report dated February 28, 2008), may affect the company’s financial statements. The following material events or transactions have come to Hirsch’s attention.

    1. On January 3, 2008, CMA, Inc., received a shipment of raw materials from Canada. The materials had been ordered in October 2007, and shipped FOB shipping point in November 2007.

    2. On January 15, 2007, the company settled and paid a personal injury claim of a forA?¬mer employee as the result of an accident that occurred in March 2006. The company had not previously recorded a liability for the claim.

    3. On January 25,2008, the company agreed to purchase for cash the outstanding stock of Broward Co. The acquisition is likely to double the sales volume of CMA, Inc.

    4. On February 1, 2008, a plant owned by CMA, Inc., was damaged by a flood, reA?¬sulting in an uninsured loss of inventory.

    5. On February 5, 2008, CMA, Inc., issued and sold to the general public $2,000,000 in convertible bonds.

    Required: For each of the events or transactions, discuss audit procedures that should have brought the item to the auditor’s attention, and the form of (and reasons for) discloA?¬sure in the financial statements.

    emeril corporation encounters the following situations 461374

    This question from book : accounting principles 9th for Jerry J. Weygandt, Paul D. Kimmel, Donald E. Kieso

    Chapter 3

    E3-4 Emeril Corporation encounters the following situations:

    1. Emeril collects $1,000 from a customer in 2010 for services to be performed in 2011.

    2. Emeril incurs utility expense which is not yet paid in cash or recorded.

    3. Emeril’s employees worked 3 days in 2010, but will not be paid until 2011.

    4. Emeril earned service revenue but has not yet received cash or recorded the transaction.

    5. Emeril paid $2,000 rent on December 1 for the 4 months starting December 1.

    6. Emeril received cash for future services and recorded a liability until the revenue was

    earned.

    7. Emeril performed consulting services for a client in December 2010. On December 31, it

    billed the client $1,200.

    8. Emeril paid cash for an expense and recorded an asset until the item was used up.

    9. Emeril purchased $900 of supplies in 2010; at year-end, $400 of supplies remain unused.

    10. Emeril purchased equipment on January 1, 2010; the equipment will be used for 5 years.

    11. Emeril borrowed $10,000 on October 1, 2010, signing an 8% one-year note payable.

    Instructions

    Identify what type of adjusting entry (prepaid expense, unearned revenue, accrued expense, accrued

    revenue) is needed in each situation, at December 31, 2010.

    Please help with this question

    intermediate accounting help 461380

    Rantzow-Lear Company buys and sells securities expecting to earn profits on short-term differences in price. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31. The following selected transactions relating to Rantzow-Lear’s trading account occurred during December 2011 and the first week of 2012.

    2011

    Dec.17 – purchaused 100,000 Grocer’s Supply Corporation preferred shares

    Dec. 28 – received cash dividends of $2,000 from the grocer’s supply corporation preferred shares

    Dec. 31 – recorded any necessary adjusting entry relating to the Grocers’s Supply Corporationprefferrd shares. The market price of the stock was $4 per share.

    2012

    Jan. 5- sold the grocer’s supply corporation preferred shares for $395,000.

    Required: 1. Prepare the appropriate journal entry for each transaction

    2. Inficate any amounts that Rantzow-Lear Company would report in its 2011 balance sheet and income statement as a result of this investment.

    answer 461381

    Rapache Clothiers is a small company that manufactures tall-men’s suits. The company has used a standard cost system. In May 2012, 11,200 suits were produced. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of May when normal capacity was 14,000 direct labor hours. All materials purchased were used.

    Cost Element

    Standard (per unit)

    Actual

    Direct materials 8 yards at $4.30 per yard $371,050 for 90,500 yards

    ($4.10 per yard)

    Direct labor 1.2 hours at $13.50 per hour $201,630 for 14,300 hours

    ($14.10 per hour)

    Overhead 1.2 hours at $6.00 per hour $49,000 fixed overhead

    (fixed $3.50; variable $2.50) $37,000 variable overhead

    Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $49,000, and budgeted variable overhead was $35,000.

    Instructions

    Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for (1) materials and (2) labor, and (3) the total variance for manufacturing overhead.

    Total materials variance $ UnfavorableFavorable

    Materials price variance $ FavorableUnfavorable

    Materials quantity variance $ UnfavorableFavorable

    Total labor variance $ UnfavorableFavorable

    Labor price variance $ UnfavorableFavorable

    Labor quantity variance $ UnfavorableFavorable

    Total overhead variance $ FavorableUnfavorable

    Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question

    accounting 461382

    Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:

    Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce

    Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour

    Var. Manuf. Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour

    Variable Manuf. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:

    3750 units of compound were produced during the month.

    There were no beginning direct materials inventory

    The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces

    Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000

    Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200

    Variable Manufacturing Overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200

    Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375

    The variable overhead spending variance for October is:

    accounting 461383

    Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:

    Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce

    Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour

    Variable Manufacturing Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour

    Variable manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:

    3750 units of compound were produced during the month.

    There was no beginning direct materials inventory

    The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces

    Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000

    Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200

    Variable manufacturing overhead costs incurred amounted to $18200

    Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375

    The variable overhead efficiency variance for October is:

    accounting 461384

    Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:

    Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce

    Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour

    Var. Manuf. Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour

    Variable Manuf. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:

    3750 units of compound were produced during the month.

    There were no beginning direct materials inventory

    The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces

    Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000

    Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200

    Variable Manufacturing Overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200

    Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375

    The variable overhead spending variance for October is:

    accounting 461385

    Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:

    Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce

    Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour

    Var. Manuf. Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour

    Variable Manuf. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:

    3750 units of compound were produced during the month.

    There were no beginning direct materials inventory

    The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces

    Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000

    Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200

    Variable Manufacturing Overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200

    Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375

    The variable overhead spending variance for October is:

    accounting 461386

    Ravena Labs., Inc makes a single product which has the following standards:

    Direct materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce

    Direct labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour

    Var. manufacturing overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour

    Variable manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:

    3750 units of compound were produced during the month

    There was no beginning direct materials inventory

    The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces

    Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225000

    Direct labor hours worked: 5,600 hours at a cost of $67,200

    Variable manufacturing overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200

    Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18375

    The direct materials quantity variance for October is:

    prime and conversion cost 461306

    The Pattia Winery is one of the finest wineries in the country. One of its famous products is a red wine called Old Vines. Recently, management has become concerned about the increasing cost of making Old Vines and needs to determine if the current selling price of $10 per bottle is adequate. The winery wants to achieve a 25 percent gross profit on the sale of each bottle. The following information is given to you for analysis:

    Unit cost per bottle

    Materials $3.5

    Labor $2.3

    Overhead $3.3

    Batch size 10,550
    Cost
    Direct Material
    Olen grapes 22,155
    Chancellor grape 9,495
    Bottles 5,275
    Total direct materials costs $36,925

    Direct Labor
    Pickers 2,110
    Crusher 422
    Processor 8,440
    Bottler 13,293
    Total direct labor costs $24,265

    Overhead
    Deprec. Equip 2,743
    Deprec. build 5,275
    Utilities 1,055
    Indirect labor 6,330
    Supervison 7,385
    Supplies 9,917
    Repairs 1,477
    Misc 633
    Total overhead cost $34,815
    Total Production cost $96,005

    Compute the prime costs per unit and the conversion costs per unit. Round your answer to two decimal places. If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.

    Prime Costs Conversion Costs
    Direct materials $ $
    Direct labor $ $
    Overhead $ $
    Totals $ $

    need assistance please 461309

    Peggy’s Ribbon World makes award rosettes. Following is information about the company:

    Variable cost per rosette———–$1.11

    Sales price per rosette————–2.90

    Total fixed costs per month——–879.00

    1: Suppose Peggy’s would like to generate a profit of $750. Determine how many rosettes it must sell to achieve this target profit. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.)

    Target units:__________

    2: If Peggy’s sells 1,070 rosettes, compute its margin of safety in units, margin of safety in dollars, and as a percentage of sales. (Round your intermediate calculations, break-even sales dollars and percentage answers to 2 decimal places. Round your margin of safety answer to the next whole number.)

    Margin of safety (units):__________rosettes

    Margin of safety in dollars:$__________

    Percentage of sales:__________%

    3: Calculate Peggy’s degree of operating leverage if it sells 1,070 rosettes. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 4 decimal places.)

    Degree of operating leverage:__________

    4: Using the degree of operating leverage, calculate the change in Peggy’s profit if it raises the sales price of each rosette by $.40. (Assume costs do not change.) (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 4 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Effect on profit:__________%

    accounting 461312

    Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:

    A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.

    B. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the conversion costs charged to production.

    C. Prepare the march Journal entry for the Casting Dept. for the completed production transferred to teh Machining Dept.

    D. Determine the Work In Process Casting Dept. March 31 Balance.

    E. Compute the Change in cost per equivilant unit for direct Materials and Conversion from the prvious month. Change in Materials ________________ $_____________________

    Change in Conversion _______________ $________________________

    acct 461313

    Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:

    A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.

    B. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the conversion costs charged to production.

    C. Prepare the march Journal entry for the Casting Dept. for the completed production transferred to teh Machining Dept.

    D. Determine the Work In Process Casting Dept. March 31 Balance.

    E. Compute the Change in cost per equivilant unit for direct Materials and Conversion from the prvious month. Change in Materials ________________ $_____________________

    Change in Conversion _______________ $________________________

    journal entry 461314

    Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:

    A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.

    please i need help with explanation 461316

    A company just starting business made the following four inventory purchases in June:

    June 1

    150 units

    $390

    June 10

    200 units

    $585

    June 15

    200 units

    $630

    June 28

    150 units

    $495

       

    $2,100

    A physical count of merchandise inventory on June 30 reveals that there are 200 units on hand. Using the LIFO inventory method, the value of the ending inventory on June 30 is

    a. $536.

    b. $653.

    c. $1,447.

    d. $1,564

    question 2 input price and quantity variances 461317

    Pietro’s Pizza has established the following standards for making one pizza:

    Dough: 0.6 pounds at $3 per pound

    Labor: 0.3 hours at $10 per hour

    Actual sales volume for the past month was 11,000 units. Actual dough and labor quantities and prices were as follows:

    Dough: 4,950 pounds (total) at $2.75 per pound

    Labor: 4,400 hours (total) at $15 per hour

    Required:

    (enter favorable and unfavorable variances as positive and negative numbers, without F or U)

    (a) What are the input price and quantity variances for dough?

    input price variance = $___________(enter negative numbers with a minus, i.e., negative $100 is -100, not ($100))

    input quantity variance = $__________ (enter negative numbers with a minus)

    (b) What are the input price and quantity variances for labor?

    input price variance = $_______________ (enter negative numbers with a minus)

    input quantity variance = $ _____________ (enter negative numbers with a minus)

    accounting for long term investment in securities 461319

    Pillar Steel Co., which began operations on January 4, 2011, had the following subsequent transactions and events in its long-term investments.

    2011

    Jan. 5 Pillar purchased 64,000 shares (30% of total) of Kildaire’s common stock for $1,875,540.

    Oct. 23 Kildaire declared and paid a cash dividend of $3.20 per share.

    Dec. 31

    Kildaire’s net income for 2011 is $1,167,000, and the fair value of its stock at December 31 is $35.00 per share.

    2012

    Oct. 15 Kildaire declared and paid a cash dividend of $2.50 per share.

    Dec. 31

    Kildaire’s net income for 2012 is $1,477,200, and the fair value of its stock at December 31 is $38.00 per share.

    2013

    Jan. 2 Pillar sold all of its investment in Kildaire for $2,217,600 cash.

    Assume that Pillar has a significant influence over Kildaire with its 30% share of stock.

    Required:

    1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events for Pillar.

    2.

    Compute the carrying (book) value per share of Pillar’s investment in Kildaire common stock as reflected in the investment account on January 1, 2013.

    3.

    Compute the net increase or decrease in Pillar’s equity from January 5, 2011, through January 2, 2013, resulting from its investment in Kildaire.

    Part 2

    Assume that although Pillar owns 30% of Kildaire’s outstanding stock, circumstances indicate that it does not have a significant influence over the investee and that it is classified as an available-for-sale security investment.

    Required:

    1.

    Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events for Pillar. Also prepare an entry dated January 2, 2013, to remove any balance related to the fair value adjustment.

    need help 461320

    Pinnacle Manufacturing Company
    Common-Size Income Statement-Machine Tech Division
    Three Years Ending December 31, 2009
    2009 2008 2007
    Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales
    Sales $5,670,915 100.00% $5,790,017 100.00% $5,299,644 100.00%
    Sales Returns and Allowances 9,518 0.17% 13,411 0.23% 13,901 0.26%
    Cost of Sales* 1,824,751 32.18% 1,993,730 34.43% 1,830,458 34.54%
    Gross Profit 3,836,646 67.65% 3,782,876 65.34% 3,455,285 65.20%
    OPERATING EXPENSES-Allocated
    Salaries-Management 94,153 1.66% 93,206 1.61% 84,906 1.60%
    Salaries-Office 13,008 0.23% 11,582 0.20% 11,354 0.21%
    Licensing and certification fees 32,315 0.57% 27,465 0.47% 24,435 0.46%
    Security 22,732 0.40% 24,888 0.43% 23,322 0.44%
    Insurance 3,851 0.07% 4,055 0.07% 4,016 0.08%
    Medical benefits 818 0.01% 958 0.02% 889 0.02%
    Advertising 6,708 0.12% 6,948 0.12% 6,129 0.12%
    Business publications 1,958 0.03% 1,864 0.03% 246 0.00%
    Property taxes 1,490 0.03% 6,948 0.12% 6,500 0.12%
    Bad debts 34,296 0.60% 41,063 0.71% 37,341 0.70%
    Depreciation expense 247,813 4.37% 181,217 3.13% 161,609 3.05%
    Accounting fees 11,074 0.20% 11,828 0.20% 11,286 0.21%
    Total operating expenses-Allocated 470,216 8.29% 412,022 7.11% 372,033 7.01%
    OPERATING EXPENSES-Direct
    Salaries-Sales 204,801 3.61% 211,855 3.66% 195,255 3.68%
    Wages Rental 506,186 8.93% 546,228 9.43% 500,630 9.45%
    Wages-Mechanics 1,146,126 20.21% 1,229,015 21.23% 1,159,488 21.88%
    Wages-Warehouse 193,851 3.42% 208,437 3.60% 202,481 3.82%
    Garbage collection 28,458 0.50% 27,313 0.47% 33,017 0.62%
    Payroll benefits 143,924 2.54% 114,664 1.98% 107,075 2.02%
    Rent- Warehouse 28,949 0.51% 28,949 0.50% 27,223 0.51%
    Telephone 1,823 0.03% 2,349 0.04% 2,852 0.05%
    Utilities 14,837 0.26% 10,419 0.18% 10,148 0.19%
    Postage 4,846 0.09% 5,218 0.09% 5,604 0.11%
    Linen service 596 0.01% 321 0.01% 397 0.01%
    Repairs and maintenance 9,689 0.17% 10,536 0.18% 10,568 0.20%
    Cleaning service 3,348 0.06% 3,185 0.06% 2,889 0.05%
    Legal service 11,658 0.21% 12,161 0.21% 9,209 0.17%
    Fuel 15,036 0.27% 13,323 0.23% 10,345 0.20%
    Travel and entertainment 5,072 0.09% 4,055 0.07% 3,719 0.07%
    Pension expense 6,554 0.12% 10,203 0.18% 5,175 0.10%
    Office supplies 6,188 0.11% 5,791 0.10% 6,331 0.12%
    Miscellaneous 8,386 0.15% 4,622 0.08% 5,956 0.11%
    Total operating expenses-Direct 2,340,328 41.29% 2,448,644 42.30% 2,298,362 43.36%
    Total operating expenses 2,810,544 49.58% 2,860,666 49.41% 2,670,395 50.37%
    OPERATING INCOME $1,026,102 18.07% $922,210 15.93% $784,890 14.83%

    * Details of manufacturing expenses are not included in this schedule.

    Material Mistatements
    Account Balance Estimate of Amount of
    Potential Mistatements

    Property Tax $1,490 $4,000
    Depreciation Expense $ 247,813 $40,000
    Pension Expense $10,203 $3,000
    Miscellaneous $8,386 $2,000

    E. Explain whether you believe the information in requirement c or d provides the most useful data for evaluating the potential for misstatements. Explain why.
    F. Your aging analysis of accounts receivable and discussions with management indicate that collections of accounts receivable have been somewhat slower than in the previous year. Evaluate whether or not you believe the allowance for uncollectible accounts is fairly valued. If you believe the account is misstated, calculate the potential misstatement.

    i need all the explanation and formulas how u get figures 461321

    Pinnacle Manufacturing Company

    Common-Size Income Statement-Machine Tech Division

    Three Years Ending December 31, 2009

    2009 2008 2007

    Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales

    Sales $5,670,915 100.00% $5,790,017 100.00% $5,299,644 100.00%

    Sales Returns and Allowances 9,518 0.17% 13,411 0.23% 13,901 0.26%

    Cost of Sales* 1,824,751 32.18% 1,993,730 34.43% 1,830,458 34.54%

    Gross Profit 3,836,646 67.65% 3,782,876 65.34% 3,455,285 65.20%

    OPERATING EXPENSES-Allocated

    Salaries-Management 94,153 1.66% 93,206 1.61% 84,906 1.60%

    Salaries-Office 13,008 0.23% 11,582 0.20% 11,354 0.21%

    Licensing and certification fees 32,315 0.57% 27,465 0.47% 24,435 0.46%

    Security 22,732 0.40% 24,888 0.43% 23,322 0.44%

    Insurance 3,851 0.07% 4,055 0.07% 4,016 0.08%

    Medical benefits 818 0.01% 958 0.02% 889 0.02%

    Advertising 6,708 0.12% 6,948 0.12% 6,129 0.12%

    Business publications 1,958 0.03% 1,864 0.03% 246 0.00%

    Property taxes 1,490 0.03% 6,948 0.12% 6,500 0.12%

    Bad debts 34,296 0.60% 41,063 0.71% 37,341 0.70%

    Depreciation expense 247,813 4.37% 181,217 3.13% 161,609 3.05%

    Accounting fees 11,074 0.20% 11,828 0.20% 11,286 0.21%

    Total operating expenses-Allocated 470,216 8.29% 412,022 7.11% 372,033 7.01%

    OPERATING EXPENSES-Direct

    Salaries-Sales 204,801 3.61% 211,855 3.66% 195,255 3.68%

    Wages Rental 506,186 8.93% 546,228 9.43% 500,630 9.45%

    Wages-Mechanics 1,146,126 20.21% 1,229,015 21.23% 1,159,488 21.88%

    Wages-Warehouse 193,851 3.42% 208,437 3.60% 202,481 3.82%

    Garbage collection 28,458 0.50% 27,313 0.47% 33,017 0.62%

    Payroll benefits 143,924 2.54% 114,664 1.98% 107,075 2.02%

    Rent- Warehouse 28,949 0.51% 28,949 0.50% 27,223 0.51%

    Telephone 1,823 0.03% 2,349 0.04% 2,852 0.05%

    Utilities 14,837 0.26% 10,419 0.18% 10,148 0.19%

    Postage 4,846 0.09% 5,218 0.09% 5,604 0.11%

    Linen service 596 0.01% 321 0.01% 397 0.01%

    Repairs and maintenance 9,689 0.17% 10,536 0.18% 10,568 0.20%

    Cleaning service 3,348 0.06% 3,185 0.06% 2,889 0.05%

    Legal service 11,658 0.21% 12,161 0.21% 9,209 0.17%

    Fuel 15,036 0.27% 13,323 0.23% 10,345 0.20%

    Travel and entertainment 5,072 0.09% 4,055 0.07% 3,719 0.07%

    Pension expense 6,554 0.12% 10,203 0.18% 5,175 0.10%

    Office supplies 6,188 0.11% 5,791 0.10% 6,331 0.12%

    Miscellaneous 8,386 0.15% 4,622 0.08% 5,956 0.11%

    Total operating expenses-Direct 2,340,328 41.29% 2,448,644 42.30% 2,298,362 43.36%

    Total operating expenses 2,810,544 49.58% 2,860,666 49.41% 2,670,395 50.37%

    OPERATING INCOME $1,026,102 18.07% $922,210 15.93% $784,890 14.83%

    * Details of manufacturing expenses are not included in this schedule.

    Material Mistatements

    Account Balance Estimate of Amount of

    Potential Mistatements

    Property Tax $1,490 $4,000

    Depreciation Expense $ 247,813 $40,000

    Pension Expense $10,203 $3,000

    Miscellaneous $8,386 $2,000

    E. Explain whether you believe the information in requirement c or d provides the most useful data for evaluating the potential for misstatements. Explain why.

    F. Your aging analysis of accounts receivable and discussions with management indicate that collections of accounts receivable have been somewhat slower than in the previous year. Evaluate whether or not you believe the allowance for uncollectible accounts is fairly valued. If you believe the account is misstated, calculate the potential misstatement.

    managerial accounting help please 461323

    Pizza Pizazz is a local restaurant. Price and cost information follows:

    Price per pizza $13.01

    Variable cost per pizza

    Ingredients 2.29

    Direct labor 1.02

    Overhead (box, etc.) 0.23

    Fixed cost per month $2,841.00

    1. Determine Pizza Pizazz’s break-even point in units and sales dollars.

    Break-even units:

    Break-even sales dollars:

    2. Determine the restaurant’s margin of safety if it currently sells 400 pizzas per month. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Margin of safety:

    3. Determine the number of pizzas that Pizazz must sell to generate $1,800 in profit. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.)

    Target sales in units:

    accounting need help 461324

    Pizza Pizazz is a local restaurant. Price and cost information follows:

    Price per pizza ——–$13.31

    Variable cost per pizza

    Ingredients——– 2.24

    Direct labor——– 1.10

    Overhead (box, etc.)——.30

    Fixed cost per month——-$4,448.20

    1. Calculate Pizza Pizazz’s new break-even point under each of the following independent scenarios (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.):

    a. Sales price increases by $1.90 per pizza.

    Break-even point:______units

    b. Fixed costs increase by $460.00 per month.

    Break-even point:______units

    c. Variable costs decrease by $.45 per pizza.

    Break-even point:______units

    d. Sales price decreases by $.60 per pizza.

    Break-even point:______units

    2: Assume that Pizza Pizazz sold 475 pizzas last month. Calculate the company’s degree of operating leverage. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places)

    Degree of operating leverage:________

    3: Using the degree of operating leverage, calculate the impact on profit caused by a 13.00 percent increase in sales revenue. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Effect on profit:_______%

    auditing i 461325

    When planning a financial statement audit, a CPA must understand audit risk and its components. The firm of Pack & Peck evaluates the risk of material misstatement (RMM) by disaggregating RMM into its two components: inherent risk and control risk.

    Required:

    For each illustration, select the component of audit risk that is most directly illustrated. The components of audit risk may be used once, more than once, or not at all.

    Note if each illustration below is Control risk, Detection risk or Inherent risk

    1. A client fails to discover employee fraud on a timely basis because bank accounts are not reconciled monthly.

    2. Cash is more susceptible to theft than an inventory of coal.

    3. Confirmation of receivables by an auditor fails to detect a material misstatement.

    4. Disbursements have occurred without proper approval.

    5. There is inadequate segregation of duties.

    6. A necessary substantive audit procedure is omitted.

    7. Notes receivable are susceptible to material misstatement, assuming there are no related internal controls.

    8. Technological developments make a major product obsolete.

    9. The client is very close to violating debt covenants.

    10. XYZ Company, a client, lacks sufficient working capital to continue operations.

    variance analysis 461326

    The plant manager decides that what is needed is an objective appraisal of what should be done. He hires

    June Collins of Collins and Collins, CPAs. June recommends that the Charlotte plant should use standard cost

    variance analysis. While not all three product managers agree that this is the best course of action the plant

    manager makes the final decision and asks June to perform the analysis. June asks that the three product

    managers aggregate their production information. The following schedule is the result of the request.

    Variance Analysis

    Variance Stated as Variance

    Materials Price Variance Per ounce price Favorable

    Materials Quantity Variance Ounce per unit Unfavorable

    Labor Rate Variance Per hour Unfavorable

    Labor Efficiency Variance Time per unit Favorable

    Required:

    1. Explain how each of the above variances could be explained.

    2. Explain how the variances could explain the following situations: For instance: Inspection time increase

    could be caused by either poor material leading to sub-quality products or using cheaper more

    inexperienced labor. This would result in a favorable materials price variance and/or an unfavorable

    labor efficiency variance indicating that the workers are taking too long to construct the product.

    Each of the below situations are to be considered independent

    Scrap Material decreased

    Return Orders increased

    Rework Time decreased

    Average Unit Cost increased

    Unexpected Downtime increased

    Sales was less than budgeted

    Volume-related revenue was less than anticipated (in this instance the company is selling

    managerial accounting hw asap 461329

    The Post Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company produces basic posts which can be sold to outside customers or sold to the Lamp Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company. Last year the Lamp Division bought all of its 32,000 posts from Post at $1.50 each. The following data are available for last year’s activities of the Post Division:

    Capacity in units 325,000 posts

    Selling price per cost to outside customers $1.85

    Variable costs per post $1.00

    Fixed costs, total $221,000

    The total fixed costs would be the same for all the alternatives considered below. Suppose the transfers of posts to the Lamp Division cut into sales to outside customers by 17,500 units. What is the lowest transfer price that would not reduce the profits of the Post Division? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places.)

    $1.85

    $1.42

    $1.00

    $1.46

    activity based costing 461331

    PRACTICE PROBLEM (problem 6-15) Activity-Based Costing

    Riverdale Printing Company is the publisher for many of the local newspapers and magazines. They publish nine periodicals and several other types of literature, including handouts and pamphlets. They have recently adopted an activity-based costing system to assign manufacturing overhead to products. The following data relate to one of their products, The Riverdale Weekly, and the ABC cost pools:

    The Riverdale Weekly annual production 20,000 units

    Direct material per unit $31 Direct labor per unit $6

    Manufacturing overhead cost pools: Cost Pool Cost Cost Driver

    Materials ordering $800,000 Number of purchase orders

    Materials inspection 400,000 Number of receiving reports

    Equipment setup 2,000,000 Number of setups

    Quality control 900,000 Number of inspections

    Other 15,000,000 Direct labor cost

    Total mfg. overhead $19,100,000

    Cost Pool All Products The Riverdale Weekly

    Materials ordering 100,000 orders 1,000

    Materials inspection 2,000 receiving reports 300

    Equipment setup 100 setups 1

    Quality control 4,000 inspections 400

    Other $10,000,000 direct labor $120,000

    a. Calculate the overhead rate per unit of activity for each of the five cost pools.

    Cost Pool Cost Total cost

    driver activity Cost pool rate

    Materials ordering

    Materials inspection

    Equipment setup

    Quality control

    Other

    Total mfg. overhead

    b. Calculate the total overhead assigned to the production of The Riverdale Weekly.

    Costs Activity Usage Cost Pool Rate Total Cost Allocated

    Materials ordering

    Materials inspection

    Equipment setup

    Quality control

    Other

    Total mfg. overhead

    c. Calculate the overhead cost per unit for The Riverdale Weekly.

    d. Calculate the total unit cost for The Riverdale Weekly.

    Suppose that Riverdale Printing allocates overhead by a traditional production volume-based method using direct labor dollars as the allocation base and one cost pool. Determine the overhead rate per direct labor dollar and the per unit overhead assigned to The Riverdale Weekly.

    e. Discuss the difference in cost allocations between the traditional method and the activity-based costing approach.

    statement of cash flow 461334

    Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows)

    Presented below is a condensed version of the comparative balance sheets for Sondergaard Corporation for the last two years at December 31.

    2010 2009

    Cash $157,000 $78,000

    Accounts receivable 180,000 185,000

    Investments 52,000 74,000

    Equipment 298,000 240,000

    Less: Accumulated depreciation (106,000) (89,000)

    Current liabilities 134,000 151,000

    Capital stock 160,000 160,000

    Retained earnings 287,000 177,000

    Additional information:

    Investments were sold at a loss (not extraordinary) of $7,000; no equipment was sold; cash dividends paid were $50,000 and net income was $160,000.

    (a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2010 for Sondergaard Corporation. (List multiple entries from the largest positive to the smallest positive amount followed by the most negative to the least negative amount,

    balance sheet from trail balance 461344

    Presented below is the trial balance of Vivaldi Corporation at December 31, 2010.

    Debit Credits
    Cash $197,000
    Sales $7,900,000
    Trading securities (at cost, $145,000) 153,000
    Cost of goods sold 4,800,000
    Long-term investments in bonds 299,000
    Long-term investments in stocks 277,000
    Short-term notes payable 90,000
    Accounts payable 455,000
    Selling expenses 2,000,000
    Investment revenue 63,000
    Land 260,000
    Buildings 1,040,000
    Dividends payable 136,000
    Accrued liabilities 96,000
    Accounts receivable 435,000
    Accumulated depreciation-Buildings 352,000
    Allowance for doubtful accounts 25,000
    Administrative expenses 900,000
    Interest expense 211,000
    Inventories 597,000
    Extraordinary gain 80,000
    Long-term notes payable 900,000
    Equipment 600,000
    Bonds payable 1,000,000
    Accumulated depreciation-Equipment 60,000
    Franchise (net of $80,000 amortization) 160,000
    Common stock ($5 par) 1,000,000
    Treasury stock 191,000
    Patent (net of $30,000 amortization) 195,000
    Retained earnings 78,000
    Additional paid-in capital

    80,000

    $12,315,000

    $12,315,000

    Prepare a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Vivaldi Corporation. Ignore income taxes. (List liabilities, long-term investments, and intangible assets from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 3.)

    using a process cost system under the first in first out method 461347

    Problem 1: Crespo Deodorant produces using a process cost system under the first in, first out method. All material is assumed to be added at the beginning of the process. The company started the period with 5,000 units 60% completed with a cost of $45,000. During the period, 15,000 units were transferred into the second department. Ending inventory was 2,000 units 30% completed. Direct labor costs were $89,000, factory overhead was $100,000 and direct materials transferred into the process were $360,000.

    Part a: Complete the chart below.

    Layers

    Actual Units

    %

    EUP

    Materials

    Conversion Cost

    Total Cost

    Beginning Inventory

    5,000

    60%

    12,000

    Started and Completed

    Ending Inventory

    I’m having difficulties with this problem. I’ve read the 3 different versions we have of this chapter, which the teacher keeps changing. I’ve started completing it, but I’m not understanding it. This is a virtual class so it’s very hard to follow up with the teacher. Thank you, any guidance will help.

    using present value techniques to evaluate alternative investment opportunities 461348

    Problem 16-16

    Fast Delivery is a small company that transports business packages between New York and Chicago. It operates a fleet of small vans that moves packages to and from a central depot within each city and uses a common carrier to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. Fast Delivery recently acquired approximately $6million of cash capital from it owners, and its president, Don is trying to identify the most profitable way to invest these funds.

    1. One manager believes that the money should be used to expand the fleet of city van at a cost of $720.000. He argues that more vans would enable the company to expand its services into new markets, thereby increasing the revenue base. More specifically he expects cash inflow to increase by $280.00 per year. The additional vans are expected to have an average useful life of four years and a combined salvage value of $100,00 Operating the vans will require additional working capital of $40,000 which will be recovered at the end of the fourth year.

    2. In contrast, the company chief accountant, believes that the funds should be used to purchased large trucks to deliver the package between the depots in the two cities. The conversion process would produce continuing improvement in operating saving with reductions in cash outflow as the following.

    Year 1, $160,000, Year 2, $320,000, Year 3, $400,000, Year 4, $440,000.

    The large trucks are expect to cost $80,000 and to have a 4 year useful life ans a $80,000 salvage value. the training cost are expect to amount to $16,000 Fast Delivery management has established a 16 percent desired rate of return.

    a. Determine the net present value of the two investment alternatives

    case study 461266

    New Phone Inc., a diversified manufacturer, has five divisions that operated throughout the United States and Costa Rico. New Phone Inc. has historically allowed its divisions to operate autonomously. Corporate intervention occurred only when planned results were not obtained. The corporation’s management has high integrity, but the board of directors and audit committee are not very active. New Phone Inc. has a policy of hiring competent and aggressive people. The company has a code of conduct, but there is little monitoring of compliance employees. Management is somewhat conservative in terms of accounting principles and practices, but employee compensation packages depend highly on performance. New Phone Inc. does not have an internal audit department, and it relies on your firm to review the controls in each division. Cheryl Smith is the general manager of the Intercept Division. The Intercept Division produces a variety of standardized parts for small smart phones. Smith has been the general manager for the last seven years, and each year he has been able to improve the profitability of the division. She is compensated based largely on the divisions’ profitability. Much of the improvement in profitability has come through aggressive cost cutting, including a substantial reduction in control activities over inventory. The periodic FIFO method of accounting for inventory is used. During the last year a new competitor, Deflector Inc., entered Intercept’s markets and has offered substantial price reductions, intense marketing and friendly customer service in order to grab market share. Smith has responded to the competitor’s actions by matching the price cuts and increasing customer service in the hope of maintaining market share. Smith is very concerned because he cannot see any other areas where costs can be reduced so that the division’s growth and profitability can be maintained. If profitability is not maintained, her salary and bonus will be reduced. Smith has decided that one way to make the division more profitable is to manipulate inventory because it represents a large amount of the division’s balance sheet. She also knows that controls over inventory are week. She views this inventory manipulation as a short-run solution to the profit decline due to the competitor’s price cutting. Smith is certain that once the competitor stops cutting prices or goes bankrupt, the misstatements in inventory can be corrected with little impact on the bottom line. In your paper identify and evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of New Phone Inc.’s control environment. Write an auditor’s internal control opinion report based upon the New Phone Inc.’s internal controls. Also, discuss the factors New Phone Inc.’s control environment that have led to and facilitated Smith’s manipulation of inventory. Finally, discuss what controls should be put in place to strengthen New Phone Inc.’s control environment.

    noteworthy assignment need help 461268

    Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.

    Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800

    Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100

    Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100

    Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200

    Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370

    Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800

    Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600

    Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200

    Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500

    Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950

    1: Calculate the total product cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total product cost:$_______

    2: Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prime cost:$_______

    3. Calculate the conversion cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Conversion cost:$_______

    4: Calculate the manufacturing overhead for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Manufacturing overhead:$_______

    5: Calculate the direct labor for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct labor:$_______

    6: Calculate the total variable cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total variable cost:$_______

    7: Calculate the total fixed cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total fixed cost:$_______

    noteworthy assignment need help 461269

    Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.

    Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800

    Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100

    Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100

    Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200

    Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370

    Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800

    Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600

    Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200

    Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500

    Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950

    1: Calculate the total product cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total product cost:$_______

    2: Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prime cost:$_______

    3. Calculate the conversion cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Conversion cost:$_______

    4: Calculate the manufacturing overhead for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Manufacturing overhead:$_______

    5: Calculate the direct labor for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct labor:$_______

    6: Calculate the total variable cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total variable cost:$_______

    7: Calculate the total fixed cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total fixed cost:$_______

    need quick answer please 461270

    Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.

    Depreciation on factory equipment $ 800

    Depreciation on CEO’s company car 100

    Speakers used in the keyboard 1,100

    Production supervisor’s salary 2,200

    Glue and screws used in the keyboards 370

    Wages of persons who install the speakers 2,800

    Cost to run an ad on local radio stations 600

    Utilities for the factory 1,200

    Personnel manager’s salary 2,500

    Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards 1,950

    1. Calculate the total product cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total product cost:$________

    simple less than 5 mins to do 461271

    Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.

    Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800

    Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100

    Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100

    Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200

    Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370

    Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800

    Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600

    Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200

    Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500

    Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950

    Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prime cost:$_______

    hello easy stuff for you 461272

    Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.

    Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800

    Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100

    Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100

    Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200

    Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370

    Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800

    Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600

    Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200

    Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500

    Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950

    Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prime cost:$_______

    finding net operating income accounting 461274

    Nutall Corporation is considering dropping product N28X. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below:

    Sales $ 830,000

    Variable expense $ 416,000

    Fixed manufacturing expenses $ 266,000

    Fixed selling and administrative expense $ 214,000

    All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $204,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $119,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product N28X is discontinued.

    Required:

    a.

    According to the company’s accounting system, what is the net operating income earned by product N28X? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    $

    b-1.

    What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product N28X? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net operating income would be by $ .

    b-2.

    Should the product be dropped?

    Yes or No?

    excel present value using function a 461277

    o Problem 1: On 1/1/11 your client received a 14 year note for $150,000 in exchange for services rendered. The note calls for an annual payment of interest on 12/31 at a contractual (stated) rate of 6%. Given the credit standing of the customer, an interest rate of 12.25% has been imputed as the effective rate. The principal amount of the note is due at maturity.

    Required:

    * Part A- At what amount should the sale be recorded on 1/1/11? NOTE: Enter the data above in four cells, and then use the appropriate financial function in your software to compute present value, rather than formulas from present value tables. The PV cell(s) should reference only data cells, not show actual amounts.

    * Part B- Prepare an amortization schedule for the Note Receivable using the following

    columns:

    Date Cash Received Interest Revenue Discount Amortized Carrying Value

    intermediate accounting 461279

    What was the last official pronouncement of the Financial Accounting Standards Board in the year 2011? Briefly describe the pronouncement in your own word.

    a. Provide the official definitions of:

    Asset retirement obligation

    Current liability

    Reasonably possible

    Warranty

    Goodwill

    b. What must an entity disclose about its asset retirement obligations?

    c. What are three examples of estimates that are used in accounting that are not contingencies? Can you explain why they are not contingencies?

    d. Under what conditions must an employer accrue a liability for employees’ compensation for future absences?

    e. Once goodwill has been recognized by a company, how will it be accounted for in subsequent accounting periods?

    What is the authoritative literature addressing revenue recognition when right of return exists?

    help with financial statement 461280

    Okay so I did half of it and the other half I can’t figure out so please help me with it. The ones that are blank are the ones I need helf with and the ones that are already answered please don’t worry about them because they are correct so please help me with the others.

    The comparative financial statements of Blige Inc. are as follows. The market price of Blige Inc. common stock was $60 on December 31, 2012.

    Here are the link to solve the problems. Please delete the space at the end before .gif to view properly

    Link 1

    http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/books/waac24h/images/ch17/waac24h_ch17_pr17_4a. gif

    Link 2

    http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/books/waac24h/images/ch17/waac24h_ch17_pr17_4a1. gif

    Determine the following measures for 2012, rounding to one decimal place, except for dollar amounts, which should be rounded to the nearest cent. Assume 365 days a year.

    1. Working capital: $ 1443000

    2. Current ratio: 3.0

    3. Quick ratio: 2.4

    4. Accounts receivable turnover: 5.3

    5. Number of days’ sales in receivables: 68.4

    6. Inventory turnover:

    7. Number of days’ sales in inventory:

    8. Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities:

    9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity:

    10. Number of times interest charges earned:

    11. Number of times preferred dividends earned:

    12. Ratio of net sales to assets: %

    13. Rate earned on total assets: %

    14. Rate earned on stockholders’ equity: %

    15. Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity: %

    16. Earnings per share on common stock: $

    17. Price-earnings ratio:

    18. Dividends per share of common stock: $ .5

    19. Dividend yield: .8%

    accounting please help 461285

    Online degrees and courses are widely used by colleges and universities around the world. Some students feel that the online courses should be cheaper than in class courses as they should use less direct labor (faculty) and absorb less overhead (variable and fixed) and other variable costs such as student fees for activities should be eliminated since online students do not access those services. Provide your response to this issue with a cost accounting based opinion. Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.

    overhead cost 461289

    The overhead costs that Lucca Industries, Inc., used to compute its overhead rate for the past year are as follows:

    Indirect materials $79,200

    Maintenance 14,900

    Outside service contract 17,300

    Indirect labor 79,100

    Factory supervison 42,900

    Depreciation 85,000

    Factory Insurance 8,200

    Property taxes 6,500

    Heat, Light, power 7,700

    Miscellaneous 5,760

    Total Overhead $346,560

    The allocation base for the past year was 45,600 total machine hours. For the next year, all overhead costs except depreciation, property taxes, and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 10 percent. Depreciation should increase by 12 percent, and property taxes and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 20 percent. Plant capacity in terms of machine hours used will increase by 4,400 hours. Compute the overhead rate for next year.

    depreciation method double declining balance and 150 declining balance 461290

    P11-1 Depreciation Method The Winsey Company purchased equipment on January 2, 2010, for $700,000. The equipment has the following characteristics: Estimatesd service life 20 years Estimated residual value $50,000 100,000 hours 950,000 units of output During 2010 and 2011, the company used the machine for 4,500 and 5,500 hours respectively and purchased 40,000 and 60,000 units respectively. Compute he depreciation for 2010 and 2011 under each of the following methods: 5. Double-declining-balance 6. 150%-declining-balance 7. Compute the company’s return on assets (net income divided by average total assets, as discussed in chapter 6) for each method for 2010 and 2011, assuming that income before depreciation is$100,000. For simplicity, use ending assets, and ignore interest, income taxes , and other assets.

    p11 14 changes and corrections of depreciation 461291

    P11-14 Changes and Corrections of Depreciation During 2010, the controller of the Ryel Company asked you to prepare
    correcting journal entries for the following three situations:
    1. Machine A was purchased for $50,000 on January 1, 2005. Straight-line depreciation has been recorded for five years,
    and the Accumulated Depreciation account has a balance of $25,000. The estimated residual value remains at $5,000,
    but the service life is now estimated to be one year longer than estimated originally.
    2. Machine B was purchased for $40,000 on January 1, 2008. It had an estimated residual value of $5,000 and an estimated
    service life of 10 years. It has been depreciated under the double-declining-balance method for two years. Now, at the
    beginning of the third year, Ryel has decided to change to the straight-line method.
    3. Machine C was purchased for $20,000 on January 1, 2009. Double-declining-balance depreciation has been recorded for
    one year. The estimated residual value of the machine is $2,000 and the estimated service life is five years. The computation
    of the depreciation erroneously included the estimated residual value.
    Required
    Prepare any necessary correcting journal entries for each situation. Also prepare the journal entry necessary for each situation
    to record the depreciation for 2010. (Assume that the debit is to Depreciation Expense.)

    problem 16 9 461292

    P16-9 (EPS with Stock Dividend and Extraordinary Items) Agassi Corporation is preparing the comparative

    financial statements to be included in the annual report to stockholders. Agassi employs a fiscal

    year ending May 31.

    h1eome from operations before income taxes for Agassi was $1,400,000 and $660,000, respectively, for

    fiscal years ended May 31, 2013 and 2012. Agassi experienced an extraordinary loss of $400,000 because of

    an earthquake on March 3, 2013. A 40% combined income tax rate pertains to any and all of Agassi Corporation’s

    profits, gains, and losses.

    Agassi’ s capital structure consists of preferred stock and common stock. The company has not issued

    any convertible securities or warrants and there are no outstanding stock options.

    Agassi issued 40,000 shares of $100 par value, 6% cumulative preferred stock in 2009. All of this stock

    is outstanding, and no preferred dividends are in arrears.

    There were 1,000,000 shares of $1 par common stock outstanding on Jtme 1, 2011. On September 1,

    2011, Agassi sold an additional 400,000 shares of the common stock at $17 per share. Agassi distributed a

    20″/o stock dividend on the common shares outstanding on December 1, 2012. These were the only common

    stock transactions during the past 2 fiscal years.

    Instructions

    (a) Determine the weighted-average number of common shares that would be used in computing earnings

    per share on the current comparative income statement for:

    (1) The year ended May 31,2012.

    (2) The year ended May 31,2013.

    (b) Starting with income from operations before income taxes, prepare a comparative income

    statement for the years ended May 31, 2013 and 2012. The statement will be part of Agassi

    Corporation’s annual report to stockholders and should include appropriate earnings per share

    presentation.

    (c) The capital structure of a corporation is the result of its past financing decisions. Furthermore, the

    earnings per share data presented on a corporation’s financial statements is dependent upon the

    capital stntcture.

    (1) Explain why Agassi Corporation is considered to have a simple capital structure.

    (2) Describe how earnings per share data would be presented for a corporation that has a complex

    multi income statement 461296

    P5-4B

    Parkland Department Store is located near the Lyndale Shopping Mall. At the

    end of the company’s fiscal year on December 31, 2012, the following accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

    Accounts Payable $ 73,300

    Accounts Receivable 45,500

    Accumulated Depreciation”Buildings 52,500

    Accumulated Depreciation”Equipment 42,600

    Buildings 190,000

    Cash 28,000

    Common Stock 140,000

    Cost of Goods Sold 412,000

    Depreciation Expense 23,400

    Dividends 15,000

    Equipment 100,000

    Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets 4,300

    Income Tax Expense 15,000

    Insurance Expense 8,400

    Interest Expense 7,000

    Interest Payable 2,000

    Inventory 43,000

    Mortgage Payable 62,500

    Prepaid Insurance 2,400

    Maintenance and Repairs Expense $ 6,200

    Retained Earnings 19,200

    Salaries and Wages Expense 111,000

    Sales Revenue 626,000

    Salaries and Wages Payable 3,500

    Sales Returns and Allowances 8,000

    Utilities Expense 11,000

    Additional data: $20,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment next year.

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet.

    [ (a) Net income $28,300, Tot. assets $313,800 ]

    (b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.

    (c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 25%. As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $50,500 and expenses by $27,800. Compute the expected new net income. (Hint: You do not need to prepare an income statement.) Then, compute the revised profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. Comment on the effect that this plan would have on net income

    and the ratios, and evaluate the merit of this proposal.

    Really need help with Multi income statement part!

    accounting tools for business decision making 4th edition 461297

    P5-4B

    Parkland Department Store is located near the Lyndale Shopping Mall. At the

    end of the company’s fiscal year on December 31, 2012, the following accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

    Accounts Payable $ 73,300

    Accounts Receivable 45,500

    Accumulated Depreciation”Buildings 52,500

    Accumulated Depreciation”Equipment 42,600

    Buildings 190,000

    Cash 28,000

    Common Stock 140,000

    Cost of Goods Sold 412,000

    Depreciation Expense 23,400

    Dividends 15,000

    Equipment 100,000

    Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets 4,300

    Income Tax Expense 15,000

    Insurance Expense 8,400

    Interest Expense 7,000

    Interest Payable 2,000

    Inventory 43,000

    Mortgage Payable 62,500

    Prepaid Insurance 2,400

    Maintenance and Repairs Expense $ 6,200

    Retained Earnings 19,200

    Salaries and Wages Expense 111,000

    Sales Revenue 626,000

    Salaries and Wages Payable 3,500

    Sales Returns and Allowances 8,000

    Utilities Expense 11,000

    Additional data: $20,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment next year.

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet.

    [ (a) Net income $28,300, Tot. assets $313,800 ]

    (b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.

    (c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 25%. As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $50,500 and expenses by $27,800. Compute the expected new net income. (Hint: You do not need to prepare an income statement.) Then, compute the revised profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. Comment on the effect that this plan would have on net income

    and the ratios, and evaluate the merit of this proposal.

    Do you have any solution for this problem… Especially for A part… Can you show me exact solutions for (a) Net income $28,300, Tot. assets $313,800…

    Thanks..

    accounting need help please 461298

    Paddle Away, Inc., makes one model of wooden canoe. Partial information for it follows.

    Number of canoes produced and sold——490

    Total costs

    Variable costs ——$73,500

    Fixed costs———159,740

    Total costs————$233,240

    Cost per unit

    Variable cost per unit————$150.00

    Fixed cost per unit—————$326.00

    Total cost per unit—————-$476.00

    1: Suppose that Paddle Away raises its selling price to $710 per canoe. Calculate its new break-even point in units and in sales dollars. (Round your break-even units answer to the next whole number. Round your sales answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    New break-even units :______ canoes

    Break-even sales: $______

    2: If Paddle Away sells 690 canoes, compute its margin of safety in dollars and as a percentage of sales. (Use the new sales price of $710.) (Round margin of safety to the nearest whole number. Round percentage of sales to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)

    Margin of safety: $______

    Percentage of sales:______%

    3: Calculate the number of canoes that Paddle Away must sell at $710 each to generate $116,000 profit. (Round your answer to the next whole number.)

    Target sales units:______ canoes

    accounting 461300

    Paige Candy Company offers a coffee mug as a premium for every ten 50-cent candy bar wrappers presented by customers together with $1.00. The purchase price of each mug to the company is 90 cents; in addition it costs 60 cents to mail each mug. The results of the premium plan for the years 2010 and 2011 are as follows(assume all purchases and sales are for cash):

    2010 2011

    Coffee mugs purchased 720,000 800,000

    Candy bars sold 5,600,000 6,750,000

    Wrappers redeemed 2,800,000 4,200,000

    2010 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2011 2,000,000

    2011 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2012 2,700,000

    (a) Prepare the general journal entries that should be made in 2010 and 2011 related to the above plan by Paige Candy.

    (b) Indicate the account names, amounts, and classifications of the items related to the premium plan that would appear on the Paige Candy Company balance sheet and income statement at the end of 2010 and 2011.

    unit cost 461304

    The Pattia Winery is one of the finest wineries in the country. One of its famous products is a red wine called Old Vines. Recently, management has become concerned about the increasing cost of making Old Vines and needs to determine if the current selling price of $10 per bottle is adequate. The winery wants to achieve a 25 percent gross profit on the sale of each bottle. The following information is given to you for analysis:

    Compute the prime costs per unit and the conversion costs per unit. Round your answer to two decimal places. If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.

    Prime Costs Conversion Costs

    Direct materials $ $

    Direct labor $ $

    Overhead $ $

    Totals $ $

    Batch size 10,550

    Cost

    Direct Material

    Olen grapes 22,155

    Chancellor grape 9,495

    Bottles 5,275

    Total direct materials costs $36,925

    Direct Labor

    Pickers 2,110

    Crusher 422

    Processor 8,440

    Bottler 13,293

    Total direct labor costs $24,265

    Overhead

    Deprec. Equip 2,743

    Deprec. build 5,275

    Utilities 1,055

    Indirect labor 6,330

    Supervison 7,385

    Supplies 9,917

    Repairs 1,477

    Misc 633

    Total overhead cost $34,815

    Total Production cost $96,005

    help 461201

    Listed below are the unadjusted general ledger account balances of Franklin Co. at December 31, 2010 (amounts are presented at their normal balance):

    Cash 10,400

    Accounts Receivable 2,500

    Office Supplies 950

    Prepaid Insurance 2,400

    Building 100,000

    Accumulated Depreciation ‘ Building60,000

    Truck 36,000

    Accumulated Depreciation – Truck 0

    Accounts Payable 8,000

    Unearned Rent Revenue 1,600

    Note Payable 10,000

    Common Stock 25,000

    Retained Earnings 26,750

    Dividends 2,500

    Sales Revenue 43,400

    Rent Revenue 4,000

    Cost of Goods Sold 12,000

    Wage Expense 9,500

    Insurance Expense 0

    Depreciation Expense ‘ Building 2,500

    Depreciation Expense ‘ Truck 0

    Supplies Expense 0

    Additional information for Franklin Company is available on December 31, 2010, the end of an annual accounting period.

    a. Franklin Company purchased a 2-year insurance policy on January 1, 2010 and debited Prepaid Insurance for $2,400.

    b. On November 1, 2010, a tenant in a building owned by Franklin Company paid two months rent in advance. The amount received was credited to Unearned Rent Revenue.

    c. A physical count of office supplies at December 31 revealed that there was $400 of supplies on hand.

    d. The truck was acquired on August 1. Franklin estimates the truck will have a useful life of 5 years and no salvage value. The depreciation on the building has already been recorded.

    e. Wages of $2,000 earned by factory employees for the last week of December were not paid until the first pay date in January.

    Required: Using the templates provided:

    1. Post the unadjusted balances at December 31 to ‘T’ accounts.

    2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries in proper format (omit explanations). Reference each adjusting journal entry with the letter corresponding to the information provided above. Accounts may need to be created.

    3. Post the adjusting entries to the ‘T’ accounts.

    4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2010.

    5. Prepare an income statement, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet in proper format for 2010.

    i am trying to solve this accounting problem 461202

    LJB Company, a local distributor, has asked your accounting firm to evaluate their system of internal controls because they are planning to go public in the future. The President wants to be aware of any new regulations required of his company if they go public so he met with a colleague of yours at a local restaurant. The President of the company explained the current system of internal controls to your colleague. Your colleague has since been promoted to a tax position so she has passed on the information below so you can generate recommendations for the partner at your accounting firm to share with the President of LJB Company.

    Since LJB Company is a relatively lean organization, they have a lot of faith in their long-term employees. They have one accountant who serves as Treasurer and Controller which streamlines many of their processes. In this dual role, he purchases all of the supplies and pays for these purchases. He also receives the checks and completes the monthly bank reconciliation. The accountant is so busy that the company handles petty cash a bit differently. All employees have access to the petty cash in a desk drawer and are asked to only place a note if they use any of the cash.

    The accountant has recently started using pre-numbered invoices and wants to buy an indelible ink machine to print their checks. The President is waiting to hear from you if this is a necessary purchase before authorizing.

    On payday, the checks are picked up by the accountant and left in his office for pick-up. Before he leaves for the weekend, he will move the checks into a safe in his office.

    The President is still quite embarrassed because he had to fire one of his employees for viewing pornography on a company computer. He later found out this individual was a convicted felon who served time for molesting children. The company had a hard time getting the employee to admit it was him because the company does not assign individual passwords. The President expressed his frustration because both he and the accountant both interview and approve all of the new hires.

    Required:

    Based on the above information, prepare a Word document to address the following:

    1. Inform the President of any new internal control requirements if the company decides to go public. (7 points)

    2. Advise the President of what the company is doing right (they are doing some things well) and also recommend to the President whether or not they should buy the indelible ink machine. When you advise the President, please be sure to reference the applicable internal control principle that applies. (13 points)

    3. Advise the President of what the company is doing wrong (they are definitely doing some things poorly). Please be sure to include the internal control principle that is being violated along with a recommendation for improvement. (20 points)

    You must prepare a formal report for the partner to distribute to the President so no abbreviations or short-hand answers.

    cost accounting question 461203

    LO.2 (DL variances) Calista & Lane, CPAs, set the following standard for its inventory

    audit of Triumph Co.: 350 hours at an average hourly billing rate of $250. Th e fi rm

    actually worked 330 hours during the inventory audit process. Th e total labor variance

    for the audit was $3,500 unfavorable.

    a. Compute the total actual payroll.

    b. Compute the labor effi ciency variance.

    c. Compute the labor rate variance.

    d. Prepare the entry to assign labor costs to inventory, record the labor variances, and

    accrue payroll costs.

    e. Write a memo to the appropriate personnel regarding feedback about the labor

    effi ciency variance. Th e memo should also off er a brief explanation that is consistent

    with the labor rate and effi ciency variances.

    help cost accounting question 461208

    LO.2 (WA EUP; cost per WA EUP) Waltham Mfg. makes skateboards and uses a

    weighted average process costing system. On May 1, 2010, the company had 400

    boards in process that were 70 percent complete as to material and 85 percent complete

    as to conversion. During the month, 3,800 additional boards were started. On

    May 31, 300 boards were still in process (40 percent complete as to material and 60

    percent complete as to conversion). Cost information for May 2010 is as follows:

    Beginning WIP Inventory costs

    Direct material $ 4,349

    Conversion 4,658

    Current period costs

    Direct material 60,775

    Conversion 46,750

    a. Calculate EUP for each cost component using the weighted average method.

    b. Calculate cost per EUP for each cost component.

    help 461210

    Longview Company is considering automating its manufacturing facility. Company information before and after the proposed automation follows:

    Before Automation After Automation

    Sales revenue————–$194,000 ————- $194,000

    ‘ Variable cost————–108,000—————-40,000

    Contribution margin———-$86,000 ————–$154,000

    ‘ Fixed cost——————15,000—————–64,000

    Net income——————-$71,000—————–$90,000

    1: Calculate Longview’s break-even sales dollars before and after automation. (Round your contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Break-even sales dollars before automation:$__________

    Break-even sales dollars after automation:$__________

    2: Compute Longview’s degree of operating leverage before and after automation. (Round your answers to 4 decimal places.)

    DOL before automation:__________

    DOL after automation:__________

    cost or market 461211

    Lower of cost or market

    Quantity in Inventory

    Cost

    Market

    Bike – Model A4467

    10

    120

    1,100

    Bike – Model A4468

    1,680

    Bike – Model A4469

    16

    190

    2,560

    What is the total cost of inventory under LCM?

    please double check my work contribution format income statement accounting 461212

    Lugano’s Pizza Parlor is considering the purchase of a large oven and related equipment for mixing and baking “crazy bread.” The oven and equipment would cost $143,200 delivered and installed. It would be usable for about 15 years, after which it would have a 10% scrap value. The following additional information is available:

    a.

    Mr. Lugano estimates that purchase of the oven and equipment would allow the pizza parlor to bake and sell 80,000 loaves of crazy bread each year. The bread sells for $1.35 per loaf.

    b.

    The cost of the ingredients in a loaf of bread is 40% of the selling price. Mr. Lugano estimates that other costs each year associated with the bread would be as follows: salaries, $25,000; utilities, $3,000; and insurance, $1,000.

    c.

    The pizza parlor uses straight-line depreciation on all assets, deducting salvage value from original cost.

    (Ignore income taxes.)

    Required:

    1.

    Prepare a contribution format income statement showing the net operating income each year from production and sale of the crazy bread. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    – Sales Revenue $ 108000

    – Variable expenses:

    Deduct Depreciation 143200

    Contribution Margin $35200

    Selling and administrative expenses:

    – Cost of ingredients 43200

    – Salaries 25000

    -Utitilities 3000

    -Insurance 1000

    Expenses in total= $72200

    – Net Operating Loss $107400

    2a.

    Compute the simple rate of return for the new oven and equipment. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Simple rate of return 7.5%

    2b.

    If Mr. Lugano accepts any project with a simple rate of return greater than 13%, will he acquire the franchise?

    No

    3a.

    Compute the payback period on the oven and equipment.

    Payback period 18 years

    3b.

    If Mr. Lugano accepts any investment with a payback period of less than five years, will he acquire the franchise?

    No

    accounting help compute the additional revenue 461217

    The management of an amusement park is considering purchasing a new ride for $80,000 that would have a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $8,000. The ride would require annual operating costs of $20,000 throughout its useful life. The company’s discount rate is 8%. Management is unsure about how much additional ticket revenue the new ride would generate-particularly because customers pay a flat fee when they enter the park that entitles them to unlimited rides. Hopefully, the presence of the ride would attract new customers. (Ignore income taxes.)

    Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 and Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

    PV= 1/(1+r)^n

    PV of annuity= 1/r [1 – 1/(1+r)^n)

    Required:

    How much additional revenue would the ride have to generate per year to make it an attractive investment? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Additional revenue $

    references

    managerial accounting question 461226

    A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

    Selling Price ………………………………… $139

    Units in beginning inventory …………….. 0

    Units produced …………………………….. 6700

    Units sold …………………………………… 6400

    Units in ending inventory …………………. 300

    Variable costs per unit:

    Direct materials …………………………….. $43

    Direct Labor …………………………………. $35

    Variable manufacturing overhead ……………$5

    Variable selling and administrative ………….. $6

    Fixed costs:

    Fixed manufacturing overhead …………….. $227,800

    Fixed selling and administrative ………………. 83,200

    What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?

    a. $(15,900)

    b. $19,200

    c. $10,200

    d. $9,000

    stockholders equity 461229

    Marble Corporation had the following balances in its stockholders equity accounts at December 31, 2010
    Common stock, $10 par, 50,000 shares authorized 20,000 shares issued…….$200,000
    Paid in Capital xcess of Par Par Value Common…..250,000
    Retained Earnings………………500,000
    Treasury Stock 1,000 shares…..(20,000)
    Total stockholders equity……..$930,000
    The following transactions occured during 2011:
    February 3 sold and issued 3,000 shares of common stock for $22 per share
    May 10 declared a $0.50 per share dividend on common stock
    October 12 sold 500 shares of the treasury stock for $20 per share
    December 31 net income for the year was determined to be $75,000
    Based on the above information, prepare a statement of stockholders equity for 2011. Use the form below

    statement of stckholders equity 461230

    MArble corporation had the following balances in its stockholders equity accounts at December 31, 2010.
    common stock, $10 par, 50,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued…$200,000
    paid-in capital in excess of par value, common……250,000
    retained eranings…….500,000
    treausry stock, 1,000 shares……..(20,000)
    total stockholders equity……….$930,000
    The following transactions occured during 2011:

    February 3 – sold and issued 3,000 ahares of common stock for $22 per share
    May10 – declared a $0.50 per share dividend on common stock
    October – 12 Sold 500 shares of the treausury stock for $20 per share
    December – 31 Net income for the year was determined to be $75,000

    Based on the above information, prepare a statement of stockholders equity for 2011.

    income taxes investor losses rental income 461233

    Mary and Charles have owned a beach cottage for several years and have always used it for vacations. When they acquired the property, they had no intentions of renting it. Becaue family circumstances have changed they are considering using the cottage for only two weeks a year and renting it for the remainder of the year. Their AGI approzimates $80,000 per year, and they are in the 30% tax bracket (combined federal and state) Interest and real estate taxes total $8,000 per year and expected to continue at this level for the forseeable future. If Mary and Charles rent the property, their incremental revenue and expenses are projected to be:

    Rent Income — $20,000
    Rental Commissions — ($3,000)
    Maintenance Expenses ($8,000)
    Depreciation expense ($10,000)
    If the cottage is converted to rental property they plan to be actively involved in key rental and maintenance decisions. Given the tax effects of converting the property to rental use, would the cash flow from renting the property be enough to meet the $12,000 annual mortage payment?

    I don’t understand how it could even possibly meet the mortage payment and how this problem works.

    accounting for income taxes 461234

    Mathis Co. at the end of 2012, its first year of operations, prepared a reconciliation between pretax financial income and taxable income as follows:

    Pretax financial income $600,000

    Estimated litigation expense 1,500,000

    Installment sales (1,200,000)

    ___________

    Taxable income $900,000

    The estimated litigation expense of $1,500,000 will be deductible in 2014 when it is expected to be paid. The gross profit from the installment sales will be realized in the amount of $600,000 in each of the next two years. The estimated liability for litigation is classified as noncurrent and the installment accounts receivable are classified as $600,000 current and $600,000 noncurrent. The income tax rate is 30% for all years. What is the income tax expense?

    accounting help 461236

    Mayfield Company expects to have a cash balance of $46,000 on January 1, 2010. These are the relevant monthly budget data for the first two months of 2010.

    1. Collections from customers: January $88,307, February $164,307.

    2. Payments to suppliers: January $58,307, February $93,307.

    3. Wages: January $30,000, February $40,000. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred.

    4. Administrative expenses: January $21,000, February $28,000. These costs include depreciation of $1,000 per month. All other costs are paid as incurred.

    5. Selling expenses: January $15,417, February $20,417. These costs are exclusive of depreciation. They are paid as incurred.

    6. Sales of short-term investments in January are expected to realize $12,000 in cash. Mayfield has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $25,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $20,000.

    Complete the cash budget for January and February below. (List multiple items under receipts, disbursements and financing from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

    MAYFIELD COMPANY

    Cash Budget

    For the Two Months Ending February 28, 2010

    January February

    Beginning cash balance $

    $

    Add: Receipts

    RepaymentsCollections from customersWagesBorrowingsSelling expensesPayments to suppliersSale of short-term investmentsAdministrative expenses

    WagesBorrowingsRepaymentsPayments to suppliersSale of short-term investmentsCollections from customersAdministrative expensesSelling expenses

    Total receipts

    Total available cash

    Less: Disbursements

    WagesAdministrative expensesSale of short-term investmentsRepaymentsPayments to suppliersSelling expensesCollections from customersBorrowings

    WagesRepaymentsAdministrative expensesBorrowingsSelling expensesCollections from customersSale of short-term investmentsPayments to suppliers

    Sale of short-term investmentsRepaymentsPayments to suppliersAdministrative expensesCollections from customersSelling expensesWagesBorrowings

    BorrowingsWagesAdministrative expensesPayments to suppliersCollections from customersSale of short-term investmentsRepaymentsSelling expenses

    Total disbursements

    Excess (deficiency) of available cash over disbursements

    Financing

    RepaymentsWagesSelling expensesPayments to suppliersCollections from customersBorrowingsSale of short-term investmentsAdministrative expenses

    BorrowingsSale of short-term investmentsCollections from customersSelling expensesPayments to suppliersRepaymentsWagesAdministrative expenses

    Ending cash balance $

    $

    breakeven and sales required to earn target profit 461238

    Melissa Valdez is planning to expand her clothing business by opening another store. In planning for the new store, Melissa believes that selling prices and costs of the various products sold will be simlar to that of the existing store. In fact, she thinks that variable and fixed costs for the new store will be similar to that of the existing store, except that rent for the new store will be $300 per month more than the rent paid for the existing store. The followig information is available for the existing store for the year ended December 31, 2004:

    Sales $200,00

    Variable cost 130,000

    Fixed cost 48,800

    Deteremine the sales required for the new store to break even. Determine the sales required for the new store to earn a profit of $20,000 per year (keep in mind that the $300 increase in rent is a monthly amount and the fixed cost of $48,000 is an annual amount)

    financial accounting 461243

    The Melville Company produces a single product called a Pong. Melville has the capacity to produce 60,000 Pongs each year. If Melville produces at capacity, the per unit costs to produce and sell one Pong are as follows. Use the data for questions 7 to 9.

    Direct materials

    $15

    Direct labor

    12

    Variable manufacturing overhead

    8

    Fixed manufacturing overhead

    9

    Variable selling expense

    8

    Fixed selling expense

    3

    The regular selling price for one Pong is $80. A special order has been received by Melville from Mowen Company to purchase 6,000 Pongs next year. If this special order is accepted, the variable selling expense will be reduced by 75%. However, Melville will have to purchase a specialized machine to engrave the Mowen name on each Pong in the special order. This machine will cost $9,000 and it will have no use after the special order is filled. The total fixed manufacturing overhead and selling expenses would be unaffected by this special order.

    Assume Melville anticipates selling only 50,000 units of Pong to regular customers next year. If Mowen Company offers to buy the special order units at $65 per unit, the effect of accepting the special order on Melville’s operating income for next year should be a:

    Answer

    $60,000 increase.

    $36,000 increase.

    $90,000 decrease.

    $159,000 increase.

    Assume Melville anticipates selling only 50,000 units of Pong to regular customers next year. At what selling price for the 6,000 special order units would Melville be economically indifferent between accepting or rejecting the special order from Mowen? (That is the price at which the total contribution with or without the special order would be the same.)

    Answer

    $38.50.

    $37.00.

    $51.50.

    $49.00.

    Assume Melville can sell 58,000 units of Pong to regular customers next year and sale of 6000 units to this special order customer will result in losing the contribution on sales to regular customers at the regular price due to the 60,000 unit maximum production capacity. If Mowen Company offers to buy the special order units at $65 per unit, the effect of accepting the special order on Melville’s operating income next year should be a:

    Answer

    $192,000 increase.

    $36,000 increase.

    $47,000 increase.

    $11,000 increase.

    accounting problem easy 461252

    Last month, Willsted Company sold 460 units for $26.00 each. During the month, fixed costs were $2,510 and variable costs were $7.30 per unit.

    1: Determine the unit contribution margin and contribution margin ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places.Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)

    Unit contribution margin:_______

    Contribution margin ratio:_______ %

    2: Calculate the break-even point in units and sales dollars. (Round your intermediate calculations and break even sales dollars to 2 decimal places.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Break-even units:_______ units

    Break-even sales dollars:$_______

    3: Compute Willsted’s margin of safety in units and as a percentage of sales. (Round your margin of safety to the next whole number.Round your percentage of sales to 4 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Margin of safety:_______ units

    Percentage of sales:_______ %

    25 461253

    For the next six months, Kurtz Company projects the following information (in units).

    July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

    Retail demand 800 300 450 450 600 600

    Dealer demand 600 750 900 1,050 1,200 1,350

    Shop capacity 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

    Painting capacity 1,050 1,050 1,350 1,800 1,800 1,800

    Demand drives production for that month and cannot be carried over from one month to another. Retail customers are satisfied first.

    25. The production for July is projected to be:

    A) 300 units.

    B) 900 units.

    C) 1,050 units.

    D) 1,500 units.

    26. The number of dealer units that will be produced and sold in September is:

    A) 900 units.

    B) 1,050 units.

    C) 1,500 units.

    D) 600 units.

    accounting question please help 461259

    NASA has requested that Campbell Soup make special “ready to eat” meals for their International Space Station and Mission to Mars. The process would be the same for the soups NASA is ordering except an additional step to freeze dry the products to meet the specifications for the “ready to eat” meals used in space. Discuss the costs and other factors that Campbell Soup should consider for this special order and also provide your conclusion assuming you had sufficient information. (This is a special order question). Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.

    help with accounting problem cash flow statement 461261

    Natalie has prepared the balance sheet and income statement of Cookie & Coffee

    Creations Inc. for the first year of operations, but does not understand how to prepare the cash

    flow statement.The income statement and balance sheet appear below. Recall that the company

    started operations on November 1, 2012, so all of the opening balances are zero.

    Additional information:

    1. Recall from Chapter 15 that the company bought kitchen equipment (a commercial oven)

    for $17,000 on November 1, 2012, and signed a $12,000 note payable to help pay for it.The

    terms provide for semiannual fixed principal payments of $2,000 on May 1 and November 1

    of each year, plus interest of 5%. All other furniture, fixture, and equipment were purchased

    during the year for cash.

    2. Recall from Chapter 14 that the company originally issued 25,930 common shares for

    $25,930, of which 750 shares were repurchased from the lawyer for $500.

    COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.

    Income Statement

    Year Ended October 31, 2013

    Sales $462,500

    Cost of goods sold 231,250

    Gross profit 231,250

    Operating expenses

    Salaries and wages expense $92,500

    Depreciation expense 9,850

    Other operating expenses 35,987 138,337

    Income from operations 92,913

    Other expenses

    Interest expense 413

    Income before income tax 92,500

    Income tax expense 18,500

    Net income $ 74,000

    COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.

    Balance Sheet

    October 31, 2013

    Assets

    Current assets

    Cash $32,219

    Accounts receivable 3,250

    Inventory 17,897

    Prepaid expenses 6,300 $ 59,666

    Property, plant, and equipment

    Furniture and fixtures $12,500

    Accumulated depreciation”furniture and fixtures (1,250) 11,250

    Computer equipment 4,200

    Accumulated depreciation”computer equipment (600) 3,600

    Kitchen equipment 83,000

    Accumulated depreciation”kitchen equipment (8,300) 75,000 89,850

    Total assets $149,516

    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

    Current liabilities

    Accounts payable $ 5,848

    Income tax payable 18,500

    Dividends payable 700

    Salaries payable 2,250

    Interest payable 188

    Note payable”current portion 4,000 $ 31,486

    Long-term liabilities

    Note payable”long-term portion 6,000

    Total liabilities 37,486

    Stockholders’ equity

    Paid-in capital

    Preferred stock, 2,800 shares issued and

    outstanding $ 14,000

    Common stock, 25,930 shares issued, 25,180

    outstanding 25,930 39,930

    Retained earnings 72,600

    Total paid-in capital and retained earnings 112,530

    Less: Treasury stock”common (750 shares), at cost (500)

    Total stockholders’ equity 112,030

    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $149,516

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for Cookie & Coffee Creations Inc. for the year ended

    October 31, 2013, using the indirect method.

    (b) Prepare a statement of cash flows for Cookie & Coffee Creations Inc. for the year ended

    October 31, 2013, using the direct method.

    prepare a general journal entry 461154

    Job order costing system

    Custom Products, which uses a job order cost system, completed the following

    transactions during the current month.

    (a) Materials costing $65,000 were used on various jobs

    (b) Time cards of direct workers indicate direct labor costs of $100,000 for the month

    (c) Overhead is applied to jobs at a rate of 80% of direct labor cost

    (d) Jobs with total accumulated costs of $150,000 were finished during the month

    (e) Units costing $175,000 were sold during the month at sales prices totaling

    $350,000. All sales were on account (accounts receivable). Custom Products

    uses a perpetual inventory system.

    In the space provided, prepare a general journal entry summarizing for the month each of the above categories of transactions. Explanations may be omitted.

    governmental 461166

    On July 15, 2011, the city of Higgins Lake issued tax-supported term bonds having a face value of

    $10,000,000 and maturing in 20 years. The bonds are dated July 15, 2011, and pay interest of 6 percent

    semiannually on January 15 and July 15 of each year. The bonds were sold at a price of 102 and were

    intended to finance construction of a new city jail. The premium on sale of the bonds was recorded

    directly in the debt service fund and was immediately invested for eventual retirement of the debt.

    For the fiscal year ending June 30, 2011, the city council approved a budget for the newly established

    term bond debt service fund in the amount of $444,500, which includes $432,500 that will be transferred

    from the General Fund as follows: (1) $300,000 on January 14, 2012 for the January 15, 2012 interest

    payment due and (2) $132,500 on June 30, 2012 for investment in the debt service fund for retirement of

    principal, and $12,000 of estimated revenue for interest on investment of premium.

    Required: Make all journal entries, including the budget entry and closing entry, required in the term

    bond debt service fund for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2012. Investment revenue during the year was

    $11,800, all of which added to the investment balance.

    cash flow 461170

    Kazaam Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its calendar-year 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales credit sales, (2) all credits to Account Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, and (5) Other expenses are paid in advance and are initially debited to Prepaid Expense. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.

    KAZAAM COMPANY

    Income Statement

    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    Sales $496,250

    Cost of Goods sold 250,000

    Gross profit 246,250

    Operating expenses

    Depreciation expense $18,750

    Other expenses 136,500 155,250

    Other gains (losses)

    Loss on sale of equipment 5,125

    Income before taxes 85,875

    Income tax expense 12,125

    Net Income $73,750

    KAZAAM COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31,2011 and 2010

    2011 2012

    Assets

    Cash $53,875 $76,625

    Accounts receivable 65,000 49,625

    Merchandise Inventory 273,750 252,500

    Prepaid expenses 5,375 6,250

    Equipment 159,500 110,000

    Accum. Depreciation – equip (34,625) (44,000)

    Total Assets $522,875 $451,000

    Liabilities and Equity

    Accounts Payable $88,125 $116,625

    Short term notes payable 10,000 6,250

    Long term notes payable 93,750 53,750

    Common stock, $5 par value 168,750 156,250

    Paid in Capital in excess of par, common stock 32,500 0

    Retained earnings 129,750 118,125

    Total Liabilities and equity $522,875 $451,000

    Additional Information on Year 2011

    a. the loss on the cash sale of equipment was $5,125 (details in b)

    b. Sold equipment costing $46,875 with accumulated depreciation of $28,125 for $13,624 cash.

    c. Purchased equipment costing $96,375 by paying $25,000 cash and signing a long term note payable for the balance.

    d. Borrowed $3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable.

    e. Paid $31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.

    f. Issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.

    g. Declared and paid cash dividends of $62,125.

    Required

    1. Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its operating activities using the indirect method. Disclose any noncash investing and financing activities in a note.

    Analysis component

    2. Analyze and discuss the statement of cash flows prepared in part 1, giving special attention to the wisdom of the cash dividend payment.

    creating a cash budget 461172

    Kelly’s Boutique is contemplating several means of financing their acquisition of $100,000 in special equipment. One alternative is to borrow $100,000 from a local bank for 10 years at 12 percent per annum. The bank has asked them to produce a 1-year cash budget broken down by months (January through December). Sales of $30,000 are expected in the first month, with each month thereafter increasing 2 percent. Purchases are based on an expected cost of sales of 55% and a required ending inventory of 70% of next month’s cost of sales. Beginning inventory was $11,000. Sales for January next year are expected to be $40,000. Sales in the previous November and December were $29,000 and $28,000, respectively. Expenses include advertising expense of $1000, depreciation expense of $800, interest expense of $1000, payroll expense of $8000, supplies expense of $500, and utilities expense of $600 per month throughout the year. All expenses except depreciation are paid in the month during which they are incurred. Collections in the month of sale are expected to be 50%, collections in the first month following a sale 40%, and in the second month 10%. Payments in the month of purchase are expected to be 75%, payments in the first month following a purchase 15%, and payments in the second month to be 10%. Purchases in the previous Nov and Dec were $16000 and $17000. Proceeds from the $100000 loan are expected in June, and $100000 of equipment will be purchased in July. The beginning cash balance in January was $22000. Please create a cash budget with formulas.

    cant seem to figure it out 461173

    Kelly’s boutique is contemplating several means of financing their acquisition of $100,000 in special equipment. One alternative is to borrow $100,000 from a local bank for 10 years at 12 percent per annum. The bank has asked them to produce a 1-year cash budget broken down by months(January through December). Sales of $30,000 are expected in the first month, with each month thereafter increasing 2 percent. Purchases are based on an expected cost of sales of 55 percent and a required ending inventory of 70 percent of next month’s sales. Beginning inventory was $11,000. Sales for January next year are expected to be $40,000. Sales in the previous November and December were $29,000 and $28,000, respectively. Expenses include advertising expense of $900, depreciation expense of $800, interest expense of $1,000, payroll expense of $8,000, supplies expense of $500, and utilities expense of $600 per month throughout the year. All expenses except depreciation are paid in the month during which they are incurred. Collections in the month of sale are expected to be 50 percent, collection in the first month following a sale 40 percent, and in the second month 10 percent. Payments in the month of purchase are expected to be 75 percent, payments in the first month following a purchase 15 percent, and payment in the second month to be 10 percent. Purchases in the previous November and December were $16,000 and $17,000, respectively. Proceeds from the $100,000 loan are expected in June, and $100,000 of equipment will be purchased in July. Monthly payments of $1,400 on the loan also begin in July. The beginning cash balance in January was $22,000.

    Using the Ch6-04 file to start your work, create a cash budget that is based on the assumptions listed in the previous paragraph. Use excels grouping feature to group operating cash receipts, operating cash payment, cash from (to) operating activities, cash from (to) investing activities, and cash from (to) financing activities and also to group the twelve monthly columns together.

    accounting 461175

    Kirsten Corporation makes 100,000 units per year of a part called a B345 gasket for use in one of its products. Data concerning the unit production costs of the B345 gasket follow:

    direct materials …. 0.15

    direct labor …. 0.10

    variable manufacturing overhead ….. 0.13

    fixed manufacturing overhead …. 0.24

    total manufacturing cost per unit …. 0.62

    An outside supplier has offered to sell Kirsten Corporation all of the B345 gaskets it requires. If Kirsten Corporation decided to discontinue making the B345 gaskets, 25% of the above fixed manufacturing overhead costs could be avoided.

    Required:

    Assume Kirsten Corporation has no alternative use for the facilities presently devoted to production of the B345 gaskets. If the outside supplier offers to sell the gaskets for $0.46 each, should Kirsten Corporation accept the offer? Fully support your answer with appropriate calculations

    direct

    managerial accounting production decisions limited capacity 461176

    Kitchen Magician, Inc. has assembled the following data pertaining to its two most popular products.
    Blender Electric Mixer
    Direct Material $6.00 $11.00
    Direct Labor $4.00 $9.00
    Manufacturing overhead @ 16 per machine hour $16.00 $32.00
    Cost if purchasing from an outside supplier $20.00 $38.00
    Annual Demand (Units) 20,000 28,000
    Past experience has shown that the fixed manufacturing overhead component included in the cost per machine hour averages $10. Kitchen Magician’s management has a policy of filling all sales orders, even if it means purchasing from outside suppliers.
    1. If 50,000 machine hours are available, and management desires to follow an optimal strategy, how many units of each product should the firm manufacture? How many units of each product should be purchased?
    2. With all other things constant, if management is able to reduce the direct material for an electric mixer to $6 per unit, how many units of each product should be manufactured? Purchased?

    acct 461181

    KRUG INC.

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 2012 and 2011

    2012 2011

    Assets

    Cash $ 26,400 $ 30,550

    Accounts receivable, net 14,050 12,150

    Inventory 90,100 70,150

    Equipment 49,900 44,500

    Accum. depreciation”Equipment (22,500 ) (18,300 )

    Total assets $ 157,950 $ 139,050

    Liabilities and Equity

    Accounts payable $ 23,350 $ 25,400

    Salaries payable 1,050 600

    Common stock, no par value 107,000 100,000

    Retained earnings 26,550 13,050

    Total liabilities and equity $ 157,950 $ 139,050

    KRUG INC.

    Income Statement

    For Year Ended December 31, 2012

    Sales $ 47,575

    Cost of goods sold (17,950 )

    Gross profit 29,625

    Operating expenses

    Depreciation expense $ 4,200

    Other expenses 8,550

    Total operating expense 12,750

    Income before taxes 16,875

    Income taxes expense 3,375

    Net income $ 13,500

    Additional Information

    a. No dividends are declared or paid in 2012.

    b. Issued additional stock for $7,000 cash in 2012.

    c. Purchased equipment for cash in 2012; no equipment was sold in 2012.

    1. Use the above financial statements and additional information to prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the indirect method. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    09 8 classified information 461183

    Lads and Lassies (L&L), an SEC registrant, has its year end on the Saturday closest to January 31. Fiscal 2006, 2005, and 2004, which include 52 weeks each, ended on January 28, 2006, January 29, 2005, and January 31, 2004, respectively.

    L&L manufactures and sells exclusive children’s clothing to the most discerning clientele. Its products offer high quality and modern style, including everything from a colorful collection of cashmere sweaters to perfect vintage washed tees. The products are sold through its boutiques, each of which resembles a New England seaside cottage.

    The boutiques also include the Sassy Spa for Spoiled Pip-Squeaks (Sassy Spa), which was introduced in the third quarter of fiscal 2005. These spas for children offer hair and nail care, make-up application, massage services, and even etiquette classes.

    L&L has the following information that needs to be analyzed to determine the appropriate income statement presentation.

    1. Net Sales

    L&L had net sales of $74.5 million in fiscal 2005 and $86.5 million in fiscal 2006; an increase of $12 million, or 16.1 percent. The increase in net sales was driven, in part, by an increase in revenue from services provided by Sassy Spa, which increased from $3.9 million in fiscal 2005 to $11.2 million in fiscal 2006. The remaining increase in total net sales of $4.7 million was because of an increase in the average transaction value, driven by higher average retail sales on a per unit basis due to the favorable customer response to the use of more vintage prints in its garments.

    2. Gross Profit

    Gross profit, which represents net sales less cost of sales, increased from $28 million in fiscal 2005 to $30.4 million in fiscal 2006; an increase of $2.4 million, or 8.6 percent.

    Cost of sales includes expenses incurred to acquire and produce inventory for sale, such as product costs, freight-in and import costs, and direct labor costs for Sassy Spa employees. However, cost of sales excludes depreciation. Cost of sales increased from $46.5 million in fiscal 2005 to $56.1 million in fiscal 2006; an increase of $9.6 million, or 20.6 percent, primarily as the result of an increase in the cost of Sassy Spa services.

    3. Gain on Sale of Corporate Headquarters

    L&L relocated its corporate headquarters to Wilton, Connecticut. In connection with the relocation, L&L sold the abandoned building and realized a gain of $1.7 million on the sale.

    4. Class Action Settlement

    L&L became aware that the “vintage” materials provided by one of its fabric suppliers were not, in fact, vintage. During fiscal 2006, L&L settled a class action lawsuit related to the legal case against the supplier in connection with this scandal and received proceeds of $2.7 million.

    Required:

    ? Determine the appropriate income statement presentation (sales, cost of sales, gross profit, operating income or expense, non-operating income or expense) for each item noted above. Note that L&L presents a subtotal for operating income on the income statement.

    activity based costing 461186

    Larner Corporation is a diversified manufacturer of industrial goods. The company%u2019s activity-based costing system contains the following six activity cost pools and activity rates:

    Activity Cost Pool

                  Activity Rates

      Supporting direct labor

     

    $ 7.00 per direct labor-hour

      Machine processing

     

    $ 3.00

    per machine-hour

      Machine setups

     

    $ 40.00

    per setup

      Production orders

     

    $ 160.00

    per order

      Shipments

     

    $ 120.00

    per shipment

      Product sustaining

     

    $ 800.00

    per product

     Activity data have been supplied for the following two products:

    Total Expected Activity

     

        J78

        W52

      Direct labor-hours

    1,000   

    40   

      Machine-hours

    3,200   

    30   

      Machine setups

    5   

    1   

      Production orders

    5   

    1   

      Shipments

    10   

    1   

      Product sustaining

    1   

    1  

    Required:

    Determine the total overhead cost that would be assigned to each of the products. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Activity Cost Pool

                     J78

                     W52

      Supporting direct labor

    $

    $

      Machine processing

      

      

      Machine setups

      

      

      Production orders

      

      

      Shipments

      

      

      Product sustaining

      

      

      Total overhead cost

    $

    $

    activity based costing 461187

    Larner Corporation is a diversified manufacturer of industrial goods. The company’s activity-based costing system contains the following six activity cost pools and activity rates: Activity Cost Pool Activity Rates Supporting direct labor $ 7.00 per direct labor-hour Machine processing $ 3.00 per machine-hour Machine setups $ 40.00 per setup Production orders $ 160.00 per order Shipments $ 120.00 per shipment Product sustaining $ 800.00 per product Activity data have been supplied for the following two products: Total Expected Activity J78 W52 Direct labor-hours 1,000 40 Machine-hours 3,200 30 Machine setups 5 1 Production orders 5 1 Shipments 10 1 Product sustaining 1 1 Required: Determine the total overhead cost that would be assigned to each of the products. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Activity Cost Pool J78 W52 Supporting direct labor $ $ Machine processing Machine setups Production orders Shipments Product sustaining Total overhead cost $ $

    laura eddy opened eddy s carpet cleaners on march 1 during march the following trans 461189

    Laura Eddy opened Eddy’s Carpet Cleaners on March 1. During March, the following transactions were completed.

    Mar. 1 Invested $10,377 cash in the business.

    1 Purchased used truck for $6,120, paying $3,060 cash and the balance on account.

    3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $1,176 on account.

    5 Paid $1,752 cash on one-year insurance policy effective March 1.

    14 Billed customers $4,870 for cleaning services.

    18 Paid $1,664 cash on amount owed on truck and $414 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.

    20 Paid $1,940 cash for employee salaries.

    21 Collected $1,497 cash from customers billed on March 14.

    28 Billed customers $2,646 for cleaning services.

    31 Paid gas and oil for month on truck $214.

    31 Withdrew $708 cash for personal use.

    The chart of accounts for Eddy’s Carpet Cleaners contains the following accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 128 Cleaning Supplies, No. 130 Prepaid Insurance, No. 157 Equipment, No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation-Equipment, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 301 L. Eddy, Capital, No. 306, L. Eddy, Drawing, No. 350 Income Summary, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 633 Gas & Oil Expense, No. 634 Cleaning Supplies Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense

    Journalize the March transactions. Use page J1 for the journal. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If amounts are the same, list alphabetically.)

    General Journal

    J1

    Date Account/Description Debit Credit

    Mar. 1

    Mar. 1

    Mar. 3

    Mar. 5

    Mar. 14

    Mar. 18

    Mar.20

    Mar. 21

    Mar. 28

    Mar. 31

    Mar. 31

    Prepare a trial balance at March 31 on a worksheet. Enter the following adjustments on the worksheet and complete the worksheet. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

    Earned but unbilled revenue at March 31 was $638.

    Depreciation on equipment for the month was $263.

    One-twelfth of the insurance expired.

    An inventory count shows $394 of cleaning supplies on hand at March 31.

    Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $503.

    EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS

    Worksheet

    For the Month Ended March 31, 2010

    Trial Balance

    Adjustments

    Adjusted Trial Balance

    Income Statement

    Balance Sheet

    Account Titles Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr.

    Cash

    Accounts Receivable

    Cleaning Supplies

    Prepaid Insurance

    Equipment

    Accounts Payable

    L. Eddy, Capital

    L. Eddy, Drawings

    Service Revenue

    Gas & Oil Expense

    Salaries Expense

    Totals

    Depreciation Expense

    Accumulated Depreciation

    Insurance Expense

    Cleaning Supplies Expense

    Salaries Payable

    Totals

    Net Income

    Totals

    Prepare the income statement and owner’s equity statement for March and a classified balance sheet at March 31. (List amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. List assets in order of liquidity and liabilities from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

    EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS

    Income Statement

    Revenues

    $

    Expenses

    $

    Total expenses

    Net income

    $

    EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS

    Owner’s Equity Statement

    $

    Add:

    Less:

    $

    EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS

    Balance Sheet

    Assets

    Current Assets

    $

    Total current assets

    Property, plant and equipment

    $

    :

    Total assets

    $

    Liabilities and Owner’s Equity

    Current liabilities

    $

    Total current liabilities

    Owner’s Equity

    Total liabilities and owner’s equity

    $

    Journalize adjusting entries. Use page J2 for the journal.

    General Journal

    J2

    Date Account/Description Debit Credit

    Mar. 31

    (To adjust accounts receivable.)

    Mar. 31

    (To adjust depreciation.)

    Mar. 31

    (To adjust insurance.)

    Mar. 31

    (To adjust cleaning supplies.)

    Mar. 31

    (To adjust salaries.)

    Journalize the closing entries. Use page J3 for the journal. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)

    General Journal

    J3

    Date Description/Account Debit Credit

    Mar. 31

    (To close revenue account.)

    Mar. 31

    (To close expense accounts.)

    Mar. 31

    (To close net income.)

    Mar. 31

    (To close drawings.)

    Post the March transactions and adjusting entries using the three-column form of account. Post the closing entries and complete the closing process. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

    Cash

    No. 101

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 1 J1

    1 J1

    5 J1

    18 J1

    20 J1

    21 J1

    31 J1

    31 J1

    Accounts Receivable

    No. 112

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 14 J1

    21 J1

    28 J1

    31 Adjusting J2

    Cleaning Supplies

    No. 128

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 3 J1

    31 Adjusting J2

    Prepaid Insurance

    No. 130

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 5 J1

    31 Adjusting J2

    Equipment

    No. 157

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 1 J1

    Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment

    No. 158

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 J2

    Accounts Payable

    No. 201

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 1 J1

    3 J1

    18 J1

    Salaries Payable

    No. 212

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 Adjusting J2

    L. Eddy, Capital

    No. 301

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 1 J1

    31 Closing J3

    31 Closing J3

    L. Eddy, Drawing

    No. 306

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 J1

    31 Closing J3

    Income Summary

    No. 350

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 Closing J3

    31 Closing J3

    31 Closing J3

    Service Revenue

    No. 400

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 14 J1

    28 J1

    31 Adjusting J2

    31 Closing J3

    Gas & Oil Expense

    No. 633

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 J1

    31 Closing J3

    Cleaning Supplies Expense

    No. 634

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 Adjusting J2

    31 Closing J3

    Depreciation Expense

    No. 711

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 Adjusting J2

    31 Closing J3

    Insurance Expense

    No. 722

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 31 Adjusting J2

    31 Closing J3

    Salaries Expense

    No. 726

    Date

    Explanation

    Ref.

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Mar. 20 J3

    31 Adjusting J3

    31 Closing J3

    Prepare a post-closing trial balance at March 31. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

    EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS

    Post-Closing Trial Balance

    March 31, 2010

    Trial Balance

    Account Titles Dr. Cr.

    Cash $ $

    Accounts Receivable

    Cleaning Supplies

    Prepaid Insurance

    Equipment

    Accumulated Depreciation

    Accounts Payable

    Salaries Payable

    L. Eddy, Capital

    L. Eddy, Drawings

    Service Revenue

    Gas & Oil Expense

    Salaries Expense

    Depreciation Expense

    Insurance Expense

    Cleaning Supplies Expense

    $

    $

    lessard corporation special order 461191

    Lessard Corporation manufactures a product with the following full unit costs at a avolume of 2,000 units:

    Direct materials $ 400

    Direct labor 160

    Manufacturing Overhead (30% variable) 300

    Selling Expenses (50% variable) 150

    Administrative Expenses (10% variable) 140

    Total Per Unit $ 1,150

    A company recently approached Lessard’s management with an offer to purchase 200 units for $900 each. Lessard currently sells the product to dealers for $1,300 each. Lessard’s capacity is sufficient to produce the extra 200 units. No selling expenses would be incurred on the special order. If Lessard’s management accepts the offer, profits will:

    A. Decrease by $50,000

    B. Increase by $47,200

    C. Increase by $127,000

    D. Decrease by $80,000

    calculate value of ending invetory and units asap 461192

    Let’s say that a company produces a single product with a sale price of $25 per unit. The variable cost per unit is $15 and the company incurs fixed costs of $50,000 per month. What is the breakeven point for this company? How much would we expect in profit for every unit sold above breakeven? What if the company has its budget set at a $35,000 target profit? How many units must it sell?

    Let’s work through an example so that we can all see how to apply these concepts! Using the data ONLY in Problem 7.12, pp. 301 and 302, let’s calculate/prepare:

    1. The product unit cost using absorption;

    2. Income statement for the month using absorption costing;

    3. The product unit cost using contribution approach; and

    4. Income statement for the month using variable costing.

    Questions:

    1. What would the value of ending inventory be, using absorption costing?

    2. What would the value of ending inventory be, using the contribution margin approach?

    3. Which method (absorption or contribution margin) provides us with the most accurate net income? Please explain.

    4. How many units must be sold to reach a profit target of $50,000?

    fifo and lifo the following comparative information is available for prasad company 461196

    LIFO (Last- In First Out)

    Sales- 85,529

    Cost of goods sold-42,503

    Operating Expenses (including depreciation)- 30,634

    Depreciation- 14,044

    Cash paid for inventory purchases- 35,047

    FIFO (First In- First Out)

    Sales- 85,529

    Cost of goods sold- 31,094

    Operating Expenses (including depreciation)- 30,634

    Depreciation- 14,044

    Cash paid for inventory purchases- 35,047

    Determine net income under each approach. Assume a 30% tax rate. (Round your calculations and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 5,250.) For both LIFO and FIFO.

    Determine net cash provided by operating activities under each approach. Assume that all sales were on a cash basis and that income taxes and operating expenses, other than depreciation, were on a cash basis. (Round your calculations and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 5,250.) For both LIFO and FIFO

    Calculate the quality of earnings ratio under each approach. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 3.15.) For both LIFO and FIFO.

    accounting 461198

    Linda Blye opened Cardinal Window Washing Inc on July 1st2010. During July the following transactions werecompleted.

    July

    1. Issued 11,000 shares of common stock for $11,000cash.

    1. Purchased used truck for $9,000, paying $2,000 cash and thebalance on account.

    3. Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account

    5. Paid $1,800 cash on 1-yr insurance policy effective July1st

    12. Billed customers $3,200 for cleaning services

    18. Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 onamount owed on cleaning supplies

    20. Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries

    21. Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July12th

    25. Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services

    31. Paid $260 for gas and oil used in the truck duringmonth

    31. Declared and paid $600 cash dividend

    Chart of Accounts:Cash, Accounts Receviable,cleaningsupplies,prepaid insurance,equpiment,accumulateddepreciation-equpiment, accounts payable,salaries payabe,commonstock,retained earnings,dividends,income summary,service revenue,gas&oil expense, cleaning supplies expense,depreciationexpense,insurance expense,salaries expense.

    INSTRUCTIONS.

    1) Journalize the july transactions

    2) Post to the ledger accounts ( Use T Accounts)

    3)Prepare trial balance at July 31st

    4)Journalize 1)services provided but unbilled and uncollectedat July 31st were $1,700

    2)depreciationon equipment for the month was $250

    3) one-twelfth of the insurance expired

    4)an inventory count shows $360 of cleaning supplies on hand atJuly 31st

    5)accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400

    5) Post adjusting entries to the T Account

    6) Prepare an adjusted trial balance

    7) Prepare the income statement and a retained earningsstatement for July and a classified balance sheet at july31st

    8) journalize and post closing entries and complete theclosing process

    9) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31st

    this is not spam i really need help and it is due on friday 461199

    Linda Blye opened Cardinal Window Washing Inc on July 1st2010. During July the following transactions werecompleted.

    July

    1. Issued 11,000 shares of common stock for $11,000cash.

    1. Purchased used truck for $9,000, paying $2,000 cash and thebalance on account.

    3. Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account

    5. Paid $1,800 cash on 1-yr insurance policy effective July1st

    12. Billed customers $3,200 for cleaning services

    18. Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 onamount owed on cleaning supplies

    20. Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries

    21. Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July12th

    25. Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services

    31. Paid $260 for gas and oil used in the truck duringmonth

    31. Declared and paid $600 cash dividend

    Chart of Accounts:Cash, Accounts Receviable,cleaningsupplies,prepaid insurance,equpiment,accumulateddepreciation-equpiment, accounts payable,salaries payabe,commonstock,retained earnings,dividends,income summary,service revenue,gas&oil expense, cleaning supplies expense,depreciationexpense,insurance expense,salaries expense.

    INSTRUCTIONS.

    1) Journalize the july transactions

    2) Post to the ledger accounts ( Use T Accounts)

    3)Prepare trial balance at July 31st

    4)Journalize 1)services provided but unbilled and uncollectedat July 31st were $1,700

    2)depreciationon equipment for the month was $250

    3) one-twelfth of the insurance expired

    4)an inventory count shows $360 of cleaning supplies on hand atJuly 31st

    5)accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400

    5) Post adjusting entries to the T Account

    6) Prepare an adjusted trial balance

    7) Prepare the income statement and a retained earningsstatement for July and a classified balance sheet at july31st

    8) journalize and post closing entries and complete theclosing process

    9) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31st

    urgent help will be greatly appreciated 461200

    A list of financial statement items is given below.

    (a) Accounts receivable

    (b) Rent payable

    (c) Retained earnings

    (d) Cost of sales

    (e) Prepaid rent

    (f) Supplies expense

    (g) Equipment

    (h) Dividends

    (i) Depreciation expense

    (j) Copyrights

    (k) Accrued liabilities

    (l) Wages payable

    (m) Land

    (n) Notes payable

    (o) Service revenue

    (p) Inventory

    (q) Advertising expense

    (r) Common stock

    (s) Cash

    (t) Gross profit

    Identify which of the statement each of these accounts belongs on by using the following codes: I=income statement, B=balance sheet, SE=statement of stockholders’ equity. Two of the accounts will have more than one statement on which they will actually appear. You should just enter the lettered item (such as a, b, c, etc) and answer (B, I, or SE).

    cost allocation and activity based costing 461150

    Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.

    Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.

    For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.

    The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Direct materials $4.50 $2.90

    Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24

    JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:

    Activity Cost Pool

    Activity Measure Expected Activity

    for the Year Expected Cost

    for the Year

    Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000

    Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000

    Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000

    Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000

    Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000

    Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000

    Total maufacturing

    overhead costs

    $2,200,000

    Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds

    Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch

    Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours

    B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours

    Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours

    Requirements:

    b. Using the data developed in (2a) above, compute the amount of manufacturing overhead cost per pound of Kenya Dark coffee and the Viet Select Coffee. Round all computations to the nearest whole cent.

    cost allocation and activity based costing 461151

    Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.

    Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.

    For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.

    The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Direct materials $4.50 $2.90

    Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24

    JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:

    Activity Cost Pool

    Activity Measure Expected Activity

    for the Year Expected Cost

    for the Year

    Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000

    Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000

    Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000

    Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000

    Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000

    Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000

    Total maufacturing

    overhead costs

    $2,200,000

    Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds

    Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch

    Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours

    B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours

    Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours

    Requirements:

    c. Determine the unit product cost of one pound of the Kenya Dark coffee and one pound of the Viet Select coffee.

    accounting 461065

    You have been given the following information about the production of Gamma Co., and are asked to provide the plant manager with information for a meeting with the vice president of operations.

    Standard Cost Card

    Direct materials (7 pounds at $3 per pound) $21.00

    Direct labor (0.9 hours at $5) 4.50

    Variable overhead (0.9 hours at $4 per hour) 3.60

    Fixed overhead (0.9 hours at $8 per hour) 7.20

    $36.30

    The following is a production report for the most recent period of operations.

    Variances

    Costs Total Standard Cost Price Quantity

    Direct materials $464,100 $99,225 F $8,400 U

    Direct labor 99,450 8,316 U -450 U

    Instructions

    (Round cost per pound and rate paid per hour to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)

    (a) How many units were produced during the period?

    (b) How many pounds of raw material were purchased and used during the period? pounds

    (c) What was the actual cost per pound of raw materials? $ per pound

    (d) How many actual direct labor hours were worked during the period? hours

    (e) What was the actual rate paid per direct labor hour? $ per hour

    Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question

    managerial accounting 461071

    Harder company manufactures a product thats sells for $50 per unit. Harder incurrs a variable cost per unit of $30 and $3,400,000 in total fixed costs to produce this product. It is currently selling 200,000 units.

    Instructions: Complete each of the following requirements, presenting labeled supporting computation

    (a) Compute and label the contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio.

    (b) Using the contribution margin per unit, compute the break-even point in units.

    (c) Using the contribution margin ratio, compute the break-even point in dollars.

    (d) Compute the margin of safety and margin of safety ratio.

    (e) Compute the number of units that must be sold in order to generate net income of $400,000 using the contribution margin per unit.

    (f) Should Harder give a commission to its salesman based on 10% of sales, if it will decrease fixed costs by $400,000 and increase sales volume 10%? Support your answer with labeled computations.

    accounting 461075

    SOmeone please help even if you answer each section in a seperate post.

    Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:

    A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.

    B. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the conversion costs charged to production.

    C. Prepare the march Journal entry for the Casting Dept. for the completed production transferred to teh Machining Dept.

    D. Determine the Work In Process Casting Dept. March 31 Balance.

    E. Compute the Change in cost per equivilant unit for direct Materials and Conversion from the prvious month. Change in Materials ________________ $_____________________

    Change in Conversion _______________ $________________________

    managerial accounting 461076

    Can someone help explain IN DETAIL how to get the answers for the second part of the question where it asks about how it would appear AFTER the proposed changes?

    Outback Outfitters sells recreational equipment. One of the company’s products, a small camp stove, sells for $50 per unit. Variable expenses are $32 per stove, and fixed expenses associated with the stove total $108,000 per month.

    At present, the company is selling 8,000 stoves per month. The sales manager is convinced that a 10% reduction in the selling price would result in a 25% increase in monthly sales of stoves. Prepare two contribution format income statements, one under present operating conditions, and one as operations would appear after the proposed changes. Show both total and per unit data on your statements.

    contribution margin 461081

    Hewtex Electronics manufactures two products, tape recorders and electronic calculators, and sells them nationally to wholesalers and retailers. The Hewtex management is very pleased with the company’s performance for the current fiscal year. Projected sales through DecemA?¬ber 31, 2010, indicate that 70,000 tape recorders and 140,000 calculaA?¬tors will be sold this year. The projected earnings statement, which appears below, shows that Hewtex will exceed its earnings goal of 9% on sales after taxes.

    The tape recorder business has been fairly stable for the last few years, and the company does not intend to change the tape recorder price. However, the competition among manufacturers of electronic calculators has been increasing. Hewtex’s calculators have been very popular with consumers. In order to sustain this interest in its calcuA?¬lators and to meet the price reductions expected from competitors, management has decided to reduce the wholesale price of its calculator from $22.50 to $20.00 per unit effective January 1, 2011. At the same time, the company plans to spend an additional $57,000 on advertising during the fiscal year 2011. As a consequence of these actions, manageA?¬ment estimates that 80% of its total dollar revenue will be derived from calculator sales as compared to 75% in 2010. As in prior years, the sales mix is assumed to be the same at all volume levels.

    The total fixed overhead costs will not change in 2011, nor will the variable overhead cost rates (applied on a direct labor hour base). However, the cost of materials and direct labor is expected to change. The cost of solid state electronic components will be cheaper in 2011. Hewtex estimates that material costs will drop 10% for the tape recordA?¬ers and 20% for the calculators in 2011. However, direct labor costs for both products will increase 10% in the coming year.

    Hewtex Electronics

    Projected Earnings Statement (totals in thousands)

    For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

    Tape Electronic

    Recorders Calculators Total

    Total Per Unit Total Per Unit

    Sales $1,050 $15.00 $3,150 $22.50 $4,200.0

    Production Costs:

    Materials $ 280 $ 4.00 $ 630 $ 4.50 $ 910.0

    Direct labor 140 2.00 420 3.00 560.0

    Variable overhead 140 2.00 280 2.00 420.0

    Fixed overhead 70 1.00 210 1.50 280.0

    Total $ 630 $ 9.00 $1,540 $11.00 $2,170.0

    Gross margin $ 420 $ 6.00 $1,610 $11.50 $2,030.0

    Fixed Selling & Admin Exp. 1,040.0

    Income before taxes $ 990.0

    Income taxes (55%) 544.5

    Net Income $ 445.5

    Required:

    1. Assuming the sales mix remains constant at all volume levels, how many units in total and of each product does Hewtex Electronics need to sell in 2010 to breakeven? Solve the problem using both (a) the dollar per unit contribution margin and (b) the contribution margin percentage.

    2. Compute the new cost structure, unit mix, and revenue mix for 2011 based on the changes that apply for 2011.

    3. Assuming the sales mix remains constant at all volume levels, how many units in total and of each product does Hewtex Electronics need to sell in 2011 to breakeven? Solve the problem using both (a) the dollar per unit contribution margin and (b) the contribution margin percentage.

    4. What volume of sales, in dollars, is required in 2011 if Hewtex Electronics is to earn a profit after taxes equal to 9% of sales? Also indicate the dollar and unit sales required of each product.

    risk adjusted npv 461086

    The Hokie Corporation is considering two mutually exclusive projects. Both require an initial outlay of $10,000 and will operate for five years. The probability distributions associated with each project for years 1 through 5 are given as follows:

    Probability Distribution for Cash Flow Years 1-5 (the same cash flow each year)

    Project A Project B

    Probability Cash Flow Probability Cash Flow

    0.15 $4,000 0.15 $2,000

    0.7 5,000 0.7 6,000

    0.15 6,000 0.15 10,000

    Because Project B is the riskier of the two projects, the management of Hokie Corporation has decided to apply a required rate of return of 15 percent to its evaluation but only a 12 percent required rate of return to project A.

    a. Determine the expected value of each project’s annual cash flows.

    b. Determine each project’s risk-adjusted net present value.

    c. What other factors might be considered in deciding between these two projects?

    accounts 461087

    Your hospital has been approached by a major HMO to perform all their MS-DRG 470 cases

    (major joint procedures). They have offered a flat price of $10,000 per case. You have reviewed

    your charges for MS-DRG 470 during the last year and found the following profile:

    Average Charge $15,000

    Average LOS 5 Days

    Cost/Charge Variable Cost %

    Routine Charge $3,600 0.80 60

    Operating Room 2,657 0.80 80

    Anesthesiology 293 0.80 80

    Lab 1,035 0.70 30

    Radiology 345 0.75 50

    Medical Supplies 4,524 0.50 90

    Pharmacy 1,230 0.50 90

    Other Ancillary 1,316 0.80 60

    Total Ancillary $11,400 0.75 50

    1. In the above data set, assume that the hospital’s cost to charge ratio is 0.80 for routine

    services and 0.75 for all other ancillary services. Using this information, what would the

    average cost of MS-DRG 470 be?

    2. Estimate the variable cost per MS-DRG 470 using the departmental cost/charge ratios

    and variable cost percentages.

    3. The HMO in the above example has indicated that their doctors use less expensive joint

    implants. If this less expensive implant is used, your medical supply charges would be

    reduced by $2,000. What is the estimated reduction in variable cost?

    4. Management has studied work patterns in the housekeeping department and estimates

    the number of hours to be worked as follows. Hours worked = (1,500 hours per month)

    + (0.50 Af— RVUs). For the coming month, management expects RVUs to be 5,800. What

    should budgeted labor for the month be?

    partnership accounting 461090

    I have 5 all together. Here is #2 of 5:

    2 – Miller and Davis, partners in a consulting business, share profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2, respectively. Prior to recording the admission of Shaw as a new partner, Miller has a capital balance of $80,000, and Davis has a capital balance of $40,000.

    Required:

    For each of the following independent cases, prepare the journal entry that was made to record the admission of Shaw into the partnership.

    1) Shaw purchased 20 percent of the respective capital balances of Miller and Davis, paying $20,000 cash directly to each of them.

    2) Shaw invested $30,000 cash in the partnership for a 20 percent ownership interest. Total capital after recording his admission was $150,000.

    3) Shaw invested $40,000 cash into the partnership for a 20 percent ownership interest. Total capital after recording his admission was $160,000.

    4) Shaw invested $50,000 into the partnership for a 20 percent interest. Goodwill is to be recognized.

    if asset b is sd for 1000 at the end of 3 years whatjournal entry would be made 461098

    (i) For the following group of assets, compute the composite depreciation rate, the composite life and the amount of depreciation recorded for the first year of ownership of the asset group, assuming that the group of assets was purchased on January 1:

    Asset Original Cost Salvage Value Estimated Life in years

    A $11,000 $ 500 5
    B $ 7,000 $ 200 4
    C $ 12,500 $ 800 3
    D $16,000 $1,000 6

    (ii) If Asset B is sold for $1,000 at the end of 3 years, what journal entry should be made? I need to answerthis question.

    (n) depr.
    orig salvage est. life cost
    asset cost (oc) value (sv) in years oc – sv sv / n
    A $11,000 $500 5 $10,500 $2,100
    B $7,000 $200 4 $6,800 $1,700
    C $12,500 $800 3 $11,700 $3,900
    D $16,000 $1,000 6 $15,000 $2,500
    TOTAL $46,500 $2,500 4.31 $44,000 $10,200

    Composite life equals the total
    depreciable cost divided by the total depreciation per year.

    = $44,000 / $10,200 = 4.31 years.

    Composite depreciation rate equals depreciation
    per year divided by total historical cost.

    =$10,200 / $46,500 = 22%

    Dep Recorded for Year 1 = $10,200

    Item (i) hs been completed, I need help with item (ii), please. Thank you

    expenses accounting problem 461104

    i need DEBT TO ASSETS RATIO

    Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:

    (All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)

    Oscar Corp

    Felix Corp

    Sales revenue

    800,000

    600,000

    Total expenses

    400,000

    200,000

    Cash

    90,000

    25,000

    Accounts receivable

    120,000

    75,000

    Property plant and equipment, net

    250,000

    225,000

    Accounts payable

    95,000

    60,000

    Salaries payable

    75,000

    35,000

    Long term liabilities

    150,000

    75,000

    Common shares outstanding, beginning of year

    50,000

    25,000

    Common shares outstanding, end of year

    100,000

    40,000

    No dividends were paid during 2008.

    complete the income statement 461111

    I regular Items

    shown below is information relating to operations of Ayers, Inc. for 20 10.

    Continuing Operations:

    Net Sales

    Costs and expenses (including income taxes)

    $7,000,000

    6,100,000

    Current-year profit generated by segment of the business

    discontinued in May (net of income taxes)

    gain on disposal of discontinued segment (net of income

    taxes)

    extraordinary loss (net of income tax benefit)

    600,000

    200,000

    (350,000)

    Th e company had 25,000 shares of common stock outstanding for six months of the year and

    1 5,000 shares of stock outstanding throughout the remainder of the year. It had no preferred

    st ck.

    In the space below complete the income statement for Ayers, Inc. including at least 3

    different earnings per share figures – 1) earnings per share from continuing operations 2)

    earnings per share before extraordinary item and 3) net earnings per share:

    Ayers, Inc.

    Condensed Income Statement

    For the Year Ended December 31, 20 I0

    accounting homework help with net monetary advantage disadvantage problems 461115

    Iaukea Company makes two products from a common input. Joint processing costs up to the split-off point total $48,600 a year. The company allocates these costs to the joint products on the basis of their total sales values at the split-off point. Each product may be sold at the split-off point or processed further. Data concerning these products appear below:

    Product X Product Y Total

    Allocated joint processing costs $ 18,800 $ 29,800 $ 48,600

    Sales value at split-off point $ 25,850 $ 37,800 $ 63,650

    Costs of further processing $ 23,300 $ 17,600 $ 40,900

    Sales value after further processing $ 48,800 $ 56,500 $ 105,300

    Required:

    a.

    What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product X beyond the split-off point? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net $

    b.

    What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product Y beyond the split-off point? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net $

    c.

    What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product X if it is to be sold at the split-off point? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Minimum acceptable amount $

    d.

    What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product Y if it is to be sold at the split-off point? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Minimum acceptable amount $

    My work for A &B

    A) 48800-25850= 22950 – 23300 = -350 Disadvantage

    B) 56500 – 37800= 18700 – 17600 = 1100

    C) My textbook does not help solve this

    D)My textbook does not help solve this

    acquisition and disposition of property plant equipment 461116

    Ice Mountain Company exchanged machinery with an appraised value of $1,755,000, a recorded cost of $2,700,000 and Accumulated Depreciation of $1,350,000 with Green Corporation for machinery Green owns. The machinery has an appraised value of $1,695,000, a recorded cost of $3,240,000, and Accumulated Depreciation of $1,782,000. Green also gave Ice Mountain $60,000 in the exchange. Assume depreciation has already been updated.

    1.Prepare the journal entry for Green Company assuming that the exchange had commercial substance.

    2. Assume that the exchange lacked commercial substance. Prepare the journal entry for Green Company.

    3. Assume that the exchange lacked commercial substance. Prepare the journal entry for Ice Mountain Company.

    accounting 461117

    Identify accounts by category and financial statement(s). Listed here are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption the category of each item and the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. Use the following abbreviations:

    Category Financial Statement

    Asset A Balance Sheet BS

    Liability L Income Statement IS

    Owners’ Equity OE

    Revenue R

    Expense E

    Gain G

    Loss LS

    Accumulated depreciation _____ ______

    Long-term debt _____ _____

    Equipment ______ ______

    Loss on sale of short-term investments _____ ______

    Net income _____ _____

    Merchandise Inventory _____ _____

    Other accrued liabilities _____ ______

    Dividends paid _____ _____

    Cost of goods sold _____ _____

    Additional paid-in capital _____ _____

    Interest income _____ _____

    Selling Expense _____ _____

    luchty 461122

    (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Lichty Car Wash has some equipment that needs to be rebuilt or replaced. The following information has been gathered concerning this decision:

    Present Equipment New Equipment

    Purchase cost new 47,000 45,000

    Remaining book value 20,000 none

    Cost to rebuild now 20,000 none

    Major maintenance at the end of 3 year 5,000 3,000

    Annual cash operating cost 9,000 7,000

    Salvage value in 5 years 2,000 6,000

    Salvage value now 8,000 none

    Lichty uses the total-cost approach and a discount rate of 10% in making capital budgeting decisions. Regardless of which option is chosen, rebuild or replace, at the end of five years Mr. Lichty plans to close the car wash and retire.

    If the new equipment is purchased, the present value of all cash flows that occur now is:

    a. $(45,000)

    b. $(39,000)

    c. $(37,000)

    d. $(34,000)

    note receivable 461137

    On January 1, 2009, Pink Company finished consultation services and accepted in exchange a promissory note with a face value of $400,000, a due date of December 31, 2012, and a stated rate of 8%, with interest receivable at June 30th and December 31st. The fair value of the services is not readily determinable and the note is not readily marketable. Under the circumstances, the note is considered to have an appropriate imputed rate of interest of 10%. (Hint: the imputed rate is similar to the market rate).

    a) Determine the present value of the note.
    b) Prepare a Schedule of Note Discount/Premium Amortization for Pink Company under the effective interest method. (Round to whole dollars.)
    c) Prepare any necessary journal entries in 2009 to record the issuance of the note and any interest journal entries that may be required based on the terms of the note.
    d) Prepare any necessary journal entries in 2012.

    accounting 461138

    On January 1, 2011, Piper Co. issued ten-year bonds with a face value of $1,000,000 and a stated interest rate of 10%, payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds were sold to yield 12%. Table values are:

    Present value of 1 for 10 periods at 10%………………………. .386

    Present value of 1 for 10 periods at 12%………………………. .322

    Present value of 1 for 20 periods at 5%………………………… .377

    Present value of 1 for 20 periods at 6%………………………… .312

    Present value of annunity for 10 periods at 10%………………. 6.145

    Present value of annunity for 10 periods at 12%………………. 5.650

    Present value of annunity for 20 periods at 5%……………….. 12.462

    Present value of annunity for 20 periods at 6%……………….. 11.470

    (a) Calculate the issue price of the bonds.

    (b) Without prejudice to your solution in part (a), assume that the issue price was $884,000. Prepare the amortization table for 2011, assuming that amortization is recorded on interest payment dates.

    cost allocation and activity based costing 461147

    Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.

    Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.

    For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.

    The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Direct materials $4.50 $2.90

    Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24

    JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:

    Activity Cost Pool

    Activity Measure Expected Activity

    for the Year Expected Cost

    for the Year

    Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000

    Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000

    Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000

    Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000

    Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000

    Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000

    Total maufacturing

    overhead costs

    $2,200,000

    Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds

    Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch

    Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours

    B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours

    Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours

    Requirements:

    1. Using direct labor-hours as the base for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following:

    a. Determine the predetermined overhead rate that will be used during the year.

    cost allocation and activity based costing 461148

    Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.

    Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.

    For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.

    The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Direct materials $4.50 $2.90

    Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24

    JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:

    Activity Cost Pool

    Activity Measure Expected Activity

    for the Year Expected Cost

    for the Year

    Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000

    Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000

    Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000

    Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000

    Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000

    Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000

    Total maufacturing

    overhead costs

    $2,200,000

    Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds

    Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch

    Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours

    B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours

    Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours

    Requirements:

    1. Using direct labor-hours as the base for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following:

    b. Determine the unit product cost of one pound of the Kenya Dark coffee and one pound of the Viet Select coffee.

    cost allocation and activity based costing 461149

    Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.

    Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.

    For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.

    The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Direct materials $4.50 $2.90

    Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24

    JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:

    Activity Cost Pool

    Activity Measure Expected Activity

    for the Year Expected Cost

    for the Year

    Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000

    Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000

    Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000

    Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000

    Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000

    Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000

    Total maufacturing

    overhead costs

    $2,200,000

    Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.

    Kenya Dark Viet Select

    Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds

    Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch

    Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds

    Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours

    B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours

    Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours

    Requirements:

    2. Using activity-based costing as the basis for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following:

    a. Determine the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost assigned to the Kenya Dark coffee and to the Viet Select coffee for the year.

    help please 461017

    The following information is available for Moore Company:

    Mixing Department
    Work in process, June 1 (100% complete complete for direct material, 60% complete for conversion costs) 1,500 units
    Units completed in June 9,850 units
    Work in process, June 30 (80% complete for direct materials, 30% complete for conversion costs) 1,050 units

    The following information is available for Valentine Company:

    Dyeing Department
    Work in process, June 1 (100% complete for direct materials, 50% complete for conversion costs)
    1,200 units
    Units completed in June 8,500 units
    Work in process, June 30 (60% complete for direct materials, 40% complete for conversion costs) 950 units

    Compute:
    a. The number of units started in each department during June.

    predetermined overhead rate 461023

    The following information pertains to Charter Company:

    Service Departments Producing Departments

    Personnel Maintenance Fabrication Assembly

    Budgeted overhead $80,000 $144,000 $280,000 $320,000

    Direct labor hours 4,000 5,000 16,000 20,000

    Machine hours 24,000 16,000

    Number of employees 8 10 30 50

    Charter Company does not divide costs into fixed and variable components. Personnel costs are allocated based on the number of employees, and maintenance costs are allocated based on machine hours. Predetermined overhead rates for Fabrication and Assembly are based on direct labor hours. (Round amounts to dollars) If the direct method is used to allocate service department costs, the predetermined overhead rate for the Fabrication Department (rounded to 2 decimal places) would be:

    A. $16.00

    B. $21.38

    C. $22.89

    D. $24.78

    overhead rate 461024

    The following information pertains to Charter Company:

    Service Depts

    Personnel

    Budgeted overhead: $80,000

    Direct labor hours: 4,000

    Machine hours: 0

    Number of employees: 8

    Maintenance

    Budgeted overhead: $144,000

    Direct labor hours: 5,000

    Machine hours: 0

    Number of employees: 10

    Producing Departments

    Fabrication

    Budgeted overhead: $280,000

    Direct labor hours: 16,000

    Machine hours: 24,000

    Number of employees: 30

    Assembly

    Budgeted overhead: $320,000

    Direct labor hours: 20,000

    Machine hours: 16,000

    Number of employees: 50

    Charter does not divide costs into fixed and variable cost components. Personnel costs are allocated based on the number of employees and maintenance costs are based on machine hours. Predetermined overhead rates for Fabrication and Assembly are based on direct labor hours. (Round amounts to dollars) If the direct method is used to allocate service department costs, the predetermined overhead rate for the Fabrication Department (rounded to 2 decimal places) would be:

    A. $16.00

    B. $21.38

    C. $22.89

    D. $24.78

    bank reconciliation and journalize adjusting entries 461025

    The following information pertains to Family Video Company.

    1. Cash balance per bank, July 31, $9,950.31.

    2. July bank service charge not recorded by the depositor $38.36.

    3. Cash balance per books, July 31, $9,979.08.

    4. Deposits in transit, July 31, $2,055.00.

    5. Bank collected $1,233.00 note for Family in July, plus interest $49.32, less fee $27.40. The collection has not been recorded by Family, and no interest has been accrued.

    6. Outstanding checks, July 31, $809.67.

    Prepare a bank reconciliation at July 31. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)

    $

    Add:

    Less:

    Adjusted cash balance per bank

    $

    $

    Add:

    Less:

    Adjusted cash balance per books

    $

    Journalize the adjusting entries at July 31 on the books of Family Video Company. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)

    Date Description/Account Debit Credit

    July 31

    (To record collection of note receivable by bank)

    July 31

    (To record bank service charge.)

    accounting help 461028

    The following information pertains to Gilmore Company.

    1. Cash balance per bank, July 31, $7,489.

    2. July bank service charge not recorded by the depositor $45.

    3. Cash balance per books, July 31, $7,441.

    4. Deposits in transit, July 31, $1,861.

    5. Note for $1,161 collected for Gilmore in July by the bank, plus interest $36 less fee $20. The collection has not been recorded by Gilmore, and no interest has been accrued.

    6. Outstanding checks, July 31, $777.

    (a) Complete the bank reconciliation at July 31, 2010 below:

    GILMORE COMPANY

    Bank reconciliation

    July 31, 2010

    Cash balance per bank statement $

    Add: Adjusted cash balance per bankAdjusted cash balance per booksCollection of note receivableBank service chargeDeposits in transitOutstanding checks

    Less: Collection of note receivableDeposits in transitOutstanding checksAdjusted cash balance per bankBank service chargeAdjusted cash balance per books

    Adjusted cash balance per bankDeposits in transitCollection of note receivableBank service chargeAdjusted cash balance per booksOutstanding checks $

    Cash balance per books $

    Add: Deposits in transitBank service chargeAdjusted cash balance per booksAdjusted cash balance per bankOutstanding checksCollection of note receivable

    Less: Adjusted cash balance per booksCollection of note receivableOutstanding checksDeposits in transitAdjusted cash balance per bankBank service charge

    Outstanding checksDeposits in transitAdjusted cash balance per booksAdjusted cash balance per bankCollection of note receivableBank service charge $

    (b) Journalize the adjusting entries at July 31 on the books of Gilmore Company. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

    Date Account/Description Debit Credit

    July 31 Interest revenueMiscellaneous expenseNotes receivableAccounts receivableCash

    Interest revenueAccounts receivableNotes receivableCashMiscellaneous expense

    Accounts receivableCashMiscellaneous expenseInterest revenueNotes receivable

    Accounts receivableInterest revenueNotes receivableCashMiscellaneous expense

    (To record the collect of notes receivable)

    July 31 Interest revenueAccounts receivableCashMiscellaneous expenseNotes receivable

    Accounts receivableMiscellaneous expenseCashNotes receivableInterest revenue

    (To record bank service charges)

    determing account balances percent fo revenue allowance method of accounting for unc 461030

    The following information pertains to Leslie’s floor store sales on account and accounts receivable.

    Accounts receivable balance, January 1, 2012 $ 52,500.00

    Allowance for doubtful accounts, January 1, 2012 $ 4,725

    Sales on account, 2012 $ 925,000

    Cost of goods sold, 2012 $ 615,000

    Collections on accounts receivable, 2012 $ 835, 000

    After several collections attempts, Leslie’s wrote off $3,100 of accounts that could not be collected Leslie’s estimates that bad debt expense will be 0.5 percent of sales on account.

    A. Compute the following amounts.

    (1) Using the allowance method, the amount of uncollectible accounts expense for 2012.

    (2) Net realizable value of receivables at the end of 2012

    B. Explain why the uncollectible accounts expense amount is different from the amount that was written off.

    financial statement analysis 461031

    The following information pertains to Tanzi Company. Assume that all balance sheet amounts represent both average and ending balance figures. Assume that all sales were on credit. Note: In the calcuation, round the earnings per share amount to the nearest cent.

    Assets

    Cash and short-term investments $36,295
    Accounts receivable (net) $29,590
    Inventory $38,477
    Property, plant and equipment $234,471
    Total Assets $338,833

    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

    Current liabilities $68,880
    Long-term liabilities $89,407
    Stockholders’ equity-common $180,546
    Total Liabilities and stockholders’ equity $338,833
    Income Statement
    Sales $89,866
    Cost of goods sold $40,440
    Gross margin $49,426
    Operating expenses $21,599
    Net income $27,827
    Number of shares of common stock 6,652
    Market price of common stock $34

    What is the price-earnings ratio for this company?

    (I need a detailed answer please where you first calculate earnings per share)

    The formula for the price-earnings ratio is the following:

    market price per share of common stock/earnings per share on common stock

    i really need help with this homework and it s due in 30 minutes 461033

    The following items were taken from the financial statements of M. Wright Company. (All dollars are in thousands.)

    Long-term debt $812 Accumulated depreciation $5,427

    Prepaid expenses 867 Accounts payable 1,221

    Property, plant, and equipment 11,183 Notes payable after 2013 203

    Long-term investments 257 M. Wright, Capital 12,836

    Short-term investments 3,420 Accounts receivable 1,289

    Notes payable in 2013 430 Inventories 1,615

    Cash 2,298

    Instructions

    Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 2012. (List assets in order of liquidity. List current liabilities from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2, with notes payable first and long-term liabilities from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2. Present all numbers as positive and subtract as necessary.)

    governmental 461036

    The following is a pre-closing trial balance for sun city’s General fund as of June 30, 2009:

    Debit Credit

    Cash 116,500

    Taxes Receivable-Current 29,000

    Estimated uncollectible current taxes 3,000

    Accounts Payable 7,800

    Due to other funds 5,500

    Tax anticipation notes payable 50,000

    Reserve for encumbrances 5,000

    budgetary fund balance 1000

    Fund Balance 70,200

    Estimated Revenues 100,000

    Revenues 102,000

    Appropriations 99,000

    Encumbrances 5,000

    Expenditures 93,000

    Totals 343,500 343,500

    (1) Providde the entries to close the budgetary and operating statement accounts.

    (2) What is the fund balance as of June 30, 2009 after all closing entries have been made? Show your work.”

    (3) what is the total fund balance as of june 30

    auditing i 461037

    For each of the following specific audit procedures, indicate the type of audit procedure(s) it represents: (1) inspection of records or documents, (2) inspection of tangible assets, (3) observation, (4) inquiry, (5) confirmation, (6) recalculation, (7) reperformance, (8) analytical procedures, (9) scanning, (1/7), and (9/7).

    a. Sending a written request to the client’s customers requesting that they report the amount owed to the client.

    b. Examining large sales invoices for a period of two days before and after year-end to determine if sales are recorded in the proper period.

    c. Agreeing the total of the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger to the accounts receivable general ledger account.

    d. Discussing the adequacy of the allowance for doubtful accounts with the credit manager.

    e. Comparing the current-year gross profit percentage with the gross profit percentage for the last four years.

    f. Examining a new plastic extrusion machine to ensure that this major acquisition was received.

    g. Watching the client’s warehouse personnel count the raw materials inventory.

    h. Performing test counts of the warehouse personnel’s count of the raw material.

    i. Obtaining a letter from the client’s attorney indicating that there were no lawsuits in progress against the client.

    j. Tracing the prices used by the client’s billing program for pricing sales invoices to the client’s approved price list.

    k. Reviewing the general ledger for unusual adjusting entries.

    question 1 production budget 461038

    The following table presents Generic Motors Company’s production budget. GM’s inventory policy is to have ending inventory equal to20% of next month’s sales.

    February March April
    Ending inventory 5,000
    Beginning inventory 2,000
    Budgeted sales 13,000 17,000 18,000
    Budgeted production

    Required:
    (a) Fill in the missing numbers in the table above.
    (Hint if you get stuck: What is the relation between ending inventory for one month and beginning inventory for the following month?)

    b) Why do firms want to hold inventory of finished goods? (an alternative could be to produce exactly the amount they are going to sell, and hold zero inventories)

    i need correct version 461041

    The following trial balance was prepared incorrectly. The amounts in the general ledger were
    correct but some of the account balances were reported incorrectly in the report. All of the
    accounts should have a normal balance.

    Cash
    40,000
    Accounts receivable
    80,000
    Inventory
    120,000
    Prepaid rent
    15,000
    Equipment
    340,000
    Accumulated depreciation
    200,000
    Accounts payable
    70,000
    Salaries payable
    20,000
    Note payable
    200,000
    Common Stock
    20,000
    Retained earnings
    50,000
    Commission revenue
    180,000
    Facility expense
    50,000
    Wage expense
    60,000
    Depreciation expense
    20,000
    Professional services expense
    15,000
    785,000
    695,000

    managerial accounting 461050

    Fresh Air Products Company manufactures and sells a variety of camping products. Recently the company opened a new plant to manufacture a deluxe portable cooking unit. Cost and sales data for the first month of operations are shown below:

    Manufacturing Costs

    Fixed Overhead $120,000

    Variable overhead $3 per unit

    Direct labor $12 per unit

    Direct material $30 per unit

    Beginning inventory 0 units

    Units produced 10,000

    Units sold 8,000

    Selling and Administrative Costs

    Fixed $200,000

    Variable $4 per unit sold

    The portable cooking unit sells for $110. Management is interested in the opening month’s results and has asked for an income statement.

    Instructions

    Assume the company uses absorption costing. Calculate the production cost per unit and prepare an income statement for the month of June, 2011.

    need walmart charts and sales info over past 4 years 461052

    As the fund manager for a large mutual fund, you are preparing for a conference call with all your major investors. You plan to e-mail everyone with an attachment that will serve as a guide for the upcoming call. You know investors’ time is limited, so you want to be focused in your brief report. Because there are numerous figures to discuss, you will be including 1 or more charts all in the same document.

    For each of the following points, prepare both a paragraph of commentary and an appropriate chart to support it. (I CHOSE WALMART AS IT WOULD BE THE EASIEST ONE). PLEASE NOTE EACH POINT NEEDS A PARAGRAPH AND CHART TO GO WITH IT. tHANK YOU TO WHOEVER HELPS WITH THIS!!

    ‘Find the last 4 years’ sales and profit or net income data for a major retail corporation.

    ‘Calculate profit as a percentage of sales; be careful to place the decimal point correctly.

    ‘Prepare a paragraph of explanation/interpretation of the data as if this were a small part of a lengthy report to potential investors.

    ‘Prepare a chart to display all the information in a meaningful way.

    managerial accounting hw asap 461053

    Galati Products, Inc., has just purchased a small company that specializes in the manufacture of electronic tuners that are used as a component part of TV sets. Galati Products, Inc., is a decentralized company, and it will treat the newly acquired company as an autonomous division with full profit responsibility. The new division, called the Tuner Division, has the following revenue and costs associated with each tuner that it manufactures and sells:

    Selling price $20

    Expenses:

    Variable $10

    Fixed (based on a capacity of

    98,000 tuners per year) 6 16

    Net operating income $4

    Galati Products also has an Assembly Division that assembles TV sets. This division is currently purchasing 29,000 tuners per year from an overseas supplier at a cost of $20 per tuner, less a 10% purchase discount. The president of Galati Products is anxious to have the Assembly Division begin purchasing its tuners from the newly acquired Tuner Division in order to “keep the profits within the corporate family.”

    Required:

    For (1) and (2) below, assume that the Tuner Division can sell all of its output to outside TV manufacturers at the normal $20 price.

    1a. What is the minimum transfer price for Tuner Division? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Minimum transfer price $

    1b.

    What is the maximum transfer price that Assembly Division is ready to pay? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Maximum transfer price $

    1c.

    Are the managers of the Tuner and Assembly Divisions likely to voluntarily agree to a transfer price for 29,000 tuners each year?

    Yes

    No

    2.

    If the Tuner Division meets the price that the Assembly Division is currently paying to its overseas supplier and sells 29,000 tuners to the Assembly Division each year, what will be the effect on the profits of the Tuner Division, the Assembly Division, and the company as a whole? (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    a. Profits of the Tuner Division will(decrease? increase? unchanged) by $ .

    b. Profits of the Assembly Division will(decrease? increase? unchanged) by $ .

    c. Profits of the company as a whole will(decrease? increase? unchanged) by $ .

    For (3) through (6), assume that the Tuner Division is currently selling only 59,000 tuners each year to outside TV manufacturers at the stated $20 price.

    3a.

    What is the minimum transfer price for Tuner Division? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Minimum transfer price $

    3b.

    What is the range of transfer price the manager’s of both divisions should agree? (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    The transfer price can be a lowest of $ and a highest of $ .

    3c.

    Are the managers of the Assembly and Tuner Divisions likely to voluntarily agree to a transfer price for 29,000 tuners each year?

    Yes

    No

    4a.

    Suppose that the Assembly Division’s overseas supplier drops its price (net of the purchase discount) to only $15 per tuner. Should the Tuner Division meet this price?

    No

    Yes

    4b.

    How much potential profit will the Tuner Division lose if the $15 price is not met? (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Profit of the company will(increase? decrease?) by $

    5.

    Refer to (4) above. If the Tuner Division refuses to meet the $15 price, should the Assembly Division be required to purchase from the Tuner Division at a higher price for the good of the company as a whole?

    No

    Yes

    6.

    Refer to (4) above. Assume that due to inflexible management policies, the Assembly Division is required to purchase 29,000 tuners each year from the Tuner Division at $20 per tuner. What will be the effect on the profits of the company as a whole? (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    a. The Tuner Division will have an(increase? decrease?) in profit by $ .

    b. The Assembly Division will have a(increase? decrease?) in profit by $ .

    c. The company as a whole will have an(increase? decrease?) in profit by $ .

    cash flows 1 461054

    Galley Corp., a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases if inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other expenses are all cash expenses and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statements follow.

    GALLEY CORPORATION

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 2011 and 2010

    2011 2010

    Assets

    Cash $174,000 $117,000

    Accounts receivable 93,000 81,000

    Merchandise inventory 609,000 534,000

    Equipment 333,000 297,000

    Accum. depreciation equip (156,000) (102,000)

    Total assets $1,053,000 927,000

    Liabilities and Equity

    Accounts payable $69,000 $96,000

    Income taxes payable 27,000 24,000

    Common stock, $2 par value 582,000 558,000

    Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock 198,000 162,000

    Retained earnings 177,000 87,000

    Total liabilities and equity $1,053,000 $927,000

    GALLEY CORPORATION

    Income Statement

    For year Ended December 31, 2011

    Sales $1,992,000

    Cost of goods sold 1,194,000

    Gross Profit 798,000

    Operating Expenses

    Depreciation Expense $54,000

    Other Expenses 501,000 555,000

    Income before taxes 243,000

    Income tax expense 42,000

    Net income $201,000

    Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions

    a. purchased equipment for $36,000 cash

    b. Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $5 cash per share

    c. Declared and paid $111,000 in cash dividends

    Required

    Prepare and complete statement of cash inflows and cash outflows from operating activities according to the indirect method.

    accounting help 461055

    Gambino’s Pizza operates strictly on a carryout basis. Customers pick up their orders at a counter where a clerk exchanges the pizza for cash. While at the counter, the customer can see other employees making the pizzas and the large ovens in which the pizzas are baked.

    Match the principles of internal control with the examples of each principle that you might observe when picking up your pizza.

    Documentation procedures – -12345

    Independent internal verification – -12345

    Physical controls – -12345

    Segregation of duties – -12345

    Establishment of responsibility – -12345

    1. The counter clerk, in handling the pizza, compares the size of the pizza with the size indicated on the order.

    2. The counter clerk is responsible for handling cash. Other employees are responsible for making the pizzas.

    3. The counter clerk uses your order invoice (ticket) in registering the sale on the cash register. The cash register produces a tape of all sales.

    4. Employees who make the pizzas do not handle cash.

    5. A cash register is used to record the sale.

    please help 461056

    The Gannon Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows:

    JUNE JULY AUGUST

    Credit sales $27,000 $29,000 $18,000

    Cash sales 18,000 51,000 39,000

    Total sales $45,000 $80,000 $57,000

    Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.

    Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 50% is paid in the month of purchase and 50% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are:

    June $60,000

    July 50,000

    August 21,000

    Other cash disbursements budgeted: (a) selling and administrative expenses of $9,500 each month, (b) dividends of $22,700 will be paid in July, and (c) purchase of a computer in August for $5,000 cash.

    The company MUST maintain a minimum cash balance of $10,000 at the end of each month. The company borrows money from the bank at 9% per year interest if necessary to maintain the minimum cash balance of $10,000. Borrowed money is repaid in months when there is an excess cash balance. The beginning cash balance on July 1 was $10,000 of which none is borrowed.

    Instructions:

    Prepare a cash budget for the months of July and August and Prepare separate schedules for expected collections from customers and expected payments for purchases of inventory.

    cash budget help please 461058

    The Gannon Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows:

    June July August

    Credit sales $27,000 $29,000 $18,000

    Cash sales 18,000 51,000 39,000

    Total sales $45,000 $80,000 $57,000

    Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.

    Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 50% is paid in the month of purchase and 50% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are:

    June $60,000

    July 50,000

    August 21,000

    Other cash disbursements budgeted: (a) selling and administrative expenses of $9,500 each month, (b) dividends of $22,700 will be paid in July, and (c) purchase of a computer in August for $5,000 cash.

    The company MUST maintain a minimum cash balance of $10,000 at the end of each month. The company borrows money from the bank at 9% per year interest if necessary to maintain the minimum cash balance of $10,000. Borrowed money is repaid in months when there is an excess cash balance. The beginning cash balance on July 1 was $10,000 of which none is borrowed.

    Instructions:

    Prepare a cash budget for the months of July and August.

    cost volume profit 461059

    Gardner Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,644,800 on 102,800 units; selling expenses $238,900 (39% variable and 61% fixed); direct materials $554,332; direct labor $280,200; administrative expenses $277,800 (19% variable and 81% fixed); manufacturing overhead $356,500 (71% variable and 29% fixed). Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 11% next year.

    Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and (2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.) (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    Contribution margin-Current year $

    Contribution margin-Projected year $

    Fixed costs-Current year& projected year $

    Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the current year. (Round calculations for unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25. Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    Breakeven point (units) units

    Breakeven point (dollars) $

    The company has a target net income of $308,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target? (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    $

    If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio? (Round answer to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5.)

    %

    cost volume profit 460978

    Felde Company had $140,030 of net income in 2011 when the selling price per unit was $160, the variable costs per unit were $83, and the fixed costs were $709,280. Management expects per unit data and total fixed costs to remain the same in 2012. The president of Felde Company is under pressure from stockholders to increase net income by $214,830 in 2012.

    Compute the number of units sold in 2011.

    Compute the number of units that would have to be sold in 2012 to reach the stockholders’ desired profit level.

    Assume that Felde Company sells the same number of units in 2012 as it did in 2011. What would the selling price have to be in order to reach the stockholders’ desired profit level? (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    this is my acounting project 460982

    FIGLEAF.COM

    POST-CLOSING TRIAL BALANCE

    MAY 31, 2005

    CASH 475,000

    ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 75,000

    ALLOW FOR UNCOLLECTIBLE ACCTS 5,000

    NOTES RECEIVABLE 200,000

    RAW MATERIALS 50,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, PEGASUS 25,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, CERBERUS 65,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, ACHILLES 10,000

    FINISHED GOODS 75,000

    MOLDING MACHINES 1,000,000

    ACCUMULATED DEP(100K/YEAR) 491,667

    OFFICE FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT 75,000

    ACCUMULATED DEP(5K/YEAR) 14,583

    PATENTS 25,000

    ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 125,000

    NOTES PAYABLE 25,000

    COMMON STOCK 600,000

    RETAINED EARNINGS 813,750

    TOTALS $2,075,000 $2,075,000

    TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE:

    1) PURCHASED RAW MATERIALS (CEMENT, DYES, STONES) TOTALLING $350,000.

    2) REQUISITIONED INTO PRODUCTION IN MONTH OF JUNE: $350,000.

    3) 2 JOBS FINISHED IN JUNE:

    A) PRODUCTION OF 400 PEGASUS STATUES (PRICE: $750/EACH) COSTS:

    1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $125,000 IN RAW MATERIALS.

    2) DIRECT LABOR COSTS: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED ON THIS JOB: 1900. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20

    3. OVERHEAD: THE COMPANY USES A PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE BASED ON DIRECT LABOR HOURS CALCULATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE FISCAL YEAR. THE TOTAL OVERHEAD ESTIMATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE YEAR WAS $2,000,000. THE COMPANY ESTIMATED IT WOULD USE 50,000 HOURS OF DIRECT LABOR FOR YEAR.

    B): PRODUCTION OF 600 CERBERUS STATUES: PRICE: $600 EACH.

    1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $175,000.

    2) DIRECT LABOR: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED: 2,000. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20

    3) OVERHEAD APPLIED AGAIN USING THE ABOVE PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE.

    C) A THIRD JOB,PRODUCTION OF 200 ACHILLES STATUES, IS STILL ON THE FACTORY FLOOR AT THE END OF THE MONTH. THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE: PRICE: $500 EACH.

    1) RAW MATERIALS USED SO FAR: $50,000

    2) DIRECT LABOR HOURS USED: 900 AT $20/HOUR

    3) OVERHEAD AGAIN IS APPLIED AT THE PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE.

    ADDITIONAL DATA:

    ACTUAL COSTS INCURRED IN THE MONTH OF JUNE:

    1) RENT EXPENSE IS $10,000/MONTH. A??3 OF THIS IS FACTORY RENT.

    2) UTILITY EXPENSE IS $4,250 FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE. $3,250 IS FOR FACTORY UTILITY COSTS; THE REMAINING IS FOR THE ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES.

    3) THE SALARIES FOR THE MONTH ARE $321,000. THIS INCLUDES: $96,000 INCURRED FOR DIRECT LABOR COSTS (ALREADY RECORDED); $125,000 FOR ADMINISTRATIVE AND SALES SALARIES; THE REMAINING IS FOR INDIRECT LABOR COSTS.

    4) ALL DEPRECIATION ON THE MOLDING MACHINES IS A FACTORY EXPENSE.

    5) 2/3 OF THE PROPERTY TAX EXPENSE IS LEVIED ON THE FACTORY; THE PROPERTY TAX ESTIMATED FOR EACH MONTH IS $4,000.

    6) ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS MANUFACTURING OVERHEAD AMOUNTED TO $70,000.

    INFORMATION NECESSARY TO PREPARE ENTRIES:

    ALL SALES ARE ON ACCOUNT.

    ALL PURCHASES OF INVENTORYARE ON ACCOUNT.

    ALL OTHER EXPENSES ARE PAID IN CASH.

    DURING THE MONTH THE COMPANY PAID $125,000 ON ACCOUNT AND RECEIVED $75,000 ON ACCOUNT.

    SALES FOR THE MONTH:

    1) SOLD BEGINNING INVENTORY IN FINISHED GOODS FOR $150,000

    2) SOLD ALL OF THE PEGASUS ORDER OF 400 STATUES ‘ PRICE $750 EACH.

    REMAINING IN FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY: THE CERBERUS ORDER.

    REMAINING IN WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY: THE ACHILLES ORDER.

    YOU WILL NEED TO A) PREPARE THE JOURNAL ENTRIES TO RECORD THE TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH INCLUDING THE FLOW OF INVENTORY AND APPLIED OVERHEAD.

    my project 460983

    fIGLEAF.COM

    POST-CLOSING TRIAL BALANCE

    MAY 31, 2005

    CASH 475,000

    ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 75,000

    ALLOW FOR UNCOLLECTIBLE ACCTS 5,000

    NOTES RECEIVABLE 200,000

    RAW MATERIALS 50,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, PEGASUS 25,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, CERBERUS 65,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, ACHILLES 10,000

    FINISHED GOODS 75,000

    MOLDING MACHINES 1,000,000

    ACCUMULATED DEP(100K/YEAR) 491,667

    OFFICE FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT 75,000

    ACCUMULATED DEP(5K/YEAR) 14,583

    PATENTS 25,000

    ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 125,000

    NOTES PAYABLE 25,000

    COMMON STOCK 600,000

    RETAINED EARNINGS 813,750

    TOTALS $2,075,000 $2,075,000

    TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE:

    1) PURCHASED RAW MATERIALS (CEMENT, DYES, STONES) TOTALING $350,000.

    2) REQUISITIONED INTO PRODUCTION IN MONTH OF JUNE: $350,000.

    3) 2 JOBS FINISHED IN JUNE:

    A) PRODUCTION OF 400 PEGASUS STATUES (PRICE: $750/EACH) COSTS:

    1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $125,000 IN RAW MATERIALS.

    2) DIRECT LABOR COSTS: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED ON THIS JOB: 1900. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20

    3. OVERHEAD: THE COMPANY USES A PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE BASED ON DIRECT LABOR HOURS CALCULATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE FISCAL YEAR. THE TOTAL OVERHEAD ESTIMATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE YEAR WAS $2,000,000. THE COMPANY ESTIMATED IT WOULD USE 50,000 HOURS OF DIRECT LABOR FOR YEAR.

    ADDITIONAL DATA:

    ACTUAL COSTS INCURRED IN THE MONTH OF JUNE:

    1) RENT EXPENSE IS $10,000/MONTH. A??3 OF THIS IS FACTORY RENT.

    2) UTILITY EXPENSE IS $4,250 FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE. $3,250 IS FOR FACTORY UTILITY COSTS; THE REMAINING IS FOR THE ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES.

    3) THE SALARIES FOR THE MONTH ARE $321,000. THIS INCLUDES: $96,000 INCURRED FOR DIRECT LABOR COSTS (ALREADY RECORDED); $125,000 FOR ADMINISTRATIVE AND SALES SALARIES; THE REMAINING IS FOR INDIRECT LABOR COSTS.

    4) ALL DEPRECIATION ON THE MOLDING MACHINES IS A FACTORY EXPENSE.

    5) 2/3 OF THE PROPERTY TAX EXPENSE IS LEVIED ON THE FACTORY; THE PROPERTY TAX ESTIMATED FOR EACH MONTH IS $4,000.

    6) ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS MANUFACTURING OVERHEAD AMOUNTED TO $70,000.

    INFORMATION NECESSARY TO PREPARE ENTRIES:

    ALL SALES ARE ON ACCOUNT.

    ALL PURCHASES OF INVENTORYARE ON ACCOUNT.

    ALL OTHER EXPENSES ARE PAID IN CASH.

    DURING THE MONTH THE COMPANY PAID $125,000 ON ACCOUNT AND RECEIVED $75,000 ON ACCOUNT.

    SALES FOR THE MONTH:

    1) SOLD BEGINNING INVENTORY IN FINISHED GOODS FOR $150,000

    2) SOLD ALL OF THE PEGASUS ORDER OF 400 STATUES ‘ PRICE $750 EACH.

    REMAINING IN FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY: THE CERBERUS ORDER.

    REMAINING IN WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY: THE ACHILLES ORDER.

    YOU WILL NEED TO A) PREPARE THE JOURNAL ENTRIES TO RECORD THE TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH INCLUDING THE FLOW OF INVENTORY AND APPLIED OVERHEAD.

    my project 460984

    fIGLEAF.COM

    POST-CLOSING TRIAL BALANCE

    MAY 31, 2005

    CASH 475,000

    ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 75,000

    ALLOW FOR UNCOLLECTIBLE ACCTS 5,000

    NOTES RECEIVABLE 200,000

    RAW MATERIALS 50,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, PEGASUS 25,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, CERBERUS 65,000

    WORK IN PROCESS, ACHILLES 10,000

    FINISHED GOODS 75,000

    MOLDING MACHINES 1,000,000

    ACCUMULATED DEP(100K/YEAR) 491,667

    OFFICE FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT 75,000

    ACCUMULATED DEP(5K/YEAR) 14,583

    PATENTS 25,000

    ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 125,000

    NOTES PAYABLE 25,000

    COMMON STOCK 600,000

    RETAINED EARNINGS 813,750

    TOTALS $2,075,000 $2,075,000

    TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE:

    1) PURCHASED RAW MATERIALS (CEMENT, DYES, STONES) TOTALING $350,000.

    2) REQUISITIONED INTO PRODUCTION IN MONTH OF JUNE: $350,000.

    3) 2 JOBS FINISHED IN JUNE:

    A) PRODUCTION OF 400 PEGASUS STATUES (PRICE: $750/EACH) COSTS:

    1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $125,000 IN RAW MATERIALS.

    2) DIRECT LABOR COSTS: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED ON THIS JOB: 1900. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20

    3. OVERHEAD: THE COMPANY USES A PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE BASED ON DIRECT LABOR HOURS CALCULATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE FISCAL YEAR. THE TOTAL OVERHEAD ESTIMATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE YEAR WAS $2,000,000. THE COMPANY ESTIMATED IT WOULD USE 50,000 HOURS OF DIRECT LABOR FOR YEAR.

    YOU WILL NEED TO A) PREPARE THE JOURNAL ENTRIES TO RECORD THE TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH INCLUDING THE FLOW OF INVENTORY AND APPLIED OVERHEAD.

    amount to appear as inventory on balance sheet 460985

    From Financial & Managerial Accounting, 13th ed; Exercise 8.5:

    Jensen Tire had 2 large shipments in transit at Dec. 31. One was a $125,000 inbound shipment of merchandise (shipped Dec. 28, F.O.B. shipping point). which arrived at Jensen’s receiving dock Jan. 2. The other shiopment was a $95,000 outbound shipment of merchandise to a customer, which was shipped and billed by Jensen Dec. 30 (terms F.O.B. shipping point) and reached the customer Jan. 8.

    In taking a physical inventory on Dec. 31, Jensen counted all goods on hand and priced the inventory on the basis of average cost. The total amount was $600,000. No goods in transit were included in this figure.

    What amount should appear as inventory on the company’s balance sheet at Dec. 31? Explain. If you indicate an amount other than $600,000, state which asset or liability other than inventory also would be changed in amount.

    Would greatly appreciate some help. TX!!

    income statement and write down of impaired assets 460986

    From Financial & Managerial Accounting, 13th ed; Exercise 9.9:

    For several years, a number of Food Lion, Inc., grocery stores were unprofitable. The company closed, and continues to close some of these locations. It is apparent that the company will not be able to recover the cost of the assets associated with the closed stores. Thus, the current value of these impaired assets must be written down (see Case in Point on page 381).

    A recent Food Lion income statement reports a $9.5 million charge against income pertaining to the write-down of impaired assets.

    a. Explain why Food Lion must write down the current carrying value of its unprofitable stores.

    b. Explain why the recent $9.5 million charge to write down these impaired assets is considered a noncash expense.

    Any help is greatly appreciated. TX!!

    current ratio working capital debt ratio 460989

    Financial Ratios

    12/31/11 12/31/10

    Current Assets 1,200,000 900,000

    Total Assets 4,000,000 3,000,000

    Current Liabilities 320,000 400,000

    Bonds Payable (long term) 1,500,000 1,200,000

    Total Liabilities

    Capital Stock $10 Par value 1,000,000 1,000,000

    Retained Earnings 1,180,000 400,000

    * These bonds are the only long term liabilites.

    Dividends of $50,000 were declared and paid in 2011. Compute the following:

    Current Ratio at the end of 2010 ? to 1

    Current Ratio at the end of 2011 ? to 1

    Working Capital at the end of 2010 $

    Working Capital at the end of 2011 $

    Debt ratio at the end of 2010 %

    Debt ratio at the end of 2011 %

    Earnings per share for 2011** $

    change in principle change in depreciation methods 460990

    For financial reporting, Clinton Poultry Farms has used the declining-balance method of depreciation for conveyor equipment acquired at the beginning of 2008 for $2,560,000. Its useful life was estimated to be six years, with a $160,000 residual value. At the beginning of 2011, Clinton decides to change to the straight-line method. The effect of this change on depreciation for each year is as follows:

    ($ in 000s)

    Year Straight Line Declining Balance Difference

    2008 $ 400 $ 853 $ 453

    2009 400 569 169

    2010 400 379 (21 )

    $ 1,200 $ 1,801 $ 601

    Required:

    (2)

    Prepare any 2011 journal entry related to the change. (Enter your answers in dollars not in thousands. Use the declining balance provided in the question. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    General Journal Debit Credit

    standard costs 460996

    Flandro Company uses a standard cost system and sets predetermined overhead rates on the basis of direct labor-hours. The following data are taken from the company’s budget for the current year:

    Denominator activity (direct labor-hours) 12,900

    Variable manufacturing overhead cost $56,760

    Fixed manufacturing overhead cost $141,900

    The standard cost card for the company’s only product is given below:

    Direct materials, 3 yards at $2.60 per yard $7.80

    Direct labor, 2 hour at $10 per hour 20.00

    Manufacturing overhead, 154.00% of direct labor cost 30.80

    Standard cost per unit

    $58.60

    During the year, the company produced 5,000 units of product and incurred the following costs:

    Materials purchased, 32,000 yards at $2.50 per yard $80,000

    Materials used in production (in yards) 26,000

    Direct labor cost incurred, 12,000 hours at $8.1 per hour $97,200

    Variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred $34,300

    Fixed manufacturing overhead cost incurred $33,700

    Requirement 1:

    Redo the standard cost card in a clearer, more usable format by detailing the variable and fixed overhead cost elements. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct materials $

    Direct labor

    Variable manufacturing overhead

    Fixed manufacturing overhead cost

    Standard cost per unit

    debt investment transcation help 460997

    Fleet Inc. is an athletic footware company that began operations on jan 1, 2012. the following transactions relate to debt investments acquired by Fleet Inc. which has fiscal year ending on december 31:

    2012

    Mar 1. Purchased $36,0000of madison Co. 5% 10-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $15. the bonds pay interest semiannually on february 1st and august 1

    apr 16 purchased $45,0000 of Westville 4%, 15-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest semianually on april 1st and october 1st.

    aug 1. received semiannuall interest on the madison co. bonds

    sep 1 sold $12,0000 of madison co bonds at 98 plus accrued interest of $50

    oct 1 received semiannual interest on westville bonds

    dec 31 accrued $500 interest on Madison Co. bonds

    dec 31 accrued $450 interest on westville bonds

    2013

    feb 1 received semiannual interest on the madison co bonds

    apr 1 received semiannual interest on the Westville bonds

    Instructions

    1. Journalize the entries to record the transactions

    2. if the bond portfolio was classified as available-for-sale, what impact would that have on financial statement disclosure

    debt investment transactions available for sale valuation 460998

    Fleet Inc. is an athletic footware company that began operations on January 1, 2012. The following transactions relate to debt investments acquired by fleet Inc which has a fiscal year ending december 31.

    2012
    Mar. 1 Purchased $36,000 of Madison Co. 5% 10-year bonds at face value plus plus accrued interest of $150. The binds pay interest semiannually on Feb 1 and Aug 1

    Apr 16 Purchased $45,000 of Westville 4%, 15- year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $75. The bonds pay interest semiannnualy on Apr 1 & Oct 1

    Aug 1 Received semiannual interest on the Madison Co. bonds

    Sept 1 Sold $12,000 of Madison Co, bonds at 98 plus accrued interest of $50.

    Oct 1 Received semiannual interest on Westville Bonds.

    Dec 31. accrued $500 interest on Madison Co. bonds

    31. accrued $450 interest on Westville bonds

    2013
    Feb 1 Received semiannual interest on the Madison Co bonds

    Apr 1 Received semiannual interest on the Westville bonds

    Instructions
    1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions
    2. if the bond portfolio was classified as available for sale, what impact would this have on financial statement disclosure?

    inventory accounting question 460999

    The following activities took place in the work in process inventory account during April:

    Beginning balance $ 15,000

    Direct materials used 120,000

    Total manufacturing labor incurred in April was $162,500, 80% of this amount represented direct labor. The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is 120% of direct labor cost. Actual manufacturing overhead costs for April amounted to $150,000. Two jobs were completed with total costs of $120,000 and $85,000, respectively. They were sold on account for $265,000 and $155,000, respectively.

    a) Compute the balance in work in process inventory on April 30.

    b) Record the journal entry for direct materials used in April.

    c) Record the journal entry for total manufacturing labor incurred in April.

    d) Record the journal entry to allocate manufacturing labor to the appropriate accounts.

    e) Record the journal entry for allocated manufacturing overhead for April.

    f) Record the entry to move the completed jobs into finished goods inventory.

    g) Record the entry to sell the two completed jobs on account.

    help with job order costing 461000

    The following activities took place in the work in process inventory account during April:

    Beginning balance $ 15,000
    Direct materials used 120,000

    Total manufacturing labor incurred in April was $162,500, 80% of this amount represented direct labor. The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is 120% of direct labor cost. Actual manufacturing overhead costs for April amounted to $150,000. Two jobs were completed with total costs of $120,000 and $85,000, respectively. They were sold on account for $265,000 and $155,000, respectively.

    a) Compute the balance in work in process inventory on April 30.
    b) Record the journal entry for direct materials used in April.
    c) Record the journal entry for total manufacturing labor incurred in April.
    d) Record the journal entry to allocate manufacturing labor to the appropriate accounts.
    e) Record the journal entry for allocated manufacturing overhead for April.
    f) Record the entry to move the completed jobs into finished goods inventory.
    g) Record the entry to sell the two completed jobs on account.

    on account at 12 31 461001

    Should the following be in Brown’s inventory account at 12/31/10?

    $80,000 of goods purchased by Brown. Terms were FOB Shipping point and they left the vendor’s warehouse on 1/1/11

    $30,000 of goods held on consignment for Lucky’s.

    $25,000 of fire damaged merchandise.

    at discounted amount, would be in probably at LCM

    $45,000 of products shipped to customer of Brown on 12/20/10 FOB Destination. Goods arrived on 1/3/11

    $10,000 of product held by Discount Hardware on consignment from Brown

    net present value method 461004

    The following data are accumulated by Reynolds Company in evaluating the purchase of $104,000 of equipment, having a four-year useful life:

    Net Income

    Year 1 $38,000
    Year 2 23,000

    Year 3 11,000

    Year 4 (1,000)

    Net Cash Flow

    Year 1 = 64,000

    Year 2 = 49,000

    Year 3 = 37,000

    Year 4 = 25,000

    A.) Assuming that the desired rate of return is 15%, determine the net present value for the proposal. Use the table of the present value of $1
    B.) Would management be likely to look with favor on the proposal? Explain.

    Present Value of $1 at Compound Interest
    Year 1 @ 15% = 0.870
    Year 2 @ 15% = 0.756
    Year 3 @ 15% = 0.712
    Year 4 @ 15% = 0.636

    compute the following amounts for the month of may 461011

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30 May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials $ 37,000 $ 50,000

    Goods in process 9,500 18,600

    Finished goods 56,000 33,500

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 181,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash) 500,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials 18,000

    Indirect labor 82,000

    Other overhead costs 94,000

    Sales (received in cash) 1,600,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 55 %

    Compute the following amounts for the month of May. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    1. Cost of direct materials used. $

    2. Cost of direct labor used. $

    3. Cost of goods manufactured. $

    4. Cost of goods sold.* $

    5. Gross profit. $

    6. ?????????? $

    *Do not consider any underapplied or overapplied overhead.

    post the journal entries 461012

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30 May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials $ 36,000 $ 49,000

    Goods in process 11,500 22,000

    Finished goods 66,000 30,800

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 190,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash) 395,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials 11,000

    Indirect labor 73,000

    Other overhead costs 105,000

    Sales (received in cash) 1,240,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 65 %

    1. Raw materials purchases for cash.

    2. Direct materials usage.

    3. Indirect materials usage.

    Prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of May. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Events General Journal Debit Credit

    1.

    2.

    3.

    prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of may omit the sign in 461013

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30 May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials $ 36,000 $ 49,000

    Goods in process 10,100 18,500

    Finished goods 64,000 36,400

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 191,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash) 415,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials 14,000

    Indirect labor 80,000

    Other overhead costs 96,000

    Sales (received in cash) 1,220,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 65 %

    1. Factory payroll costs in cash.

    2. Direct labor usage.

    3. Indirect labor usage.

    Prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of May. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Events General Journal Debit Credit

    1.

    2.

    3.

    prepare the journal entry to allocate close overapplied or underapplied overhead to 461015

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30 May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials $ 39,000 $ 53,000

    Goods in process 11,500 17,500

    Finished goods 60,000 31,000

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 189,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash) 410,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials 13,000

    Indirect labor 79,000

    Other overhead costs 95,000

    Sales (received in cash) 1,280,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 65 %

    Prepare the journal entry to allocate (close) overapplied or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    General Journal Debit Credit

    help cost accounting 461016

    The following information is available for Moore Company:
    Mixing Department
    Work in process, June 1 (100% complete for direct materials, 60% complete for conversion costs) 1,500 units
    Units completed in June 9,850 units
    Work in process, June 30 (80% complete for direct materials, 30% complete for conversion costs) 1,050 units
    2) The following information is available for Valentine Company:

    Dyeing Department
    Work in process, June 1 (100% complete for direct materials, 50% complete for conversion costs) 1.200 Units

    Units completed in June 9,500 units
    Work in process, June 30 (60% complete for direct materials, 40% complete for conversion costs) 950 units

    Compute:
    1. The number of units started in each department during June.
    2. equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs for each Department
    Use weighted Average Method

    question help 460921

    Department A Department B Department C Total

    Sales $300,000 $280,000 $120,000 $700,000

    Variable Expenses

    160,000 175,000 105,000 440,000

    Contribution Margin

    140,000 105,000 15,000 260,000

    Fixed Expenses

    65,000 35,000 40,000 140,000

    Net Income

    $75,000 $70,000 $(25,000) $120,000

    Ellen Electric has an offer from a potential supplier to provide 40,000 units at $65 each that Ellen Electric now manufactures at a total cost of $75 per unit. The manufacturing costs for 40,000 units are: direct materials $900,000; direct labor $450,000; variable overhead $900,000; and fixed overhead $750,000. All costs except $500,000 in fixed overhead will be avoided if the parts are purchased.

    (B) Would your answer change if Ellen Electric could use the capacity that would become available to produce additional income of $125,000? Explain

    process costing 460922

    Department G had 3,300 units, one-third completed at the beginning of the period, 13,843 units were completed during the period, 1,772 units were one-fifth completed at the end of the period, and the following manufacturing costs were debited to the departmental work in process account during the period:

    Work in process, beginning of period $28,550

    Costs added during period:

    Direct materials $110,223

    Direct labor $73,482

    Factory overhead $24,494

    a) Assuming that all direct materials are placed in process at the beginning of production and that the first-in, first-out method of inventory costing is used, what is the total cost of the departmental work in process inventory at the end of the period?

    b) Assuming the same as above, what is the total cost of 3,600 units of beginning inventory which were completed during the period?

    c) Assuming the same FIFO method, what is the total cost of the units “started and completed” during the period?

    documenting business processes 460941

    draw a document flowchart to depict each of the following situations

    (a) an individual from the marketing department of wholesale company prepares five copies of a sale invoice, and each copy is sent to a different department

    (b) the individual invoices from credit sales must temporarily be stored until they can be matched against

    customer payments at later date

    (c) A batch control tape is prepared along with a set of transactions to ensure completeness

    of data

    (d) the source document data found on employee application forms are used as input to create new employee records on a computer master file

    (e) Delinquent credit customer are sent as many as four different inquiry letters before their accounts are turned over to a collection agency

    (f) physical goods are shipped back to the supplier if they are found to be damaged upon arrival at the receiving warehouse

    (g) the data found on employee time cards are keyed onto a hard disk before they are processed by a computer

    (h) the data found on employee time cards are first keyed onto a floppy diskette before they are entered into a computer job stream for processing

    (i) A document flowchart is becoming difficult to understand because too many lines cross one another(describe a solution)

    (j)three people all in different department look at the same document before it is eventually filed in fourth department

    (k) Certain data from a source document are copied into a ledger before the document itself is filed in another department

    can t figure out problem 460944

    Dual effects on balance sheet equation and journal entries.

    Assume that during 2008, a U.S. retailer, engages in the following six transactions.

    Bullseye Corporation applies U.S. GAAP, and reports its results in millions of U.S. dollars.

    1.The firm issues 20 million shares of $0.0833 per value common stock for a total of $960 million cash.

    2. It purchases merchandise costing $1500 million on account.

    3. The firm acquires a new store location, consisting of a building costing $3200 million and land costing $930 million. It pays cash to the owner of the property.

    4. The firm purchases fixtures for the new store costing $860 million on account.

    5. The firm pays the merchandise supplier in transaction (2) the amount due.

    6. The firm pays the supplier of the fixtures in transaction (4) half of the amount due in cash. The firm pays the other half by issuing 8.6 million common shares to the supplier. At the time of this transaction, Bullseye Corporation shares traded at $50 per share in the market.

    a. Indicate the effects of these six transactions on the balance sheet equation using this format:

    Transaction Number Assets = Liabilities + Shareholders Equity

    (1) +$960 $0 +$960

    Subtotal $960 = $0 + $960

    b. Give the journal entries for each of the six transactions.

    accounting help lue dunay corporation is considering investing 905 000 in a project 460946

    Dunay Corporation is considering investing $905,000 in a project. The life of the project would be 9 years. The project would require additional working capital of $38,000, which would be released for use elsewhere at the end of the project. The annual net cash inflows would be $186,000. The salvage value of the assets used in the project would be $48,000. The company uses a discount rate of 17%. (Ignore income taxes.)

    Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 and Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.

    Required:

    Compute the net present value of the project. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Net present value $

    managerial accounting 460948

    Dutton Company prepared the tabulation below at December 31, 2008.

    Net Income $275,000

    Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

    Depreciation expense, $25,000

    Decrease in accounts receivable, $55,000

    Increase in inventory, $12,000

    Decrease in accounts payable, $6,600

    Increase in income taxes payable, $1,500

    Loss on sale of land, $5,000

    Net cash provided (used) by operating activities

    Instructions:

    Show how each item should be reported in the statement of cash flows. Use parentheses for deductions

    Net income

    Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

    depreciation expense

    decrease in accounts receivable

    increase in inventory

    decrease in accounts payable

    increase in income tax payable

    loss in sale of land

    net cash provided(used) by operating activities

    ?

    summary journal for stine company job order cost system 460949

    E 2-2

    Stine Company uses a job order cost system. On May 1, the company has a balance in Work in Process Inventory of $3,500 and two jobs in process: Job No 429 $2,000, and Job No 430 $1,500. During May, a summary of source documents reveals the following:

    MATERIALS LABOR

    JOB NUMBER REQUISITION SLIPS TIME TICKETS

    429 $2,500 $1,900

    430 3,500 3,000

    431 4,400 $10,400 7,600 $12,500

    GENERAL USE 800 1,200

    ___________ _____________

    $11,200 $13,700

    Stine Company applies manufacturing overhead jobs at an overhead rate of 60% of direct labor cost. Job No. 429 is completed during the month.

    (a) Prepare summary journal entries to record (i) requisition slips, (ii) the time tickets, (iii) the assignment of manufacturing overhead to jobs, and (iv) the completion of Job No. 429.

    (b) Post entries to Work in Process Inventory, and prove the agreement of the control account with the job cost sheets (Use a T account)

    pls help 460950

    E4-10 Wilmington, Inc. manufactures A?¬ ve models of kitchen appliances at its Mesa plant.
    The company is installing activity-based costing and has identiA?¬ ed the following activities
    performed at its Mesa plant.
    1. Designing new models.
    2. Purchasing raw materials and parts.
    3. Storing and managing inventory.
    4. Receiving and inspecting raw materials and parts.
    5. Interviewing and hiring new personnel.
    6. Machine forming sheet steel into appliance parts.
    7. Manually assembling parts into appliances.
    8. Training all employees of the company.
    9. Insuring all tangible A?¬ xed assets.
    10. Supervising production.
    11. Maintaining and repairing machinery and equipment.
    12. Painting and packaging A?¬ nished appliances.
    Having analyzed its Mesa plant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Wilmington, Inc. identiA?¬ ed its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant
    activity cost drivers in order to assign overhead costs to its products.
    Instructions
    Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that
    might be used to assign overhead to Wilmington’s A?¬ ve products.

    Weygandt, Jerry J. (2011-12-01). Managerial Accounting: Tools for Business Decision Making, 6th Edition (Page 179). Wiley. Kindle Edition.

    evaluate the pros and cons of the present university accounting for tuition benefits 460951

    Eastern University prides itself on providing faculty and staff a competitive compensation package. One aspect of this package is a faculty and staff child tuition benefit of $4,000 per child per year for up to four years to offset the cost of a college education. The faculty or staff member’s child can attend any college or university, including Eastern University, and receive the tuition benefit. If a staff member has three children in college one year, the staff member receives a $12,000 tuition benefit. This money is not taxed to the individual staff or faculty member.
    Eastern University pays the benefit directly to the university where the staff/faculty member’s child is enrolled or if the student is attending Eastern, it reduces the amount of tuition owed by the faculty/staff member. The university then charges this payment to a benefits account. This benefits account is then allocated back to the various colleges and departments based on total salaries in the college or department

    retail inventory method lcm ave lifo sp11 eaton co uses the retail inventory method 460952

    Eaton Co. uses the retail inventory method to estimate its inventory for interim statement purposes. Data relating to the computation of the inventory at July 31, 2007, are as follows: The Inventory balance at cost on Jan/31/2007 is $200,000 and is determined to be $300,000 at retail prices. Purchases made during the year cost $1,200,000 and are determined to be $1,600,000 at retail prices. In addition, Sales for the period are $1,600,000, estimated normal shoplifting losses are $20,000, markdowns are $140,000, markdown cancelations are $30,000, markups are $130,000. Abnormal spoilage is $40,000 cost and $65,000 retail. Freight costs are $17,000. Purchase discounts are $15,000 and employee discounts are $15,000.

    a) Under the lower-of-cost-or-market (conventional) method, calculate Eaton’s estimated inventory at July 31, 2007.

    b) Under the average cost method, calculate Eaton’s estimated inventory at July 31, 2007.

    c) Under the LIFO method, calculate Eaton’s estimated inventory at July 31, 2007.

    ethical issues 460953

    An ECG partner has not been diligent in fulfilling contractual obligations for a business strategy engagement, which requires timely response because the final presentation to the client will occur in a matter of weeks. The partner did not encourage the consulting team to conduct some very critical market research and analysis of a new business opportunity for a long-standing client. Instead, data was used from a similar study done 3 years ago while the partner was employed by another consulting firm. This data, which overstates the current market opportunity, was shared with the client during an interim presentation along with a recommendation to consider a strategic move into the business market. The presentation could influence the client’s decision to invest significant resources into a new venture that is not as appealing strategically or financially now as it was in the past. If the issue becomes more widely known, business factors, inherent risks with certain responses to this situation, the possible loss of a key client, questions about firm’s credibility, and the potential negative affect to the firm’s upcoming IPO must also be considered.

    Define critical steps in the decision-making process

    variation of problem e10 11 460955

    Edington Plumbing Company is a newly formed company specializing in plumbing services for home and business. The owner, Steve Edington, had divided the company into two segments: Home Plumbing Services and Business Plumbing Services. Each segment is run by its own supervisor, while basic selling and administrative services are shared by both segments.

    Steve has asked you to help him create a performance reporting system that will allow him to measure each segment’s performance in terms of its profitability. To that end, the following information has been collected on the Home Plumbing Services segment for the first quarter of 2011.

    Budgeted Actual

    Service revenue $30,000 $31,200

    Allocated portion of:

    Building depreciation 13,200 13,200

    Advertising 6,000 5,040

    Billing 4,200 3,600

    Property taxes 1,440 1,200

    Material and supplies 1,800 1,440

    Supervisory salaries 10,800 11,280

    Insurance 4,800 4,200

    Wages 3,600 3,960

    Gas and oil 3,240 4,080

    Equipment depreciation 1,920 1,560

    Prepare a responsibility report for the first quarter of 2011 for the Home Plumbing Services segment. (List budget amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If answer is 0, please enter 0 for the amount and NA for the variance. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)

    dividends and stockholders equity section 460956

    Elizabeth Company reported the following amounts in the stockholders’ equity section of its December 31, 2010, balance sheet.

    Preferred stock, 10%, $100 par (10,000 shares authorized, 2,000 shares issued) $200,000

    Common stock, $5 par (100,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued) 100,000

    Additional paid-in capital 125,000

    Retained earnings 490,000

    Total $915,000

    During 2011, Elizabeth took part in the following transactions concerning stockholders’ equity.

    1. Paid the annual 2010 $10 per share dividend on preferred stock and a $8 per share dividend on common stock. These dividends had been declared on December 31, 2010.

    2. Purchased 1,700 shares of its own outstanding common stock for $41 per share. Elizabeth uses the cost method.

    3. Reissued 700 treasury shares for land valued at $30,700.

    4. Issued 500 shares of preferred stock at $107 per share.

    5. a 10% stock dividend on the outstanding common stock when the stock is selling for $50 per share.

    6. Issued the stock dividend.

    7. Declared the annual 2011 $10 per share dividend on preferred stock and the $8 per share dividend on common stock. These dividends are payable in 2012.

    (a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions described above.

    (b) Prepare the December 31, 2011, stockholders’ equity section. Assume 2011 net income was $330,000

    managerial accounting 460957

    Empire Corporation needs to set a target price for its newly designed product R2’D2.

    The following data relate to this new product.

    Per Unit Total

    Direct materials $8

    Direct labor $15

    Variable manufacturing overhead $7

    Fixed manufacturing overhead $2,000,000

    Variable selling and administrative expenses $6

    Fixed selling and administrative expenses $1,000,000

    These costs are based on a budgeted volume of 100,000 units produced and sold each year. Empire

    uses cost-plus pricing methods to set its target selling price. The markup on total unit cost

    is 35%.

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the total variable cost per unit, total fixed cost per unit, and total cost per unit for

    R2’D2.

    (b) Compute the desired ROI per unit for R2’D2.

    (c)Compute the target selling price for R2’D2.

    (d)Compute variable cost per unit, fixed cost per unit, and total cost per unit assuming that

    80,000 R2’D2s are sold during the year.

    answer 460960

    enus Chocolate Company processes chocolate into candy bars. The process begins by placing direct materials (raw chocolate, milk, and sugar) into the Blending Department. All materials are placed into production at the beginning of the blending process. After blending, the milk chocolate is then transferred to the Molding Department, where the milk chocolate is formed into candy bars. The following is a partial work in process account of the Blending Department at March 31, 2012:

    ACCOUNT Work in Process”Blending Department ACCOUNT NO.

    Date Item Debit Credit Balance

    Debit Credit

    Mar. 1 Bal., 5,500 units, 4/5 completed 21,010

    31 Direct materials, 220,000 units 704,000 725,010

    31 Direct labor 139,800 864,810

    31 Factory overhead 34,920 899,730

    31 Goods transferred, 221,000 units ?

    31 Bal., ? units, 2/5 completed ?

    Instructions:

    Hide

    Hint(s)

    1. Prepare a cost of production report, and identify the missing amounts for Work in Process”Blending Department. If an amount is zero, enter in a zero (0). When computing cost per equivalent units, round to two decimal places.

    Venus Chocolate Company

    Cost of Production Report-Blending Department

    For the Month Ended March 31, 2012

    Unit Information

    Units charged to production:

    Inventory in process, March 1

    Received from materials storeroom

    Total units accounted for by the Blending Department

    Units to be assigned cost:

    Equivalent Units

    Whole Units

    Direct Materials

    Conversion

    Inventory in process, March 1

    Started and completed in March

    Transferred to Blending Department in March

    Inventory in process, March 31

    Total units to be assigned cost

    Cost Information

    Costs per equivalent unit:

    Direct Materials

    Conversion

    Total costs for March in Blending Department

    $

    $

    Total equivalent units

    Cost per equivalent unit

    $

    $

    Costs charged to production:

    Direct Materials

    Conversion

    Total

    Inventory in process, March 1

    $

    Costs incurred in March

    Total costs accounted for by the Blending Department

    $

    Cost allocated to completed and partially completed units:

    Inventory in process, March 1 balance

    $

    To complete inventory in process, March 1

    $

    $

    Cost of completed March 1 work in process

    $

    Started and completed in March

    Transferred to Molding Department in March

    $

    Inventory in process, March 31

    Total costs assigned by the Blending Department

    $

    excele homework problem 3 460965

    Excel Homework Problem #3

    Navigation Inc. produces gyroscopes for electronic navigation systems used in aircraft. Company income statements for the last three years using absorption costing are:

    Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
    Sales 2,250,000 2,025,000 3,375,000
    COGS:
    Beginning inventory 246,600 371,382 802,620
    COGM 1,459,000 1,592,500 1,370,000
    Goods ava. For sale 1,705,600 1,963,882 2,172,620
    Ending Inventory 371,382 802,620 178,100
    COGS 1,334,218 1,161,262 1,994,520
    Gross Margin 915,782 863,738 1,380,480
    Selling and Admin Exp 510,000 484,000 640,000
    NOI 405,782 379,738 740,480

    The beginning inventory in Year 1 was 1,800 units valued at $137 per unit, which included $48 per unit of allocated fixed manufacturing overhead. After selling 10,000 units in Year 1, the company anticipated increased sales of 13,000 units in Year 2 and scheduled production accordingly. Unfortunately, a slump in aircraft sales in Year 2 due to a nation-wide recession resulted in sales of only 9,000 units and a higher than desired ending inventory. By the end of Year 2, the economy was much improved and aircraft sales were rebounding sharply. Navigation planned for improved sales of at least 14,500 units in Year 3. Production was scheduled to meet the anticipated demand while lowering inventory levels. Actual production and sales figures for the three years were as shown:

    Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
    Production in units 11,000 12,500 10,000
    Sales in units 10,000 9,000 15,000

    Additional information:

    a. Variable manufacturing costs per unit were $49.00 for direct materials, $25.00 for direct labor, and $15.00 for variable manufacturing overhead in each of the three years. Fixed manufacturing overhead was $480,000 in each year.

    b. The company uses First in first out (FIFO) inventory flow assumption to value inventory.

    c. The company applies fixed manufacturing overhead per unit to each year’s product based on each year’s production (i.e. the fixed manufacturing overhead per unit is different each year).

    d. Variable selling and administrative costs each year were $26.00 per unit. Fixed selling and administrative costs were $250,000 in each of the three years.

    Required:

    1. Compute the absorption costing unit product cost for each year. (Show each variable cost per unit, fixed cost per unit, and total cost per unit.)

    2. Compute the variable costing unit product cost for each year.

    3. Prepare variable costing income statements in contribution format for each of the three years.

    4. Show a reconciliation to explain the difference between variable costing net operating income and absorption costing net operating income each year.

    Additional instructions:

    1. Submit the problem on electronic media (CD, flash drive, etc.) in the manila envelope provided. The project will be graded on the accuracy of the answers, the appearance of the schedules and statements, and the use of the functionality of Excel.

    2. Use good form for the income statement. Include the calculation of COGS using beginning and ending finished goods inventory.

    acct 2 problem 22 460966

    Exercise 14-9 (Algorithmic)

    Entries for Issuing and Calling Bonds; Gain

    Vidovich Corp. produces and sells renewable energy equipment. To finance its operations, Vidovich Corp. issued $425,000 of 25-year, 8% callable bonds on January 1, 2012, with interest payable on January 1 and July 1. The fiscal year of the company is the calendar year.

    Journalize the entries to record the following selected transactions:

    2012

    Jan. 1 Issued the bonds for cash at their face amount.

    July. 1 Paid the interest on the bonds.

    2018

    July. 1 Called the bond issue at 97, the rate provided in the bond indenture. (Omit entry for payment of interest.)

    Issued the bonds for cash at their face amount.

    Paid the interest on the bonds.

    Called the bond issue at 97, the rate provided in the bond indenture. (Omit entry for payment of interest.) For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.

    intermediate accounting 460968

    ‘ Explain the revenue recognition issue presented. Provide codification references.

    ‘ Compute the revenue to be recognized in the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.

    Situation 1: Paperback book division

    The paperback book division sells large quantities of novels to a few book distributors that in turn sell to several national chains of bookstores. The division allows distributors to return up to 30% of sales, and distributors give the same terms to bookstores. While returns from individual titles fluctuate greatly, the returns from distributors have averaged 20% in each of the past 5 years. A total of $7,000,000 of paperback novel sales were made to distributors during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. On November 30, 2012, $2,200,000 of fiscal 2012 sales were still subject to return privileges over the next six months. The remaining $4,800,000 of fiscal 2012 sales had actual returns of 21%. Sales from fiscal 2011 totaling $2,500,000 were collected in fiscal 2012, with less than 18% of sales returned. All of the criteria for revenue recognition when the right of return exists are applicable to the paperback book division.

    Situation 2:The alarm systems division works through manufacturers’ agents in various cities. Orders for alarm systems and down payments are forwarded from agents and the division ships the goods f.o.b. shipping point. Customers are billed for the balance due plus actual shipping costs. The firm received orders for $6,000,000 of goods during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. Down payments of $600,000 were received, and $5,000,000 of goods were billed and shipped. Actual freight costs of $100,000 were also billed. Commissions of 10% on product price were paid to manufacturers’ agents after the goods were shipped to customers. Such goods are warranted for 90 days after shipment, and warranty returns have been about 1% of sales. Revenue is recognized at the point of sale by the alarm division.

    f. Assume that you are the corporate controller for Jamestown Corporation. Write a business memo, in good form to President Jeffrey Simmons explaining the accounting issues involved in the two situations. Your memo should not exceed one typewritten page.

    new products decision making 460975

    Fastenalt is an industrial supply manufacturer that provides HVAC Specialty Thermostats to manufacturers and retailers. Fastenalt has experienced substantial growth in the past three years and is known for its high quality thermostats and reliable on-time delivery. These characteristics have resulted in high customer satisfaction. Fastenalt focuses on the strategic objectives of quality, reliability and growth. Fastenalt’s operating capacity is 4,000 thermostats per month and is currently selling 3,500 thermostats each month. Fastenalt has received a request for a special order of 800 specialty thermostats for $150,000 from Hank’s Retailer. Hank’s is the largest hardware retailer in the metropolitan area and surrounding region. Hank’s is not a current customer of Fastenalt’s. Production costs for the thermostats would be the same however Fastenalt would incur additional set-up costs of $20,000 to complete Hank’s order. No marketing costs would be associated with the special order. If Fastenalt accepts the special offer, Hank’s requires that Fastenalt fill the entire order of 800 units.

    The following information is for Fastenalt’s current operations:
    Sales & production data for 4,000 Specialty Thermostats
    Amounts per unit (Thermostat)
    Sales price $250.00
    Direct materials 64.00
    Direct labor 50.00
    Variable overhead 35.00
    Fixed overhead 25.00
    Variable marketing 15.00
    Fixed marketing 12.00

    Required: Complete each of the following questions. CLEARLY SHOW CALCULATIONS TO SUPPORT EACH ANSWER. – NO SUPPORTING CALULATIONS = NO CREDIT.

    1. Does Fastenalt have the capacity to accept the special order from Hank?

    2. If Fastenalt accepts Hank’s special order, what is Fastenal’s cost from lost sales of current customers?

    3. Using a relevant cost analysis should Fastenalt accept Hank’s special order?

    4. If Fastenalt does not have excess capacity to accept Hank’s offer, what is the minimum price Fastenalt should accept from Hank’s for the special order?

    5. If Fastenalt has excess capacity, what is the minimum price Fastenalt should accept from Hank’s for the special order?

    6. Refer back to Fastenalt’s original capacity of 4,000 units. Discuss the strategic implications of accepting Hank’s offer.

    7. Discuss the strategic implications of rejecting Hank’s offer.

    interest capitalization on february 1 2007 the caper manufacturing co began construc 460976

    On February 1, 2007 the Caper Manufacturing Co. began construction of a building to be used as corporate offices. The building was completed on September 30,2008.

    Expenditures on the project were as follows:

    March 1, 2007 $ 200,000

    April 30, 2007 600,000

    August 31, 2007 1,000,000

    November 30, 2007 1,300,000

    June 1, 2008 500,000

    July 31, 2008 100,000

    September 1, 2008 600,000

    On January 1, 2007, the company obtained a $1 million, 5 year construction loan with a 10 % interest rate. The company’s other interest-bearing debt included two long-term debt notes of $1,000,000 and $500,000 with interest rates of 6% and 8% respectively. Both notes were outstanding during all of 2007 and 2008. The company’s fiscal year-end is December 31.

    a) Prepare the journal entry recording the amount of interest that Carter should capitalize in 2007 using the specific interest method.

    b) Prepare the journal entry recording the amount of interest that Carter should capitalize in 2008 using the specific interest method.

    c) What is the cost of the building at December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2008?

    d) Calculate the amount of interest expense that will appear in the 2007 and 2008 income statements.

    cost accounting transfer pricing 460875

    A Corporation has 2 divisions: Division 1 and Division 2. Division 1 makes product A, product B and product C. Those products are sold to both to outside customers and to Division 2. Division 2 uses products A,B, and C in manufacturing products D, E and F respectively. Recently products a A,B, and C have been in short supply. As a result, Division 2 has been operating below capacity because of the lack of these products. Finally, Division 1 was told to sell all its products to Division 2. Here the facts about this products:

    Division 1:

    product A Product B Product C

    transfer price $10 $10 $15

    variable manufacturing cost $3 $6 $5

    contribution per unit $7 $4 $10

    fixed cost (total) $50,000 $100,000 $75,000

    Division 1 has a capacity of 50,000 units per month. The processing constraints are such that capacity production can be obtained only by producing at least 10,000 units of each products. The remaining capacity can be used to produce 20,000 units of any combination of the three products. The Division 1 cannot exceed the capacity of 50,000 units.

    Division 2 has sufficient capacity to produce about 40% more than it is now producing because the availability of products A,B, and C is limiting production. Also, Division 2 can sell all the products that it can produce at the prices indicated above.

    Division 2

    product D Product E Product F

    selling price $28 $30 $30

    variable cost:

    inside purchases 10 10 15

    other variable costs 5 5 8

    total variable cost 15 15 23

    contribution per unit 13 15 7

    fixed cost (total) $100,000 $100,000 $200,000

    Question:

    What production pattern optimizes total company profits?

    solution needed 460876

    A Corporation has 2 divisions: Division 1 and Division 2. Division 1 makes product A, product B and product C. Those products are sold to both to outside customers and to Division 2. Division 2 uses products A,B, and C in manufacturing products D, E and F respectively. Recently products a A,B, and C have been in short supply. As a result, Division 2 has been operating below capacity because of the lack of these products. Finally, Division 1 was told to sell all its products to Division 2. Here the facts about this products:

    Division 1:

    product A Product B Product C

    transfer price $10 $10 $15

    variable manufacturing cost $3 $6 $5

    contribution per unit $7 $4 $10

    fixed cost (total) $50,000 $100,000 $75,000

    Division 1 has a capacity of 50,000 units per month. The processing constraints are such that capacity production can be obtained only by producing at least 10,000 units of each products. The remaining capacity can be used to produce 20,000 units of any combination of the three products. The Division 1 cannot exceed the capacity of 50,000 units.

    Division 2 has sufficient capacity to produce about 40% more than it is now producing because the availability of products A,B, and C is limiting production. Also, Division 2 can sell all the products that it can produce at the prices indicated above.

    Division 2

    product D Product E Product F

    selling price $28 $30 $30

    variable cost:

    inside purchases 10 10 15

    other variable costs 5 5 8

    total variable cost 15 15 23

    contribution per unit 13 15 7

    fixed cost (total) $100,000 $100,000 $200,000

    Question:

    If you were the manager of Division 1, what products would you sell to the Division 2 if there were no outside markets for products A,B or C?

    easy accounting questions but need help 460880

    Cory Bryant runs a courier service in downtown Phoenix. He charges clients $0.50 per mile driven. Cory has determined that if he drives 2,700 miles in a month, his total operating cost is $931. If he drives 5,900 miles in a month, his total operating cost is $1,507. Cory has used the high-low method to determine that his monthly cost equation is: Total Monthly Cost = $445 + $0.18 per Mile Driven.

    1: Determine how many miles Cory needs to drive to break even. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.)

    Break-even units:_______miles

    2: Calculate Cory’s degree of operating leverage if he drives 6,100 miles. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 4 decimal places.)

    Degree of operating leverage:_______

    3: Suppose Cory took a week off and his sales for the month decreased by 23 percent. Using the degree of operating leverage, calculate the effect this will have on his profit for that month. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 4 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    Effect on profit:_______%

    accounting cotton white inc 460885

    Cotton White, Inc., makes specialty clothing for chefs. The company reported the following costs for 2010.

    Factory rent————————————$36,000

    Company advertising————————–24,000

    Wages paid to seamstresses—————–75,000

    Depreciation on salespersons’ vehicles——30,000

    Thread——————————————1,000

    Utilities for factory—————————23,000

    Cutting room supervisor’s salary———–30,000

    President’s salary—————————75,000

    Premium quality cotton material———–40,000

    Buttons—————————————–750

    Factory insurance—————————-18,000

    Depreciation on sewing machines———–6,000

    Wages paid to cutters———————-50,000

    2: Compute the cost of direct labor for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct labor cost:$___________

    3: Compute the cost of manufacturing overhead for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Manufacturing overhead:$___________

    4: Compute the total manufacturing cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total manufacturing cost:$___________

    5: Compute the prime cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prime cost:$___________

    6: Compute the conversion cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Conversion cost:$___________

    7: Compute the total period cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total period cost:$___________

    need help cotton white assignment 460886

    Cotton White, Inc., makes specialty clothing for chefs. The company reported the following costs for 2010.

    Factory rent———————————$36,000

    Company advertising———————–24,000

    Wages paid to seamstresses—————75,000

    Depreciation on salespersons’ vehicles—–30,000

    Thread—————————————-1,000

    Utilities for factory————————-23,000

    Cutting room supervisor’s salary————-30,000

    President’s salary—————————–75,000

    Premium quality cotton material————-40,000

    Buttons——————————————-750

    Factory insurance——————————18,000

    Depreciation on sewing machines————–6,000

    Wages paid to cutters————————-50,000

    1: Compute the cost of direct labor for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct labor cost:$___________

    2. Compute the cost of manufacturing overhead for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Manufacturing overhead:$___________

    3. Compute the total manufacturing cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total manufacturing cost:$___________

    4. Compute the prime cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prime cost:$___________

    5. Compute the conversion cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Conversion cost:$___________

    6. Compute the total period cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total period cost:$___________

    helpp please 460887

    Cotton White, Inc., makes specialty clothing for chefs. The company reported the following costs for 2010.

    Factory rent———————————$36,000

    Company advertising———————–24,000

    Wages paid to seamstresses—————75,000

    Depreciation on salespersons’ vehicles—–30,000

    Thread—————————————-1,000

    Utilities for factory————————-23,000

    Cutting room supervisor’s salary————-30,000

    President’s salary—————————–75,000

    Premium quality cotton material————-40,000

    Buttons——————————————-750

    Factory insurance——————————18,000

    Depreciation on sewing machines————–6,000

    Wages paid to cutters————————-50,000

    1: Compute the cost of direct labor for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct labor cost:$___________

    2. Compute the cost of manufacturing overhead for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Manufacturing overhead:$___________

    3. Compute the total manufacturing cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total manufacturing cost:$___________

    4. Compute the prime cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prime cost:$___________

    5. Compute the conversion cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Conversion cost:$___________

    6. Compute the total period cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total period cost:$___________

    prepare stockholder s equity section of balance sheet 460889

    Crea ing a stockholder’s equity section ofthe balance sheet:

    Ange s, lnc. was authorized to issue 1,000,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $1 per share.

    On J nuary 1, 2011, they sold 500,000 shares for $10 a share.

    They were also authorized to issue 200,000 shares of 7% preferred stock with a par value of $100. On

    Janu 1,2011, they sold 100,000 shares of preferred stock for $100 a share.

    Duri g 2011, they had net income of $1,000,000 and paid $700,000 out in dividends. At December 31,

    2011: the common stock was trading for $11 a share and the preferred stock was trading for $101 a share.

    Pleas prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet. (Some of the above information is

    relev: nt to this task and some is not.)

    journal entries 460890

    Please create journal entries for the following transactions for Wilson Inc.

    l. On January 1, 2012, company sells 500,000 additional shares of stock for cash. The sale price is

    $2.00 per share. The par value is $.01 (one cent) per share.

    2. On January 1,2012, the company signs a lease and pays one year of rent in advance. One year of rent

    is $120,000.

    3. On January 2,2012, company buys Office Equipment for $120,000, paying $50,000 in cash and the

    balance in a note payable.

    4. On January 3, 2012, company bills Brown, Inc. for $30,000 (Canadian dollars) offees (the revenue

    account is Consulting Fees Earned). On January 3, 2011, the exchange rate is $1 Canadian dollar

    buys $.95 U.S. dollars.

    5. On January 31, 2012, company allocates $25,000 of direct labor costs to work in process.

    6. On January 31, 2012, company makes the appropriate adjusting journal entry for the rent.

    7. On January 3, 2012, Brown, Inc. pays the company $30,000 Canadian dollars which the company

    converts to U.S. dollars. The exchange rate is $1 Canadian dollar buys $1 U.S. Dollar.

    prepare table of entities and activities for milenium insurance company 460894

    Customers send requests for auto insurance into the Asheville sales office, where sales clerks prepare policy request forms. They file a copy of the form and forward the original to the input preparation section, where data entry clerks use networked PCs to key and key-verify the data contained on the documents to a disk (“policy requests”).

    Each evening, computer operations retrieves the policy request data from the network, edits the data on the computer for accuracy (e.g., all required fields completed), sorts the data in policy number sequence, and prints a summary report listing the edited policy requests. The summary report is sent to the sales office, where the sales clerks compare the report to the copy of the policy request form that they previously filed. If everything checks out, they notify computer operations to go ahead with processing. When notified, computer operations processes the correct policy request data against the policyholder master data to create a new policy record. Each evening, a disk, which was created during the processing run, is used to print premium notices that are sent to the customer.

    accounting 460900

    Darter Company manufactures two products, Product F and Product G. The company expects to produce and sell 2,600 units of Product F and 6,000 units of Product G during the current year. The company uses activity-based costing to compute unit product costs for external reports. Data relating to the company’s three activity cost pools are given below for the current year:

    activity cost pool estimated overhead expected activity

    product F product G total

    machine setups 10,400 80 180 260

    purchase orders 88,440 810 1,200 2,010

    general factory 65,340 2,340 3,600 5,940

    Required:

    Using the activity-based costing approach

    1. Determine the overhead rate for each of the three cost pools.

    2. Determine the total amount of overhead charged to Product G.

    3. Determine the overhead cost per unit for Product G..

    answer 460902

    Data related to the expected sales of snowboards and skis for Winter Sports Inc. for the current year, which is typical of recent years, are as follows:

    Products Unit Selling Price Unit Variable Cost Sales Mix

    Snowboards $230 $160 20%

    Skis 380 180 80%

    The estimated fixed costs for the current year are $501,120.

    Instructions:

    1. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall (total) product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.

    units

    2. Based on the break-even sales in units in part 1, determine the unit sales of both snowboards and skis for the current year.

    snowboards: units

    skis: units

    3. Assume that the sales mix was 80% snowboards and 20% skis. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.

    units

    acct 460903

    Data related to the expected sales of snowboards and skis for Winter Sports Inc. for the current year, which is typical of recent years, are as follows:

    Products Unit Selling Price Unit Variable Cost Sales Mix

    Snowboards $230 $160 20%

    Skis 380 180 80%

    The estimated fixed costs for the current year are $501,120.

    Instructions:

    1. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall (total) product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.

    units

    2. Based on the break-even sales in units in part 1, determine the unit sales of both snowboards and skis for the current year.

    snowboards: units

    skis: units

    3. Assume that the sales mix was 80% snowboards and 20% skis. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.

    units

    greg s bicycle shop has the following transactions related to it s top selling mongo 460904

    Date: Transactions: Units: Cost per unit: Total cost:

    March 1 Beginning inventory 20 $200 $4,000

    March 5 Sale ($300 each) 15

    March 9 Purchase 10 220 2,200

    March 17 Sale ($350 each) 8

    March 22 Purchase 10 230 2,300

    March 27 Sale ($375 each) 12

    March 30 Purchase 8 250 2,000

    Total: $10,500

    a) Calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012 using the specific identification method. The March 5 sale consists of bikes from beginning inventory, the March 17 sale consists of bikes from the March 9 purchase, and the March 27 sale consists of four bikes from beginning inventory and eight bikes from the March 22 purchase.

    b) Using FIFO, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012

    c) Using LIFO, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012

    d) Using weighted-average cost, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012

    e) Calculate sales revenue and gross profit under each of the four methods

    f) Comparing FIFO and LIFO, which one provides the more meaningful measure of ending inventory? Explain.

    g) If Greg’s Bicycle Shop chooses to report inventory using LIFO instead of FIFO, record the LIFO adjustment.

    calculate the full unit cost per tonne of waste from private persons and that per to 460906

    Debate on cost allocation in the municipality of Statendam

    It started with a letter

    Statendam, November 5, 2001

    To: Henk Jacobs, director finance department

    From: Bob Jansen, manager refuse collection department

    Dear Henk,

    Someone told me that you had to see the teachers of one or your children last night, so you could not be present at the council meeting. Well, you have really missed something! The Conservative-Liberal Party seized the opportunity to use the 2002 budget for an attack on the municipal privatization policy. My department was seen as a possible spearhead of a new policy. The Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that only financial considerations should determine whether a municipality performs its duties itself or leaves them to the market. The Conservative-Liberal Party has conducted a small survey to compare the refuse collection rate for private persons in Statendam with the rates of four municipalities of similar sizes. Two of these four municipalities have contracted refuse collection out to a private enterprise and the two remaining municipalities work together with other municipalities in a joint refuse collection scheme . Table 1 shows the figures presented by the Conservative-Liberal Party.

    Table 1. Refuse collection rates for private persons in different municipalities (2001)

    Approach to refuse collection, a municipal duty* Refuse collection rate (waste collection levy) per household

    Refuse collection, a municipal duty, contracted out to a private enterprise $190 to $197.50

    Refuse collection through a joint scheme of a number of municipalities $202.50 to $217.50

    Refuse collection by the municipality itself, i.e. Statendam $209

    * The services offered by the municipalities mentioned above hardly differ, as far as I can tell. All the municipalities collect different kinds of waste separately, i.e. vegetables, fruit and garden waste are composted and other waste goes to the regional dump. Waste is collected once a week and people can dispose of special kinds of waste such as glass, cartons of juice or milk, etc., and household chemical waste at the usual places. All the municipalities in Table 1 use rates that cover the costs involved. In addition, Statendam and the other municipalities use separate rates for the collection and processing of industrial waste.

    The group leader of the Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that his survey demonstrates that Statendam should contract out refuse collection. If the VAT-exempt status of public services disappears in the future, contracting out will become even more advantageous, according to the Conservative-Liberal Party .

    You know that I have no fundamental objections to contracting out government tasks. However, I do think that discussions about this subject should be based on solid facts and figures, and our council’s discussion is not. What the Conservative-Liberal Party is doing in its little table, is comparing apples and oranges. It is reasonable to compare the rate of our municipality with that of a municipality in a joint scheme, but it is unfair to compare it with the rates of private enterprises. And why is that? Well, the overhead costs of private enterprises are almost negligible; only the cost of employing a director and keeping accounts, that’s it. Quite a contrast with the overheads of a municipality. Our accounting system has to meet all kinds of government regulations, which makes it expensive. And we have a costly administrative system, i.e. municipal council, municipal executive, and support staff. What’s more, my department is really at a disadvantage because of the way our organization’s overheads are allocated. All the overhead costs are added up and then each department is allocated overhead costs that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question. This calculation method puts my department at a disadvantage. A relatively large number of people are employed in my department, while we hardly use support services in such areas as housing, automation, financial policy, personnel policy, financial accounting, and human resources. And my department is hardly a burden on the administrative system. I submit my budget and report twice a year. And that’s it. My department is very seldom involved in complex projects, which tax the administrative system.

    When the Conservative-Liberal Party was carrying on yesterday, I was quite disheartened for a moment. I am running an efficient department which can hold its own with its competitors, including private enterprises. I can prove that our labour productivity and the utilization ratio of our fleet are excellent. But I may come off badly because I am saddled with far too large overheads. This is not fair, admit it. That’s why I want to ask you to do me a favour. Next week the alderman has to be well prepared for the council’s discussion about privatization proposals. I could write a policy document for the alderman, but it would not impress many people. They would probably think I was a bit biased. For that reason, I would like you to provide the alderman with information that shows that we are not more expensive than private enterprises at all, as far as refuse collection is concerned.

    Please let me know what you are going to do.

    Best regards,

    Bob

    Assignment 1 ‘ Basic, Mid-Level and Advanced

    You are the director of the finance department. You know that in a few days’ time the alderman will have to be provided with information which she can use during the municipal council’s discussion about privatization. You also realize that the tricky overheads problem will play an important part in the discussion. There is not enough time left to look into the municipality’s overhead costs and you are too busy to write a detailed report on this subject, although you could come up with a few essential considerations. Your assignment is to write them on one sheet of paper.

    Start of Assignment 2

    Analysis

    A month has passed since the council debated the overhead costs of refuse collection. Bob Jansen has had enough time to do some calculations for himself. As far as the ‘products’ collected are concerned, he distinguishes two cost centres (which are products), namely:

    – tonnes of refuse collected and processed for private persons;

    – tonnes of refuse collected and processed for businesses.

    In addition, he distinguishes three so-called cost pools. The first two relate to the overheads of the municipal organization as a whole, to which he referred in his letter of November 5, 2001, and the third cost pool relates to the overheads of his own department:

    – central administrative department (personnel, finance and information); annual budget of $1.6 million;

    – central coordination (political management and central management of the municipality); annual budget of $1.1 million;

    – management of the refuse collection department and planning its activities; annual budget of $0.3 million.

    At present each department is allocated costs from the first two cost pools that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question (expressed as a full-time equivalent (fte)). The total number of employees of the municipality to which the costs from the first two cost pools are allocated amounts to 550 ftes; the number of employees in the refuse collection department is 99 ftes. Each of the two cost units is allocated costs from the third cost pool that are proportionate to the work done for the cost unit in question, i.e. about 70% of the work is done for private persons and about 30% for businesses. Table 2 contains the number of tonnes and the direct costs for each type of waste for the year 2001.

    Bob Jansen starts his calculations by determining full unit costs per tonne of waste, for private persons and for businesses. To that end, as is customary in his municipality, he decides to allocate the central overheads (i.e. overheads from the first two cost pools) to the two cost centres proportionate to the tonnes of waste collected for private persons and the tonnes of waste collected for businesses respectively.

    Table 2. Number of tonnes and direct costs per type of waste (2001)

    Type of waste Number of tonnes Direct costs

    Private persons 21,000 $2.6 million

    Businesses 14,000 $0.9 million

    Assignment 2 Basic, Mid-Level and Advanced

    Please calculate the full unit cost per tonne of waste from private persons and that per tonne of waste from businesses, using the data mentioned above.

    Start of Assignment 3

    In 2001 the average amount of waste per private person (i.e. per house) amounted to 1,415 kilos (= 1.415 tonnes). Bob Jansen now wants to know how much the central overheads allocated to his department have to be decreased in order to arrive at a full rate per household which might meet the Conservative-Liberal Party’s market-based requirements (see Table 1).

    Assignment 3 ‘ Mid-Level and Advanced

    Please show how much the central overheads allocated to the refuse collection department have to be decreased in order to meet the market-based requirements mentioned above. Please suggest how this could be achieved by changing the apportionment keys for the first two cost pools. A few tips:

    – use Bob Jansen’s letter for your suggestions;

    – discuss to what extent the cost allocation principles for support department costs and joint costs apply to the first two cost pools.

    Start of Assignment 4

    Implementation

    The municipal council’s discussion about the privatization of refuse collection, a municipal duty, has not resulted in clear conclusions. A majority of the municipal council has passed a motion in which the municipal executive is instructed to look closely into the overheads problem. The director of the finance department, Henk Jacobs, is in charge of this inquiry. He is due to report back within four months.

    Assignment 4 ‘ Advanced Only

    Please outline a possible decision-making process concerning the allocation of overheads. You might choose different cost allocation principles for the various cost pools.

    Indicate too how, after one or more cost allocation methods have been selected, cost allocation should be implemented.Inlcude suhc tables and callculations as you deem approppriate.

    Start of Assignment 5

    Why ‘integral management’?

    After Henk Jacobs has completed his inquiry, the municipal executive and senior officials have heated discussions about the municipality’s cost allocation policy. The key question is: should municipal departments be able to influence the size of the overheads allocated to them. Henk Jacobs suggests in his report that a considerable part of the overheads allocated to each of the departments should be proportionate to the number of employees working in the department in question. Several of the municipality’s managers are in favour of this. For this reason, they do not like the response of the alderman for staff matters, Linda Tolsma. She says:

    ‘At the beginning of every council term, I come to an agreement with the public sector personnel unions on the number of people employed by our municipality. Last time I agreed to decrease the number of employees by 5% (from 620 to 590 ftes). After such an agreement has been made, it is translated into so-called target numbers of employees per organization unit (i.e. per department) on the basis of policy-based proposals for new policies and savings. I cannot face the unions if the agreement has not been honoured. If you, as managers, were free to deviate from fixed target numbers of employees, for example to decrease the size of the overheads allocated to you, then I would run the risk of ending up with a total number of employees equalling 570 ftes instead of 590 ftes. Well, that would be a disaster. So I think you should stick to the agreements on employment that are reached at the beginning of each council term. The matter can be reconsidered before a new council term. And another thing, it is vitally important to prevent any unrest in our organization, so we must see to it that we do not have to negotiate every single adjustment to the number of employees with the unions. The kind of complete agreement I make gives a sense of security and clarity, not only to the employees, but also to us.’

    The head of the welfare department, Richard van Delden, is speaking for many of his colleagues when he says:

    ‘How can you be held accountable for providing services and products and for managing the money involved if you are not given a free rein to decide for yourself how you are going to use your resources? The costs involved include not only your own costs, such as the direct staff costs of your department, but also the support department costs that are allocated to you. In this municipality all of us have decided to use integral management. So we are supposed to be fully accountable for both the policy-based and the financial aspects of the work done by our departments. If I interpret the alderman’s response correctly, we are going to be judged on the products agreed on, although our hands are tied by the agreed way of using resources. I am not allowed to use freelancers for certain projects, for example, although it would be a good idea – even if their hourly wages are a bit higher than the permanent staff’s. If my department was allowed to use freelancers, it would not run the risk of understaffing and it would be not be allocated so many overhead costs.’

    Assignment 5 ‘ Advanced Only

    Please analyse the above discussion. You should use responsibility accounting principles and should also try to find a solution to the differences of opinion described above.

    costing 460907

    Debate on cost allocation in the municipality of Statendam

    It started with a letter

    Statendam, November 5, 2001

    To: Henk Jacobs, director finance department

    From: Bob Jansen, manager refuse collection department

    Dear Henk,

    Someone told me that you had to see the teachers of one or your children last night, so you could not be present at the council meeting. Well, you have really missed something! The Conservative-Liberal Party seized the opportunity to use the 2002 budget for an attack on the municipal privatization policy. My department was seen as a possible spearhead of a new policy. The Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that only financial considerations should determine whether a municipality performs its duties itself or leaves them to the market. The Conservative-Liberal Party has conducted a small survey to compare the refuse collection rate for private persons in Statendam with the rates of four municipalities of similar sizes. Two of these four municipalities have contracted refuse collection out to a private enterprise and the two remaining municipalities work together with other municipalities in a joint refuse collection scheme . Table 1 shows the figures presented by the Conservative-Liberal Party.

    Table 1. Refuse collection rates for private persons in different municipalities (2001)

    Approach to refuse collection, a municipal duty* Refuse collection rate (waste collection levy) per household

    Refuse collection, a municipal duty, contracted out to a private enterprise $190 to $197.50

    Refuse collection through a joint scheme of a number of municipalities $202.50 to $217.50

    Refuse collection by the municipality itself, i.e. Statendam $209

    * The services offered by the municipalities mentioned above hardly differ, as far as I can tell. All the municipalities collect different kinds of waste separately, i.e. vegetables, fruit and garden waste are composted and other waste goes to the regional dump. Waste is collected once a week and people can dispose of special kinds of waste such as glass, cartons of juice or milk, etc., and household chemical waste at the usual places. All the municipalities in Table 1 use rates that cover the costs involved. In addition, Statendam and the other municipalities use separate rates for the collection and processing of industrial waste.

    The group leader of the Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that his survey demonstrates that Statendam should contract out refuse collection. If the VAT-exempt status of public services disappears in the future, contracting out will become even more advantageous, according to the Conservative-Liberal Party .

    You know that I have no fundamental objections to contracting out government tasks. However, I do think that discussions about this subject should be based on solid facts and figures, and our council’s discussion is not. What the Conservative-Liberal Party is doing in its little table, is comparing apples and oranges. It is reasonable to compare the rate of our municipality with that of a municipality in a joint scheme, but it is unfair to compare it with the rates of private enterprises. And why is that? Well, the overhead costs of private enterprises are almost negligible; only the cost of employing a director and keeping accounts, that’s it. Quite a contrast with the overheads of a municipality. Our accounting system has to meet all kinds of government regulations, which makes it expensive. And we have a costly administrative system, i.e. municipal council, municipal executive, and support staff. What’s more, my department is really at a disadvantage because of the way our organization’s overheads are allocated. All the overhead costs are added up and then each department is allocated overhead costs that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question. This calculation method puts my department at a disadvantage. A relatively large number of people are employed in my department, while we hardly use support services in such areas as housing, automation, financial policy, personnel policy, financial accounting, and human resources. And my department is hardly a burden on the administrative system. I submit my budget and report twice a year. And that’s it. My department is very seldom involved in complex projects, which tax the administrative system.

    When the Conservative-Liberal Party was carrying on yesterday, I was quite disheartened for a moment. I am running an efficient department which can hold its own with its competitors, including private enterprises. I can prove that our labour productivity and the utilization ratio of our fleet are excellent. But I may come off badly because I am saddled with far too large overheads. This is not fair, admit it. That’s why I want to ask you to do me a favour. Next week the alderman has to be well prepared for the council’s discussion about privatization proposals. I could write a policy document for the alderman, but it would not impress many people. They would probably think I was a bit biased. For that reason, I would like you to provide the alderman with information that shows that we are not more expensive than private enterprises at all, as far as refuse collection is concerned.

    Please let me know what you are going to do.

    Best regards,

    Bob

    Assignment 1 ‘ Basic, Mid-Level and Advanced

    You are the director of the finance department. You know that in a few days’ time the alderman will have to be provided with information which she can use during the municipal council’s discussion about privatization. You also realize that the tricky overheads problem will play an important part in the discussion. There is not enough time left to look into the municipality’s overhead costs and you are too busy to write a detailed report on this subject, although you could come up with a few essential considerations. Your assignment is to write them on one sheet of paper.

    Start of Assignment 2

    Analysis

    A month has passed since the council debated the overhead costs of refuse collection. Bob Jansen has had enough time to do some calculations for himself. As far as the ‘products’ collected are concerned, he distinguishes two cost centres (which are products), namely:

    – tonnes of refuse collected and processed for private persons;

    – tonnes of refuse collected and processed for businesses.

    In addition, he distinguishes three so-called cost pools. The first two relate to the overheads of the municipal organization as a whole, to which he referred in his letter of November 5, 2001, and the third cost pool relates to the overheads of his own department:

    – central administrative department (personnel, finance and information); annual budget of $1.6 million;

    – central coordination (political management and central management of the municipality); annual budget of $1.1 million;

    – management of the refuse collection department and planning its activities; annual budget of $0.3 million.

    At present each department is allocated costs from the first two cost pools that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question (expressed as a full-time equivalent (fte)). The total number of employees of the municipality to which the costs from the first two cost pools are allocated amounts to 550 ftes; the number of employees in the refuse collection department is 99 ftes. Each of the two cost units is allocated costs from the third cost pool that are proportionate to the work done for the cost unit in question, i.e. about 70% of the work is done for private persons and about 30% for businesses. Table 2 contains the number of tonnes and the direct costs for each type of waste for the year 2001.

    Bob Jansen starts his calculations by determining full unit costs per tonne of waste, for private persons and for businesses. To that end, as is customary in his municipality, he decides to allocate the central overheads (i.e. overheads from the first two cost pools) to the two cost centres proportionate to the tonnes of waste collected for private persons and the tonnes of waste collected for businesses respectively.

    Table 2. Number of tonnes and direct costs per type of waste (2001)

    Type of waste Number of tonnes Direct costs

    Private persons 21,000 $2.6 million

    Businesses 14,000 $0.9 million

    help please 460909

    On December, 31, 2008, Tie One On reported net income for the year of $265,000 and the following account balances:

    Cash $175,000

    Accounts receivable 21,000

    Prepaid rent 6,000

    Eqipment and furnishings 230,000

    Accumulated depreciation-Equipment and furnishings ($43,000)

    Accounts payable 39,000

    Wages payable 13,000

    Owners’ equity (including net income of $265,000) 337,000

    After this information was prepared the bookkeeper discovered that they failed to prepare two adjusting entries. Thees were not reflected in the balances shown. Here is the information on these two entries:

    1. The prepaid rent account was paid on April 1, 2008, for one year for $6,000. The account has not been adjusted since.

    2. A bill received in January 2009 for utilities incurred in December 2008 for $1,400 was mistakenly not entered into the system.

    Please calculate the year-end balances for the following account : Asset You can enter your answer in the following format:

    Assets=$X(Show your work in parentheses, number only, no titles necessary)

    basic and diluted eps 460910

    On December 31, 2010, Berclair, Inc. had 200 million shares of common stock and 4 million shares of 10%, $100 par value cumulative preferred stock issued and outstanding. Berclair issued a 6% common stock dividend on July 1, 2011. On March 1, 2011, Berclair purchased 24 million shares of its common stock as treasury stock. 4 million treasury shares were sold on October 1. Net income for the year ended December 31, 2011, was $160 million.

    Also outstanding at December 31 were incentive stock options granted to key executives on September 13, 2006. The options are exercisable as of September 13, 2010, for 30 million common shares at an exercise price of $56 per share. During 2011, the market price of the common shares averaged $70 per share.

    The options were exercised on September 1, 2011.

    Compute Berclair’s basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2011

    cpa and cma review questions 460911

    On both December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011, Kopp Co.’s only equity security investment had the same fair value, which was below its original cost. Kopp considered the decline in value to be temporary in 2010 but other-than-temporary in 2011. At the end of both years the security was classified as a noncurrent asset. Kopp could not exercise significant influence over the investee. What should be the effects of the determination that the decline was other-than-temporary on Kopp’s 2011 net noncurrent assets and net income?

    A) Decrease in both net noncurrent assets and net income.

    B) No effect on both net noncurrent assets and net income.

    C) Decrease in net noncurrent assets and no effect on net income.

    D) No effect on net noncurrent assets and decrease in net income.

    please help 460919

    Department A Department B Department C Total

    Sales $300,000 $280,000 $120,000 $700,000

    Variable Expenses

    160,000 175,000 105,000 440,000

    Contribution Margin

    140,000 105,000 15,000 260,000

    Fixed Expenses

    65,000 35,000 40,000 140,000

    Net Income

    $75,000 $70,000 $(25,000) $120,000

    Ellen Electric has an offer from a potential supplier to provide 40,000 units at $65 each that Ellen Electric now manufactures at a total cost of $75 per unit. The manufacturing costs for 40,000 units are: direct materials $900,000; direct labor $450,000; variable overhead $900,000; and fixed overhead $750,000. All costs except $500,000 in fixed overhead will be avoided if the parts are purchased.

    Required:

    (A) What should Ellen Electric do in this situation? Explain fully and show your computations.Would your answer change if Ellen Electric could use the capacity that would become available to produce additional income of $125,000? Explain.

    please help 460920

    Department A Department B Department C Total

    Sales $300,000 $280,000 $120,000 $700,000

    Variable Expenses

    160,000 175,000 105,000 440,000

    Contribution Margin

    140,000 105,000 15,000 260,000

    Fixed Expenses

    65,000 35,000 40,000 140,000

    Net Income

    $75,000 $70,000 $(25,000) $120,000

    Ellen Electric has an offer from a potential supplier to provide 40,000 units at $65 each that Ellen Electric now manufactures at a total cost of $75 per unit. The manufacturing costs for 40,000 units are: direct materials $900,000; direct labor $450,000; variable overhead $900,000; and fixed overhead $750,000. All costs except $500,000 in fixed overhead will be avoided if the parts are purchased.

    (A) What should Ellen Electric do in this situation? Explain fully and show your computations.

    chapter 16 problem 7 460813

    Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 20013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.

    1. The company is authorized to issue 8,000,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,000,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.

    2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.

    Price per Share

    July 1, 2012 $20.00

    January 1, 2013 $21.00

    April 1, 2013 $25.00

    July 1, 2013 $11.00

    August 1, 2013 $10.50

    November 1, 2013 $9.00

    December 31, 2013 $10.00

    3. A total of 700,000 shares of an authorized 1,200,000 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.

    4. East Aurora Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.

    5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $11,550,000.

    The following specific activities took place during 2013.

    1. January 1″ a 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.

    2. April 1″ a total of 400,000 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.

    3. July 1″ A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.

    4. August 1″a total of 300,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.

    5. November 1″a total of 24,000 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.

    6. Common stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.

    April 15″$0.30 per share

    October 15″$0.20 per share

    7. Preferred stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.

    Instructions

    (a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.

    (b) Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.

    (c) Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.

    chapter 16 problem 7 460815

    Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 20013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.

    1. The company is authorized to issue 8,000,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,000,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.

    2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.

    Price per Share

    July 1, 2012 $20.00

    January 1, 2013 $21.00

    April 1, 2013 $25.00

    July 1, 2013 $11.00

    August 1, 2013 $10.50

    November 1, 2013 $9.00

    December 31, 2013 $10.00

    3. A total of 700,000 shares of an authorized 1,200,000 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.

    4. East Aurora Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.

    5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $11,550,000.

    The following specific activities took place during 2013.

    1. January 1″ a 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.

    2. April 1″ a total of 400,000 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.

    3. July 1″ A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.

    4. August 1″a total of 300,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.

    5. November 1″a total of 24,000 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.

    6. Common stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.

    April 15″$0.30 per share

    October 15″$0.20 per share

    7. Preferred stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.

    Instructions

    (a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.

    (b) Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.

    (c) Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.

    please help 460816

    Chi Omega Sorority is planning its annual Riverboat Extravaganza. The Extravaganza committee has assembled the following expected costs for the event:

    Dinner (per person)

    $ 7

    Favors and programs (per person)

    3

    Orchestra

    2,600

    Tickets and advertising

    1,800

    Riverboat Rental

    5,200

    Floor show and strolling entertainers

    1,400

    The committee members want to charge $30 per person for the evening’s activities.

    Required:

    1. Compute the break-even point for the Extravaganza (in terms of the number of persons that must attend.) Assume that only 250 person attended the Extravaganza last year. If the same number attend this year, what price per ticket must be charged in order to break

    help 460817

    Chi Omega Sorority is planning its annual Riverboat Extravaganza. The Extravaganza committee has assembled the following expected costs for the event:

    Dinner (per person) $ 7

    Favors and programs (per person) 3

    Orchestra 2,600

    Tickets and advertising 1,800

    Riverboat Rental 5,200

    Floor show and strolling entertainers 1,400

    The committee members want to charge $30 per person for the evening’s activities.

    3. If Chi Omega want to make a profit of $5,000 and charge $30 per ticket, how many people must buy tickets? Chi Omega decides to sell tickets for $35 each and the costs will remain the same as shown in the table above. If they believe they can sell 800 tickets, what will be their margin of safety in dollars and as a percent of sales?

    answer 460820

    Cincinnati Soap Company manufactures powdered detergent. Phosphate is placed in process in the Making Department, where it is turned into granulars. The output of Making is transferred to the Packing Department, where the packaging is added at the beginning of the process. On July 1, Cincinnati Soap Company had the following inventories:

    Finished Goods $15,620

    Work in Process-Making 6,070

    Work in Process-Packing 7,910

    Materials 3,430

    Departmental accounts are maintained for factory overhead, which both have zero balances on July 1.

    Manufacturing operations for July are summarized as follows:

    a. Materials purchased on account $194,560

    b. Materials requisitioned for use:

    Phosphate-Making Department $128,520

    Packaging-Packing Department 44,700

    Indirect materials-Making Department 5,030

    Indirect materials-Packing Department 1,800

    c. Labor used:

    Direct labor-Making Department $91,820

    Direct labor-Packing Department 61,980

    Indirect labor-Making Department 17,780

    Indirect labor-Packing Department 31,880

    d. Depreciation charged on fixed assets:

    Making Department $16,760

    Packing Department 13,840

    e. Expired prepaid factory insurance:

    Making Department $3,180

    Packing Department 1,270

    f. Applied factory overhead:

    Making Department $43,820

    Packing Department 48,410

    g. Production costs transferred from Making Department to Packing Department $264,920

    h. Production costs transferred from Packing Department to Finished Goods $416,940

    i. Cost of goods sold during the period $418,470

    1. Journalize the entries to record the operations, identifying each entry by letter. For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank or enter “0”.

    Item Account Debit Credit

    a.

    b.

    c.

    d.

    e.

    f.

    g.

    h.

    i.

    2. Compute the July 31 balances of the inventory accounts.

    Materials: $

    Work in Process-Making Department: $

    Work in Process-Packing Department: $

    Finished Goods: $

    3. Compute the July 31 balances of the factory overhead accounts. If required, use the minus sign to indicate a credit balance.

    Factory Overhead-Making Department: $

    Factory Overhead-Packing Department: $

    income sheet 460824

    One client had indicated that they were interested in purchasing $35,500 worth of products, so the bookkeeper recorded the transaction. However, the client has not actually committed to the purchase.

    The bookkeeper may have made a mistake when computing cost of good sold. She included total production costs for 2011 and did not adjust ending inventory for the $35,500 worth of units left at the end of the year. The amount of ending inventory was determined using a physical count.

    Nybrostrand Company

    31-Dec-11

    Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)

    Debit

    Credit

    Accounts payable

    67,000

    Accounts receivable

    24,500

    Cash

    16,700

    Common stock

    10,000

    Depreciation expense

    24,350

    Cost of goods sold

    254,000

    Equipment (net of depreciation)

    425,000

    Insurance

    1,400

    Inventory

    25,000

    Long-term debt

    145,000

    Marketing

    4,500

    Paid-in capital

    90,000

    Property taxes

    8,900

    Rent

    18,000

    Retained earnings

    ?

    Revenues

    456,000

    Salaries

    67,500

    Utilities

    6,700

    Total

    876,550

    768,000

    Prepare an income statement for the company in good format. Always include the name of the company and the priod covered in the title. Don’t forget dollar signs where appropriate. You do not need to include the balance sheet. Consequently, you will not need all the accounts listed above. How does the income or loss compare to the original income statement? Explain the importance of the matching concept.

    The submission should be 2 to 4 pages and need to include answers to all the questions listed above. Show computations, discuss the results and include references in APA format.

    acounting prepare 460825

    College Painters had the following account balances at 12/31/08.

    Full service revenue

    100,000

    Prepaid Rent

    1,000

    Retained earnings, January 1, 2008

    15,000

    Painting supplies expense

    18,000

    Note payable, due June 2009

    5,000

    Cash

    12,000

    Salaries payable

    2,500

    Note payable, due January 1, 2010

    8,500

    Equipment

    40,000

    Employee advances receivable

    2,000

    Advertising expense

    3,500

    Salaries expense

    40,000

    Accounts payable

    4,000

    Accumulated depn – equipment

    5,000

    Painting prep revenue

    15,000

    Rent and utilities expense

    15,000

    Office supplies expense

    1,000

    Common Stock

    2,500

    Accounts receivable

    25,000

    Prepare, in good form, a classified balance sheet as of 12/31/08 and an income statement and a statement of

    retained earnings for the year then ended.

    theory of constraints 460826

    Colorado Industries manufactures electronic testing equipment. Colorado also installs the equipment at customers’ sites and ensures that it functions smoothly. Additional information on the Manufacturing and Installation Departments is as follows (capacities are expressed in terms of the number of units of electronic testing equipment):

    Equipment Manufactured Equipment Installed

    Annual capacity 400 units per year 300 units per year

    Equipment manufactured 300 units per year 300 units per year

    and Installed

    Colorado manufactures only 300 units per year because the Installation Department has only enough capacity to install 300 units. The equipment sells for $40,000 per unit (installed) and has direct material costs of $15,000. All costs other than direct material costs are fixed. The following requirements refer only to the preceding data. There is no connection between the requirements.

    Required

    1.Colorado’s engineers have found a way to reduce equipment manufacturing time. The new methodwould cost an additional $50 per unit and would allow Colorado to manufacture 20 additional units a year. Should Colorado implement the new method? Show your calculations.

    2.Colorado’s designers have proposed a change in direct materials that would increase direct material costs by $2,000 per unit. This change would enable Colorado to install 320 units of equipment each year. If Colorado makes the change, it will implement the new design on all equipment sold. Should Colorado use the new design? Show your calculations.

    3.A new installation technique has been developed that will enable Colorado’s engineers to install 10 additional units of equipment a year. The new method will increase installation costs by $50,000 each year. Should Colorado implement the new technique? Show your calculations.

    4.Colorado is considering how to motivate workers to improve their productivity (output per hour). One proposal is to evaluate and compensate workers in the Manufacturing and Installation Departments on the basis of their productivities. Do you think the new proposal is a good idea? Explain briefly.

    company expense in accounting equation 460833

    Which company appears more solvent? (Name a ratio used to determine.)

    Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:

    (All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)

    Oscar Corp

    Felix Corp

    Sales revenue

    800,000

    600,000

    Total expenses

    400,000

    200,000

    Cash

    90,000

    25,000

    Accounts receivable

    120,000

    75,000

    Property plant and equipment, net

    250,000

    225,000

    Accounts payable

    95,000

    60,000

    Salaries payable

    75,000

    35,000

    Long term liabilities

    150,000

    75,000

    Common shares outstanding, beginning of year

    50,000

    25,000

    Common shares outstanding, end of year

    100,000

    40,000

    No dividends were paid during 2008.

    wacc capm 460837

    The company faces two choices that Mr. Smith must evaluate with your assistance: continue with the current smaller sized stores, or select larger stores for the firm’s strategic growth or construction plan. The initial cost will be $2,100,000 for each of the smaller sized stores and $3,700,000 for each of the five larger ones. Projected present value of cash flows for the smaller units projected for the firm’s five-year strategic plans are $450,000 for each year while the projected cash flows for the larger units are projected to be $740,000 per year. Because the projects must be financed from different sources, unfortunately, financing costs will be different. Mr. Smith’s data indicates that the current and projected 120-day treasury bill rate is 9.75% and the firm’s expected market return is 12.5% for the plan period. The beta for the African art industry and the planned new stores is 1.15. However, the bond rates for the projects are 10% for the smaller stores and 12.7% for the larger store funds. Thus, the details have been provided for the analysts, namely you, to:

    1. Determine the capital asset pricing model rate for the firm.

    2. Combine that rate with the specific debt rates for each store model, using a tax rate of 34%.

    3. Determine the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) for each project.

    4. Find the net present value (NPV) for each alternative purchase.

    5. Use the NPV and profitability index analyses (because each project will have a different WACC rate) to advise/convince Mr. Smith of your selection of the most desired, profitable project for the company.

    consignment 460846

    A company sells merchandise on a consignment basis to dealers. The selling price of the merchandise averages 25% above cost of merchandise. The dealer is paid a 10% commission on the sales price for all sales made.

    The following info is given:

    Manufacturing cost of goods shipped on consignment_______________$250,000

    Sales price of merchandise sold by dealers________________________$220,000

    Payments made by dealers after deducting commission_____________$139,000

    Prepare summary entries on the books of the consignor for these consignment sales transactions prepare summary entries on the books of the consignee for these consignment sales transactions. Prepare the parts of the company financial statements that relate to these consignment sales.

    perpet sys one calculate 460851

    Company uses the perpetual system for tracking inventory. The following

    inventory transactions occurred during the month.

    Date

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Total

    Beginning inventory

    1-Jan

    100

    10

    1,000

    Purchase

    5-Jan

    20

    11

    220

    Sale

    7-Jan

    2

    Purchase

    10-Jan

    30

    12

    360

    Sale

    11-Jan

    15

    Under LIFO method of costing inventory, what was the cost of goods sold for the items sold on

    taxation 460856

    Complete the chart below, indicating the Calvet Trust entity accounting income for each of the alternatives. For this purpose, use the following information.
    Interest Income, taxable $300,000
    Interest income, tax-exempt 30,000

    Interest income, tax exempt but AMT Preference item 20,000
    Long term capital gain 25,000
    Trustee Fee 5,000

    Trust Agreement Provisions
    Fees and capital gains allocable to corpus —————————————–
    Capital gains allocable to corpus, one half of fees allocable to income ————————————–
    Capital gain allocable to income, silent concerning allocation of fees ————————————–
    Fees and exempt income allocable to corpus, silent —————————————–
    concerning allocation of capital gain/loss

    how to post the journal to the general ledger 460857

    Comprehensive Problem 2

    Ocean Atlantic Co. is a merchandising business. the account balances for Ocean Atlantic co. as of July 1, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:

    110 Cash 63,600

    112 Accounts Receivable 153,900

    115 Merchandise Inventory 602,400

    116 Prepaid Insurance 16,800

    117 Store Supplies 11,400

    123 Store Equipment 469,500

    124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 56,700

    210 Accounts Payable 96,600

    211 Salaries Payable –

    310 Capital stock 75,000

    311 Retained earnings, Aug 1 2011 480,300

    312 Dividends 135,000

    313 Income summary

    410 Sales 3,221,100

    411 Sales Returns and Allowances 92,700

    412 Sales Discounts 59,400

    510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 1,623,000

    520 Sales Salaries Expense 334,800

    521 Advertising Expense 81,000

    522 Depreciation Expense –

    523 Store Supplies Expense –

    529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 12,600

    530 Office Salaries Expense 182,100

    531 Rent Expense 83,700

    532 Insurance Expense –

    539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 7,800

    During July, the last month of the fiscal year, the following transactions were completed:

    July 1, Paid rent for July, $4000.

    3, Purchased merchandise on account from Lingard Co., Terms 2/10,n/30,FOB shipping point, $25,000.

    4, Paid freight on purchase of July 3, $1000.

    6, Sold merchandise on account to Holt Co., terms 2/10,n/30, FOB shipping point, $40,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $24,000.

    7, Received $18000 cash from Flat Co. on account, no discount.

    10, sold merchandise for cash $90,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $50,000.

    13, Paid for merchandise purchased on July 3, less discount.

    14, Received merchandise returned on sale of July 6, $7000. The cost of the merchandise returned was $4500.

    15, Paid advertising expense for last half of July, $9000

    16, received cash from sale of July 6, less return of July 14 and discount.

    19, purchased merchandise for cash, $22000.

    19, Paid $23,100 to Corino Co. on account, no discount

    Record the following transactions on page 21 of the journal

    20, sold merchandise on account to Reedley Co., terms 1/10,n/30, FOB shipping point, $40000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $25000.

    21, for the convenience of the customer, paid freight on sale of July 20, $1100.

    21, received $17600 cash from Owen co. on account, no discount.

    21, purchased merchandise on account from Munson Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB Destination, $32000.

    24, Returned $5000 of damaged merchandise purchased on July21, receiving credit from the seller.

    26, Refunded cash on sales made for cash, $12000. The cost of the merchandise returned was $7200.

    28, paid sales salaries of $22800 and office salaries of $15200.

    29, purchased store supplies for cash, $2400.

    30, Sold merchandise on account to Dix co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $18,750. The cost of the merchandise sold was $11,250.

    30, received cash from sale of July 20, less discount, plus freight paid on July 21.

    31, Paid for purchase of July 21, less return of July 24 and discount.

    Instructions

    1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account. Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (?) in the posting reference column. Journalize the transactions for July.

    2. Post the journal to the general ledger, extending the month-end balances to the appropriate balance columns after all posting is completed. In this problem, you are no required to update or post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers.

    3. Prepare and unadjusted trial balance.

    4. At the end of July, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete (5) and (6).

    a) Merchandise inventory on July 31 $ 565000

    b) Insurance expired during the year $ 13400

    c) Store supplies on hand on July 31 $3900

    d) Depreciation for the current year $11500

    e) Accrued salaries on July 31: Sale salaries $3200 Office salaries $1300 ($4500)

    5. Enter the unadjusted trial balance on a 10-column end-of-period spreadsheet (work Sheet), and complete the spreadsheet.

    6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Record the adjusting entries on page 22 of the journal.

    7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance

    8. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.

    9. Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries on page 23 of the journal. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry. Insert the new balance in the retained earnings account.

    10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

    computation of actual return gains and losses corridor test and pension expense 460858

    (Computation of Actual Return, Gains and Losses, Corridor Test, and Pension Expense)

    Erikson Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan. The corporation’s actuary provides the following information about the plan.

    January 1 December 31

    2012

    2012

    Vested benefit obligation $1,500 $1,900

    Accumulated benefit obligation 1,900 2,730

    Projected benefit obligation 2,500 3,300

    Plan assets (fair value) 1,700 2,620

    Settlement rate and expected rate of return 10%

    Pension asset/liability 800 ?

    Service cost for the year 2012 400

    Contributions (funding in 2012) 700

    Benefits paid in 2012 200

    (If answer is zero, please enter a 0, do not leave any fields blank.)

    (a) Compute the actual return on the plan assets in 2012.

    $

    (b) Compute the amount of the other comprehensive income (G/L) as of December 31, 2012. (Assume the January 1, 2012, balance was zero.)

    $

    (c) Compute the amount of net gain or loss amortization for 2012 (corridor approach).

    $

    (d) Compute pension expense for 2012.

    im stuck on the whole problem itself 460860


    Compute the following ratios at December 31, 2010.
    (a) Current. (e) Days in inventory.
    (b) Receivables turnover. (f ) Cash debt coverage.
    (c) Average collection period. (g) Current cash debt coverage.
    (d) Inventory turnover. (h) Free cash flow.

    Armada Company has these comparative balance sheet data:

    ARMADA COMPANY
    Balance Sheets
    December 31
    2010 2009
    Cash $ 25,000 $ 30,000
    Receivables (net) 65,000 60,000
    Inventories 60,000 50,000
    Plant assets (net) 200,000 180,000
    $350,000 $320,000
    Accounts payable $ 50,000 $ 60,000
    Mortgage payable (15%) 100,000 100,000
    Common stock, $10 par 140,000 120,000
    Retained earnings 60,000 40,000
    $350,000 $320,000

    help again 460862

    Computer Boutique sells computer equipment and home office furniture. Currently, the furniture product line takes up approximately 50% of the company’s retail floor space. The president of Computer Boutique is trying to decide whether the company should continue offering furniture or just concentrate on computer equipment. If furniture is dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided. In addition, sales of computer equipment can increase by 13%. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.

    Computer

    Home Office

    Equipment

    Furniture

    Total

    Sales

    $1,200,000

    $800,000

    $2,000,000

    Less cost of goods sold

    700,000

    500,000

    1,200,000

    Contribution margin

    500,000

    300,000

    800,000

    Less direct fixed costs:

    Salaries

    175,000

    175,000

    350,000

    Other

    60,000

    60,000

    120,000

    Less allocated fixed costs:

    Rent

    14,118

    9,882

    24,000

    Insurance

    3,529

    2,471

    6,000

    Cleaning

    4,117

    2,883

    7,000

    President’s salary

    76,470

    53,350

    130,000

    Other

    7,058

    4,942

    12,000

    Total costs

    340,292

    380,708

    649,000

    Net Income

    $159,708

    ($ 8,708)

    $151,000

    Prepare an incremental analysis to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the furniture line.

    help with example 1 460864

    Computer Boutique sells computer equipment and home office furniture. Currently, the furniture product line takes up approximately 50% of the company’s retail floor space. The president of Computer Boutique is trying to decide whether the company should continue offering furniture or just concentrate on computer equipment. If furniture is dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided. In addition, sales of computer equipment can increase by 13%. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.

    Computer

    Home Office

    Equipment

    Furniture

    Total

    Sales

    $1,200,000

    $800,000

    $2,000,000

    Less cost of goods sold

    700,000

    500,000

    1,200,000

    Contribution margin

    500,000

    300,000

    800,000

    Less direct fixed costs:

    Salaries

    175,000

    175,000

    350,000

    Other

    60,000

    60,000

    120,000

    Less allocated fixed costs:

    Rent

    14,118

    9,882

    24,000

    Insurance

    3,529

    2,471

    6,000

    Cleaning

    4,117

    2,883

    7,000

    President’s salary

    76,470

    53,350

    130,000

    Other

    7,058

    4,942

    12,000

    Total costs

    340,292

    380,708

    649,000

    Net Income

    $159,708

    ($ 8,708)

    $151,000

    Prepare an incremental analysis to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the furniture line.

    accounting 460873

    A copier company has been using the same Copier A for 5 years. This copier can copy approximately 50 sheets a minute. The company has an opportunity to purchase a new Copier B that can process approximately 60 sheets a minute. The old machine will continue to be used for jobs that aren’t rush jobs. The new machine will create a need for additional fixed selling expenses, an additional supervisor, and the two employees to use the machine. No other fixed costs will change.

    Please list out whether each of these costs are relevant ( R) or not relevant ( NR). Format your answer as follows: a) R, b) R, and so forth.

    a. Copier revenue

    b. Book value-Copier A

    c. Disposal value-Copier A

    d. Variable selling expenses

    e. Fixed selling expenses

    f. Depreciation of Copier A

    g. General and administrative overhead fixed

    h. Direct labor

    i. Indirect labor

    j. Market value of Copier B

    Home Improvement Company, a retail home store, has two major divisions-outdoors and indoors. Here is the data on their income and expenses:

    Total Indoor Outdoor

    Sales $85,000 $50,000 $35,000

    Variable expenses 35,000 15,000 20,000

    Contribution margin 50,000 35,000 15,000

    Fixed expenses:

    Advertising 5,000 2,000 3,000

    Supervisor salaries 19,000 10,000 9,000

    Store insurance 2,000 1,000 1,000

    General administrative 11,000 8,000 3,000

    overhead

    Total fixed expenses 37,000 21,000 16,000

    Net operating income (loss) $13,000 $14,000 (1,000)

    Due to the loss, the general manager is considering closing the outdoor division and just focusing on the indoor division. If the division were closed, the supervisor salary and the advertising costs could be eliminated. Should the division be closed? Please show your computations to support your answer.

    accounting 460874

    A corp. makes 8000 units of part G25 each year. This part is used in one of the company’s products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the part at this level of activity:

    Per unit

    Direct materials $6.70

    Direct labor $8.10

    Variable Manufacturing Overhead $1.10

    Supervisors salary $2.00

    Depreciation of Special equipment $4.20

    Allocated general overhead $2.10

    An outside supplier has offered to make and sell the part to the company for $21.20 each. If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $2000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided. In addition, the space used to produce the part G25 would be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating additional segment margin of $16,000 per year for that product. What would be the impact on the company’s overall net operating income of buying part G25 for the outside supplier?

    accounting help 460752

    Becton Labs, Inc.,
    produces various chemical compounds for industrial use. One compound, called
    Fludex, is prepared using an elaborate distilling process. The company has
    developed standard costs for one unit of Fludex, as follows:

    Standard
    Quantity

    Standard Price or
    Rate

    Standard
    Cost

    Direct materials

    1.3 ounces

    $5.70 per ounce

    $7.41

    Direct labor

    .7 hours

    $12.30 per hour

    8.61

    Variable manufacturing overhead

    .70 hours

    $2.70 per hour

    1.89

    $17.91


    During November, the following activity was
    recorded relative to production of Fludex:

    a. Materials purchased, 10,500 ounces at a cost
    of $56,700.

    b. There was no beginning
    inventory of materials; however, at the end of the month, 2,500 ounces of
    material remained in ending inventory.

    c.The company employs 40
    lab technicians to work on the production of Fludex. During November, they
    worked an average of 60.00 hours at an average rate of $13.00 per hour.

    d. Variable manufacturing
    overhead is assigned to Fludex on the basis of direct labor-hours. Variable
    manufacturing overhead costs during November totaled $5,520.

    e. During November, 4,000 good units of Fludex
    were produced.

    The company’s management is anxious to
    determine the efficiency of the Fludex production activities.

    Requirement 1:

    For direct materials used in the production of
    Fludex:

    (a)

    Compute the price and
    quantity variances. (Indicate the effect of
    each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for
    unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input
    all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your
    response.)

    Materials price variance (Click to select)UFNone

    Materials quantity variance (Click to select)UNoneF

    (b)

    The materials were
    purchased from a new supplier who is anxious to enter into a long-term
    purchase contract. Would you recommend that the company sign the contract?

    (Click to select)NoYes

    Requirement 2:

    For direct labor employed in the production of
    Fludex:

    (a)

    Compute the rate and
    efficiency variances. (Indicate the effect of
    each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for
    unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input
    all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to the nearest dollar
    amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Labor rate variance (Click to select)FNoneU

    Labor efficiency variance (Click to select)UNoneF

    (b)

    In the past, the 40
    technicians employed in the production of Fludex consisted of 20 senior
    technicians and 15 assistants. During November, the company experimented with
    fewer senior technicians and more assistants in order to save costs. Would
    you recommend that the new labor mix be continued?

    (Click to select)NoYes

    Requirement 3:

    (a)

    Compute the variable
    overhead rate and efficiency variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F”
    for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no
    effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Round
    your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in
    your response.)

    Variable overhead rate variance

    $

    (Click to select)NoneFU

    Variable overhead efficiency variance

    $

    (Click to select)UFNone

    (b)

    What relation can you see between this
    efficiency variance and the labor efficiency variance?

    (Click to select)Independent.Directly related.

    equivalent units schedule 460756

    At the beginning of 2012, the management of Patrick’s Practice Sets has decided to begin a small manufacturing process that will print the practice sets and then bind them. The manufacturing process begins with the printing of the practice sets. The practice sets are then collated and bound. After they are inspected, they are transferred to finished goods. This is a process costs system and the company elects to use the FIFIO method of accounting for product costs. Assume there are no significant material or labor variances.

    DIrect materials

    Paper is added 100% at the beginning of the process

    Binding is added 100% as the last step in the manufacturing process

    Conversion costs

    Direct labor and factory overhead are added equally throughout the process

    At the beginning of the accounting period, it is estimated that production will be 60,000 practice sets. Estimated factory overhead for the period is $30,000. This information is to be used to determine rate for the factory overhead.

    Direct materials

    Purchase of paper 12,000 reams @ $3.00 a ream

    Each ream contains 500 sheets of paper and each practice set contains 100 sheets of paper.

    The company starts printing of 55,000 practice sets

    Purchase of 60,000 units of binding @ $.15

    Used 46,000 units of bindings this period

    Estimated and actual direct labor costs totaled $96,500

    Actual factory overhead costs totaled $27,000

    Ending work in process is 100% complete as to paper

    25% complete as to conversion costs

    0% complete as to binding

    The finished good inventory at January 1, 2012 had a balance of 30,000 practice sets and at December 31, 2012 had an ending balance of 40,000 practice sets.

    The selling price of each practice set is $10.00

    Assume all material purchases and sales were made on account.

    Assume all other transactions were on the cash basis

    Operating expense this period totaled $80,000

    1. Prepare an equivalent units schedule. The schedule should have a minimum of the following information. (XXX represents a number)

    Whole Units Direct Materials Direct Materials Conversion Costs

    Paper Binding

    Beginning XXX XXX XXX XXX

    Start/Comp XXX XXX XXX XXX

    Ending XXX XXX XXX XXX

    2. Calculate the cost per equivalent unit for the direct materials (paper) direct materials (bindings) and conversion costs. (Do not round your numbers)

    3. Prepare a cost production report using FIFO costing.

    using capital expedentures 460762

    Blake Company incurred the following equipment related costs:

    Purchase of factory equipment ($27,000 list price. $2,000 cash discount given)

    25,000

    Installation charges related to factory equipment

    15,000

    Repainting executive offices

    5,000

    Buying land for new office building

    100,000

    General contractor’s fee on new office building

    40,000

    Cost of regularly scheduled maintenance on new factory equipment

    6,000

    Cost to put in parking lot for office building

    30,000

    Cost to wire new building

    14,000

    Cost of major remodel of factory

    150,000

    Determining classification of debt as of 12/31/08

    Current

    Long term

    $100,000 note at 7% interest, payment terms are $10,000 (plus interest) per year for the next 10 years. Borrowed 11/1/08. First payment due 10/31/08

    $350,000 note at 7% interest, due in equal annual installments of $85,362. Borrowed 7/1/08. First payment due 6/30/09

    what journal entry should i use 460767

    The Boston Metropolitan Bank which started operations a year back wants to estimate its loan loss provision for the year 2009. The loan loss provision is intended to capture the expected losses that the bank is expected to incur due to loan defaults. On Dec. 31st, 2008 the debit balance in the Provision account was $500,000. Given the rapidly changing U.S. economy, the bank knew that using a simple percentage of loan assets based on past experience to estimate its loan loss provision may not be appropriate. Therefore it wants to simulate its expected losses due to loan defaults to arrive at a more realistic measure of the loan loss provision. The Bank knows that while agricultural loan losses often tend to be normally distributed, retail loan defaults follow a triangular distribution. The bank has the following data available at its disposal.

    Max Loss Min Loss Most Likey Loss Mean Std. Dev

    Agricultural Loans $1m $60,000 $500,000 200,000

    Retail Loans $700,000 $75,000 $300,000

    What journal entry should be entered on Jan 1st 2009 to record the loan
    loss provision?

    i just need someone to double check my answer on accounting hwk thanks 460768

    Boyle’s Home Center, a retailing company, has two departments, Bath and Kitchen. The company’s most recent monthly contribution format income statement follows:

    Departments: Bath Kitchen

    Sales: Total $ 4,220,000 Bath $ 1,070,000 Kitchen $3,150,000

    Variable expenses: Total $1,326,000 Bath $415,000 Kitchen:$911,000

    Contribution margin: Total: $2,894,000 Bath:$655,000 Kitchen $2,239,000

    Fixed expenses: Total: $2,160,000 Bath: $860,000 Kitchen:$1,300,000

    Net operating income (loss): Total: $ 734,000 bath: $ (205,000 ) Kitchen: $ 939,000

    A study indicates that $378,000 of the fixed expenses being charged to the Bath Department are sunk costs or allocated costs that will continue even if the Bath Department is dropped. In addition, the elimination of the Bath Department would result in a 14% decrease in the sales of the Kitchen Department.

    Required:

    If the Bath Department is dropped, what will be the effect on the net operating income of the company as a whole? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    in net operating income $

    What I did:

    Contribution Margin of Bath – (Contribution Margin of Kitchen*14%) to get total lost contribution margin = 655000 – 313460= 341540

    Then I subtracted the less avoidable fixed costs ($860000 – 378000)= 482000

    Then I subtract 341540 and 482000 = -140460.

    This is decrease in overal net operating income $-140460.

    IS THIS RIGHT? THANKS.

    managerial accounting question 460769

    The Brandilyn Toy Company manufactures a line of dolls and a doll dress sewing kit. Demand for the dolls is increasing, and management requests assistance from you in determining the best sales and production mix for the coming year. The company has provided the following data:

    Product Demand

    Next year

    (units) Selling

    Price

    per Unit Direct

    Materials Direct

    Labor

    Marcy 31,000 $39.00 $3.20 $6.00

    Tina 46,000 $26.00 $3.10 $2.40

    Cari 33,000 $18.00 $4.70 $7.80

    Lenny 41,000 $14.00 $2.60 $6.60

    Sewing kit 490,000 $17.00 $1.50 $1.80

    The following additional information is available:

    a.

    The company’s plant has a capacity of 129,100 direct labor-hours per year on a single-shift basis. The company’s present employees and equipment can produce all five products.

    b. The direct labor rate of $12.00 per hour is expected to remain unchanged during the coming year.

    c. Fixed costs total $396,000 per year. Variable overhead costs are $5.00 per direct labor-hour.

    d. All of the company’s nonmanufacturing costs are fixed.

    e. The company’s finished goods inventory is negligible and can be ignored.

    Required:

    1.

    Determine the contribution margin per direct labor-hour expended on each product. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Product Contribution

    margin per DLH

    Marcy $

    Tina $

    Cari $

    Lenny $

    Sewing Kit $

    2.

    Calculate the the total direct labor-hours that will be required to produce the units estimated to be sold during the coming year. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Product Total

    DLHs

    Marcy

    Tina

    Cari

    Lenny

    Sewing Kit

    Total DLHs required

    4.

    What is the highest price, in terms of a rate per hour, that Brandilyn Toy Company should be willing to pay for additional capacity (that is, for added direct labor time)? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Highest price $ per hour

    managerial accounting 460770

    Bravo Baking identified the costs below to determine its cost of one unit of product and its monthly operating costs.The units produced is 14,000.

    Table A Variable Fixed

    Materials used in baking bread 2.29

    Factory Supervisor Salaries 0.12

    Bakers Wages 2.29

    Rent for Execitive offices 3000

    Factory Supervisor Salaries 3500

    Utilities used in the factory 0.50

    Advertising costs 1000

    Delivery truck depreciation 400

    Depreciation on bake ovens 0.07

    Interest on bank loan 500

    Total costs $5.27 $8400.00

    Price Charged per unit $7.77

    I need the solutions to the below questions by using the information in Table A

    Using the costs from Table A compute the below questions.

    A) Breakeven units (rounded to 2 decimal places)

    B) Break-even sales dollars

    C) Contribution Margin

    D) Contribution Margin Ratio (%)

    Part II Complete the following requirements

    A) If Bravo requires a profit of $5,000 how many units must it sell?

    B) What is the total revenue from A above?

    C) If Bravo actually sells 8,000 units (Hint: Use Break Even $ from B Above)

    1) What is the margin of safety in Dollars

    2) What is the margin of safety percentage?

    balance sheet 460772

    Bruno Company has decided to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented below in order to obtain additional funds for expansion.

    BRUNO COMPANY

    Balance Sheet

    December 31, 2010

    Current assets

    Cash $260,000

    Accounts receivable (net) 340,000

    Inventories at lower of average cost or market 401,000

    Trading securities-at cost (fair value $120,000) 140,000

    Property, plant, and equipment

    Building (net) 570,000

    Office equipment (net) 160,000

    Land held for future use 175,000

    Intangible assets

    Goodwill 80,000

    Cash surrender value of life insurance 90,000

    Prepaid expenses 12,000

    Current liabilities

    Accounts payable 135,000

    Notes payable (due next year) 125,000

    Pension obligation 82,000

    Rent payable 49,000

    Premium on bonds payable 53,000

    Long-term liabilities

    Bonds payable 500,000

    Stockholders’ equity

    Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized

    400,000 shares, issued 290,000 290,000

    Additional paid-in capital 180,000

    Retained earnings ?

    Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $160,000 and for the office equipment, $105,000. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $17,000. The pension obligation is considered a long-term liability. (List current assets in order of liquidity. List multiple entries for Property, plant and equipment, Long-term investments and Current liabilities from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 3.)

    help with a cost of goods section please 460775

    The budget committee of Hardesty Company collects the following data for its San Miguel Store in preparing budgeted income statements for May and June 2012.

    Sales for May are expected to be $800,000. Sales in June and July are expected to be 10% higher than the preceding month.

    Cost of goods sold is expected to be 75% of sales.

    Company policy is to maintain ending merchandise inventory at 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold.

    Operating expenses are estimated to be:

    Sales salaries $30,000 per month

    Advertising 5% of monthly sales

    Delivery expense 3% of monthly sales

    Sales commissions 4% of monthly sales

    Rent expense $5,000 per month

    Depreciation $800 per month

    Utilities $600 per month

    Insurance $500 per month

    Budgeted Income Statement

    May June

    Sales 800,000 880,000

    I need to know how to do the rest of the cost of goods section?

    budget 460776

    Budgeted cash sales

    15,000

    18,000

    16,000

    Budgeted credit sales

    20,000

    21,000

    22,000

    Budgeted inventory purchases

    22,000

    24,000

    28,000

    Budgeted selling and admin expenses

    3,000

    2,000

    2,500

    Credit sales are expected to be collected 60% in month of sale; 40% in month following

    Inventory purchases are expected to be paid 50% in month of purchase; 50% in month following

    All selling and admin expenses are expected to be paid in full in month incurred. Depreciation expense is

    included in budget at $500 per month

    Company budgets the purchase of equipment in February for $45,000

    Company maintains a minimum cash balance of $10,000

    Interest rate for any borrowings is 6%. Borrowings (and repayments) are always made on the last day of the month

    Prepare a cash budget for January, February and March.

    question 2 cash receipts from sales 460777

    Budgeted sales revenue for the coming five months is as follows:

    Month Sales revenue
    August $110,000
    September $105,000
    October $150,000
    November $110,000
    December $170,000

    You estimate that you will collect 30% of sales revenue in the month of sale, 35% in the following month, 30% two months after the sale, and the remaining 5% three months after the sale.

    Required:

    a) Compute budgeted cash inflows for November and December.
    November = $
    December = $
    (Hint: pay attention to the timing, e.g. “35% is collected in the following month” means 35% of August revenue is collected in September, i.e., cash receipts (inflows) for September include 35% of previous month’s sales revenue.)

    b) Is it possible for a firm to run out of cash even though it is profitable? If no, explain why not, if yes, give an example of how that can happen.

    overhead rate 460781

    Cabigas Company manufactures two products, Product C and Product D. The company estimated it would incur $167,140 in manufacturing overhead costs during the current period. Overhead currently is applied to the products on the basis of direct labor hours.

    Data concerning the current period’s operations appear below:

    Product C Product D

    Estimated volume 2,000 units 2,700 units

    Direct labor hours per unit 2.00 hours 0.80 hour

    Total Hours 4000 hour 2160 hours

    Direct materials cost per unit $21.50 $24.10

    Direct labor cost per unit $24.00 $ 9.60

    Required:

    Compute the predetermined overhead rate under the current method, and determine the unit product cost of each product for the current year.

    lifo fifo ending outing 460783

    Calculate Ending Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold under FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average

    Beginning inv

    25

    110

    2,750

    Purchased 10/1

    10

    125

    1,250

    Purchased 10/14

    20

    125

    2,500

    Purchased 10/25

    10

    130

    1,300

    65

    7,800

    On hand at 10/31

    35

    standard costing and variance analysis 460785

    Camping for Fun, Inc., produces a variety of camping products on a year-round basis. The best-selling item is a compact portable camping stove made from sheets of rust-free aluminum. Production of this stove requires two main operations: cutting/assembly and coating. The basic direct materials use are aluminum sheeting, a polyurethane base coating, and a gas jet assembly. Quantity, time, and cost standards for the camping stove are as follows:

    Direct materials consist of sheet aluminum (two 2-by-3-meter sheets per stove at $1.15 per sheet), 1.2 liters of coating materials per stove at $.80 per liter, and a gas jet assembly purchased at $11.30. Direct labor in the Cutting/Assembly Department is expected to produce 50 stoves per hour at $9.50 per hour. Direct Labor in the Coating Department can handle 32 stoves per hour at $8 per hour. Normal capacity is 126,000 stoves per year.

    The firm actually produced 120,000 units during the year, and the production records contain the following information:

    For direct materials, the firm used 241,200 sheets of aluminum at $1.10 per sheet, 148,500 liters of coating at $0.77 per liter, and 120,100 gas jet assemblies costing a total of $1,369,140. Direct lobor in the Cutting/Assembly Department amounted to 2,800 hours at $9.25 per hour; in Coating Department, it amounted to 3,560 hours at $7.50 per hour.

    Using the information provided, determine the following (remember to indicate whether the variance is favorable or unfavorable):

    a. Standard hours allowed for the Cutting/Assembly and Coating Departments for the year(by department)

    b. Direct materials price variances (by material)

    c. Direct materials quantity variances (by material)

    d. Direct labor rate variances (by department)

    e. Direct labor efficiency variances (by department)

    cardinal castles accounting assignment 460787

    Cardinal Castles, Inc., makes one type of birdhouse that it sells for $30 each. Its variable cost is $14 per house, and its fixed costs total $13,840 per year. Cardinal currently has the capacity to produce up to 2,000 birdhouses per year, so its relevant range is zero to 2,000 houses.

    1: Prepare a contribution margin income statement for Cardinal assuming it sells 1,100 birdhouses this year. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cardinal Castles, Inc.

    Contribution Margin Income Statement

    Sales revenue:__________

    less: variable costs:__________

    contribution margin:__________

    less: fixed costs:__________

    income from operations:__________

    2: Without any calculations, determine Cardinal’s total contribution margin if the company breaks even. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total contribution margin:$__________

    3: Calculate Cardinal’s contribution margin per unit and its contribution margin ratio. (Round your contribution margin ratio answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)

    Unit contribution margin:$__________

    Contribution margin ratio:__________%

    4: Calculate Cardinal’s break-even point in number of units and in sales dollars. (Round your unit answer to the next whole number. Round your sales dollars answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Break-even units:__________units

    Break-even sales dollars:$__________

    5: Suppose Cardinal wants to earn $20,000 this year. Determine how many birdhouses it must sell to generate this amount of profit.

    Target unit sales:__________units

    available for sale investments 460788

    Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.

    Feb. 1, 2012 Sharapova Company common stock, $100 par, 200 shares $37,400
    April 1 U.S. government bonds, 11%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 110 bonds of $1,000 par each 110,000
    July 1 McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $50,000, dated March 1, 2012 purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032 54,000

    Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale.

    Fill in the debit/credit values.
    Description/Account Debit Credit
    Debit Investments (AFS)

    Equity Investments (AFS)

    Interest Revenue 2000

    Investments

    help 460790

    Carter Company manufactures cappuccino makers. For the first eight months of the year the company reported the following operating results while operating at 80% of plant capacity:

    Sales (500,000 units) $75,000,000

    Cost of goods sold 45,000,000

    Gross profit 30,000,000

    Operating expenses 24,000,000

    Net income $6,000,000

    An analysis of costs and expenses reveals that variable cost of goods sold is $80 per unit and variable operating expenses are $30 per unit.

    In September, Carter Company receives a special order for 40,000 machines at $120 each from a major coffee shop franchise. Acceptance of the order would result in $10,000 of shipping costs but no increase in fixed expenses.

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order. Should Carter Company accept the special order? Justify your answer.

    case 3 2 critical think case 460792

    Case 3.2, Measuring Income Fairly

    Kim Morris purchased Print Shop, Inc., a printing business, from Chris Stanley. Morris made a cash down payment and agreed to make annual payments equal to 40 percent of the company’s net income in each of the next three years. (Such “earn-outs” are a common means of financing the purchase of a small business.) Stanley was disappointed, however, when Morris reported a first year’s net income far below Stanley’s expectations.

    The agreement between Morris and Stanley did not state precisely how “net income” was to be measured. Neither Morris nor Stanley was familiar with accounting concepts. Their agreement stated only that the net income of the corporation should be measured in a “fair and reasonable manner.”

    In measuring net income, Morris applied the following policies:

    Revenue was recognized when cash was received from customers. Most customers paid in cash, but a few were allowed thirty-day credit terms.

    Expenditures for ink and paper, which are purchased weekly, were charged directly to Supplies Expense, as were the Morris family’s weekly grocery and dry cleaning bills.

    Morris set her annual salary at $60,000, which Stanley had agreed was reasonable. She also paid salaries of $30,000 per year to her husband and to each of her two teenage children. These family members did not work in the business on a regular basis, but they did help out when things got busy.

    Income taxes expense included the amount paid by the corporation (which was computed correctly), as well as the personal income taxes paid by various members of the Morris family on the salaries they earned working for the business.

    The business had state-of-the-art printing equipment valued at $150,000 at the time Morris purchased it. The first-year income statement included a $150,000 equipment expense related to these assets.

    Q1 Discuss the fairness and reasonableness of these income-measurement policies. (Remember, these policies do not have to conform to generally accepted accounting principles. But they should be fair and reasonable.)

    Q2 Do you think that the net cash flow generated by this business (cash receipts less cash outlays) is higher or lower than the net income as measured by Morris? Explain.

    case study 2 springfield express 460793

    Case Study 2

    Springfield Express is a luxury passenger carrier in Texas. All seats are first class, and the following data are available:

    Number of seats per passenger train car 90

    Average load factor (percentage of seats filled) 70%

    Average full passenger fare $ 160

    Average variable cost per passenger $ 70

    Fixed operating cost per month $3,150,000

    a. What is the break-even point in passengers and revenues per month?

    b. What is the break-even point in number of passenger train cars per month?

    c. If Springfield Express raises its average passenger fare to $ 190, it is estimated that the average load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the monthly break-even point in number of passenger cars?

    d. (Refer to original data.) Fuel cost is a significant variable cost to any railway. If crude oil increases by $ 20 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will rise to $ 90. What will be the new break-even point in passengers and in number of passenger train cars?

    e. Springfield Express has experienced an increase in variable cost per passenger to $ 85 and an increase in total fixed cost to $ 3,600,000. The company has decided to raise the average fare to $ 205. If the tax rate is 30 percent, how many passengers per month are needed to generate an after-tax profit of $ 750,000?

    f. (Use original data). Springfield Express is considering offering a discounted fare of $ 120, which the company believes would increase the load factor to 80 percent. Only the additional seats would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising cost would be $ 180,000. How much pre-tax income would the discounted fare provide Springfield Express if the company has 50 passenger train cars per day, 30 days per month?

    g. Springfield Express has an opportunity to obtain a new route that would be traveled 20 times per month. The company believes it can sell seats at $ 175 on the route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. Fixed cost would increase by $ 250,000 per month for additional personnel, additional passenger train cars, maintenance, and so on. Variable cost per passenger would remain at $ 70.

    1. Should the company obtain the route?

    2. How many passenger train cars must Springfield Express operate to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?

    3. If the load factor could be increased to 75 percent, how many passenger train cars must be operated to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?

    4. What qualitative factors should be considered by Springfield Express in making its decision about acquiring this route?

    ae6 5 460797

    Catlet Co. uses a periodic inventory system. Its records show the following for the month of May in which 65 units were sold.

    Date Explanation Units UnitCost TotalCost
    May 1 Inventory 30 $9.44 $283.20
    May 15 Purchases 25 12.44 311.00
    May 24 Purchases

    35

    13.44

    470.40

    Totals

    90

    $1,064.60

    Compute the ending inventory at May 31 and cost of goods sold using the FIFO and LIFO methods. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)

    FIFO LIFO
    Ending Inventory $ $
    Cost of goods sold $ $

    reporting investing activities 460693

    An analysis of the income statement and the balance sheet accounts of Hayes Export Co. at December 31, 2011 provides the following information:

    Income statement items:

    Gain on Sale of Plant Assets $ 12,000

    Loss on Sales of Marketable Securities 16,000

    Analysis of balance sheet accounts:

    Marketable Securities account:

    Debit entries $ 78,000

    Credit entries 62,000

    Notes Receivable account:

    Debit entries 55,000

    Credit entries 60,000

    Plant and Equipment accounts:

    Debit entries to plant asset accounts 150,000

    Credit entries to plant asset accounts 140,000

    Debit entries to accumulated depreciation accounts 100,000

    1.

    Except as noted in 4 below, payments and proceeds relating to investing transactions were made in cash.

    2.

    The marketable securities are not cash equivalents.

    3.

    All notes receivable relate to cash loans made to borrowers, not to receivables from customers.

    4.

    Purchases of new equipment during the year ($150,000) were financed by paying $50,000 in cash and issuing a long-term note payable for $100,000.

    5.

    Debits to the accumulated depreciation accounts are made whenever depreciable plant assets are sold or retired. Thus, the book value of plant assets sold or retired during the year was $40,000 ($140,000 – $100,000).

    Instructions

    a.

    Prepare the investing activities section of a statement of cash flows. Show supporting computations for the amounts of (1) proceeds from sales of marketable securities and (2) proceeds from sales of plant assets. Place brackets around amounts representing cash outflows.

    b.

    Prepare the supplementary schedule that should accompany the statement of cash flows in order to disclose the noncash aspects of the company’s investing and financing activities.

    c.

    Does management have more control or less control over the timing and amount of cash outlays for investing activities than for operating activities? Explain.

    analyzing and computing average issue price and treasury stock cost 460695

    Analyzing and Computing Average Issue Price and Treasury Stock Cost
    Following is the stockholders’ equity section from the Campbell Soup CompanyAc€ balance sheet.

    Shareholders’ Equity (millions, except per share amounts) August 3, 2008 July 29, 2007
    Preferred stock: authorized 40 shares; none issued $ __ $ __
    Capital stock, $0.0375 par value; authorized 560 shares;
    issued 532 shares
    20 20
    Additional paid-in capital 337 331
    Earnings retained in the business 7,927 7,132
    Capital stock in treasury, 186 shares in 2008 and
    163 shares in 2007, at cost
    (6,812) (6,015)
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss (136) (123)
    Total shareowners’ equity $1,336 $1,345

    Campbell Soup Company also reports the following statement of stockholders’ equity.

    (Millions, except per
    share amounts)
    Capital Stock Additional
    Paid-in
    Capital
    Earnings
    Retained
    in the
    Business
    Accumulated
    Other
    Comprehensive
    Income (Loss)
    Total
    Share-
    owners’
    Equity
    Issued In Treasury
    Shares Amount Shares Amount
    Balance at July 29, 2007 532 $20 (163) $(6,015) $331 $7,132 $(123) $1,345
    Comprehensive income (loss)
    Net earnings 1,165 1,165
    Foreign currency translation
    adjustments, net of tax
    112 112
    Cash-flow hedges, net of tax 11 11
    Pension and postretirement
    benefits, net of tax
    (136) (136)
    Other comprehensive loss (13) (13)
    Total comprehensive income 1,152
    Impact on adoption of FIN 48
    (Note 10)
    (18) (18)
    Dividends ($0.88 per share) (352) (352)
    Treasury stock purchased (26) (903) (903)
    Treasury stock issued under
    management incentive and
    stock option plans
    3 106 6 112
    Balance at August 3, 2008 532 $20 (186) $(6,812) $337 $7,927 $(136) $1,336

    (b) At what average price were the Campbell Soup shares issued? (Round your answer to two decimal places.)
    $ 2

    prior period adjustment of retained earnings 460696

    Andy’s Skateboards, Inc. reported a retained earnings balance of $300,000 at December 31, 2008. In June 2009, Andy’s internal audit staff discovered two errors that were made in preparing the 2008 financial statements that are considered material:

    a. Merchandise costing $50,000 that was on consignment at various consignee locations was mistakenly omitted from the 2008 ending inventory.

    b. Equipment purchased in January 2, 2008 for $150,000 was appropriately capitalized and depreciated using straight-line depreciation, a 10-year useful life, and $5,000 salvage value. The capitalized amount included $30,000 for repairs of the equipment which suffered major damage when it was struck by a forklift during installation.

    Required:

    What amount should Andy’s Skateboards report as a prior period adjustment to beginning retained earnings at January 1, 2009? (Ignore taxes)

    Give the journal entries that Andy’s Skateboards would make in June 2009 to correct the errors made in 2008. Assume that depreciation for 2009 is made as a year-end adjusting entry. (Ignore taxes)

    accounting cost allocation 460701

    Answer the following questions in detail and showing all work:

    1.NBS, Inc. is a technology consulting firm focused on Website development and integration of Internet business applications. The president of the company expects to incur $719,600 of indirect costs this year, and she expects her firm to work 8,000 direct labor hours. NBS’ systems consultants earn $350 per hour. Clients are billed at 150% of direct labor cost. Last month NBS’ consultants spend 100 hours on Windstream’s project.

    a. Compute NBS’ indirect cost allocation rate per direct labor hour.

    b. Compute the total cost assignment to the Windstream project.

    c. Compute operating income from the Windstream project.

    2. Brannon Company manufactures ceiling fans and uses the activity-based costing system. Each ceiling fan consists of 20 separate parts totaling $95 in direct materials, and requires 2.5 hours of machine time to produce. Additional information:

    Activity Allocation Base Cost Allocation Rate

    Materials handling Number of parts $.08

    Machining Machine hours $7.20

    Assembling Number of parts $.35

    Packaging Number of finished units $2.70

    a. What is the cost of materials handling per ceiling fan?

    b. What is the cost of machining per ceiling fan?

    c. Compare and contrast the ABC costing to more traditional costing methods. What are the main benefits of ABC?

    3. Explain, in your own words, what “Management by Exception” is and how it is used. (detailed info located in chapter lecture notes)

    4. Explain how management uses “performance variances” to help run a profitable company.

    accounting cost allocation 460704

    Answer the following questions in detail and showing all work:

    1.NBS, Inc. is a technology consulting firm focused on Website development and integration of Internet business applications. The president of the company expects to incur $719,600 of indirect costs this year, and she expects her firm to work 8,000 direct labor hours. NBS’ systems consultants earn $350 per hour. Clients are billed at 150% of direct labor cost. Last month NBS’ consultants spend 100 hours on Windstream’s project.

    a. Compute NBS’ indirect cost allocation rate per direct labor hour.

    b. Compute the total cost assignment to the Windstream project.

    c. Compute operating income from the Windstream project.

    2. Brannon Company manufactures ceiling fans and uses the activity-based costing system. Each ceiling fan consists of 20 separate parts totaling $95 in direct materials, and requires 2.5 hours of machine time to produce. Additional information:

    Activity Allocation Base Cost Allocation Rate

    Materials handling Number of parts $.08

    Machining Machine hours $7.20

    Assembling Number of parts $.35

    Packaging Number of finished units $2.70

    a. What is the cost of materials handling per ceiling fan?

    b. What is the cost of machining per ceiling fan?

    c. Compare and contrast the ABC costing to more traditional costing methods. What are the main benefits of ABC?

    3. Explain, in your own words, what “Management by Exception” is and how it is used. (detailed info located in chapter lecture notes)

    4. Explain how management uses “performance variances” to help run a profitable company.

    contribution margin per labor hour accounting help 460711

    Aon Company produces three products: A, B, and C. The selling price, variable costs, and contribution margin for one unit of each product follow:

    Product

    A B C

    Selling price $120 $180 $130

    Variable costs:

    Direct materials 71.40 65.40 80.70

    Direct labor 10.50 28.00 14.00

    Variable

    manufacturing overhead 2.10 5.60 2.80

    Total variable cost 84.00 99.00 97.50

    Contribution margin $ 36.00 $ 81.00 $ 32.50

    Contribution margin ratio 30% 45 % 25 %

    Due to a strike in the plant of one of its competitors, demand for the company’s products far exceeds its capacity to produce. Management is trying to determine which product(s) to concentrate on next week in filling its backlog of orders. The direct labor rate is $7 per hour, and only 3,560 hours of labor time are available each week.

    Required:

    1.

    Compute the amount of contribution margin that will be obtained per hour of labor time spent on each product. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Contribution margin per labor hour for A is?

    Contribution margin per labor hour for B is?

    Contribution margin per labor hour for C is?

    2.

    Which orders would you recommend that the company work on next week”the orders for product A, product B, or product C?

    Product A

    Product C

    Product B

    3.

    By paying overtime wages, more than 3,560 hours of direct labor time can be made available next week. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay per hour in overtime wages as long as there is unfilled demand for the three products? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Maximum amount $ per hour

    managerial acct calculate the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product l 460713

    AP6-4A

    The Creekside Inn is a restaurant in Tucson, Arizona. It specializes in southwestern style meals in a moderate price range. Will Feld, the manager of Creekside, has determined that during the last 2 years the sales mix and contribution margin ratio of its offerings are as follows.

    Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio

    Appetizers 10% 80%

    Main entrees 50% 30%

    Desserts 10% 60%

    Beverages 30% 80%

    Will is considering a variety of options to try to improve the profitability of the restaurant. Her goal is to generate a target net income of $151,300. The company has fixed costs of $1,432,870 per year.

    a) Calculate the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    Appetizers $

    Main entrees $

    Desserts $

    Beverages $

    Total restaurant sales

    b) Will believes the restaurant could greatly improve its profitability by reducing the complexity and selling price of its entrees to increase the number of clients that it serves. It would then more heavily market its appetizers and beverages. She is proposing to drop the contribution margin ratio on the main entrees to 10% by dropping the average selling price. She envisions an expansion of the restaurant that would increase fixed costs by 50%. At the same time, she is proposing to change the sales mix to the following.

    Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio

    Appetizers 20% 80%

    Main entrees 30% 10%

    Desserts 10% 60%

    Beverages 40% 80%

    Compute the total restaurant sales, and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    Appetizers $

    Main entrees $

    Desserts $

    Beverages $

    Total restaurant sales

    c) Suppose that Will drops the selling price on entrees and increases fixed costs as proposed in the second part of the question, but customers are not swayed by the marketing efforts and the sales mix remains what it was in the first part of the question. Compute the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    Appetizers $

    Main entrees $

    Desserts $

    Beverages $

    Total restaurant sales

    Need answers ASAP with explanation plz!

    can anyone help me and solve this q plz the creekside inn is a restaurant in tucson 460715

    AP6-4A

    The Creekside Inn is a restaurant in Tucson, Arizona. It specializes in southwestern style meals in a moderate price range. Will Feld, the manager of Creekside, has determined that during the last 2 years the sales mix and contribution margin ratio of its offerings are as follows.

    Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio
    Appetizers 10% 80%
    Main entrees 60% 20%
    Desserts 10% 40%
    Beverages 20% 80%

    Will is considering a variety of options to try to improve the profitability of the restaurant. Her goal is to generate a target net income of $149,400. The company has fixed costs of $1,051,000 per year.

    Calculate the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    Appetizers $
    Main entree $
    Desserts $
    Beverages $
    Total restaurant sales $

    Incorrect.

    Will believes the restaurant could greatly improve its profitability by reducing the complexity and selling price of its entrees to increase the number of clients that it serves. It would then more heavily market its appetizers and beverages. She is proposing to drop the contribution margin ratio on the main entrees to 10% by dropping the average selling price. She envisions an expansion of the restaurant that would increase fixed costs by 50%. At the same time, she is proposing to change the sales mix to the following
    Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio

    Appetizers 20% 80%
    Main entrees 30% 10%
    Desserts 10% 40%
    Beverages 40% 80%

    Compute the total restaurant sales, and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

    Appetizers $
    Main entrees $
    Desserts $
    Beverages $

    Total restaurant sales $

    Suppose that Will drops the selling price on entrees and increases fixed costs as proposed in the second part of the question, but customers are not swayed by the marketing efforts and the sales mix remains what it was in the first part of the question. Compute the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
    Appetizers $
    Main entrees $
    Desserts $
    Beverages $

    Total restaurant sales $

    journalize the transaciton 460717

    AP7-3A

    The chart of accounts of Lopez Company includes the following selected accounts.

    112 Accounts Receivable 401 Sales

    120 Merchandise Inventory 412 Sales Returns and Allowances

    126 Supplies 505 Cost of Goods Sold

    157 Equipment 610 Advertising Expense

    201 Accounts Payable

    In July the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account. The cost of all merchandise sold was 70% of the sales price.

    July 1 Purchased merchandise from Fritz Company $7,568.

    2 Received freight bill from Wayward Shipping on Fritz purchase $384.

    3 Made sales to Pinick Company $1,190, and to Wayne Bros. $1,500.

    5 Purchased merchandise from Moon Company $3,251.

    8 Received credit on merchandise returned to Moon Company $347.

    13 Purchased store supplies from Cress Supply $672.

    15 Purchased merchandise from Fritz Company $3,562 and from Anton Company $3,226.

    16 Made sales to Sager Company $3,980 and to Wayne Bros. $1,480.

    18 Received bill for advertising from Lynda Advertisements $579.

    21 Sales were made to Pinick Company $110 and to Haddad Company $3,400.

    22 Granted allowance to Pinick Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $46.

    24 Purchased merchandise from Moon Company $3,049.

    26 Purchased equipment from Cress Supply $840.

    28 Received freight bill from Wayward Shipping on Moon purchase of July 24, $428.

    30 Sales were made to Sager Company $5,340.

    Instructions

    (a) Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank. For multiple entries on the same day, list in the same order presented in the problem.)

    Purchases Journal

    P1

    Date

    Account Credited

    Ref.

    Accounts Payable Cr.

    Merch. Inventory Dr.

    Other Accounts Dr.

    July 1 Lynda AdvertisementsCress SupplyWayne Bros.Sager CompanyMerchandise InventorySalesHaddad CompanySuppliesMoon CompanyEquipmentAnton CompanyPinick CompanySales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseFritz CompanyWayward Shipping P

    2 Haddad CompanySuppliesMerchandise InventoryMoon CompanyCress SupplyEquipmentSales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldSalesWayne Bros.Anton CompanyFritz CompanyAdvertising ExpenseWayward ShippingLynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanySager Company P

    5 Moon CompanyFritz CompanyWayne Bros.Anton CompanyMerchandise InventoryPinick CompanySalesHaddad CompanySales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldSuppliesAdvertising ExpenseEquipmentCress SupplyWayward ShippingLynda AdvertisementsSager Company P

    13 Sager CompanySales Returns and AllowancesMoon CompanyAnton CompanyCost of Goods SoldHaddad CompanyLynda AdvertisementsMerchandise InventoryAdvertising ExpenseWayne Bros.SuppliesPinick CompanyCress SupplyEquipmentFritz CompanySalesWayward Shipping 126/P

    15 Wayne Bros.Pinick CompanyCress SupplySager CompanyMerchandise InventoryLynda AdvertisementsAnton CompanyHaddad CompanySuppliesAdvertising ExpenseEquipmentSalesSales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldMoon CompanyFritz CompanyWayward Shipping P

    15 EquipmentAnton CompanyCost of Goods SoldSalesCress SupplySales Returns and AllowancesAdvertising ExpenseWayne Bros.Pinick CompanySager CompanyFritz CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanyLynda AdvertisementsHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventorySupplies P

    18 Sales Returns and AllowancesSuppliesEquipmentSalesPinick CompanyCost of Goods SoldSager CompanyHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventoryAdvertising ExpenseLynda AdvertisementsFritz CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanyAnton CompanyWayne Bros.Cress Supply 610/P

    24 Wayne Bros.Cress SupplyAnton CompanySuppliesEquipmentLynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanyWayward ShippingSager CompanySales Returns and AllowancesFritz CompanyHaddad CompanyAdvertising ExpenseMerchandise InventorySalesCost of Goods SoldMoon Company P

    26 Sales Returns and AllowancesWayward ShippingSalesAdvertising ExpenseSager CompanyEquipmentCress SupplyHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventoryLynda AdvertisementsWayne Bros.SuppliesMoon CompanyCost of Goods SoldPinick CompanyFritz CompanyAnton Company 157/P

    28 Lynda AdvertisementsSuppliesSager CompanyEquipmentSalesCost of Goods SoldHaddad CompanyWayne Bros.Pinick CompanyAnton CompanyMoon CompanyMerchandise InventorySales Returns and AllowancesCress SupplyAdvertising ExpenseWayward ShippingFritz Company P

    (201) (120) (X)

    Sales Journal

    S1

    Date

    Account Debited

    Ref.

    Accounts Receivable Dr.

    Sales Cr.

    Cost of Goods Sold Dr.

    Merch. Inventory Cr.

    July 3 Pinick CompanySalesWayward ShippingEquipmentSales Returns and AllowancesMoon CompanyFritz CompanyWayne Bros.Haddad CompanyAnton CompanyLynda AdvertisementsCress SupplySager CompanyMerchandise InventorySuppliesCost of Goods SoldAdvertising Expense P

    3 Lynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanySager CompanyEquipmentWayward ShippingHaddad CompanyMoon CompanySalesSales Returns and AllowancesAnton CompanyMerchandise InventorySuppliesCost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseWayne Bros.Fritz CompanyCress Supply P

    16 Fritz CompanyHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventoryWayward ShippingEquipmentWayne Bros.Advertising ExpensePinick CompanySuppliesSalesSales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldCress SupplySager CompanyMoon CompanyAnton CompanyLynda Advertisements P

    16 Cost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseSalesWayne Bros.Fritz CompanyWayward ShippingAnton CompanyLynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanySuppliesMoon CompanyCress SupplySager CompanyHaddad CompanySales Returns and AllowancesMerchandise InventoryEquipment P

    21 Advertising ExpensePinick CompanyFritz CompanyHaddad CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanyLynda AdvertisementsSales Returns and AllowancesSalesWayne Bros.Cost of Goods SoldAnton CompanyMerchandise InventoryCress SupplySager CompanySuppliesEquipment P

    21 Cost of Goods SoldWayne Bros.Haddad CompanySalesFritz CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanySales Returns and AllowancesEquipmentSuppliesPinick CompanySager CompanyAdvertising ExpenseCress SupplyMerchandise InventoryAnton CompanyLynda Advertisements P

    30 SuppliesCress SupplyCost of Goods SoldFritz CompanyMerchandise InventoryWayward ShippingMoon CompanyAnton CompanyLynda AdvertisementsWayne Bros.Pinick CompanyHaddad CompanyEquipmentAdvertising ExpenseSalesSales Returns and AllowancesSager Company P

    (112)(401) (505)(120)

    GENERAL JOURNAL

    G1

    Date Description/Account Debit Credit

    July 8 Acc. Payable-Anton CompanyAcc. Payable-Cross SupplyAcc. Receivable-Haddad CompanyAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanySales Returns and AllowancesMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Fritz CompanyAdvertising ExpenseSuppliesAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplyCashCost of Goods SoldAcc. Payable-Lynda AdvertisementsEquipmentAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.SalesAcc. Payable-Moon CompanyAcc. Receivable-Sager Company

    SuppliesAcc. Receivable-Sager CompanyMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Anton CompanyEquipmentAcc. Payable-Fritz CompanyAcc. Payable-Cross SupplySalesCashAcc. Payable-Moon CompanyAdvertising ExpenseCost of Goods SoldAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanyAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.Acc. Receivable-Haddad CompanyAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplySales Returns and AllowancesAcc. Payable-Lynda Advertisements

    July 22

    SuppliesAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanyAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplyAcc. Payable-Anton CompanyCashEquipmentSalesMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Moon CompanyCost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseSales Returns and AllowancesAcc. Payable-Cross SupplyAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.Acc. Payable-Fritz CompanyAcc. Payable-Lynda AdvertisementsAcc. Receivable-Sager CompanyAcc. Receivable-Haddad Company

    SuppliesAdvertising ExpenseAcc. Payable-Cross SupplyAcc. Receivable-Sager CompanyAcc. Payable-Anton CompanyCost of Goods SoldAcc. Receivable-Haddad CompanySales Returns and AllowancesEquipmentAcc. Payable-Fritz CompanySalesAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanyCashAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.Acc. Payable-Moon CompanyMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplyAcc. Payable-Lynda Advertisements

    (b) Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.) (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.

    General Ledger

    Accounts Receivable No. 112

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 31 S1

    22 G1

    Merchandise Inventory No. 120

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 31 P1

    8 G1

    31 S1

    Supplies No. 126

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 13 P1

    Equipment No. 157

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 26 P1

    Accounts Payable No. 201

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 31 P1

    8 G1

    Sales No. 401

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 31 S1

    Sales Returns and Allowances No. 412

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 22 G1

    Cost of Goods Sold No. 505

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 31 S1

    Advertising Expense No. 610

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 18 P1

    Accounts Receivable Subsidiary Ledger

    Wayne Bros.

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 3 S1

    16 S1

    Pinick Company

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 3 S1

    21 S1

    22 G1

    Sager Company

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 16 S1

    30 S1

    Haddad Company

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 21 S1

    Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledger

    Cress Supply

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 13 P1

    26 P1

    Wayward Shipping

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 2 P1

    28 P1

    Fritz Company

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 1 P1

    15 P1

    Moon Company

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 5 P1

    8 G1

    24 P1

    Lynda Advertisements

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 18 P1

    Anton Company

    Date

    Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance

    July 15 P1

    (c) Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts.

    Accounts receivable balance:

    $

    Subsidiary account balances

    Wayne Bros. $

    Pinick Company

    Sager Company

    Haddad Company

    Total

    $

    Accounts payable balance

    $

    Subsidiary account balances

    Cress Supply $

    Wayward Shipping

    Fritz Company

    Moon Company

    Lynda Advertisements

    Anton Company

    Total

    $

    Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question

    Question Attempts: 0 of 5 used

    cost accounting 460718

    On April 30, 2010, Alvira Co. had 21,600 units in process that were 85 percent complete as to material, 60 percent complete as to direct labor, and 45 percent complete as to overhead. During May, 561,000 units were started. The 13,700 units in ending inventory were 75 percent complete as to material, 25 percent complete as to direct labor, and 10 percent complete as to overhead.

    a. Calculate the physical units to account for in May.

    b. How many units were started and completed during May?

    c. Determine May’s EUP for each category using the weighted average method. Equivalent Units Direct Material (DM) Direct Labor (DL) Overhead (OH)

    d. Determine May’s EUP for each category using the FIFO method. Equivalent Units Direct Material (DM) Direct Labor (DL) Overhead (OH)

    need to do an assignment on data on excel 460721

    Assignment 1

    Descriptive statistics using Excel This assignment is designed to test Unit Objective 1

    Due date: 10am Wednesday week 4 (21 March 2012) or as specified by your lecture

    This assignment is marked out of 50 and is worth 5% of the assessment in this unit. You must use Excel to generate the relevant output. The data for this assignment is in the file A1_data.xls which can be found at:

    Home page >Assessment information>Assignments>Assignment 1>A1 data.

    The file has two worksheets, labelled Data, and Results.

    The file is arranged so that all the required results can be presented in the worksheet labelled Results. The appropriate places for graphs, comments and tables are set out in this worksheet, and you are required to hand in a printed copy of the Results worksheet only. It is recommended that you first create the graphs and tables in the data worksheets, and then copy them to the appropriate places in the Results worksheet. In fact on some computers it is essential that you work in this way, as some networked computers have difficulty dealing with data analysis tools when data is selected from a different worksheet.

    The assignment is to be handed in as a printout of the completed Results worksheet. Do not print out the data. The Results work sheet has been set up to make printing as easy as possible but it is your responsibility to ensure that all required information actually appears on the pages you hand in. Be sure to include your name and student ID on the worksheet.

    While the presentation of the assignment is important, and some marks are designated for presentation, elaborate features are not required. Your work must be easy to read.

    For questions involving written comments, the size of the textboxes on the Results worksheet are a general indication of the length of comments required (based on 11-point font.) It is however permissible to make some adjustment to the size and shape of the textboxes, especially when this is necessary to arrange the worksheet for printing.

    Question

    Background

    There are many universities and colleges providing tertiary education in the United States, and news magazines such as US News and World Report track various statistics about these institutions which presumably help students decide which ones to apply to. The data available for this exercise comes from 1995.

    There are many state-funded institutions and a larger number of private ones.

    From the data provided by US News and World Report, a few columns have been selected and placed in the sheet labeled Data in the file A1_Data.xls.

    The columns provide:

    ? Column A: the name of the institution

    ? Column B: whether it is private or public, (1 = public, 2 = private)

    ? Column C: the number of offers of places made by the institution

    ? Column D: the number of students who enrolled

    ? Column E: the tuition fees charged (dollars per year)

    ? Column F: the cost of room and board (dollars per year)

    ? Column G: the amount per student spent by the institution on instruction

    All tables, graphs and comments for this question should be places in the designated spaces in the Worksheet Results.

    (a) Complete Table (a). Use Countif or another method such as using the histogram tool to find the frequencies for the number of public and private institutions in the sample and hence complete Table (a).

    [4 marks]

    (b) Display the data in Table (a) as an appropriate pie chart as Graph (b).

    [3 marks]

    (c) Briefly summarise the information about the number of public and private institutions in the sample. Answer in Textbox (c).

    [2 marks]

    (d) Sort all the data by column B (the public/private code). [Please note that if you sort the data incorrectly, it will be hard to achieve any credit for the reminder of the assignment. Some comments on sorting in Excel are given in the Excel tips at the end of this assignment question.] In column I, calculate for each institution the sum of tuition fees and room and board. We will call this variable “Costs”.

    Hence complete summary statistics for the Costs variable for the two types of institutions (Table (d)). Give your answers in this table to an appropriate number of decimal places.

    [9 marks]

    (e) Complete the grouped frequency table for the Costs of the two types of institutions in the sample (Table (e)). Find frequency and hence calculate percentage frequency and cumulative percentage frequency for the two types of institutions in the sample.

    [6 marks]

    (f) State the modal class for both the Public and Private institutions. Are these figures very different? Explain why they might be different including in your answer an explanation of what the modal class of a data set represents in Textbox(f).

    [4 marks]

    (g) Construct percentage frequency polygons of the costs variable for the two distributions as one chart as Graph (g).

    [6 marks]

    (h) Discuss the shape of the percentage frequency polygon for the two different types of institutions. Answer in Textbox (h).

    [3 marks]

    (i) List the four measures of variability given in the table. Do public or private institutions show more variability? Answer in Textbox (i).

    [4 marks]

    (j) Private school costs would be expected to be higher than those of public schools. Do the data provided here support this? Quote figures from Table (d) to support your argument. Answer in Textbox (j).

    [4 marks]

    Presentation: 5 marks (If your presentation is easy to read, you will get these 5 marks. Ease of reading is assisted by appropriate font size, borders, colour choice and labelling in graphs, and some care in spelling, grammar and punctuation. )

    Excel tips

    Sections 1 and 2 of the Unit Guide provide technical information about Excel that you may need in completing this assignment.

    Some extra Excel information is given below.

    Sorting Data

    When sorting a number of columns of data by one variable, remember to highlight the whole block of data (all required rows and columns) first. If you just highlight the column for the variable you are sorting by, then the values of this variable will be separated from the cases to which they belong.

    Paste special When copying and pasting a table, for example into a different worksheet, it is frequently necessary to use the option: Edit?Paste Special ? Values.

    Textbox In order to insert a textbox, first make sure the Draw toolbar is showing (e.g. select “Toolbars” from the View menu, and ensure “Drawing” is checked) and then click on the textbox icon, , click in one corner of where you want the textbox, and drag to the required size.

    Percentage frequency polygons When creating the polygons, remember to introduce fictitious empty classes at both ends in the table (rows have been arranged so there is room) so that each polygon touches the X axis at both ends. Use Excel’s “Scatter graph” option (including connecting lines) to create the polygons. Due to axis-labelling issues, it is inappropriate to use Excel’s Line Graph Chart type to produce frequency polygons.

    Choosing which columns of a table to graph The series tab in Step 2 of the Chart Wizard provides a convenient way to specify exactly which data you wish to graph. For example, if you highlight all of a table including frequencies and percentage frequencies, and use XY scatter, Excel will graph frequency polygons and percentage frequency polygons all on the same axes. You can use the series tab to remove the frequency polygons.

    Page break preview When organizing the arrangement of material to fit neatly onto pages for printing it is sometimes convenient to select “Page Break Preview” from the view menu. You can then vary the number of columns or rows on a page. However, be aware that adding columns or rows is effected by shrinking the content, so this technique should only be used for minor adjustments.

    Obtaining Histogram and other Data Analysis tools

    See Section 2.5 of the Unit Guide if you have trouble finding Data Analysis on the Tools menu. Also note that the Data Analysis option does not appear on the Tools menu when a graph is highlighted or if the cursor is in a textbox.

    Here is a clear version of the question paper: http://24.83.215.177/A1_Data.xls

    Here is the data sheet: http://24.83.215.177/A1_Questions.pdf

    I need this urgently. If you can answer this send the answers in the excel sheet to stateover@gmail.com . And reply here. I’ll give you “Lifesaver” karma points. Thank you

    chapter 15 comprehensive problem 4 24th 460722

    Assignment: Comprehensive Problem 4

    1.

    Comprehensive Problem 4

    Part 1:

    Selected transactions completed by Everyday Products Inc. during the fiscal year ending December 31, 2012, were as follows:

    1. Journalize the selected transactions.

    If no entry is required, select “No Entry Required” from the dropdown and leave the amount boxes blank. For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.

    a. Issued 12,500 shares of $25 par common stock at $32, receiving cash.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    b. Issued 2,000 shares of $100 par preferred 5% stock at $105, receiving cash.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    c. Issued $400,000 of 10-year, 6% bonds at 105, with interest payable semiannually.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    d. Declared a quarterly dividend of $0.45 per share on common stock and $1.25 per share on preferred stock. On the date of record, 85,000 shares of common stock were outstanding, no treasury shares were held, and 17,000 shares of preferred stock were outstanding.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    Common stock

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    Preferred stock

    e. Paid the cash dividends declared in (d).

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    f. Purchased 5,500 shares of Kress Corp. at $22 per share, plus a $275 brokerage commission. The investment is classified as an available-for-sale investment.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    g. Purchased 6,500 shares of treasury common stock at $35 per share.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    h. Purchased 36,000 shares of Lifecare Co. stock directly from the founders for $18 per share. Lifecare has 112,500 shares issued and outstanding. Everyday Products Inc. treated the investment as an equity method investment.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    i. Declared a 2% stock dividend on common stock and a $1.25 quarterly cash dividend per share on preferred stock. On the date of declaration, the market value of the common stock was $40 per share. On the date of record, 85,000 shares of common stock had been issued, 6,500 shares of treasury common stock were held, and 17,000 shares of preferred stock had been issued.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    j. Issued the stock certificates for the stock dividends declared in (h) and paid the cash dividends to the preferred stockholders.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    k. Received $24,500 dividend from Lifecare Co. investment in (h).

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    l. Purchased $62,000 of Nordic Wear Inc. 10-year, 6% bonds, directly from the issuing company at par value, plus accrued interest of $550. The bonds are classifed as a held-to-maturity long-term investment.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    m. Sold, at $42 per share, 2,600 shares of treasury common stock purchased in (g).

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    n. Received a dividend of $0.65 per share from the Kress Corp. investment in (f).

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    o. Sold 500 shares of Kress Corp. at $26.50, including commission.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    p. Recorded the payment of semiannual interest on the bonds issued in (c) and the amortization of the premium for six months. The amortization was determined using the straight-line method.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________ _________________

    q. Accrued interest for three months on the Nordic Wear Inc. bonds purchased in (l).

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    r. Lifecare Co. recorded total earnings of $205,000. Everyday Products recorded equity earnings for its share of Lifecare Co. net income.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    s. The fair value for Kress Corp. stock was $18.50 per share on December 31, 2012. The investment is adjusted to fair value using a valuation allowance account. Assume Valuation Allowance for Available-for-Sale Investments had a beginning balance of zero.

    Description Debit Credit

    _________________ _________________

    _________________ _________________

    ——————————————————————————–

    2.

    Comprehensive Problem 4

    Part 2:

    Note: You must complete part 1 before part 2.

    After all of the transactions for the year ended December 31, 2012, had been posted [including the transactions recorded in part (1) and all adjusting entries], the data below were taken from the records of Everyday Products Inc.

    On your own paper, in the working papers, or using a spreadsheet, prepare the following:

    a. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, concluding with earnings per share. In computing earnings per share, assume that the average number of common shares outstanding was 84,000 and preferred dividends were $85,000. (Round earnings per share to the nearest cent.) Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below.

    b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below.

    c. Prepare a balance sheet in report form as of December 31, 2012. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below.

    If required, only use the minus sign to indicate net loss before income tax, net loss, or a deficit balance in retained earnings.

    Gross profit $ _________________

    Total Selling expenses $ _________________

    Total Administrative expenses $ _________________

    Total operating expenses $ _________________

    Income from operations $ _________________

    Net Other expenses and income $ _________________

    Income tax $ _________________

    Net income $ _________________

    Earnings per common share (rounded to the nearest cent) $ _________________

    Retained earnings, January 1, 2012 $ _________________

    Total current assets $ _________________

    Investment in Nordic Wear Inc. bonds $ _________________

    Total property, plant, and equipment $ _________________

    Total assets $ _________________

    Total current liabilities $ _________________

    Net Long-term liabilities $ _________________

    Total liabilities $ _________________

    Total Paid-in capital Preferred 5% stock $ _________________

    Total Paid-in capital Common stock, $25 par $ _________________

    Total paid-in capital $ _________________

    Retained earnings, December 31, 2012 $ _________________

    Total stockholders’ equity $ _________________

    ——————————————————————————–

    managerial accounting concepts and principles 460730

    Assume that you must make a presentation to the marketing staff explaining the difference between product and period costs. Your supervisor tells you the marketing staff would also like clarification regarding prime and conversion costs and an explanation of how these terms fit with product and period cost. You are told that many on the staff are unable to classify costs in their merchandising activities.

    Prepare a one-page memorandum to your supervisor outlining your presentation to the marketing staff.

    Shown here are annual financial data at December 31, 2011 taken from two different companies.

    Pinnacle Retail Slope Board Manufacturing

    Beginning Inventory

    Merchandise $150,000

    Finished goods $300,000

    Cost of Purchases 250,000

    Cost of goods manufactured 586,000

    Ending Inventory

    Merchandise 100,000

    Finished 200,000

    Compute the cost of goods sold section of the income statement at December 31, 2011, for each company. Include the proper title and format in the solution.

    Write a half-page memorandum to your instructor (a) identifying the inventory accounts and (b) describing where each is reported on the income statement and balance sheet for both companies.

    need all x s solved and calculations on how they were solved please 460733

    This is assuming accountant has requested a minimun cash balance of $7k at the start of each month. All borrowings, repayments, investments are made in even $1k amounts. Please see far below for chart…

    July

    August

    September

    Total

    Cash Balance Beginning

    $7,400

    $7,200

    x

    x

    Cash Receipts

    16,400

    20,200

    x

    x

    Total cash available

    $23,800

    $27,400

    41,000

    77,800

    Cash Disbursments:

    Payments on account

    2,600

    7,800

    11,400

    x

    Wage Expenses

    10,000

    x

    12,400

    34,600

    Overhead Costs

    8,000

    9,200

    8,800

    26,000

    Total disbursments

    20,600

    x

    32,600

    x

    Cash excess

    $3,200

    x

    x

    x

    Min. cash bal.

    -7,000

    -7,000

    x

    x

    Cash available

    ($3,800)

    -8,800

    x

    -11,600

    Financing:

    Borrowings

    4,000

    x

    -1,000

    x

    Sell investments

    0

    0

    x

    x

    Receive interest

    0

    0

    x

    -20

    Ending cash balance

    7,200

    x

    x

    7,380

    cost accounting question 460735

    Assuming a FIFO method of

    process costing, determine the equivalent units of production for labor and overhead.

    a. Beginning WIP Inventory (45% complete) 10,000

    Units started in production 350,000

    Units transferred out 344,000

    Ending WIP Inventory (60% complete) 16,000

    b. Beginning WIP Inventory (30% complete) 40,000

    Units started in production 480,000

    Units transferred out ?

    Ending WIP Inventory (70% complete) 26,000

    c. Beginning WIP Inventory (55% complete) 15,000

    Units started in production 405,000

    Units transferred out 415,800

    Ending WIP Inventory (90% complete) ?

    d. Beginning WIP Inventory (25% complete) 10,800

    Units started in production ?

    Units transferred out 351,600

    Ending WIP Inventory (45% complete) 18,300

    cost accounting 460740

    Aztec Company is relocating its facilities. The company estimates that it will take three trucks to move office contents. If the per truck rental charge is $1,000 plus 25 cents per mile, what is the expected cost to move 800 miles? (Points : 1)
    A. $1,000
    B. $1,200
    C. $2,400
    D. $3,600

    2. Short-term increases in net income caused by producing inventory in excess of sales can occur under which of the following costing methods? (Points : 1)
    A. Variable costing.
    B. Absorption costing.
    C. Direct costing.
    D. Short-term increases in net income due to increases in production volume can occur under any of the methods listed.

    3. Absorption costing income will be greater than variable costing income if the units produced are: (Points : 1)
    A. one-third the units sold.
    B. fewer than the units sold.
    C. equal to the units sold.
    D. greater than the units sold.

    4. Which cost accumulation and reporting system treats the costs of all manufacturing components (direct material, direct labor, and both variable and fixed overhead) as product costs? (Points : 1)
    A. Absorption costing
    B. Variable costing
    C. Mixed costing
    D. None of the above

    5. Since overhead costs are indirect costs, _______. (Points : 1)
    A. they require some process of allocation
    B. they can be easily traced to production
    C. a predetermined overhead rate is not advantageous
    D. they cannot be allocated

    6. Which cost accumulation and reporting system is required for external reporting and tax purposes? (Points : 1)
    A. Absorption costing
    B. Variable costing
    C. Mixed costing
    D. None of the above

    7. Regression analysis: (Points : 1)
    A. uses the highest and lowest points on the scatter graph to help separate the variable and fixed components of a mixed cost.

    B. is not as accurate as the high-low method.
    C. is simpler to apply than the high-low method.
    D. uses all points on the scatter graph to help separate the variable and fixed components of a mixed cost.

    8. Which of the following methods mathematically “fits” a line to the data? (Points : 1)
    A. The high-low method only.
    B. Regression analysis only.
    C. Both the high-low method and regression analysis.
    D. Neither the high-low method nor regression analysis.

    9. Which of the following statements concerning absorption and variable costing is false? (Points : 1)
    A. Most authoritative bodies of accounting professions require the use of absorption costing to prepare external financial statements.
    B. Because absorption costing classifies expenses by functional category, cost behavior cannot be observed from an absorption costing income statement.
    C. An absorption costing income statement is often referred to as a contribution income statement.
    D.Absorption costing treats the costs of all manufacturing components as product costs.

    10. M Company derived the following cost equation to explain its monthly manufacturing overhead cost:
    OH = $80,000 + $12MH, where MH = machine hours
    The standard time required to manufacture one unit is 4 machine hours. The company applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of machine hours and its normal annual production is 50,000 units. What is the estimated variable manufacturing overhead cost for a month in which scheduled production is 5,000 units? (Points : 1)
    A. $360,000
    B. $320,000
    C. $240,000
    D. $80,000

    11. Which of the following statements is true concerning plantwide versus departmental overhead rates? (Points : 1)
    A. Plantwide predetermined overhead rates generally tend to provide the most useful information.
    B. Homogeneity more likely exists across departments rather than within departments; thus separate departmental overhead rates generally don’t provide useful information.
    C. Computing departmental overhead rates requires each department to use the same cost driver for comparability purposes.
    D. A company with multiple departments that use different types of work effort should use separate departmental predetermined overhead rates.

    12. Which of the following is among the primary reasons for using a predetermined overhead rate in product costing? (Points : 1)
    A. Improves the timeliness of information.
    B.Allows seasonal variations in utility costs, or other important variations, to be reflected in product costing.
    C. Allows fluctuations in activity levels that are unrelated to fixed overhead costs to be reflected in product costing.
    D. All of the choices are among the primary reasons for using a predetermined overhead rate.

    13. Select the incorrect statement concerning overapplied overhead. (Points : 1)
    A. The overhead control account will have a debit balance.
    B. The amount of overhead transferred to WIP from the overhead control account exceeded the actual amount of overhead incurred.
    C. Overapplied overhead must be closed at year-end because a single year’s activity level was used to set the predetermined overhead rate.
    D. Overapplied overhead may result if the company’s actual utilization of capacity is greater than expected.

    14. If the level of activity increases, _______. (Points : 1)
    A.variable cost per unit and total fixed costs increase
    B. fixed cost per unit and total variable cost increase
    C.total cost will increase and fixed cost per unit will decrease
    D. variable cost per unit and total cost increase

    15. Aquatic Motor Company is exploring different prediction models that can be used to forecast indirect labor costs. One independent variable under consideration is machine hours. Following are matching observations on indirect labor costs and machine hours for the past six months:

    In a high-low model, which months’ observations would be used to compute the model’s parameters? (Points : 1)
    A. 2 and 5
    B.1 and 6
    C.2 and 6
    D.4 and 5

    assigning costs fifo costing method 460742

    The Bakery produces tea cakes. It uses a process costing system. In March, its beginning inventory was 450 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 10 percent complete for conversion costs. The cost of beginning inventory was $655. Units started and completed during the month totaled 14,200. Ending inventory was 410 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 70 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs per equivalent unit for March were $1.40 for direct materials costs and $0.80 for conversion costs.

    From this information, compute the cost of goods transferred to the Finished Goods Inventory account, the cost remaining in the Work in Process Inventory account, and the total costs to be accounted for. Use the FIFO costing method.

    Cost of goods manufactured $

    Ending inventory

    Total costs $

    accounting please help 460743

    The baking process for Pop Tarts leaves about 5% scrap for each ingredient. Kellogg’s design team has identified a new product called “Mini Pop Tarts” that can use about 85% of the scrap material as the key ingredients. The new product will require additional icing, direct labor and machine time along with specific marketing and promotion. No other costs are expected to change and the additional revenue is expected to be in addition to the main line Pop Tarts and thus will not adversely affect current sales but it will increase overall sales by 8%. Should Kellogg use the scrap and process the product further? Discuss the relevant revenue and cost considerations and other relevant issues in your response. Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.

    help with accounting question 460744

    The balance sheet and income statement of Cookie & Coffee Creations Inc. for its first

    year of operations, the year ended October 31, 2013, follows.

    COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.

    Balance Sheet

    October 31, 2013

    Assets

    Current assets

    Cash $32,219

    Accounts receivable 3,250

    Merchandise Inventory 17,897

    Prepaid expenses 6,300 $ 59,666

    Property, plant, and equipment

    Furniture and fixtures $12,500

    Accumulated depreciation”furniture and fixtures 1,250 11,250

    Computer equipment 4,200

    Accumulated depreciation”computer equipment 600 3,600

    Kitchen equipment 83,000

    Accumulated depreciation”kitchen equipment 8,000 75,000 89,850

    Total assets $149,516

    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

    Current liabilities

    Accounts payable $ 5,848

    Income tax payable 18,500

    Dividends payable 700

    Salaries payable 2,250

    Interest payable 188

    Note payable”current portion 4,000 $ 31,486

    Long-term liabilities

    Note payable”long-term portion 6,000

    Total liabilities 37,486

    Stockholders’ equity

    Paid-in capital

    Preferred stock, 2,800 shares issued $14,000

    Common stock, 25,930 shares issued,

    25,180 outstanding 25,930 39,930

    Retained earnings 72,600

    Total paid-in capital and retained earnings 112,530

    Less:Treasury stock”common (750 shares),

    at cost (500)

    Total stockholders’ equity 112,030

    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $149,516

    COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.

    Income Statement

    Year Ended October 31, 2014

    Sales revenue $462,500

    Cost of goods sold 231,250

    Gross profit 231,250

    Operating expenses

    Salaries and wages expense $92,500

    Depreciation expense 9,850

    Other operating expenses 35,987 138,337

    Income from operations 92,913

    Other expenses

    Interest expense 413

    Income before income tax 92,500

    Income tax expense 18,500

    Net income $ 74,000

    Additional information:

    Natalie and Curtis are thinking about borrowing an additional $20,000 to buy more kitchen

    equipment. The loan would be repaid over a 4-year period. The terms of the loan provide for

    equal semiannual installment payments of $2,500 on May 1 and November 1 of each year, plus

    interest of 5% on the outstanding balance. Dividends on preferred stock were $1,250. Since this

    is the first year of operations and the beginning balances are zero, use the ending balance as the

    average balance where appropriate.

    Instructions

    (a) Calculate the following ratios.

    1. Current ratio 6. Gross profit rate

    2. Receivables turnover 7. Profit margin

    3. Inventory turnover 8. Asset turnover

    4. Debt to total assets 9. Return on assets

    5. Times interest earned 10. Return on common stockholders’ equity

    (b) Comment on your findings from part (a).

    (c) Based on your analysis in parts (a) and (b), do you think a bank would lend Cookie & Coffee

    Creations Inc. $20,000 to buy the additional equipment? Explain your reasoning.

    (d) What alternatives could Cookie & Coffee Creations consider instead of bank financing?